Практический курс английского языка.1 курс [В Д Аракин] (fb2) читать онлайн
[Настройки текста] [Cбросить фильтры]
1
ПРАКТИЧЕСКИЙ КУРС
АНГЛИЙСКОГО ЯЗЫКА
1 курс
Под редакцией В.Д.АРАКИНА
Издание пятое, исправленное
Д о п у щ е н о
Министерством общего и профессионального образования Российской
Федерации в качестве учебника для студентов педагогических вузов по
специальности «Иностранные языки»
Москва
1998
2
ББК 81.2 Англ-9 П69
В.Д.Аракин, Л.И.Селянина, К.П.Гинтовт,
М.А.Соколова, Г.А.Шабадаш, Н.И.Крылова,
И.С.Тихонова, В.С.Денисова
Рецензент:
кафедра английского языка Самарского
осударственного педагогического института
(зав. кафедрой доц. Г.И . Чернышева)
Практический курс английского языка. 1 курс. П69 Учеб. для пед.
вузов по спец. «Иностр. яз.» / Л.И.Селянина, К.П.Гинтовт, М.А.Соколова
и др.; под ред.
В.Д.Аракина|.- 5-е изд., испр. - М.: Гуманит. изд. центр ВЛАДОС,
1998. - 536 с: ил.
ISBN 5-691-00030-6
Серия учебников предназначена для студентов педагогических вузов и
предполагает преемственность в изучении английского языка с I по V курс. Цель
учебника - обучение устдаой речи на основе автоматизированных речевых навыков.
В пятом издании (четвертое - 1997 г.) переработан ряд реалий в соответствии с
теми изменениями, которые имели место в учебном процессе английского языка за
последние годы.
ББК 81.2 Англ-9
©Коллектив авторов, 1996
© «Гуманитарный издательский центр ВЛАДОС», 1997, 1998
3
АРАКИН Владимир Дмитриевич —
профессор, доктор филологических наук
МПГУ им. В. И. Ленина — родился в 1903 г.
Свыше 50 лет трудился В. Д. Аракин в
высших учебных заведениях страны,
плодотворно сочетая педагогическую
деятельность с широкой научной работой в
области как западных, так и восточных
языков.
Общий объем печатных трудов (111
работ) В. Д. Аракина — полиглота
редчайшего дарования — составляет 700
п.л., включая 450 п.л. монографий и
словарей.
Блестяще владея искусством лектора, В. Д. Аракин неустанно работал
с аспирантами и создал научную школу, включающую 100 учеников,
успешно защитивших диссертации на материале разнообразнейших
языков.
Ученым-филологам В. Д. Аракин хорошо известен как крупный
специалист в области истории английского и скандинавского языков. Так,
например, ему принадлежит 1-й полный норвежско-русский словарь
объемом 140 п.л.
Типологические воззрения В Д. Аракина изложены в книге
«Сравнительная типология английского и русского языков», а также в
крупных монографиях: «Типология скандинавских языков», «Введение в
тюркологию» и других.
В. Д. Аракин руководил кафедрой иностранных языков и позднее
кафедрой английского языка в нашем университете (в прошлом МГПИ
им. В. И. Ленина) с 1958 г. до 1983 г.
Помимо чисто деловых организаторских качеств, сочетавшихся с
высокой принципиальностью, работники кафедры высоко ценили
великодушие и доброту этого необыкновенного человека, всегда
создававшего вокруг себя атмосферу теплоты и сердечности.
Пятитомный учебник английского языка, предлагаемый студентам,
основан на научном подходе В. Д. Аракина к вычленению
лингвистического содержания в обучении иностранному языку.
Авторский коллектив (профессора и доценты нашего университета —
люди с огромным педагогическим стажем) много раз проверили в работе
данный учебник и с чувством глубокой благодарности посвящают его
памяти одного из крупнейших лингвистов нашего времени.
4
ПРЕДИСЛОВИЕ
Данный учебник предназначен для студентов 1 курса факультетов и
отделений английского языка педагогических вузов. Он начинает серию
учебников, обеспечивающих практический курс английского языка для
всех пяти лет обучения.
Основная цель учебника — обучение устной речи на основе развития
необходимых автоматизированных речевых навыков, развитие техники
чтения и умения понимать английский текст, содержащий усвоенную
ранее лексику и грамматику, а также развитие навыков письменной речи
в пределах программы для 1 курса.
Учебник состоит из четырех частей: 1. Коррективный курс (уроки 1—
11); 2 Основной курс (уроки 12—20); 3. Раздел упражнений по
интонации; 4. Раздел упражнений по грамматике.
Коррективный курс включает уроки, в которых постановка
произношения сочетается с работой по развитию речевых навыков при
постепенном усложнении структуры речи. Здесь же даны основные
сведения по английской орфографии, правилам чтения.
Уроки Основного курса содержат по два текста, один из которых
описательного характера, другой — диалогического.
В начале каждого урока с целью тренировки речевых образцов даны
подстановочные таблицы. Перед текстами помещены грамматические
упражнения, построенные на лексическом материале предыдущих
уроков и имеющие целью первичное закрепление грамматических
явлений, встречающихся в тексте.
После текстов даются: лексический и фонетический комментарии и
упражнения, способствующие развитию навыков устной речи на основе
овладения фонетическими, лексическими и грамматическими явлениями
текста.
В большинстве уроков помимо поурочного словаря дается
тематический список слов и словосочетаний (Topical Vocabulary) для
использования в упражнениях по теме урока, а также разговорные
фразы, употребительные в разговорной речи, которые частично
заимствованы из книги L Jones Functions of English L , 1982
После каждого урока приведен перечень заданий, которые должны
быть выполнены студентами самостоятельно и с использованием
магнитофонной записи и звукозаписывающей аппаратуры.
Разделы упражнений по интонации и грамматике имеют целью
дальнейшее и более прочное закрепление интонационных и
грамматических структур изучаемых на 1 курсе.
Раздел упражнений по интонации состоит из серии обучающих,
контролирующих и творческих упражнений, предназначенных для
выработки автоматизированных навыков воспроизведения и
употребления изучаемых на 1 курсе интонационных структур. Работа
5
над интонационной структурой начинается с прослушивания и
повторения за диктором односинтагменного предложения и на
определенном этапе завершается употреблением этой структуры в
спонтанной речи. Обучающие упражнения предназначены в основном
для лабораторной работы (в лаборатории устной речи), контролирующие
и творческие — для работы в аудитории. Специальных упражнений на
транскрибирование, интонирование и изображение интонации в этом
разделе нет, но такое задание может быть дано по усмотрению
преподавателя к любому упражнению. В конце раздела предлагаются
тексты, предназначенные для аудирования. В разделе упражнений по
интонации использованы упражнения и тексты из книг известного
английского фонетиста Дж О' Коннора.
Работу над данными упражнениями целесообразно начинать
одновременно с уроком 8 Коррективного курса. В дальнейшем
предполагается параллельная работа над материалом урока и
соответствующим подразделом (Section) упражнений по интонации.
Раздел упражнений по грамматике содержит тренировочный
материал по изучаемым грамматическим темам. Материал для
упражнений заимствован из произведений современных английских
авторов. Упражнения составлены поурочно с использованием лексики
учебника.
МЕТОДИЧЕСКИЕ УКАЗАНИЯ
Работая над Коррективным курсом, рекомендуется начинать каждое
занятие с гимнастики органов речи, которая включает немые
двигательные упражнения на выработку активной энергичной
артикуляции, упражнения для языка, губ и другие. Начиная с 6—7
уроков можно подключить голос и проводить фонетическую зарядку на
словах, составленных из пройденных гласных и согласных звуков.
Из разнообразия упражнений артикуляционной гимнастики приводим
лишь несколько наиболее типичных и необходимых для английского
уклада речи:
I. 1. Широко раскройте рот. Нижняя челюсть максимально опущена.
2. Закройте рот.
П. 1. Полуоткройте рот. 2. Откройте рот шире. Нижняя челюсть
максимально опущена. 3. Закройте рот.
Ш. 1. Растяните губы как при улыбке. 2. Сомкните губы (нейтральное
положение губ).
1. Обнажите верхние и нижние зубы (упражнение — так называемый
«оскал»). Губы не прикрывают зубы. 2. Сомкните губы (губы принимают
нейтральное положение).
1. Раскройте рот. Поднимите кончик языка к альвеолам (кончик языка
касается альвеол). 2. Опустите язык. Кончик языка лежит плоско во рту.
6
1. Широко раскройте рот, оттяните весь язык назад. Задняя спинка
языка поднимается к мягкому нёбу. 2. Опустите язык и продвиньте его
вперед. Кончик языка касается нижних зубов. Не закрывайте рот.
Все упражнения выполняются по несколько раз перед зеркалом.
Порядок работы над фонетическими упражнениями:
Прослушивание упражнения с пленки (или в чтении преподавателя).
Объяснение артикуляции корректируемого звука.
Показ артикуляции звука преподавателем, подкрепленный
наглядными пособиями (схемами, таблицами).
Воспроизведение артикуляции звука студентами перед зеркалом под
контролем преподавателя.
Произнесение звука студентами хором и индивидуально.
Прослушивание пленки и повторение каждого слова за диктором
хором.
Индивидуальное чтение упражнения студентами перед зеркалом под
контролем преподавателя.
Первое тренировочное чтение упражнения отдельными студентами
при одновременном прослушивании упражнения всеми остальными
студентами через наушники.
Второе чтение тренировочного упражнения при участии всех
студентов в исправлении ошибок.
10.
Контрольное чтение упражнения.
Можно предложить следующую последовательность видов работы
над уроками Основного курса (работа над каждым уроком занимает 36—
38 часов (две недели):
I. Прослушивание текста в записи на магнитную ленту и
интонационная разметка текста. Этот вид работы проводится
самостоятельно в лаборатории, реже — в аудитории с участием
преподавателя.
П. Речевая тренировка с подстановочными таблицами и выполнение
грамматических упражнений (часто проводится параллельно с
последующим видом работы).
ПХ Объяснительное тренировочное чтение с объяснением всех новых
и трудных лексических и грамматических явлений в тексте,
интонационный анализ и проверка интонационной разметки текста,
перевод на русский язык отдельных предложений.
IV Контрольное чтение текста. Контроль орфографии, знания
активной лексики и фразеологии. Тренировка вопросо-ответных речевых
единиц.
Активизация лексики и грамматического материала текста в
различного рода речевых тренировочных упражнениях.
Пересказ текста (беседа по тексту) и контроль выполнения части
тренировочных лабораторных работ.
7
VII.
Дальнейшая тренировочная речевая работа. Упражнения
более
'
сложного творческого характера: описание картинок, составление
ситуаций,
диалогов, иллюстрация пословиц. Работа над фильмом1.
Vin. Беседа на тему урока Тренировка вопросо-ответных речевых
единиц, сообщения по теме, диалоги на тему, описание картин, речевое
сопровождение диафильмов, контроль выполнения тренировочных
лабораторных работ.
ГХ. Письменная контрольная работа.
После проведения контрольного чтения первого текста урока
начинается работа над вторым текстом — диалогом с той же
последовательностью отработки: 1. слушание и интонационная разметка
текста; 2. тренировочное чтение; 3. контрольное чтение; 4. речевая
тренировка на основе усвоенного лексического и грамматического
материала урока, перефразировка отдельных предложений и пересказ
диалога в косвенной речи; воспроизведение диалога наизусть по ролям.
Такая последовательность изучения материалов урока варьируется в
зависимости от характера текста, степени подготовленности студентов и
других условий. Помимо указанных основных видов работы над текстом
предполагается работа по контролю домашнего чтения, развитию
письменных навыков, а также выполнение дополнительных
грамматических и фонетических тренировочных упражнений
(групповых или индивидуальных), работа по картинкам, диафильмам,
устные и письменные изложения на дополнительном материале,
подбираемом преподавателем.
Работа по подготовке пятого издания проводилась коллективом
авторов и распределилась следующим образом: Коррективный и
Основной курсы — доц. Л.И.Селянина, доц. К.П.Гинтовт, проф.
М.А.Соколова, доц, Г.А.Шаба-даш. Раздел упражнений по интонации —
проф. М.А.Соколова, доц. К.П.Гинтовт, проф. Н.И.Крылова, проф.
И.С.Тихонова, доц. Г.А.Шабадаш. Раздел упражнений по грамматике —
проф. В.С.Денисова.
8
К О Р Р Е К Т И В Н Ы Й К У Р С
В В Е Д Е Н И Е
Фонетический строй английского языка очень своеобразен, и его
изучение представляет значительные трудности для русских как в
собственно звуковом, так и в интонационном отношении. Овладеть
произносительными нормами иностранного языка значит научиться
правильно произносить звуки данного языка как изолированно, так и в
потоке речи, правильно интонационно оформлять предложения.
В основе звукового строя всякого языка лежит система фонем.
Фонема может быть определена как мельчайшая звуковая единица языка.
Это звук или группа звуков, которые, будучи противопоставлены другим
звукам в одинаковом фонетическом контексте, различают слова и
грамматические формы слов. Например: грач — врач, мел — мель.
Каждая фонема имеет свое собственное графическое изображение
соответственно системе фонетической транскрипции. Знаки
фонетической транскрипции обычно заключаются в квадратные скобки: [
].
Количество звуков-фонем, составляющих слово, не всегда совпадает с
количеством входящих в его состав букв, что составляет основную
трудность овладения английской орфографией. Так, например, слово
daughter ['do:t3] дочь содержит восемь букв, но четыре звука-фонемы. 26
букв английского алфавита передают 44 гласные и согласные фонемы.
Подобное расхождение между орфографией и произношением
обусловлено исторически. Английская орфография на протяжении веков
не подвергалась сколько-нибудь значительным изменениям и в своем
современном виде отражает произношение, существовавшее в языке
несколько веков тому назад.
Обучение английскому произношению производится на базе
произносительной нормы лондонского диалекта, лежащего в основе
литературного произношения современного английского языка.
Чтобы овладеть правильным английским произношением,
необходимо познакомиться с устройством и работой нашего
артикуляционного аппарата.
9
ОРГАНЫ РЕЧИ И ИХ РАБОТА
Выдыхаемая струя воздуха из легких проходит бронхи и попадает в
дыхательное горло (см. рис. на с. 9). Верхняя часть дыхательного горла
называется гортанью. В гортани расположены две мускульные
эластичные подвижные складки — голосовые связки; пространство
между ними называется голосовой щелью. При произнесении глухих
согласных голосовые связки не напряжены и раздвинуты. Когда
голосовые связки напряжены и сближены, а поток воздуха заставляет их
вибрировать, возникает голос, который мы слышим при произнесении
гласных, сонантов или звонких согласных звуков. Полость,
расположенная выше гортани, называется зевом, или глоткой.
В полости рта расположены следующие органы речи; язык, нёбо,
отделяющее полость рта от носовой полости, зубы и губы. Для удобства
описания артикуляции звуков язык условно разделяется на следующие
части: переднюю часть с кончиком языка, среднюю и заднюю с корнем
языка. Нёбо включает альвеолы (небольшие бугорки за верхними
зубами), твердое нёбо и мягкое нёбо с маленьким язычком.
В состоянии покоя передняя часть языка находится против десен и
альвеол, средняя часть расположена против твердого нёба, задняя —
против мягкого нёба. При поднятом положении подвижной части мягкого
нёба проход для струи воздуха в носовую полость закрыт, а при
опущенном ее положении воздушный поток проходит через нос.
Органы речи принято подразделять на а к т и в н ы е и
п а с с и в н ы е . К активным органам речи относятся голосовые
связки, задняя стенка зева, мягкое нёбо с маленьким язычком, губы,
язык. Они подвижны и в процессе образования звуков занимают то или
иное положение по отношению к пассивным органам речи: зубам,
альвеолам, твердому нёбу, являющимся неподвижными.
1 — полость рта; II — глотка; 111 — полость
носа; IV — гортань; 1 — нижняя губа;
2 — язык: а — передняя часть, б — средняя
часть, в — задняя часть, г — корень языка, 3 —
мягкое нёбо: д — передняя часть, е — задняя
часть; 4 — маленький язычок; 5 — голосовые
связки; 6 — верхняя губа; 7 — верхние передние
1
зубы; 8 — альвеолы; 9 — твердое небо: ж —
0
передняя часть, з — средняя часть; 10 — задняя
стенка зева.
ГЛАСНЫЕ И СОГЛАСНЫЕ
10
Звуки речи подразделяются на гласные и согласные. Выдыхаемая
струя воздуха, встретив на своем пути напряженные и сближенные
голосовые связки, приводит их в состояние периодического колебания,
результатом чего является, как было отмечено выше, голос, или
музыкальный тон. Если струя воздуха не встречает на своем пути
шумообразующей преграды, произносятся звуки, называемые
г л а с н ы м и . Характерный тембр гласного определяется объемом и
формой ротовой и носовой полостей, служащих резонаторами.
В отличие от гласных с о г л а с н ы е характеризуются наличием
шума, образуемого при преодолении преграды. При произнесении
глухих согласных слышится только шум, при произнесении звонких —
шум и голос. Если шум превалирует над голосом, согласный называется
шумным, например: русские [г], [д], [с], [з], английские [t], [d], [s], [z];
если же голос превалирует над шумом, согласный называется сонантом,
например: русские [м], [н], [й], английское [т], [п],
ОСНОВНЫЕ ПРИНЦИПЫ КЛАССИФИКАЦИИ СОГЛАСНЫХ
Английские согласные классифицируются по следующим принципам:
I. по способу образования преграды,
II. по работе активного органа речи и месту образования
преграды,
III. по участию голосовых связок.
I. По способу образования преграды согласные подразделяются на
четыре большие группы:
с м ы ч н ы е ,
щ е л е в ы е ,
а ф ф р и к а т ы и д р о ж а щ и е .
Образование
с м ы ч н ы х
согласных достигается полным
смыканием артикулирующих органов речи, т. е. образованием в полости
рта полной преграды для потока воздуха. Если при размыкании преграды
струя воздуха производит сильный, подобно взрыву, звук, согласный
носит название в з р ы в н о г о , например: русские [к], [г], [п], [б],
английские [k], [g], [p]f [Ь]. При произнесении смычных сонантов проход
для воздуха через ротовую полость закрыт, так как мягкое нёбо опущено.
Струя воздуха направляется через носовую полость. Произнесенные
таким способом смычные сонанты [м], [н], [m], [n], [rj] называются
н о с о в ы м и .
При произнесении щ е л е в ы х согласных достигается лишь
некоторое сближение артикулирующих органов речи. Если образованная
подобным образом щель не слишком широка, в произнесении согласных
преобладает шум трения. Такие согласные носят название
ф р и к а т и в н ы х , например: русские [ф], [в], английские [f], [v], [h].
11
При произнесении щелевых сонантов проход для воздушной струи
несколько шире. Воздух направляется либо вдоль всей плоскости языка,
как в случае согласного'[й], либо по бокам языка, как в случае [л], [1].
Поэтому такие согласные, как [й], [j], [w], [г], называются
с р е д и н н ы м и с о н а н т а м и , а согласные [л], [1] относятся к
б о к о в ы м , или л а т е р а л ь н ы м , с о н а н т а м .
При произнесении а ф ф р и к а т [ч], [ц], [tj], [cfe] полная преграда
постепенно переходит в неполную.
Д р о ж а щ и й
русский
с о н а н т
[р] артикулируется
вибрирующим кончиком языка.
II. По работе активного органа речи и месту образования преграды
согласные подразделяются на следующие группы.
1. Г у б н о - г у б н ы е согласные, при произнесении которых
преграда образуется смыканием или сближением верхней и нижней губ.
К этой группе относятся согласные [п], [б], [м], [р], [b], [m], [w]
2. Г у б н о - з у б н ы е согласные, при произнесении которых
преграда образуется путем сближения верхних зубов и нижней губы, как
в случае [ф], { в ] , [f], [v].
3. П е р е д н е я з ы ч н ы е согласные, при произнесении которых в
образовании преграды принимает участие передняя часть языка. Среди
переднеязычных согласных следует различать д о р с а л ь н ы е , при
произнесении которых кончик языка пассивен и несколько опущен,
например [т], [н], а п и к а л ь н ы е , при произнесении которых
активным является самый кончик языка, как, например, в случае [1], [n],
[z], [0], и, наконец, к а к у м и н а л ь н ы е , когда кончик языка
слегка загнут назад, как это имеет место при произнесении [р], [г].
Переднеязычные согласные, артикулируемые у внутренней
поверхности верхних зубов, называются з у б н ы м и , например: [н],
[с]. Переднеязычные согласные, артикулируемые у альвеол, называются
а л ь в е о л я р н ы м и , например: [ж], [щ], [t] [d]f [п].
4. С р е д н е я з ы ч н ы е
согласные артикулируются средней
спинкой языка, поднятой к твердому нёбу. Поэтому по месту образования
преграды они называются п а л а т а л ь н ы м и : [й], jj],
5. З а д н е я з ы ч н ы е согласные артикулируются задней спинкой
языка, поднятой к мягкому нёбу. Поэтому они называются
з а д н е н ё б н ы м и , или в е л я р н ы м и : М, [г], [х], [k], [д], [г,].
III. По участию голосовых связок в произнесении согласных
последние подразделяются на з в о н к и е и г л у х и е .
При произнесении з в о н к и х согласных, как, например, в случае
[б], [г], [г], [Ь], [о] и других, а также сонантов, голосовые связки
вибрируют. Произнесение г л у х и х согласных связано с отсутствием
вибрации голосовых связок, а следовательно, и с отсутствием в их
произнесении голоса, например: [п], [х], [ф], [ц], [р], [ Ц , [9].
12
Следует отметить сильную артикуляцию конечных глухих согласных
и значительное ослабление артикуляции и частичное оглушение
конечных звонких согласных в английском языке.
ОСНОВНЫЕ ПРИНЦИПЫ КЛАССИФИКАЦИИ ГЛАСНЫХ
Качество гласного определяется объемом и формой ротового
резонатора, что в первую очередь зависит от положения языка и губ.
Поэтому классификация английских гласных опирается в первую
очередь на следующие принципы:
I. особенности положения языка,
II. особенности положения губ.
I. Разные части языка могут быть подняты в направлении к нёбу на
различную высоту. В зависимости от того, какая часть языка поднята к
нёбу, гласные делятся на:
1. Гласные п е р е д н е г о р я д а , при произнесении которых
поднята средняя часть языка, как, например, при произнесении русских
[и], [э] и английских [i:], [е].
2. Гласные с р е д н е г о р я д а , при произнесении которых
поднят участок языка на границе его средней и задней частей: [а], [ы].
При произнесении гласных с м е ш а н н о г о р я д а [з:] и [э],
которых нет в русском языке, приподнят весь язык целиком.
3. Гласные з а д н е г о р я д а , при произнесении которых поднята
задняя часть языка, как, например, при [о], [у], [u:], [DJ.
Среди английских гласных переднего ряда выделяется гласный [i].
При его произнесении язык продвинут вперед несколько меньше, чем
при произнесении русского [и]. Английский гласный [i] следует отнести
к переднему о т о д в и н у т о м у н а з а д ряду.
Задний ряд гласных также имеет два подразделения. При
произнесении английского [и] язык оттянут назад не так далеко, как при
русском [у], и его задняя часть поднимается не к задней, а к передней
части мягкого неба. Русское [у] — гласный г л у б о к о г о заднего ряда,
а английское [и] относится к заднему п р о д в и н у т о м у в п е р е д
ряду.
В зависимости от степени подъема той или иной части языка гласные
делятся на следующие группы:
1. Гласные в ы с о к о г о п о д ъ е м а , при произнесении которых
язык значительно сближается с нёбом: [и], [ы],
Ivl [i-i М, [и].
2. Гласные с р е д н е г о п о д ъ е м а , при произнесении которых
язык находится примерно на полпути к нёбу: русское [э], английское [е].
3. Гласные н и з к о г о п о д ъ е м а , при произнесении которых
язык вместе с нижней челюстью опущен вниз: [ж], [а:], [ Я
13
Особенности произнесения английских гласных требуют
дополнительного деления гласных каждого вида подъема на
ш и р о к у ю и у з к у ю р а з н о в и д н о с т и .
И. По положению губ гласные делятся на л а б и а л и з о в а н н ы е
и н е л а б и а л и з о в а н н ы е .
При произнесении лабиализованных гласных губы округлены, как
при английских [ о : ] , [u:], [в], [и] и даже, как в случае с русскими [о] и
[у], несколько выдвинуты вперед.
При произнесении нелабиализованных гласных губы сохраняют
нейтральное или несколько растянутое положение, как в случае с [и], [э],
[ы], [а], [л], [з:].
В отличие от русских гласных английские гласные делятся на
д о л г и е и к р а т к и е .
Длительность английских гласных подвержена значительным
позиционным и комбинаторным изменениям.
Гласные наиболее длительны в открытом слоге, несколько
сокращаются в закрытом слоге перед звонким согласным и подвергаются
значительному сокращению в закрытом слоге перед глухим согласным,
что объясняется их усиленной артикуляцией в этой позиции. Например:
[bi: — brd — bit]. Гласные значительно удлиняются в ударных и,
особенно, в ядерных слогах.
В зависимости от стабильности артикуляции выделяются ^
следующие три группы гласных:
1. М о н о ф т о н г и , при произнесении которых артикуляция не
меняется в течение всего периода звучания. Например- русский [а],
английский [э:].
2 Д и ф т о н г и , состоящие из двух разных по качеству элементов,
как, например, в случае с английскими [ai], [аи]. В русском языке
дифтонгов нет.
3. Д и ф т о н г о и д ы , качество которых неоднородно в начале и
конце произнесения; так, например, звучат английские [i:]( [и:].
14
Lesson One
Фонетика: Согласные [k]( [g], [t], [d], [n], [s], [z], [9], [6], [p], [b], [m] Гласные [i],
[е]. Палатализация Словесное ударение
l-[k]-[g] — з а д н е я з ы ч н ы е в е л я р н ы е с м ы ч н ы е
в з р ы в н ы е с о г л а с н ы е . При произнесении [k]r [g]r так же как и
при произнесении русских [к], [г], задняя спинка языка касается мягкого
нёба, образуя полную преграду. Струя воздуха со взрывом размыкает эту
преграду. Английский глухой согласный [к] энергичнее
соответствующего русского звука и произносится с аспирацией, то есть с
придыханием [kh].
Английский звонкий согласный [д] значительно слабее глухого [к]. В
отличие от русского [г] английский [д] в конце слов оглушается не
полностью.
2. [t], [d]
—
п е р е д н е я з ы ч н ы е
а п и к а л ь н о -
а л ь в е о л я р н ы е
с м ы ч н ы е
в з р ы в н ы е
с о г л а с н ы е . При их произнесении кончик языка касается альвеол,
образуя полную преграду, средняя и задняя части языка опущены. Струя
воздуха со взрывом размыкает эту преграду. Английский глухой
согласный [t] сильнее русского [т] и произносится с аспирацией [th].
Английский звонкий согласный [d] значительно слабее глухого [t].
В отличие от русского согласного [д] английский [d] в конце слов
оглушается частично.
При произнесении русских согласных [т], {д] передняя часть языка
касается верхних зубов, кончик языка несколько опущен (дорсально-
зубная артикуляция).
3. [п] —
п е р е д н е я з ы ч н ы й
а п и к а л ь н о - а л ь -
в е о л я р н ы й с м ы ч н ы й н о с о в о й с о н а н т . Уклад органов
речи тот же, что и для [t], [d], но мягкое нёбо опущено, и воздух проходит
через полость носа.
Русский звук [н] — носовой дорсально-зубной сонант.
15
4. [s], [z] —
п е р е д н е я з ы ч н ы е
а п и к а л ь н о -
а л ь в е о л я р н ы е
щ е л е в ы е
ф р и к а т и в н ы е
с о г л а с н ы е . При произнесении этих согласных узкая щель
образуется между кончиком языка и альвеолами. Английский глухой
согласный [s] энергичнее русского [с]. Английский звонкий согласный [z]
слабее английского глухого [s]. В отличие от русского [з] английский
согласный [z] в конце слов оглушается частично. В отличие от
английских согласных [s], [z] русские [с], [з] характеризуются дорсально-
зуб-ной артикуляцией.
5. [i] — м о н о ф т о н г п е р е д н е г о о т о д в и н у т о г о
н а з а д
р я д а
в ы с о к о г о
п о д ъ е м а
( ш и р о к о й
р а з н о в и д н о с т и ) , к р а т к и й н е л а б и а л и з о в а н н ы й .
При произнесении [i] язык находится в передней части полости рта,
средняя часть языка поднята к твердому нёбу, но значительно ниже, чем
при соответствующем русском [и], кончик языка находится у нижних
зубов, губы слегка растянуты.
Чтобы избежать ошибки типа русского закрытого звука [и], не
следует слишком высоко поднимать язык, необходимо слегка оттянуть
его назад и сократить звук.
При ошибке типа русского центрального [ы] язык следует продвинуть
вперед, растянуть губы и максимально сократить звук.
6. П а л а т а л и з а ц и я (palatalization), или смягчение согласных,
возникает под влиянием следующих за ними гласных переднего ряда.
Палатализация создается поднятием средней части языка к небу во
время произнесения согласных. Это явление характерно для русских
согласных и выполняет смыслоразли-чительную функцию в русском
языке: мол — моль, лук — люк, ров — рёв, нов — новь.
В английском языке большинство согласных произносятся без
палатализации, твердо.
Во время произнесения английского согласного средняя часть языка
должна быть опущена, лишь по окончании произнесения его следует
переходить к последующему гласному звуку
7. П о з и ц и о н н а я
д о л г о т а
г л а с н ы х .
Долгота
гласных (как кратких, так и долгих) находится в зависимости от позиции
в слове. Ударные гласные являются наиболее долгими в конечной
позиции, несколько короче перед звонкими согласными и наиболее
короткими перед глухими согласными
16
8. Твердый приступ — задержка начала колебаний голосовых
связок при артикуляции начального гласного.
7. С л о в е с н о е
у д а р е н и е
(word-stress). Словесным
ударением называется выделение в слове одного или двух слогов среди
других слогов. Акустически ударные слоги производят впечатление
более сильных. Ударение обозначается знаком ['] перед слогом ['km].
10. [0], [5] — п е р е д н е я з ы ч н ы е а п и к а л ь н о -
м е ж з у б н ы е щ е л е в ы е ф р и к а т и в н ы е с о г л а с ные. При
Фонетическое упражнение 1
didsit'sitiitsit —siddignit'kitiIZdik —digkidsik'tikitintik —
tigsinkis'gidi
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите особое внимание на:
1.
Отсутствие палатализации согласных перед гласным [i].
2. Апикально-альвеолярный уклад органов речи при произнесении
[t], [d], [n], [S], [Zj.
3.
Аспирацию согласных [t], [k] в начале ударного слога.
4. Сильную артикуляцию конечных глухих согласных и слабую,
частично оглушенную артикуляцию звонких согласных в этой пози-
ции.
5.
Позиционную долготу гласного.
6. Отсутствие твердого приступа перед гласным [i] в начальном
положении. f
произнесении этих звуков язык распластан и не напряжен, кончик языка
находится между зубами. Струя воздуха проходит между языком и
верхними зубами. Зубы обнажены.
Звонкий [д] значительно слабее глухого [0] и в конце слов частично
оглушается.
В русском языке подобных звуков нет. В случае ошибки типа [т], [д]
не следует прижимать язык к верхним зубам, необходимо оставлять щель
между зубами и языком. Чтобы избежать ошибки типа [с], [з], не,следует
держать язык в за-зубном положении. Кончик языка должен находиться
между зубами. Во избежание ошибки типа русских [ф], [в] следует
опускать нижнюю губу.
17
Примечание Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на:
1 Отсутствие палатализации согласных перед гласным |i]
2 Переход от межзубной к альвеолярной артикуляции в слове [5is].
11.[р] [Ь] — г у б н о - г у б н ы е с м ы ч н ы е в з р ы в н ы е
с о г л а с н ы е . При произнесении этих звуков губы, смыкаясь,
образуют полную преграду. В отличие от русского согласного [п]
английский [р] произносится с аспирацией. Для английского согласного
[р] характерна сильная артикуляция, особенно в конце слов. Английский
согласный [Ь] в конце слов частично оглушается.
12.
[т] — г у б н о - г у б н о й с м ы ч н ы й н о с о в о й
с о н а н т . При произнесении [т] губы, смыкаясь, образуют полную
преграду, но мягкое небо опущено, и струя воздуха проходит через
полость носа. По сравнению с русским [м] следует отметить более
напряженную артикуляцию английского согласного [т].
13.
[е] — м о н о ф т о н г п е р е д н е г о р я д а с р е д н е г о
п о д ъ е м а у з к о й р а з н о в и д н о с т и .
К р а т к и й
н е л а б и а л и з о в а н н ы й . При произнесении гласного [е] язык
находится в передней части полости рта, кончик языка — у основания
нижних зубов, средняя часть языка поднята к твердому небу, губы слегка
растянуты. По сравнению с русским гласным [э] английский [е] более
закрытый. При ошибке типа русского [э] следует меньше раскрывать рот,
губы слегка растянуть и продвинуть язык вперед.
Фонетическое упражнение 3
ten
get
en
det
— ded
sit "
- set
'bizi —
pen
pet
eg
bet
— bed
bit -
- bet
'piti —
men net
et
set
— sed
big -
- beg
'mini —
did -
-ded
'beni gets 'beti pets 'meni bedz kidz
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на:
1. Позиционную долготу гласного.
1. Отсугствие твердого приступа перед гласным в начальном положении.
2. Аспирацию глухих согласных [р], [t], [к].
18
3. Сильную артикуляцию конечных глухих согласных и слабую артикуляцию
звонких согласных, частично оглушенную в этой позиции
УПРАЖНЕНИЯ
1. Ответьте на вопросы преподавателя словами из фонетических
упражнений урока.
О б р а з е ц 1: Teacher: What's the girl's name? (Who is
standing in the corridor?)
Student: xKitty (Minnie, Betty, Nelly)... О б р а з е ц 2: Teacher: I've lost
my umbrella.
Student: xPity!
ДОПОЛНИТЕЛЬНЫЕ УПРАЖНЕНИЯ ДЛЯ
САМОСТОЯТЕЛЬНОЙ ТРЕНИРОВКИ
1. Прочтите упражнение несколько раз перед зеркалом.
2. Запишите чтение упражнения на пленку и прослушайте себя, отметьте
свои ошибки. '
3. Прослушайте чтение упражнения вашим товарищем, укажите ему на его
ошибки:
pit — pet
bid — bed 'pern
pin — pen nit — net 'tedi
ЛАБОРАТОРНАЯ РАБОТА1
I. В интервалах повторите слова за диктором.
II. Запишите эти слова в транскрипции.
1 По образцу приводимых видов заданий преподаватель, работающий с данным
учебником, может сам подготовить вселабораторные работы.
Lesson Two
19
Фонетика: Согласные [1], [fj, (v], (j]. Гласный [э]. Ассимиляция. Латеральный
взрыв. Интонация. Низкий нисходящий и низкий восходящий ядерные тоны.
Понятие о синтагме. Фразовое ударение.
' в е о л я р н ы й боковой сонант. Кончик языка прижат к
альвеолам, но боковые края языка опущены, образуя проход для струи
воздуха.
При произнесении русского [л] кончик языка находится у верхних
зубов.
Так называемый темный (твердый) оттенок [ i ] звучит в конце слов и
перед согласными. При произнесении этого звука поднята задняя спинка
языка. Светлый (палатализованный) оттенок [1] звучит перед гласными и
перед согласным [j]. Смягчение достигается поднятием средней спинки
языка. Следует иметь в виду, что английский палатализованный
согласный [1] тверже соответствующего русского варианта, а английский
темный согласный [ i ] несколько мягче русского [л].
2. Латеральный
взрыв
(lateral
plosion).
Сонант
[1] с предшествующим взрывным 1.
[1]
—
переднеязычный
апикально-аль-
альвеолярным
согласным
произносится слитно, не следует отрывать кончик языка от
альвеол, не должно быть гласного призвука между ними.
Взрыв альвеолярного согласного происходит в процессе
произнесения последующего сонанта [1]. Сонант в подобных
случаях становится слогообразующим.
2. Латеральный взрыв [t] перед [I].
Каллиграфия: Начертание букв Nn, Mm, Ss, Ff, LI.3. [f], [v] — губно-
зубные щелевые фрикативные согласные. Артикуляционно эти согласные
совпадают с соответствующими русскими согласными [ф], [в]. Глухой
английский согласный [f] сильнее соответствующего русского
согласного, особенно в конце слов. Звонкий согласный [v] слабее [f]. В
конце слов звонкий гласный [v] частично оглушается. Фонетическое
упражнение 5
fil def 'definit in'definit hv 'velvit 'sevn l'levn
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на
1 Отсутствие палатализации согласных перед гласными [i], [е]
2 Слит ное произношение сочетания [vn], без гласного
Фонетическое упражнение 4
20
les — sel
lik -
- kil
'setl
let — tel
lit -
- til
'ketl
lip - pil
'111i - - 'litl
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на: 1
Ахшкально-альвеолярное положение языка при произнесении
[I],призвука между ними
[э] — нейтральный безударный монофтонг смешанного ряда среднего
подъема, краткий нелабиализованный. При произнесении этого гласного
в начале или середине слов несколько приподнят весь язык целиком. Для
английского [э] в этом положении характерна краткость и отсутствие
четкости артикуляции. Недопустима замена английского нейтрального
гласного русскими [а] или [ы].
Интонация. Предложение может состоять из одной или нескольких
синтагм или интонационных групп (Intonation-group). Синтагмой
называется отрезок предложения, относительно законченный по смыслу.
Иногда синтагма может быть равна предложению. Например: Не is a
teacher и As far as I know he is a teacher. Фонетически каждая синтагма
характеризуется определенной интонационной структурой Под
интонацией понимаются изменения в высоте основного тона, силе, темпе
и тембре произнесения. Движение основного тона и фразовое ударение
являются основными характеристиками интонационной структуры
синтагмы.
Каждая синтагма заканчивается либо нисходящим, либо восходящим
тоном последнего (или единственного) ударного слога. Этот тон носит
название ядерного и выделяет ядро смыслового центра высказывания.
Низкий нисходящий тон (Low Fall) чаще всего выражает
законченность мысли, категоричность суждения. Эмоционально
нейтральные утвердительные предложения, специальные вопросы,
приказания, восклицания произносятся с нисходящим тоном. Низкий
нисходящий тон характеризуется средним диапазоном и постепенностью
понижения. Следует обратить особое внимание на низкое звучание
конечных безударных слогов.
It is .difficult.
Низкий восходящий ядерный тон (Low Rise) характеризует
некатегоричные утверждения, некоторые синтагмы, семантически тесно
связанные с последующей частью предложения, общие вопросы и
просьбы. Низкий восходящий тон отличается низким началом и
постепенностью повышения. Например:
21
Is it .six?
* • •
Если за последним ударным слогом следуют безударные слоги,
повышение осуществляется на безударных слогах. Конечный ударный
слог произносится на низком, почти ровном тоне. Например:
• ,Isn'tit?
Сравните движение тона в английском и русском пред-ожениях:
л Is it .six? Сейчас шесть?
. х
,Isn't it?
Не так ли? х
__!___1
Предъядерная часть синтагмы в эмоционально-нейтральных
высказываниях образует обычно нисходящую шкалу (descending head),
которая имеет 2 разновидности:
падающая шкала (Falling Head). Например:
\ This is the^ 'sixth vlesson. "~*e~"*\e ступенчатая шкала (Stepping Head).
Например: \ Is this 'lesson difficult?
или высокую ровную шкалу (High Level Head), когда предъядерная
часть синтагмы включает один ударный слог. Например:
\ This is a ^lesson.
"~ * * "\ в
В тексте первый ударный слог нисходящей шкалы обозначается | \ |,
низкий нисходящий тон обозначается j v j, низкий восходящий тон
обозначается | , |, ударные неядерные слоги | 1 |, второстепенное ударение
| (|, пауза между тзщтагмами | , между предложениями | .
Ф р а з о в о е у д а р е н и е (sentence-stress) выделяет одни слова в
предложении среди других. Наиболее обычным видом фразового
ударения является с и н т а к с и ч е с к о е ударение, при котором
знаменательные слова, как правило, бывают ударны, а служебные —
безударны.
22
Л о г и ч е с к о е ударение, другая разновидность фразового
ударения, выделяет логический центр высказывания, подчеркивает
элементы противопоставления в высказывании.
А н г л и й с к и й р и т м характеризуется чередованием ударных
слогов через равные промежутки времени в определенной мелодической
последовательности.
6. А с с и м и л я ц и я (assimilation). Под ассимиляцией понимается
качественное уподобление смежных согласных звуков.
Так, альвеолярные согласные [t], [d], [n], [1], [s], [z] становятся
зубными под влиянием последующих межзубных [0], [5].
Фонетическое упражнение 6
э 'lesn э 'sentsns
эп 'end бэ 'lesn
5э 'sentsns
-* dis iz 9vlesn -* 6is izw69 vsiks0 lesn v 6is izw5s lten0 vsent9ns ш^бэ vsiti
otw69 vlesn т^бэ vdesk 9tw59 vdesk
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на:
1. Отсутствие палатализации перед гласными [i], [е].
2. Сильное произнесение ударных и быстрое ослабленное — безударных слогов.
3. Отсутствие твердого приступа перед гласными в начале слов.
4. Слитное произнесение слов в предложениях.
Ш — с р е д н е я з ы ч н ы й щ е л е в о й с р е д и н н ы й
с о н а н т . При произнесении этого согласного средняя часть языка
поднята к твердому небу, но не так высоко, как в случае с русским
согласным [й]. Края языка прижаты к верхним зубам, образуя проход для
воздуха вдоль середины языка. Органы речи постепенно переходят в
позицию для произнесения последующего гласного. Английский
согласный значительно слабее соответствующего русского согласного.
Фонетическое упражнение 7
et — jet el — jel es — jes Jes I it xiz
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на:
1. Слабую артикуляцию согласного [j].
2. Апикально-альвеолярную артикуляцию звука [t].
23
Фонетическое упражнение 8
-> i z 5is э ,sent9ns || Jes | it viz ||
i z it э /difikalt sentans || -> jes I it viz || 5is -*
sentsns i z Mifikslt || its э xdifik9lt sentans | ,iznt it ||
Jes | it viz ||
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на
1 Отсутствие межзубной артикуляции [z] перед [ д ] , а также его выпадание
2 Отсутствие гласного призвука в сочетании [znt], слитное его произнесение
3 Слитное произнесение слов в предложениях
8. В английском языке отсутствует свойственная русскому языку
регрессивная ассимиляция, затрагивающая работу голосовых связок, т. е.
такая ассимиляция, при которой предыдущий согласный оглушается или
озвончается под влиянием последующего [-> tedi iz xten]
Фонетическое упражнение 9
-» kiti iz xsiks
V iz 'km ;siks^/
-» beki iz vsevn
V iz 'beki ,sevn
-» tedi iz vten
V iz 'tedi ,ten
lib iz ivlevn
V iz 'hli i/Ievn
I misiz 'nelsan iz
'siksti vsiks V iz misiz 'nelsan 'siksti ,siks
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на
1
Постепенность понижения в последнем ударном слоге и низкое
произнесение конечных безударных слогов в случае низкого нисходящего тона
2
Низкое начало повышения в случае низкого восходящего тона Буквы Nn
[en], Mm [em], SS [es], Ff [ef], LI [el] пишутся:
УПРАЖНЕНИЯ
I. Прочтите следующие фразы, обращая особое внимание на интонацию:
24
1. [xJcs]
л
* 3. [xkiti] ^ ,
2. [4bil]
^
4. [mis vkiti]
5. [/ted]
j
8. [-»iz it /ten]
6. [/iz it]
9. [V iz misiz 'diksi 7siksti] •
7. [-» iz it ,sevn]
10. [Viz mis 'smiG 'siksti ~'/Siks]
П. Прочтите следующие предложения сначала как утверждение с
нисходящим тоном, а затем как вопросительное предложение с восходящим
тоном:
1
[Jes]
[/jes]
.
2
U6is]
[,eis]
.
3
Ubeti]
[,beti]
.
4
[mis xmini]
[mis ,1x11111]
.
5
[-> mini xsmi9]
[-* mini /SmiG]
.
6
[- beti xnelsan]
[-> beti ,nels3n]
.
III.
Запомните названия следующих букв. Напишите каждую 10—15 раз:
Mm, Nn, Ss, Ff, LI.
IV. Составьте предложения по образцу, используя приведенные ниже слова.
Правильно и отчетливо произносите начало предложения [5is iz]. Соблюдайте
правильный английский нисходящий тон (Low Fall).
25
О б р а з е ц 1: -> 5is iz xnik
Dick, Sid, Eddy, Kitty, Benny, Betty, Minnie, Ben, Lily.
О б р а з е ц 2: -^5is iz э xlesn
sentence, text, desk, pig, city, ticket, egg, kid, pen, pencil.
V. Спросите друг друга и кратко ответьте по образцу, используя слова из
упр. IV. Следите за интонацией: нисходящий тон должен быть категоричным,
финальным, т. е. доходить до нижнего предела голоса, а низкий восходящий
должен начинаться с низкого и не превышать среднего уровня голоса.
Работайте парами.
О б р а з е ц 1: -» dis iz vdik | -»iz dis ,dik || xjes О б р а з е ц 2: -> dis
iz э xsent9ns || -> iz dis э ,sent9ns | xjes |
VI.
Ответьте на вопросы преподавателя по образцу:
О б р а з е ц : Teacher: Who is reading the text?
Student: xNick (Eddy, Sid, Kitty, Dick, Ben, Lily) is.
VII.
Ответьте на вопросы преподавателя фразами из фонетических
упражнений:
О б р а з е ц : Teacher: How old is Lily? (Becky, Tom...) Student: ~*Lily
is exleven.
VIII.
Используя слова из урока, составьте с преподавателем мик-
родиалог по образцам.
О б р а з е ц 1: Teacher: How many books have you read this
year? Student: xMany. Teacher: And more exactly?
Student: .Ten.
О б р а з е ц 2: Teacher: Why can't you come to my place?
Student: NBusy. Teacher: Pity, isn't it?
Student: It xis.
ДОПОЛНИТЕЛЬНЫЕ УПРАЖНЕНИЯ ДЛЯ
САМОСТОЯТЕЛЬНОЙ ТРЕНИРОВКИ
1. Прочтите упражнение несколько раз перед зеркалом.
26
2. Запишите чтение упражнения на пленку и прослушайте себя, отметьте
свои ошибки.
3. Прослушайте чтение упражнения вашим товарищем, укажите ему на его
ошибки:
*
lit — let -» dis iz з xtekst
iz dis э ,tekst
fil — fel -» dis iz э чsi11 -> iz dis э ,siti lift — left -» dis iz э
xpeni -> iz dis э 7peni
ЛАБОРАТОРНАЯ РАБОТА
I. а) Отработайте произношение слов, б) Запишите эти слова.
II. Повторите в интервалах предложения за диктором.
II. Протранскрибируйте слова.
Lesson Three
А"
Фонетика: Гласные [i:]P [a:], [D], [U:], [и], [з:], [зи]. Носовой взрыв.
27
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на;
1 Различие в позиционной долготе гласных [г.] и [i]
2 Различие в длительности гласных [i] и [к] в одинаковых позиционных
условиях.
3 Качественное различие [i] и [i:] во всех позициях
4 Отсутствие палатализации согласных.
5 Отсутствие твердого приступа перед [к] в начальном положении.
1.
[i:]
—д о л г и й
н е л а б и а л и з о в а н н ы й
д и ф т о н г о и д п е р е д н е г о р я д а в ы с о к о г о п о д ъ е м а
у з к о й р а з н о в и д н о с т и . При произнесении [i:] язык находится
в передней части полости рта, кончик языка касается нижних зубов,
средняя часть языка поднята высоко к твердому нёбу, губы несколько
растянуты. В процессе а
ртикуляции, язык от более низкого и отодвинутого назад положения
переходит к более высокой и продвинутой вперед позиции [i] > [й].
При произнесении русского [и] передняя часть языка поднята выше и
несколько продвинута вперед по сравнению с английским гласным.
Чтобы избежать ошибки типа русского [и], следует обратить особое
внимание на неоднородность артикуляции [i:]. Исходной должна быть
позиция языка, как при английском [i], только к концу артикуляции язык
занимает положение, сходное с русским [и]. Потеря взрыва на стыке двух
смычных звуков. Редукция Каллиграфия:
2. [а:] — д о л г и й н е л а б и а л и з о в а н н ы й м о н о ф т о н г
з а д н е г о
р я д а
н и з к о г о
п о д ъ е м а ш и р о к о й
р а з н о в и д н о с т и . При произнесения гласного [ст.] язык
находится в задней части рта, задняя часть языка слегка приподнята,
кончик языка оттянут от нижних зубов, губы нейтральны. При ошибке
типа русского [а], звука центрального ряда, следует оттянуть язык назад
и несколько удлинить гласный. Не следует широко раскрывать рот.
Фонетическое упражнение 10
bi: — bi:n— bi:ti:v did— di:dsit -— si:tdi: — di:n— di:p'i:zi lid— lidbit -- bitni:
— ni:d— ni:ti:t hv— H:vnit -— nitsi: — si:d— si:tfild— fridlist -— listH: — lLg
— li:ksin— si:nslip-— slip
28
3. Н о с о в о й в з р ы в (nasal plosion). Сочетание взрывные
альвеолярных согласных [t], [d] с последующими носовыми сонантами
[п] или [т] произносится слитно. Взрыв альвеолярного согласного
происходит в процессе произнесения последующего сонанта [п] или [т] и
называется н о с о в ы м в з р ы в о м . Например: ['gcudnj.
4. П о т е р я в з р ы в а (loss of plosion). Английские смычные
согласные [р], [b], [t], [d], [k], [g] теряют взрыв, если за ними следует
другой смычный согласный или аффрикаты [tf]' №1- Так, например, [к]
теряет взрыв в сочетании с последующим [д] в словосочетании
[do'da:kxga:dn].
Фонетическое упражнение 11
ka: — ka:m — ka:t
am э -> fa: xsta
fa: — fa:m — pa:t
a:t -> a:sk xfa:da
ba: —ba:d —ba:k a:sk дэ -> da:k xga:dn
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на' отсутствие
твердого приступа перед [а:] в начальном положении.
5. [о] — к р а т к и й л а б и а л и з о в а н н ы й м о н о ф т о н г
з а д н е г о р я д а н и з к о г о п о д ъ е м а ш и р о к о й
р а з н о в и д н о с т и . При произнесении [х>\ t язык находится в
задней части полости рта, задняя часть языка слегка приподнята, рот
широко раскрыт, губы округлены. '
По сравнению с [а:] английский гласный [о] несколько более задний
и закрытый. В отличие от английского [о] русский гласный [о] менее
открытый, губы сильно округлены. В случае ошибки типа русского [о]
следует шире раскрыть рот, ниже опустить и отодвинуть язык, округляя
губы, не вытягивать их вперед и несколько сократить звук.
6. [и:]
—
Д О Л Г И Й
л а б и а л и з о в а н н ы й
д и ф т о н г о и д з а д н е г о р я д а в ы с о к о г о п о д ъ е м а
Фонетическоеупражнение12 god— goton э 'dog— dogzэ 'boks — 'boksiznod— notod
a'dol— dolzэ 'foks — 'foksizdog— dok'ofa э 'kok— koks^mDd(9)n nDV(9)lzlog—
x
Ink'oksan э 'Ink— InksVgiv 'poll kofi
x
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на
1 Чтение окончания множественного числа -s, которое произносится как [s] после
глухого согласного, как [z] после звонкого согласного и гласного Окончание -es после
шипящих и свистящих согласных звучит как [iz] Не оглушайте звонкий конечный [z] в
окончаниях множественного числа
2 Сильную артикуляцию конечных глухих согласных и слабую — звонких
29 3
Отсутствие твердого приступа перед [о] в начальном положении
у з к о й р а з н о в и д н о с т и . При произнесении этого гласного
язык находится в задней части полости рта. Задняя часть языка
значительно приподнята. В процессе произнесения [и:] язык
перемещается от продвинутого вперед и более низкого положения в
направлении более задней и закрытой позиции. Губы значительно
округлены, причем округление увеличивается к концу произнесения. По
сравнению с английским гласным русский гласный [у] является более
задним, более закрытым и более лабиализованным. В случае ошибки
типа русского [у] следует в первую очередь следить за тем, чтобы губы
были округлены, но не вытянуты вперед.
7. Р е д у к ц и я . Длительность гласных в безударных служебных
словах и местоимениях сокращается. При сильном ослаблении гласные
этих слов могут утратить свое качество. Происходит так называемая
к о л и ч е с т в е н н а я и к а ч е с т в е н н а я р е д у к ц и я .
Например: [а: — а* — э].
Формы служебных слов и местоимений с нередуцированным
гласным носят название сильных, формы с редуцированным гласным
называются слабыми.
Фонетическое упражнение 13
lu:z — lu:s
nju:, fju:
jir va:
mu:d — mir.t
lmju:zik
ju a* vnot
su:n — su:p
'mju:zik9l
,a: ju*
'stjuidants
ju* va:nt
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на:
1 Дифтонгизацию в артикуляции гласного [и]
2 Позиционную долготу гласного [и]
8.
[и] —
к р а т к и й
л а б и а л и з о в а н н ы й
м о н о ф т о н г з а д н е г о п р о д в и н у т о г о в п е р е д
р я д а
в ы с о к о г о
п о д ъ е м а
ш и р о к о й
р а з н о в и д н о с т и . При произнесении этого гласного язык
находится в задней части полости рта, но не так далеко, как при [и:].
Задняя часть языка приподнята меньше, чем при [и:]. Губы слегка
округлены. В случае ошибки типа русского гласного [у] следует
продвинуть язык вперед и не вытягивать губы вперед,
Фонетическое упражнение 14
gud
pul — pu:I
9-^gudvbuk
30
kud
ful
— fu:l
9-»gudNkuk
kuk
fut
— fu:d
->luk at бэ vbuk
tuk
put — bu:t
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на
1 Различие в длительности гласных [и] и [и] в одинаковых позиционных
условиях
2 Качественное различие [а] и [и] во всех позициях
3 Отсутствие межзубной артикуляции [t] перед [д]
4 Потерю взрыва взрывных согласных перед последующим смычным
согласным
9. [з:] — д о л г и й м о н о ф т о н г с м е ш а н н о г о р я д а
с р е д н е г о
п о д ъ е м а
у з к о й
р а з н о в и д н о с т и ,
н е л а б и а л и з о в а н н ы й . При произнесении [з:] язык приподнят,
спинка языка лежит плоско, кончик
языка находится у нижних зубов, зубы чуть обнажены, расстояние
между верхними и нижними зубами небольшое. В случае ошибок типа
[е], [э] не следует слишком растягивать губы. В случае ошибки типа [о]
следует добиться нейтрального положения губ, не открывать широко рот,
продвинуть язык слегка вперед, добиваясь его плоского уклада.
Фонетическое упражнение 15
S3: —s3:v —S3:f з:п эп —*3:li xb3:d f3: — 1з:п — rt3:s 'з:11
5э ->f3:st хУЗ:Ь Ьз: — b3:d — Ьз:0 з:Э бэ ->вз:П xf3:st
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на отсутствие
палатализации согласных перед [з:].
10. [зи] — д и ф т о н г . Я д р о д и ф т о н г а — [з] —
г л а с н ы й
с м е ш а н н о г о
р я д а
с р е д н е г о
п о д ъ е м а
у з к о й
р а з н о в и д н о с т и ,
л а б и а л и з о в а н н ы й . Язык находится не так далеко, как для
русского [о]. Ядро дифтонга близко по звучанию к [з:]. После
произнесения ядра язык делает легкое движение вверх и отходит назад в
направлении артикуляции [и].
В начале произнесения дифтонга губы, слегка округлены, затем
постепенно губы еще болыце округляются (без оттягивания вперед). В
случае ошибки типа русского [оу] надо следить за тем, чтобы губы не
были вытянуты вперед, язык следует продвинуть вперед. При ошибке
типа русского [эу] следует не растягивать губы (губы округлены) и
несколько оттянуть язык назад.
31
Фонетическое упражнение 16
1зи —пзип — пзШ
зи
S3: —S3U ->S3U xs3u
дзи — кзи1 —k3ut
зип
f3: —f3u -►зи x^gj^sunt
дзугз;
S3u —s3ul —S3uk
'зипЬ
t3:n —t3un
bi'bu — Ьзип — ЬзШ
зирп
Ьз:п — Ьзип
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на.
1 Движение губ при произнесении дифтонга
2 Апикально-альвеолярную артикуляцию [1], [n], [t], [а].
1 Аспирацию [к]
Фонетическое упражнение 17
-> dis iz э 4klt>k -> ^Tis iz э xdesk Vdis iz бэ 'besf^arnss Vdis iz бэ 'fife
xlesn Vdis iz бэ 'sek3r$^let3 Vdis iz di' i'levn9 vsent9ns
iz dis э ,gud klok -> iz 5is э ,1зи desk -> iz dis бэ /best arnss
iz dis 5э ,fif9 lesn
iz dis бэ /Sekand lets -> dis iz di- ,end
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на.
1 Четкость произнесения трудных сочетаний [dis iz Оэ], [iz dis бэ].
2 Артикуляцию открытого заднего гласного [о]
3 Низкий нисходящий тон в утверждениях
4 Подъем голоса с нижнего уровня в низком восходящем тоне.
Буквы Оо [зи], Сс [si:], Ее [i:], Dd [di:], Рр [pi:], Bb [ Ы ] , Rr [a:], Tt
[ti:], Vv [vi:] пишутся:
ЧТЕНИЕ АНГЛИЙСКИХ ГЛАСНЫХ. ПЕРВЫЙ И
ВТОРОЙ ТИПЫ СЛОГА
32
Английский алфавит состоит из 26 букв, передающих на письме 44
английских звука (20 гласных и 24 согласных). Такое несоответствие в
количестве букв и звуков речи вызвало необходимость обозначать
различные звуки одними и теми же буквами или сочетаниями букв. Это
особенно характерно для гласных. Каждая гласная буква в английском
языке имеет не менее четырех вариантов чтения.
Чтение гласной буквы в ударном слоге зависит от типа слога. Тип
слога определяется тем, какие буквы следуют за ударной гласной.
Ударные слоги принято делить на 4 типа.
Первый тип слога — о т к р ы т ы й с л о г , т. е. слог,
оканчивающийся на гласную. Ударная гласная читается здесь так, как
она называется в алфавите. Обычно это долгий гласный или дифтонг.
Первый тип слога имеет две разновидности:
1) а б с о л ю т н о о т к р ы т ы й с л о г — слог, графический
образ которого совпадает'с фонетическим, т. е. с его звучанием.
Например: me [mi:], по [пзи];
2) у с л о в н о о т к р ы т ы й с л о г — слог только графически
открытый, а фонетически закрытый. Такие слова, как note [пзт], Pete
[pi:t], исторически восходят к двусложным словам, в которых первый
слог был открытым. В современном английском языке это односложные
слова, так как конечная буква е в словах этого типа немая. Она является
только условным показателем того, что слог здесь открытый и гласная
этого слога должна читаться так же, как и в абсолютно открытом слоге.
Второй тип слога — з а к р ы т ы й с л о г . В этом типе слога за
ударной гласной буквой следует одна или несколько согласных (любых,
кроме буквы г). Гласная буква в закрытом слоге передает краткий
гласный звук.
Согласные буквы, стоящие перед гласной, в большинстве случаев не
влияют на чтение гласной. Так, буква е в закрытом ударном слоге
передает краткий гласный звук [е] независимо от того, сколько согласных
стоит перед ней. Например: en [en], pen [pen], spend [spend].
Чтение гласных о, e в I и II типах слога
БукваТипслога
IIIе[i:]
me
Pete[е]
реп
теп[зυ] [υ]оnоonnotenot
Сочетания ег, ог "в безударном слоге передают звук [э]. Например:
better, doctor.
33
Буква о перед сочетанием согласных Id читается [зи]: old, bold.
Буква s читается как [s] в начале слов, перед согласной буквой, в
конце слов после глухих согласных: sit, best, hps.
2 Заказ 1271 33
Буква s читается как [z] между гласными, в конце слов после гласных
и звонких согласных: music, noses, beds.
Буква с читается как [s] перед буквами ег i, у и как [к] во всех
остальных случаях: cent, cold.
Сочетание ск читается как [k]: clock.
УПРАЖНЕНИЯ
1. Прочтите следующие вопросы, соблюдая нисходящую шкалу и низкий
восходящий той, начинающийся с низкого уровня голоса, или низкий
нисходящий той:
I. Is this a text? 2. Is this a lesson? 3. Is this a sentence? 4. Is this a pen? 5.
Is this a park? 6. This text is easy, isn't it? 7. The dog is not big, is it? 8. This
lesson is not difficult, is it?
II. Прочтите вслух следующие пары слов (Полностью не оглушайте звонкий
конечный [z] в окончании множественного числа):
a lot — lots; a top — tops; a net — nets; a set — sets; a note — notes; fog
— fogs; a pet — pets; a nod — nods; a bill — bills; a fox — foxes; a kiss —
kisses; a bed — beds; a clock — clocks; a kid — kids; a stick — sticks; a
theme — themes.
III.
Протранскрибируйте следующие слова. Отметьте, где необходимо,
словесное ударение;
a bell — bells; a mill — mills; a city — cities; a test — tests; an empty
desk — empty desks; a sentence — sentences; a lily — lilies; a busy bee —
busy bees.
IV. Запомните названия следующих букв. Напишите каждую 10—15 раз:
Bb( Dd, Рр, Ttr Сс, Ее, Оо, Vv( Rr.
V.
Выучите правила чтения букв е, о, с. Приведите собственные
примеры на чтение этих букв.
34
VI.
Протранскрибируйте следующие слова и объясните правила
их чтения:
best, code, nod, tops, sent, bed, these, cod, sold, spoke, mock, theme,
block, then, neck, cone, bold, enter, cell, centner, motor, dose, nest, depth,
less, self, fold, doctor.
VII.
Составьте предложения по образцам, используя приведенные даже
существительные.
О б р а з е ц 1: This is a text
a penny, a sentence, a park, a car, a fox, a clock, a cock.
З б р а з е ц 2: This is the doctor.
the garden, the star, the box, the dog, the lesson, the text, he pen, the book;
the girl.
VIII. а) Составьте предложения по образцу, используя приведенные даже
существительные.
О б р а з е ц : This isn't a box.
a bed, a city, a pencil, an answer, an oak, a star, a cock, a mill, a penny.
б) Составленные предложения переделайте в разделительные вопросы.
Соблюдайте указанную в образце интонацию разделительных допросов.
О б р а з е ц : This isn't a vbox, | ,is it?
IX.
На следующие предложения дайте реплики, выражающие удивление,
сомнение. Произнесите их низким восходящим тоном.
О б р а з е ц : This is an oak. — Is it?
This isn't an oak. — Isn't it?
1. This is a garden. 2. This is a mill. 3. This isn't a penny. 4. This isn't a
star. 5. This is a cock. 6. This isn't a fox. 7. This is a clock. 8. This isn't a dog.
X. а) Составьте предложения по образцу. Используйте приведенные
чиже словосочетания.
О б р а з е ц : This is a yellow pencil.
an old clock, an^ea^_seritenc^ yellow fox, a big park, a difficult lesson,
аЫдсагГ*^^ •*
35
б) Составленные предложения переделайте в отрицательные предложения.
О б р а з е ц : This isn't a yellow pencil.
XI.
а) Прочтите следующие общие вопросы, обращая внимание на
интонацию (низкий восходящий тон).
0 6 p a 3 e i j : V I s the 'lesson ,easy?
1. Is the park big? 2. Is the clock old? 3. Is the pencil yellow? 4. Is the
lesson easy? 5. Is the text difficult? 6. Is the book good?
б) Переделайте общие вопросы в разделительные.
О б р а з е ц Л к the 'lesson ,easy? The -* lesson is 4easy, | ^sn't it?
XII.
Используя приведенные ниже существительные, спросите друг друга
и кратко ответьте по образцу. Соблюдайте правильную интонацию. Работайте
парами.
О б р а з е ц l:-*This is a xstar, /isn't it?
-* Yes, it xis.
О б р а з е ц 2:VThis 'isn't a xstar, /is it?
-* No, it xisn't.
a bee, a fox, a park, a pencil, a car, a clock, a book, a notebook, a cook, a
stick, a slip, a bell, a bird, a dog.
XIII.
а) Используя приведенные ниже имена собственные и подходящие
числительные, составьте повествовательные предложения и общие вопросы по
образцу. ,
О б р а з е ц : - » Tom is xsix.
V Is 'Тот /Six?
б) Задайте друг другу общие вопросы и ответьте на них отрицательно.
О б р а з е ц Л к 'Tom ,six?
No, I -* Tom's seven.
x
v
Pete, Bob, Victor, Polly, Lily, Lucy, Arthur, Betsy, Emily, Emma, Philip,
Dick, Benny, Sid, Betty, Nick.
36
XIV.
Используя фразы из фонетического упражнения 17, обменяйтесь
репликами с товарищем по'образцу.
О б р а з е ц ^ This is the 'fifth vlesson.
The/fifth lesson?
XV. Используя фразы из фонетических упражнений урока, составьте
микродиалоги по образцу:
О б р а з е ц : VThis is an 'old xpark. ,1s
it? It xis.
ДОПОЛНИТЕЛЬНЫЕ УПРАЖНЕНИЯ ДЛЯ
САМОСТОЯТЕЛЬНОЙ ТРЕНИРОВКИ
1. Прочтите упражнение несколько раз перед зеркалом.
1. Запишите чтение упражнения на пленку и прослушайте себя, отметьте
свои ошибки.
2. Прослушайте чтение упражнения вашим товарищем, укажите ему его
ошибки:
got — дзш km — кзш sok — S3uk
not — fond — klo9 —
пзш f3:m f3und рз:1 kbudz дз:1
— f3um
— рзи!
— дзи!
Ьз:9 — Ьзи9 b3:st — b3ust 1з:п —э'1зип
ЛАБОРАТОРНАЯ РАБОТА
I. а) Повторите в интервалах предложения, б) Сделайте эти предложения
вопросительными и отрицательными.
П. а) Повторите в интервалах общие вопросы, б) Переделайте эти вопросы
в разделительные. (Следите за интонацией.)
III. Протранскрибируйте слова. 4
Lesson Four
37
Фонетика: Согласные [h], Ц], [з! Гласные [э], [ге), [ei], [ai]
Каллиграфия: Начертание букв Аа, Ii, Kk, Хх, Zz.
Правила чтения: Буквы а и i в I и II типах слога Буквы а, о, е, i, у, и в III типе
слога Правила слогоделения Ударение в двусложных и многосложных словах
Грамматика: Повелительные предложения Безличные предложения
1.
[h]
—
г л у х о й
щ е л е в о й
ф а р и н г а л ь н ы й
с о г л а с н ы й . При его произнесении в области зева образуется
неполная преграда сближением корня языка и задней стенки зева. Язык в
момент произнесения [h] принимает по-
ложение для последующего гласного. Звук [h] встречается только
перед гласным и на слух представляет собой лишь выдох. При
произнесении русского [х] задняя часть языка высоко поднята к мягкому
нёбу. При ошибке типа [х] следует ослабить согласный до легкого
выдоха, предшествующего гласному.
Фонетическое упражнение 18
i: — hi:
ЬэЧзи
iz — hiz
ЬзиЧе1
a m — ham
'hospitl
at — hat
->дзи хЬзит ->дзи ,Ьзит
hiz xhed
Vd3unt 'дзи хЬзит
hiz xhat
Vd3unt 'дзи ,Ьзит
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на:
1. Ударение в словах: [пэЧзи], [пзиЧеЦ, fhvspitl].
2. Латеральный взрыв в слове ['hvspitl].
3. Отсутствие палатализации звука [h].
4. Различие интонационного оформления приказания и просьбы.
5. Отсутствие взрыва в словосочетании fd3unt 'дзи].
1. [э:] — д о л г и й л а б и а л и з о в а н н ы й м о н о ф т о н г
з а д н е г о
р я д а
н и з к о г о
п о д ъ е м а
у з к о й
р а з н о в и д н о с т и . При произнесении [а] язык находится в задней
части полости рта. Задняя спинка • языка поднята к мягкому нёбу
несколько выше, чем для [DJ. При ошибке типа русского [о] следует
добиваться более открытой артикуляции. По сравнению с [о] гласный
звук [а] менее открытый и более лабиализованный.
Фонетическое упражнение 19
кэ: -- kad— kata L kad— kadsd: -— sad— sat'agastkat— katfa -—
38
fam— fa кatpat— patta -- tal— takpak— pak
6. П о т е р я а с п и р а ц и и г л у х и х в з р ы в н ы х [р, t, к],
с т о я щ и х п о с л е [s]. Согласные [к], [t], [р] теряют аспирацию в
ten —t3:n— tornkDk— как —'кзикзиhed —h :d— hadhot— hal —
3
пзирben —Ьз:п— banpot— pat —рзикbed —b :d— badspot— spat —
3
sp3uk-> notat yO:\|| V iz dis'bal ,big |э* smal ||
x
t
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на:
1.
Позиционную долготу гласных.
2. Положение губ при произнесении звуков [о], [э:], [зи], качествен-
ное различие [d — у] во всех позициях.
3. Отсутствие озвончения глухого согласного [s] под влиянием по-
следующего звонкого [b]: [dis Ьэ:1].
4.
Отсутствие твердого приступа перед гласным [э:] в начале слова.
5.
Правильную артикуляцию конечных звонких согласных.
6.
Аспирацию [k|, [р|, [t|.
7.
Интонацию альтернативного вопроса.
положении после согласного [s]. Например: [spot].
4. [ае]
—
п о л у д о л г и й н е л а б и а л и з о в а н н ы й
м о н о ф т о н г п е р е д н е г о р я д а н и з к о г о п о д ъ е м а
ш и р о к о й р а з н о в и д н о с т и . При произнесения [ае] рот
довольно широко раскрыт, язык находится в передней части полости рта,
плоско лежит во рту, средняя его часть несколько приподнята. Кончик
языка находится у нижних зубов. Углы губ слегка оттянуты в стороны.
Подобного звука в русском языке нет.
Русский гласный [э] менее открытый, чем английский гласный [ае], а
русский гласный [А] открытый, но более задний (центрального ряда) по
сравнению с английским звуком [ае]. Чтобы избежать ошибки типа
русского звука [э], следует шире открывать рот, кончик языка остается у
нижних зубов. В случае ошибки типа русского звука [А] следует прижать
кончик языка к нижним зубам и шире открыть рот.
Фонетическое упражнение 20
laeb —lsep aed did — ded — daed pit — pet — paet э -*big vbaeg kaeb
—kaep aem hid — hed — haed tin — ten — taen э ->Ыгек vk<et haed—
haet eet sit —set —saet pin—pen — paen ->get бэ xmaeps
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на: * 1.
Отсутствие твердого приступа перед гласным в начале слов [aed],
2. Отсутствие палатализации согласных перед гласными переднего
ряда |i, е, ж].
39
3.
Потерю взрыва в словосочетаниях [э -*big ^baeg], [э ->b!aek ^kaet]
5. [ei] — д и ф т о н г . Я д р о д и ф т о н г а — к р а т - *
к и й г л а с н ы й [е] п е р е д н е г о р я д а с р е д н е г о
п о д ъ е м а
у з к о й
р а з н о в и д н о с т и ,
н е л а б и а -
л и з о в а н н ы й . После произнесения ядра язык делает лег-
кое движение вверх в направлении звука [i], не достигая, од-
нако, его полного образования. Нельзя допускать произно-
шения звука типа русского [й].
Фонетическое упражнение 21
lei — leid — leit ei
дэ -» seim Nneim
mei — meid — meit eid
дэ -» feitl Ndei
sei — seiv — seif eit
V d3unt 'teik дэ xkeik
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на:
1. Ослабленную артикуляцию второго элемента дифтонга [ei].
2. Позиционную долготу дифтонга.
3. Отсутствие озвончения глухого звука [к] перед звонким [б] в сочетании слов
[-» teik бэ 4keik].
6. [ai] — д и ф т о н г . Я д р о д и ф т о н г а — г л а с -
н ы й з в у к п е р е д н е г о р я д а н и з к о г о п о д ъ е м а
ш и р о к о й
р а з н о в и д н о с т и ,
н е л а б и а л и з о -
в а н н ы й . При произнесении ядра дифтонга язык находит-
ся в передней части полости рта и лежит плоско, кончик
языка касается нижних зубов, губы немного растянуты (как
монофтонг этот звук не встречается). После произнесения
ядра язык делает движение вверх в направлении звука [i]. В
случае ошибки типа [AI] язык следует продвинуть вперед, с
тем чтобы сделать звук более передним, при ошибке типа
[ай] второй элемент дифтонга следует произносить как мож-
но слабее и среднюю часть языка не следует поднимать вы-
соко.
Фонетическое упражнение 22
sai — said — sait ai hei — hai -*fain xaiz lai — laid — lait aiz
mei— mai -*dei bar Ndei tai — taid — tait ais lpik— laik -> leit at
Nnait
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на;
40
1.
Ослабленную артикуляцию второго элемента дифтонга [ш].
2,
Позиционную долготу дицЬтонга.
Lfl» 1з] —
п е р е д н е я з ы ч н ы е
а л ь в е о л я р н о -
п а л а т а л ь н ы е
щ е л е в ы е
с о г л а с н ы е .
При их
произнесении кончик языка находится у альвеол, а средняячасть языка
поднимается к твердому нёбу. Поднятием средней части языка к
твердому нёбу и объясняется тот оттенок мягкости, которым английские
[f], [3] отличаются от русских твердых согласных звуков [ш] и [ж]. Чтобы
избежать ошибки типа русских звуков [ш], [ж], следует поднять среднюю
часть языка.
Фонетическое упражнение 23
Ji:
Jael
Jr xiz
hi* xiz
ai xaem
fij
'finif
Ji- viznt
hi- xiznt
ai (э)т xrmt
'тезэ
'р1езэ
Ji- iz xm>t
hi* iz xnut
,aem ai
di'vi3n
di'si3n
,iz Ji-
,iz hi-
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на:
1. Отсутствие качественной редукции в местоимениях he, she в безударном
положении.
2. Частичное оглушение [1] в сочетании с предыдущим глухим согласным [р].
3.
Отсутствие гласного призвука между согласным в слове [iznt].
Буквы Аа [ei], Ii [ai], Kk [kei], Xx [eks], Zz [zed] пишутся:
ТРЕТИЙ ТИП СЛОГА
Чтение гласных букв а и i в I и II типах слога
БукваТип слога
IIIа[ei] name lake[ X ]
am bag[ai][1]•
1likebigminebit
Чтение гласных букв а, о, е, U у, и в III типе слога
а + г [а:]о + г [о:]е + г [з:]i + r [з:]У + г [з:]u + г [з:]parkforkherfirstmyrtlefurdarksort
41
Третьим типом слога принято считать слог, в котором за ударной
гласной следует буква г [а:]. Буква г не читается. Она только указывает
на то, что предшествующая ей гласная имеет долгое чтение.
В случае с удвоенной буквой г, как и со всякой другой удвоенной
согласной, ударная гласная двусложного слова читается по второму типу
слога. Например: marry ['тэеп], sorry ['son].
Буква x читается [gz] перед ударной гласной: exam [ig'zaem], exhibit
[ig'zibitj; [ks] во всех остальных случаях: six [siks], text [tekst], exercise
['eksssaiz], expect [iks'pekt).
ПРАВИЛА СЛОГОДЕЛЕНИЯ
Гласная в ударном слоге двусложного слова читается по тем же
правилам, что и гласная в односложном слове. Но для определения типа
слога необходимо установить графическую границу между ударным и
безударным слогами. При определении графической границы в
двусложных словах следует исходить из следующего:
1. Если за ударной гласной стоит одна согласная буква (но не буква г),
то она относится к следующему за ней безударному слогу, например: stu |
dent ['stjir.dsnt]. Таким образом, ударный слог оказывается открытым, и
гласная в нем читается по I типу слога1. Однако в английском языке
имеется ряд двусложных слов, в которых ударная гласная в открытом
слоге читается кратко. Например: city, pity, copy, very и др.
2. Если гласная ударного слога отделена от последующей гласной
двумя или более согласными, в том числе и удвоенной буквой г( то
1 В случае, когда за ударной гласной двусложного слова стоит согласная г, эта
гласная читается по IV типу слога Например' during I'djuann], Магу |'тзэп]
первая из согласных отходит к первому слогу, закрывая при этом
ударный слог. Гласная в данном случае читается по II типу слога, т. е.
кратко, например: dinner ['dins], marry ['тэеп]. Это правило не
распространяется на слова, в которых одна из двух согласных,
отделяющих ударный слог от безударного, — сонант, например: ta |Ые
ftei|bl]. В этом случае согласная b примыкает ко второму слогу,
образуемому сонантом 1( и первый ударный слог оказывается открытым.
УДАРЕНИЕ В ДВУСЛОЖНЫХ И МНОГОСЛОЖНЫХ СЛОВАХ
42
В двусложных английских словах ударение, как правило, падает на
первый слог (если первый слог не является префиксом, потерявшим
семантическое значение), например: dinner ['dina], office ['ofis]. В словах,
содержащих префикс, ударение падает на второй слог, например: return
[пЧз:п], begin [bi'gm].
В трехсложных и многосложных словах в большинстве случаев
ударным является третий слог от конца слова, и гласная в нем читается
по II типу слога, т. е. имеет краткое чтение, независимо от количества
согласных, отделяющих ее от следующего за ней безударного слога, даже
если это буква г, например: factory [Тэекчэп], family [Taemili], experiment
[iks'penmant].
Но когда в ударном третьем от конца слоге содержится звук [ju:], этот
слог читается по I типу слога, как открытый. Например: funeral
['0и:пэгэ1].
При определении ударного слога грамматические окончания и живые
суффиксы во внимание не принимаются. Например: demonstrate
['demanstreit], demonstrated ['demanstreitid], demonstrating I'demanstreitin].
Но при образовании существительных путем присоединения к
глаголу суффикса -ion происходит перемещение ударения на слог,
предшествующий суффиксу, а ударение исходного глагола сохраняется в
виде второстепенного. Например: demonstration [.demans'treijn].
Второстепенное ударение обозначается в транскрипции черточкой внизу.
Некото
рые слова имеют два главных ударения. Это — числитель- * ■ ные от
13 до 19, например: thirteen ('вз:'И:п], а также слова с приставками,
придающими слову новое значение. Например: disappear fdisa'pia],
rewrite ['rhVait].
Таблица № 1 ПОВЕЛИТЕЛЬ! 1ЫЕ
ПРЕДЛОЖЕНИЯ
the book.the map.(Don't)takethe clock.the
bag.the pen.
Таблица № 2
БЕЗЛИЧНЫЕ ПРЕДЛОЖЕНИЯ
five.6)dark?late.late?Itis(not)dark.Isit(not)hot?cold.cold?hot. <five?
43
ИЗУЧИТЕ СЛЕДУЮЩЕЕ
t
УПРАЖНЕНИЯ
1. а) Составьте все возможные варианты предложений, используя
подстановочные таблицы 1 и 2.
О б р а з е ц : Take the book. Take the map и т. д.
Don't take the book. Don't take the map и т. д. It is five. It is not five
и т . д Is it dark? It is not dark и т. д.
б) Попросите товарища о чем-либо, используя как образец подстановочную
таблицу № 1. Произнесите каждую фразу с понижением тона как приказание и
с восходящим тоном как просьбу. Обратите внимание, как интонация меняет
отношение говорящего к высказыванию.
II. Прочтите следующие альтернативные вопросы, обращая внимание на
интонацию:
1. Is she five or six? 2. Is his daughter four or five? 3. Is Pete nine or ten?
4. Is this a park or a garden? 5. Is this family big or small? 6. Is this pencil
black or yellow? 7. Is the lesson difficult or easy? 8. Is the meat hot or cold?
III. Прочтите дважды следующие повелительные предложения — как
приказания с нисходящим тоиом и как просьбы с восходящим тоном.
1. Tell Father all. 2. Don't go alone. 3. Make tea for him. 4. Take the ball.
5. Don't take the lamp. 6. Take the pencil.
IV. Протранскрибируйте следующие сочетания слов. Расставьте ударения:
ten miles, go home, take the pen, he is late, it is fine, a pale face; I am
nineteen; This is a park.
V. Протранскрибируйте следующие слова и объясните правила их чтения:
sit, lame, back, miss, sack, gave, tip, tide, tap, late, mad, made, nine, fill,
cake, thick, bat, pin, pine, hate, act, ice, plot, face, hid, fate, stamp, spot, pile,
land, mist, mole, mark, gold, cap, nose, fix, harm, merry, horn, start, form,
exact, examination, exist, sixty, appendix, expend, exotic, except, exile.
44
VI.
Запомните названия следующих букв. Напишите каждую 10—
15 раз:
Аа, Ii, Kk, Хх, Zz.
VII.
а) Напишите по 5—10 слов с буквами а и г в открытом и закрытом
слогах. б| Выпишите по 5—10 слов с буквами о и i в открытом и закрытом
слогах из книги по домашнему чтению.
VIII.
а) Составьте предложения по образцу, используя приведен-
ные ниже существительные.
О б р а з е ц : This is snow.
meat, milk, ham, pork, leather, velvet.
б) Составленные
предложения переделайте в разделительные
вопросы.
О б р а з е ц : This is snow, isn't it?
в) Составьте отрицательные предложения, используя те же суще-
ствительные.
О б р а з е ц : This isn't snow.
г) Составленные отрицательные предложения переделайте в разде-
лительные вопросы.
О б р а з е ц : This isn't snow, is it?
IX.
Выразите согласие с собеседником по образцу.
О б р а з е ц 1 : It's xhot today.
It vis.
О б р а з е ц 2 : It -»isn't vhot today.
It xisn't.
1. It's cold in the garden. 2. It's late, I believe. 3. It's light in the hall. 4. It's
five o'clock. 5. It's dark-in the park. 6. It's seven o'clock. 7. It's dark inside. 8.
It isn't late, I hope. 9. It isn't six yet.
X. На следующие предложения дайте реплики, выражающие удивление,
сомнение.
О б р а з е ц * She is in the garden. — Is she?
She is not in the garden. /Isn't she?
45
1. She is cold. 2. He is not hot 3. He is in the park. 4. Ann is not in the
hospital. 5. Nick is at home. 6. Betty is not at home. 7. Benny is not in the
boat. 8. They are in the garden. 9. He is not in the hall. 10. Mother is not in.
XL а) Данные ниже предложения переделайте в вопросительные и
отрицательные, б) Задайте вопросы по поводу этих же предложений и кратко
ответьте на них по образцу.
О б р а з е ц : The city is small.
Is the city small? Yes, it is.
#
1. The lesson is difficult. 2. He is ill. 3. 1 am cold. 4. The text is easy. 5.
This is a small lamp. 6. He is a doctor. 7. Father is at
home.
в) Выскажите удивление по поводу этих же предложений по образцу.
О б р а з е ц ; Не is vlate.
7Late? -> No, he visn't.
XII.
Переведите на английский язык:
1. Она врач? — Да, она хороший врач. 2. Ей 17 (лет), не так ли? —
Да. 3. Твоему брату 14, да? — Да. 4. Ему 14 или 15 (лет ) ? — 14. 5. Этот
мяч маленький, не так ли? — Да. 6. Карандаш маленький или большой?
— Большой. 7. Они не заняты, не так ли? — Нет. 8. Он занят, не так ли?
— Да. 9. Его нет дома, не так ли? — Да, его нет. 10. Он дома, не так ли?
— Да. 11 . Это кожаный портфель, не так ли? — Да. 12. Это трудный или
легкий текст? — Легкий. 13. Текст нетрудный, не так, ли? — Да,
нетрудный. 14. Сейчас одиннадцать (часов), не так ли? — Да. 15. Сейчас
одиннадцать или двенадцать (часов)? — Одиннадцать. 16. Сейчас нет
двенадцати, не так ли? — Нет. 17. Холодно. 18. Холодно? 19. Холодно, не
так ли? 20. Холодно или жарко в зале? — Холодно. 21. В зале не жарко,
не правда ли? — Да, не жарко. 22. Возьми эту карту (лампу, ручку,
тетрадь, бумагу). 23. Не бери мой мяч (портфель, карандаш, мои коньки,
мои вещи). 24. Не иди домой одна. 25. Темно. Иди домой!
XIII.
Используя слова нз урока, составьте микродиалоги по образцу.
О б р а з е ц : — -> Is it a /good clock?
— vYes.
— /Is it?
— Of ^course.
46
ДОПОЛНИТЕЛЬНЫЕ УПРАЖНЕНИЯ ДЛЯ
САМОСТОЯТЕЛЬНОЙ ТРЕНИРОВКИ
1. Прочтите упражнение несколько раз перед зеркалом.
2. Запишите чтение упражнения на пленку и прослушайте себя, отметьте
свои ошибки.
3. Прослушайте чтение упражнения вашим товарищем, укажите ему его
ошибки:
kaet —ka:t haet —hat hiz xbaeg h3*. —h3:d — h3:t paek —pa:k haed
—ha:d hiz vhaet f3: —f3:m — f3:st
ЛАБОРАТОРНАЯ РАБОТА
I. а) Повторите в интервалах предложения, б) Поставьте к ним общие
вопросы н дайте на них ответы в отрицательной форме.
I. Ответьте на вопросы.
III.
Переделайте предложения в разделительные вопросы н дайте на них
краткие ответы.
IV. Сделайте повелительные предложения отрицательными. Произнесите их
сначала с нисходящим, а затем с восходящим тоном.
V. Составьте альтернативные вопросы, используя пары слов.
VI. Протранскрибируйте слова. 1
Lesson Five
Phonetics: Согласные [w], [о], [г] Гласные [л], [аи]. Обращение, стоящее в
середине и в конце предложения. Служебные слова в связной речи
Penmanship: Начертание букв Uu( Yy, Qq.
Reading Rules: Чтение букв у и u и гласных диграфов ai, ei, oi, оо, au, ou, oa, ее,
ea, ay, ey, oy, eu.
Text: A Visit
47
Grammar: Глагол to be в Present Indefinite Tense Степени сравнения
прилагательных Личные и притяжательные местоимения Правила орфографии
1. Iw] — г у б н о - г у б н о й з а д н е я з ы ч н ы й с р е д и н н ы й
щ е л е в о й с о н а н т . При его произнесении губы сильно
округляются и выдвигаются вперед, образуя круглую щель. Задняя часть
языка поднята к мягкому нёбу. Затем мгновенно язык и губы переходят в
положение для произнесения следующего гласного. Подобного звука в рус-
* ском языке нет. В случае оши,бки типа русского [в] необхо- \ димо
следить за тем, чтобы нижняя губа не касалась верхних; зубов. В случае
ошибки типа русского [ы] следует еще больше напрячь и округлить губы.
wi:
'winta
wi' vcr.
-> wuts дэ vmaet3
wel
'wind3u
wi* a- vnot
wen iz hi' vbizi
wai
wDnt
,a: wi-
V wai 'iznt бэ 'wo:t9 vWD:m
Wl6
W3UIlt
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на.
1. Четкость произнесения трудного сочетания слов [wots дэ]
2 Правильность звучания [в]
3 Интонационное оформление специальных вопросов
2. [rj] — з а д н е я з ы ч н ы й с м ы ч н ы й н о с о в о й
с о н а н т . При его произнесении задняя часть языка касает-
ся мягкого нёба, мягкое нёбо опущено, и воздух проходит
через полость носа. В русском языке подобного звука нет. В
случае ошибки типа [п] или [н] шире откройте рот и просле-
дите, чтобы кончик языка не поднимался к верхним зубам
или альвеолам, а находился у корней нижних зубов.
Phonetic Exercise 25
sir) baerjk (a) gud vmo:nir) (b) -> gud ,тэ:гпг)
lrjrj taerjk
gud cr.ft3vnu:n gud аЦпап
'i:tirj 'lirjkirj gud vi:vnirj
-> gud /kvmr)
'skeitirj 'Girjkirj
gud ,nait 'S3u ,1т)Г)
gud ,bai
48
Примечание. Обратите внимание на интонационное оформление восклицаний,
употребляемых при встрече (а) и при расставании (Ь)
3, [г] — п е р е д н е я з ы ч н ы й з а а л ь в е о л я р н ы й
с р е д и н н ы й щ е л е в о й с о н а н т . При его произнесении
кончик языка поднят к заднему скату альвеол. Английский сонант [г]
представляет собой однородный звук и акустически сильно отличается
от прерывистого раскатистого русского звука [ррр]. При произнесении
русского [р] кончик языка занимает то же положение (заальвеолярное),
но он расслаблен и вибрирует. Чтобы избежать ошибки типа [р], следует
кончик языка держать напряженным и неподвижным и не касаться им
альвеол.
n:d
'ben
-» ri:d бэ vraimz
rait
'паегзи
-> bi:t дэ xridm
r3ud
'fDrin
daets vrait
'reidnu
-* veri xst)ri
~* greit vbritn
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на
1 Отсутствие палатализации согласных перед [i], [i] и [е]
1 Слитность артикуляции сочетания сонанта (rl с предшествующим согласным
(gl и |Ь] в словосочетании ['greu 'bntnj, соблюдайте носовой взрыв в слове ('bntnl
4.
[л]
—
м о н о ф т о н г
с м е ш а н н о г о
р я д а
с р е д н е г о п о д ъ е м а ш и р о к о й р а з н о в и д н о с т и ,
к р а т к и й н е л а б и а л и з о в а н н ы й . При произнесении [л] рот
полуоткрыт, губы нейтральны, язык несколько оттянут назад. Задняя
часть языка слегка приподнята. В случае ошибки типа русского [А] язык
следует несколько отодвинуть назад. Английский звук более краткий.
Phonetic Exercise 27
кл
клр
AS
Ь
SAmeirj vf\ni клт 1э дэ хк1лЬ *nai V тлдэг
'клгп
bA
bAt
лр
iz э vdokt3 V evn 'клтп haez its vkASt9mz
d
SA
1лк
'And
I1
a
Примечание. Работая над упражнением,
tA
hAt
обратите внимание на
1
Tj
Позиционную долготу гласного [л].
1 Отсутствие редукции гласного в безударном глаголе (haezj, употребленном в
своем основном значении.
2 Аспирацию согласных [k], [t]
3 Слитное произношение слов.
49
4 Правильное интонационное и ритмическое оформление предъ-ядерной части
предложений
5. [аи] — д и ф т о н г . Я д р о д и ф т о н г а — г л а с н ы й
п е р е д н е г о о т о д в и н у т о г о н а з а д р я д а н и з к о г о
п о д ъ е м а
ш и р о к о й
р а з н о в и д н о с т и ,
н е л а б и а л и з о в а н н н ы й . Он произносится почти так же, как
первый элемент дифтонга [ai], а затем язык делает движение назад и
вверх в направлении звука [и]. Второй
элемент дифтонга должен быть очень слабым. В случае ошибки типа
[ау] следует продвинуть язык вперед, чтобы сделать первый элемент
дифтонга более передним и значительно ослабить второй элемент.
Phonetic Exercise 28
паи bau э'1аи паип
taun
laud
a'baut
haus
daut
aul aut
hau vhai -»лр 9n(d) vdaun
hau xhu:d 9-»baut vfaiv
'hau vhr>t ->wnt эЬаШ дэ xsaundz
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на
1 Слабость второго элемента дифтонга [аи]
1 Позиционную долготу дифтонга [аи]
2 Правильное ггроизношение звука [h], представляющего собой лишь выдох
перед началом гласного
3 Потерю взрыва и выпадение первого звука [d] в словосочетании 1эп(с1)]
Буквы Uu [ju:]F Yy [wai], Qq [kju:] пишутся:
Чтение буквы у в I и II типах слога
БукваТип слога
IИУ[ail
type typist[i] myth
gypsy
50
4Jj П О, ^-fy
Буква у в конечном неударном слоге читается как [i]: Betty; в начале
Чтение буквы и в I и II типах слога
БукваТип слога
III[ju:]МиtunebutdutySunday
слова перед гласной читается как [j]: yes.
После звуков [г], [I], [cfe] буква и произносится как [и:]: rule, flute,
June.
Сочетание ng в конце слова читается как [rj]: long [1од|, sang |saegj.
ЧТЕНИЕ ГЛАСНЫХ ДИГРАФОВ В УДАРНОМ СЛОГЕ
Д и г р а ф о м называется сочетание двух букв, произносимых как
одна фонема. Чтение гласных диграфов в ударном слоге не зависит от
типа слога. Наличие у диграфов некоторых общих черт позволяет
разделить их на следующие три группы:
Первая группа — диграфы, произносимые как дифтонги. Первый и
второй элементы дифтонга передаются соответственно первой и второй
буквами диграфа в их кратком чтении. Например: ei — vein [vein), oi —
oil I о 1 1J.
Вторая группа — диграфы, произносимые как монофтонги или
дифтонги. Звуковое значение дифтонга не соответствует чтению
входящих в его состав букв. Например: аи — August fagdst], ои — loud
[laud].
В диграфах третьей группы читается только первая или вторая из
двух букв. Она имеет алфавитное чтение. Например: ai — maid [meid] —
читается первая буква; eu — neutral ['njurtrdl] — читается вторая буква.
Сочетания букв i + e, о + е , и + е в односложных словах могут
рассматриваться как диграфы III группы ie( ое, ие ИЛИ как открытый тип
слога с немой е на конце.
Сочетание гласных не всегда является диграфом: иногда это
свободное сочетание гласных, образующее два слога, и тогда первая
гласная читается по правилу I, открытого типа
51
слога, а вторая образует неударный слог. Например: diet ['daiat],1 trial
['traial], duel ['djiralj.
Чтение гласных диграфов ai, ei, oi, oo, au, ou, oa, ее, ea, ay,
ey, oy eu
r
Первая группаВторая группаТретья группаei [ei] vein
oi 1 oil oy J l3IJ boy ey [ei] theyoo в конце словам too oo + согласная • [u:]
(кроме k) J soon2 oo + k [u] book au [э:] August ou [au] outai [ei] maid ay [ei] day оа
[зи] oak ее [к] see ea [i:] mean3 eu [ju:] neutral*
ЧТЕНИЕ ГЛАСНЫХ В НЕУДАРНОМ СЛОГЕ
Буквы er i, у, а (с последующей немой е) читаются [i]: delegate
['deligitj4.
Буквы oF ur а (без последующей немой е) читаются [э]5: pilot ['pailat],
circus ['s3:k3s], cinema ['sinima].
Буква о в конечном положении не редуцируется, всегда читается [зи]:
potato [рэЧеИзи].
Если слог содержит конечную букву п или 1, гласная совсем не
читается: final [Tainl], garden ['ga:dn]( lesson ['lesn].
Большая часть диграфов в неударном положении также читается,[1]
или [э]. Например: hockey ['ht>ki]( famous ['feU mas].
Диграф ow в конечном положении двусложных слов читается [зи]:
window ['wind3U]. \,-
1
В некоторых словах сочетание ie читается [i]: field, believe.
2
Но в словах good, wood, stood, foot диграф oo + согласная читается кратко [и].
3
Перед буквой d и сочетанием th диграф еа читается [е|. Например1 dead, bread,
death. Но: read [n:d|, lead [li:d],
4
Суффикс -ate читается [it] в существительных и прилагательных, ■ но в
глаголах читается leit]: to delegate ltd 'deligeit].
5
Иногда буква u в неударном слога имеет алфавитное чтение. Например: institute
['institjuit].
TEXT
A VISIT
52
W: Hello, Betty!
B: Good afternoon, Mr. White!
W: Is Doctor Sandford ['saenfsd] in?
B: No, he isn't. Doctor Sandford is still in the hospital.
W: Is Mrs. Sandford at home?
B: No, she isn't. Mrs. Sandford is out. She is in the park with Benny, and
old Mrs. Sandford is not well.
W: Oh, that's a pity! What's the matter? It isn't the flu, is
it?
B: Oh, no, it's a bad cold, she's better today. W: Is she in
bed?
B: No, she isn't. Come in, Mr. White, and have a talk with Mrs.
Sandford. She is always glad to see you. W; Perhaps, some other dayr Betty!
B: I'm so sorry Mr. Sandford isn't at home yet. W: That's all right.
Remember me to Mrs. Sandford. B: Yes, Mr. White. W: So long then,
Betty!
B: So long, Mr. White. On Saturday Mr. Sandford is at home after four.
с
VOCABULARY NOTES
to be in быть дома, е. д. Is Dr. Sandford in? Доктор Сэндфорд дома?
Ant. to be out не быть дома, е. д. Mrs. Sandford is out. Миссис Сэндфорд
нет дома.
not to be well = to be unwell; to feel bad плохо себя чувствовать, е. д.
Mrs. Sandford is not well. I feel bad today.
That's a pity! Какая жалость! What a pity!
What's the matter? Что случилось? В чем дело? What is it?
flu n грипп
It's a bad cold. Она сильно простудилась (сильная простуда).
She is in bed. Она лежит. Устойчивые сочетания типа in bed, by bus,
to school употребляются без артикля.
to have a* talk поговорить; также: to have a smoke покурить: to have
a swim поплавать (значение однократного действия) to be glad
радоваться, е. д. She is glad to see you.
perhaps возможно, может быть
some other day как-нибудь в другой раз
to be sorry сожалеть, е. д. I'm sorry, he is out.
Remember me to Mrs, Sandford* Передайте привет миссис
Сэндфорд.
53
CONVERSATIONAL PHRASES
Approval: Well, yes. Right! Good, isn't it? Yes, i see. Quite! Nice, isn't it?
Yes, very likely. That's right. Wonderful! Splendid! Fine! First-rate! Excellent!
Magnificent! Fantastic! That's a good idea! (
Disapproval: Pity! That's a pity! What a pity! What a shame! Awful!
(What) nonsense! No wonder! How very strange!
PHONETIC NOTES
1- Служебные слова (союзы, предлоги, артикли, вспомогательные
глаголы) и местоимения (личные, притяжательные, относительные,
неопределенные) имеют две формы произнесения: сильную и слабую:
has [haez — haz — z]
Как правило, в связной речи эти слова безударны и употребляются в
слабой форме. Например:
Ц т iz xo:lwsz ,glsed ts ,si: ju*]
2. Обращение, стоящее в середине или в конце предложения, обычно
безударно и продолжает мелодию предшествующей синтагмы:
Good-»afternoon, Mr. White. ш
-» So ,long, Mr. White.
STUDY THE FOLLOWING
T a b l e No 1
THE VERB TO B E IN THE PRESENT INDEFINITE TENSE
I ama doctorWedoctorsYou are(not)a studentYouare(not)studentsHe (she) is
a pupilThey
pupils
Ami
a doctor?
we
doctors7
54
Are you
a student7
Are
you
students 7
Is he (she)
a pupil?
they
pupils?
CONTRACTED FORMS
Are you a student? — Yes, 1 am No, I'm not
Is he a pupil? — Yes( he is No, he isn't
Are you doctors? — Yes, we are No, we aren't.
T a b l e No 2
DEGREES OF COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
Comparative
taller
younger*
her friend
prettier
her sister
She
than
her brother her
is
sister-in-law
more
beautiful
her aunt
tired
Superlative
the tallest
the oldest
of all the students in
the busiest
her group
She
of the three girls
is
the most
beautiful
of all
capable
activ?T
55
T a b l e No 3
ADJECTIVES WHICH HAVE TWO FORMS OF COMPARISON
PositiveComparativeSuperlativefar oldfarther более дальний further 1 более
дальний, 2 дальнейший
older elder(the) farthest ]
(the) furthest ] самыи Аальнии
(the) oldest старший по возрасту (the) eldest старший в семье
Примечание При сравнении двух предметов одинакового качества
прилагательные в положительной степени употребляются с конструк цией as ... as.
В соответствующих отрицательных предложениях употребляются not so ... as
или not as .. as, e g My flat is as large as yours My flat is not so large as yours My flat
is not as large as yours
T a b l e No 4 PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE
PRONOUNS
Nominative CaseObjective
Case
/Conjoint form Absolute form i "■ -■ ■ ■ -
r
me mymineyou heyou himyour hisyours
hissheherherhers itititsits weusourours theythemtheirtheirs
SPELLING RULES
1. Если прилагательное оканчивается на согласную, кото-
рой предшествует ударная краткая гласная, то в сравнитель-
ной и превосходной степенях при прибавлении суффиксов
-err -est конечная согласная удваивается big — bigger — big-
gest
2, Если прилагательное оканчивается на -у с предшеству-
ющей согласной, то перед -err -est у переходит в i busy —
busier — busiest, dry — drier — driest, но gay — gayer — gay-
est v
3. Если прилагательное оканчивается на немое -ег то перед -err -est
оно опускается: large — larger — largest.
56
4. Имена существительные, оканчивающиеся на -s, -ssf -xf -shr -chr во
множественном числе принимают окончание -es |iz]: bus — buses; glass
— glasses; box — boxes; dish — dishes; match — matches.
5. Окончание
-es
принимафт также существительные,
оканчивающиеся на -о; potato — potatoes.
Однако существительные piano и photo принимают окончание -s:
piano — pianos; photo — photos.
6. Имена существительные, оканчивающиеся на -у с
предшествующей согласной, меняют у на i перед окончанием -es: study
— studies; family — families.
Если конечной букве -у предшествует гласная, то у не меняется: day
— days.
7. В сложных существительных типа
brother-in-law форму
множественного числа обычно принимает главное в смысловом
отношении слово: brothers-in-law.
8. Существительные, оканчивающиеся на -f или -fef принимают
окончание -s или -es, причем f меняется на v: leaf — leaves; wife —
wives.
Однако существительные roof, chief, handkerchief образуют
множественное число по общему правилу путем прибавления окончания
-s: roofs, chiefs, handkerchiefs.
9. Существительные child, ox во множественном числе принимают
окончание -en: child — children; ox — oxen.
10.
Следующие существительные образуют множественное число
путем изменения корневой гласной: man — men: woman — women;
mouse — mice; tooth — teeth; foot — feet; goose —■ geese.
11.Некоторые существительные имеют одну форму для единственного
и множественного числа: swine, sheep, deer, fish.
EXERCISES
I. Study Substitution Tables No. 1—4 and compose as many sentences as you
can.
II. a) Read aloud:
speed, loaf, loom, reach, rose, fill, coal, aim, cube, weave, faint, steam,
tool, freeze, mutton, crystal, tense, shoot, trainer, coast, raze, float, beach,
least, boot, fee, rein, author, veil;
a merry song, a big boat, a simple riddle, a little star, a black bag, an old
goat, a good cook, a fat cock, a good accent, an old oak, a good tool.
57
b) Concentrate on the rhythm, sentence stress, weak forms of the pronouns and
the low falling tone:
His -> mother is xill. Her -> cousin is xright. My -> sister is xin. His ->
brother is xout. The -> man is xwrong. His -» wife is xout. The -> man is xbad.
The ^ woman is xgood. The -> girl is xclever. His -> daughter is xpretty.
III. a) Write five words with each of the following digraphs: oo, ее, ea, oa. b)
Copy out in columns the words with the digraphs from your book on home reading.
IV. Write the plural form of the following nouns. Transcribe them:
college, writer, family, wife, child, mouse, parrot, house, bird, man, goose,
woman, leaf, roof, day, son-in-law, turkey, swine, box, dish, sheep.
V. Before you start working at the text practise the sounds in the following
words and word combinations:
1. [i]
— is, in, visit, still, pity;
[e]
— Betty, Benny, well, better, bed, yet, then;
[ae]
— matter, bad, have, glad, Saturday, Sandford;
[зи]
— oh, no, so, old, home," cold;
[D]
— doctor, hospital, sorry, long.
2. a) Alveolars replaced by dentals: in_the hospital; inwthe park. -
b) No glottal stop: Is Doctor Sandfordwin? She_is_in the park.
Shejs^always glad; is not_at home yet.
c) Loss of plosion: badj:old, gladjto see you.
VI.
a) Listen to the recording of the dialogue "A Visit". Mark the
stresses and tunes, b) Practise the text for test reading. Listen to it very
carefully until you can say it in exactly the same way. c) Memorize the
dialogue and dramatize it.
VII.
a) Read the following special questions. Concentrate on the intonation.
Observe the weak forms of the pronouns and the verb to be:
1. ->When is she vbusy? 2. -»Why are you vlate? 3. -»When are you vfree?
4. -»When are you vbusy? 5. ->Why are you xsad? 6. VWhy is 'Betty in the
vpark? 7. VWhy is Mrs. 'Sandford in vbed? 8. VWhy is he 'still at the
^hospital? 9. -»When is she at vhome? 10. VWhy is she 'still at vhome?
b) Change the special question into general ones and answer them as in the
model. Work in pairs.
M o d e l : Why is he in bed? Is
he in bed? Yes, he is.
58
"V.
VIII.
Answer the following questions:
1. Is Doctor Sandford in? 2. Where is he? 3. Is Mrs. Sandford at home? 4.
Is Mrs. Sandford in the park with Benny? 5. She isn't in the garden, is she? 6.
Old Mrs. Sandford isn't ill, is she? 7. Is she in bed? 8. She is better today, isn't
she? 9. Is Mr. Sandford at home after four on Saturday? 10. Is he at home after
four or at half past four on Saturday?
IX. a) Complete the following general questions to make them alternative.
M о d e 1 :-4s he,busy? —-»Ishe,busy |orvfree?
1. Are they in the garden ...? 2. Is your sister at the Institute ...? 3. Is
Doctor Sandford at the hospital...? 4. Is his wife in the park ...? 5. Is the
exercise easy. .? 6. Is Betty nineteen ...? 7. Is the hall big...? 8. Are you free on
Saturday ...? 9. Are these lessons difficult...? 10. Is this sentence long...?
b) Change these general questions into disjunctive ones. Mind the intonation.
M о d e 1: -»Is he ,busy? — He is vbusyt | ,isn't he?
X. Give the following sentences in the plural.
M o d e l : This is a pen. These are pens.
1. This is a box. 2. This is a spoon. 3. That is a fork. 4. This is a park. 5.
That is a garden. 6. This is a desk. 7. That is a door 8. This is my bird. 9. That
is his dog. 10. That is her daughter.
XL Give the degrees of comparison of the following adjectives and transcribe
them:
short, tall, large, nice, long, big, red, high, dirty, fast, easy, good, bad, few,
busy, near, far, old, late, thin, thick, comfortable, interesting, difficult, narrow.
XII.
Rewrite the following sentences changing as ... as into not so as or not as ...
as:
1. She is as young as you are. 2. He is as clever as his father is. 3. I am as
tired as you are. 4. My mother is as old as yours. 5. This book is as interesting
as that one. 6. These dictations are as bad as those ones. 7. My father is as tall
as yours. 8. His daughter is as beautiful as his wife. 9. My room is as light as
yours. 10. This new house is as big as the old one. 11. This boy is as clever as
that one.
XIII.
Rewrite the following sentences changing not so ... as into less ... than:
59
1. She is not so tired as I am. 2. The child is not so sleepy as you are. 3.
This task is not so important as that one. 4. This book is not so interesting as
that one. 5. Spanish is not so difficult as Chinese. 6. There is not so much ink
in my fountain-pen as in yours.
XIV.
a) Respond to the following sentences. Express your surprise or doubt as
in the models.
M o d e l 1 : This is a good car. Is it?
M o d e l 2: This isn't a good car. Isn't it?
1. This is a light room. 2. This is a big dog. 3. This is a dark garden. 4.
This isn't a bad book. 5. This is a nice animal. 6. T!..^ isn't a good shop. 7.
This isn't a big city. 8. This is a long sentence. 9. This isn't a thick exercise-
book. 10. This is a difficult test. 11. This is an interesting story. 12. This isn't a
bad idea. 13. This isn't a clever answer. 14. This isn't a small park.
Ы Go on with the exercise until everyone has participated. Work in pairs.
XV.
a) Let the members of the class ask and answer questions as in the model.
Give a short answer using contracted forms. Add a sentence of your own.
M o d e l ' Is your sister a student?
No, she isn't. She is still a pupil.
b) Respond to the negative sentence of your fellow-student as in the model. Use
contracted forms. Work in pairs.
M o d e l : His father isn't a doctor.
No, he isn't. He is an officer.
XVI.
a) Give questions to the following sentences:
1. On Saturday Mr. Sandford is at home after four. 2. My brother is still at
the office. 3. Mr. Smith is a good doctor. 4. My mother is glad to see you.
b) Each sentence describes a certain situation in a concise way. Some points of
the situation are already known to you. Find out some more details about the
situation by asking questions. Work in pairs. Use conversational phrases expressing
approval and disapproval where possible.
M o d e l : Mrs. Sandford is in the park.
Nice, isn't it? Is she alone there?
No, she isn't.
With whom is she there?
With Benny, her son, you know.
Yes, I see.
60
XVII.
Let the members of the class ask and answer questions as in the model.
Use contracted forms.
M o d e l 1 . Is she as tall as her friend?
She's much taller than her friend. M o d e l 2 : Is
Nina active?
She's the most active of all.
XVIII.
Translate the following into English:
1. В чем дело (что случилось)? — Джон болен. 2. Он лежит? — Да, но
ему сегодня лучше. 3. Том дома? — Нет, его нет. Он обычно бывает дома
в пять. 4. В субботу я бываю дома в четыре. 5. Где Бэнни? — Он в парке.
6. Кто он? — Он врач. 7. Доктор Сэндфорд дома? — Он еще в больнице.
8. Бэнни в парке, не так ли? 9. Когда они бывают дома в субботу? — В
шесть. 10. Они всегда рады видеть вас. 11. Какая жалость, что его нет
дома. 12. Какая жалость, она все еще в постели.
ADDITIONAL PHONETIC EXERCISES
1. Read the exercise several times before the mirror.
2. Record your reading and listen to it, detect your errors.
3. Listen to your fellow-student reading the exercise. Detect his errors in sounds
and intonation and tell him what he must do to get rid of them.
a) pi:t — pit — pet — pset — pat — pot — p3:t — po:t — put
ri:d — rid — red — reid — raid — r3ud — ru:d
b) -» тлдэг iz at vh3um || -> fadar iz in di' vofis | -> sistar iz ill
бэ vga:dn || -> Ьглбэг iz at дэ vsteidi3m | дэ тэеп iz in дэ vstri:t | дэ
-> woman iz in дэ vmakit | дэ -> дз:1 iz in дэ xpa:k ||
LABORATORY WORK
I. a) Repeat the sentences after the tape, b) Make them interrogative and
negative.
II. Repeat the general questions and give short answers to them.
III.
Give the sentences in the plural.
IV. Supply short questions expressing surprise, doubt.
61
III. Repeat the alternative questions and change them into disjunctive ones.
Observe the intonation.
III.
Repeat the special questions and change them into general ones. Observe
the intonation.
III.
Transcribe the words given on the tape.
VIII.
These disjunctive questions are not true to fact. Correct them.
M o d e l 1: Mr. Sandford is at home, isn't he? — Oh, no (I am afraid, you
are mistaken), he is not in.
M o d e l 2: Mr. Sandford is not a doctor, is he? — But he is.
Lesson Six
Phonetics: Согласные [tfl, [<fe]- Дифтонг [ o i ] Сочетания сонантов с
предшествующими согласными Связующее г Сравнительная таблица русских и
английских гласных фонем Интонация приложения Интонация вводной синтагмы в
конце предложения Ударение в составных прилагательных
Penmanship: Начертание букв Gg, Jjr Hh, Ww.
Reading Rules: Правила чтения диграфов au, aw, ouf ow, оа и некоторых
буквосочетаний
Text: Betty Smith
Grammar: Притяжательный падеж имен существительных Глагол to have в
Present Indefinite Tense Неопределенные местоимения some, any, no. Предлоги места
Числительные от 1 до 100
1-
[tfli
—
п е р е д н е я з ы ч н ы е
а л ь в е о л я р н о -
п а л а т а л ь н ы е с м ы ч н ы е а ф ф р и к а т ы , т е. сложные
согласные звуки, первый компонент которых — взрывной звук [t] или [d],
а второй — фрикативный [Л или [3] При их произнесении кончик языка
касается альвеол, одновременно средняя часть языка поднимается к
твердому нёбу. Постепенно кончик языка отходит от альвеол. Таким
образом, эта полная преграда переходит в неполную
Английское [tf] по сравнению с русским [ч] звучит тверже.
Английское [<&] не имеет соответствующего звука в русском языке.
Нельзя допускать раздельного произнесения компонентов аффрикаты
[<&], как в русских словах джаз, джем.
62
Phonetic Exercise 29
tfiz
tfcaem
tfaild
tfeu'lai
-* cfcein an(d) xЈfeDn
tfo:k
'vihtfe
\ d3unt 'utf 5э Xv/Dtf
t r . tr
tfemcfe
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание па
1 Отсутствие полного оглушения [cfcl в конце слов
2 Слитное произнесение компонентов аффрикаты [cfc]
3 Слитное произнесение слов в предложениях
2. hi] —д и ф т о н г . Я д р о д и ф т о н г а — з в у к
з а д н е г о р я д а н и з к о г о п о д ъ е м а , л а б и а л и -
з о в а н н ы й . Оно представляет собой звук, средний меж-
ду [и] и [э:]. После произнесения ядра язык движется в на-
правлении гласного [i]. В случае ошибки типа [ой] следует
сделать первый элемент дифтонга более открытым и менее
лабиализованным, а второй элемент значительно ослабить.
Phonetic Exercise 30
n o i z — VDIS
dis xboi — -» di:z Nbsiz
bnii — tfois
-» dis 4tDi — -» di:z NtDiz
кэш — ik'sploit
-» dast sVDIS— -* дзиг svoisiz
бэ V boi 'spnilz дэ yioiz
Примечание. Рабская над упражнением, обратите внимание на.
1 Различие в позиционной долготе дифтонга [oi].
2 Отсутствие аспирации [р] в положении после [s]
3 Произнесение указательных местоимений
3. С о ч е т а н и я
с о н а н т о в
с
п р е д ш е с т в у -
ю щ и м и с о г л а с н ы м и . Сонанты [г, 1, w, j] в сочета-
нии с предшествующим согласным произносятся слитно.
Например: [breik, glaid].
Сонанты [г, 1, w, j] в положении после глухих согласных частично
оглушаются. Например: [tn:, plei, 'twenti, tju:n].
Альвеолярная артикуляция согласных [t, d] переходит в
заальвеолярную под влиянием последующего заальвеоляр-ного сонанта
[г]. Например: [trai, drai].
В сочетании сонантов [1 + j] произносится светлый оттенок [1].
Например: [,wiijir].
63
Phonetic Exercise 31
tri:
fri:
twinz
trai
frend
twelv
~* wil^Jir ,ri:d
tra
praud
kwik wiiwju* /клт ~*
m
wil^Jir ,дзи
dra
'ргзипаип
kwait
wilwju* ЬЭУ 'braun 'bred ,brekf9St
i
drL
0гзи
'kwes
4. С в я з у ю щ е е г. Если за словом,
m
tfn
оканчивающимся на согласную букву г,
следует слово, начинающееся с глас-
3 Заказ 1271
65
ного звука, то на стыке слов звучит согласный [г], который носит
название «связующего г» (linking г). Если эти слова разделены паузой, то
связующее г исчезает.
Phonetic Exercise 32 ai hsev э -> fa:darw3nd э
хтлдэ ||
-> hiEv ju- eni ,a:nts | xjes | ai hsev vtu: | -» пзи ai haev xnot || хпзи I ai
hsev хпзи a:nts || хази | ai xhaevnt eni ,a:nts || -» hsez Ji* eni чдз:1 frendz in
mt>sk3U || Jes | Ji* xhaez SAITI | bst -» not чтеш |
64
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на силыгую форму
безударного глагола to have, употребляемою в своем основном значении
class="book">Буквы Gg [cfei:], Jj [cfeei], Hh [eitfb Ww ['dAblju:] пишутся:
Сравнительная таблица русских и английских гласных фонем
РядПодъемПереднийПередний отодвинутый на, задЦентральный или
смешанныйЗадний продвинутый впередГлубокий заднийВысокийУзкая
разновидностьи 1ыУ
и
Широкая разновидностьiиСреднийУзкая разновидностье3
3о
Широкая разновидностьэ
сэ
лНизкийУзкая разновидностьэ
эШирокая разновидностьа*аD
а
ПРАВИЛА ЧТЕНИЯ ДИГРАФОВ И НЕКОТОРЫХ
БУКВОСОЧЕТАНИЙ
Звуковые значения некоторых диграфов совпадают, несмотря на то,
что их буквенное выражение разное. Как правило, это пары диграфов, на
которых один встречается в начале или середине слова, а другой — в
конце:
65
Диграфы II группы
Диграфы III группы
аи Л author aw J law
оа ] . . boat ow ) I3"' low
ou1 1 r . out ow J now
Как видно из таблицы, диграф ow отличается от других диграфов
тем, что его можно отнести как ко II группе (звуковое значение диграфа
не соответствует чтению входящих в него букв — [аи|), так и к III группе,
когда он читается по названию первой буквы, т. е. [зи].
Невозможно указать какое-либо четкое правило, с помощью которого
можно было бы решить, к какой группе диграфов относится диграф ow в
том или ином слове. Поэтому произношение слов, содержащих этот
диграф, следует запоминать в каждом отдельном случае.
Буква о перед буквами mF n, v и сочетанием th в большинстве случаев
читается [л]: come [клт], son [SAn|, love [L\v]r mother [1тлбэ].
Слова, читающиеся не по правилу: move, novel, gone, shone, approve,
proverb, woman, women, honour.
Заметьте: в слове cousin диграф читается (л), в слове group — | u j
Буквы а, о после w, qu в II и 111 типах слога читаются не по правилу,
а именно:
|wo:| —■ war (kwo:| — quarer
[wt>] — want, was, watch |kwt>]
— quantity
w + or [w3:l — work, word
В сочетании wr буква w не читается: writer ['raits].
В сочетании wh читается только первая буква w: white [waitI. Но
перед буквой о, наоборот, читается только вторая буква h: who [hu:|,
whole [пзи1], whose [hu:zj.
Буква g перед e, ir у читается [cfej: page [peicfel, gin [cfein], gymnast
['cfeimnaest], в остальных случаях [g|: good, gray.
Слова, читающиеся не по правилу: give, girl, get.
Буква j читается (c±5): just.
66
Сочетание th читается [G] в большинстве знаменательных слов: thin,
Smith. В служебных словах, местоимениях и в конце знаменательных
слов между гласными читается (д|: the, this, that, they, bathe.
Сочетание sh читается [J]: she.
Сочетание ch читается [tf|: chin.
Сочетание gh в середине и в конце слова не произносится (немое):
eight [eit], sigh [sai], но ghost [дзш1].
Буква i перед gh имеет алфавитное чтение ]ai|: high |hai|. Буква i перед
Id и перед nd читается [ai]: child, kind. Сочетание ph читается [f|: phone.
Сочетание ture читается (tfs]. Например: picture ['pikt/a], lecture
[MektjD |.
В сочетании kn в начале слова буква к не произносится: know [пзи],
knife [naif].
Диграфы II группы au( ou перед ght читаются [э:|: daughter ['data],
thought [Go:tJ.
T E X T
BETTY SMITH
I am Betty" Smith. My full name is Elizabeth Louise Smith. I am
twenty-two. I am a college graduate. I am a writer, just a
beginner, you know. I have a lot of friends. Most of them are my former
school-mates. My best companions are two girl-friends. They are
very kind, jolly and well-bred.
My brother-in-law, Henry Sandford, is married to my elder sister Helen. I
am a member of her family. My brother-in-law is a doctor. He has a mother,
but he has no father. My sister is a house-wife. They have only one child,
Benny. Benny is my nephew, he is four. Sometimes he is naughty. He is
fond of birds and animals. We have white mice, a hedgehog and a parrot in
the house. Now Benny is eager to have a rabbit. But his mother is against
it, we have no peace because of all Benny's animals and birds.
VOCABULARY NOTES
I am twenty-two. Мне 22 года. How old are you? I am nineteen (years
old).
a college graduate выпускник колледжа; I'm a college graduate
у меня высшее образование
just a beginner новичок former
бывший
school-mate соученик, школьный товарищ; сравни: a fellow-student
товарищ по институту companion товарищ
67
girl-friend подруга; boy-friend товарищ, друг jolly
веселый, славный well-bred хорошо воспитанный
elder старший (о членах семьи); older старше. Например: My elder
sister is 28. She is two years older than I. I am two years younger than my
sister.
house-wife домашняя хозяйка
naughty непослушный, шаловливый
to be fond of smth; to like любить, нравиться
to be eager очень хотеть
to be against быть против
peace покой; сравни: piece кусок
TOPICAL VOCABULARY
Relations by Birth: parents, father, mother, sister, brother, son,
daughter, grandfather, grandmother, grandson, granddaughter, grandchildren,
grandparents, great-grandfather, great-grandmother, great-grandchildren,
uncle, aunt, cousin, nephew, niece
Relations by Marriage: husband, wife, father-in-law, mqther-m-law,
son-in-law, daughter-in-law, brother-in-law, sister-in-law, stepmother,
stepfather, stepchildren, stepbrother (sister, son, daughter) v t
People's Age*
What's your age? (How old are you?)
I am seventeen. I am seventeen years old. I am under seventeen.
I am over seventeen. I am nearly eighteen.
I am under age yet. = I am not yet eighteen.
In three month's time I'll come of age.
She is still in her teens (13—19). She is a teen-ager.
She is in her (early, mid, late) teerfs.
She is in her (early, late) thirties [ i . e. between 29 and 40). She is a
middle-aged person. She is an elderly person.
Animals and birds [domestic): horse, cow, dog, cat, goat, pig, swine,
ass, rabbit, hen, cock, goose (geese), duck, turkey
Animals and birds (wild): lion, tiger, wolf (wolves), bear, fox, hare,
elephant, mouse (mice), monkey, hedgehog, eagle, swan, sparrow, swallow,
parrot, pigeon, donkey
CONVERSATIONAL PHRASES
68
Agreement: Sure. Why, yes of course. By all means. That'd be lovely. I'd
be glad to. How nice of you. It (certainly) is.
Disagreement: By no means.'Far from it. I'm afraid I don't agree. I think
you're mistaken. Just the other way round. I'd like to say yes, but... I'm awfully
sorry but you see...
1. Приложение обычно выделяется в отдельную смысловую группу,
ударно и произносится тем же тоном, что и определяемое слово, но на
более низком уровне.
My -> brother-in-law, | -» Henry ,Sandford... # %%j
2. You know — вводная смысловая группа. Вводная смысловая
группа в конце предложения безударна и продолжает мелодию
предшествующей смысловой группы :
Гт a х writer, | —> just a bevginner, you know.
_liu
3. Слово well-bred является составным прилагательным. Составные
прилагательные обычно произносятся с ударением на каждом из
составляющих слово элементов. Например: 'well-'known, 'good-'looking,
'kind-'hearted, 'absent-'minded.
В связной речи под влиянием ритма одно из ударений может
опускаться. Например: She is а -»good-looking vgirl.
STUDY THE FOLLOWING
T a b l e No 1
POSSESSIVE CASE OF NOUNS
the room of my sister — my sister's [z] room
the son of my friend — my friend's [z] son
the answer of the student — the student's [s| answer
the works of Marx — Marx's [iz] works
the books of the students — the students' books
the flat of my mother-in-law — my mother-in-law's [z] flat
69
e, g. My brother's flat is large. The girl's lace is
pretty. These are Byron's poems. The students'
answers are correct. My daughter-in-law's room is
small.
T a b l e No. 2
THE VERB TO HAVE IN THE PRESENT INDEFINITE TENSE
I (we, you, they)have (got)1afather, cousin, book, flat.He (she)has (got)
I (we, you, they)have (got)someink, time, work. French books, new maps, good
pictures.He (she)has (got)
Hav
e
I (we, you, they)
a
father, cousin, book, flat?
Has
he (she)
Hav
any
ink, time, work? friends?
e
I (we, you, they)
cousins? children?
Has
he (she)
PREPOSITIONS OF PLACE
I (we, you, they)haven't
•
have no haven't (got)any aink, time, work, books, cousins, maps, mother-in-
law.hasn'tanyink, time, work.He (she)has nochildren.sisters-in-law.hasn't (got)ason,
book, map.
Примечание.
Неопределенное
местоимение
some
употребляется
в
утвердительных предложениях; any — в вопросительных и отрицательных
предложениях, по — только в отрицательных; not any предпочтительно в
разговорной речи
1 В разговорной речи глагол to have очень часто заменяется формой have got.
70
The book is on the table. The pencil is in the box.
The ball is under the table. The boy is at the window.
Go into the room!
Take the newspaper out of the bag!
Go to the blackboard.
Take the book from the library.
Go down the stairs.
Look up.
NUMERALS 1—12
13—19
CardinalOrdinalone[ WAn ] the first[f3:st]two[tu:]the second['sekand]three[6ri:]the
third[9 :d]four[fo:]the fourth[fo:9]five[faiv]the fifth1[fife]six[siks]the
3
sixth[siksG]seven['scvn]the seventh['sevnO]eight[eitlthe eighth[eite]nine[nam]the
ninth[патв]ten[ten]the tenth[ten9]eleven[I'levn]the eleventh[I'levne]twelve[twelv]the
twelfth[twelfG]
1 Полужирным шрифтом выделены числительные, представляющие особые
трудности в написании.
Cardinal
Ordinal
thirteen
['03:lti:n]
the thirteenth
['Gsi'tknG]
fourteen
['fo:'ti:n]
the fourteenth
['fo:ti:nei
fifteen
.['fifti:n]
the fifteenth
[TiftiinG]
sixteen
['siks'ti:n]
the sixteenth
['siks'tr.nG]
seventeen
['sevn'ti:n]
the seventeenth
['sevn'tknG]
eighteen
['ei'tiin]
the eighteenth
[*ei'ti:nG]
nineteen
['nain'tkn]
the nineteenth
['nam'ti:n0]
20—100
Cardinal
Ordinal
71
twenty
['twenti]
the twentieth
['twentnG]
twenty-one
['twenti
the twenty-first
['twehtrf3:st]
Wn]
twenty-two
['twenti
the twenty-
['twenti'seksn
'tu:]
second
d]
thirty
[•03:ti]
the thirtieth
['GsitnG]
forty
[*fo:ti]
the fortieth
[TD-.tnG]
fifty
['fifti]
the fiftieth
I'fiftuG]
sixty
['siksti]
the sixtieth
['sikstuG]
seventy .
['sevnti]
the seventieth
['sevntiiGj
eighty
Teiti]
the eightieth
['emiG]
ninety
I'namti]
the ninetieth
I'namtnG]
a (one) hundred
['rundrad]
the hundredth
['rundradG]
Примечания. 1. Числительные, оканчивающиеся на суффикс -teen, имеют два
равных ударения: 'thir'teen. В связной речи под влиянием ритма одно из ударений
может* опускаться: 'fourteen books, но 'page fourteen.
2. Номер телефона читается 5687 — five six eight seven. Есл-рг~две первые (или
последние) цифры номера телефона одинаковые, употребляется слово double: 4417
— double four one seven: 3477 — three lour double seven. Если две средние цифры
номера телефона одинаковые, то слово double не употребляется: 7889 — seven eight
eight nine. Цифра 0 читается [зи]. Номера 1000, 2000 и т. д. читаются one thousand,
two thousand и т. д.
3. При обозначении номеров домов, квартир, автобусов и т. п., а также часто
страниц, глав, упражнений употребляются количественные числительные.
Существительные в таких случаях употребляются без артикля, и оба слова пишутся
с прописной буквы. Например1 The meeting will take place in Room Thirty.
I. Study Substitution Table No. 2, page 72 and compose as many sentences as you
can.
II. Transcribe the following words and explain the reading rules:
five, tip, bed, pipe, land, fry, rule, ton, tone, pupil, love, cut, shade, brother,
shall, bus, snack, blame, poke, found, aloud, green, town, toy, farm, yellow,
glove, warm, some, won, worse, nothing, mild, world, month, worth,
company, worship, none, find, wild, ought, above, brought.
III.
Explain the pronunciation of the consonants in bold type in the following
words:
face, eight, yet, gate, cage, engine, lock, wrong, write, job, white,
gymnastics, Alice, chest, light, cheek, fish, sigh, gently, knight, bright, ginger,
knock, physics, phlox, Gypsy, whole, whip, whisper.
72
IV. Before you start working at the text practise the sounds in the following words
and word combinations:
1. [ae] — companions, married, family, parrot, rabbit;
( h ) — a house-wife, a hedgehog, in the house, to have a rabbit, his
mother, we have no peace;
[ 3 v ] —a lot of friends, most of them, a member of her family, is fond of
birds, because of all.
No palatalization: Smith, Elizabeth, beginner, sister.
2. a) No glottal stop: is JElizabeth, my^elder, have_only,
and^animals, isjeager, becausejof_all;
b) Linking [r|: my brother-in-law, a member^pf, my sisterjs, his
motherjs.
V. a) Listen to the recording of the text "Betty Smith", Mark the stresses and
tunes, b) Practise the text for test reading very carefully . until you can say it in
exactly the same way.
V. Transcribe the following sentences, mark the stresses and tunes:
1. My brother-in-law, Mr. Smith, is a writer. 2. Have you a sister? 3. How
old is she? 4. Whatrs her name? 5. Is Betty a member of his family?
VII. Answer the following questions:
1. What's Betty Smith's full name? 2. What is she? 3. Has she got many
companions? 4. Are her companions kind and jolly? 5. Who is Betty's elder
sister Helen married to? 6. Is Betty a member of her sister's family? 7. What's
her brother-tn-law?
9. Has Doctor Sandford parents? 9. Is Helen a doctor? 10. Have
they got any children? 1. How old is Betty's nephew? 12. Is he a
good child? 13. What's he fond of? 14. Is Benny eager to have
a dog? 15. Have they got any animals and birds in the house?
VIII. Ask and answer questions. Use contracted forms where possible.
Work in pairs.
M o d e l 1: What's his name? — (It's) Benny.
1. What's your name? 2. What's your mother's name? 3. What's her
nephew's name? 4. What is her sister's name? 5.1s "Benny" a boy's or a girl's
name? 6. What's your school-mate's (girl-friend's, boy-friend's) name? 7.
What's Betty's full name?
73
M o d e l 2: Has your brother a large family? — Yes, (he has). No, (he
hasn't).
1. Has Betty Smith a large family? 2. Have you a large family? 3. Has your
cousin a brother (father, mother, friend, wife, parents, grandfather)? 4. Has
Benny got a hedgehog? 5. Has Benny got a rabbit? 6. Have you got a dog in
the house? 7. Has Benny friends? 8. Has Benny books (toys, pens, pencils)?
IX. Change the given groups of words as in the model.
M o d e l : the room of my sister — my sister's room
the friends of my sisters — my sisters' friends.
1. the brother of my mother; 2. the friend of my sister; 3. the husband of
his daughter; 4. the house of my parents; 5. the table of my father; 6. the work
of my mother; 7. the notebook of this student; 8. the books of these students;
9. the sister of my friend;
10.
the friend of our cousin; 11. the photo of my grandfather;
12. the room of Pete; 13. the son of her brother; 14. the daughter
of Ann; 15. the sister of my mother.
X. a) Form questions to which the following statements are the answers, b) Each
sentence states a certain fact. Find some more details about it by asking questions.
Work in pairs, Use conversational phrases of Lessons 5 and 6 wherever possible.
1. We are students of the English Faculty. 2. Her brother-in-law is a doctor.
3. Betty Smith is a writer. 4. Mo sister-in-law is a house-wife. 5. His family is
not large. 6. ТЙеу have only one child. 7. She has a daughter. 8. Their child's
name is Benny. 9. Her name is Helen. 10. His nephew is four. 11. He is in the
park. 12. She is an English student. 13. Betty is the sister of Helen. 14. She
has some books on the table. 15. Benny has no brothers. 16. Their
grandmother is an elderly person. 17. Doctor Sandford is a middle-aged
person.
XL a) Change the following sentences into interrogative and negative, b) Ask one
another questions on the following sentences and answer them in the negative. Mind
the distribution of sentence-stress in the replies.
M o d e l : They have many English books.
Have they many English books? No, they haven't. They have a lot of
xRussian books | and very few x English books.
1. She has some English books. 2. He has a lot of mistakes in his test. 3.1
have a lot of notebooks in my bag. 4. The boy has three red pencils. 5. Kitty
has two cousins. 6. Dr. Sandford has a son. 7.1 have relatives in Moscow. 8.
They have two rooms. 9.1 have some newspapers on the desk. 10. We have
very many friends.
74
XII.
Fill in suitable words:
1. His aunt's son is his ... . 2. Your father's father is your ... . 3. My sister's
son is my ... . 4. My sister's, daughter is my ... . 5. My mother's brother is
my ... . 6. Your mother's sister is your ... . 7. Your uncle's daughter is your ... .
8. Your mother's mother is your . . . . 9. Your brother's wife is your ... . 10.
Your sister's husband is your....
XIII.
Fill in am, is, are:
1. I ... an English student. 2. His name ... George Brown. 3. Mr. and Mrs.
Brown ... his father and mother. 4. My brother's name ... Benny, and my
sisters' names ... Betty and Rose. 5. We ... members of one family. 6. ... Helen
married? 7. ... they mar
ried? 8. Mr. Sandford ... Betty's brother-in-law. 9. How old ... you? — I...
eighteen. 10. What... you all? —We ... all students.
11.... your girl-friends students? 12. ... Betty's school-mates kind and jolly?
13. His companions ... well-bred. 14. ... Benny eager to have a dog? 15. She ...
a naughty child. 16.1... eager to have a girl-friend. 17.1... two years younger
than my cousin. 18. He ... as young as his boy-friend. 19. My niece ... eighteen
months old.
XIV. Fill in prepositions:
1. Betty's sister is married ... Doctor Sandford. 2. Is Benny. . home? — No,
he is still... the park ... his mother. 3. Look ... the picture (blackboard). 4. Put
the notebook ... the drawer. 5. He is not... the room. 6. Come ... the room. 7.
Go ... , the room. 8. He has some friends ... Moscow. 9. Don't put the
pencils ... the box. 10. Take the newspaper... the table. 11. The letter is ... the
book.
12.
Go ... Room Four. 13. Come ... the blackboard. 14. Take the
books and notebooks..............your bags! 15. She has a pen ... her
hand. 16. Go ... the Institute. 17. Are you fond ... cats? 18. Have you got a
dog^the house? 19. Open your books ... page 25. 20. Thousands ... students
study our University. 21. Children begin school... the age... seven.
XV.
Fill in some, any, no, none, not any, one or the indefinite article a:
1. Have you got ... relations? — No, I haven't . . . . 2. Has she got ...
nephews or nieces? — She has ... . 3. She has ... sister, she has only ... brother.
4. They have got ... cousins in Minsk. 5. Have you got ... brothers? — No, I
haven't ... . 6. I have ... good friends. 7. Have you got ... interesting books? —
Yes, I have. 8. Have you got ... friends in St.Petersburg? 9. He has ... English
books in the bookcase. 10. Have you got ... pencils in your bag? — Yes, I have
... . 11. Has she ... girls in the family? — No, she has ... . 12. Have we got ...
chalk on the blackboard?
75
13.
She has ... mistakes in her test.
XVI.
Form nouns from the following verbs by adding the suffix -ел
wrife, work, teach, read, paint, sing, examine, dance, listen:
XVII.
Write in words the following cardinal numerals: 3,
9, 11, 12, 14, 15, 19, 33, 44, 60, 99, 100.
XVIII. Write in words the following ordinal numerals:
1st, 3rd, 5th, 9th, 19th, 2nd, 4th, 8th, 12th, 20th
XIX. Write in words.
M o d e l : 13 +45 = 58
(Thirteen plus forty-five is fifty-eight).
5 0 — 3 1 = 19
(Fifty minus thirty-one is nineteen).
15 x 2 = 30
(Fifteen multiplied by two is thirty).
30 : 2 = 1 5
(Thirty divided by two is fifteen).
46 + 18 =64
4 + 40 = 44
30 : 5 = 6
10: 5 = 2
15 - 8 = 7
10 + 8 = 18
5 x 5 =25
6 x 8 = 48
80 - 30 = 50
79 - 50 = 29
9 x 9 = 81
6 x 6 = 36
9 + 11 = 20
99 + 1 = 100
1 0 : 2 = 5
2 7 : 3 = 9 '
XX.
Use the following verbs in commands and requests:
take, open, go, come, put, write, read, look, close, speak, prepare.
XXI.
Translate the following sentences into English:
1. Его друзья — студенты факультета английского языка. Они будущие учителя.
2. Элен — жена мистера Сэндфорда. 3. Сколько лет вашей племяннице? 4. Сколько
братьев у Джеймса? — Только один. 5. Он женат, и у него большая семья. 6. Ваша
старшая сестра замужем? — Да, ее муж — преподаватель английского языка.
7. У него есть племянник? — Нет, но у него есть племянница.
8. Достаньте ваши книги из портфелей. 9. Откройте (ваши) книги на двадцать
седьмой странице. 10, Вы должны прочесть шестой урок еще раз. 11. Прочтите и
переведите третье предложение. 12. Сделайте упражнение одиннадцатое на
странице 37. 13. Принесите мел из комнаты № 14. 14. Она непослушная девочка.
15. Моя школьная подруга очень любит животных. 16. Мне очень хочется иметь
собаку в доме, но мои родители против этого. 17. У моей невестки нет покоя в доме
из-за кошек и собак. 18. Большинство подруг ее дочери — студентки. 19. Его дети
хорошо воспитаны. 20. Нелли — добрая и славная девочка. 21. Мы товарищи по
школе и одноклассники (class-mates). 22. Он живет на Лесной улице 9, квартира
15. 23. У вас есть телефон? — Да, номер моего телефона 217-18-36. 24. Он не такой
молодой, как вы думаете, ему уже 30 лет. 25. Моей племяннице столько же лет,
сколько вашему внуку. 26. Сколько лет вашему сыну? — Ему десять лет. Он старше
76
вашей дочери на три года. 27. Моя двоюродная сестра моложе меня
на два с половиной года. 28. Дочери моего брата всего полтора года. 29.
Наташа самая молодая из моих друзей. 30. Я живу со своими родителями
на Песчаной улице, дом 10. 31. Прибавьте десять к десяти. 32. Умножьте
пять на семь. 33. Если ты разделишь тридцать на шесть, то получится
пять.
XXII. Think of stimulating phrases for your fellow-student to agree or disagree
with you.
XXIII. Make up a small talk about (a) Mr. Sandford's family; (b) your own
family. Try to use conversational phrases suggested for dialogues.
ADDITIONAL PHONETIC EXERCISES
' 1. Read the exercises several times before the mirror.
2. Record your reading and listen to it, detect your errors.
3. listen to your fellow-student reading the exercises. Detect jhis errors in sounds
and intonation and tell him what he must do to get rid of them:
fetf
tfest
'cfeestfa ecfe cfeoin
kaetf
tfaet
cfeASt
baecfe point
lastf
tfart
cfet)b
lacfe in'cfeoi
*
-> fetf бэ xbaeg -> кэ:1 xcfeon
э -> drai xtri:
-> kastf бэ xdDg -> famd xcfeD:cfe
э -> Ьгзикп xtDi
-* ri:tf бэ храк -> ti:tf xcfeein
э -* fr3uzn хгзиг
LABORATORY WORK
I. a) Repeat the sentences after the tape, b) Make them interrogative and
negative.
II. Transcribe the text. Mark the stresses and tunes.
III.
Answer the questions according to the models.
IV. Change the given groups of words as in the model.
III. Translate the sentences into English.
III.
Spell the words given on the tape.
77
III.
These disjunctive questions are not true to fact. Correct them.
Lesson Seven
Phonetics: Дифтонги ||э], [еэ], [иэ]. Иисходящо-восходящий I топ {Fall-Rise),
интонация обращения. Интонация перечисления.
Reading Rules: IV тип слога. Чтение буквы а перед некоторыми согласными.
Texts: 1. Doctor Sandford's Family. 2. About Benny's Cousins.
Grammar:
Предложения с вводным
there.
Числительные свы-
ше
100.
Предлоги
времени.
_________________________________________________________________________
^
Phonetic Exercise 33
'seldom
'leta,
дэ su:n3 дэ vbet3
'intavsl
'bets
V bets 'leit дэп vnevs
'eksslsnt 'nev3
Примечание. Обратите внимание на различие в звучании нейтрального гласного
в конечном положении но сравнению со всеми остальными позициями.
Нейтральный гласный во всех позициях, кроме коночной, звучит как ослабленное
[ г . ] . В конечном положении качество нейтрального гласного является
промежуточным между [з:1 и [л].
1.
— д и ф т о н г . Я д р о д и ф т о н г а — г л а с -
н ы й
п е р е д н е г о
р я д а
в ы с о к о г о
п о д ъ е м а
ш и р о к о й -
р а з н о в и д н о с т и ,
н е л а б и а л и з о -
в а н н ы й . После произнесения ядра язык движется к цент-
ру в направлении |э]. Чтобы избежать ошибки типа [IAJ ,
следует ослабить второй элемент дифтонга.
2. |£э| - ^ д и ф т о н г . Я д р о д и ф т о н г а — г л а с н ы й
п е р е д н е г о р я д а с р е д н е г о п о д ъ е м а ш и р о к о й
р а з н о в и д н о с т и н е л а б и а л и з о в а н н ы й , второй
элемент — нейтральный гласный.
3. [иэ] —д и ф т о н г . Я д р о д и ф т о н г а — г л а с н ы й
з а д н е г о п р о д в и н у т о г о в п е р е д р я д а в ы с о к о г о
п о д ъ е м а ш и р о к о й р а з н о в и д н о с т и , с л е г к а
л а б и а л и з о в а н н ы й . После произнесения ядра язык движется к
78
центру в направления [э]. Следует избегать сильного округления и
выпячивания губ при произнесении первого элемента.
dis Ьеэ
риз
-* we^r \z хтеэп
тэ д£Э
/иэ
wesr iz бэ xtfc3
гиэ Ьсэ
']иэгэр
wot iz деэг in дэ хЬагд
'реэгэтз 'ju:3U9lr
wot iz д£эг on дэ xJelf
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на: 1 Отсугствие
палатализации согласных перед дифтонгами [io|, [гэ1
2. Второй элемент, который представляет собой слабый скользящий
звук
3. Низкое положение языка при артикуляции диптгопга |сэ|.
4 Связующее [г| в предложениях
Phonetic Exercise 35
lltl lSAdn'didntpar — spai til — Stll teibi'ntn'kudntpein - — spein to:l
— sto:lpi:pl'teikn'haszntkeit - — skeit tTAbl'bi:tn'ni:dnt ku:l -—
sku:i >
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на: 1 Латеральный
взрыв в словах первой колонки, носовой — в словах второй колонки, Отсутствие
гласных призвуков между взрывными и сонантом.
2. Отсутствие аспирации глухих согласных [р], |t], [к] в сочетании с предыдущим
[s|.
ЧЕТВЕРТЫЙ ТИП СЛОГА
Четвертый тип слога графически напоминает первый условно-
открытый слог. Разница между ними в том, что в IV типе слога между
ударной гласной и немым е стоит не любая согласная, а буква г.
1 Исключение;
2 Исключения:
3 Исключение:
Чтение гласных букв а, е, и, о в ГУ типе слога
а + ге [еэ]е + re [is]u + re [jua]о + re [э:]fare1here2pure3more
are [а:|.
there [деэ], where sure Циэ|.
[weal, were [w3:].
ЧТЕНИЕ БУКВЫ А ПЕРЕД НЕКОТОРЫМИ СОГЛАСНЫМИ
79
Буква а перед сочетанием th и перед n, s, f + согласная читается
[а:]. Например; bath [Ьаб], dance [dans], past [past], after ['аЛэ].
Буква а перед 1 + согласная, кроме mr f, vr читается [о:]. Например:
all [э:1], salt [salt],
В сочетании a + lk буква 1 — немая: talk [to:k], chalk [#>:к].
Буква а перед 1 + mr fr v (буква 1 в этих сочетаниях — немая)
читается [а]. Например: calm [кат], half [haf], halves [havz].
TEXT 1 DOCTOR SANDFORiyS FAMILY
Doctor Sandford's family is not very large. There are five of them. The
five members of his family are: his mother, his sister-in-law, his son Benny,
his wife Helen and himself. Helen has no parents.
Old Mrs. Sandford is fifty-eight. Helen is twenty-six. Doctor Sandford is
thirty. Benny is an only child and there are no boys or girls in the family
for him to play with.
TEXT 2 ABOUT BENNY'S COUSINS
"Granny, have I any cousins?" "Yes
Benny! You have two."
"Whose children are they? How old are they? Are they boys or girls?"
"Not so many questions at once, please, Benny! Your cousins are: a five-
year-old boy, Georgie, and a four-year-old girl, May. They are your Aunt
Emily's children. They are in Canada now with their parents: your Aunt Emily,
my daughter, and her husband, Mr. Thomas Brown."
"In Canada? What's Canada, granny? Where is it?"
"Canada is a far-away country. It is in the North of America."
"In the North of America? Where is it? Is it as far as London?"
"Oh, no Benny! It's much farther." "But,
granny. ."
"Come along, my dearest. It's just the time for your midday milk."
VOCABULARY NOTES
an only child единственный ребенок
five-year-old пятилетний
far-away дальний, далекий
in the North of на севере
as far as так же далеко, как
come along пойдем
80
it's just the time как раз пора
TOPICAL VOCABULARY
What's your occupation? What do you do (for a living)? worker
(mechanic, turner, locksmith), farmer, engineer, teacher, doctor, surgeon,
dentist, soldier, sailor, pilot, officer, salesman, saleswoman (shop-assistant,
shop-girl), research worker, architect, lawyer, journalist, typist, driver, actor,
actress, composer, painter, writer, poet, playwright, musician, conductor,
chemist, physicist
'
CONVERSATIONAL PHRASES 4
Opening remarks: Oh, it's you. Ah, there you are! Well, if it isn't old
Jack! I say. . Excuse me... Sorry to trouble you... Hello!
Parting remarks: Bye-bye / See you / See you tomorrow (then); Love
to... Regards to ...
PHONETIC NOTES
1. Характерным для английского языка является сложный нисходяще-
восходящий тон (the falling-rising tone, или Fall-Rise). Нисходяще-
восходящий тон наблюдается в смыс
ловых группах, требующих восходящего тона, в которых
коммуникативный центр высказывания выделен понижением тона.
Нисходяще-восходящее движение тона может осуществляться в пределах
одного слога или распространяться на большее количество слогов.
Употребление нисходяще-восходящего тона вместо простого
восходящего тона характерно для эмоционально окрашенной речи:
They are in xCanada ,now.
.. ♦ "\ .. *У
2. Интонация обращения (Direct Address). Интонация обращения
зависит от его места в предложении. В начале предложения обращение
всегда ударно, обычно образует самостоятельную смысловую группу и
произносится, как правило, с нисходяще-восходящим тоном. Например:
xGran,ny, | -»have I any ,cousins? * \ j ~ .
81
В официальной речи или когда обращение направлено к аудитории,
оно произносится с нисходящим тоном:
Comrade Ivaxnova, | -» come to the /blackboard, please.
— • •
•
— • •
В середине и в конце предложения обращение безударно и
продолжает мелодию предшествующей смысловой группы:
-»Come a,long, my dearest.
3. В предложениях, содержащих перечисление (enumeration), обычно
каждая неконечная смысловая группа произносится с восходящим тоном.
Например:
The Vfive 'members of his 'family xare: | his /mother, | his sister-in-law, |
his -> son /Benny, | his -» wife ,Helen | and himxself.
— •
—
*
— —
•
•
---------------------N
•
—
t l
S T U D Y T H E F O L L O W I N G
82
T a b l e No. 1
ПРЕДЛОЖЕНИЕ С ВВОДНЫМ THERE
There isa
some no
not anybook cup knife plate
newspaperon the table, on the desk.There aresome no
not any (not) many a lot of a fewbooks
exercise-books
cups knivesr
on the table, on th,e desk.There *ssome no
not any (not) much a lot of little a littlechalk
bread
butter
sugar
milk
Is thereanybook cup knife plate
newspaperon the table? on the desk?Are thereany
many
fewbooks
exercise-books plateson the table? on the desk?
! 1
i 1 Is thereany
much
littlechalk
bread
butter
sugar
milk
83
The
clock
glass
is
cat
dog
boxes
pencils
are
books
on
under
the
desk, chair, bed. i sofa.
bookcase.
NUMERALS
101
— one hundred and one
245
— two hundred and forty-five
359
— three hundred and fifty-nine
712
— seven hundred and twelve
2 018
— two thousand and eighteen
8 541
— eight thousand five hundred and forty-one
3 400 936
— three million four hundred thousand nine hundred
and thirty-six
84
Примечания. 1 В составных числительных перед десятками (а если их нет,
то перед единицами) ставится союз and
2
Числительные hundred, thousand, million не употребляются во
множественном числе Во множественном числе могут употребляться только
соответствующие существительные. Например' hundreds of thousands of people.
3
Годы обозначаются количественными числительными.
1900 — nineteen hundred,
1909 — nineteen nine или nineteen hundred and nine,
1977 — nineteen seventy-seven или nineteen hundred and seventy-seven.
Слово year после обозначения года не употребляется, но может
употребляться перед ним in the year nineteen twelve
Даты обозначаются порядковыми числительными, на письме и в чтении
25th January, 1912 the twenty-fifth of January, nineteen-twelve January
25th, 1912 или January the twenty-fifth, nineteen twelve, January 25, 1912.
PREPOSITIONS OF TIME
Для указания времени употребляются предлоги at, past, to, from, till.
e. g. Come at five o'clock. Go there at seven. The train arrives at seven
thirty-two. It is half past two. It is a quarter to three. Leave your place at a
quarter to six. He is at home from three till four.
EXERCISES
I. a) Study Substitution Table No. 1 and compose as many sentences
as you can. b) Let the members of the class ask and answer questions as
in the model. Give a short answer and add a sentence of your own with
the introductory there.
M o d e l : Is there any clock on your desk?
There is. And there is also a lamp on it.
c) Respond to the negative sentence of your fellow-student as in the model. Use
contracted forms in speech.
M o d e l : There aren't any knives on the table.
No, there aren't. There are only forks here.
d} Study Substitution Table No. 2 and compose as many sentences a$ you can.
e| Use the same sentences in short situations.
85
II. Transcribe the following words and explain the reading rules:
boot, prepare, ball, book, mere, meat, good, store, bread, care, palm, cure,
cold, last, plant, text, exam, rather, germ, hurt, hare, grasp, staff, bald, calf,
chalk, clasp, a talented dancer, a broken branch, a stone wall, a dull day, a
wise man, a cheap car, a big ship, a fat sheep, a naughty girl, a lazy boy, a rare
plant, a strict lady, a cold lake, a birthday present, Bertha's basket, spare time,
pure water.
III. Write the plural form of the following nouns. Transcribe them:
country, saleswoman, match, boy, sister-in-law, man, tooth, handkerchief,
potato, deer, piano, knife, lady, suffix, foot.
IV. Before you start working at the text, practise the sounds in the following
words and word combinations:
1. [A] — cousin, at once, husband, country, London, much,
but, come; [a] — large, aunt, farther, as far as; [ o : ]
— daughter, Georgie, four, North.
2. a) Linking r: yourwaunt, are^in Canada, where^is it,
faraway, as fai^s;
b) No voicing before voiced consonants: Thoma§J3rown, it'sfjust,
it'^jnuch;
c) No devoicing before voiceless consonants: Benny' SLЈOU-sins,
whos^children, Emily' SLfhildren;
d) Loss of plosion: but^granny, micijday.
V. a) Listen to the recording of the text "Doctor Sandford's Family". Mark the
stresses and tunes, b) Practise the text for test reading. Listen to the text very
carefully until you can say it in exactly the same way. c) Listen to the recording of
the dialogue "About Benny's Cousins". Mark the stresses and tunes, d) Practise the
dialogue for test reading. Listen to the text very carefully until you can say it in
exactly the same way. e) Memorize the dialogue and dramatize it.
V. Read the following:
1. VOld Mrs. 'Sandford is 'fifty-veight, | V Helen is 'twenty-xsix, I Doctor
-»Sandford is xthirty. 2. There are a -»lot of, exercise-books, I,pens I and
xpencils on the desk. 3. There are V not so 'many ,parks, 1,gardens | and
^squares in the town. 4. -»Show all the , rivers, |,lakes, | and xseas on the map.
VII. Answer the following questions:
A. 1. Is this a classroom? 2. Are there many desks in it? How many? 3. Are
there any chairs in the room? How many? 4. Are there any lamps in the room?
5. Are they on the walls? 6. How many lamps are there in it? 7. How many
windows are there in the room? 8. What colour are the walls? 9. What colour
are the desks? 10. What colour are the chairs? 11. Is there a blackboard on the
86
wall? 12. What colour is the board? 13. Are there any sentences on it? 14.
How many books are there on your desk? 15. Are they English or Russian?
16. How many exercise-books are there in your bag? 17. Are they thick or
thin? 18. Is this book thick or thin? 19. What is there on this table? 20. What is
there in that box?
B. 1. Is the box on the desk? 2. Are the pencils in the box? 3. Is the bag on
the desk or under it? 4. Is the fountain-pen on the bag or in the bag? 5. Is the
notebook in my hand or under it? 6. Are the notebooks on the desk or under
it? 7. Are the letters on the book or under it? 8. Where is the picture? 9. Where
is the chair? 10. Where are the pens?
C. 1. Is Dr. Sandford's family large? 2. Has he a wife? 3. What is her
name? 4. Has she a sister? 5. Has Dr. Sandford a father? 6. Has he a mother?
7. Has Dr. Sandford a daughter? 8. Has he a son? 9. What is his name? 10. So
how many people are there in Dr. Sandford's family? 11. How old is Dr.
Sandford? 12. How old is Helen? 13. How old is Mrs. Sandford? 14. How
many cousins has Benny? 15. Whose children are Georgie and May? 16.
Where are Benny's cousins?
VIII. a) Write sentences using there is, there are and the words given
below:
1. bus, street; 2. lamp, room; 3. chalk, blackboard; 4. bread, table; 5. tea,
tea-pot; 6. coffee, coffee-pot; 7. money, bag; 8. paper, box; 9. soap, shelf; 10.
water, jug.
b) Make up micro-dialogues with the same sentences.
IX. Fill in prepositions:
1. Don't be late. Come ... nine o'clock. 2. What time is it now? It is half ...
six. 3. We are going to leave ... a quarter ... ten. 4. It is twelve o'clock now.
Come here in ten minutes, ten minutes ... twelve. 5. Is it a quarter ... three? In
a quarter of an hour, ... three o'clock we must be ... the University. 6. He must
work ... seven ... eleven o'clock. 7. They live ... the North ... our country.
X. a) Rewrite the following in the plural:
1. There is a sentence on the blackboard. 2. Is there a desk in the room? 3.
There is not any book on the table. 4. Is there a dictionary on the chair? 5.
There is a match in the box. 6. There is a girl in the picture. 7. There is no
child in their family.
b) Change the sentences using the construction given in Table No. 2 on page 87.
87
XI.
a) Write the interrogative and negative forms of the following
sentences:
1. There is a telegram on the table. 2. There is a cinema near our house. 3.
There are many mistakes in his dictation. 4. There js much paper in his bag. 5.
There are two sofas in the room, i. There are a lot of children in the park
today.
b) Express your surprise asking questions as in the model. Note the
listribution of sentence stress in the replies.
yl о d e 1: There is a dog in the room.
,1s there? Is there -> really a ,dog in the room? I say there vis.
c) Respond to the same statement in the negative.
Л о d e 1: There is a dog in the room.
Oh, no. There is vno dog there.
Are you sure?
Quite.
XII.
The following statements are not true to fact. Correct them.
M o d e l : Doctor Sandford's family is large. No,
that's wrong. It's not large.
1. Doctor Sandford has two sons and one daughter. 2. There are seven
people in Doctor Sandford's family. 3. Doctor Sandford is eighty. 4. There are
many girls and boys for Benny to play with. 5. Benny has no cousins. 6.
Benny's cousins are in Africa. 7. Benny's cousins are schoolchildren.
XIII.
Describe Doctor Sandford's family as if you were Doctor Sandford, his
wife or Benny.
XIV.
Work in pairs. Ask your fellow-student logical questions on the given
statements and answer them.
M o d e l : There are two tables in the room. What's
there in the room? (There are) some tables. How many
(tables are there in it) ? (There are) two.
1. There is a green notebook on the desk. 2. There is little milk in the
bottle. 3. The Browns have a very large family.
4. My parents are at home. 5. Benny's cousins are in the
North of America.
XV.
a) Make questions beginning with What ... and How many ... and answer
them.
88
M o d e l 1: What is there in your street?
M o d e l 2: How many high buildings are there in your street?
1. There are two tables in the room. 2. There are eight notebooks in her
bag. 3. There are ninety-five students in the hall. 4. There is a clock on the
desk. 5. There are twelve cassette-recorders in the laboratory. 6. There are six
sentences in this exercise.
b) Make your own questions on the same models and answer them.
XVI.
a) Make questions beginning with How much ... and answer them.
M o d e l : How much milk is there in the jug?
1. There is a lot of coffee in the coffee-pot. 2. There is a little water in the
glass. 3. There is too much salt in the soup. 4. There is little money in the bag.
5. There is a lot of tea in the tea-pot. 6. There is not much butter on the plate.
b) Make your own questions on the same model and answer them.
XVII.
Translate the following sentences into English:
A. 1. На стене картина. На стене часы. На стене классная доска. На
столе картофель. На столе книги. В кувшине молоко. На тарелке масло.
На столе соль. На доске (написано) предложение. 2. Картина на стене.
Часы на стене. Классная доска на стене. Коробки на столе. Портфели на
столе. Книги на столе. Молоко в кувшине. Масло на тарелке. Соль на
столе. Предложение (написано) на доске. 3. На столе лампа. Лампа на
столе. На столе газеты. Газеты на столе. На улице автомобиль.
Автомобиль на улице. У стены диван. Диван у стены. В коробке
карандаши. Карандаши в коробке. 4. На стуле нет книги. Книга не на
стуле. На стуле нет шляпы. Шляпа не на стуле. На стуле нет тетради.
Тетрадь не на стуле. В коробке нет авторучки. Авторучка не в коробке. В
сумке нет денег. Деньги не в сумке. 5. В портфеле не три книги, а четыре.
В портфеле не пять карандашей, а шесть. В портфеле не две ручки, а
одна. 6. Как раз пора обедать. Как раз пора пить чай.
B. 1. Это моя комната. Посредине комнаты стоит стол. На столе
кувшин. В кувшине молоко. На тарелке масло. 2. Пусть Бенни
садится за стол. Как раз пора завтракать. Молоко в кувшине. Масло
на тарелке. Нож около тарелки. Где хлеб? Хлеб в буфете (sideboard). 3.
Где журнал? На столе нет журнала. Журнал не на столе, а на стуле. 4. В
коробке нет авторучки. Авторучка не в коробке, а в столе. 5. Где деньги?
В сумке нет денег. Твои деньги не в сумке. Они на столе. 6. В твоем
портфеле много тетрадей? — Не очень, две или три. — На доске много
мела? — Да, я так думаю. 7. На вашей улице много домов? — Да, у нас
много красивых новых домов. — В вашем парке много цветов? — Не
очень, но они мне очень нравятся
89
XVIII.
Write 4 examples on each of the models.
M o d e l 1: There is a lot of paper in the box. M o d e l
2: There are a lot of questions to the text.
XIX.
Translate into English the words given in brackets:
1. There is (много) paper on the desk. 2.,There are (много) students in the
classroom. 3. There is (немного) milk in the jug. 4. There are (миотб)
newspapers on the shelf. 5. There is (м&ого} time left. 6. There is (много)4
class="book">butter on the plate. .7. There are (несколько) notebooks in the bagv8. Give me
(немного)'Water, please. 9. Can you give him (несколько) coloured pencils?
10. May I take (несколько) sheets of paper? 11. There are (много) families in
this house. 12.1 have not (много) money. I cannot buy this coat. 13. There are
not (M^STO) sentences in this text. 14. Put (немного] salt into your soup.
XX.
Make up questions as in the models. Add something using the topical
vocabulary to Lesson Six. (People's age).
M o d e l 1: How old is Jane ? — She is twenty. M o d e l 2: How old are
these boys ? — They are eighteen years old.
XXI.
Translate the following into English using the preposition at:
1 В десять часов. 2. В семь часов. 3. В двенадцать часов. 4. В
половине первого. 5. В половине третьего. 6. В половине одиннадцатого.
7. В четверть шестого. 8. В четверть восьмого. 9. В четверть десятого. 10.
Без четверти час. 11. Без четверти три. 12. Без четверти четыре. 13. В
двадцать минут девятого. 14. Без десяти двенадцать. 15. Без двадцати
пяти пять. 16. В десять минут седьмого. 17. Без пяти шесть. 18. Без трех
минут шесть. 19. Без семи девять. 20. Без двадцати восьми три.
ХХП. a) Write down the following numerals in words:
134, 298, 355, 948, 3526, 9011, 193, 561, 7 506 017, 35 616 234.
b) Read the following numerals and telephone numbers quickly:
104, 151, 175, 189, 1012, 1017, 1038, 2568, 4083, 5993, 6410f 10 784,
257 629, 841 403, 2 184 001; 134-86-78, 253-64-92, 289-47-30.
XXIII. Translate the following sentences into English:
1 . Много ли студентов в этой комнате? — Нет, не много. 2. В
середине этой комнаты стол. На столе цветы. 3. В нашей квартире пять
комнат. Они большие и светлые. 4. Где твой брат? — Он в той комнате 5.
На столе нет хлеба. 6. Наш университет находится недалеко от центра 7.
На этой улице много больших домов. 8. В этой комнате много света 9.
90
Олег в 105 группе. 10. Нелли в 102 группе. 11. Борис в 501 группе. 12.
Читайте текст 9 13. Сделайте упражнение 2 на доске. 14. У доски нет
мела. 15. На столе много ручек, карандашей и тетрадей. 16. Есть ли
яблоки на тарелке? 17. Яблоки в корзине. 18. Чашки на столе. 19. Ваш
племянник в школе? — Нет, он дома. 20 В нашей группе не десять, а
девять студентов. 21. На этом столе много коробок? — Нет, не много. 22.
В нашей комнате не три, а четыре окна. 23. Приходите в шесть часов. 24
Возвращайтесь в половине десятого. 25. Джеймс — восьмилетний
мальчик, его сестра — шестилетняя девочка. 26. Скажи мне, пожалуйста,
твой телефон. Пожалуйста. Запиши. 338-29-41. 27. Сыну Питера 7 лет.
Сестре Артура 15 лет Бабушке Тома 68 лет.
XXIV.
a) Write a short composition about your family (your friend's family),
the family of a well-known person you are interested in. b) Make up dialogues using
the topical vocabulary and conversational phrases of Lessons Five, Six, Seven.
XXIV.
a) Bring your family photo in class and get ready to tell your fellow-
students of all the members of your family, b) Ask and answer questions on the
photo. Describe it.
ADDITIONAL PHONETIC EXERCISES
1. Read the exercises several times before the mirror.
2. Record your reading and listen to it, detect your errors.
3. Listen to your fellow-student reading the exercise. Detect his errors
in sounds and intonation and tell him what he must do
to get rid of
them:
из —tea —шэ э -> пз хкэ:пэ 'botl
'rotn
dis — des — duo э -> spes vminU 'dAbl
'psetn
mi3 — тез — тиэ э -> риэг ха&штэ1 'simpl
'hidn
■ndl
fVbidn
LABORATORY WORK
I. a) Listen to the questions and record your answers in the intervals,
d) Listen to the key and correct your mistakes.
II. a) Make the sentences interrogative and negative. Record your sentences.
91
b) Check your sentences with the key.
III. a) Make questions beginning with What ... using the statements, b) Make
questions beginning with How many ... using the combinations of words, c) Make
questions beginning with How much ... using the combinations of words.
IV. Form special questions using the statements. (The questions should be formed
to the given word.)
M o d e l : My sister is at the University, (my sister) Who is at the
University?
V. Listen to the sentences. Supply short questions expressing surprise, doubt.
V. Change, the sentences as in the model.
VII.
Give sentences opposite in meaning to the given ones.
M o d e l : There are a lot of pens in the box. There
are few pens in the box.
VIII.
Listen to the disjunctive questions. They are not true to fact.
Correct them.
Lesson Eight
A
Ph
one A
tics: Сочетания гласных [aid], [аиэ]. Интонационное оформление
слова please и словосочетания Thank you в предложении.
Reading Rules: — Четыре типа слога (сводная таблица).
Text: Our English Lesson.
Grammar: Модальные глаголы can, may, must.
\L \l
[аю, аиэ] — трехэлементные сочетания гласных. Самый сильный и
отчетливый элемент этих сочетаний — первый, самый слабый — второй.
Графически их можно изобразить следующим образом: [aid], [аиэ].
Во избежание замены второго элемента сочетания [а!э] звуками [j]
или [й] не следует поднимать очень высоко среднюю часть спинки языка.
При произнесении сочетания [аиэ] не следует сильно выдвигать губы
и заменять второй элемент сочетания губ-но-губным сонантом [w].
Phonetic Exercise 36
92
fai3 аиэ беэг а- V Паиэг эпс! 'flausz vevnwea
w a i 3 /аиэ taid — 'taisd
>
taisd taus lain — 'laisn laian
раиэ kwait — kwaiat
'ailand — 'aislsnd
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на
слитное произношение слов в предложении.
Phonetic Exercise 37
V kasn hi- *spi:k ,113911/ || jes hi- vkasn | -> пзи hi* vka:nt | -> пзи hi-
vkaenst ||
V m e i ai 'Lvm^in | -> jes ,pli:z | vdu: 'plfcz || jes ju* vmei || хпзи I ju-
vnusnt j its tu: vleit ||
V irust wi* 'rait_jt ,daun | -> jes ju- vnust | its э V veri 'gud vprDV3:b У
хпзи j ju- vntdnt | Vswitf ' DII дэ kavset r^kads | and -> hsn tu- it svgein |
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на:
1. Произношение отрицательной формы глаголов сап и must: cannot, can't
(сокращенная форма), mustn't.
2. Сложные глаголы to come in, to switch on, в которых наречия in и on
обычно ударны
3. Неизменяемое качество звуков [и:] в словах [hi-], |wi-j, [ju-]
Чтение букв i и у в IV типе слога
CONTRACTED FORMS
i+ re [агэ]у + re [aia]fire
admiretyre
\v Буква
Тип \^ слогааоиei/yI[ e i j
name[зи] note[ju:] tune1[i:] me[ a i ] time, typeII[ж]
mapМ not[л] but[e]
pen[ i ]
sit, mythIIIa + r
[о:] parkо + г
[э:] forku + r
[з:] fure + r
[з:] heri/y+ r [з:] girl, myrtleIVа + re
[ез] parentsо + re
[э:] moreu + re
UM pure2e + re
[13]
herei/y + re
[ai3] fire, tyre
1
После звуков [г], [1], [ф]
буква и читается [и:]. Например: rule [nil],
93
plume [plum], June [cfcu:n].
2
После звуков \f\, [ф], [г]
и сочетания согласная + 1 буква и читается
I Заказ 1271
[иэ] Например: sure ЦЪэ], jury
['фиэп], rural ['гиэгэ!], plural ['р!иэгэ1]
4. Использование в отрицательных ответах на вопросы с глаголом must
отрицательной формы другого модального глагола need — needn't
обозначающей необязательность выполнения действия.
TEXT
OUR ENGLISH LESSON
94
T e a c h e r : Good morning, all! Sit down, please! I expect no one is
away?
M o n i t o r : Nobody is. All are present. Ohr sorry, Ann is not here.
T e a c h e r : What's up? Is she ill?
M о n i t о r: It's flu with a high temperature.
T e a c h e r : That's too bad. Well now. Let's begin. We'll check our
homework. Mike, will you take your exercise-book and come to the board?
M i k e : Shall I write the words in transcription?
T e a c h e r : Do. And you, Helen, read Text 7, will you? The others
should write down the mistakes if she has any. Do you follow me? Will you
read a little louder, please. That'll do. Any mistakes noticed?
J u l i a : I believe there's some palatalization in the nouns "family" and
"Benny".
T e a c h e r : That's it. Please, Helen, pronounce the words. Now it's
correct. You must work more. Pronunciation is your weak point, I'm afraid.
H e l e n : Shall I read the text again for the next time?
T e a c h e r : Yes. Have another try and make your reading more
distinct. Now everybody look at the board!
M i k e : Shall I read the exercise?
T e a c h e r : Of course. {Mike reads). Is everything correct, Pete?
P e t e: I think it is.
T e a c h e r : Thank you, Mike. Clean the board, please, and go to your
seat. ( To the monitor). Have we got the headphones ? M o n i t o r : Here
they are.
T e a c h e r : Fine. Let's listen to the new text. Open your books at page
81. Will you please switch on the cassette-recorder? Thank you. t
VOCABULARY NOTES
I expect = I believe = I think to be
away ] -
. , , ' \ from — отсутствовать to be
absent J 3
Обратите внимание на отсутствие оглушения звука [Ь] в слове
absent.
to be present присутствовать (на лекции, собрании и т. д.) What's
up? Что случилось? temperature температура That's too bad. Очень
жаль.
to check (go through) the homework проверять домашнее задание
exercise-book тетрадь
transcription транскрипция. Shall I write it in transcription?
(Следует ли) написать его в транскрипции? Форма Shall I...?
соответствует русской конструкции вопроса, начинающегося с
95
инфинитива глагола. Запомните: Shall I begin? Начинать? Shall 1 read?
Читать? Shall 1 open the window? Открыть окно?
Обратите внимание на употребление количественных числительных
после существительных: Read Text 7. Write Exercise 3. \ртикль в этом
случае не употребляется, а существительное чаще сего пишется с
прописной буквы, за исключением слова раде: ЧоЛ page 81.
to write (put) down записывать to
follow следовать; зд. слушать
louder громче. Предложение Will you read louder? выражает |1росьбу,
несмотря на его вопросительную конструкцию. That'll do. Достаточно,
noticed отмеченный, замеченный palatalization смягчение,
палатализация That's it. Вот именно.
to pronounce произносить; pronunciation произношение weak point
слабое место
have another try попытайтесь (попробуйте) еще раз distinct
отчетливый
headphones наушники, головной телефон Here
they are. Вот они!
to switch on включать; to switch off выключать
cassette-recorder (tape-recorder) магнитофон
TOPICAL VOCABULARY
Classroom
to have classes, after classes, to stay away from classes
Do you have classes on Saturday?
Good moming! Good afternoon! Good-bye!
Sit down. Go to your place. Stand up! Take your seat
Who is on duty today?
Is anybody absent today?
What's the pronunciation (spelling) of the word?
Is this right (correct, wrong)?
Go on reading (writing, retelling)
Don't go so fast! What date is it today? What's the date today? May I come
in? May I go out?
Shall I read (begin, answer your
question) ? What's the English (Russian)
for. .?
Will you repeat it? Can you
(could you) repeat it? Will you pronounce (translate,
spell) it?
Will you say it again (once more)? Please, pronounce (translate,
spell) it. That will do.
Stop talking. Silence, please.
96
Keep silent. No helping (whispering), please, to write a test
to do homework orally (in written form, in writing)
Expressions
to give (to set, to check) homework
to collect (to hand in) exercise-books (homework)
to give in (to give out, to hand out) papers
Come (up) to the blackboard!
to clean the blackboard
Wipe the word (sentence) off.
Let the others see the board.
Don't stand in front of the board.
Speak up!
Ask questions on (about) the text. Put questions to the sentence. May I ask
you a question? May I say it this way? May I put it like this? to make a report
to make a mistake, to correct
mistakes How long is it before the bell? break, in break at the Dean's office
group register; time-table; list of
students chalk; duster, to wet the duster head(ear)phones
to switch on (switch off) the cassette-recorder (tape-recorder)
to wind back = to rewind the tape — to play (back) the tape
to plug in, to unplug, to switch on, to switch off
The lesson is over.
a (student's) record book
an examination card
PHONETIC NOTES
1. Произношение слова please зависит от его места в предложении.
а) В начале предложения (или смысловой группы), оно ударно, но
обычно не образует отдельной смысловой группы. Например:
V Please, Helen, pro'nounce the vwords. |
——.
b) В середине предложения слово please может быть ударно или
безударно, но оно не образует отдельной смысловой группы. Например:
VWill you please 'switch 'on the /tape-recorder?]]
97
с) В конце предложения слово please безударно, не образует
отдельной смысловой группы и произносится с мелодией
предшествующей смысловой группы:
V Will you 'read /louder, please?
2. Обратите внимание на интонацию Thank you. Произнесенное
нисходящим тоном оно выражает искреннюю благодарность. Те же
самые слова, произнесенные восходящим тоном, служат выражением
лишь формально вежливой благодарности:
VWill you please 'switch 'on the ,tape-recorder?|| xThank you.|
STUDY THE FOLLOWING
/Thank you, Mike. | ] -* Go to your xseat. 11
MODAL VERBS
T a b l e No 1
Can
I
He (She) We You Theycan (cannot, can't)write it in transcription, read louder, write
Exercise 5. read English.CanI
he (she) we you theywrite it in transcription? read louder? write Exercise 5? speak
English?
e. g. Can you read louder? — Yes, I can. No, I can't.
Heasks meto
wait for
him.Shetel s
meto do it at
I
once.FatherY
He (She) We You Theymay (may n
o o
u t)t
T a
h ke
e
yathe
sk exercise-book.
meno M
t t a
o y
stay at home.
go
take the headphones.MayI
there
he (she) we you theytake the exerci
al se
on -b
e. o
T ohk?
e
girlstell
stay at home?
menot to stay
take the headphones?
there any
longer.
98
Note. Обратите внимание на слитное написание отрицательной формы
глагола can: cannot.
e. g. May I stay at home? — Do, please. Yes, you may. — I am afraid not.
No, you mustn't.
Note. В отрицательной форме глагол must означает категорическое за*
прещение.
T a b l e No. 3 Must
a
I
must (must not)
forget it. listen
)
He (She)
to him. read this
We You They
book.
b
I
)
he (she)
repeat the nouns?
Must
we
read this book?
you
translate the story?
they
e. g. Must I read this book? — Yes, you must. No, you needn't.
Note. В отрицательных ответах на вопросы с глаголом must используется
отрицательная форма другого модального глагола need — needn't,
обозначающая необязательность выполнения действия.
EXERCISES
I.
a) Study Substitution Tables No. 1, 2, 3 and compose as many
sentences as you can. Let the members of the class ask and answer
questions as in the model. Give a short answer using contracted forms
and add a sentence of your own.
M o d e l : May I stay at home on Saturday?
No, you mustn't. You are to go to your classes.
b) Respond to the negative sentences of your fellow-student as in the model. Use
contracted forms in speech.
M o d e l : I can't write Exercise Three.
You needn't do it now.
99
II.
a) The material below is to be prepared for reading. Mark the
stresses and tunes. Concentrate your attention on the vowel [ае]. b) Let
your fellow-student read this exercise aloud for you to detect his possible
errors in sounds. Tell him what must be done to eliminate them:
[жI 1. That's the man who sat on my hat in the tram. 2. Once there lived a
lad who was always very sad. For he hadn't any mother and he hadn't any dad.
3. Where are you going to, my little cat ? I'm going to
town to buy a hat! What! ? A hat for a cat? A cat in a hat?
Who ever saw a cat in a hat?
III.
Write the following words and phrases in transcription and explain the
reading rules:
share, store, here, cure, fur, term, more, firm, spare, sphere, wire, mere, a
spare moment, a famous painter, a rare ring, the upper teeth, the thick wood,
the first letter, the next room, the full moon, the vast territory.
IV. Before you start working at the text practise the sounds in the following words
and word combinations;
!• [i:] — please, read, believe, weak, clean; [i] — ill, begin, transcription,
distinct, listen, switch; [e] —lesson, present, temperature, let, exercise, check,
text, rest, any, correct; [ae]— absent, bad, palatalization, family, thank.
2. a) Alveolars replaced by dentals: inwthe nouns, at^the board, readjthe
text, cleanjthe board;
b) Loss of plosion: sit-down, reac^Text 7, write-down, nextjime;
c) Clear [I] before [j:]: willwyou take, willwyou please switch on the
cassette-recorder?
V. a) Listen to the recording of the text "Our English Lesson". Mark
the stresses and tunes, b) Practise the text for test reading. Listen to the
text very carefully until you can say it in exactly the same way. c) Me-
morize the text and dramatize it.
VI. Transcribe the following sentences, mark the stresses and tunes.
Read the sentences aloud:
1. Don't go to the cinema tonight. 2. Don't forget. 3. Get us some chalk. 4.
Pronounce the sentence. 5. Find page twenty-nine. 6. Stand up, please. 7.
Good morning, everybody. 8. Sit down, please. 9. Any mistakes noticed? 10.
Is everything correct, Pete? 11. What's the pronunciation of this word? 12. Do
you follow me?
VII. Answer the following questions:
100
A* 1. Can you speak English well? 2. Can you speak French well? 3. Can
you understand Spanish? 4. Can you count the chairs in this room? 5. Can we
write without a pen or a pencil? 6. What can we do with a fountain-pen ? 7.
May I take your textbook? 8. May Helen leave the classroom? 9. May we go
to the pictures? 10. Must we speak English now? 11. What must we have if
we want to write a letter? 12. What must we have if we want to buy
something? 13. What must we use if we want to wash our hands? 14. What
must you do when you have flu? 15. What must you do to make your reading
distinct?
ВЛ. Is this your pen or mine? 2. Whose bag is this? 3. Is this watch yours
or mine? 4. Is that watch hers or his? 5. Is this your room or theirs? 6. Is this
box yours or ours? 7. Is this your desk or their desk? 8. Is this notebook mine
or yours? 9. Is this cassette-recorder ours or theirs?
С. 1. How many students are there in your group? 2. How many students
are absent? 3. How many students are present? 4. Who is the monitor in your
group? 5. What is the monitor's name? 6. Have you got any bag? 7. Where is
your bag? 8. Have you got a ball-pen? Is it a good one? What colour is it? 9. Is
there much chalk at the board? 10. Have you many books at home? 11. Are
there Russian or English books in your bag? 12. Have you got a watch? Is it
right or wrong? 13. Is N's watch fast or slow? 14. Is A's dress black or brown?
15. Is B's ball-pen green or yellow?
VIII. a) Write the interrogative and negative forms of the following sentences:
1. She can spell the noun correctly. 2. You may take your exercise-book. 3.
He can write this in transcription. 4. There are some mistakes in her dictation.
5. My sister has got two interesting magazines. 6. Doctor Sandford is busy in
his study. 7. Spelling is her weak point.
b) Express your surprise at the given statement as in the model.
M o d e l : You may take those pencils. Oh,
may I? Of course, you may.
с) Respond to the same statement in the negative.
M o d e l : You may take those pencils.
Oh, no. I'm afraid, I may not take them.
IX. Work in pairs. Ask your fellow-student logical questions on the
given statements and answer them. Use the modal verbs:
101
1. We have got headphones for the whole group. 2. Everybody must
go to the laboratory today. 3. Mary can help us with the
cassette-recorder.
X. Fill in the missing modal verbs:
1. You ... go out today. It's too cold. 2. Д-Д take your fountain-pen? — Do,
please. 3. We not carry^the bookcase upstairs. It is too heavy. 4. When ... you
come to see us? — I come only tomorrow. 5. Shall I write a letter to him? —
No, you it is not necessary. 6. Mary finish the work at once. 7; :ь you cut
something without a knife? 8. Peter ../return the book to the library. We all
want to read it. 9. Why'.//* not you understand it? It is so easy. lOuu we do the
exercise at once? 1 l/rfЈl)you pronounce this sound?
XI.
a) Write sentences according to the following models using the
words and word combinations given below.
M o d e l 1: Let's begin our morning exercises.
read the text; write on the blackboard; do the exercises; speak to the dean.
M o d e l 2: Shall I write it in transcription ?
clean the blackboard; bring some chalk; do my homework; answer your
question; spell the noun; press the button; pronounce it.
M o d e l 3: Listen to the new song.
the teacher; your fellow-students; the radio, the story; the text; the tune;
the cassette-recorder; the actor.
M o d e l 4: Look at the clock.
the picture; the house; the blackboard; the bird; the child; the lamp; the
cup; the plate.
b) Give sentences of your own using the same models.
c) Make up micro-dialogues, as in the following models. Use the above-
mentioned words and word combinations. Give short answers. Add a sentence or
two of your own.
M o d e l 1: Let's begin our morning exercises.
Yes, let's. (I'm afraid I can't.) In half an hour we must have breakfast.
M o d e l 2 : Shall I write it in transcription?
Do, please. (No, you needn't.) We are to discuss it then.
M o d e l 3 ; Let's listen to the new song.
I'd love to. I'm fond of folk songs.
102
M o d e l 4 : Look at the clock.
Oh, it's beautiful (lovely, ugly, etc.). I'd like to have one.
XII.
a) Make up sentences on the following model. Make your sentences
interrogative and negative.
M o d e l ; We have got skates.
b) Express your surprise at the given statements as in the model.
M o d e l : I have got a cassette-recorder.
Have you really got a new one?
c)
Respond to the same statements in the negative.
M o d e l : I have got a new cassette-recorder.
That can't be true. You haven't got any (cassette-recorder).
XIII.
Make up sentences according to the model.
M o d e l : This apple is mine.
XIV.
Translate the following into English using classroom expressions:
1. Кто сегодня дежурный? — Елена. Сегодня кого-нибудь нет? — Да.
Трех студентов нет. 2. Никто сегодня не отсутствует. Все девять
студентов сегодня здесь. 3. Виктор здесь? — Нет, он отсутствует. 4. Какое
сегодня число? — 15 октября. 5. Можно задать вам вопрос? —
Пожалуйста. — Где комната № 48? — Я не могу ответить на ваш вопрос.
Спросите, пожалуйста, секретаря. 6. Как
по-английски «наушники» («письменный стол», «палатализация»)? 7.
Включить магнитофон? — Да, пожалуйста. Выключить магнитофон? —
Нет, подождите немного. Мне начинать читать? — Да. Стереть с доски?
— Пожалуйста. Открыть окно? — Нет, не надо. Прочитать это
предложение снова? — Да, пожалуйста. 8. Читайте громче, пожалуйста.
Говорите громче, пожалуйста. Пойте громче, пожалуйста. Достаточно. 9.
Повторите предложение два раза. Прочтите текст три раза. 10. Давай
пойдем в деканат во время перерыва. Давай исправим ошибки в
диктанте. 11. Не принесете ли вы классный журнал (мел, тряпку список
студентов, наушники)?
12.
Вы можете сделать это упражнение сегодня? — Да. Вы
можете написать текст сегодня? — Нет. Я не могу написать текст
сегодня.
13.
Эти упражнения трудны. Повторите их. Эти тексты легкие.
Вам незачем повторять их. 14. Можете садиться (идти, начинать читать).
15. Продолжайте читать (писать, говорить, работать). 16. Тише,
пожалуйста. Занятие не окончено. Сколько времени до звонка? — Только
103
две минуты. 17. Как произносится слово «палатализация»
(«транскрипция», «оглушение»)? 18. Как пишется слово
«произношение» («журнал», «достаточно», «отвечать»)? 19.
Поставьте вопросы к тексту. 20. Не подсказывайте, пожалуйста. 21.
Сдайте тетради, пожалуйста. 22. Сначала поставьте кассету, а затем
включите магнитофон. 23. А теперь, пожалуйста, перемотайте кассету.
24. У вас есть занятия в пятницу? — Да, есть, но они кончаются рано. 25.
Можно Бобу не ходить в школу сегодня? — Нельзя. Он должен идти в
школу. 26. Попробуйте еще раз и читайте громче.
XV.
a) Write the following numerals in words:
395, 745, 1950, 13 408, 282 867, 345 296, 5 712 133.
b) Read the following numerals:
273, 1882, 19 176, 30 016, 55 744,81 614, 389 107,6 271 398.
XVI.
a) Ask your fellow-student for permission ...
to go out; to come in; to open the window; to take the newspaper; to read;
to go home; to begin reading; to close the door.
(The person you ask must give any o f the following answers:
Certainly. You may. Do, please. I'm afraid not. You mustn't.)
M o d e l : May I speak to the dean? — You may. May I
leave now? — I'm afraid not.
b) Give your permission to perform the actions given above.
M o d e l : You may speak to the dean.
c) Ask your fellow-students to perform the actions given above. Don't forget to
be polite.
M o d e l : Speak to the dean, please. (Will you speak to the dean?)
d) Ask your fellow-students not to perform the actions given above.
M o d e l : Please, do not smoke here.
XVII.
Arrange short dialogues using modal verbs.
M o d e l s : 1. May I take your pencil? — I'm afraid not, I need it.
Have you got a pen? — Yes, I have. — May I take it? — Certainly. (Of
course, you may.)
104
2. Can you come to see us tonight? — Sorry, I can't, but I can come
tomorrow. — All right.
3. Shall (must) I read this exercise once more? — No, you needn't. That
will do. Your reading is quite good.
XVIII.
Write a short description of your classroom using the construction there
is, there are.
XVIII. Act as a teacher of English. Ask your pupils:
1. to clean the blackboard; to use the duster; to bring some chalk; 2. to tell
you the date; to write it on the board; not to stand in front of the board; 3. to
come up to your desk; to read the text; not to go so fast; to go to his place; 4.
to check homework; to correct the pronunciation or spelling of some word; 5.
to collect the exercise-books and to hand them in; 6. to switch on the cassette-
recorder; to listen to the text; 7. to wind (play) it back; to switch off the
cassette-recorder; 8. to have another try and read distinctly.
XX.
Stage a dialogue between a teacher and a student using class-
room expressions:
1. beginning a lesson; 2. checking homework; 3. reading the text; 4.
writing on the blackboard; 5. listening to the cassette-recorder; 6. giving
homework.
ADDITIONAL PHONETIC EXERCISES
1. Read the exercises several times before the minor.
2. Record your reading and listen to it, detect your errors.
3. Listen to your fellow-student reading the exercises. Detect his errors in
sounds and intonation and tell him what he must do to get rid of them:
'traisl
э feimss xsaiantist
'kwaist
э -> freigrant xvai3lit
'taiarant
э -> k3uld Jaus
ad'maia
э kltn xtau9l
di'zais
э -> frAnt xvau9l
LABORATORY WORK
I. Repeat the sentences after the tape.
105
II. a) Listen to the questions and record your answers in the intervals, b) Listen to
the key and correct your mistakes.
II. a) Make the given sentences interrogative and negative. Record your
sentences, b) Check your sentences with the key.
III.
a) Make questions beginning with Where ... to the given statements, b) Make
questions beginning with When ... to the given statements, c) Make questions
beginning with Why ... to the given statements, d) Make questions beginning with
Whom ... or To whom ... to the given statements.
IV. Listen to the sentences. Supply short questions expressing surprise, doubt.
V. Listen to the sentences. Change the construction using the absolute form of the
possessive prononns.
M o d e l : This is her coat. — This coat is hers.
VII.
Compose sentences on the model using have got or has got
VII.
Translate the sentences into English.
VII.
Listen to the disjunctive questions. They are not true to fact. Correct them.
X. Listen to the poem "The Arrow and the Song" by H. W. Longfel-
low. Mark the stresses and tunes. Read and memorize it.
Lesson Nine
Phonetics: Сочетание [ W 3 ] Интонация обстоятельственной группы Интонация
сложносочиненного предложения
ding Rules: Сводная таблица правил чтения гласных диграфов Чтение диграфов
перед буквой г
Text: Doctor Sandford's House
Grammar: Повествовательно
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на отсутствие
призвука [к] или [д] при произнесении сонанта [д] между гласными
tat — 0o:t — so:t — fat 'WAII ba0 — 'On: ba6z
'wAn mau0 — 'Gri: maudz 'WAII pa0 — '0rL padz
'wAn ju:0 — '0rL* ju:6z
э V sn3U wait vteibl klt)0 | -> redi meid хк1зибг |
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на отсутствие
гласного призвука между согласными при произнесении сочетания [6z]
106
Чтение диграфов перед буквой г
Диграф 4- г
Звук
Примеры
ai + r ei + r ее + г
еа + г
оа + г оо + г ои + г
[еэ]
[»]
[ю] [еэ]
[о]
[из]
[аиэ]
air, chair their
beer, deer near, dear1 bear board poor2 our, flour
1
В некоторых словах диграф еа + г читается [ з ]
Например learn, earth
2
Но в словах door, floor диграф читается [ о ]
107
TEXT
DOCTOR SANDFORD'S HOUSE
Doctor Sandford's house is not large, but it is comfortable and we|l-
planngd. It is a small two-st6reyed cTottdge.
In fron^f the house there is a green ifclWn and a lot of flowers. Behind
it there is a little ordi&Vcf with av ^ew fruit trees in it. On the ground
floor v there is a kitchen, a pantry, a
108
dining-room, a cosy sitting-room and Dr Sandford's study There are
tfisb" several rooms frpstЈrЈ on the first floor the Sand-fords' bedrooms,
109
Grandmother's room, which is also Benny's nursery, Betty's room and the
bathroom
The furniture is modern and quite nЈw But Doctor Sandford sa^ys. he
must pay a lot of money for the house and th^ furniture He must pay fthe
money for many years, before he can call the house his own
VOCABULARY NOTES
comfortable удобный
well-planned хорошо спланированный
two-storeyed двухэтажный
cottage коттедж, загородный дом
in front of перед чем-либо
lawn лужайка, газон
orchard фруктовый сад
the ground floor первый этаж
kitchen кухня pantry
кладовая
dining-room столовая; living-room общая комната (в семье)
cosy уютный
sitting-room гостиная
study кабинет
several несколько
upstairs вверху, вверх
bedroom спальня
nursery детская
bathroom ванная комната
furniture мебель; built-in furniture встроенная мебель modern
современный, модный own собственный
TOPICAL VOCABULARY
Articles o f furniture: bed, sofa, divan-bed, chair,' armchair, dressing
stool, table, bookcase, cupboard, wardrobe, dressing-table, mirror, lamp,
standard-lamp, stool, unit(s), cabinet, bedside cabinet, wall-furniture, suite
Modern conveniences: electricity, gas, running-water, central heating,
telephone, toilet, a rubbish chute, tiled walls, lift
Electric and other equipment: lamp, standard-lamp, upper-lights,
refrigerator (fridge), gas-stove, electric stove, vacuum-cleaner, television-set,
radio-set, music-centre
110
PHONETIC NOTES
1.
О б с т о я т е л ь с т в е н н ы е
г р у п п ы
в начале
предложения, как правило, выделяются в отдельную интонационную
группу и произносятся низким восходящим тоном. Например:
In -> front of the, house.
e j
On the ground, floor. ч j
2. Оба предложения, входящие в состав сложносочиненного
предложения (категорического утверждения), как пра
вило, произносятся нисходящим тоном, что объясняется их
смысловой законченностью. Например:
Doctor V Sandford's1 house is 'not vlarge | but it is vcomfortable.
Большая смысловая взаимосвязь между двумя самостоятельными
предложениями может быть выражена восходящим завершением первого
предложения. Например:
Doctor V Sandford's'house is 'not ,large | but it is ^comfortable.
3. Предложение, вводящее прямую речь, может произноситься как
восходящим, так и нисходящим тоном. Например:
Не ,says: | "I'm from vMoscow." Не vsays: | "Fm from ^Moscow."
При переводе в косвенную речь это предложение обычно не образует
самостоятельной смысловой фуппы. Например:
Doctor V Sandford 'says he must 'pay a1 lot of vmoney.
4. Постепенно нисходящая последовательность ударных слогов может
быть нарушена, если по смыслу необходимо выделить одно из
промежуточных слов (the Broken Descending Scale). Некоторое
повышение тона на ударном слоге выделенного слова сопровождается
дальнейшим постоянным понижением тона последующих слогов.
Например:
Не must Vpay the 'money for trnany vyears now.
— — , — ^
t
111
STUDY THE FOLLOWING
T a b l e No. 1 STATEMENTS I N INDIRECT SPEECH
I
he is a good student.
say
We You
she can speak English well.
tell him
They
(that)
the students must work more at
He She
says tells
their pronunciation.
me
Tom must be in Room No. 7.
Direct Speech
Indirect Speech
Tom says: "I have a few Eng- Tom says he has a few English
lish books." Betty says: "I am a writer." Bob says: "There are three
rooms in our flat."
books. Betty says she is a writer. Bob says there are three rooms
in their flat.
EXERCISES
I. Study Substitution Table No. 1 and compose as many sentences as
you can.
II. Read the following words and word combinations and explain the reading
rules:
a) weight, lain, coin, play, neighbour, neutral, grew, pie, pool, took, toy,
autumn, how, know, narrow, true, group, bread, peace, feel, dare, mere, where,
sore, ore, nasty, salt, lure, sure, jerk, jaw, fruit, foe, paw, hair, dear, chair, peer,
learn, car, moor;
b) a white bear; a poor fellow; a new dish; a low couch; a big mouth; a
narrow path; a broken chair; an old gypsy; chilly weather; brown bread; good
maize; bitter beer; fresh air; red hair; bad flour; repeat each word; correct
these mistakes; close the window; take the pill.
III.
The material below is to be prepared for reading. Mark the stresses and
tunes. Concentrate your attention on the vowel [зи]. Let your fellow-student read this
exercise for you to detect his possible errors in sounds:
|зи] 1. Oh, no, don't go home alone, nobody knows how
lonely the road is.
112
2. Soames never boasts of what he knows. But Rose never knows of what
she boasts.
3. As you sow you shall mow.
4. Little strokes fell great oaks.
5. If many men knew what many men know, If many men went where
many men go,
If many men did what many men do.
The world would be better — I think so, don't you?
2. a) No devoicing before voiceless consonants: Sand-ford'sjhouse,
is_comfortable, Sandfordjsays.
b) Alveolars replaced by dentals: andj:he rooms, and J:he bathroom.
b) Loss of plosion: fruitjtrees, but^Doctor, mustj^ay.
c) No glottal stop: in frontjsf, there is_a green lawn, is^also, his_own.
1. [ d ] — doctor, not, modern, following, long;W— lawn, also,
cal , before, orchard;[зи]— cosy, also, only, own, so; ,[35]—
Sandford, pantry, grandmother;[u:]— rooms, two, fruit;[ai]—
behind, dining-room, quite;[з:]— nursery, furniture;[e]— Betty,
bedroom, every, many;[au]— house, downstairs.
V. a) Listen to the recording of the text "Doctor Sandford's House". Mark the
stresses and tunes, b) Practise the text for test reading. Listen to the text carefully
until you can say it in exactly the same way.
VI. Transcribe the following sentences. Mark the stresses and tunes:
1. Behind Doctor Sandford's house there is a small orchard. 2. He says: "I
have a good television-set." 3. The house is not large, but it is comfortable.
VII. Answer the following questions:
A. 1. Is Doctor Sandford's house large? 2. What is there in front of the
house and behind it? 3. What rooms are there in the house? 4. What kind of
furniture is there in the house? 5. Is it Doctor Sandford's own house?
B. 1. Is your flat large or small? 2. How many rooms are there in your flat?
3. What do you call a room people sleep in? 4. What do you call a room
113
people have meals in? 5. What do you call a room where a person studies,
reads, writes, etc.? 6. What do you call a room where children sleep, play and
have meals? 7. What do you call a room where people spend time after dinner
or supper (where guests are received)? 8. What do
you call a room where food is cooked? 9. What do you call a room where
food is kept? 10. Is your flat comfortable and cosy?
11.There is a green lawn in front of your house, isn't there?
12.
Are there any fruit trees in your garden? 13. Is your house old or
new? 14. What colour are the walls in your flat? 15. What articles of furniture
are there in your parents' bedroom (the dining-room, your father's study, your
own room)? 16. There are many new houses in your street, aren't there? 17.
Have you got a rubbish chute in you flat to carry rubbish down? 18. Have you
got built-in furniture in your flat? 19. Has she got a unit in her room?
С. 1. Can you read English? 2. Can you speak French? 3. Who can answer
my question? 4. Where can I find this book? 5. You can transcribe this word,
can't you? 6. You can't speak German, can you? 7. May I ask you a few
questions? 8.MayIgo out? 9. May I open the window? 10. May I take your
book? 11. Must I translate this text? 12. Must we learn this poem by heart? 13.
Must I put this book into the desk? 14. What must I read now? 15. (At) What
time must I come home? 16. We can't go to the skating-rink at four, can we?
VIII. Write in words:
a) 122,2 489,1 963,1 844; 11 389,20 856; 119 922.
b) M o d e l : 3.15 — It's a quarter past three.
5.05; 3.25; 6.30; 3.35; 11.40; 10.15; 9.20; 5.10; 4.45; 7.05; 7.55; 8.50.
IX. a) Chance the following sentences into interrogative and negative:
1. There are some fruit trees in front of my house. 2. There is a study in
our flat. 3. It is a difficult text. 4.1 have a room of my own. 5. We can go out
for a walk now. 6. You may open the window. 7. The students must learn this
dialogue by heart. 8. Mr. Sandford must pay much money for his house. 9.
You must switch off the cassette-recorder.
b) Ask one another questions on the statements above and answer them in the
negative. Mind the distribution of sentence-stress in the replies.
M o d e l : The walls of our kitchen are tiled.
Are the walls of your kitchen tiled ? No, they xaren4
tiled.
X. a) Form all possible questions to which the following sentences are the
answers, b) Each sentence states a certain fact. Find some more details about it by
asking questions. Work in pairs:
114
1. There are eight fruit trees in our garden. 2. Mr. Sandford is the head of
the family. 3.1 can answer this question. 4. My brother can speak French. 5.
You may ring me up tonight. 6. We may go home now. 7. They must prepare
this poem for phonetic reading. 8.1 must work much at my pronunciation. 9.
On the right you can see a standard-lamp.
XL Fill in the missing words:
1. There is no ... in my flat. 2. There are many fruit trees in our . . . . 3.
There is a green ... in front of his Institute. 4. Where is you father? — He is
working in the . . . . 5. My sister's room is very .... 6. Is this your ... book? 7.
The furniture in my brother's room is quite.... 8. The floor is covered with a
beautiful thick.... 9. A... serves to carry rubbish down.
XII.
a) Ask your fellow-student questions on pictures on p. 114—115. Work in
pairs, b) Describe the pictures.
XII.
Fill in prepositions if necessary:
1. It is a quarter ... ten (10.15). 2. I must get up ... half past six. 3. He must
be back ... half... an hour. 4. May I come ... an hour? 5. You needn't work
late ... night. 6. May I finish this translation... the morning? 7. What's the
time ...your watch? — It is half... nine. — Your waWh is slow, I am afraid.
You must set it right. It is already a quarter ... ten. 8. Picture No. 6 is ... page
20. 9. Where is Ann? — She must be ... home. 10. Which day. . the week is
Sunday? 11. It's time ... a break, I believe. 12. Open your books... page 98.
XIV.
Fill in some, no, {not) any, {not) much, little, a little, [not) many, few, a
few, a lot of*
1. I have ... work today. 2. I should like to have ... milk for breakfast. 3.
Mary ha^Jriends at the Institute. 4. There are ... boys in Group Two. 5. Can
you give me... English books? 6. Are there ... fruit trees in your orchard? 7.1
have ... spare time today. 8. Who can give the boy ... pencils? 9.1 must ask you
... questions about your studies. 10. Have I ... mistakes in spelling? 11. Are ...
students away from the lesson? 12.1 hope, I have ... mistakes in my
translation.
XV.
Change the following sentences using the given model.
M o d e l : Can you show me the room of your sister? Can you show me
your sister's room?
1. May I see the book of John? 2. Will you come to the birthday party of
my daughter? 3. You must read all the novels by Dickens. 4. He must check
the work of his students. 5. Who can tell me the address of the Smiths? 6.
There are all modern conveniences in the flat of my mother-in-law. 7. May I
have a book from the library of your father? 8. Where can I listen to the music
of Prokofiev? 9. Is there any built-in furniture in the flat of your cousin?
115
XVI.
Complete the sentences. Observe the low rising ^>ne in adverbial groups:
1. In the middle of the room ... . 2. On the walls ... . 3. On the left . . . . 4.
To the right of the fridge . . . . 5. Next to the door ... . 6. In front of the house 7.
Next to the writing-table ... . 8. I n the bathroom . . . . 9. In the kitchen ... . 10.
Upstairs . . . .
XVII.
Fill in the missing modal verb:
1. My sister can read English but she ... not read German. 2. Who ... recite
this poem? 3. ... I smoke here? — I am afraid not. 4. ... I pay for these books
"at once? — No, you needn't. You ... pay for them in a day or two. 5. The
lesson is over. We ... go home now. 6. ... 1 take your dictionary? — Do,
please. 7. Must we translate this article in class? — No, you you'll do i t a t
home. 8. You ... find our dean upstairs, 9. ... I see your father's study? 10.
What kind of furniture ... you see in the sitting-room? 11. You ... take a cold
shower every morning. 12. ... I come to see you tomorrow at ten o'clock?
13. ... you do this translation in the morning? 14. I ... be a t the Institute a t
eight. 15. It is dark. You ... draw the curtains.
XVIII.
Think of stimulating phrases to which the phrases below are the replies:
1. Do, please. (Yes, please.) 2. I am afraid not. 3. No, you (he, she, they)
mustn't. 4. No, you needn't. 5. Yes, I (she, h e we, they) can. 6. No, I (she, he,
we, they) can't. 7. That's too bad.
XIX. Supply short replies stimulating further talk. Work in pairs.
M o d e l : You can go now. — ,Can I?
1. You can stop here. 2. You may rest in the garden. 3. You must telephone
him at once. 4. You can turn off the gas. 5. You may listen to the radio. 6. You
may stay with us. 7. You must go to the lab today. 8. You must read the text
again. 9. You can go home now.
XX.
Translate the sentences into English:
1. Перед нашим домом много цветов. 2. Наша квартира на втором
этаже. 3. Можно мне поговорить с вами сейчас, или я должна прийти
завтра? 4. Могу ли я купить этот приемник? 5. Квартира моей сестры
очень удобная и уютная. 6. Есть ли в вашей квартире кладовая? — Нет. 7.
В этой квартире две комнаты и кухня.
8. Можно ли детям пойти на каток? — Нет, уже слишком поздно.
9. Могу ли я поговорить с преподавателем? — Да. 10. Должна ли я
отвечать вам сейчас? — Нет. Вы можете это сделать завтра. 11. В спальне
моих родителей две кровати, кресло, два стула и туалетный столик. 12. У
116
вас есть телевизор? — Нет. — А холодильник? — Да, есть. 13. Вы
можете почистить (to clean) ковер пылесосом. Это очень легко. 14. Мне
нравится мебель в вашей квартире. Она совсем новая и вполне
современная. Вы должны только купить ковер и торшер для столовой. 15.
Я живу в новом доме. В нашей квартире есть все удобства:
электричество, газ, водопровод, центральное отопление, мусоропровод и
телефон. 16. В вашей ванной комнате есть зеркало? 17. У вас дома есть
английские книги? — Нет. 18. Вы не можете мне позвонить (to ring up)?
— У меня нет телефона. 19. Вы должны исправить все ошибки в
переводе. 20. Кто муж твоей сестры? — Он врач. 21. На ком женат твой
брат? — Он женат на моей приятельнице. — Какее зовут? — (Ее зовут)
Елена. — Сколько ей лет? — (Ей) двадцать лет. — Кто она по
профессии? — (Она) машинистка. 22. В вашем саду есть цветы? — Нет,
в нашем саду нет цветов, но есть несколько фруктовых деревьев. 23. Есть
ли студенты в комнате 20? — Нет. Они должны прийти туда через
полчаса. 24. Который сейчас час? — Половина шестого. — Ваши часы
спешат. Сейчас только четверть шестого. 25. У меня есть немного
свободного времени. Я могу пойти на каток. 26. На столе есть молоко? —
Да, немного.
XXI.
a) Use the following sentences in indirect speech according to the given
model. Make all the necessary changes.
M o d e l : Bob says: "I can skate well." — Bob says he can skate well.
b) Imagine you are telling someone about what is said in the sentences below.
Your fellow-student is to express agreement as in the model.
M о d e 1: He says he has no earphones. — No, he hasn't.
1. He says: "This sentence is not difficult." 2. Mary says: "There is only
one window in our classroom." 3. John says: "There aren't many fruit trees in
our Institute garden." 4. Betty says: "Doctor Sandford isn't in." 5. Doctor
Sandford says: "My family is not large." 6. Helen says: "I have only one son."
7. Mrs. Sandford says: "Benny is an only child in the family." 8. Benny says:
"Our house is not large." 9. The student says: "I cannot speak English well."
10. Betty says: "I must learn many poems by heart." 11. The teacher says: "It
is two o'clock. Our classes are over." 12. The mother says: "Tom must come
home at a quarter^ to three." 13. The father says: "I must work till late at night
to-4 day." 14. Bob says: "I can come in the morning." 15. Nick says: "My sister
is married to a sailor."
XXII.
a) Find a picture on the topic "The Flat I Live in" for your discussion
in class. Prepare 8—10 questions which would help your fellow-students to describe
the picture, b) Ask another student or the students of your group in turn about the
flat they live in. c) Ask your friend what pieces of furniture there are in his sitting-
117
room. Ask your fellow-student a few questions about his new flat, d) Suggest a
situation for your fellow-students to give it in the form of a dialogue.
XXIII.
a) Speak on the topic "The Flat I Live in", b) Make up short dialogues
on the topic, c) Describe the rooms in the memorial house o f some distinguished
person (a writer, a composer) you have lately visited, d) Describe the flat you live in
or your friend lives in.
ADDITIONAL PHONETIC EXERCISES
1. Read the exercises several times before the mirror.
2. Record your reading and listen to it, detect your errors.
3. Listen to your fellow-student reading the exercises. Detect his errors in
sounds and intonation and tell him what he must do to get rid of them:
sir) э xsrjrj
-» дзиц) лр дэ vstri:t
straik э Ngnrj
~» lukirj at дэ vpiktfa
Vplei э 'geim 3V pirj vprjrj -» W3:kirj at дэ хргоЫэт
W3:k — wo:k — W3uk W3:l — W D :1 —
W3uld W3:m — wo:m — w3US9m
LABORATORY WORK
I. a) Repeat the sentences after the tape, b) Make them interrogative and
negative.
I. a) Listen to the words, translate them, write them down, transcribe them, b)
Check your spelling and transcription with the key. Correct your mistakes if you
have any.
II. Listen to the questions. Give full answers (affirmative, negative) in the
intervals.
IV. a) Translate the sentences into English, b) Check your sentences with the key.
V. Listen to the disjunctive questions. They are not true to fact. Correct them.
VI. a) Listen to the text "Our Sitting-Room", b) Write down the text, mark the
stresses and tunes. Read it. c) Pick out words, phrases, sentences, which can be used
in the topic "The Flat I Live in", d) Listen to the text again and answer the questions
in the intervals.
118
Lesson Ten
( X
Phonetics: Ассимилятивные сочетания. Интонация восклицательных
предложений. Text: Mr. White Comes Again
Grammar: The Present Indefinite Tense. Общий вопрос в косвенной речи
Предлоги времени
Phonetic Exercise 41
raitirj э vleta
-» veri vwel
ri:dirj э xnnv(a)l
wot xvau3l
brnirj э vp3Uim
э -» swi:t vvois
si:irj эп хорэгэ haus
Vwr>t 'fain xv3:siz
widaut senrj э Nw3:d
ts win э xvikt(a)n
-> wnt iz бэ vwe6a laik беэг in ,wint9 | its -+ kwait vwo:m |
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на:
1 Отсутствие призвука [к] или lg] в звуке [о] перед гласным.
2 Различие в положении губ при произнесении двугубного [w] и губно-зубного
[v],
3 Оглушение [w] в положении после глухих согласных, например, [kwanj.
3. Фразовое ударение в предложениях.
Phonetic Exercise 42
mai -* redwXpensl
gl«dwts xsi: ju*
jo* -* wi:kwXpnint
ai wr>ntwtu* xa:sk ju*
из* J"o:twXk3ut
hi* haezntwXgi>t it
hiz greitwXtrAbl
Jr ~* dAzntwXti:tf h3*
беэг 3uldwXklt>k
-* nr>twXnau
-* letwmi xsi:
-> raitwXnau
ai -* d3untwXn3u
str>pwXme3n
wi -* d3untwXlaik it
-> leit 3t_vnait
hi -* dAznt^b'n "it
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на: 1. Потерю
взрыва первым согласным перед другим смычным согласным на стыке слов
2 11аличие латерального и носового взрывов па стыке слов 3. Фразовое ударение
в предложениях.
119
T E X T MR. WHITE COMES AGAIN
It is Saturday afternoon. Doctor Sandford is in his study. Betty knocks.
"Come in, please. What is it, Betty?" *"Mr. White wants to see you,
Henry." '"Well, yes. Show him in please." (Mr. White enters.) '"Good
afternoon, doctor." • "Good afternoon, Mr. White."
"I'm terribly sorry to trouble you."
"That's all right. Glad to see you. Sit down, please. What can I do for
you?" ч "Do you receive the Times'?" "Certainly."
"Would you like to have it for the next year?"
"Oh, I forget. We never remember such things in time. Must I pay
anything right now?"
"No you needn't. For the present, you can sign this paper. Here you are."
"Where do I sign?"
"Here, please. Thank you, doctor.
"Well, Mr. White. It's five o'clock. You'll have some tea with us, won't
you?"
"Thank you. I'd be glad to."
"Let's go to the dining-room. This way, please."
VOCABULARY NOTES
to knock стучать
What is it? В чем дело?
Show him in. Просите его сюда.
What can I do for you? Чем могу быть вам полезен?
to receive получать
to remember помнить, вспоминать
in time вовремя
right now сразу же, тотчас же
for the present пока, на этот раз
to sign подписывать. Where do I sign? Где мне подписаться?
Here you are. Вот, пожалуйста! There are several equivalents for the
Russian word «пожалуйста». 1. Please is used when we ask for smth. or about
smth., e. g. Please give me your fountain-pen. Have some more salad, please.
2, Here you are is used in answer to some request. It is said by someone giving
smth. he has been asked for, e. g. Please give me another cup of coffee. —
Here you are. 3. The expression not at all (пожалуйста, не стоит) is an answer
to smb.'s thanks, e. g. Thank you for helping me. — Not at all. That's all right.
120
You'll have some tea with us, won't you? He выпьете ли Вы с нами чаю?
This way, please. Сюда, пожалуйста.
TOPICAL VOCABULARY
Months: January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August,
September, October, November, December
The Days o f the Week: Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday,
Thursday, Friday, Saturday.
e. g. What's the date today? — Today is Friday, the seventeenth of March
(or March the seventeenth) nineteen eighty-four (Friday, March 17th, 1984).
What day is it? — It is Monday.
CONVERSATIONAL PHRASES
Asking for Information
Question Techniques: I wonder if you could help me. I'd like to know
(where I could get this book). Could you possibly (tell me about it). I wonder
if you could tell me (where he lives). Do you happen to know (when the train
is coming).
Answering Techniques: Well, let me see; Well now; Oh, let me think
for a moment; I'm not sure, I'll just have to find out; I'm glad you asked me
that; That's a very good question; I'm terribly sorry, I really don't know; I've
no idea, I'm afraid.
PHONETIC NOTES
1. Вводное слово well, употребляемое в начале предложения, часто
образует самостоятельную интонационную' группу и произносится
восходящим тоном. Например:
/Well, Mr. White, | it's -> five o\clock.
2. Восклицательные
предложения (exclamations) обычно
произносятся нисходящим тоном при несколько расширенном диапазоне.
Например:
'Certainly!
^ . .
3. Предлог, следующий за последним ударным словом интонационной
группы, имеет полную нередуцированную форму. Например:
What can I do for you? [-> wot кэп ai xdu: fo- ju ]
STUDY THE FOLLOWING
121
T a b l e No 1
PREPOSITIONS OF TIME
attwo o'clock, half past three, night, noononSunday, Monday, May
the first, the second of JuneinJanuary, February, March spring,
summer, autumn 1949
the morning, the evening, the afternoon
Следующие обстоятельства времени употребляется без предлога:
this morning, this afternoon, this evening, tonight; yesterday morning,
yesterday afternoon, yesterday evening, last night;
tomorrow morning, tomorrow afternoon, tomorrow evening, tomorrow
night.
THE PRESENT INDEFINITE TENSE
attwo o'clock, half past three, night, noononSunday, Monday, May the
first, the second of JuneinJanuary, February, March spring, summer,
autumn 1949
the morning, the evening, the afternoon
Примечание. Суффикс -(e)s глагола в 3-м лице единственного числа
произносится [ г ] после гласных и звонких согласных — sees [si z], builds |bilz) [s|
после глухих согласных — wants [wonts], [iz] после ширящих и свистящих согласных
— teaches ftfctfiz]
Table No. 2
122
b
Do
I
like
English?
)
we
Moscow?
you
winter?
they
our University? this poem?
Mary and Tom
to skate?
Does
he (she) Mary
to read English books?
c
I
do not (don't)
like
)
We
You
They
German, our study,
Mary and Tome
winter, this poem, to
He (She) Mary
does not
skate, to go out in the
(doesn't)
evening.
CONTRACTED FORMS
Do you study English? — No, I don't. Does he study
English? — No, he doesn't.
T a b l e No. 3 GENERAL QUESTIONS IN INDIRECT
SPEECH
I
WeYouaskthe weather is fine.theyMary speaks English.Mary and Tomiffather is free on
Sunday.(whether)Tom likes to play chess.
He (She)the children can skate well.MaryasksThe boy
Глаголы, оканчивающиеся на -s, -ss, -sh, -ch, -xr -z, принимают в третьем
лице единственного числа окончание -es [iz]: I pass — he passes; 1 teach —
he teaches.
Окончание -es в глаголе groes читается как [ z ] : I go — he goes [g3uz].
123
Глаголы, оканчивающиеся на букву -у, которой предшествует согласная,
меняют букву у на i и принимают окончание -es: to study — he studies.
Если букве -у предшествует гласная, буква у не меняется: to stay — he
stays.
Memory $0or$-
Solomon Grundy
Solomon Grundy Born on Monday, Christened on Tuesday,
Married on Wednesday, J31 on Thursday, Worse on Friday, Died
on Saturday, Buried on Sunday, That was the end of Solomon
Grundy.
* * *
Thirty days have September, April, June and November, All the rest have
thirty-one; February has twenty-eight alone, Excepting leap-year, that's the time
When February's days are twenty-nine.
EXERCISES
I. Study Substitution Table 2 and compose as many sentences as you can.
II. Read and transcribe the following words. Explain the reading rules:
did — deed, had — hard, lick — leak, hip — heap, dear — ieer, lad — lard,
Mary — marry, hail — hear, sill — seal, bear —
beer, lip — leap, pit — pat, hill — heal, chair — cheer, bad — ,l bard, fill —
feel, marry — merry, ship — sheep, taught — tap — tape, pen — pain — pale, fit
— foot — fate, dive — dove — dame, daisy — lazy — darling.
III. Copy the following words and arrange them in columns according '
to the corresponding type of syllable:
stamp, write, stir, bench, tulip, Arthur, button, mule, lace, typist, fare, dark,
cure, burn, here, muff, fine, mere, lace, cube, purse, tires, fade, prepare, mass,
system.
IV.
Spell and transcribe the 3rd person singular of the following
verbs:
come, go, play, write, wash, stress, begin, catch, cut, eat, hang, get, relax, hold,
know, lead, meet, ring, think, understand, work, change, open, push, kiss, study,
stay, copy, say, carry, watch.
124
V. The material below is to be prepared for reading. Mark the stress-
es and tunes. Concentrate your attention on the sound [з:]. Let your fel-
low-student read the exercise aloud for you to detect his errors:
[з:] 1. A little girl with a pretty curl.
2. Learn thirteen words of Lesson Thirty.
2. The first word is a verb and the third word is ari adverb. \
3. First come first served.
4. One good turn deserves another.
5. As the workman so is the work.
VI.
Before you start working at the text practise the sounds in the
following words and word combinations:
1.
— see, receive, read, needn't, please, tea;
[ae]— Saturday, Sandford, glad, can, family, thank, have; [e] — enter, present,
let, anything, pleasure, well; [u] — knock, what, doctor, clock. Nasal plosion:
needn't, certainly.
2. a) No devoicing before voiceless consonants: his ^study,
havewtea;
b) No voicing before voic&d consonants: let's^go, this_way;
c) Loss of plosion: glad_to see you, sit_down, whatwcan I do, likewto have it;
d) No glottal stop: Saturdaywafternoon, Sandfordwiswin, comewinf whatwis^it,
show him^in, Mr. White^enters.
VII.
a) Listen to the recording of the dialogue "Mr. White Comes Again". Mark the
stresses and tunes, b) Practise the dialogue for test reading. Listen to the recording very
carefully until you can say it in exactly the same way. c) Memorize the dialogue and
dramatize it.
VIII. Read the following exclamations:
1. You are right! 2. It's excellent! 3. How nice! 4. She is here! 5. They are
ready! 6. We can ask him!
IX.
Pronounce the following phrases with the low-rising tone and
then with the falling-rising tone:
1. Satisfactory?
2. On Saturday?
3. Mr. Robertson?
4. In Moscow?
5. In London?
125
6. Next year?
7. To the North?
8. Again
9. At night
10.
Today?
11.Now?
12.
X. Transcribe the following sentences, mark the stresses and tunes, picture them on
the staves:
1. Good afternoon, Doctor? 2. What can I do for you? 3. Come in, please. 4.
Show him in, Betty. 5. Have tea with us. — Thank you. I'd be glad to.
XI. Answer the following questions:
A. 1. Where is Mr. Sandford on a Saturday afternoon?
2. Who comes to see Doctor Sandford on a Saturday afternoon?
3. What does Mr. White ask Doctor Sandford about? 4. Why does Mr. White
call on Doctor Sandford? 5. Doctor Sandford signs the paper, doesn't he? 6. What
do they do in England at 5 o'clock in the afternoon?
B. 1. Do you like English? 2. You speak English well, don't you? 3. Where do
you study English? 4. Does your brother go to the Institute every day? 5. Your
classes begin in the morning, don't they? 6. Where do you prepare your lessons? 7.
What does your brother do in the evening? 8. What foreign language does your
mother speak? 9. What do you write on the blackboard with?
C. 1. What's the date today? 2. What day is it? 3. What is the first (second,
third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh) day of the week? 4. What is the first (second,
third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth, tenth, eleventh, twelfth) month of
the year? 5. Which month is November? 6. Which month is June? 7. Which month
is December? 8. When do your studies at the University begin? 9. When do the
winter examinations begin? 10. When do the summer examinations begin?
XII.
a) Make the following sentences interrogative and negative. :
b) Ask one another questions on the following statements and answer ■
them in the negative. Keep moving this exercise rapidly.
M o d e l : Mr. White wants to see you.
126
Does Mr. White want to see me? No, he doesn't.
1. Mr. White and Betty enter the room. 2. Mr. White wants to see Doctor
Sandford. 3. You can sign this paper. 4. I know some of these names. 5.1 can do
something. 6. The walls of my room are light-green.
XIII. Write questions to the words in bold type and let your fellow-student answer
them. Observe the distribution of stress in the replies:
1. There are twelve months in a year. 2. There are thirty days in June. 3. She
is twelve. 4. My brother's friend can skate well 5. He is a doctor. 6. We call it a
bedroom. 7. I like to read English books. 8. It is the first of October. 9. It is
Thursday. 10. On the right I can see a bookcase.
XIV. a) Form all possible questions to which the following sentences are the
answers:
1. There are some newspapers on the desk. 2. We have tea at five o'clock. 3. I
have two English lessons on Monday. 4. My parents live in Moscow. 5. My father
is a doctor. 6. My father works at a hospital. 7. He is forty-five. 8. All the
members of my family read this paper. 9. I can come and see you on Friday. 10.
You may sign this paper tomorrow.
b) Each sentence states a certain fact. Find some more details about it by asking
questions. Work in pairs.
XV.
Write in words and read:
9/IV 1946; 8/V11 1924; 1/1X 1827; 12/X 1955; 4/1 1949; 11/II 1918.
XVI.
Fill in somebody [someone), anybody [anyone), nobody [no one) everybody
[everyone), somethingr anything, nothing, everything:
1. Is there ... on the desk? 2. The door is open. There must be ... at home. 3.
There is ... wrong with my fountain-pen. It won't write. 4. A blind man cannot
see ... . 5. Is there ... in the room? — Yes, there is ... in it. 6. It is too dark here, I
cannot see ... . 7. If there is ... in the room you may turn off the light. 8. Can ...
recite the poem? 9. We must do ... to help her. 10. Can I do ... for you? 11. There
must be ... interesting in the book you read. 12. It is too dark, I can't see ... on the
blackboard. May I turn on the light? 13. We can work in Room No. 20. There is ...
there.
14.
Let's go there at once. I want to see ... with my own eyes.
15.
May I come to see you tonight? I've got ... to tell you.
16.
Bob is one of our best students, .. knows him. 17. Must we learn ... by
heart? — No, you needn't. You must only prepare the poem for test reading. 18.
There is ... interesting in this magazine. 19. Is ... away from the lesson?
XVII. Fill in prepositions if necessary:
127
1. He must go to St. Petersburg... spring. 2. We take our written exams ...
January. 3. Our studies begin ... autumn. 4. What do you do ... Sunday? 5. All the
students of our group will take part in the concert... the eighth ... May. 6. May I
ring you up ... the morning? 7, My elder brother is a doctor. He often comes ...
home late ... night. 8. Is there anybody. . the Dean's office? 9.1 must go and see
him ... three o'clock ... Friday. 10. Listen ... the new text... the laboratory. 11. Look
... the blackboard. Do you see any mistakes ... it? 12. Who is ... duty today? 13.
Will you go... the blackboard? 14. You may go ... your place. 15. ... the right... the
dining-table there is a cupboard.
XVTII. Fill in the definite or indefinite article if necessary:
1. There are three rooms and ... kitchen in her new flat. 2. My new dress is
made of... silk. 3. If you want to write something on ... blackboard, you must
have ... piece of ... chalk. 4. Are there any students in ... Room No. 12? 5.1 have ...
new English book. ... book is very interesting. 6. There is ... garden and ... lawn in
front of her Institute.... garden is not large, but it is very beautiful. 7. The students
of your group must be in ... Room No. 30. 8. Open ... book at page 29 and start
reading. 9. May is ... fifth month of the year. 10. Saturday is ... seventh day of the
week. 11. Sunday is... day off.
XIX. Think of stimulating phrases to which those below could be the replies. Work
in pairs:
1. Here you are. 2. Show her in, please. 3. Thank you, I'd be glad to. 4. Do
they? 5. Are you? 6. Do, please. 7. Certainly. 8. Here, please.
XX.
Think of replies to the following questions and statements. Work in pairs:
1. Yes, Helen. What is it? 2. Good afternoon, Helen! 3. What can I do for you?
4. Sign this paper, please. 5. Let me see this book. 6. Have tea with us. 7. Thank
you. 8. May I ring you up tonight?
XXI.
a) Respond to the following sentences as in the model below. Express
surprise or doubt in your replies and add something to develop a situation.
M o d e l : I don't like autumn., Don't you?
b) Continue the exercise suggesting your own verbal context:
1. I am very busy. 2. Tom is already ten. 3. You are late. 4. You have no
mistakes in pronunciation. 5. I can't speak French well. 6. We must stay at home.
7. You may go home. 8. I live in a comfortable flat now. 9. My sister wants to
study German. 10. They don't make many mistakes in spelling. 11. We have got
built-in furniture in the kitchen. 12. My girl-friend has got flu, I am afraid.
128
XXII.
Use the following questions in indirect speech according to the given model.
Make all the necessary changes.
M o d e l : The teacher asks: "Do you know any English words?" The teacher
asks if we know any English words.
1. Tom asks: "Do you know English well?" 2. She asks: "Do you like to
skate?" 3. My friends ask: "Are you free on Sunday?"
4. The student asks: "Have you any English books at home?"
5. She asks: "Do you want to read this book?" 6. The teacher asks: "Are there
any mistakes in spelling on the blackboard?" 7. The student asks: "Are there any
mistakes in my pronunciation?" 8. The teacher asks me: "Do you know any poem
by heart?" 9. Mary asks me: "Do you know many English words?"
10.
Betty asks Tom: "Must you go to the Institute today?"
11.The teacher asks the boy: "Is May a spring month?" 12. The students ask
me: "Do you like our University?" 13. Mr. White asks Betty: "Is Doctor Sandford
in?" 14. The children ask Betty: "Do you play the piano?" 15. The teacher asks the
boy: "Have you any brothers or sisters?" 16. The teacher asks the girls: "Can you
spell the word 'white'?" 17. The boy asks his sister: "Do you see anything on the
table?"
XXIII.
Make up short dialogues according to the given model. Use
the following questions.
M o d e l : A: Do you know Helen?
B: What do you ask me?
A: I ask you if you know Helen.
C: What does A. ask you?
B: A. asks me if I know Helen.
1. Are you busy? 2. Are the lessons over? 3. Is he already twenty? 4. Are there
any new words in Lesson Four? 5. Do you know the pronunciation of all the new
words? 6. Is this translation difficult? 7. Do the students of your group work much
at their English? 8. Who is the monitor of your group? 9. Can you swim? 10.
Must we finish this work today? 11. Are you fond of animals?
XXIV.
Translate the following into English:
1. Пока я ничего не могу сделать. 2. Никто'ничего не хочет есть. 3. Могу
ли я для вас что-либо сделать? 4. Можно прийти к вам в воскресенье? 5.
Четверг — пятый день недели. 6. Моей младшей сестре сейчас десять лет. 7.
Я пока не умею говорить по-английски. — Неужели? 8. Добрый день, мистер
Уайт. В чем дело? — Могу ли я поговорить с вами, мистер Сэндфорд? — Да,
пожалуйста. 9, Что значит это слово? 10. Должна ли я что-либо подписать?
— Вот, пожалуйста. — Где мне подписать? — Вот здесь. 11. Многие из
наших студентов работают осенью на фермах. 12. Вы умеете играть на
рояле? 13. Можете ли вы дать мне что-нибудь почитать? 14. Кто работает *в
129
комнате 4? 15. Откройте страницу 5 и прочитайте текст. 16. На девятой
странице нет никакой картинки. 17. В комнате ваших родителей есть кто-
нибудь? 18. Мой сын знает наизусть много английских стихов. — Неужели?
19. Ее дочь уже школьница. — Неужели? 20. Я могу дать вам эту книгу. —
Неужели? 21 Аня должна приехать в понедельник. — Неужели? 22. Наши
занятия кончаются в июне. 23. Никто в нашей семье не работает в субботу.
XXV.
a) Describe Mr. White's visit. Concentrate on the reported speech, b) Imagine
you come to see your fellow-student to discuss^certain items (points) of your homework.
Make up a dialogue, c) Suggest a situation for your fellow-students to give it in the form
of a dialogue.
XXV.
Build short conversations. Use the vocabulary of this lesson and
conversational phrases.
ADDITIONAL PHONETIC EXERCISES
1. Read the exercises several times before the mirror.
2. Record your reading and listen to it, detect your errors.
3. Listen to your fellow-student reading the exercises. Detect his errors in sounds and
intonation and tell him what he must do to get rid of them:
hau xpnti Ji* iz
hao ^klevsr 9v ju' -+ hau xnais ju1 ,клт -> hau »streincfe dis 3old тэеп
V wot 'nasti xwed3
V wot 'wAndsfol xr3uziz
V wot 'Uvli xvai9lits ju*v got
IZ
LABORATORY WORK
I. Repeat the sentences after the tape.
II. a) Listen to the questions and record your answers in the intervals, b) Listen to
the record and correct the mistakes if you have any.
III. a) Make the sentences interrogative and negative. Record the interrogative
and negative forms in the intervals, b) Check your sentences with the key.
II. a) Listen to the sentences. Supply short answers expressing surprise or doubt
and record them in the intervals, b) Check your sentences with the key.
IV. a) Change the sentences from direct into indirect speech. Record your
sentences in the intervals, b) Check your sentences with the key.
130
VI.
a) Translate the sentences into English and record them in the intervals, b)
Check your sentences with the key.
VII. a) Listen to the words, translate them, write them down, transcribe them, b)
Check your spelling and transcription with the key.
VIII.
Listen to the disjunctive questions. They are not true to fact.
Correct them.
IX. a) Listen to the dialogues "Days and Months", ''Asking the Time".
Translate them. Write them down. Mark the stresses and tunes, b) Read
the dialogues and learn them by heart.
131
Lesson Eleven
Phonetics: Интонация сложноподчиненного предложения. Text: Dialogue.
Grammar Степени сравнения наречий. Употребление определенного артикля с
географическими названиями.
Phonetic Exercise 43
'sehbreit — ,seli'brei/n
mw5a хпэ:0
'demanstreit — .deman'streijh
mwfle xsau0
'sitjueit 'imiteit
i'Iju:mineit
'oiganaiz 'dekareit ,sitju'eijn .imi'teifn
.iljuimi'nei/n (o:g3nai'zeiJn ^eka'reijn
inwda xwest inwdr xi:st inwda pa'sifik x3ufn inwdi* 3txlaentik 3ufn
m^di* aenxtaktik
Примечание. Работая над упражнением, обратите внимание на:
1. Произношение многосложных слов, состоящих из четырех или более слогов. Они
чаще всего имеют два ударения: главное и второстепенное. Второстепенное ударение
стоит в начале слова и отмечено знаком [,].
2. Глаголы того же корня, которые произносятся лишь с одним ударением в начале
слова.
Сочетание [т_дэ], где альвеолярный согласный становится зубным перед
межзубным.
TEXT
DIALOGUE
Alex meets a group of foreign students.
A l e x : Excuse me, what country are you from?
V о i t e k: I am from Poland. A l e x : Do
you live in Warsaw?
V о i t e k: No, I don't. I live in a small town in the North of Poland. Let me
introduce you to my friend Lucy.
A l e x : I am ever so glad to meet you.
132
V o i t e k : Lucy is from France, from Paris. She is French. By the way, do
you speak French?
A I ex: I am afraid I don't. I speak only two foreign languages, English and
Spanish. And I prefer to speak Spanish, as I know it much better than English.
V o i t e k : Oh, that's fine! Lucy speaks Spanish rather well. Her mother is
from South America. As for me I can't speak Spanish but I understand nearly
everything. Lucy and I are pen-friends.
A l e x : Would you like to join me and my fellow-students? We can have a
good time together.
V o i t e k : That'd be lovely. • A l e x : Come on, then.
VOCABULARY NOTES
foreign иностранный; foreign language иностранный язык Exxcuse me!
Извините! (Apology used before troubling smb.), e. g.
Excuse me! May 1 ask you a question? Excuse my back! Извините,
что я сижу (стою) к вам спиной.
xSorry! (I beg your) ^Pardon! (Apologies used after doing smth.
wrong.), e. g. Sorry, I didn't mean to hurt you. Mind: ,Sorry! ,Pardon!
(Asking to repeat smth.), e. g. Sorry! (Pardon!) Which street did you
say?
introduce vt вводить, e. g. He introduced a new method of working, to
introduce smb. to smb. представлять кого-л. кому-л., e. g. Will you introduce
me to your sister? Let me introduce myself. (Note: to acquaint smb. with smb.
(or smth.) знакомить кого-л. с кем-л. (чём-л.), е. д. Mr. Hill acquainted Eric with
his work, to get acquainted with smb. познакомиться с кем-л. Syn. to meet
(со/.), e. g. We got acquainted last year. This is John Smith, Ann. — Oh, glad to
meet you. I've heard so much about you. Meet my sister Helen. I am ever so glad
to meet you. Рад с Вами познакомиться.
prefer предпочитать
as for me что касается меня
pen-friends друзья по переписке
to join smb. присоединиться к кому-л.
come on пойдем
TOPICAL VOCABULARY
Cardinal points: the North, the South, the West, the East.
Continents: Europe I'jusrap], Asia ['eifc], Africa, America, 'Australia
[xs'treiljs], the Antarctic.
Oceans: the Atlantic Ocean, the Pacific Ocean, the Indian Ocean, the Arctic
Ocean.
Seas: the Black Sea, the Baltic Sea.
Rivers: the Volga, the Thames [temz], the Mississippi.
133
Islands: Great Britain, Ireland.
Chains o f mountains: the Urals ['jusrslz], the Alps.
The Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) consists of former Soviet
Republics.
They are: Russia (Moscow), Ukraine (Kiev), Belarus (Minsk), Uzbekistan
(Tashkent), Kazak(h)stan (Alma-Ata), Georgia (Tbilisi), Azerbaidzan (Baku),
Moldova (Kishinev), Kirghizia (Bishkek), Tadzhikistan (Dushanbe), Armenia
(Ereven), Turkmenistan, Turkmenia (Ashghabat or Ashkabad).
134
CountriesCapitalsLanguagesNationalities BulgariaSofiaBulgarianthe
Bulgarians[ЬлГдеэпэ]['S3Ufld](a Bulgarian)CzechiaPragueCzech(ish)the
Czechs['tjekia][ргад](a Czech)SlovakiaBratislavaSlovakthe Slovaks[sl3u'v<r.ki3]
[.brsti'slaiva](a Slovak)
>CubaHavanaSpanishthe Cubans['kjuba][ha'vaena](a
Cuban)GermanyBoonGermanthe Germans['фз.тэгп](bu:n)(a
German)HungaryBudapestHungarianthe Hungarians[Ълддэп]['bu:d3,pest](a
Hungarian)MongoliaUlan BatorMongolianthe Mongolians[ггтп'дзийэ]['u:la:n 'baito](a
Mongolian)PolandWarsawPolishthe Poles (a Pole)['рзЫэпа]
['wd:sd:]R(o)umaniaBucharestRumanianthe Rumanians[ru:'meinja]['buikarest](a
Rumanian)Viet NamHanoiViet-Namesethe Viet-Namesef'vjet'ncrm][ha:noi](a Viel-
Namese)AustriaViennaGermanthe Austnans['arstria][vi'ena]w(an
Austrian)BelgiumBrusselsFlemishthe Belgians['belcfcam]['brAslz](a
Belgian)CanadaOttawaFrench,the Canadians['kaenada]['otswa]English(a
Canadian)DenmarkCopenhagenDanishthe Danes['denmaik]['ksupan'heign](a
Dane)FinlandHelsinkiFinnishthe Finns['finland]['helsirjki](a
Finn)FranceParisFrenchthe French[fra:ns]['pans](a Frenchman)*(-woman)Great
BritainLondonEnglishthe English (an['greit 'bntn]['UndsnJEnglishman
Countries
135
Greece [gri:s]
the
Netherlands fnedabndz] (Holland) ['holand]
India ['indja]
Italy ['itali]
Japan [с&э'рзеп]
Norway ['no:wei]
Spain [spem]
Sweden |'swi:dn]
the United States of America (the USA) [бз ju:'naitid 'steits 3v э'тепкэ]
Capitals
Athens ['aeGanz]
Amsterdam ['aemstadam]
Delhi ['deli]
Rome [гзит]
Tokyo [Чзик1зи]
Oslo fosbu]
Madrid [ma'dnd]
Stockholm ['stDkh3ulm]
Washington ['wDfintan]
Languages Greek
Dutch
Hindi
Italian
Japanese
Norwegian
136
Spanish
Swedish
English
Nationalities
the Greeks (a Greek)
the Dutch (a Dutchman) (-woman)
the Indians (an Indian)
the Italians (an Italian)
the Japanese (a Japanese)
the Norwegians (a Norvegian)
the Spanish (a Spaniard)
the Swedes (a Swede)
the Americans (an American)
Примечания.
1 .
У п о т р е б л е н и е
с у б с т а н т и в и р о в а н н ы х
п р и л а г а т е л ь н ы х ,
о б о з н а ч а ю щ и х
н а ц и о н а л ь н о с т ь .
Некоторые имена прилагательные в английском языке могут выступать в функции
существительных. В этом случае они приобретают и морфологические признаки
существительных: способность иметь единственное и множественное число, принимать
определенный или неопределенный артикль, употребляться в притяжательном падеже, а
также иметь при себе определения.
Английские прилагательные, обозначающие национальность и оканчивающиеся на
-an, -ian, могут употребляться как прилагательные и как существительные. При
употреблении в значении существительных они приобретают все морфологические
признаки существительных. Например, a Russian book — русская книга; a Russian —
русский; several Russians — несколько русских; the Russians — русские; that Russian's
report — доклад того русского.
В качестве предикатива для обозначения национальности, как правило,
употребляются прилагательные; существительные употребляются реже: She is not
English, she is Russian. She is not an English woman, she is a Russian.
Прилагательные, обозначающие национальность, оканчивающиеся на -ese и -ss,
выступая в функции существительных, могут употребляться с неопределенным
артиклем для обозначения отдельного лица данной нации (a Japanese) и с определенным
— для обозначения нации в целом (the Japanese). Однако эти существительные не имеют
ни окончания множественного числа -s, ни окончания притяжательного падежа, several
Japanese — несколько японцев, that Japanese' daughter
137
Прилагательные, обозначающие национальность, оканчивающиеся на -ish и -сп,
выступая в функции существительных, употребляются всегда с определенным артиклем,
имеют значение только множественного числа, но не принимают окончания -s. Они
употребляются для обозначения данной нации в целом* the English — англичане
Для обозначения отдельных представителей данной нации употребляются сложные
существительные, образованные из этих прилагательных с существительными man,
woman, men, women: an Englishman, an Englishwoman, two (several) Englishmen.
2. Названия некоторых государств, океанов, морей, рек, горных цепей употребляются
с определенным артиклем С определенным артиклем употребляются также следующие
названия, the United Slates of America, the Caucasus ['ko kasas], the Crimea [krai'mia].
PHONETIC NOTES
И н т о н а ц и я
с л о ж н о п о д ч и н е н н о г о
п р е д л о ж е н и я .
Главное предложение, предшествующее придаточному, может произноситься
как нисходящим, так и восходящим тоном в зависимости от степени его
смысловой законченности. Например:
I preVfer to 'speak х Spanish, | as I Vknow it 'much ЪеКег than xEnglish. В
главном предложении выражена основная мысль, придаточное предложение
представляет собой дополнительную мысль.
I preVfer to 'speak , Spanish, | as I Vknow it 'much 'better than ^English.
Главное предложение воспринимается незаконченным без разъяснения,
сделанного в придаточном предложении.
Однако в целом ряде случаев сложноподчиненные предложения образуют
одну синтагму. Например: I V don't 'think he is xright.
Придаточное предложение, предшествующее главному, как правило, не
выражает смысловой законченности и произносится восходящим тоном.
Например:
When it -> gets ,dark | V Moscow 'looks especially beautiful I
because of its -> splendid illuminations.
При образовании наречий прибавлением к прилагательному суффикса
-1у, буква у меняется на i: easy — easily, happy — happily, gay—gaily.
Memory Work:
Roadways
By John Masefield
138
One road leads to London, One road runs to Wales,
My road leads me seawards To the white dipping sails.
One road leads to the river As it goes singing slow. My road leads to shipping
Where the bronzed sailors go.
My road calls me, lures me West, east, south and north,
Most roads lead men homewards My road leads me forth.
*
EXERCISES
I. Study Substitution Table No. 1 and compose as many sentences as
you can.
II. Copy and transcribe the following words. Mark primary and secondary stresses
and read the words aloud:
anniversary, demonstration, revolution, illumination, the Mississippi,
nationality, Japanese, explanation, celebration, invitation, assimilation,
conversation, congratulation, palatalization.
III.
a) The material below is to be prepared for reading. Mark the stresses and tunes.
Concentrate your attention on sounds, b) Let your fellow-student read the exercise aloud
for you to detect his possible errors in sounds. Tell him what must be done to eliminate
them:
[э:] 1. George was born in August.
2. I saw more than forty horses.
3. Her naughty daughter Maud is at fault.
2. Of all the saws I ever saw, I never saw a saw as that saw saws.
[c&] 1. Julius was jealous.
2. Jane, Jim and George Jones.
3. John, put the orange juice into the frige.
4. A journalist made a journey over Japan.
IV. Before you start working at the text practise the sounds in the following words
and word combinations:
1. [e] —November, eleventh, seventh, celebrate, gets,
guests, red, let, French, pen-friends, fellow, members;
[a:] — part, march, dark, park, France, party, mark;
[J] — revolution, demonstration, illuminations, English, Spanish;
[o:] — Warsaw, small, North.
2. a) Alveolars replaced by dentals: i^Jhe eleventh, on^the
139
seventh, iswthe greatest, injthe parks, and^the guests, onJ;his day, inj;he
history, i^Jthe birthday.
b) Loss of plosion: tak^part, whatj:ountry, goodjtime.
c) No voicing before voiced consonants: thi^jiay, get^jlark, muchjsetter.
d) No glottal stop: thewanniversary, thewillumination, from^all, let
me^introduce you, better than^English, butwIwunderstand, nearlyweverything,
Lucy^andwI, common.
V. a) Listen to the dialogue. Mark the stresses and tunes, b) Practise the dialogue for
test reading. Listen to it very carefully until you can say it in exactly the same way, c)
Memorize and dramatize it.
V. Give the degrees of comparison of the following adverbs and transcribe them:
slowly, fast, hard, badly, much, well, early, far, near, often, late, quietly, easily,
little, warmly, seriously, comfortably, quickly. ,
VII.
a) Put the adverbs in brackets in the correct place:
1. (never) Alex is late for his classes. 2. (usually) He has dinner at two o'clock.
3. (seldom) I go to bed before twelve o'clock. 4. (often) I speak Spanish with my
mother, 5. (always) He works in the lab after his lessons. 6. (still) Do you think
that she is ill? 7. (already) I think she is at home. 8. (sometimes) I see him in the
library.
b) Form sentences of your own using the same adverbs.
VIII. Answer the following questions:
1. What traditional holidays in our country do you know? 2. How do you
usually see in the New Year? 3. Is there a New-Year tree at your place at that
time? 4. Where can you see the biggest and the most beautiful New-Year tree in
Moscow? 5. When do we celebrate Mother's Day? 6. How do you mark this day
in your family? 7. Is Victory Day a traditional holiday only in our country or is it
an international holiday? 8. How do we celebrate Victory Day in our country? 9.
How do people in other countries mark it? 10. Which is the traditional holiday of
teachers in our country? 11. When is your birthday? 12. Do you always invite
guests to your birthday party? 13. There is a tradition in some countries to put
candles on the birthday cake so that people can see how old you are. How do you
like this tradition? 14. Do you put candles on your birthday cake? Why? *
IX.
Put the adjectives in brackets in the required degree of comparb
son:
i
140
1. Asia is (large) than Australia. 2. The Volga is (short) than the Mississippi. 3.
Mary is a (good) student than Lucy. 4. There are (few) mistakes in my dictation
than in yours. 5. This garden is the (beautiful) in our town. 6. The Arctic Ocean is
(cold) than the Indian Ocean. 7. Chines^ is (difficult) than English. 8. Spanish is
(easy) than German. 9. Let's go to the (far) corner of the park. That is the (quiet)
place here.
X. Some adverbs have the same form as their corresponding adjectives. Make up
sentences of your own using the words below (first as adjectives, then as adverbs).
M o d e l : It's a bad mistake. She feels bad today, fast, early, late, hard, long,
far, low, well, quick.
XI. The following pairs of adverbs are different iu meaning. Make Up sentences of
your own to show the difference:
hard — hardly, near — nearly, close — closely.
XII.
Speak on your favourite holidays.
XIII.
Fill in prepositions if necessary:
1. When we go ... foreign countries we see and learn a lot ... things. 2. She says
she likes to go ... the Caucasus ... winter. 3. Japan is a country ... the western
part ... the Pacific Ocean. It consists ... many islands, large and small. Some ...
them are only a few miles long. 4. The Crimea is ... the South ... our country. 5.
My sister lives ... the Far East. 6. The Baltic Sea is ... the West. 7. Show us the
longest river ... Russia ... the map. 8. Slovakia is ... the centre ... Europe. 9. St.
Petersburg is ... the north-west ... Moscow. 10. Thousands ... students ... all
nationalities study ... the institutes ... our country. 11. One ... the students ... our
group is ... Rumania. 12. What's the capital ... Rumania? 13. What language do
they speak ... Bulgaria.
XIV.
Fill in the definite or indefinite article if necessary:
1. ... Russia occupies ... eastern half of ... Europe and ... northern third ... of
Asia. 2. ... climate of ... northern part of ... Russia is severe. 3. In ... European part
of ... Russia ... summer is warm and sunny. 4. This winter is ... true Russian winter
with hard frosts. 5. It is warm all ... year round in ... Crimea and ... Caucasus. 6. ...
Commonwealth of Independent States is one of ... biggest countries of ... whole
world. 7. Tbilisi is ... capital of ... Georgia. 8. I want to go to ... Alma-Ata some
day. 9. ... best vway to know and understand ... people of other countries is to meet
them in their own homes. 10. Is Australia ... island or ... continent? 11. ... Black
Sea is in ... South. 12. There are six continents in ... world, aren't there? 13. France
is to ... northwest of Italy.
141
XV.
Let the members of the class ask and answer questions as in
the models. Give a short answer and add a sentence of your own using
adverbs in the comparative and the superlative degree.
M o d e l 1 : Does she speak Spanish more fluently than her friend? Oh yes,
she does. Of all the students in our group she speaks most fluently.
. M o d e l 2 : He doesn't go to bed later than you, does he? No, he doesn't. He
goes to bed earliest of all, (or. But he does. He goes to bed latest of all.)
XVI.
Form questions to the following statements:
1. Russia is a very large country. 2. There are more than 100 nationalities in
the CIS. 3. In the North of our country winter is very cold. 4. There are a lot of
rivers and lakes in the North of Russia.
XVII. Answer the following questions:
1. How many oceans can you see on the map? What are they? 2. Is the Pacific
the largest ocean in the world ? 3. Which is the largest ocean in the world? 4. Does
the Pacific Ocean wash Western Europe? 5. Which ocean washes Western Europe?
6. Which ocean washes the northern part of Europe? 7. Which ocean washes
Eastern Asia? 8. What two American continents do you know? 9. What other
continents do you know? 10. Is Australia a continent or an island? 11. Is Ireland an
island or a continent? 12. The Alps are higher than the Urals, aren't they? 13. What
are the highest mountains in Europe? 14. The Mississippi is the longest river in the
world, isn't it? 15. Is the Thames as long as the Mississippi? 16. Which is the
longest river in the world? 17. Is the Black Sea in the South? 18. Is the Baltic Sea
in the South too? Where is it? 19. Is the White Sea in the North or in the South?
20. Is the United States in North or in South America? 21. Is Japan in the .West or
in the East? 22. Is Italy in the South or in the North of Europe? 23. What is the
capital of Bulgaria (Hungary, Rumania) ? 24. What language do the Spaniards (the
Japanese) speak?
XVIII.
Look at the map of the world, show and name all the continents, oceans,
seas, countries and other geographical names you know.
XVIII. Make up short dialogues on the topic: "At the Map of the World". Use
conversational phrases.
XX.
Change the following sentences from direct into indirect speech:
1. The pupil asks: "Is the United States in North America?"
2. The student asks: "Is the Volga longer than the Thames?"
3. The pupil asks: "Is the Thames as long as the Volga?" 4. My friend asks me:
"Is the Baltic Sea cold?" 5. The teacher asks: "Is Budapest in Hungary?" 6. The
teacher says: "The Indian Ocean is warmer than the Arctic Ocean." 7. Betty says:
142
"My father speaks two foreign languages: German and French." 8. The teacher
says: "London is the capital of Great Britain." 9. The
teacher says: "Betty speaks German better than Mary." 10. My friend asks:
"Does Mary speak Italian?" 11. My mother asks: "Does Helen know any foreign
languages?" 12. The teacher says: "Japanese is a difficult language." 13. The
student asks: "Is Japanese more difficult than Russian?" 14. The pupil asks: "Is
Prague the capital of Czechia?" 15. The teacher asks me: "Can you spell the word
'Mississippi'?"
XXL a) Form sentences on the model using the following words and word
combinations.
M o d e l : He wants to take part in this work.
the game, the play, the football match, demonstration, concert, discussion.
b) Make the same sentences negative.
XXII.
a) Fill in much better.
1. He knows French ... than German. 2. He can do it ... than she. 3. He writes
dictations ... than his friends.
b) Give sentences of your own using the same model.
XXIII.
Replace the part of the model in bold type by the following:
M o d e l 1: Let me introduce you to my friends.
my mother, my teacher, my sister, my cousin, my father-in-law.
M o d e l 2 : 1 am ever so glad to meet you.
to see you, to listen to you, to do it for you, to join you.
M o d e l 3 : Would you join my fellow-students?
our group, my friends, our company, my family.
M o d e l 4 : What's his (her, their) nationality? He is (a)
Russian.
Greek, Armenian, English, ...
M o d e l 5: The Russians live in Russia. Poland,
England, Spain, France, ...
M o d e l 6: What country (republic) are you (she, they) from? I come (am)
from Estonia.
Latvia, Spain, France, ...
XXIV.
Translate the following sentences into English:
143
1. В дни праздников Москва выглядит особенно красиво. 2. Является ли 8
Марта традиционным интернациональным праздником? 3. Хотели бы вы
встретить Новый год с нами? 4. Известный певец принимает участие в
нашем конкурсе. 5. Вид из окна моей комнаты великолепен. 6. Когда
темнеет, люди выходят на улицы смотреть иллюминацию. 7. В праздничные
дни в Москве много иностранных гостей. Они гуляют по городу,
разговаривают с русскими людьми. 8. Вы принимаете участие в работе
нашего английского клуба? 9. В нашей группе учатся студенты из разных
городов России. 10. Моя подруга знает немецкий язык гораздо лучше, чем я.
11. Он говорит по-итальянски плохо, но понимаетпочти все. 12. На каком
иностранном языке говорит ваша подруга? 13. Разрешите мне познакомить
вас с моей мамой. 14. Я вижу стройную черноволосую девушку у окна. Как
ты думаешь, кто она по национальности? — Я знаю, что ее мать — грузинка,
а отец — русский. 15. Среди туристов было много болгар, которые хорошо
говорили по-русски. 16. Я родилась в Москве. (My birthplace).
XXV.
Speak on the following:
1. The map of the world. 2. The country you find interesting. 3. My favourite
holiday.
ADDITIONAL PHONETIC EXERCISES
1. Read the exercises several times before the mirror.
2. Record your reading and listen to it. Detect your errors.
3. Listen to your fellow-student reading the exercises. Detect his errors in sounds and
intonation and tell him what he must do to get rid of them:
'ilsstreit 'libsreit 'imigreit 'stimjuleit
.ib'streijh .libs'reijn .imi'greifn .stimju'leijn
'kDnstitju:t — JkDnsti'tjirJh di'skrimineit— di.skrimi'neijh дэ -> reis
di,sknmi vneijn бэ -> fait fo ,lib9vreijn бэ V nju: 'nvfn ,kDnstixtju:Jn
I. a) Repeat the sentences after the tape, b) Make the sentences interrogative and
negative.
(Don't forget that in the negative sentences as ... as is changed into not so ...
as).
II. listen to the questions and answer them in the intervals.
Ш. a) Change the sentences from direct into indirect speech, b) Check your sentences
with the key.
144
IV.
a) Translate the sentences into English and record them in the
intervals, b) Check your sentences with the key.
V. a) Translate the sentences into English and pronounce them in two ways: first the
main clause must be pronounced with the falling tone and then with the rising one. b)
Check your sentences with the key.
M o d e l : I prefer to speak v Spanish | as I know it much better than ^English.
I prefer to speak, Spanish | as I know it much better than x English.
VI. Spell and transcribe the words and word combinations.
n VII. Listen to the disjunctive questions. They are not true to fact. Correct them.
О С Н О В Н О Й К У Р С
Lesson Twelve
Л
Grammar The Present Continuous Tense. Special Questions in
Indirect Speech. Imperative Sentences in Indirect Speech. Texts: 1. Meals. 2. In the
Canteen. Phonetics: Intonation of Parentheses.
STUDY THE FOLLOWING
T a b l e No. 1
THE PRESENT CONTINUOUS TENSE
Iam (not)Hespeaking English.My cousinis (not)writing a letter.Her brotherplaying the
3
piano.walking fast.reading a newspaper.Weplaying footbal .Youare (not)The girls
%
Ishis wife their friend her motherworking in the garden? writing anything? standing
b)
at the window? reading exercises? working in the room?Arethe students the
children
145
T a b l e No. 2
SPECIAL QUESTIONS IN INDIRECT SPEECH
Hewhere my parents live.My friendasks (me)why I am late.Our teacherwhere my
father works.what newspaper I read.
T a b l e Na. 3 IMPERATIVE SENTENCES IN INDIRECT
SPEECH
Heasks meto wait for him.Shetells meto do it at once.FatherYouTheyask menot to go
there alone.The girlstell menot to stay there any longer.
SPELLING RULES
The following spelling rules should be observed in the forma-tibn of Participle
I:
1. The mute -e is dropped before adding the suffix -ing: to take — taking.
2. The final consonant is doubled (before the suffix -ing) if it is preceded by a
vowel expressing a short stressed sound: to get — getting.
1 3. The final -1 is doubled if it is preceded by a vowel expressing a short
sound: to travel — travelling.
4. In the verbs to die, to lie and to tie the letters ie are replaced by у before
the suffix -ing: to die — dying; to lie — lying; to |ie — tying.
5. The final -y is not changed before adding the suffix -ing no matter whether
it is preceded by a consonant or by a vowel: to say — saying; to dry — drying.
6. The letter r is doubled if the final syllable is stressed: prefer — preferring;
but: 'offer — 'offering.
GRAMMAR EXERCISES
I. Study Substitution Table No. I and compose as many sentences as you can.
I. Write and transcribe the first participle of the following verbs:
146
give, take, begin, buy, pay, say, listen, write, stay, leave, go, come, dine, put,
pass, talk, work, get, sit, look, forget, hurry, study, travel, have, give, taste, prefer,
bring, offer, add.
III.
Give the verb in the following sentences in the Present Continuous:
1. He (to read) newspapers. 2. I (to work) hard at my English. 3. She (to sit) at
the window and (to look) at the sea. 4. I (to prepare) my homework. 5. They all (to
work) at the laboratory. 6. I (to write) letters to my cousins. 7. I (to have) breakfast
with my family. 8. We (not to go) to the Institute. 9. He (to come) home. 10. Mr.
Smith (not to give) a lesson.
IV. a) Answer the question What are you. doing? imagining that you are:
1. at an English lesson; 2. at a lecture; 3. in the corridor; 4. in the street; 5. in
the garden: 6. in the Metro; 7. in the forest; 8. in the dining-room; 9. in the water;
10. in the kitchen; 11. in the bathroom.
b) Answer the same question about your fellow-student.
V. Look at the pictures on page 157: a) Ask your fellow-students questions, use the
Present Continuous Tense, b) Describe the pictures.
VI. Give the following sentences in indirect speech, make the necessary changes:
1. My father says: "Why don't you read English newspapers?" 2. Maggy says:
"Why are you looking at me in that way?" 3. My teacher says: "You've got a
number of mistakes in your translation." 4. She says: "What are you going to be
when you leave the Institute?" 5. I say: "I'm sure I am going to be a teacher." 6. He
says: "Italy is in the South of Europe." 7. My cousin says: "When are you coming
to see us?" 8. She says: "I like the poem. I am going to learn it by heart." 9.
Mother says:
147
148
"Don't be late for dinner," 10. Our teacher says: "You must work more
systematically." 11. They say: "Don't stay here any longer, It is getting dark." 12.
The girl says: "We have a lot of English books at home." 13. The child says:
"What are you doing?"
14.
The mother says: "Why are you crying? Come up to me."
15.
The boys say: "We want to help you, father." 16. Mr. Smith says:
"Have dinner with us." 17. The mother says: "Eat up your porridge, children." 18.
The teacher says: "Find the Thames on the map, Mike." 19. They say: "Don't
make so much noise, John. The baby is asleep."
TEXT 1 MEALS
The Smiths are in their dining-room. There are five of them: Mr. Smith, the
head of the family, Mrs. Smith, his wife, and their children: John, Ann and Kitty.
They are having breakfast. Mrs. Smith is putting some cornflakes on the boy's
plate. The elder daughter is passing the sugar to her father,
Mrs. S m i t h : Will you have sugar on your cornflakes, John? John: Oh, no,
Mum, thank you. I'd like some more milk instead.
Mr. S m i t h : Why aren't you eating anything, Kitty? You are so slow. Look,
Ann is already finishing her cornflakes.
K i t t y : I don't like cornflakes. I'm just thirsty. Give me some tea and cakes,
Mum,
Mrs. S m i t h : Now, be a good girl, Kitty. Have some more cornflakes. We're
going to have bacon and eggs, and then you'll get your tea with toast and
marmalade.
Mr. S m i t h : Could you give me a little more cornflakes, dear?
Mrs. S m i t h : Just a moment. (Mrs. Smith passes him his plate.) What
about bacon and eggs? Will you have some?
Mr. S m i t h : Sure. And then a nice strong cup of tea. I'm afraid I must leave
in a quarter of an hour or so.
The father is already having his cup of tea while the children are still talking
over their cornflakes.
TEXT 2
IN THE CANTEEN
A n n: I think, it's high time to have a bite. I am hungry.
В о b: So am I, I see you are ready to go down to the canteen, I am just
finishing this article. Will you wait a minute, please.
A n n : Yes, hufry up, then.
В о b : I wonder if there is anything to your taste on the menu.
149
A n n : Oh, yes, all kinds of things. Let's have some soup, Clear soup,
perhaps?
B o b : I don't think I'll have any soup today. I'd like some salad to begin
with.
A n n : Will you have mixed salad, chops and mashed potatoes?
B o b : Why, yes of course. What do you say to a bottle of beer?
A n n : No beer, thanks. I prefer a glass of soda-water or just a cup of tea.
B o b : All right. Tea then. Will you pass me the mustard, please?
A n n : Here you are. As for me, I never take mustard or pepper.
B o b ; You don't say sol
A n n : Look! The waitress is already bringing our tea.
B o b : We want neither ham nor sausage, do we?
A n n : No, ham as well as sausage is out of the question. I'd like some fruit,
apples or oranges.
B o b : Yes, but I'm afraid you forget about the meeting of our English club.
We must leave at once to be in time for the beginning of the discussion.
A n n : Right you are. Let's pay for the dinner and be off.
VOCABULARY NOTES
meal n завтрак, обед или ужин; to have a meal есть, поесть, е. д. We
usually have four meals a day: breakfast, lunch, dinner and supper.
breakfast n завтрак; to have breakfast (dinner, supper) (no article!)
завтракать, обедать, ужинать, е. д. Dinner is ready. Have dinner with us.
cornflakes пшеничные (кукурузные) хлопья
Mum = Mummy мама; Cf. Dad — Daddy
I'd (should) like (to do smth.) Мне бы хотелось ...
more, another, still correspond to the Russian «еще». The pronouns more
and another are used with nouns. More is used both with counta-bles in the plural
and uncountables: more books, more sugar; another is used only with countables
in the singular: another book, another student. Cf. more tea, but another cup of
tea. Still is used with verbs. It is often translated into Russian as «все еще», е. д.
It is still raining. He is still at home.
slow adj медленный, e. g. You are very slow. Slowly adv медленно, e. g. You
speak very slowly.
to be going to собираться
toast л гренок; ломтик хлеба, подрумяненный на огне What
about ...? Как насчет ...?
leave (for) (left, left) W 1. уезжать, уходить, e. gr. He is leaving Moscow for
St.Petersburg. He is leaving for St.Petersburg. He is leaving in half an hour. Ant.
stay vi оставаться, e. g The children stay at home as it is raining. 2. забывать,
оставлять, е. g Don't leave your exercise-book at home, Cf. Don't forget my
address. Don't forget to open the window.
150
It is high time (to do smth.) Давно пора ...
to have a bite перекусить
hungry adj голодный; as a hungry dog, a hungry child: to be hungry хотеть
есть, е. д. I am hungry. I am going to the canteen, hunger л голод
I am hungry. So am I. И я тоже. The word combination So am (do, can...) I is
used as a reply to an affirmative sentence. Neither am (do, can...) I is used after
negative sentences, e. g. I am reading. So am I. I prefer a cup of tea. So do I. I can
do it. So can I. I am not writing. Neither am I. I don't like this salad. Neither does
my sister. He can't translate this sentence. Neither can I. The subject is at the end
of the phrase and is stressed: 'So do XI.
wait vi ждать; to wait for (smb., smth.), e. g. We are waiting for a taxi,
waiter (waitress) n официант (официантка); Syn. to expect
hurry vi спешить, e. g. We are hurrying to the laboratory. Hurry up! Скорее!
Живее! е. д. Hurry up, it's already 8 o'clock.
taste n вкус, e. g. You must know her taste if you want, to buy her a present,
to one's taste по вкусу. Proverb: Tastes differ. ( = о вкусах не спорят.) taste
vt 1. пробовать, e. g. Will you taste my porridge? 2. иметь вкус, е. д. The pie
tastes very sweet, tasty adj вкусный
to begin with для начала, начнем с того, что ...
What do you say to ... Что вы скажете насчет ...
You don't say so! Что вы говорите?! Неужели?!
neither ... nor ни ... ни; In sentences with neither ... nor the verb is used in
the affirmative form and agrees with the second noun in number and person, e.
g. Neither Ivanov nor Petrov knows the answer to my question. We have
neither bread nor meat in the house. Please go and buy some. ! It is out of the
question. Об этом не может быть и речи. Это ; (совершенно) исключается,
е. д. Going to the forest now is out of the question, it's too dark.
discussion n дискуссия, обсуждение; discuss vt, e. g They are \ discussing a
book by Mark Twain.
6 Заказ 1271
161
TOPICAL VOCABULARY
Meals
breakfast, lunch, dinner, supper; first course, second course, dessert; for the
first (second) course
a plate, a glass, a cup, a saucer, a tea-pot, a kettle, a fork, a spoon, a knife
bread, meat, fish, butter, eggs, cheese, sugar, sausage, bacon, herring
potatoes, tomatoes, carrots, cabbage, cucumbers, beets, peas salt, mustard,
pepper
151
water, milk, tea, coffee, cocoa, beer, wine, fruit-juice, honey soup (clear soup,
cabbage soup, pea soup), porridge, macaroni, salad (mixed salad), mashed
potatoes, fried potatoes, chops, cutlets, beefsteak, chicken, goose
pudding, cake, sweets, pie, ice-cream, jam, jelly, stewed fruit apples, pears,
plums, oranges, tangerines, grapes, bananas, berries, cherries, peaches, nuts
to have (to eat, to drink), to dine, to cook, to fry, to boil, to taste, to prefer
to lay the table, to sit down to table, to be (to sit) at table, to clear the table (to
take away the dirty dishes); Help yourself to (smth., some food); Have some
more; No more, thank you!
PHONETIC NOTES
1. T h e i n t o n a t i o n o f a p a r e n t h e s i s depends on its position
in a sentence. A parenthesis at the beginning of a sentence is usually stressed. It
often forms a separate sense-group.
e.g. I'm aVfraid, I must 'leave in a tquarter of an 'hour or xso. ;
xNow I V be a 'good xgirl, Kitty.
As for ,me | I V never take 'mustard or xpepper.
A parenthesis in the middle or at the end of a sentence is usually unstressed or
half-stressed and it continues the melody of the preceding sense-group.
e. g. Y d like some xsalad to begin with. t" ~* ^ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Compound nouns are usually pronounced with the stress on the first element
only: a "dining-room, a "blackboard, but "ice-'cream, cas'sette-re.corder.
EXERCISES
I. Transcribe the following words and explain the reading rules:
a) porridge, salt, already, thirsty, bacon, marmalade, father, meals, dining-
room, dinner, passing, butter, sweets, spoon, husband, afraid, Smith, moment,
about, leave, talking, another;
152
b) thin, think, bite, hungry, just, article, canteen, please, kind, chop, glass,
mustard, pepper, pass, use, sausage, apple, right, discussion, off, mashed.
II. Copy out of the texts the words: a) with the digraphs ее, ea; b) with the third type
of syllable (vowel + г); c) with the first type of syllable (open syllable).
III. a) The material below is to be prepared for reading. Mark the stresses and tunes.
Concentrate your attention on sounds, b) Let your fellow-student read the sentences
aloud for you to detect his errors in sounds and tell him what must be done to get the
sounds right;
M 1. The cook took a good look at the cookery book.
2. It's good he could go on foot.
3. A good beginning makes a good ending.
[w] 1. Everywhere we saw the white snow.
2. William was not very willing to wait.
3. Didn't this waiter work in Washington last winter?
4. No sweet without some sweat.
5. Where there is a will there is a way.
[w3:] Her work grows worse and worse, w — v] William always wears a
very warm woollen vest in winter; Victor, however, will never wear woollen
underwear, even in the Wild West.
IV.
Before you start working at the texts practise the sounds in
the following words and word combinations:
A. 1. [ зи] no more, so slow, with toast, just a moment;
[rj] having breakfast, putting some cornflakes. 2, a) Alveolars replaced by
dentals: atj;he picture, ir\Jheir dining-room, andjtheir children, justj;hirsty.
b) Loss of plosion: tea andwcake, aboutwbacon and eggs.
b) Lateral plosion: don'tjike, mustjeave, I'djike.
B.1. [ai] it's high time to have a bite, so am I, I'd like
some;
[rj] finishing this article, is there anything, is already
bringing our tea, for the beginning of the discussion; [av]a bottle of beer, a
glass of water, a cup of tea, all
kinds of things. 2. a) Alveolars replaced by dentals: in thewcanteen,
or\J;he menu, aboutjiie meeting, i^Jhere anything; b) Loss of plosion: a
minutewplease, soupwperhaps,
soupwtoday, saladwto, mashedwpotatoes, must-
ardwplease.
V. a) Listen to the recording of the text "Meals". Mark the stresses and tunes, b)
Practise the text for test reading. Listen to the recording very carefully until yon can say
it in exactly the same way.
153
VI. a) Listen to the recording of the dialogue "In the Canteen**. Mark the stresses
and tunes, b) Practise the dialogue for test reading. Listen to the recording very carefully
until you can say it in exactly the same way. c) Memorize the dialogne and dramatize it.
VII. a) Read the following sentences, pay attention to the intonation
of the word please in them:
1Л Please "bring me that ^newspaper. 2. V Please pro'nounce the "sentence
once vmore! 3. V Please "tell me your vname. 4. V Please "take same xsalad for me.
V 5. Please "show me the ^Caucasus on the map! 6. V Will you 'please "come 7up
to me? 7. V Will you "please "pass me the ,book? 8. V Will you "please "turn "on
the ca"ssette-re,corder? 9. YWill you "please "say it a,gain? 10. -» Stand xup,
please! 11. -* Stop ^talking, please! 12. -> Step a;side, please! 13. -> Help yourself
to some ,pie, please.
b) Address one another with some reqnest using the word please at the beginning, in
the middle and at the end of the phrase and respond to it.
VIII. a) Read the following sentences. Pay attention to the intonation
of direct address:
1. Ann, will you please fetch some milk from the kitchen? 2. Shall I put some
more sugar on your cornflakes, John? 3. No more, Mum. 4. Why aren't you eating
anything, Kitty? 5. Give me a little more cornflakes, dear.
b) Address one another using the name of your fellow-student at the beginning, in the
middle and at the end of the phrase. Work in pairs.
IX. Read the following sentences, mark the stresses and tunes and picture them on
the staves:
I. You are wrong, I am afraid. 2. As for me, I prefer bananas to tangerines. 3.
Well, she says, it's time to have a bite. 4. As far as I know, Japanese is more
difficult than Spanish. 5. Tastes differ, he says. 6. To tell you the truth, 1 don't like
this beefsteak. 7. Besides, I'd like to be in time for the beginning of the party.
X. a) Read the following compound nouns. Don't stress the second element:
a dining-room, a looking-glass, a blackboard, a fountain-pen, a bathroom, a
bedroom, a reading-hall, a smoking-car, a dressmaker.
b) Give your own examples of compound nouns and compound adjectives. Keep in
mind the distribution of word stress in them.
XI.
Answer the following questions:
A. 1. What do you see in the picture? 2. Who is in the dining-room? 3, What
are they doing in the room? 4. What is Mrs. Smith doing? 5. What is the elder
154
daughter passing to her father? 6. Does John like sugar on his cornflakes? 7. What
does he prefer on his cornflakes? 8. Who is already finishing his cornflakes? 9.
Who doesn't like cornflakes? 10. What does Kitty, the little girl, want? 11. What
does Mr. Smith ask his wife to give him? 12. What does Mrs. Smith ask her elder
daughter to do? 13. What are the children doing while their father is having his
tea?
B. 1. Where do the two friends go? 2. What do they take for dinner? 3. Why do
they go to the canteen? 4. Do they always take soup for dinner? 5. Where do the
friends hurry? 6. Why naust they leave at orrce?
С. 1. What time do you have breakfast? 2. What do you have for breakfast?
3. Will you describe your breakfast? 4. Where do you usually have dinner? 5.
Why do you have dinner at home? 6. What do you usually have for the first
course (for the second course, for dessert)? 7. What time do you usually have
dinner? 8. Who cooks meals in your family? 9. Can you cook? 10. What time do
you have dinner on Sunday? 11. Will you describe your Sunday dinner? 12. Do
you have supper late? 13. Why don't you have supper late? 14. Do you like
vegetables? 15. What vegetables do you like? 16. What soup do you like best?
17. What kind of salad do you like? 18. What kind of fruit do you buy in summer
(in winter) in your city? 19. How do you lay the table?
XII.
Write the interrogative and negative forms of the following sentences:
A. 1. They are having breakfast. 2. Mrs. Smith is putting some cornflakes on
the boy's plate. 3. Ann is finishing her cornflakes. 4. Mrs. Smith is passing a plate
to her husband. 5. The children are talking over their cornflakes. 6. We are having
an English lesson. 7. The girl is coming into the room.
B. 1.1 am finishing this article. 2.1 prefer a glass of soda-water. 3. The waitress
is already bringing in our tea. 4. The boy is writing a letter to his parents. 5. My
cousin is leaving tomorrow.
XIII.
a) Let the members of the class ask and answer questions as in the model.
Give a short answer using contracted forms and add a' sentence of your own in the
Present Continuous.
M o d e l : Is your teacher writing a letter?
—
No, he isn't. He's speaking English.
b) Respond to the negative sentence of your fellow-stndent as in the model. Use
contracted forms in speech. Work in pairs.
M o d e l : The pupils aren't playing football.
—
No, they aren't. They're reading a newspaper.
XIV.
a) Write all the possible questions to which the following sentences are the
answers, b) Each sentence describes a certain situation in a concise way. Some points of
155
the situation are already known to you. Find out some more details about the situation by
asking questions. Work in pairs. Use conversational phrases:
A. 1. The elder daughter is passing the salt to her father. 2.1 am thirsty now. 3.
The father is having his cup of tea. 4.1 must'
leave in a quarter of an hour. 5. The children are working in the garden. 6. The
students are reading the text. 7. The girl is going to write a letter.
В. 1. I'm ready to go down to the canteen. 2.1 am finishing this article. 3.1
prefer a glass of soda-water. 4. The waitress is already bringing in our tea. 5. You
forget about the meeting of our club. We must leave at once to be in time for the
beginning of the discussion.
XV.
Read and write in words:
a) 4, 14, 44, 9, 19, 90, 12, 38, 157, 673, 821, 1239. 1955, 2018, 3687, 271,
299, 945, 9212, 322;
b) 23/1 1964; 7/XI 1945, 22/VI 1941; 5/XH 1982.
XVI.
Choose the right word:
to leave — to stay
1. He ... home in summer. 2. He ... at home in summer. 3. We ... in Moscow,
while our father is in the North. 4. He is ... the Urals very soon. 5. They never ...
town for the vacation. 6. When will you ...? 7.1 don't think I'll ... at the Ivanovs'
more than a fortnight. 8.1 can't... here any longer, the lectures begin at 9 o'clock, I
must ... at once. 9. Our cousin is ... for Volgograd, he is going to ... and work there.
10. Why are you ...? We are going to have a meeting. 11. He is ... with us for
another week, isn't he? — No, he is ... tomorrow morning, I am afraid. 12. When
they. . I shall... quite alone in the room.
to come — to go
1. He usually ... home in time. 2. Our father ... to his office at a quarter to 9, as
a rule. 3. The dean ... to the University at a quarter to 9. 4. If they ... to the Crimea
in August I shall miss them. 5. Look, daddy is already ... home. 6. Where are
you ...? I am... to the University. Our studies begin at 9 o'clock.
still — more — another
1. It is already October but it is ... rather warm. 2. Give me ... pencil, this one
is too small. 3. Give me ... glass of water, I am ... thirsty. 4. Give me some ...
water, please. 5. We need ... time for the translation, I am afraid. 6. "I don't want to
get up," says little Kitty, "it is ... very early." 7. Will you give me some ... milk?
8. He asks for ... apple. 9. Let me have some ... pudding, it is very tasty. 10.
Help yourself to some ... pie. 11. Help yourself to ... piece of pie. 12.1 can't eat the
porridge, it is ... very hot. 13. It is ... early, you needn't hurry. 14. I should like to
have some ... salad. 15. Nick is not at home. He is ... at the Institute. 16. It is ...
156
snowing, 17. The students need ... practice in these words. 18. She is going to buy
some ... milk. 19. Try to get ... books on English literature. 20. May I have ...
ticket to the Bolshoi Theatre? 21. Will you please give me some... porridge? 22.
They are ...talking.
XVII.
Fill in prepositions if necessary:
1 ,
A. 1. Pass ... me the salt, please. 2. Pass,the salt ... me. 3. Give the bread ... me.
4. Show this text ... the teacher.
5. Show. . the teacher this book. 6. He is going to come л. half an
hour. 7. Look г. the boy. How dirty he is! 8. I see a new wall-
newspaper \*? the corridor. 9. The children are playing ... the gar-
den. 10. Are you going т.. home? — No, I am going S9. the li-
brary. 11. They have breakfast... 8 o'clock v. the morning. 12.1
dine 3 o'clock the afternoon. 1^3. What do you see this
picture? 14. Excuse me, may I go .h? 15. Please, come We
are just beginning our lesson. 16. The bell is ringing, the students
are coming**:.; the room. The teacher is entering ... the room.
17.
The bell is ringing and the students are leaving ;.. the room.
18.
He is leaving rv. St.Petersburg, you know.
B. 1. Will you wait ... me,'I'll come ... a minute. 2. Are you ready ?.'.4he
answer? 3. Have some fruit ../pleasure. 4. Help yourself..: some fruit, please. 5.1
prefer an apple ... ice-cream.
6. The children are ready. . breakfast. They are waiting ... their
father. 7. Let's have some herring to begin .... 8. What do you
say ... an ice-cream? 9. As(.. me I prefer a piece of cake ...
sweets. 10. A waitress is coming ... our table. What shall we
order? 11. The pudding is ... your taste, I hope. 12. Going to the
river is.....the question, it's too cold to bathe today. 13. Father
usually comes ... home time. 14. We must pay the waitress the dinner. 15. I'm
fond.., vegetables and meat.
XVIII.
a) Chance the following sentences into interrogative and negative.
M o d e l : I have breakfast at 9.
— Do you have breakfast at 9?
— I don't have breakfast at 9.
b) Ask one another questions on the following sentences and answer them in the
negative. Mind the distribution of sentence-stress in the reply.
M o d e l : I have breakfast at 9.
— Do you have breakfast at 7?
— No, I xdon*t have breakfast so ,early. I have it only
atx9.
1. They have supper at 8. 2. We usually have dinner at home. 3. Father has
lunch at his office. 4. My cousin's family has dinner at 5 o'clock, as a rule. 5. He
157
has dinner in the canteen. 6. I always have breakfast at home. 7. They usually have
lunch together. 8. My brother has lunch at the plant. 9.1 often have dinner at my
aunt's.
XIX.
Replace the part of the model in bold type by the following:
M o d e l : I am leaving for London.
a) Kiev, Novosibirsk, Sochi, Tbilisi, Bratsk, Vladivostok, Tula;
b) the Urals, the Caucasus, the Crimea, Ukraine, the country.
XX.
Respond to the following sentences. Express your wish in the response as in the
model.
M o d e l : I like fruit. I should like some fruit now.
1. I like cucumbers. 2. I like chops and mashed potatoes.
3. I like sausage. 4. I like jam. 5. I like sugar. 6. I like bacon and eggs. 7. I like
marmalade. 8. I like coffee. 9. I like icecream. 10.1 like chicken. 11.1 like
bananas.
XXI.
Respond to the following sentences.
M o d e l 1: Begin reading.
— Shall I begin reading?
1. Speak English. 2. Open the window. 3. Read the exercise.
4. Do it at once. 5. Repeat this poem. 6. Learn it by heart. 7. Clear the table. 8.
Answer my question. 9. Lay the table. 10. Make tea for us.
M о d e 1 2: I don't see what's wrong here.
— Shall I show you?
1.1 don't know this expression. 2.1 can't see what is written on the blackboard.
3.1 can't swim. 4.1 can't hear you. 5.1 don't remember this word. 6. I don't know
Moscow well. 7. I can't find the newspaper. 8.1 don't know where my ball-pen is.
XXII.
Make rejoinders to the following statements:
M o d e l : I go to the Institute by bus.
— So do I.
I can't translate this sentence.
— Neither can my friend.
1. My sister speaks English. 2. The students of Group 102 are working at the
laboratory now. 3. My mother is a doctor. 4. Her father is a teacher. 5.1 prefer
apples to bananas. 6.1 don't take mustard. 7. He lives in Klin. 8. He doesn't live
with his parents. 9.1 don't know this old man. 10.1 can't come at four. 11. Father
likes to work in the garden. 12. He doesn't work much. 13. My little sister can't
swim. 14. We have breakfast at half past eight.
15.
Comrade Petrov is leaving for Kiev tomorrow morning.
158
16.
My aunt is leaving for the Urals. 17. My nephew is a naughty child.
18. Those young men are not very well-bred. 19. My school-mate's father is a
journalist.
XXIII. a) Change the direct speech in Text 1 into indirect.
M o d e l : Mr. Smith: "Will you please give me a little more cornflakes, dear?"
Mr. Smith asks his wife to give him a little more cornflakes.
b) Retell the text in indirect speech (make use of the picture on page 159). c) Describe
the breakfast as if you were the mother (the-father, Kitty, Ann).
XXIV.
a) Use the following pairs of words in sentences:
M o d e l : He prefers fruit to ice-cream.
soda-water — beer; cheese — sausage; meat — fish; English — French;
coffee — cocoa: milk — water; tomatoes — cucumbers; mashed potatoes —
macaroni; porridge — bacon and eggs; clear soup — cabbage soup; apples —
plums; oranges — tangerines
b) Give your own examples according to the given model.
XXV.
Respond to the following statements. Express your denial of the both. Work
in pairs.
M o d e l : 1 like both apples and pears. I like neither apples nor pears.
1. They have both a son and a daughter. 2. She can do both sing and dance. 3.1
use both pepper and mustard. 4. He speaks both English and French. 5. I like both
football and hockey.
6. She knows both my cousin and brother. 7.1 am going to buy both cabbage
and potatoes. 8. I am going to have both coffee and cake. 9. My cousin likes both
autumn and winter. 10. We aeed both cucumbers and tomatoes. 11. She knows
both physics and mathematics. 12. We see both the child and his mother.
13.
You've got both grammar and pronunciation mistakes.
14.
Both my school-mates and my fellow-students are to come to my
birthday party.
XXVI. Compose 10 sentences according to the following model:
M o d e l : My mother speaks neither German nor Italian, but she reads
English.
XXVII.
Complete the following sentences:
r АЛЛ should like ... . 2. Let me ... , 3, Be a good girl and ... . 4. Why don't you
...? 5. Will you give me ...? 6.1 am afraid ... . 7.1 don't think he.... 8. What about...?
159
ВЛ. I think, it's high time to ... . 2. Well, I see you are ready ... . 3. Would you
like ...? 4. What do you say to ...? 5. Will you pass me...? 6. As for me... .
7.Letus....
XXVIII.
Translate the following sentences into English:
A. 1. Они обедают. 2. Когда вы обычно обедаете? 3. Что у нас сегодня на
ужин? 4. Вы сейчас обедаете? Тогда я позвоню вам через четверть часа.
Хорошо? 5. Снимай пальто и входи. Мы как раз обедаем, 6. В котором часу
обычно обедает ваша семья? 7. Нина дома? — Да. Она обедает. 8. На что ты
смотришь? — Я смотрю на тот новый дом. Красивое здание. Ты видишь его?
9. Здравствуй, Сергеев! Куда ты идешь? — Я иду в университет, хочу еще раз
прослушать в лаборатории 12-й урок. 10. Что ты делаешь, Боб? — Я пишу
письмо, разве ты не видишь? 11. Ты идешь в библиотеку? — Нет, я иду в
кабинет английского языка (the English study-room). 12. Почему вы курите
здесь? В комнате спит ребенок. 13. Почему вы говорите по-русски? Ведь вы
на уроке английского языка, не -так ли? 14. Не спеши! Лекция начнется
только через полчаса. 15 Вы слышите меня, друзья? 16. Вы слушаете,
Петров? 17. Вы хорошо слышите? 18. Почему вы не отвечаете на мой
вопрос? Вы 'Можете ответить на мой вопрос? 19. Не кричи так громко, твоя
сестренка спит. 20. Почему ты плачешь, малыш (my little kiddy, ту ; little
one)? — Я не плачу. 21 . Что делают студенты? — Они отвечает на вопросы
преподавателя. (Они слушают текст № 12.) 22. О Чем ты думаешь? Пора
готовить уроки. (Пора вставать. Пора идти гв школу. Пора ложиться спать.)
23. Почему ты ставишь так мало
тарелодс на стол? Сегодня нас пятеро. Дедушка приезжает, ты знаешь?
24. Садись за стол, мама несет суп. 25. Прочитать вам эту пословицу? 26.
Обед приготовить к четырем часам? 27. Написать это слово на доске? 28.
Посолить суп (to salt)? 29. Принести мел? 30. Стереть с доски? 31. Купить
овощи? 32. Вы обедаете дома? 33. Он не обедает дома, он обычно обедает в
столовой. 34. Когда вы завтракаете? 35. Почему вы так поздно завтракаете?
36. Он всегда ужинает дома? 37. Почему он не обедает дома? 38. Мне бы
хотелось еще чашку чая (молока, воды, кофе). 39. Мне бы хотелось еще
молока (каши, варенья, хлеба, рыбы). 40. Он еще дома (в лаборатории, в
больнице). 41. Мне хочется пить. Давай возьмем бутылку газированной
воды,
В. 1. Пора обедать (завтракать, ужинать). 2. Давно пора знать этот
материал. 3. Давай возьмем на первое бульон. 4. Кого ты ждешь? — Я жду
свою подругу, мы вместе идем в театр. (Я жду нашего преподавателя, он в
деканате.) 5. Столовая внизу или наверху? 6. Пойдите вниз в библиотеку и
возьмите эту книгу, пожалуйста. 7. Я предпочитаю фрукты мороженому
(перец — горчице, холод — жаре). 8. Что ты скажешь насчет чашки чая
(бутылки газированном воды)? 9. Об этом фильме не может быть и речи, он
не для детей. 10. Передайте, пожалуйста, соль. — Пожалуйста. — Спасибо.
— Пожалуйста (не стоит). 11. Где мел? Дайте мне кусок мела. —
160
Пожалуйста. — Спасибо. — Не стоит. 12. Я ничего не могу найти по вкусу
сегодня. — Неужели? Сегодня столько вкусных вещей. Смотри, салат из
помидоров и огурцов, ветчина, колбаса. 13. Уже 6 часов. — Да что вы
говорите?! Пора идти домой. 14. Кого ты здесь ждешь? Уже 8.15. Пошли! —
Минуточку. Нина идет с нами. Я жду ее. — Я боюсь, мы опоздаем. Уже пора
быть в институте. — Ты права. Смотри, она уже идет. Побежали. Мы не
должны опаздывать. — Поторопись, Нина!
XXIX. Fill in prepositions if necessary and retell the text:
Tom and Nick are going ... the canteen to have dinner. It is only half ... one but
there are many people ... the canteen already. Some ... them are reading
newspapers, others are eating their dinner. The friends always enjoy ... their meals
there.
They go ... a small round table ... the window, take a menu-
card ... the next table and begin to read it. Tom does not want
to have any soup today. He is going to take some roast beef
and vegetables. Nick takes some cabbage soup ... himself, some
fried fish and potatoes. He goes over ... the buffet and soon
comes back ... some tomato and cucumber salad. Then a wait-
ress comes.............their table and brings them the soup, meat and
fish. She also brings some mustard, pepper and salt and puts a knife, fork,
spoon ... the table ... front... each person.
Nick wants to have some ice-cream ... dessert but as it is not ready yet, he
takes a piece ... cake and a glass ... tea. Tom orders some fruit as he always prefers
fruit... cakes and ice-cream.
The boys are usually satisfied ... their meals ... this canteen.
So they finish their dessert and pay the waitress ... the dinner.
Then they put... their coats and go.......................the street.
XXX.
Copy out the following joke in transcription, mark the
stresses and tunes. Retell the joke in indirect speech (in the Present
Indefinite Tense). Enlarge the joke and give your own ending to it:
T e a c h e r : Jimmie, why don't you wash your face? I can see what you had
for breakfast this morning. L i t t l e b o y : What was it? T e a c h e r : Eggs, of
course. L i t t l e b o y : Wrong, teacher, that was yesterday.
XXXI.
Translate the following into English:
1 Принеси воды. Принеси воду. 2. Не бери бумагу. Дай мне лист бумаги Дай мне
бумагу. 3. Мне бы хотелось немного варенья. Мне нравится варенье, оно очень вкусное.
4. Выпей стакан молока. Выпей молока. Выпей молоко (to have milk). 5. Положи
капусту на стол, я собираюсь варить обед. Купи капусты, я собираюсь сварить сегодня
щи. 6. Съешь еще каши. — Мне не нравится каша. Она слишком соленая. 7. Суп в кухне.
Принеси его сюда, пожалуйста. Мне очень хочется есть. Дайте мне супу. 8. Не покупай
161
эти огурцы, мне они не нравятся. Не покупай огурцов. 9. Мне хочется кофе. Мне бы
хотелось выпить еще чашку кофе. 10 Не забудь купить хлеба. Не оставляй хлеб на столе,
поставь его в буфет 11. Принесите, пожалуйста, мел. Дайте мне мелу, пожалуйста.
XXXII.
Compare the following Russian verbs and phrases to the corresponding
English ones. Use them in sentences of your own:
бояться, хотеть пить, хотеть есть, гордиться, сожалеть, радоваться, сердиться.
XXXIII.
Respond using the conversational phrases and add a phrase or two of your
own:
1. Will you bring a piece of chalk, please? 2.1 can't tell you anything about the
book. I don't remember it. 3. Shall I repeat the sentence? 4. Please come another
time. 5. You don't remem
ber this extract, do you? 6. May I open the window? 7. Shall I have a bite? 8. I
can't swim, you know. 9. Will you pass me the sugar, please? 10. Shall I wait for
you? 11. Will you give me a cigarette? 12. I don't eat ice-cream. 13. Shall I give
you more porridge? 14. You don't take beer, do you? 15. You help me so much,
thank you. 16. You can't speak German yet, can you? 17. Shall I pass you the
cake? 18. May I bring my younger sister with me? 19. Thank you for your warm
greetings. 20. He never remembers his duties. 21. Will you play back the tape and
repeat the text?
XXXIV.
Find a picture on the topic "Meals" for your discussion in class. Prepare 8
—10 questions which would help your fellow-students to describe the picture. Get ready
to speak on the topic "Meals". Use pictures, slides for illustration.
XXXIV.
Read the recipe and guess what we are going to have for dinner today:
Pour water into a sauce-pan, put some meat into it. While it boils peel and cut
beetroot, carrots, parsley and onions. Heat 2 spoonfuls of butter in the frying pan.
Fry vegetables in it, add sliced tomato or tomato puree and cover the lid on. Stir
the vegetables, add some water if necessary, let them simmer. Remove them into
the sauce-pan. After 15—20 minutes add some cut cabbage, salt, vinegar and
sugar to your taste. Put potatoes either whole or cut up. Boil if until it's quite
ready. Serve with sour cream.
Ingredients:
500 gr. meat
100 gr. onions vinegar
300 gr. beetroot
100 gr. fresh tomatoes or sugar
200 gr. fresh cabbage 1 spoonful of tomato puree salt
Answer: Ukranian borshch
XXXVI.
a) Watch Film Segment One "Surprise for Dinner" for general content,
b) Watch the film segment again to find English equivalents to the following:
162
я очень голоден; обед подан; мясное блюдо; баранья отбивная; жаркое;
съедобный; рыбные консервы; яичница; очень вкусный (восхитительный);
гореть; подгорать; сюрприз; в восторге; ничего не поделаешь; выиграть по
лотерее.
с) Answer your teacher's questions on the content of the film segment, d) Listen to
the sound track recording of Segment One. Get ready to describe the situation of the
segment and to reproduce the dialogue between Mr. and Mrs. Brown at table.
XXXVII.
a) Make up a dialogue on the following situation:
You ask your friend if he is hungry and when he is going to the canteen. You
are very busy and you can't leave the office earlier than 3 o'clock. You ask him to
buy a cake and two apples for you.
b) Get ready with a situation for your fellow-students to give it in the form of a
dialogue.
XXXVIII.
Find English proverbs concerning meals. Provide them with Russian
equivalents, ask your fellow-students to illustrate them. \
XXXVIII.
Describe: a) your Sunday breakfast; b) your dinner at home; c) the
procedure of laying the table for dinner.
LABORATORY WORK
I. a) Repeat the sentences after the tape, b) Make them interrogative
and negative.
II. Change the sentences into indirect speech. Begin each of them with He asks me ...
III. Supply short answers according to the model.
M o d e l : I am hungry. — So am I.
IV. Translate the sentences into English using the given word combinations.
V. Listen to the sentences on the tape. They are not true to fact. Correct them.
163
II. a) Listen to the text "The Browns' Dining-Room". Translate it sentence by
sentence in the intervals, b) Ask each other questions on the text, c ) Retell the text, d )
Write it down.
Lesson Th irteen
Grammar: The Present Perfect Tense.
Texts: A Student's Day. 2. Dialogue.
Phonetics: The High-Falling or the Rising-Falling Tone.
\1
STUDY THE FOLLOWING
T a b l e No. 1 THE PRESENT PERFECT TENSE
He (She) Mary
has left Cs left) has
John Father
not left
(hasn't left)
for the Institute.
for the country.
I
for England.
We
have left ('ve left)
for Moscow.
You
have not left
They
(haven't left)
Betty and Tom
he (she)
Has
Mary
4
John
father
for the Institute?
(not) left
for the country?
I
for England?
we
for Moscow?
Have
you they
Betty and Tom
He (She)
Mary
has already had
John
(Fs already had)
breakfast.
Father
lunch.
dinner.
I
supper.
164
We
tea.
You
have already had
an English lesson.
They
('ve already had)
Betty and Tom
He (She)Maryhas not hadJohn(hasn't had)breakfastFatherlunchdinneryet.
IsupperWeteaYouhave not hadan English lessonThey
Betty and Tom
CONTRACTED FORMS
We've left. — We haven't left. He's left. — He hasn't left.
GRAMMAR EXERCISES
I.
Study Substitution Table No. 1 and compose as many sentences
as you can.
II. Spell and transcribe the four forms of the following verbs:
be, do, have, see, strike, get, open, turn, wash, take, dry, clean, go, dress, put,
make, sweep, clear, stay, say, hurry, begin, prepare, come, work, press, iron,
gather, play, repair, knit, listen, hang, change, want, finish, know, help, fire, show.
III.
Answer the following questions:
1. Have you had dinner yet? 2. Have you had coffee today? 3. Has your
brother left for Kiev? 4. Has she ever met my elder brother? 5. Has Mary been to
the canteen yet? 6. Have you found anything to your taste on the menu? 7. Have
they paid for the lunch yet? 8. What book have you discussed today? 9. How
much have you paid for the supper? 10. You have learned this poem by heart,
haven't you? 11. You have made few mistakes in spelling, haven't you? 12. Where
165
have you found this book? 13. Which lesson have you learned by heart? 14. What
English books have you read yet?
IV. Choose the right verb:
to tell — to say
1. Mr. Smith -{(JJ$/lr. Brown it is time to have a break for lunch. 2. Mr.
Sandford u'.:Ms son he is going to London. 3. Mrs. Watson ... her children that
they must not go out on such a nasty day. 4. Susan ... her friends that she has a lot
of work to do. 5. Mrs. Smith ... her sons that she has already made toasts for
them. 6. John ... his brother is a perfect sportsman. 7. The boy ... he is not going
to stay at home on such a fine day. 8. Tom ... his friend that he is always up at
eight. 9. The mother ... that she has already served breakfast. 10. The teacher ...
the student that he has made only a few mistakes in pronunciation. 11. The boy ...
he has already aired the room. 12. The girl... her mother that she doesn't like
boiled eggs. 13. The monitor. . we are going to have a sitting of our English club
tonight. 14. Mike ... his little brother is a very hard-working boy.
V. Use the following sentences i n indirect speech. Make all the necessary changes:
1. Mary says to me: "I am already finishing this book." 2. The girl says to her
mother: "I don't like porridge." 3. Tom says to his friend: "I am going to the
canteen." 4. The boy says to me: "I'm thirsty." 5. The teacher says to the students:
"You must be ready for the written test tomorrow." 6. Nick says to his mother: "I
have already had сЦппег." 7. Boris says to me: "My father is leaving for Kiev." 8.
Nick says to me: "I have already paid for the lunch." 9. Ida says to her friends:
"There/is nothing to my taste on the menu." 10. The girl says to her sister: "I
haven't finished my supper yet." 11. Tom says: "I can speak two foreign
languages: English and Spanish." 12. Mary asks: "Has the bell gone?" 13. Tom
asks: "Is Mary staying at home?" 14. Nick says to Ann: "Don't forget to air the
room." 15. John asks his father: "Has she left?" 16. Tom asks Mary: "What is our
next lesson?"
TEXT 1
.
A STUDENTS DAY
1. What js there in this picture? There is a bedroom in it. Is it„still darkTn the
room? No, it is already light. What time is it now? The clock has just struck seven.
Who(m) do you see in
this picture? We see Mary in it. Is she still asleep? No, she is not. She is
already up, she has opened the window and turned on the radio. She is doing her
morning exercises to the music. What is she going to do next? She is going to
have a wash.
2. It is a quarter past seven. Mary is in the bathroom. Shei has just taEen a
cold shower, dried herself on the towel and cleaned her teeth. Now she Js doing
166
her hair before the looking-glass. What is she going to do next? She is going to
dress.
3. Mary is in the bedroom again. She has already brushed her clothes and
shoes. What is she doing now? She is dressing. She has just put on her dress. She
is putting on her shoes now. Has she made her bed yet? Yes, she has.
4. It is a quarter to eight The family has already had breakfast. While Mary is
sweeping the floor with a broom her mother is washing up. Is Mary going to stay
at home? No, she is not She is going to the Institute.
5. It is eight o'clock. Mary is hurrying to the Institute. She is a first-year
student of the English faculty. Her classes begin at half past eight. Mary is never
late for her classes. Does she walk to the Institute? No, she does not. She goes to
the Institute by Metro. How long does it take her to get to the Institute? It takes
her half an hourjto 9et there.
6. Jt is two <Ус1осю Has the bell gone? Yes, it has. The classes are over.
Mary and her friends are having dinner. Are they going home after dinner? No,
they are not. Mary is going to the laboratory to have some practice in
pronunciation. Her friends are going to the reading-room to prepare their
homework there.
167
168
2. It is nearly six o'clock in the evening. Mary has just come home after a
walk. She is having a short rest now. She is reading. Is Mary going to do any
work about the house? Yes, she is She is going to iron her father's shirts.
3. It is ten minutes to ten. The working day is over. The family are all together,
Mary is playing the piano. Her brother David is repairing the TV-set. Their
mother is knitting. Their father is going to turn on the radio and listen to the news.
The family are not going to bed yet.
TEXT 2 D I A L O G U E
E d w a r d : Hello, Mary!
M a r y : Hello, Eddy. It's so nice to see you. Come in, please. (Edward
comes in, takes o f f his coat and hangs it on the hook.)
E d w a r d : Look here, Mary, there's a concert this evening at the club. You
are sure to like it. What about going there together?
M a r y : Oh, I'm sorry I can't. I'm making a new dress. I want to wear it at our
party and I haven't finished it yet.
E d w a r d : Oh, dear, we haven't been to the club for ages. Besides, it's a pity
to stay at home on such a fine day, you know.
M a r y : All right. Eddy. But will you help me before we go? E d w a r d : Oh,
yes, why not?
M a r y : Something has gone wrong with my electric iron. (Mary gives
the iron to Edward.) Can you put it right?
E d w a r d : Let me have a look at it. (Edward examines the iron.) Well,
there's nothing the matter with the iron. I'm sure it's the plug.
(Edward repairs the plug. Mary goes out to change. Then she
comes back to Edward.) E d w a r d : Here you are.
M a r y : How clever of you! Thank you ever so much! E d w a r d : Not at
all. Are you ready to go now? M a r y : Just a moment! I must switch off the light.
E d w a r d : Hurry up then. We're going to be late, I'm afraid. M a r y : I'm ready.
Come on. (Mary and Edward hurry out.)
VOCABULARY NOTES
to be asleep спать; Ant. to be awake
to turn on (off) the light (electricity, water, gas, TV-set, radio, tape-recorder, lamp,
tap) включать (выключать) свет (электричество, воду, газ, телевизор, радио,
магнитофон, лампу, кран); Syn. to switch on (off).
169
to do \
a lesson housework an exercise the room (flat, house) one's hair shopping,
ironing, washing, etc. good (harm)
to make /
a mistake
a report
a dress
tea
a fire
a present
money
friends (enemies) bed
to (the) music под музыку
wash vt мыть, to have a wash мыться; to wash one's hair мыть голову; to wash
clothes (linen) стирать одежду, белье; to wash up мыть посуду
to take (to have) a bath (shower) принимать ванну, душ to dry (oneself) on (with)
a towel вытирать(ся) полотенцем clean vt чистить, очищать от грязи; to clean
one's teeth (nails, clothes, shoes) чистить зубы (ногти, одежду, ботинки); to clean
the blackboard стирать с доски; to clean the room (the flat) убирать комнату
(квартиру); to clean the window протирать окно
brush vt чистить (щеткой); to brush one's clothes (shoes, teeth) чистить
(щеткой) одежду (ботинки, зубы)
to put smth. on надевать что-л., е. д. Put your coat on. It's cold. Ant. to take
smth. off снимать что-л., e. g. He took his hat off and entered.
sweep (swept, swept) подметать a first-year
student первокурсник
classes л pi. занятия; in class на занятиях, е. д. We have done this exercise in
class, after classes, e, g. What are you going to do after classes?
to be late for опаздывать, e. g. Don't be late for the lecture,
go (went, gone) w идти; to go by bus (tram, train, Metro) ехать на
автобусе (трамвае, поезде, метро); to go to bed ложиться спать It takes her
(half an hour) ... Потребуется полчаса е. д. It
doesn't take him long to prepare his homework. How long has it taken
you to read this book?
get (got, got) v t / i становиться; to get to a place добираться ку-да-л.; to get
up вставать
Has the bell gone? Звонок был?
to be over кончиться, e. g. The lesson is over.
170
practice n практика, тренировка; to have practice in smth. практиковаться,
тренироваться; practise vt
iron vt гладить; to iron linen гладить белье; Syn. to press clothes (not linen)
утюжить; (electric) iron n (электрический) утюг
to play the piano (the guitar, the violin) играть на рояле (гитаре, скрипке),
to play chess (tennis) играть в шахматы (теннис)
repair vt чинить; Syn. to put right
news n (plural in form, but treated as singular) новости, e. g. What's the
news? Что нового? the news последние известия It is so nice to see you. Очень
приятно тебя видеть. Look here, Mary ... Послушай, Мэри...
sure adj\ to be (feel) sure of smth. быть уверенным в чём-л., е. д. We are
sure of our future. We are sure that he will come. You are sure to like it. = You will
certainly like it.
for ages целую вечность
Something has gone wrong with ... Что-то случилось с ... to have a look at
smth. взглянуть на что-то There's nothing the matter with the iron. Утюг в
порядке. How clever of you! Умница! So kind of you! Так мило с вашей
стороны!
TOPICAL VOCABULARY
lobe short of time = to be pressed for time; spare time; on the way home, on
the way to..., in town, out of town; to be through with smth; to look through smth.
(newspaper, article, text); to look forward to sipth. (doing smth.); to manage to do
smth., to look in; to listen in; to watch a TV programme; to go to the laundry; the
hairdresser, the barber, the cleaner's; to have one's hair done, one's clothes cleaned,
to have a manicure
Compound verbs have usually two primary stresses; e. g. She is V putting 'on
her xshoes. I must V switch 'off the xlight.
EXERCISES
I.
a) The material below it to be prepared for reading. Mark the
stresses and tunes. Concentrate your attention on the vowel [t>] and
the consonant [h]. b) Let your fellow-student read the exercise aloud
for you to detect his errors in sonnds and tell him what must be
done to eliminate them:
171
[о] 1. "What an odd clock," said Tom.
2. Lots and lots of clocks and watches have gone wrong.
3. Molly's got a spot on her frock.
4. A watched pot never boils.
5. Honesty is the best policy.
[hi 1.
Helen's husband hates hot tea.
2. He held her hand in his.
3. The horn of the hunter was heard on the hill.
4. Healthful habits make healthy bodies.
5. He that has ears to hear let him hear.
6. My heart's in the Highlands. My Heart is not
here.
II. Before you start working at the text practise the sounds in the following words and
word combinations:
A. 1. [rjj is going to, is putting on, is sweeping the floor, is washing the dishes.
2. a) Alveolars replaced by dentals: opened^the window, on^the radio, inwthe
bathroom, aboutwthe house.
b) Loss of plosion: what^time, and^turned, and^clean-ed, just^taken,
just^come.
c) No glottal stop: is^awake, has^opened, turned^on.
B. 1. [A] such a fine day, nothing the matter.
2. a) Alveolars replaced by dentals: on^the hook, at^the club, repairs^the
plug.
b) Loss of plosion: about w going, haven't w been to, want^to have, goes out^to
change.
c) No glottal stop: takes^off, what^about, goes^out, not^at^all.
III.
1. a) Listen to the recording of the text "A Student's Day**. Mark the stresses
and tunes, b) Practise the text for test reading. Listen to the recording very carefully until
you can say it in exactly the same way.
* 2. a) Listen to the recording of the dialogue. Mark the stresses and tunes, b)
Practise the dialogue for test reading. Listen to the recording very carefully until you
can say it in exactly the same way. c) Memorize the dialogue and dramatize it.
IV. Transcribe the following sentences, mark the stresses and tunes and picture them
on the staves:
1. Hello, Mary! 2. Look here, Mary, there is a concert this evening at our club.
3. Well, we haven't been there for ages. 4. Let me have a look at it. 5. We're going
to be late, I'm afraid.
V. Answer the following questions:
172
1. (At) what time do you get up? 2. Is it light when you get up? 3. You do your
morning exercises to music, don't you? 4. What do you do in the bathroom? 5.
What do you do with a tooth-brush (a towel, a comb)? 6. Do you take a shower in
the morning or before you go to bed? 7. What do you clean your teeth with? 8.
What do you dry yourself on? 9. You do your hair before a looking-glass, don't
you? 10. At what time do you usually have breakfast? 11. What must you do with
the dishes after having a meal? 12. What do you usually do before you leave the
University? 13. What do you clean your flat with? 14. (At) what time do you leave
for the University? 15. It takes you long to get to the University, doesn't it? 16.
How long does it take you to get to the University? 17. Do you go to the
University by bus? 18. (At) what time do your classes begin? 19. What do you do
when the classes are over? 20. Where do you usually have dinner? 21. Do you
prepare for your English lessons at home or do you prefer to work in the
University reading-room? 22. How long does it take you to do your homework?
23. Do you work at the laboratory every day? 24. When do you usually come
home? 25. What do you usually do when you come home? 26. In what way do
you help your mother about the house? 27. What do you do with an iron (a
vacuum-cleaner, a broom) ? 28. What do you usually do in the evening? 29. Do
you often go to the theatre or to the cinema? 30. You are fond of skating, aren't
you? 31. What do you do when you stay at home in the evening? 32. Do your
friends often come to see you? 33. How do you spend the time when your friends
come to see you? 34. You listen to the news every day, don't you? 35. What do you
do when you are going to listen to the latest news? 36. (At) what time do you
usually go to bed? 37. Who does the shopping in your family?
VI. a) Write the interrogative and negative forms of the following sen-
tences, b) Ask and answer questions on the following statements as in the
model. Use the Present Perfect Tense. Add a sentence or two to develop a
situation.
/ M o d e l : He has already repaired the iron. Has he repaired the cassette-
recorder yet? No, he hasn't. But he is sure to do it soon.
1. Mary has already ironed the table-cloth. 2.1 have already turned off the
light. 3. The girls have already done the room. 4. It takes me long to prepare for
my English lesson. 5. It has taken Peter five minutes to shave. 6. We are going to
the skating-rink after classes. 7. My sister is very good at sewing. 8. Peter is going
to repair our TV-set. 9. We are going for a walk after classes. 10.1 must do some
knitting today.
VII.
a) Write questions to the parts of the sentences in bold type, b) Each sentence
describes a situation in a concise way. Find out some more details about it by asking
questions. Work in pairs:
1. I have dinner at two. 2. I leave for the Institute at eight o'clock. 3.1 go to
the Institute by bus. 4. It has taken me three hours to do my homework. 5.
David has already repaired the radio. 6. It has taken me a fortnight to knit this
173
sweater. 7.1 am going to have some practice in intonation at the laboratory.. 8. I
am going to the iheatre today. 9. Robert is going to press his coat. 10.1 do my
room with a vacuum-cleaner once a week. 11. You needn't switch on the light, it
is quite light. 12. Mary has gone to be&>43. It takes me a quarter of an hour to
have breakfast. 14. I lake a bath every morning. 15.1 go to the Institute by
Metro. 16. We are going to the skating-rink. 17.1 do my hair with a comb.
VIII.
Rewrite the sentences in the Present Perfect using the adverbs already,
just.
Model:My brother is going to repair the cassette-recorder. My brother has
already repaired the cassette-recorder.
1.1 am going to have some practice at the laboratory. 2.1 am going to clean the
flat. 3. John is going to shave. 4. They are going to have a rest in the country. 5.
Ann is going to turn off the gas. 6. The boy is going to brush his clothes, isn't he?
7.1 am going to turn on the light. 8. His family are going to listen to the seven
o'clock news, aren't they? 9. Who is going to have a bite?
10. What are you' going to do? 11. They are going to stay out of town for a
fortnight. 12. I'm going to look through his article.
IX. Make up as many sentences as you can according to the following models. Use
the words, word combinations and phrases of the lesson.
M o d e l 1: I am (not) going to turn on the light. I am (not) turning on the
light. I have (already, just) turned on the light. (I have not turned on the light yet.)
M o d e l 2; Are you going to turn on the light? Are you turning on the light?
Have you turned on the light (yet) ?
X. FiU in articles wherever necessary:
1. Mary has taken ... cold shower and is going to dress. 2. Let me have ...
look at your translation. 3.1 always do ... room with... vacuum-cleaner. 4. Let's
turn on... cassette-recorder and dance to ... music. 5. What are your fellow-
students doing? — Mary is playing ... piano. Peter and David are playing ...
chess. 6. I don't go to ... Institute by ... bus. I prefer to go there by ... vletro. 7.
How long does it take you to do ... homework? }. Something has gone wrong
with ... vacuum-cleaner. I am sure t's ... plug. 9. It is not pleasant to go by. .
Metro on such ... fine lay. Let's go on ... foot. 10. Will you turn on ... radio? I
should ike to listen to ... seven o'clock news. 11. It's ... pity you have lever
been to... England. 12. My parents are still in... town.
XL Fill in prepositions or adverbs wherever necessary:
1. Ann begins to work fttfhalf past eight. At half past twelve she goes .>Cto
lunch. After lunch she comes back*Ј$her office and work<S^*i|our o'clock. At
four o'clock she puts{U|her hat and coat and goes r^home. 2. The students .jftour
174
group are never a minute latej^he classes. 3. It doesn't take me long to get 70 the
Institute. 4. When do you usually get 5. Will you turn Mhe ight? The children
are going bed. 6. We have turned и She :assette-recorder and are going to dance
r.i the music. 7. Vvlien corpe :A home I take Л my coat and hang it V^the hook.
Then go |^the bathroom, turn OAthe tap, wash my hands and dry hem >/V^he
towel. 8. What do you press your clothes >„иЛ" ). Have you cleaned ... the
table yet? 10. Let's hurry or we'll be ate hif the first lesson. 11. What kind of dress
are you going to ivear^rour party? 12. The button has come ".{^ my coat. — Shall
I sew it .\for you? 13. Why have you turned ...the radio? —lam going to
listen ... the seven o'clock news. 14. Are you going ..; bus? 15. HurryI'm short...
time. 16. Are you through ... your housework?
XII. Fill in the missing words:
A. 1. Something has gone ... with the cassette-recorder. Can you put it...? 2. She
is not up yet; she is still.... 3. The classes are
over. I am ... to go home. 4. I am ready to have a hot .... ... my
teeth and go to bed. 5. If you want to have a let's go for a walk. 6. I have ... my
hands and now I am going to ... them on the towel. 7, Before putting on my
clothes and shoes I always... them. 8. While the mother serves breakfast Susan and
Peter ... the flat and ... the beds. 9.1 am going to present my brother with a sweater
which I have ... myself. 10. In the evening we usually have some music or ... to
the radio or ... the TV programme. Sometimes we ... to see our friends or our
friends ... to see us. Once a week we go to the cinema or to the theatre. 11 . Do
you usually sit up late or do you ... to bed early? 12. Peter is a good
sleeper, he.........late and often has no time for breakfast. 13. If
the water feels cold on winter mornings you must rub yourself with the ... . 14.
There is a ... this evening at the club. 15. Something has gone wrong with the ... .
Will you have a ... at it? 16. Please, turn on (off) the ...! 17. Have you cleaned
the ...? 18. I'm ... for time, will you help me? /
B. 1. He is forty. His wife is thirty^five. He is*T. than his wife. 2. Dayiri is ten.
Bob is eight. Bob is^than David. 3. Se^nteen is\.f than ten. 4. In August
the/weather is generally^.: than in October. 5. In May the days arethan in March.
6. This book is ... interesting than that one. 7.1 think this exercise is the ...
difficult. 8. Hpwareyou? — Thank you. ГпкС today. 9.1 know German L than
English.
C. 1. ... your lessons and be off. 2. You look so smart tqdayi Where have you'...
your hair? 3. How could you possibly"... so many mistakes in your dictation? 4. If
you want to make a good sportsman you must ^. morning exercises every day. 5.
On her way home motty^r usually ... some shopping. 6. I'm pressed for time. Will
youL... the room yourself? 7. Skating will ... a lot of good. 8. I'd like you to ...
friends with all the students of your group. 9. Isn't it your turn to... a report today?
XIII. Form one sentence of the given two using the following model.
175
M o d e l : This mistake is gross. That mistake is not so gross. That mistake is
not so gross as this one.
1. These apples are tasty. Those apples are not so tasty. 2. The Volga is long.
The Don is not so long. 3. My house is tall. Your house is not so tall. 4. Tom's
pronunciation is good. Your pronunciation is worse. 5. The winter in Moscow is
cold. The winter in London is not so cold. 6. Your mother is yoting. My mother is
not so young.
b XIV. Form as many sentences as T
you o
m
can using the f to
oll do
owi t
n h
g e
t
a f
blla
e t?
s:
)
mea quarter of an hourto get home A
(t nn
o thehimhalf ant o
h c
o l
u e
rI a
n n
sti tthe
ute w
).It i ndow
take s?
sMaryan
h H
ou ow
rto lpong
repa doe
re fo sr tiht eta
u k
saen hour an ydou
a halfEnglish le to ge
sson. t t
yo o
ul tohe
ng tcol ub
rep?air the
radio.them
them
to have dinner?
M o d e l : I have already swept the floor. — Have you?
I haven't aired the room yet. — Haven't you?
1. Mary has gone by bus. 2. The bell hasn't gone yet. 3. I've had much practice
in English. 4. Something has gone wrong with the gas stove. 5. I haven't done my
meMaryto get home.It doesn't, takeBobto cook supper.uslongto learn the dialogue
byyouheart.themto take a shower.
XV. a) Respond to the following sentences as in the model.
washing yet. 6. She has just come. 7. I've done a lot to help him. 8. I haven't been
to the club for ages. 9. I've never been late for the lectures. 10. I've already looked
through the article.
b) Continue the exercise suggesting your own verbal context.
XVI.
Complete the following sentences and let your fellow-student
respond to them:
1. I arn (not) going to ... . 2. Are you going to ...? 3. It has taken m& ... . 4.
Something has gone wrong with ... . 5. David is sure to ... . 6. Are you sure to ...?
7. Look here, Mary ... . 8. I'm afraid ... . 9. I should like to ... . 10. It is so nice
to ... . 11. What about ...? 12. It doesn't take me long to .... 13. Has it taken you
long to ...? 14. How long does it take ...? 15. It's a pity to ... . 16. It's a pity you
176
haven't ... .17. It's a pity he can't ... . 18. How clever of you to ... . 19.1 look
forward to ... . 20. He can't manage to ....
XVII.
Think of stimulating phrases to which those below could be replies. Work in
pairs:
1. Thank you ever so much. 2. No more, thank you. 3. I'm afraid, I can't. 4.
Certainly! 5. Here you are. 6. Just a moment/ 7. It is out of the question. 8. I'd love
to. 9. That's all right.
XVIII.
a) Respond to the following sentences. Work in pairs, b) Continue the
exercise suggesting your own verbal context of the same type:
1. May I come in? 2. What about going to the country together? 3. Will you
help me, Nick? 4. I've read many English books this month. 5. I should like to see
that magazine. 6. Shall I air the room? 7. Will you have another cup of tea? 8. Let
me have a look at it. 9. Something has gone wrong with my ball-pen. -
XIX.
Translate the following sentences into English:
A. 1. Петр еще спит? — Нет, он уже проснулся. 2. Когда я прихожу домой,
я иду в ванную, открываю кран, мою руки и вытираю их полотенцем. 3. Вы
должны проветривать (to air) спальню, прежде чем ложиться спать. 4 Мать
просит мальчика взять щетку и подмести пол. 5. Вы ездите в институт на
автобусе? 6. Что ты обычно делаешь после занятий? 7. Сними пальто и
повесь его на крючок. 8. Давай потанцуем? — С удовольствием. 9. Ты
обычно делаешь зарядку под музыку? — Да. 10. Сколько времени у тебя
уходит на то, чтобы добраться до института? — Около получаса 11. На то,
чтобы причесаться и одеться, у меня уходит четверть часа. 12. Что-то
случилось с телевизором, ,рн не работает
13.
Включи (to plug in), пожалуйста, утюг и отупб#сь: отцу пиджак
14.
Что ты сейчас делаешь? — Я глажу белье. 15. В восемь часов
отец надевает пальто и шляпу и идет на работу. 16. Что ты собираешься
делать? — (Я) собираюсь принять ванну. 17. Пойдем на каток1 — Боюсь, что
(я) не смогу. 18. Давай, я помогу тебе убрать комнату. 19. Сколько времени
ты затратила на подготовку лабораторной работы № 12? 20. Очень жарко. Я
бы хотела принять холодный душ. 21. Мальчик уже кончил есть кашу и пьет
кофе с бутербродом. 22. Я открыла окно, чтобы проветрить комнату. 23. Ты
уже связала свитер? — Нет еще. Я собираюсь кончить его завтра. 24. Скорее,
а то (ог) мы опоздаем на первый урок. 25. Где твоя сестра? — Она моет
посуду на кухне. 26. Мальчик попросил мать пришить ему на пальто
пуговицу. 27. Давай включим магнитофон и послушаем музыку. 28. Что ты
делаешь? — (Я) готовлюсь к уроку английского языка. — Что ты
собираешься делать потом? — (Я) собираюсь поиграть на рояле. 29. Ты
слышала последние известия? — Да. 30. Что ты делаешь? — (Я) постирала
белье, а сейчас глажу его. 31. Давайте соберемся после занятий и
прогуляемся вместе. 32. Мне нравится платье, которое было на тебе вчера,
177
33.
Почему в комнате темно? — Что-то случилось с лампой.
34.
Ты уверена в том, что выключила свет? — Да.
В. 1 Сейчас в деревне почти каждая семья имеет радиоприемник или
телевизор. Поэтому люди могут посмотреть телевизор или послушать радио
дома. Некоторые из них идут в читальню, чтобы почитать книгу, газету или
журнал. Другие идут в клуб, если там концерт или идет новый фильм. 2.
Хорошо ли для ребенка просиживать целый вечер перед телевизором? —
Конечно, нет. Дети должны проводить больше времени на воздухе (out-of-
doors) 3. Что вы обычно делаете по вечерам? — Обычно бываем дома. Раз
или два в неделю мы ходим на каток, в театр или кино. Моя сестра очень
любит музыку и часто бывает на концертах. Иногда мы смотрим телевизор,
если в программе (on the programme) есть что-нибудь интересное. — Вы
идете куда-нибудь (to go out) сегодня вечером2 — Не думаю. — Тогда
пойдемте со мной в наш университетский клуб. Там будет концерт. Вам он
наверняка понравится. — Спасибо, с удовольствием. 4. Что-то случилось с
приемником. Он не работает. — Дай мне посмотреть. — Ты думаешь, что ты
можешь его починить? — Конечно. — Сколько тебе на это потребуется
времени? — Совсем немного. Готово. Пожалуйста. — Какой ты молодец!
Большое спасибо! — Не стоит.
XX. Make up short dialogues using the given statements:
M о d e 1: A: I have done a lot of work about the house. B: What do you tell
me?
A: I tell you that I have done a lot of work about the1
house. B: What does A tell В ?
D: A tells В that she has done a lot of work about the house.
1. I have never been to London. 2. Mary has already had some practice at the
laboratory. 3. We don't like this poem. 4. They are leaving for the Crimea
tomorrow. 5.1 am not going to stay at home. 6. It takes me half an hour to get to
the skating-rink.
7. My parents always listen to the seven o'clock news.
8. I can sew a button on for you. 9. There is a new film on this evening at the
club. 10. Nick can repair your cassette-recorder very easily.
XXI. Read and translate the following. Pick out all the words, word combinations and
phrases that can be used for the topic "Housework" or "The Daily Programme".
I
D a v i d : Look, dear, a button has come off my coat. M a r y : Have you got
the button? D a v i d: Yes, I have.
M a r y : Well, bring me my sewing-basket from the next room.
D a v i d : Here you are!
178
M a r y : Thank you. I must get a needle and some thread.
D a v i d : Shall I thread the needle for you? It is not an easy thing to get the
thread through the eye of the needle, is it?
M a r y : Ah, I've done it. Now take your coat off and I'll sew the button on for
you.
II
This is my daily programme. I wake at about seven o'clock and then it is time
for me to get up, I like a cold shower every morning, so I put on my dressing-
gown and slippers and go to the bathroom. The water feels very cold on winter
mornings, but I rub myself hard with the towel and soon I feel quite warm.
Then I shave, brush my teeth, wash my face and go back to the bedroom to
dress. I brush and comb my hair, take a clean handkerchief out of the drawer and
have breakfast at a quarter past eight. After breakfast I sit and read my morning
paper. If the
weather is fine, I usually walk to my office. At nine o'clock the day's work
begins. At twelve-thirty I have a break for lunch. I generally finish my work
about six o'clock. Then I have a cup of tea and a biscuit, and in summer I spend an
hour or so out-of-doors, play a few games of tennis or volley-ball.
We have supper about seven-thirty or eight o'clock and then we sit and talk, or
listen to the wireless. Often in summer we take out the car and go for a run in the
country; in winter we go to the cinema or the theatre. But that is not often. I have a
lot of work to do, and usually after supper I read or write until twelve or one
o'clock.
XXII.
a) Watch Film Segment Two "Early in the Morning" for general content, b)
Watch the Him segment again to find English eqnivalents to the following:
вы уже встали?; отправляться за покупками; осматривать
достопримечательности; беспокоить, портить, нарушать; звучит как...; регби;
электрическая бритва; чинить; электрическое оборудование; ничего
особенного; как следует побриться; неслыханно! (вот так так!);
любительский фильм.
с) Answer your teacher's questions on the content of the film segment, d) Listen to the
sound track recording of Segment Two and speak on the Browns' activities throughout
the day.
XXIII.
a) Make up a dialogue on the following situation:
You ask your friend when she usually gets up and at what time she leaves her
house. You ask her if she does any work about the house in the morning and how
long it takes her to get to the Institute.
b) Suggest a situation for your fellow-student to give it in the form of a dialogue.
179
XXIV.
Make up a conversation using the vocabulary of the lesson and
conversational phrases.
XXV.
a) Speak on the topic "Housework", b) Give an account of your own daily
programme (your father's).
XXIV.
a) Think of a proverb which could be applied to your daily round, b) Make
up a conversation with your fellow-student to finish it with this proverb.
7 Заказ 1271
193
LABORATORY WORK
I. a) Repeat the sentences after the tape, b) Make the sentences interrogative and
negative.
II. a) Listen to the questions, answer them and record your answer in the intervals, b)
Listen to the record and correct the mistakes if you have any.
I. Give the Present Perfect in the sentences. Make all the necessary changes.
III. Translate the sentences into English using the words and word combinations of
the lesson.
IV. Listen to the sentences and change them into indirect speech. Make all the
necessary changes.
I. Translate the words into English. Spell and transcribe them.
VII. Spell and transcribe the four forms of the verbs.
VIII.
Listen to the disjunctive questions. They are not true to fact.
Correct them.
IX. Listen to the text and write a dictation.
IX. Listen to the dialogue "Morning and Evening**. Mark the stresses and tunes.
Repeat the text alter the model. Learn it by heart.
Lesson Fourteen
Grammar: The Past Indefinite Tense. The Past Continuous Tense. Statements in Indirect
Speech.
Texts: 1. Our University (A Letter). 2. Dialogue.
Phonetics: Logical Stress in Expressive Speech.
180
STUDY THE FOLLOWING
When Whydidwe you
he (she) theycome? rest? work? meet?I
H W
e eYo
(Sh u
e g
) o
Wta
e n
Y En
ou g
Tli
hsh
e b
ydio
do
kye
not st
(d e
i rd
dn'a
t y
)l .T
e h
a e
ve stud
Mo en
scotsre
w b a
e d
g a
i
n l e
T tt
e e
xtro
1n
5 Mo
fini nd
sh a
t y
h .T
e h
l e
e
a
sson
monitorbroughta newspaperthe other day.Her parents
)
stay at homeyesterday, the other day. last week.
с)
T ab l e No. 2
THE PAST CONTINUOUS TENSE
Our cousin My sister Her friendwas (not)reading a newspaper playing the piano
a listening to the newswhen he came, when I rang
)
her up. at that time.The girlswere (not)
b)youplaying chesswhen he returned?Weretheyhaving supperat that moment?
taking a shower
^STATEMENTS IN INDIRECT SPEECH
Tab l e No. 1 T H E PAST INDEFINITE TENSE
1. He said: "I am busy today."
He said (that) he was busy that day.
2. He said to me: "I know this young man." He told me that
he knew that young man.
SPELLING RULES
181
Regular verbs form the Past Indefinite Tense by adding the suffix -ed to the
infinitive. Observe the following spelling rules:
1. The mute -e is dropped before adding the suffix -ed: to taste —tasted.
2. The final consonant is doubled before the suffix -ed if it is preceded by a
vowel letter expressing a short stressed vowel sound: to stop — stopped.
3. The final -1 is doubled if it is preceded by a vowel letter expressing a short
vowel sound: to travel — travelled.
4. The final -y is changed into i before adding the suffix -ed if it is preceded
by a consonant letter: to try — tried.
5. The letter -r is doubled if the final syllable is stressed: pre'fer — preferred,
but 'offer — 'offered.
GRAMMAR EXERCISES
I. Study Substitution Tables No. 1, 2 and compose as many sentences as you can.
II. Spell and transcribe the four forms of the following verbs:
tell, go, come, walk, give, take, put, say, speak, hear, see, read, write, finish,
begin, make, show, enter, teach, study, find, get, leave, stay, pay, eat, drink, prefer,
ask, answer, pass, stop, prepare, travel, examine, offer, plan, carry, occur, quarrel.
III.
Express the idea in the past (change the adverbials if necessary):
1. My sister works hard at her English this year. 2. They must write many
exercises at home. 3. The students speak only English at the lesson. 4. Our lessons
begin at 12 on Thursday. 5. Our family gets up at 8 o'clock on Sunday. 6.1 usually
prepare my homework in the morning. 7. Before going to bed I can rest for half an
hour and listen to the news. 8. We often have to work together. 9. We gather at the
club every Saturday. 10. The girl reads about 20 pages every day. 11. In the
morning she takes a cold shower, dries herself on the towel and cleans her teeth
before she puts on her clothes. 12. We don't understand these words. 13. The boys
do morning exercises every day. 14. Why don't you turn off the cassette-recorder
when you leave the room? 15. How long does it take you to get to the theatre? —
It takes me half an hour to get there.
IV. Give the interrogative and negative forms of the following
sentences:
1. Ann got a good mark yesterday. 2. We translated the text two days ago. 3.
He was translating the text at that time. 4. He
came home late last night. 5. She finished her work half an hour ago. 6. They
had breakfast at 8.7. They were waiting for us then,
8. My friend saw this film last week. 9. He was looking at the people in the
hall. 10. There was a mistake in his test. 11. Ann was having dinner at six o'clock.
1 2. They had to take four exams,
182
V.
Answer the following questions:
1. Have you bought this book? 2. When did you buy it? 3, Have you seen this
play? 4. When did you see it? 5. Have you made this dress yourself? 6. When did
you make it? 7, What were you doing at 7 last night? 8. Were you knitting at that
moment? 9. What were you reading when I entered? 10, What were you singing
when he came? 11. Why were you laughing when you saw him? 12. Why was the
baby crying? 13. What were you doing when we rang you up? 14. What were they
writing when the teacher entered? 15, What was he listening to when you called
him? 16. What were you reading when the door-bell rang? 17. Where were you
going to when I stopped you? 18. Where was the boy running when you saw him?
VI,
Use the following sentences in indirect speech:
1. He said: "I want to see you today." 2. She said: "I am free tonight. May I
come to see you?" 3. Mother said to me: "I feel bad today." 4. The students of
Group 106 said to us: "We have four exams this spring." 5. The pupil said to the
teacher: "I can do my homework after dinner." 6. The teacher said: "You work
hard, I know. You are a good boy." 7. The teacher said to the students: "We have
18 hours of English a week." 8. The dean said at the meeting: "The first-year
students must work well."
9. The girl asked: "May I wait for my friend here?" 10. She said: "Are you
going to the club together?" 11. The old man said to her: "You can sing perfectly."
12. My sister said to me: "You look very well, I hope you are all right?" 13. The
girl said to me: "I am going to become a doctor." 14. Some of our students said to
him: "You are not right. You don't work hard enough."
15.
He said to us: "I agree, I don't always work systematically,"
16.
My uncle said to us: "I buy several newspapers every day."
17.
"You are an excellent cook. Everything is so tasty," my guest said.
VII.
Put the verbs in brackets in the correct tense-form:
1. They (to go) to the Maly Theatre last week. 2. They (to be) to the theatre
twice this week. 3. He (to come) home, (to have) a short rest, (to read) an article
from the latest magazine and (to begin) to prepare his lessons. 4. When (to return)
your friend from the South? — She (to return) yesterday. — You (to go) to the
station to meet her? — No, I (can) not. I (to be) too busy. 5. With whom (to
discuss) you this question yesterday? 6. I (to see) this film this week and I like it
very much. 7. When I (to enter) the kitchen, I (to see) that my mother (to stand) at
the table and (to cut) some cabbage. She (to cook) dinner. 8. As soon as I (to hear)
a cry I (to run) out of the room and (to see) that the child (to lie) on the ground
and (to cry). "What (to happen)? (To hurt) you yourself?" 9. I (to want) to get
tickets to the Bolshoi Theatre. — You (to want) to hear the new opera? (Not to
hear) you it yet? 10. What (to go) you to do? — Now I (to go) to have a bite. I (to
have) not any dinner today. 11. As soon as I (to see) him, I (to understand) that he
183
(to work) hard. He (to think) of something very important for him and (not to
notice) anything. 12, Your brother (to return) from the North? — Yes, he (to
come) two days ago. 13. (To be) you to the Crimea? When (to be) you there? — I
(to stay) there for two months in 1979. I (to remember) I (to like) everything
there, and most of all I (to like) the sea.
VIII.
a) Compose sentences of your own using have { h a d ) to in the affirmative,
interrogative and negative forms, b) Ask one another questions and answer them as in the
models.
M o d e l 1: Did he have to prepare for his entrance exams? — Yes, he had to
take four exams.
M o d e l 2: Did he have to wait long? — No, he didn't have to stay there.
TEXT 1 OUR UNIVERSITY
( A Letter)
Dear Helen,
Don't be angry with me for my long silence, but really I was too busy to
write.
As you know, I left school in June and began to prepare for my entrance
exams to the University. As both my mother and father are teachers I have made
up my mind to be a teacher too. I think teaching is a noble profession.
I had to take four exams and passed all of them with excellent marks. So I'm
glad to tell you that now I'm a first-year student at the Moscow State Teacher
Training University.
I should like to show you the main building of our University. I can't help
admiring this fine old building with its beautiful columns. The first students
entered it more than 120 years ago.
It goes without saying we, students, are very proud of this fact.
There are 18 faculties at our University which train teachers in many subjects:
Russian, Literature, Mathematics, Physics, Geography, Chemistry, Biology,
Foreign languages and others. Many well-known professors teach at our
University.
We have good libraries and reading-rooms and for those who go in for sports
there are good gymnasiums and a stadium.
At present we have quite a lot of work as we have English practice, Grammar
and Phonetics, Linguistics, History of our native land and other subjects. There is
an English speaking club at our faculty. It gives us a good opportunity to master
the language, but I don't take part in it yet. I'm working hard at my
pronunciation. There is a good language laboratory at our faculty where we work
with cassette-recorders. It helps us to find out our mistakes and to get rid of them
in the shortest possible time.
184
So that's the latest news about myself. Please write to me about your life and
studies.
My best regards to your parents.
Yours, Ann.
TEXT 2 A TELEPHONE CALL
Alex is about to ring up a friend of his. He picks up the receiver, and dials the
number. The first time the line is engaged but then he gets through.
A: Bob?
B: Speaking.
A: This is Alex. Hello, old chap. Haven't heard from you for ages. How are
you ?
B: Oh, hello, Alex. I'm fine, thanks.
A: Wonderful, I hear you passed all your entrance exams with excellent marks.
So you are a student now, aren't you? B: Well yes, and you?
A: I wasn't so lucky at the exams, in fact. I only got good marks in the main
subjects: physics and maths.
В: I wonder if you find it difficult to study mathematics?
A: Rather. I spend a lot of time doing my home assignment. But I'm not at all
sorry. You've got to work hard to make good progress.
В: Do you have time to go in for sports ?
A: Yes, of course, I joined the University sports society, as I'm fond of skating,
skiing and tennis.
B: As for me, I'm a member of our English speaking club. I've joined our
drama society and the choir. They say I'm rather good at both singing and
acting.
A: Good, isn't it? Hope to see you some day. Will you invite me to your club?
B: Sure.
A: By the way, I've got a new telephone number. It is now 235...
B: Just a second. I must have a pen to put it down. Yes? A: So I repeat 235-60-
57. I'll be expecting your call. Bye-bye. B: So long, then.
VOCABULARY NOTES
angry adj сердитый, раздраженный, разгневанный; anger n; to be angry
with smb. сердиться на кого-л., е. д. She was angry with me because I was late.
silence n тишина, молчание; silent adj тихий, молчаливый; Keep silent!
Соблюдайте тишину! е. д. Keep silent, I can't hear anything!
to leave school (no article!) оканчивать школу; Cf. to go to school, to go by
bus, to go to bed
entrance n вход; entrance exams вступительные экзамены; Ant. exit; enter
vt; Syn. come vi; Ant. leave vt, e. g. He entered Room 5. Come in!
185
mind n разум, ум, память; vt помнить; иметь в виду; следить за собой, за
своими словами; возражать, иметь что-л. против;
to make up one's mind = to decide; Never mind! Ничего, неважно. To my
mind. По-моему.
exam(ination) л экзамен; examine vt проверять, экзаменовать; examiner л
экзаменатор; to take an exam держать, сдавать экзамен; to pass one's exam
выдержать, сдать экзамен, е. д. Не took an exam in Geography but he didn't pass
it.
mark л оценка, отметка; to give a mark поставить оценку; a mark for an
answer оценка за ответ; a mark in a subject оценка no предмету, e. g. He got a
satisfactory mark in Physics. The teacher gave me a five for my answer yesterday.
train vt тренировать; to train teachers готовить учителей
one can't help (doing smth.) нельзя не нельзя удержаться от чтобы не е.
д. I couldn't help smiling, the child was so funny.
admire vt восхищаться, любоваться; admiration л, е. д. We all admire your
singing. The people looked at the actress in admiration.
It goes without saying. Само собой разумеется, е. д. It goes without saying
we help those who need our help.
proud adj гордый; pride л; to be proud of smth. гордиться чём-л., e. g. We are
all proud of our country.
subjects (учебные) предметы: Literature литература, Mathematics (Maths)
математика, Physics физика, Geography география, Chemistry химия. Biology
биология, a Foreign language иностранный язык, Linguistics языкознание
professor л профессор, преподаватель; scientist л ученый (чаще в области
точных наук); science л наука; scientific a d j научный; research worker научный
работник
to go in for увлекаться, заниматься, e. g. The students of our group go in for
sports.
opportunity л возможность, e. g. This is a good opportunity to help them.
to master the language овладеть языком
hard a d j / a d v тяжелый, трудный/тяжело; усиленно; Cf. hard work, to work
hard at smth.; hard-working трудолюбивый, старательный
to get rid of отделаться, избавиться, e. g. I can't get rid of my mistakes.
best regards to ... большой привет; Syn. Remember me to ...
receiver л телефонная трубка
to pick up the receiver поднять трубку
to hang up положить трубку
dial vt набирать (номер); dial л диск
the line is engaged (free) линия занята (свободна); to engage занимать. Hold
the line, please. He вешайте трубку.
to get through дозвониться; Are you through? Вы разговариваете? Вы
слышите?
lucky adj удачный, счастливый, е. д. I know him, he is always lucky. Ему
везет.
186
spend (spent, spent) vt тратить, расходовать, е. д. Не spends much money on
books. I spend much time on my English.
to make (good) progress делать успехи, е. д. We hope to make good progress
in English.
They say ... Говорят .... e. g. They say it is going to be cold.
to be good at smth. (or at doing smth.) удаваться, получаться, быть
способным к е. д. She is very good at singing.
TOPICAL VOCABULARY
Telephone Talk: a telephone-booth; a call-box; insert a coin in the slot;
buzz, buzzing sound; long-distance call; to be disconnected (to be cut off); to get
the wrong number; St. Petersburg is on the wire.
Letter Writing:
Opening greetings
(on the left-hand side of the page)
Dear Sir (Dear Madam), Dear Mr. Brown,
My dear sister, Dearest Mother
Corresponding polite endings
(on the right-hand side of the page)
Yours truly; Yours faithfully Yours very truly; Respectfully yours
Affectionately yours Your loving daughter
PHONETIC NOTES
To make speech more expressive we do not always stress all the notional
words in a sentence. Sometimes we make one or two words more prominent than
the others. The word which is most important in the sentences is often marked by
logical stress while the words following it remain unstressed or half-stressed as
they do not introduce anything new, but refer to something already known.
e. g. There is an \ English 'speaking xclub at our faculty. \ We, 'students, are
xproud of this fact.
187
Compare:
I beVgan to pre'pare for my tentrance e'xams to the .University.
And later:
I should V like to 'show you the 'main xbuilding of our
University.
EXERCISES
I. Transcribe the following words and explain the reading rules:
angry, exams, mind, mark, Russian, admire, hard, proud, sports, find, tape,
lucky, ages, sorry, invite, club, certainly, rather.
II. a) The material below is to be prepared for reading. Mark the stresses and tunes.
Concentrate your attention on sounds, b) Let your fellow-student read the sentences
aloud for you to detect his errors in sounds and tell him what must be done to get the
sounds right:
[0, dl 1. The third Thursday of this month is the sixteenth.
2. Thirty-three thousand three hundred and thirty-three.
3. These are three brothers, these are their father and mother, this is their other
brother.
4. Wealth is nothing without health.
5. First think then speak.
[0 — s] Three things on this side and six things on that side, [d — f] That fish
has a fat fin, this fish is a fish that has a thinner fin than that fish.
III. Before you start working at the text practise the sounds in the following words
and word combinations:
A. 1. [a] — my mother and father, working hard, my best regards.
2. a) Alveolars replaced by dentals: atwthe Institute, that'sjhe latest news.
b) Loss of plosion: don't^be angry, had^to take, gladJ:o tell you,
oldjDuilding, don'tjtake part.
c) Linking [rj: mother^nd father, four^exams, gram-mar^nd phonetics,
ourjtastitute.
В. 1. [зи] Oh, hello, good at both, so long.
—
2. a) Alveolars replaced by dentals: joined^the society, , andwthe choir,
butwthen.
b) Loss of plosion: difficultwto study, at jDOth, hardwto; make, and^tennis,
aboutwto ring up.
c) Nasal plosion: excellent w marks, student wnowf
goo dwm arks.
' -
188
IV.
1 . a) Listen to the recording of the text "Our University".
b) Mark the stresses and tunes, c) Practise the text tor test reading.
Listen to it very carefully until you can say it in exactly the same way.
2. a) Listen to the recording of the dialogue, b) Mark the stresses and tunes, c)
Practise the text for test reading. Listen to it very carefully until you can say it in exactly
the same way. d) Memorize the dialogue and dramatize it.
V. Read the following sentences as answers to the given questions. Change the logical
stress in them according to the question.
M o d e l : He works in the Crimea now.
a) Does he rest in the Crimea now? — No, he vworks in the Crimea now.
b) Where does he work now? — He works in the Crivmea now.
1. She spoke to the dean last week, a) When did she speak to the dean? b) Did
she see the dean last week? c) Whom did she speak to last week? 2, I gave" this
letter to her. a) Did you give or did you read this letter to her? b) What did you
give her?
c) Wbom did you give this letter to? 3. He read the third story to
the child, a) What did he read to the child? b) Which story did
he read to the child? c) Whom did he read the third story to?
VI.
Repeat the following sentences several times. Change the logical stress (and the
tune if necessary) according to the situations given in brackets.
M o d e l : V Don't do it avlone! (Do it with your brother.) vDon4 do it alone!
(You really shouldn't.)
1. Did he work in the Caucasus last year? (or did he rest there? or did his
wife? or in the Crimea? or 3 years ago?) 2. Read Exercise 5 at home! (not in
class! not Exercise 6!) 3. Did your father often play chess with you? (or seldom?
or with your brother? or does your brother play chess with you?)
VII. Transcribe the following sentences, mark the stresses and tunes
and picture them on the staves:
1. How are things? 2. Don't you find it difficult to study mathematics? 3. Do
you have time to go in for sports? 4. Hope to see you some day! 5. So you are a
student now, aren't you?
6. Will you invite me to your party?
VIII.
Make up questions covering the content of Text 1 for your
fellow-students to answer them.
IX. Fill in prepositions or adverbs if necessary:
1. First-year students work hard to master ... the language.
2. What mark did you get... Literature ... the entrance exams?
189
3. What mark have you got... your report? 4. "Try to get rid ... this gross
mistake," said the teacher. 5. When did you make a report ... this book? 6. Our
nephew is very good ... maths.
7. Why don't you take part... our discussion? 8. We decided to
join ... the English choir. 9. Where have you been? We haven't
seen you ... ages. 10. When the monitor entered ... the class-
room the students kept silent. 11. Cousin Helen sends her best
regards ... everybody. 12. The girl has invited her friends ... her
birthday party. 13. What kind of sports does he go........................? — He
is good ... tennis and volley-ball. 14. I see you are angry ... me, but I don't
understand why you do not answer ... my question.
15.
Did he often write ... his mother when he was ... the South?
16.
The students are proud ... their Institute. 17. They are all very fond ...
the English speaking club. 18. Two of my fellow-students are away. . the lessons
today.
X.
a) Write questions to the parts of the sentences in bold type,
b) Each sentence describes a situation in a concise way. Find out
some more details about it by asking questions. Work in pairs. Use
conversational phrases:
1. I left school in June. I began to prepare for my entrance exams to the
Institute. 2. The first students entered the Institute more than 100 years ago. 3.
We all gathered at my cousin's place to see the New Year in. 4.1 was just writing
a letter to my brother when the door-bell rang and he himself entered.
XI.
Fill in articles where necessary:
1. His son left ... school two years ago. 2. Helen passed ... entrance exams to ...
Institute with excellent marks. 3. My
favourite subject at ... school was ... Literature. 4. My brother goes in for ...
sports. 5. It was decided to finish ... building of ... house in ... shortest possible
time. 6. I'm going to join ... sports society. 7. He is ... member of ... students'
English club. 8. We haven't yet had ... discussion on ... book we are reading now.
9.1 got... satisfactory mark for ... test. 10. Read and translate ... text, do ...
Exercise 5 orally and ... Exercise 8 in ... written form.
11.He turned on ... radio as he was going to listen to ... news.
12.
... Pacific Ocean is seldom quiet. 13. I'm afraid he is so short of...
time.
XII.
Express a similar idea by using the synonymic expression to make up one's
mind.
M o d e l : We decided to learn to swim. We made up our minds
to learn to swim.
190
1. I decided to go for a walk as it was a pleasant evening. 2. We decided to
answer his question in written form. 3. He decided to speak to the assistant-dean
about his work. 4. Our cousin decided to go to the country for his holiday. 5. He
decided to recite his new poem to his friends. 6. He decided to get an excellent
mark in English. 7. He decided to master two foreign languages.
XIII.
Intensify the idea of liking by using to be fond o f . M o d e l : I like
dancing. I am fond of dancing.
1. I like Tchaikovsky's music. 2. The girls liked to spend time in the open air.
3. I like swimming. 4. He likes Byron's poetry. 5. We all like Russian nature. 6.
The old man liked this beautiful park.
XIV.
Intensify the idea by using the construction one can't help doing smth.
M o d e l : I laughed at the boy. I couldn't help laughing at the
boy.
1. We love Repin's work, he is a great artist. 2. I went to my sister's yesterday,
it was my niece's birthday. 3. I invited Helen, she is one of my best friends. 4. I
entered a teachers' training institute, I love children. 5. I told her everything. She
wanted to know all about her mother. 6. I smiled while looking at that funny
animal.
XV.
Intensify the idea by adding it goes without saying at the beginning of each of
the given sentences.
M o d e l : We are proud of our University. It goes without saying we are
proud of our University.
1. We read a newspaper every day. 2. We must work systematically if we want
to know English well. 3. She will get an excellent mark. 4. His work is very
interesting. 5. Teaching is a noble profession. 6. He is a well-bred person. 7. We
are eager to master the English language.
XVI.
Give sentences with the construction to take part using the following words:
discussion, concert, work, excursion, expedition, picnic.
XVII.
Give sentences with the constructions to go in for and to be good at using
the following words. Explain their meaning:
music,sports, poetry, painting, swimming, singing, foreign languages.
XVIII.
a) Let the members of the class ask and answer questions. Give short
answers and add a sentence of your own in the Past Indefinite or Past Continuous Tenses
as in the models.
M o d e l 1: When did he take his exam in History? — On Wednesday. He
passed it successfully.
191
M o d e l 2: Were they playing chess when he returned? — No, (they weren't).
They were having supper.
b) Respond to the negative sentence of your fellow-student as in the model. Use
contracted forms in speech.
M o d e l 1: He didn't leave Moscow the other day. — No, (he didn't). He left
only yesterday.
M o d e l 2: The girls were not playing the piano when he came. — No, (they
weren't). They were listening to the news.
XIX.
Ask one another questions as in the model. Repeat your question beginning it
with / asked i f ... . Student B. could start answering with Sony / didn't catch that; I'm
afraid 1 missed that, 1 beg your pardon; Would you mind repeating that, please.
M o d e l : A: Did you take part in the discussion?
B: I'm afraid I didn't quite hear what you said.
A: I asked if you took part in the discussion. В: I did. The discussion was very
interesting.
XX.
Translate the following into English:
1. Мы стараемся принимать участие в дискуссиях о новых фильмах. Мы
принимаем участие в общественной жизни Университета. Мы принимаем
участие в работе английского клуба. 2. Почему вы не принимаете участия в
нашей работе (в нашем концерте, в нашем обсуждении)? 3. Он занимается
(интересуется) спортом (музыкой, живописью, языками, научной работой,
пением, искусством). 4 Те, кто приезжают из других городов, живут в
общежитии. 5. Он принял решение поступить в Московский педагогический
университет (University) (стать учителем; усиленно заниматься в этом
семестре). 6. Я не могу не остановиться, когда вижу этого милого ребенка. Я
не могла не поступить в педагогический университет, я моблю детей. 7. Дети
гордятся своим отцом-моряком. Они гордятся своими успехами (their
success). Они все сдали экзамены и получили оценку «отлично». Жители
Волгограда гордятся своим городом. Это действительно новый, чудесный
город. 8. Не сердись на меня. Это моя ошибка. Они сердятся на меня, потому
что я опоздала (потому что я не ответила на их письмо). 9. Само собой
разумеется, на уроках английского языка мы говорим только по-английски,
Само собой разумеется, он помог нам. 10. Я не могу избавиться от этой
ошдбки в произношении (от тяжелой мысли; от этой болезни). 11. Когда вы
сдали последний экзамен? — Я сдала последний экзамен 12 августа. Она
сдала последний экзамен. Вы сдали этот экзамен? — Да, я сдал последний
экзамен и теперь свободен. Он не сдавал с нами экзамен, так как был болен.
Он не выдержал (не сдал) экзамен. Мы сдаем экзамен по английскому языку
в январе. Надеюсь, что мы все сдадим его.
192
XXI.
Retell Text 1 in the person of Ann, Helen.
XXII.
Complete the following sentences:
1.1 made up my mind ... .2. Next Wednesday we shall take part in ... . 3. Did
you take part in ...? 4, It goes without saying ... . 5.1 can't get rid of... . 6. He found
out that... . 7.1 am fond of... . 8. Do you find it difficult to ... . 9. My elder sister is
very good at... . 10. I can't help .... 11. We are proud of... . 12. Did you manage
to ...? *
XXIII.
Think of situations using the following words and word combinations:
a) to take an exam (exams); to get a mark; to enter an institute; to take part in;
not to make mistakes; to be lucky;
b) to get rid of; to be good at; to make a report on; they say.
XXIV.
Make up sentences using the following word combinations:
to be angry with; to take part in; to give a mark; to get a mark in (a subject); to
make progress; to be good at; to be lucky; to join smth.; to find out; to make up
one's mind; to make mistakes; to do homework (lab work); to go in for; to take an
exam in (a subject); to pass the exam; to get rid of; to be proud of; one can't help
doing smth.; to master the language.
XXV.
Think of- stimulating phrases to which the following sentences
are the replies. Work in pairs:
1. You are lucky. 2. Certainly. 3. Sure. 4. I hope to. 5. Willingly. 6. Rather. 7.
Pardon! 8. All right. 9. It's high time to do it. 10. Nothing of the kind. 11. Never
mind. 12. I should like to. 13. You don't say so. 14. Sorry. 15. It's out of the
question. 16. No more, thank you. 17. Here you are. 18. I'm afraid, I am (was, did,
have). 19. Just a moment. 20. I believe so. 21. So did (have, was, am) I. 22.
Neither did (was, have, am) I. 23. How clever you are. 24. No at all.
XXVI.
Respond to the following sentences:
1. Will you come to our party? 2 Is it late to go downstairs to the laboratory? 3.
Have some more coffee, will you? 4.1 am so thankful to you, you have helped me
a lot. 5. It's so cold today. 6. Let's go to the museum together. 7. You don't know
our new secretary, do you? 8. I've already invited their parents to our party. 9. I
should like to join our English choir. 10. She is very good at swimming. 11. I find
it rather difficult to study a foreign language. 12. Will you go to the Caucasus in
summer? 13. We are going to have a test in oral practice this week. 14. He has
passed his exam in Chemistry and got an excellent mark. 15. The girl has failed at
her exam, you know. 16. Would you like to go to the skating-rink tonight? 17. He
is very good at skating. 18. Will you put my fountain-pen right? 19. Will you turn
off the tap? The bath is full of water. 20. Shall I turn on the radio? I should like to
listen to the news. 21. I'm so sorry. I can't
193
get this book. 22. It's so stuffy here. You should air the room. 23. How could
you say such a thing?
XXVII.
Translate the following sentences into English:
1. Я окончила школу два года назад. Я уже закончила работу и могу пойти
с вами в кино. Когда я кончила работу, я решила пойти погулять. Собрание
окончилось, и мы пошли домой. 2. Моя сестра поступила в институт в 1982
году. Когда я вошла в зал, я увидела, что там было много студентов. 3.
Москвичи гордятся своим городом-героем. 4. Мы не можем не думать о
предстоящих экзаменах. 5. Его родители уехали из Киева, когда ему было 10
лет. 6. Я сдала на отлично вступительный экзамен по английскому языку.
Сколько экзаменов вы выдержали в прошлом году? Нина сдала экзамен по
физике, но не сдала химию. 7. Какую оценку вы получили за изложение? 8.
Мальчик хорошо отвечал, и учитель поставил ему пять. 9. Я знаю этого
преподавателя, он экзаменовал меня но истории в прошлом году. 10. У нее
хорошие оценки по всем предметам. 11. Мой брат любит математику, физику
и химию, а я люблю литературу и географию. 12. На прошлой неделе у нас
была контрольная. Я получила три. 13. На уроках практики речи мы читаем,
отвечаем на вопросы, делаем устные и письменные упражнения. Сделайте
упражнение 3 устно, а 7 и 8 письменно. 14. Вчера я готовила уроки в
лаборатории. Я люблю работать с магнитофоном. Если вы хотите избавиться
от ваших ошибок, вы должны больше работать в лаборатории. 15. Я хочу
принять участие в работе этого научного общества. 16. Борис решил
вступить в наше спортивное общество, он увлекается спортом. 17. Хотя в
нашем Университете есть хороший гимнастический зал, мы часто ходим на
стадион. 18. Когда вы вступили в драмкружок? — Несколько дней тому
назад. 19. Наш английский клуб помогает нам лучше овладеть языком. 20. У
моей подруги хороший голос. Она член нашего хорового кружка. 21. На
прошлой неделе я делала доклад по домашнему чтению. Я сделала много
ошибок, и преподаватель поставила мне неудовлетворительную оценку.
XXVIII.
Retell the following jokes, use indirect speech:
1. E n g l i s h p r o f e s s o r : What is the difference between an active verb
and a passive verb?
S t u d e n t : A n active verb shows action and a passive verb shows passion.
2. P r o f e s s o r : Can you tell me anything about the great scientists of the
17th century?
r
194
S t u d e n t : They are all dead, sir.
3. F r i e n d : And what is your son going to be when he's passed his final
exam?
F a t h e r: An old man.
4. Two men were talking in a train.
"Are you going to Milberry's lecture today?" said one. "Oh, yes, I am," replied
the other.
"Take my advice and don'1.1 hear he is a very poor lecturer." "I am afraid, I
must go," said the other. "I'm Milberry."
5. During a lecture a well-known lecturer on economics mentioned the fact
that in some parts of the world the number of men was larger than that of women,
and he added humorously:
"I can therefore recommend the ladies to emigrate to that part of the world."
A young lady who was sitting in one of the last rows stood up ^full of anger.
She was leaving the room rather noisily, when the lecturer remarked.
"I don't mean that it must be done in such a hurry as that."
XXIX. a) Read the following text. Explain the usage of tenses in Lit. b) Render the
text in indirect speech, c) Make up short bits of conversation on the analogy of those
given below;
The Brown Family at Breakfast
Parti
A r t h u r : Has the post come yet, Robert? R o b e r t : Yes. There were only
two letters, one for you and mother, and one for me.
E i l e e n : Nothing for me?
R: Of course not.
E: Why *of course not*?
R: Well, you never write to anyone. You've never written a letter in your life.
E: I have. R: You haven't.
J a n e : Now you two, stop arguing and get on with your _ breakfast.
Partll
A: Who was our letter from, Jane? J: Edith. Here
it is.
A: Have you read it? J: Yes.
A: Weil just tell me what she says. J: Don't
you want to read it?
A: I've left my glasses upstairs. Have they moved yet? J: Yes. They moved last
Tuesday. A: How do they like the new house? J: They love it. A: Good.
J; They've bought one or two new pieces of furniture.
A: Have they got rid of that awful old sofa?
J: Yes. And they've bought some new chairs for the kitchen,
195
Part III
A: Have they started on the garden?
J: Oh, yes. They started on that weeks ago, I suppose. They've done the front
garden. They haven't touched the back at all.
A: Well, at least they've made a start.
J: They've been very lucky with their neighbours.
A: In what way have they been-lucky?
J: Well, they were very kind on'the day Anne moved.
A: What-did they do?
J: Sarah (that's the wife's name) looked after the two boys the whole day. .
A: How nice of her! ;
J: And Tom (that's the husband) helped Peter to lay the carpets. 4
A: Hm, hm.
J: He's even offered to help Peter with the garden.
XXX.
Listen to the text carefully. Pick out words and word combinations
pertaining to the topic "Your Studies". Get ready to ask your fellow-students questions
on the text. Retell the text.
XXXI.
a) Watch Film Segment Three "Buying a Textbooks" for general content, b)
Watch the film segment again to find English equivalents to the following:
не слишком ли (много)?; разговорный английский; недостатки;
заниматься; изучать лингвистику; веский довод; твердый переплет; бумажная
обложка.
с) Answer your teacher's questions on the content of the film segment, d) Listen to
the sound track recording of Segment Three. Say what happened in the bookshop.
XXXII.
a) Make up a dialogue on the following situation:
You ask your friend what marks she got at the entrance exams and what
subjects she studies at the University. You wonder how often she works in the
laboratory and whether the work helps her to correct her pronunciation. You'd also
like to know if she takes part in the work of the English club and what kind of
work she does there.
b) Suggest a situation for your fellow-stndents to make up a dialogue on it.
XXXIII.
Describe situations illustrating the following proverbs:
1. All is well that ends well.
2. It is never late to learn.
3. Out of sight out of mind.
4. Where there's a will, there's a way.
XXXIV.
Describe the procedure for telephoning.
196
XXXV.
Imagine you are on the phone talking to a friend (asking for information)
about 1) your studies; 2) your social activities.
XXXIV.
Write a letter to a friend (to an English pen-friend, to your former English
teacher) about your studies. Mind the layout of the letter.
LABORATORY WORK
I. a) Repeat the sentences after the tape, b) Make them interrogative
and negative.
II. a) Answer the questions in the intervals, b) Listen to your record and correct the
mistakes if you have any.
III. Translate the words and word combinations into English. Spell and transcribe
them.
II. a) Translate the sentences into English using the given word combinations, b)
Check your translation with the key.
IV. Use the sentences in indirect speech. Make all the necessary changes.
V. Listen to the disjunctive questions. They are not true to fact. Correct them.
Lesson Fifteen
Grammar: The Future Indefinite Tense. The Future Continuous Tense. To be able, to
have in the Future Indefinite Tense. Adverbial Clauses of Time and Condition.
Texts: 1. Seasons and Weather. 2. Dialogue: Weather Talk.
STUDY THE FOLLOWING
Tab l e No, 1 THE FUTURE INDEFINITE TENSE
T ab l e No. 2 THE FUTURE CONTINUOUS
TENSE
I
Weshal (shan't)He (She)
You
Theywill (won't)be meeting the delegation at the
station. (?) be having dinner at 5 o'clock. (?) be sleeping when Mother comes. (?)Shal I
we
Willhe (she)
you
they•
197
I
shall (shan't)
We
He
go to the country go
next Saturday. (?)
(She) You
to the theatre work
tomorrow. (?) on
will (won't)
They My
leave for St.
Sunday. (?) next week.
parents
Petersburg
(?)
Shall
I
we
he (she)
Will
you
•
they
Tab l e No. 3 TO BE ABLE IN THE FUTURE INDEFINITE TENSE
I
be able
to do it tomorrow. (?) to translate this
shall (shan't)
We
article tomorrow. (?)
He (She)
to repair the radio-set alone. (?) to
will (won't)
■ You They
practise this text in the laboratory. (?)
I
Shall
we
he (she)
Will
you
they
Tab l e No. 4
TO H A V E + INFINITIVE IN THE FUTURE INDEFINITE TENSE
I ^ We
shall (shan't)
He (She)
You
will (won't)
They
to do it tomorrow. (?) to work in the
I
have
garden tomorrow morning. (?) to rewrite
Shall
we
the text. (?) to help them. (?)
he (she)
Will
you
they
198
Tab l e No. 5
ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF TIME AND CONDITION
Ishal We(shan't)He(She)Youwillgo to the countryit is hot. (?)They(won't)go for a walkthe
weather iswork in the gardeniffine. (?) Peter comes. (?)play tenniswhen
ShallIhave dinner in theit doesn't rain (it
wegardenrains). (?)the sun shines (?)
he (she)Willyou they
GRAMMAR EXERCISES
I. Study Substitution Tables No. 1 5 and compose as many sentences
—
as you can.
II. Change each of these sentences using the Future Continuous:
*
1. At 10 o'clock he was still working at the laboratory. 2. My friend was
preparing for her written test when I came. 3. Were you waiting for me at the
station at 8 o'clock in the morning? 4. Was his friend giving a lesson at 5 o'clock?
5. My nephew was repairing our vacuum-cleaner at 7. 6. My uncle was listening
to the news when I went to bed. 7. My aunt was knitting the whole morning. >
III.
Write questions to the parts of the sentences in bold type:
1. He will begin his lectures next month. 2. My brother will go to India for
six months. 3. My sister will go to the South because of her child's illness. 4. It
will take me 20 minutes to get to her house. 5. I shall be waiting for you at the
station. 6. It will take two years to build this theatre. 7. It was snowing hard
when I got up this morning. 8. I shall be able to translate this
article next week. 9. He will see her at 9 o'clock tomorrow. 10. I shall get up
tomorrow at 6 o'clock. 11. He will stay in the country for two months. 12. I shall
be able to go to the canteen after the lesson. 13. I shall have to repair my aunt's
iron tomorrow. 14. I shall be having dinner soon.
IV. Use the correct form of the verb in the adverbial clauses of time and condition:
199
1. If you (to translate) this article into Russian, I shall use it in my report. 2. If
she (to be) in Moscow now, she will meet you. 3. If you don't (to hurry), you will
miss the train. 4. If it (to rain), we shan't go to the country. 5. When my friend (to
come) to Moscow we shall go to the Bolshoi Theatre. 6. What will you be doing
when he (to come) to your place? 7. Don't forget to pay for your dinner before you
(to leave) the canteen. 8. I shall be able to translate this article if you (to give) me
a dictionary. 9. You will have to work hard at the laboratory if you (to miss) the
lesson. 10. Where will you go when you (to come) to Moscow? 11. You will lay
the table as sdon as Mary (to wash) the dishes. 12. I shan't have dinner before
mother (to come) home.
V. Use the following sentences in indirect speech. Make other necessary changes:
1. He says: "I am sure she will come in time." 2. She says: "I shall be able to
read English newspapers without a dictionary in a year." 3. They say: "We shan't
go to the Institute on Sunday." 4. Mr. Sandford says: "I shall have to pay much
money for the house." 5. Peter says: "I'll be waiting for you at the station." 6.
Mary says: "I'll be back soon." 7. She says: "What are you going to do when you
come home?" 8. She says: "I hope I'll soon speak English as well as you do." 9.
He says: "I am sure it will rain tomorrow." 10. They say: "We'll go for a walk if it
is hot tomorrow." 11. She says: "I am busy today but I'll be much busier
tomorrow." 12. Jane says: "I shall come earlier tomorrow." 13. John says: "I shan't
be able to meet them tomorrow." 14. He says: "I'll come if I am free." 15. She
says: "I'll go to the cinema in the evening if I am not very tired." 16. My mother
says: "You'll be sleepy tomorrow if you don't go to bed at once." 17. My aunt says:
"I shan't be thirsty if I have some grapes." 18. My mother says: "Don't serve
dessert before I clear the table."
VI. Change the following sentences using the Past and Future Indefinite:
1. You must practise this text in the laboratory. 2. You must take your exam in
English. 3. She can translate this article without a dictionary. 4. They can't meet
them at the station. 5. The doctor must examine this child. 6. He must work
systematically if he wants to know French well. 7. This child must spend more
time out in the open air. 8. I can't recite this poem. 9. You must take part in this
work. 10. He can't join the party, he is busy.
TEXT 1 SEASONS AND WEATHER
When two Englishmen meet, their first words will he "How do you do?" or
"How are you?" And after the reply "Very well, thank you: how are you?" the next
remark is almost certain to be about the weather. "It's a lovely morning, isn't it?"
or "Isn't it hot today?" and the other person will reply "Yesr it's wonderful weather
we are having. I hope it will keep fine, it seems almost too good to last."
200
Or perhaps the day is dull, it is raining a little, the sky is grey, and everyone is
wearing a mackintosh or carrying an umbrella. As the cars and buses go along the
street, they splash the water and mud on the passer§-by.
Gradually it gets darker: a thick fog is spreading over London. The lamps are
lit in the streets and in the shops and offices; cars and buses put on their lights and
can only crawl along. As one friend bumps into another, he says, "Isn't it a beastly
day?" — "Yes," replies the other, you can hardly see a yard in front of you."
Then comes winter. There has been a good fall of snow and a hard frost. It is
just the day for a good country walk; let us have a tramp down the country lanes.
The ground is like iron and rings under our feet, the frost sparkles on the branches,
and icicles hang from the houses.
It is still freezing hard and the ponds are frozen over. There are crowds of
people on them sliding and skating, and here is a merry group of schoolboys
having a fight with snowballs. It is very pleasant while the frost lasts; the
unpleasant time comes when the thaw begins. t
A few months have passed and it is a beautiful spring day. The rain fell
heavily last night, but now the soft white clouds are floating across the blue sky,
and the sun is shining brightly. Raindrops and dewdrops shine on every small
green leaf and every blade of young grass.
The farmer has ploughed his fields and the new corn is just beginning to
appear above the ground. In a few months autumn and harvest time will come.
When the corn has turned ripe and golden the farmer will reap it and put it in his
barn.
(Abridged from "Modem English Course for Foreign Students" by Eckerseley)
T E X T 2 DIALOGUE WEATHER TALK
L e o n : Lovely day today isn't it?
G e o r g e : It is. There's hardly a cloud in the sky in fact. L e o n : We'll have
a heat wave, I fear. It must be 25 degrees in the shade.
G e о r g e: It is very close today. Not a leaf is stirring. L e o n : There's hardly
a breath of air.
G e o r g e : By the way, I've just read the weather-forecast in
my newspaper here.
L e o n : What does it say?
G e o r g e : (reading) "Pressure will remain high to the southwest of the
British Isles. There will be occasional rain or drizzle, but bright weather with a
few scattered showers will spread to England and Wales."
L e о n: I fear a thunderstorm is coming.
G e o r g e : The sky is overcast and the sun is going in.
L e o n : It looks like rain. Actually it's beginning to rain. And 1 have left my
umbrella at home. It never rains but it pours!
201
G e o r g e : Fortunately enough, I've got my folding umbrella ^vith me. Let
me put it up.
; L e o n : What a tremendous clap of thunder!
G e o r g e : And what a flash of lightning!
L e o n : But the English have a saying about the weather: If |you don't like it
now, just wait a bit.
G e o r g e : Look! It's clearing up. The clouds are lifting. L e o n : It has
stopped raining. Look at this wonderful rainbow!
G e o r g e : Bright sunshine again. Now I know why English weather is
something worth talking about.
(After "English by Radio")
VOCABULARY NOTES
keep (kept, kept) vt/i держаться; оставаться (в известном состоянии); to
keep fine, е. д. The weather kept fine, dull adj пасмурный; Ant. bright
splash vt забрызгивать, брызгатъ(ся), е. д. The driver splashed mud on the
passers-by.
fog n туман; a thick fog густой туман; foggy adj туманный, e. g. It is foggy.
spread (spread, spread) vt/i простираться, расстилаться, е. д. A green valley
spread before us; to spread over smth., e. g. The water spread over the floor.
light (up) (lit, lit/lighted) vt/i зажигать(ся), освещать, е. д. The lamps are lit
in the streets. Our houses are lighted by the electricity.
beastly adj ужасный, противный; Syn, nasty; beast л зверь, животное; Сотр.
animal
hardly adv с трудом, едва, е. д. I could hardly understand her.
hard adv сильно; Syn. heavily, e. g. It is raining hard (heavily), hard adj
сильный, as a hard frost
frost л мороз; frosty adj морозный; freeze (froze, frozen) vt замерзать,
покрываться льдом; е. д. It's freezing hard.
sparkle vi сверкать; Syn. shine
icicle n сосулька
slide (slidr slid) vi/t скользить; кататься no льду thaw n
оттепель
float vi/1 плыть (по течению, по воздуху), e. g. A lot of red and green balloons
floated in the air.
harvest n жатва, уборка хлеба; урожай
degree л градус, е. д. We had 25 degrees above (below) zero yesterday.
close adj душный, e. g. Open the window. It's very close here Syn. stuffy
breath л дыхание; зд. дуновение, е. g. At last we felt a breath of fresh air;
breathe vt/i дышать, e. g. The child was breathing hard, weather-forecast л
прогноз погоды
202
remain vi оставаться, е. д. In England the fields and the parks remain green
even in winter; Syn. stay
drizzle л мелкий дождь, изморось; drizzle vi, е. д. It's drizzling,
thunderstorm л гроза; thunder л гром; a clap of thunder удар
грома
overcast adj покрытый облаками; хмурый (о небе)
pour vt/i лить, литься; наливать, е. д. It's pouring, Льет дождь.
Pour yourself a cup of milk.
fortunately adv к счастью; Ant. unfortunately tremendous adj страшный,
громадный; Syn. awful, terrible lightning л молния, е. д. A flash of lightning lit
up the sky. worth predic. adj заслуживающий, стоящий; to be worth doing
smth., e. g. It's not worth thinking about.
TOPICAL VOCABULARY
season, to shine brightly; to be out-of-doors; to be in blossom (to be in bloom);
flower-bed; to cycle; to boat; to fish; to go cycling (boating, fishing); to bathe, to
swim; to lie in the sun; to play with a ball; to play tennis (football); to play a game
of chess (tennis); to pick flowers, to pick (gather) berries and mushrooms; to
travel by car; at the seaside; on the beach; on the bank of the
river
' ifiWviS
to blow; to go skating; skating-rink; to toboggan; fraifes of
snow; sleet; sledge; slush; to get wet through; melt
CONVERSATIONAL PHRASES
Weather remarks: What a marvellous (shocking) day! It seems to be getting
more settled (clearing up), doesn't it? It's very windy (mild, wet, stormy) today. I'll
be glad when the rain's over (the fog's cleared), won't you? It's nice (cold, warm,
chilly, hot), isn't it?
Hesitation devices: um, er, well, actually, in fact, you see, you know, the
thing is, it's like this, how shall I put it, thee (lengthening of the), ayyy
(lengthening of a), tooo (lengthening of to), I think..., I believe I suppose.
Memory Work:
When the weather is wet We must not fret, —
When the weather is cold We must not scold.
When the weather is warm We must not storm, —
But be thankful together Whatever the weather.
203
EXERCISES
I. a) The material below is to be prepared for reading. Mark the stresses and tunes.
Concentrate your attention on sounds, b) Let your fellow-student read the sentences for
you to detect his errors in sounds and tell him what must be done to eliminate them:
[e] 1. Get ten eggs ready for breakfast.
2. Every day in every way.
The weather is getting better and better.
3. East or West home is best.
4. All is well that ends well.
5. Better late than never.
6. Health is above wealth.
II. Before you start working at the texts practise the sounds in the following word
combinations from the texts:
A.
1. [rj] raining a little, wearing a mackintosh, carrying an
umbrella, spreading over London, floating across the sky, having a flight;
2. [ 3 :J their first words, almost certain, the other person,
turned ripe;
3. [зи — э: — D] almost, can only crawl along, the ponds
are frozen over, a fight with snowballs.
B.1. Alveolars replaced by dentals: read the weather-fore-
cast, and the sun, but the English, about the weather, look at this.
2. Nasal plosion: it must be, it never, let me, like it now.
3. Loss of plosion: must be, what does it, but bright, spread to, it pours.
III. 1. a) Listen to the recording of the text "Seasons and Weather**.
Mark the stresses and tunes, b) Practise the text for test reading. Listen
to it carefully until you can say it in exactly the same way.
2. a) Listen to the dialogue. Mark the stresses and tunes, b) Practise the dialogue for
test reading. Listen to it very carefully until you can say it in exactly the same way. c)
Memorize and dramatize it.
IV.
Copy out of Text 1 all the words with digraphs ai, ei, ее, oo,
ow and transcribe them.
V. Give the four forms of the following verbs:
come, blow, drive, fall, prefer, freeze, ski, put, sweep, hang, show, sew, awake,
sleep, build, stop, sit, read, write, play, leave, begin, become.
VI.
Give the degrees of comparison of the following adjectives and transcribe them:
204
dark, heavy, hard, large, old, severe, pleasant, bad, good, strong, weak, little,
far, near, late, clear, hot, warm, beautiful.
VII. Ask questions covering the contents of Text 1 for your fellow-students to answer
them.
VIII. Look at the picture (p. 224) and answer the following questions:
1. Which of the four seasons is it? 2. Is the sky overcast with heavy clouds or
is it clear and bright? 3. Has the sun gone in or is it shining brightly? 4. What is
the ground covered with? 5. Are the fruit trees in blossom? 6. Do you see any
flower-beds in the picture? 7. Who do you see in the picture? 8. What are the
grown-up people doing? 9. What are the children doing? 10. Do people stay at
home in spring or do they prefer to go out into the garden? 11. How do you like to
spend your time m spring?
IX.
Look at the right-hand picture and ask one another questions
using the words and word combinations given below:
season; summer; hot, cold; the sun; to shine brightly; on the bank of the river;
to bathe, to swim; to boat, to fish (to go boating, to go fishing); to lie in the sun
(on the sand); to pick flowers; to pick (to gather) berries? and mushrooms; in the
woods; to spend one's vacation (holiday) at the seaside; to travel by car; to go
cycling; in a rest-home; on the shore.
205
X. Describe the picture (p. 225) using the following words and word
combinations: <
autumn; weather; nasty; the sky; to be overcast; cold, wind, to blow; low
clouds, to drive across the sky; to rain heavily (hard); to hurry along the streets; to
wear raincoats; to carry an umbrella; to get wet through; cars, trolley-buses, buses;
to go (run) along the streets; to splash; mud; passers-by.
XI.
Look at the right-hand picture and make up a dialogue. Use the Topical
Vocabulary, Conversational Phrases and Hesitation Devices.
XI.
a) Make the following sentences interrogative and negative:
1. It is as chilly today as it was yesterday. 2. The frost will be as hard
tomorrow as it is today 3. She is as fond of frosty weather as her brother is. 4. It
has stopped raining. 5. She will be working when you come. 6. Pressure will
remain high.
206
b) Ask one another questions on the fol owing sentences and answer them in the
negative. Add a sentence or two to develop a situation. Use conversational phrases:
1. It's coming on to pour. 2. There was a good fall of snow yesterday. 3. It's
still freezing hard. 4. The rain fell heavily last night. 5. It was foggy yesterday
morning. 6. It's clearing up. 7. The clouds are lifting. 8. I've got my folding
umbrella with me. 9. A thunderstorm is coming. 10. I've just read the weather-
forecast.
XIII. Put the adjectives and adverbs in brackets in the required degree of
comparison: -
1. Today the frost is (severe) than it was yesterday. 2. This book is (interesting)
of all I have read this year. 3. It snows (hard) this winter than it did last winter. 4.
January is (cold) month of the year. 5. My sister speaks English (bad) than I do. 6.
Which is (hot) month of the year? 7. Which is (beautiful) place in this part of the
country? 8. This nice-looking girl is (good) student in our group. 9. Does this
sportsman run (fast)
8 Заказ 1271
225
207
than you? — Oh, yes, he is (fast) in our group, 10. The students, of our
group'll have (little) spare time this term and I (little) of all as I've got (much)
work at the scientific society.
XIV.
a) Read the following dialogue and copy out all the adjectives and adverbs
used in the comparative and the superlative degrees, b) Retell the dialogue in indirect
speech:
"Good evening, Mrs. Martin. Let me take your things. Put your bag on this
table." "How is Mr. Jones?"
"Quite well, thank you. He is not in yet. And how is your husband?" (
"He is coming in a moment. He is busier than ever."
"My husband usually comes home about six. Sometimes a little earlier. But he
never comes later than half past six."
"It is only a quarter past."
"Let us go into the sitting-room. Please, sit down in this armchair. It is the
most comfortable."
"I like your house very much. It is the quietest I know."
"There is very little traffic in our street."
"Your garden is so large. It is much larger than ours."
"But yours is more beautiful. Your trees are older and you have finer flowers."
XV.
Fill in prepositions or adverbs:
A. 1. Be careful! Don't splash mud ... passers-by. 2. A thick fog is spreading ...
the city and though cars and buses have put ... their lights they can only crawl ... .
3. It is pleasant to look ... the trees when the frost sparkles ... the branches. 4.
There is a
bridge ... the river. 5. The rivers and lakes freeze.....................winter. 6. I
don't like to be out-of-doors ... such bad weather. I prefer to stay ... home. 7.
Let us have a tramp ... the country lanes. 8. The new corn is just beginning to
appear ... the ground. 9. The ground is usually covered ... snow ... winter.
B. 1. The temperature is 25° ... zero ... the shade today. 2. Look ... the sky.
There is hardly a cloud ... it. 3. A heat wave will spread ... the south-west ...
Moscow. 4. It's beginning to rain. Put ... your umbrella. 5. The rain is ... and it's
clearing ... . 6. The weather is getting worse. The sun is going ... . 7. Look ...
picture ... page 25. What do you see ... the picture? 8. It's pouring. We shall be wet
... . 9. My aunt will stay ... our place ... two months.
XVI. Complete the following sentences using the words in brackets:
1. The sky will be clear if the wind ... (to stop). 2. I shall go to the country if
the weather ... (to be fine). 3. We shall go to the skating-rink if the frost ... (to be
not severe). 4. The snow will melt if the sun ... (to be hot). 5. You will feel warm
if you (to put on) a warm coat. 6. He will ring you up when he (to come) home. 7.
The days will be longer when summer (to come). 8. I shall go home if it (to rain).
9. We look forward to the time when spring (to come).
208
XVII.
Choose the right word:
to stay — to remain
1. I have done three exercises and two ... . 2. The place was so nice that we
decided to ... there all the summer. 3. Few leaves ... on the trees and they are not
green any longer. 4. He was so tired that he ... in bed all day long. 5. The teacher
tried to make the boy speak but he ... silent. 6. It was raining so hard that I ... at
my friend's the whole night.
such — so
1. She was ... tired that she couldn't go on working. 2.1 never go for ... long
walks. 3. I didn't know that it was ... an interesting book. 4. The student spoke
English ... badly that the teacher couldn't give him even a satisfactory mark. 5. The
weather was ... nasty yesterday that I stayed at home all day long. 6. It rained ...
hard yesterday that I got wet through.
XVIII.
a) Respond to the following sentences. Develop them into dialogues. Use
conversational phrases and hesitation devices:
1. It looks like rain. 2. It's pouring, what shall we do? 3. What nasty weather
we are having today! 4. It's a lovely morning, isn't it? 5. Isn't it a hot day? 6. It's
wonderful weather we are having. I hope it will keep fine. 7. What a tremendous
clap of thunder! 8. Look! It's clearing up.
b) Continue the exercise suggesting your own verbal context.
XIX.
Think of stimulating phrases to which those below could be replies. Work in
pairs:
1. Very well indeed, thank you. 2. I don't know exactly. 3. Sometimes I do. 4. I
think so. 5. I've no idea, I'm afraid. 6. No,
I don't think I'll ... . 7. Yes, I'll have to change my clothes. 8. I think that's a
very good idea. 9. I don't think so. 10. I've lost my umbrella. 11. Fancy that!
XX.
Complete the following sentences and add something to develop a situation:
1. I shall go skiing if ... . 2. The pond will be frozen over when ... . 3. The
farmers will reap the corn when ... . 4. The unpleasant time comes when .... 5. We
shall go for a walk as soon as ... . 6. I'll stay out-of-doors till... . 7. She'll be able
to help you if she ... . 8. He'll make good progress if... . 9. I shall put up my
umbrella when ... . 10. Don't go out before ... .
XXI.
Team up with another student and have a friendly talk using words and word
combinations of Text 2 concerning weather.
XXII.
a) Read the following text. Give a title to the story, b} Retell
the story using the vocabulary of the lesson:
209
The weather in England can change very quickly. One day last week 1 went
for a walk in the country. When I started early in the morning the weather was
beautiful. The sun was shining, the sky was blue and there were no clouds at all.
In the middle of the morning a sudden change came. A cool wind started to blow,
black clouds covered the sun and in a very short time it started to rain heavily.
There were no houses in sight and I had no coat with me. So I got yery wet indeed
and very cold too. After about an hour I managed to catch a bus which took me
home. But when I arrived I was shivering and sneezing and I've had a cold ever
since. We sometimes say that England is the only country where you can have
four seasons in one day.
XXIII.
Translate the following into English:
A. 1. Сегодня не такой туман, как вчера. Вчера туман был такой густой, что я боялась
ехать на машине и предпочла идти в театр пешком. 2. Неприятно гулять, когда небо
покрыто тучами и идет дождь, а автобусы и машины забрызгивают прохожих водой и
грязью. 3. Какая сегодня скверная погода! Моросит дождь, и улицы такие грязные. 4.
Небо потемнело, и с моря начал дуть холодный ветер. Но сегодня ветер не такой
сильный, как вчера. Вчера он был гораздо сильнее. 5. Сильно подмораживает. Скоро
пруд замерзнет, и мы сможем кататься на коньках. 6. Парк выглядит
так прекрасно, когда земля покрыта снегом, а на деревьях сверкает иней.
7. Я не слышала прогноза погоды сегодня и не знаю, будет ли сегодня дождь.
Если дождя не будет, я обязательно поеду за город. 8. Погода становится
теплее, я думаю, что скоро зацветут (будут в цвету) фруктовые деревья. 9.
Зерно начинает созревать. Скоро начнется уборка. Некоторые студенты
поедут помогать убирать урожай, 10. Возьми плащ или зонт. Погода может
измениться. 11. Сегодня очень холодно. Тебе придется остаться дома. Если
ты выйдешь, ты опять простудишься и не сможешь посещать школу. 12. Я
думаю, что он вам не позвонит до того, как вернется в Москву. 13. Завтра
утром приезжает мой брат. Я не знаю, получу ли от него телеграмму, но даже
если не получу, я поеду на вокзал встречать его. Г4. Мы сможем обсудить
наши планы в понедельник. 15. Вы не должны учить это стихотворение
наизусть, пока вы не отработаете его в лаборатории. 16. Она не знает,
закончит ли свою статью сегодня. Если закончит и если сегодня не будет
дождя, мы пойдем в театр. 17. Я буду рада, если дождь прекратится. Мне
надо торопиться на вокзал. 18. Через час начнут прибывать первые делегаты.
19. В Англии поля и парки остаются зелеными даже зимой. 20. Посмотри!
Выпало много снега. Завтра дети будут кататься на санках и лепить
снеговика. 21. Как красиво! Капельки дождя и росы сверкают на листьях и
на траве. 22. Я думаю, что дождь не будет продолжаться очень долго и мы
сможем пойти в лес собирать грибы и ягоды.
В. 1. Сегодня очень душно. Боюсь, что скоро будет гроза. 2. Эти ужасные
раскаты грома разбудили меня ночью. Дождь лил как из ведра всю ночь. 3.
Посмотри! Дождь перестал. Облака рассеялись. На небе красивая радуга.
210
Надеюсь, будет хорошая погода. 4. Согласно прогноза погоды на этой неделе
изредка будут выпадать дожди. 5. Идет сильный дождь, раскрой зонтик, а то
ты совершенно промокнешь.
XXIV. a) Translate into Russian, b) Give synonyms to the following words:
silly, ruin, jolly, completely, chuckle, lovely, flimsy, start.
c) Explain the meaning of the following words and word combinations in English:
tomfoolishness, occasional, depression, to be plagued, set-fair day, keep on
steadily, a thing that is beyond me.
d) Retell the text:
George got hold of the paper, and read us the weather forecast "rain, cold, wet
to fine, occasional local thunderstorms, east wind with general depression over
the 'Midland Counties'." I do think that, of all the silly, irritating tomfoolishness
by which we are plagued, this "weather forecast" fraud is about the most
aggravating. It "forecasts" precisely what happened yesterday or the day before,
and precisely the opposite of what is going to happen today.
I remember a holiday of mine being completely ruined one late autumn by our
paying attention to the weather report of the local newspaper. "Heavy showers,
with thunderstorms, may be expected today," it would say, and so we would give
up our picnic, and stop indoors all day, waiting for the rain. And people would
pass the house, going off in wagonettes and coaches as jolly and merry as could
be, the sun shining out, and not a cloud to be seen.
"Ah," we said, as we stood looking out at them through the window, "won't
they come home soaked!"
And we chuckled to think how wet they were going to get. By twelve o'clock,
with the sun pouring into the room, the heat became quite oppressive, and we
wondered when those heavy showers and occasional thunderstorms were going to
begin. At one o'clock the landlady would come in to ask if we weren't going out,
as it seemed such a lovely day.
"No, no," we replied, with a knowing chuckle, "not we. We don't mean to get
wet — no, no." But not a drop ever fell, and it finished a grand day, and a lovely
night after it.
The next morning we would read that it was going to be a "warm fine to set-
fair day, much heat," and we would dress ourselves in flimsy things, and go out,
and, half-an-hour after we had started, it would commence to rain hard, and a
bitterly cold wind would spring up, and both would keep on steadily for the whole
day, and we could come home with cools and rheumatism all over us, and go to
bed.
The weather is a thing that is beyond me altogether. I never can understand it.
(Abridged from "Three Men in a Boat"
by Jerome K. Jerome)
211
XXV.
Find a picture on the topic "Season and Weather** for your discussion in
class. Prepare 8—10 questions which would help your fellow-students to describe the
picture.
XXV.
Listen to the text "The Snow Maiden" carefully. Pick out words and word
combinations pertaining to the topic "Weather**. Get ready to ask your fellow-students
questions on the text. Retell the text.
XXVII.
a) Watch Film Segment Four "The Sky is Overcast" for general content,
b) Watch the film segment again to find the English equivalents to the following:
до семи дождь, до одиннадцати ясно; английское лето — три жарких дня и гроза;
какая там у Боба погода?; небо затянуто облаками; поехать на пикник; лгать; как хорошо
слышно; накануне; матч на кубок; все хорошо, что хорошо кончается.
с) Answer your teacher's questions on the content of the film segment, d) Listen to the
sound track recording of Segment Four. Get ready to ask and answer questions on the
content of Film Segment Four and to reproduce the dialogue.
XXVIII.
a) Explain the meaning of the proverb: "It never rains but it pours** and
give a situation to illustrate it. b) Find English proverbs concerning weather, provide
them with Russian equivalents, ask your fellow-students to illustrate them.
XXVIII. Describe the weather in England and in your native town.
XXX.
a) Make up a dialogue on the following situation:
Две студентки (одна с юга, другая из Сибири) разговаривают о климате своих
родных мест. Южанке не нравится климат Москвы. Ей кажется, что зимой здесь очень
холодно, а летом часто идет дождь. Сибирячке тоже не нравится московская зима. Хотя
морозы в Сибири достигают 30—35°, но переносятся они легче, так как почти нет ветра
и воздух сухой. А в Москве зимой снег часто тает, иногда моросит дождь.
b) Suggest a situation for your fellow-students to give it in the form of a dialogue.
LABORATORY WORK
I. a) Repeat the sentences after the tape, b) Make them interrogative and negative.
I. a) Listen to the questions and record your answers in the intervals, b) Listen to the
record and correct the mistakes.
I. Translate into English, spell and transcribe the following words and word
combinations.
II. Spell and transcribe the four forms of the following verbs.
212
III. a) Join the following pairs of sentences using the first one as an adverbial clause
of condition, b) Listen to the key following the intervals and repeat the key aloud. Pay
attention to the intonation.
I. a) Translate the following sentences into English as in the models, b) Check your
sentences with the key following the intervals and repeat the key aloud.
VII.
a) Use the following sentences in indirect speech. Make all the
necessary changes, b) Check your sentences with the key following the
intervals and repeat the key aloud.
VIII.
Listen to the poem "Nothing Will Die" by Alfred Tennyson.
Mark the stresses and tunes. Practise the poem. Learn it by heart.
Lesson Sixteen
A
Grammar: Sequence of Tenses. The Future in the Past. The Past Perfect Tense.
Texts: 1. Under the High Trees 2. At the Seaside.
STUDY THE FOLLOWING
Tab l e No. I SEQUENCE OF TENSES
sure
Tom Ann
ill. out.
He (She)
was
was
everybody
at school.
They
were
the children
were
in the country.
their friends
BenJameseveryonewasRoger IaskedifAliceready, busy.Wefree.The Brownsthey
b
her friendswereangry.
)
213
Tab l e No. 2 THE FUTURE IN
THE PAST
Ann
Tom
We
The Browns The studentsknew thatI
weshouldgo out of town, join them, enjoy the party, skate a lot. leave the place, never
return, read the story.
Mr. Black everyonewould
T ab l e No. 3 THE PAST
PERFECT TENSE
We
Ann
Tom
The Browns The studentsknew thatwe
everyone Mr. Black Irenehadread the letter, seen the play, bought a radio-set. stayed
indoors all day.Alice George The Blacksasked ifJohn Ann
the Browns everyonehadhad dinner, bought a lot of fruit, changed the clothes.
GRAMMAR EXERCISES
I. Study Substitution Tables No. 1, 2, 3 and compose as many sentences as you can.
II. Spell and transcribe the four forms of the following irregular verbs:
take, do, come, read, feel, say, see, ride, go, know, shine, forget, tell, cut, get,
make, run, fly, choose, catch, swim, lie.
III. Write the following sentences in indirect speech using the Future
in the Past:
1. She asked me: "Will you be angry with me?" 2.1 said: "I'll be too busy
tomorrow." 3. We said: "We'll take four exams in summer." 4. He said: "I'll show
you the main building of our University. It's very beautiful." 5. Алп said: "I'll have
a better command of the language, if I read English books." 6. The students said:
"We'll work hard at our pronunciation. We want to get rid
of our mistakes." 7. They asked us: "When will you join our choir?" 8. Nelly
asked her "Will you invite me to your birthday party?"
214
IV. Write the following sentences in indirect speech using the Past Perfect)
1. Roger said: "My uncle has been here more than once". 2. Alice asked me:
"Did you spend much time there?" 3. Ben asked me: "When did you join our
circle?" 4. She said: "Our group has worked in the lab today." 5. Bill said: "I
remember she was good at singing." 6. The mother asked her son: "Why have you
spent so much money on sweets?" 7. Fanny asked her friend: "Where did you go
during your vacation?"
V. Find in the book you use for your home reading examples on Sequence of Tenses.
Copy them out.
VI. Translate the following sentences into English:
1. Мы слышали, что все первокурсники получили большое удовольствие от
концерта. 2. Все были уверены, что Петр сдаст все экзамены на отлично. 3. В письме
сын писал матери, что принимал участие в трудной, но интересной работе. 4. Мы
узнали, что они не поехали за город из-за отвратительной погоды. 5. Бекки сказала
матери, что она пригласила на пикник своих друзей. 6. Я был уверен, что не смогу
получить отличную оценку по географии. 7. Брат сказал, что он не любит химию. 8.
Анна сказала Николаю, что ему придется делать доклад в субботу. 9. Дети сказали Тому,
что учительница поставила ему хорошую оценку.
10.
Он узнал, что этот человек был когда-то храбрым генералом.
11.Мы услышали по радио, что на следующий день мороз будет еще сильнее. 12. Она
боялась, что день будет холодным и дождливым. 13. Гарри сказал, что дождя не было, по
крайней мере, двое суток. 14. Девочка сказала, что ее братья уехали кататься на лыжах.
15. Отец сказал, что он уже просмотрел утренние газеты. 16. Подруга Нины сказала, что
ей удалось достать билеты.
TEXT 1 UNDER THE HIGH TREES
It was six o'clock when Ben Smith, dreadfully tired, arrived home from the
school where he was a teacher. He had had a lot of work and trouble that day. He
dreamed of a quiet evening at
home. June, his wife, methim at the door smiling radiantly. She asked Ben to
be quick with his supper and change after that. She said she had got everything
arranged and they would go to the theatre.
Only then did Ben remember it was the very night that had been settled for
their going out. So June was realizing her dream. He envied his daughter Penny, a
sixteen-year old girl, who said she would stay indoors and watch television. But
suddenly he was sorry for June who got too little entertainment even at week-
ends.
It was already past seven when they started for the theatre. The weather was
unusually nasty. Ben's nose and feet were cold. After 20 minutes a number 64 bus
stopped. They got on, but the seats were full. Unfortunately the bus conductor told
215
Ben to get off as only seven people could stand in the bus. Ben did so forgetting
that his wife had got the tickets.
It wa$ pouring now. The road was wet and there "was a hole in his shoe.
Luckily he got on the next number 64 bus soon enough and found a seat. Ben shut
his eyes. When he opened them again, the bus was past the theatre. It was still
raining as he walked back to it feeling unhappy. Over the doors were the words,
"Under the High Trees".
The man at the door said he could not let him in without a ticket. Ben was
about to leave when a girl behind the ticket-office window said: "Are you Mr.
Smith? Your wife left your ticket with me."
Ben squeezed to his seat in the dark, stepping on people's feet. He asked June
what the play was about. She whispered she could not understand much as one
actor, an old man, spoke very quietly, and the other, a young man, spoke very
quickly.
As soon as the play was over, they ran out. There were no buses and it was
raining. They waited and waited and their clothes got wetter. At last Ben lost his
patience and shouted: "Taxi!"
A passing taxi stopped. Ben pushed his wife in. "Two pounds" said the driver
when they arrived. "What?"
"After ten o'clock in the evening the fare is higher." Unwillingly Ben paid the
driver. Besides all the trouble it turned out to be too expensive for them,
"Did you watch television, Penny?" Ben asked his daughter. "Yes," she said.
"You can't imagine how brilliant the play was."
"What was the name oi it?" asked Ben as he picked up his cup of coffee.
"Under the High Trees" was the answer. Ben Smith put his cup of coffee on the
kitchen table and went slowly upstairs to bed.
TEXT 2 AT THE SEASIDE
Mrs. H i l t o n : It's much fresher here than in London.
Mr. H i l t o n : Yes, it was so stuffy in the train with the carriage so crowded, I
hate trains and buses.
Mrs. H i l t o n : It's all over now. Look? Alice and Roger have gone further
along. They've chosen a nice place.
Mr. H i l t o n : Yes, there are fewer people there.
Mrs. H i l t o n : How quick the young people are! They are already in their
bathing-suits lying in the sun.
A l i c e : Isn't the water cold?
R o g e r : It is, and you are certainly afraid to come into the water, you
coward.
Mrs. H i l t o n : Stop teasing your sister, Roger. I am sick and tired of your
quarrels. Let me have a minute's rest.
216
R o g e r : Sorry, Mum. I'll be as good as gold. Wait for me, Alice, I'm coming
too.
A l i c e : Quick! I'm already in the water.
R o g e r : I'll catch up with you easily. You splash about too much with your
feet.
A l i c e : I'm not such a strong swimmer as you. Oh, I've got a mouthful cf
salt water.
R o g e r : You shouldn't swim with your mouth open.
A l i c e : I feel a bit chilly. I'd rather swim ashore and lie on the sand.
R o g e r : I'll join you in a moment after I dive off that raft.
VOCABULARY NOTES
be tired after устать от, е. д. They were tired after having practice in hearing and
pronunciation. If you are tired of London, go down to the sea. be tired (of) надоесть; be
sick and tired надоесть до смерти; е. д. I am sick and tired of this noise.
a lot (of) много. The following word combinations are all translated into Russian with
the word «много». Mind their usage and the way prepositions are used: a great deal (of), a
good deal (of) are used with uncountable nouns, e. g. He spends a good (great) deal of time
at the language laboratory. She plays the piano a good (great) deal, a great number of, a
great many are used with countable nouns, e. g. There is a great number of old newspapers
in the desk. I saw a great many needles in the working-basket, a lot of, plenty of are used
both with countable and uncountable nouns, e. g. There is a lot (plenty) of fruit in the shop
today. There are a lot (plenty) of tooth-brushes on the shelf. He knows a lot.
Mind the way of strengthening the meaning of the given word combinations: He knows a
lot more than you think. I can tell you a great deal more on the subject.
get everything arranged все уладить, приготовить, е. д. Robert and Tom got
everything arranged for their excursion.
very adj тот самый, е. д. At that very moment Mrs. Hilton told them that it was high
time for everybody to go to bed. He is the very person we want to see.
settle vt улаживать, решать; назначать, определять, е. д. It was not difficult to settle the
question. Syn, decide v t / i решать, e. g. She decided to leave Nick at home.
realize vt 1. представлять себе; понимать, осознавать. Syn. understand
(understood, understood) vt, e. g. The man was very quiet. He didn't realize the danger.
2. осуществлять, реализовать, е. д. The plan was hard to realize (fulfil). But: It's necessary
to understand the rule before doing this exercise. I don't understand why he has left.
indoors adv дома; out-of-doors на улице; indoor games: chess, draughts, lotto,
dominoes, etc.; outdoor games: football, golf, cricket, hockey, etc.
Mind the stresses in the following word combinations: 'indoor ' games, but to 'stay in'
doors;' out-of-' doors.
watch television (TV) смотреть телевизор, е. д. The Leonovs bought a TV-set and
invited the neighbours to watch TV. to see
(watch) the TV programme смотреть телевизионною передачу, е. д. I'm
sorry you didn't see the TV programme on Sunday evening. It was really
interesting.
217
week-end n Sunday, with parts of Saturday and sometimes of Monday, as a
period of rest or as a holiday. Mind the use of prepositions: to do something at the
week-end, to go somewhere for the week-end.
start (for some place) v t / i 1. отправляться, пускаться в путь, е. д. The
family started for the railway station. 2. Начинать что-л.. e. g. The machine
started working.
unusually adv необычно, e. g. He thought that Jane looked unusually pretty
that day. Ant. usually обычно, e. g. He usually takes a cold shower at 8 o'clock, as
usual как обычно, е. д. Не took off his coat and hung it on the hook as usual.
to feel (look) unhappy (happy, bad, chilly, etc.) чувствовать себя
(выглядеть, казаться) несчастным (счастливым), чувствовать себя
(выглядеть) плохо, чувствовать озноб, but to feel (look) well чувствовать себя
(выглядеть) хорошо, е. д. Не always feels happy when he comes to his native
town. She felt chilly and swam ashore. Ann looked surprisingly beautiful in her
black dress. John looked well in spite of his illness.
to be about to собираться сделать что-л., е. д. They were about to leave the
house when the telephone bell rang.
besides adv кроме того; beside prp около, возле, е. д. X. is a wonderful
singer and a good pianist besides. There was a house beside the river.
expensive adj дорогой, e. g. The hat is too expensive. I can't buy it. Syn. dear
(разг.), e. g. Isn't the toy dear? Ant. cheap дешевый, e. g, The cheapest things
cannot be very good.
at the seaside у моря, на взморье
Note: shore n берег моря, океана, озера, as the shore of the Black Sea;
bank n берег реки, as the bank of the Moskva river; coast n побережье, as the
coast of France; the Black Sea coast; beach л пляж, е. д. Robert and his
Grandpa sometimes spent their time on the beach;*
as good as gold золотой, примерный (о поведении, о нравственных
качествах)
to catch up (with smb.) догонять, е. д. It's easy to catch up with him, he is
walking slowly. Mary was afraid that she would not be able to catch up with the
group after her illness.
to splash about брызгаться, плескаться
I'd rather (I would rather) я пожалуй, я предпочел бы, е. д. f d rather swim
ashore.
Compare: You'd better (You had better) вам бы лучше, e. g. You'd better go
now = It would be better for you to go now.
EXERCISES
I. a) The material below is to be prepared for reading. Mark the stresses and tunes,
b) Let your fellow-student read this exercise for you to detect his errors in sounds and tell
him what must be done to eliminate them:
218
[i:[ 1. Please believe me. Please leave me in peace.
2. Extremes meet.
3. Seeing is believing.
4. A friend in need is a friend indeed.
5. A sailor went to sea
To see what he could see. But all he could
see Was sea, sea, sea.
6. If all the seas were one sea, what a great sea that would be.
II. Before you start working at the text practise the sounds in the following word
combinations:
A. 1. [ai] smiling, realizing, behind, wife, arrived.
—
2. Loss of plosion: and trouble, that day, asked Ben, got too little, walked back.
3. Alveolars replaced by dentals: when they, in the bus, and there, at the door,
as the play, said the driver, in the evening, that was the end, was the answer.
B. 1. Loss of aspiration: swtop teasing, you s^plash. 2. No glottal stop: alljDver,
swin\jishore, div^_pff.
III. 1. a) Listen to the recording of the text "Under the High Trees".
Mark the stresses and tunes, b) Practise the text for test reading. Listen
to the text very carefully until you can say it in exactly the same way.
2. a) Listen to the recording of the dialogue "At the Seaside". Mark the stresses and
tunes, b) Practise the dialogue for test reading. Listen to the text very carefully until you
can say it in exactly the same way. c) Memorize the dialogue and dramatize it.
IV.
Transcribe the following words and practise their pronunciation:
dreadfully, radiantly, arranged, week-end, squeeze, enough, quietly, patience,
unwillingly, expensive;
carriage, both, further, bathing-suit, coward, tired, mouthful, ashore, moment,
raft.
V. Transcribe the following sentences; mark the stresses and tunes and picture them
on the staves:
1. "I can speak Japanese," he said. 2. "India is in the South of Asia," the pupil
answered. 3. "Does he come from South America?" John asked. 4. "Have you
come from Bulgaria?" I asked him. 5. Besides, he is a good sportsman. 6. To tell
you the truth, I dislike him. 7. As far as I know, she is married. 8. The students, of
course, knew the professor. 9. As a rule, I am free in the evening.
VI.
a) Answer the following questions:
219
1. Why was Ben Smith so dreadfully tired when he carne home? 2. Why was
June smiling radiantly? 3. What kind of dream was June realizing? 4. What was
Penny's idea of spending that evening? 5. Why did Ben envy his daughter? 6.
What do you think of Ben's attitude towards June? 7. What can be said about the
weather? 8. Why did Ben have to get off the bus? 9. How did it happen that Ben
went past the theatre? 10. Why didn't the man at the door let Ben in? 11. Who
saved the situation at that moment? 12. Was it easy for Ben to find his seat? Why?
13. Why did Ben and June find it difficult to understand the plot of the play? 14.
Why did Ben decide to take a taxi on their way back? 15. Why did the journey
turn out to be rather expensive? 16. What struck Ben when he talked to his
daughter about watching TV?
b) Ask your comrades questions on Text 2. c) Ask your comrades questions on their
past week-end,
VII.
Fill in prepositions or adverbs wherever necessary. Retell the text:
Tom Sawyer got tired ... the medicine which Aunt Polly gave ... him every day.
So once he decided to give it ...his Aunt's cat Peter. Peter sprang up ... the air ...
once. ... a few minutes Aunt Polly entered ... the room. She wanted to know what
Tom was
laughing ... . She came just ... time to see Peter jumping........................the
window and carrying the last flower-pot ... him. Tom lay ... the floor laughing.
She looked down and saw the bottle ... medicine and a teaspoon ... the bed. Aunt
Polly took Tom ... the ear and
asked why he had treated ... the poor animal like that. Tom said, "I was sorry. .
him because he had no aunt."
VIII.
Each sentence describes a certain situation in a concise way.
Find out some more details about the situation by asking questions. Work
in pairs. Use conversational phrases:
1. They are proud of their wonderful language laboratory. 2. Tom asked his
father to take him down to the seaside. 3. She is turning on the radio. 4. The
Greens have breakfast in the open air in summer. 5. Ann does her morning
exercises to music every day.
IX. Fill in the right word out of those in brackets (to hear, to listen; to leave, to stay,
tall, high; short, low):
1. She said she did not like the idea of... the children all by themselves. 2.
When Tom ... the old man's words he trembled with fear. 3. He said he had spent
his childhood far away in ... mountains. 4. When the teacher made sure that all his
pupils were... to him he began explaining the new material. 5. Peter the First was
an unusually ... man. 6. The girl said that she would never ... a moment in the
220
house where nobody liked her. 7. He was so ... that his wife was ... than he. 8. Pay
attention to that ...building.
X. Replace the part of the model in bold type by the following. M о d e 1: It is high
time for everybody to swim ashore.
for him to leave, for them to go out of town, for everybody to begin the work,
for John to return.
XI.
Form 5 sentences on the model using the following adjectives.
M o d e l : The girl was tall enough to reach the apples, quick, well, clever,
energetic, polite, nice, distinct.
XII. Write 5 sentences of your own on each of the models and add
some more sentences for a situation.
M o d e l : a) It was such a wonderful holiday. We bathed a lot.
b) She dislikes such selfish young men. They get on her nerves.
c) Don't go out in such bad weather. You may catch cold.
XIII. Write exclamatory sentences on the models using the given adjectives.
M o d e l 1: a) How quick the boy is! He has already run away!
b) How quick the young people are! They are already on the other bank!
M o d e l 2: a) What a quick boy he is! He has already come
back!
b) What quick young people they are! They are already on their way home!
strong, weak, interesting, beautiful, lovely, tall, high, jolly.
XIV.
Form adjectives of negative meaning with the help of the prefix ил- from the
following adjectives. Translate the derived adjectives into Russian:
tidy, pleasant, selfish, able, grateful, limited, necessary, married, original.
XV.
Form adjectives of negative meaning with the help of the suffix -less from the
following nouns. Translate the adjectives into Russian:
home, speech, care, wood, water, thought, sleep, rest, hair, tooth.
XVI. a) Translate the following sentences into Russian:
1. Would you rather have a piece of bread or a cake? 2. I would rather go to the
cinema than stay at home. 3. We had better leave the house at 5 *so as not to be
late. 4. Would you like to go to the theatre? — No, thank you, I would rather stay
at home. 5. You had better eat your breakfast or you'll be hungry before lunch-
time. 6. If we don't run, we shall miss the bus, so we had better run. 7. Would your
brother like to come? — I think he'd rather not. 8. The boys would rather play
football.
9. I would rather have hot weather than cold weather.
221
10.
Which would you rather have: tea or coffee?
Ы Make up sentences using the following tables.
M o d e l : You'd better (You had better) do it yourself.
We'd He'd She'd I'd
They'd You'd better
try again.
say nothing, go at once, wait for her.
tell him the answer.
М о d е 1: I'd rather (I would rather) do it myself.
stay at home.
take the book.
go on an excursion.
take a taxi.
have tea than coffee.
I'd
We'd
He'd
She'd
They'd
You'd
XVII. Translate the following sentences into English:
1. Сколько времени им нужно, чтобы прочитать эти журналы? — На это
не потребуется и получаса. Сколько времени вам будет нужно, чтобы
закончить эту работу? — Около полутора часов. 2. Друзья собирались
поехать за город в конце недели. 3. Я очень устала после экскурсии и не
смогу приехать к вам сегодня. 4. Им всем хотелось провести праздник
весело. 5. Детям нельзя смотреть телевизор каждый день. 6. Эта женщина
выглядит молодо. Она всегда так хорошо выглядит? 7. Он никогда не думал,
что сможет осуществить свою мечту. Старик сознавал, как серьезно было его
положение. 8. Легко затеять ссору, но нелегко помириться. 9. Ваш ребенок
знает гораздо больше, чем вы думаете. 10. Они долго сидели на берегу реки.
На берегу озера никого не было. На побережье Черного моря сейчас тепло.
11. К ним присоединились 12-летняя Мэри и Дикки, веселый пятилетний
мальчуган. 12. Трудно оставаться дома в такую погоду. 13. Он готов был
(собирался) выйти из дома, когда начался дождь. 14. Мне хотелось бы быть
сейчас на свежем воздухе. 15. Эту проблему нетрудно разрешить. 16. Вот та
222
самая тетрадь, которая мне нужна. Вот тот самый человек, которого я мечтал
встретить. 17. В вагоне очень душно. Давай выйдем на платформу на
следующей остановке.
XVIII.
a) Retell Text 1 in the words of the author, Ben Smith, June,
Penny, one of the spectators at the theatre, b) Think of another way for
the Smiths to spend their week-end. c) Sum up the content of the text in
a few sentences.
XIX. Fill in the blanks with a great {good) deal [ o f ) ; a great many,
a great number o f ; plenty o f :
1. It was a very gay party. We laughed .... 2. The boys saw. . people on the
beach. 3. There were ... most beautiful flowers in the mountains. 4. There are ...
small boats at the bank. 5. In winter ... skiers practise their skill on the
VorobyevHills. 6. Both of the girls spend ... time on reading books in the original.
7 . They used to quarrel.... but they made up their quarrels easi
ly. 8. In the morning we settled ... questions and got everything arranged for
the journey. 9. After her illness she had to study ... to catch up with the group.
10. ... fashionable dresses were displayed in the shop-windows. 11. One can see ...
fruit and vegetables at the market in autumn. 12. ... multistoreyed buildings have
lately appeared in the suburbs of Moscow. 13. ... trains run from Moscow to St.
Petersburg every day. 14. The mother and the daughter spent ... money at a ready-
made clothes department. 15. You can't buy ... expensive things with the money
you have been given.
XX.
Fill in articles wherever necessary. Retell the stories:
1. ... young lady entered ... crowded bus with ... pair of ... skates for ... figure
skating over her arm. ... gentleman stood up to give her his seat. "Thank you very
much, sir," ... lady said, "but I've been skating all ... afternoon and I'm tired of
sitting down." 2. ... young man and his girl-friend once decided to see ... football
match. It was very difficult to get ... tickets and they had to wait outside for ...
long time. ... young people got there only thirty minutes after ... beginning of ...
first half. "What's the score?" Peter asked ... fan sitting next to him. "Nothing to
nothing." ... fan replied. "You see," said ... girl with ... smile, "we haven't missed
anything."
XXI.
Make up dialogues:
a) between Ben and June; b) June and Penny; c) Ben and Penny; d) Ben and
June, looking out of the windows of a taxi; e) Ben and his neighbour after the visit
to the theatre; f) two friends who have come to Moscow for their vacation; g) two
friends going on a visit.
223
XXII.
Describe situations using the following words and word combi-
nations:
a) a t the seaside: the beach, waves, to be fond of looking at the bright sky,
to lie in the sun, to swim, to dive, to go boating, children, sea-gulls, to be glad to;
b) on Sunday, to go on an excursion, it took to go by bus, crowded, to get off,
the wonderfully fresh country air, the tall pines and birch trees, to enjoy the beauty
of the landscape, to look forward to;
a) a t the skating-rink: the frosty air, to go skating, to be fond of, figure
skating, to enjoy music, a great many, to be tired after;
c) a t the evening party: to gather, to celebrate, gay, smiling, to sing, to
recite poems, to dance, to enjoy oneself, to be pleased with.
XXIII.
Respond to the following sentences. Work in pairs:
1. Excuse me, I haven't looked through this paper yet. 2. Oh, it's you! 3. Give
me that pencil, please. 4. May I take your newspaper? 5. What about going to the
country today? 6. How are you? 7. I'm afraid, I'm very short of time. 8. Well, if it
isn't old Jack!
XXIV.
Think of stimulating phrases to which those below could be replies. Work in
pairs:
1. Here you are. 2. Oh, no, I didn't. 3. I am afraid not. 4. It's nonsense. 5.
Really? 6. I think so. 7. Certainly. 8. Oh, it's too bad. 9. Right you are. 10. Don't
worry. 11. See you tomorrow, then.
XXV.
Retell Text 2 in indirect speech, as if you were Alice (Roger, Mr. Hilton, Mrs.
Hilton).
XXV.
a) Make up a dialogue using conversational phrases:
Два студента собираются на зимние каникулы в дом отдыха. Один из них уже был в
этом доме отдыха прошлой зимой, и ему там очень понравилось. На вопрос товарища,
где они смогут кататься на коньках, он отвечает, что там есть большой пруд, и зимой,
когда он замерзает, на нем катаются на коньках. Надо ли брать с собой коньки,
спрашивает его товарищ, или их можно получить в доме отдыха. В прошлом году,
отвечает первый студент, коньки можно было достать в доме отдыха. А лыжи лучше
взять с собой. В хорошую погоду многие уезжают на лыжах в лес, и тогда получить их
почти невозможно.
b) Get ready with a situation for your fellow-student to give it in the form of a
dialogue.
XXVII.
Translate the story into English. Retell it:
224
Погода была прекрасная в то воскресное утро. Федоровым очень хотелось провести
несколько часов на свежем воздухе. Потребовалось немного времени, чтобы обдумать
план отдыха. Все
они — отец, мать и два сына, Юрий и Виктор, — были отличными
лыжниками. Поэтому они решили взять лыжи и выехать как можно скорее
за город.
Они позавтракали, приготовили все для поездки и в 10 часов вышли из
дома.
Улицы были полны народу. Одни шли в музеи и на выставки, другие —
навестить друзей. Многие молодые люди и дети несли лыжи или коньки.
Через пять минут Федоровы добрались до Савеловского вокзала. Через
час вместе с другими лыжниками они были на станции Турист. Морозный
воздух был изумительно свеж. Все вокруг было покрыто снегом.
После прогулки все почувствовали себя немного уставшими, но были
довольны днем, проведенным за городом. После обеда братья играли в
шахматы. Отец и мать сказали, что предпочитают остаться вечером дома и
посмотреть телевизор. Отец сказал, что воскресная телевизионная
программа обещает быть интересной. Они посмотрят новый фильм и с
удовольствием послушают оперу Мусоргского
Но Юрий и Виктор не собирались отдыхать дома. Александр, их друг,
праздновал свой день рождения. Оба брата были приглашены. Мать
пожелала им хорошо повеселиться на вечере. Юноши попрощались с
родителями и вышли из дома.
XXVIII.
Arrange short dialogues according to the model. Use the,
following statements.
M o d e l : A: I've never seen such a town. B: What did
you say? A: I said I'd never seen such a town.
1. She can't help admiring St. Petersburg. 2. They haven't got any refrigerator.
3. He won't be able to make a report tomorrow. 4. My friend isn't a coward. 5.
Mary can shoot well. 6. My brother hasn't had dinner yet. 7. We'll clean the
windows on Monday. 8. They've gone further along. 9. She's having a bathe, 10.
The boy's teasing a dog. 11. They're about to dive off that raft.
XXIX.
Render the following in indirect speech:
Once in Berlin, Remarque, the author of "All Quiet on the Western Front", was
talking to an American girl.
The American, speaking in German, asked Remarque why he had never visited
the United States. His answer was: "I know эп1у a few sentences in English."
"What are the sentences?" inquired the girl.
Remarque said: "How do you do? I love you. Forgive me. Forget me. Ham and
eggs, please."
225
"Why, with that vocabulary you could tour my country from Maine to
California," the girl said.
XXX.
Find a picture on the topic "Rest" for your discussion in class. Write 8—10
questions which would help your fellow-students to describe the picture.
XXX.
a) Translate into Russian, b) Find the key-phrases. Retell the text. Mind the
speed limit:
Let's Have a Picnic
Picnics are popular with women and children and some men who know how to
make a fire. Children are fond of picnics chiefly because, as a rule, there are no
tables at picnics and consequently no table manners and because they have an
excellent opportunity to eat things that do not agree with them. Since picnic
lunches are always just about the same and therefore require little imagination,
women do not have to trouble about thinking up a meal.
Much depends, of course, upon the day. Typical picnic weather is of three
kinds. Either it is dark and threatening with occasional showers in the morning,
clearing in the afternoon or it is hot and clear in the morning, with thunder
showers in the afternoon; or there is a steady drizzle all day long. But as most of
the lunch is prepared ahead of time, nothing much can be done about it. After all,
there is not much choice between eating a picnic lunch that has waited a day or
two and getting a soaking. Picnic grounds are usually situated on a body of water
at some high altitude. One of these features is essential, for no picnic can be a
success unless the children have something to fall into, or fall off. Also, a body of
water naturally suggests taking fishing tackles along. No fish was ever known to
have been caught on a picnic, but fishing serves as an excellent excuse for getting
out of the way while the heavy work is being done.
Quite the most important feature of the picnic is the lunch. Fried chicken is
always popular ... Then there should be hard-boiled eggs. Almost everything else
that comes in a can or a paper bag is good for a picnic lunch. These containers are
very important as, after the contents have been eaten, they are strewn about and
identify the picnic ground. Ginger ale, too, should be brought along to remind
you that you left the bottle-opener at home. However, there is always at least one
person present who knows how to open a bottle on a rock.
As soon as the food and other equipment have been unpacked it is in order to
start a fire. Collecting wood provides occupation for people who do not know how
to amuse themselves.
After the lunch has been eaten a picnic is mostly anticlimax. But there is
always the possibility of someone nearly getting drowned or running into a
hornets' nest or twisting an ankle. However, you must remain until well into
afternoon, or you may not appear to have had a good lime. To make matters
worse, someone will suggest singing.
226
Picnics, whatever may be said against them, have their advantages. At least
they reawaken in the hearts of many the truth of the old saying that there is no
place like home.
(S M G From "Humour Variety. Stories, Jokes, Cartoons", No 2, London)
XXXII. Read and translate the following story which is not finished, give a title and
your own ending to it:
The morning we left Liverpool the weather was very fine and we were going
to have a very pleasant time. The captain told us it would be warm and calm all
the way to New York. I still remember some of the passengers. There was an old
lady who was going to visit her son in Boston. Then there was a man who was
going to start a new life in Canada. They both went down with the ship. The first
and second days were very nice. I thought I would soon have a fine suntan. Then,
on the second evening the captain told us that the weather was going to be a bit
worse than expected, but it wouldn't last long.
It turned very nasty on the third day. None of us had any idea how bad it was
going to get. By the time it was evening, it was really terrible.
Everybody stayed in their cabins on the fourth day. The storm was impossible
to describe by then. Suddenly I felt a jolt.
(From "English in Situations" by R O'Neill London Oxford University Press)
^XXXIII. a) Watch Film Segment Five "The Picnic", b) Watch the film segment
again to find the English equivalents to the following:
растворимый кофе; пиво в банках; снимать (делать фото); моментальный
снимок; с континента; линза (объектив); закопать мусор.
с) Answer your teacher's questions on the content of the film segment, d) Listen to
the sound track recording of Segment Five. Make up the dialogue between Mrs. Brown
and Margaret on the phone. Get ready to ask and answer questions on the content of
Segment Five. Write a short account of what happened at the picnic.
XXXIV.
Write a short composition about your week-end.
XXXV.
Arrange a dialogue on the topic "Week-End". Use conversational phrases.
LABORATORY WORK
I. a) Repeat the sentences after the tape, b) Make them interrogative
and negative.
227
II. Use the sentences in indirect speech. Mind the change in intona-
tion.
III.
Paraphrase the sentences using a great deal and a good deal instead of a lot
IV. Paraphrase the sentences using a great number and a great many instead of a lot.
V.
a) Use the adjectives unhappy, bad, awful, nervous, frightened,
ill, strange instead of the adjective happy, b) Use the nouns taxi, bus,
tram, trolley-bus, pony instead of the noun bicycle.
VI.
a) Use the adjectives gay, pretty, clever, kind, dull instead of the adjective
quick, b) Compose exclamatory sentences beginning with What ... Use the following
word combinations: a strong wind, a high mountain, a bright student, a kind woman.
VII. a) Translate the sentences into English using the vocabulary of the lesson, b)
Check your translation with the key.
VIII.
Listen to the wrong statements. Correct them.
IX.
Listen to the dialogue "Planning a Holiday". Mark the stresses
and tunes. Repeat it following the model. Learn it by heart.
Lesson Seventeen
Л
Grammar; The Passive Voice.
Texts: 1. A Visit to Moscow. 2. Conversation.
\1
STUDY THE FOLLOWING
T a b l e No 1 THE PASSIVE
VOICE
The articleThe poemwaswrittenon Monday.translatedyesterday.
The exercisesfinishedlast week.The letterswere
GRAMMAR EXERCISES
I. Study Substitution Table No. 1 and compose as many sentences as
you can.
II. Change the form of the verbs in the sentences from the active
into the passive voice and add something to them to develop a situation:
228
1. We turn on the light when it's dark. 2. The students finished their translation
in time. 3. Helen washed the dishes. 4. Betty often took Benny to the park. 5.
Mother has made some coffee. 6. Have you ironed your dress yet? 7. Nina
mispronounced the word. 8. We pronounce the consonant with aspiration. 9. We
form the Present Perfect Tense with the help of the auxiliary verb 'to have'. 10.
They told her the truth. 11 She promised me a book. 12. She's cooked the cake
very well. 13. One uses chalk for writing on the blackboard. 14. I'll finish my
work at about seven. 15. Someone has opened the door. 16. The waitress brought
in the coffee. 17. One of my friends took me to the pictures last week. 18. They'll
meet me at the station. 19. We shall finish this work in time. 20. They built the
house in 1980. 21. They didn't invite me to the birthday party because they didn't
know I was in Moscow. 22. I didn't leave
the windows open. 23. They didn't turn off the light. 24. I have invited some
friends to tea. 25. She's given me an English book. 26. Have you written the letter
yet?
III.
Change the form of the verbs in the sentences from the passive into the active
voice. Add something to them to develop a situation. Think of new subjects in the
sentences:
1. The light has not been switched off. 2. The boy was punished for something.
3. His work was finished by 3 o'clock. 4. The dictation was written without
mistakes. 5. Who is the article written by? 6. Her dress was washed and ironed. 7.
I was not invited to the party. 8. The work wasn't finished in time. 9. This house
was built last year. 10. The letter has just been sent off. 11. This article will be
translated. 12. When will this book be read? 13. The room was cleaned and aired.
14. Have all these books been read? 15. Who are these letters written by?
16.
The letter's just been typed. 17. She showed me the article which had
been translated by her brother. 18.1 shan't be allowed to go there. 19. He's been
told everything. 20. All the questions must be answered. (By you).
IV. Translate the following sentences into English:
1. Эта статья написана одним из наиболее известных английских
журналистов. 2. Эта книга должна быть прочитана всеми студентами нашей
группы. 3. Кем написана эта книга? 4. Статья должна быть переведена к 5
часам. 5. Он обещает, что перевод будет закончен вовремя. 6. Когда я пришла
домой, стол был уже накрыт. 7. Их будут обучать английскому языку. 8.
Когда экзамен был сдан, студенты пошли на стадион. 9. Когда будет
написана ваша статья для стенной газеты? — Завтра. 10. Лаборатория речи
посещается ежедневно всеми студентами. 11. Все эти книги взяты из
библиотеки. 12. Диктант был сдан преподавателю после звонка. 13. Нам об
этом ничего не сказали. 14. Студенты нашей группы всегда приглашаются на
заседания клуба. 15. Она читала письмо, полученное от сына. 16. Это не
могло быть сказано студентами.
229
17.
Я думала, что хлеб и масло будут куплены сестрой. 18. Весной
это поле будет покрыто зеленой травой и цветами. 19. Проверь, пожалуйста,
выключены ли газ и электричество. 20 Уроки были приготовлены, книги и
тетради уложены в портфель. 21. Письма были оставлены (забыты) на столе.
22. Мальчику не разрешили купаться в реке. 23. После обеда посуда была
вымыта.
TEXT 1
A VISIT TO MOSCOW
Last summer Mr. Wilson, his wife and their daughter Mary — tourists from
England arrived in Moscow. It was their first visit to Russia and they wanted to
—
see as much as possible.
Their guide showed them a lot of places of interest so that they could get a
good idea of the Russian capital.
The Wilsons liked Moscow's straight and broad streets and avenues. They
admired the centre of the city with its theatres, cinemas, museums, monuments,
and wonderful multi-storeyed buildings. They were greatly impressed by the
Moscow Kremlin, Red Square, Lenin Avenue, which is one of the longest and
busiest streets in Moscow.
The Wilsons wanted to see Moscow University and the guide suggested their
going there by metro. They liked the idea and joined a stream of people going
downstairs into the metro. It^ seemed to them that nearly everyone in Moscow
was in a hurry.,; Very few were satisfied to stand still and let the magical stair- *
case carry them down to the platforms below. Most people went hurrying down on
the left side. On and on ran the train through, the tunnel and at every station
people came in and out. The trip-gave the Wilsons a good impression of Moscow's
immense size.
When they came up into the daylight, they saw the magnificent building of
the University which is situated on the Voro-byev Hills and from there they
enjoyed a most beautiful view of the whole city.
They went for a ride in the city. The size and the beauty of the capital made a
great impression on the family. The saw endless streams of buses, trolley-buses
and cars in the streets, crowds of people walking along the pavements. They
crossed the city in different directions but to their great surprise they saw the
same thing everywhere: well planned streets lined with trees, multi-storeyed
houses, big stores, hotels and beautiful squares. They saw no contrasts between
the central part of the city and its suburbs so typical of big old towns.
The Wilsons went sightseeing every day of their stay in Moscow. And before
their tour came to an end they had seen and learned a lot of interesting* things
about the capital and the country. They liked Moscow and the Muscovites who are
so hospitable and friendly.
TEXT 2
230
CONVERSATION
S t r a n g e r : Excuse me.
R e s i d e n t : Yes?
S t r .: I... I was wondering if you could help me. R.: Well, I'll
try.
S t г.: I need to find out where the...ver. . town centre is. Now I see there is a
sign up there that points to the left.
R.: Ah, well, let me see, ... er. . it all depends if you're on foot or going by car.
S t r .: Ah, no, I'm walking.
R.: Ah well, you turn to the left and then carry straight on.
S t r . : Ah, right, thanks! Er... I wonder if you could tell me... um... if there's a
good hotel... er. . in town that I can use.
R.: Oh, let me think a moment... um... yes, there are two hotels — they're in
the High Street... er... one on each side of the road.
S t r . : Right, well, I expect we'll manage to find one of those. Er, 1 wonder if
you could tell me er... anything about the... er. . castle in town... er... where...
where it is.
R.: Um, well, it's actually further on... er. . down the High Street and then you
cross over the bridge and it's on the other side of the river.
S t r . : I see, I see. Could you tell me a bit more about it? Is it worth visiting
you think?
R.: I'm not really sure. I've never actually been there myself. I think it's one of
the tourist attractions of the town.
S t r . : I see, well, right, thank you, thank you.
VOCABULARY NOTES
visit л посещение, визит, as a visit to a friend, a visit to the Crimea: visit vt посещать,
навещать, е. д. They visited the Ivanovs on Sunday. Syn. attend vt посещать регулярно
(лекции, собрания), as to attend lectures, meetings, classes
tourist л турист, путешественник; tour л путешествие, экскурсия, поездка; to make
a tour of (some place) объехать, осмотреть, е. д. We made a tour of the new metro
stations.
arrive vi прибывать, приезжать. Syn. come vi; to arrive in прибыть, приехать (в
страну, в большой город), е. д. A large group of tourists from England arrived in Russia. We
arrived in Moscow in the evening, to arrive at прибыть, приехать (в небольшой
населенный пункт), е. д. She arrived at Abramtsevo. We arrived at the station to meet our
friend, arrival n прибытие, приезд, е. д. I saw him on the day of his arrival.
place of interest достопримечательность
so that для того чтобы
idea n представление, идея, е. д. That's a good idea, let's visit Kiev in winter, to get an
idea of smth. получать представление, е. д. I'd like to get an idea of his character, to give
231
an idea дать общее представление, е. д. This book gives you a good idea of life in
England.
straight adj прямой, as a straight line (street, road, etc.); straight adv прямо, as to
stand straight; go (carry) straight on идите прямо
broad adj широкий; Syn. wide, e. g. We need broad roads now that there are so many
motor-cars. Ant. narrow
avenue л проспект
impress vt производить впечатление, е. д. The book didn't impress me at all.
impression л впечатление; to make an impression on smb. производить
впечатление на кого-л., е. д. His speech made a great impression on the audience.
busy adj 1. занятый; to be busy (doing smth.) быть занятым, е. д. I was busy
getting ready for the journey. 2. оживленный, беспокойный, суетливый, е. д. Tve^skaya
Street is one of the busiest streets in Moscow.
suggest vt предлагать, выдвигать идею, предложение. Syn. offer. The verb to
suggest is never followed by an infinitive. The direct object following the verb to suggest
may be expressed by a noun, a gerund or a clause.
a walk in the park, (our) takinq a walk in the park, that we (he, she, they) should take a
{walk in the park.
offer vt предлагать. The direct object following the verb to offer may be expressed by a
noun or an infinitive.
to help me. He offered ^ his help.
me a glass of lemonade.
satisfy vt удовлетворять; Ant. dissatisfy, e. g. The teacher was satisfied with
the student's answer, satisfactory adj удовлетворительный; Ant. unsatisfactory, e.
g. She got a satisfactory mark at the exam.
immense adj огромный, as immense distance, height; immensely adv
чрезвычайно, очень, е. д. Our guests were surprised at the immense size of
Moscow. Their trip was immensely interesting.
magnificent adj величественный, великолепный; Syn. splendid, excellent as
a magnificent building (hotel, house)
to be situated быть расположенным, е. д. The village is situated on the bank
of the river Volga.
crowd л толпа; crowded adj переполненный, битком набитый;
overcrowded p. p., e. g. The bus was overcrowded.
cross vt пересекать, переходить (улицу), crossing л переход, е. д. Cross busy
streets at crossings, (subway л подземный переход), across ргр через, по ту
сторону, е. д. There is a bridge across the river, to come across smth. случайно
натолкнуться, е. д. I came across a very interesting phrase in the book, to cross
out вычеркивать, e. g. Two of the words were crossed out.
direction л направление; in the direction of в направлении, е. д. I saw her
walking in the direction of the Institute, direct adj прямой, as a direct line, direct
speech, direct object
surprise vt удивлять, поражать, е. д. I was surprised to see the cat playing
with the dog. to be surprised at smth. удивляться, е. д. I was surprised at seeing
232
her there, surprise л удивление, е. д. То my great surprise his plan succeeded, in
surprise с удивлением, е. д. The girl looked at us in surprise.
sights n pi достопримечательности, as to see the sights of Moscow; Syn.
places of interest, e. g. They were shown a lot of places of interest during their
tour, sightseeing n осмотр достопримечательностей; to go sightseeing
осматривать достопримечательности
sign л знак, е. д. a traffic sign
manage vt справляться, успевать (в чём-л.), е. д. I didn't manage to go to the
library today, I had no time, castle л замок
attraction л привлекательность, е. д. The picture gallery is one of the greatest
attractions of our town, attract vt привлекать, притягивать; to attract one's
attention привлекать чье-л, внимание
TOPICAL VOCABULARY
get on/off (a bus); to put down at...; down/up the street; at the bottom of the
street; take bus No. 7. change for bus No. 7; it's a five minutes' walk from here;
take the first turning to the left/right; what/how much is the fare?; full up/packed;
traffic regulations/lights; right/left hand traffic: heavy/light traffic; one way
traffic; peak/rush hours; industrial area; shopping area/centre; outskirts;
outstanding; tower
EXERCISES
I. Spell and transcribe the four forms of the following verbs:
arrive, get, admire, impress, situate, enjoy, ride, cross, learn, show, teach,
make, visit, plan, drive, build.
II. Give the comparative and superlative degrees of the following adjectives:
new, long, busy, dirty, beautiful, good, large, big, splendid, narrow, interesting,
hospitable, straight, impressive, broad, crooked.
III.
Write a) the plural and b) the singular of:
a) avenue, bus, crowd, фу, view;
b) pictures, taxis, squares, theatres, minutes, guides.
IV. Transcribe the following words and explain the reading rules applied in them:
broad, crooked, crowded, guide, hotel, museum, narrow, street, stream, square,
typical, worker, show, friendly, builder, view, straight, country, avenue, between.
233
V. a) The material below is to be prepared for reading. Mark the stresses and tunes.
Concentrate your attention on sounds, b) Let your fellow-student pronounce this exercise
for you to detect his errors in the vowel [a:] and tell him what must be done to eliminate
them:
[a:] 1. Can't you ask Father or Aunt Margaret?
2. He laughs best who'laughs last.
3. Half heart is no heart.
4. The highest art is artlessness.
VI.
Before you start working at the text practise the sounds in the
following words and word combinations:
A.
1. [av] a lot of places of interest, the centre of the city,
—
typical of big towns, streams of buses, crowds of people.
2. a) Alveolars before interdentals: admired w the centre, its^theatres, they
crossed^the city, suggested^their going, on^the left side, b) No devoicing before
voiceless consonants: aswpossi-ble, their guide^showed, ofwpeople.
B.1. [rj] —wondering^if you, anything^, about, going^by
car, is it worth visitingwyou think? 2. Linking [r]: the town centre w is, further _
on, a bit more^about it, I wonder^if, never^actually.
VII.
1. a) Listen to the recording of the text **A Visit to Moscow". Mark the
stresses and tunes, b) Practise the text for test reading. Listen to the recording very
carefully until you can say it in exactly the same way. c) Listen to Text 2 carefully. Try to
dramatize it following the conversational style of the speakers on the tape.
VIII.
Transcribe the following sentences, mark the stresses and tunes and picture
them on the staves:
1. I say, Mary! Does this bus go to Tverskaya Street? 2. Excuse me, can you
tell me where the nearest metro station is about here? — Certainly. 3. Is there a
bus from here to Red Square? — Yes, any bus'll take you.
IX.
Answer the following questions:
1. When did the Wilsons arrive in Moscow? 2. Where did they come from? 3.
They came to Moscow on a visit, didn't they? 4. What do people usually do when
they come to a town for the first time? 5. Wriat did they want to see in Moscow?
They wanted to see as much as possible, didn't they? 6. Who took them
sightseeing about the city? 7. What places of interest did the guide show them? 8.
Did they do much sightseeing? 9. Did the Wilsons like the centre of out city? 10.
What did they admire most of all? 11. Where is Moscow University situated? 12.
What did the tourists see from the Vorobyev Hills? 13. Where else can one enjoy a
most beautiful view of the whole city from? 14. Can you describe the centre of
Moscow? 15. In which street do you live? 16. How long does it take you to get to
the University from your place? 17. Does your friend live in the suburbs of
Moscow?
234
9 Заказ 1271
257
18.
Can you tell me the way from here to Petrovka Street?
19.
How does your father usually get home from his office? 20. Is it easy
to get a taxi during rush hours? 21. If one of your friends came here for
sightseeing what would you advise him to see if he had: one day; two days; a
week or a fortnight?
X. Rewrite as in the models.
M o d e l 1: His answer surprised me.
I was surprised at his answer.
1. Her voice surprised us all. 2. The results of the exam surprised the teacher.
3. His behaviour surprised those who were present. 4. You surprise me. 5. Your
written test surprises us. 6. The girl's speech surprised the students. 7. The youth's
words surprised the old people.
M o d e l 2: The teacher was impressed by the student's answer.
The student's answer made an impression on the teacher.
1. The listeners were impressed by the speech. 2. The play impresses me each
time I see it. 3. The tourist was impressed by the places of interest in St.
Petersburg. 4. We were greatly impressed by Petrov's speech. 5. My companions
were impressed by her singing.
M o d e l 3: He came to Moscow the other day.
He arrived in Moscow the other day.
1. He has come to St. Petersburg to take part in the work of the congress. 2. He
came to the meeting in time. 3. They came to the seaside at the week-end. 4. We
came to London on the 16th of March. 5. We all came to the station to see our
friends off to Minsk. 6 . We came to Pushkino at about б o'clock.
XI.
Fill in prepositions if necessary:
A. 1. A lot ... tourists ... various countries arrive ... Russia. 2. The children
enjoyed riding ... the metro and going ... escalators which led ... the platforms. 3.
We were taken ... the town ... the guide. 4. Mary was most interested ... the
museums. She was impressed ... the beautiful things she saw there. 5. ... Sunday
we went ... the Recreation Park, we walked ... the alleys. The leaves ... the trees
were turning red, brown and yellow. It was
like being ... the country, and only the noise ... the streets ... the distance
reminded us that we were still... the city. 6. We greatly enjoyed a ride ... the city ...
a taxi. 7. The buildings built.... the suburbs are as modern and beautiful as those ...
the centre ... the town. 8. Most ... the places ... interest are as a rule situated ... the
centre ... the town. 9. Tourists always admire the Moscow metro, the beauty ... its
235
architecture different ... each station. 10. There were crowds ... people ... the
streets ... the first... January. 11. ... which direction did he go? — He was
walking ... the direction ... Red Square. 12. I planned to leave ... Sochi... the 5th
July. 13. These splendid multi-storeyed houses are inhabited ... the workers ... the
automobile plant. 14. ... all the theatres ... Moscow she prefers the Bolshoi
(theatre). 15. We went ... sightseeing tours whenever we had time. 16. ... their
great surprise the picture did not impress me ... all. 17. The dean's speech made a
great impression ... the students. 18. They were sitting side ... side. 19. We were
all greatly impressed ... his knowledge ... so many foreign languages. 20. I
came ... these old photos when I was looking ... my passport. 21. Can you make
room ... another boy ... that desk?
B. A n n : Er, 1 say, Betty? Do you live ... the hostel ... our Institute?
B e t t y : Oh, no. I'm a Muscovite and live ... Tverskaya Street. But why?
A n n : Well. I wanted to call ... a friend ... mine who lives ... the hostel, but
I'm not sure I can find the way there. Is it a long way ... the Institute?
B e t t y : Rather. It'll take you 35 minutes or so.
A n n: Do you happen to know how I can get there ... here?
B e t t y : Ohr let me think for a moment. Take trolley-bus 14. It'll take you
right there. I'm not absolutely sure, but I think there's a stop ... the metro station.
A n n: I wonder if I can get there by metro.
B e t t y : Why yes of course. But if you go ... metro you'll have to change ...
Revolution Square, that's why the best way for you to go is ... trolley-bus.
A n n : And where do I get...?
B e t t y : You have to go as far as Yaroslavskaya Street stop, there you get turn
... the corner, walk a short distance ... the street and ... less than 5 minutes you'll
find yourself... the hostel.
A n n : It's perfectly clear.
B e t t y : It is quite easy to get there. But ... case you lose your way, you may
ask a militiaman or any passer-by ... it. They'll show you the way, only don't
forget the address: 18 Yaroslavskaya Street.
A n n : Thank you very much, Betty. Good-bye.
XII.
Translate the following sentences into English using You'd better, I'd rather.
1. Ты бы лучше поехал на метро, а вам бы лучше сойти на следующей
остановке. 2. Лучше читай вслух. 3. Я, пожалуй, навещу Олю. 4. Ему бы
лучше остаться дома. Мне кажется, у него ангина 5. Она сказала, что
предпочитает пойти на прогулку. 6. Я бы предпочла присоединиться к своим
институтским друзьям. 7. Мы, пожалуй, пойдем осматривать город. 8. Куда
бы ты скорее поехал: в Лондон или Париж? — В Лондон. 9 . Вам бы лучше
пойти туда немедленно. 10. Ты бы лучше помогла маме убрать квартиру. 1 1 .
Я, пожалуй, куплю ежика для мальчика. 12. Ты бы лучше произносила все
отчетливее. 13. Я предпочла бы не говорить об этом.
236
XIII.
a) Read the following sentences. Note the constructions in bold type, b)
Compose 5 sentences on each of the constructions:
A. 1. The tourists wanted to see as much as possible. 2. Be as careful as
possible when you cross the street. 3. If you don't work as hard as possible, you
won't pass your exams. 4. Go to the language laboratory aspften as possible. 5.
Keep as quiet as possible.
B. 1. I arranged to meet Nina so that we could go to the cinema together. 2. Let
us go out earlier so that we can catch the train. 3. Draw it larger so that everybody
can see it. 4. The little girl stood up so that the old woman could sit down. 5. You
must speak louder so that I can hear you.
С 1. I am busy teaching you. 2. Mother is busy cooking dinner. 3. I was busy
writing letters the whole morning. 4. He is busy translating the article. 5. She was
busy making her dress.
D. 1. Our new friend took us sightseeing about the town 2. What about going
sightseeing? 3. The tourists went sightseeing every day of their stay in the town. 4.
On the next day of our arrival in Kiev we went sightseeing. 5. What do you say to
going sightseeing?
XIV.
Translate the following sentences into English:
1. Я живу на одной из наиболее оживленных улиц нашего города. Моя подруга
живет на окраине города. 2. В новых городах нет узких, кривых улиц. 3. На Кутузовском
проспекте построено прекрасное здание музея-панорамы. 4. Мы приехали в Сочи в
воскресенье. Город расположен на побережье Черного моря. Сады и парки Сочи
великолепны. В центре города много больших магазинов. 5. Картины этого музея
произвели на меня большое впечатление. 6 Туристы всегда восхищаются московским
метро. 7. Россияне очень гостеприимны. 8. Я живу в доме, расположенном на берегу
реки. 9. Они перешли улицу и вошли в дом. 10 Поездка по городу доставила нам
большое удовольствие. 11. Мы устали после нашей поездки по городу. 12. Толпы людей
спешили по направлению к станции метро. 13. Запишите мой адрес, чтобы не забыть. 14
Как только мы прибыли в Волгоград, мы тотчас же отправились осматривать
достопримечательности этого города-героя 15. Простите, вы не знаете, как проехать в
Сокольники? — Нет. Я очень плохо знаю Москву. 16. В такси для меня не оказалось
места. 17. Давайте выйдем на следующей остановке и пройдемся пешком. 18. Я езжу в
институт автобусом. 19 Где вы делаете пересадку (a change) по дороге на работу? — На
Пушкинской площади Там я пересаживаюсь на 31-й троллейбус. 20. Вы выходите на
следующей остановке? — Да, выхожу. 21. Вам бы лучше остаться дома — вы
нездоровы. 22. Вы можете сказать, который сейчас час? 23. Простите, вы можете сказать
мне, какой троллейбус идет по Петровке? — Кажется, № 69. 24. За последние годы в
Москве построено много подземных переходов.
237
XV.
a) Write all possible questions to which the following sentences are answers, b)
Each sentence describes a certain situation in a concise way. Find out some more details
about it by asking questions. Work in pairs.
M o d e l : The street in which I live is broad and straight.
A: What's the street you live in like? B: It's broad
and straight. A: Is it in a new district? B: Yes, in
Medvedkovo.
1. My brother lives in one of the new districts in Kiev. 2. Minsk has greatly
changed since the war, you will hardly recognize it now. 3. There is a new cinema
not far from the
ф
metro station. 4. In summer we shall visit a lot of towns in different parts of
Russia and shall see very many places of interest, 5. The guide wanted us to have
the best possible impression of the city. 6. A lot of new houses are being built in
all the towns of Russia. 7. Last Sunday our best friend visited us. 8. My girl-
friend has just arrived in Moscow from the Crimea.
XVI.
Rewrite these sentences changing the verbs in bold type from the Present
Indefinite to the Past and Future Indefinite, Present and Past Continuous, Present and
Past Perfect. Make other necessary changes, add the corresponding adverbs of time:
1. The tourists are shown many places of interest in our town. 2. Moscow
University on the Vorobyev Hills is greatly admired by everybody, 3. History and
Art Museums are often visited by the students of our group. 4. New metro
stations are built in our town. 5. The poem is recited in our group.
XVII.
a) Change the following sentences into indirect speech using the verbs to
suggest or to offer.
1. "Let us study English together," said Olga. 2. "Why don't you buy the
dictionary?" Mary said to me. 3. "Let's go to the park by metro," said John. 4.
"Take another piece of cake, it's delicious," said our hostess. 5. "Let us rest for a
while," said my friend. 6. "Will you have another cup of tea?" asked Mother. 7.
"Let us visit Mary," said one of the students. 8. "Why not arrange some excursions
during the winter holidays?" said the monitor of the group.
b) Translate the following sentences into English using one of the following verbs: to
offer — to suggest:
1. Гид предложил туристам поездку в Сергиев Посад. 2. Можно
предложить вам еще чашечку кофе? 3. Он предложил мне билет в театр. 4.
Нина предложила своей подруге провести каникулы вместе в деревне. 5.
238
Староста группы предложила студентам поехать на экскурсию в
воскресенье. 6. Так как до вокзала было далеко, они предложили нам взять
такси. 7. Мой друг предложил мне пойти с ним в театр. 8. Я знаю, что он
предложил помочь им. 9. Я предложил ей отложить поездку (put off) на
неделю. 10. Оля предложила идти до станции метро пешком.
XVIII.
Replace the passive constructions by the corresponding active
constructions. Supply the new subject yourselves where necessary:
1. The Tretyakov Gallery is visited by thousands of people every year. 2. They
were greatly impressed by the Moscow Kremlin. 3. We were pleasantly surprised
at his answer at the examination. 4. We were told to wait outside. 5. We were
shown the nearest way to the Bolshoi theatre by a passer-by. 6. The girl was
promised a new dress. 7. I was asked to come at 5 o'clock. 8. The child was left at
home. 9. We were taken on a ride about the city. 10. You are invited to dinner
tomorrow.
XIX. Translate the following into English:
Москва, город-герой, — столица Российской Федерации. Это крупнейший
политический и культурный центр страны и самый большой город России, один из
крупнейших городов мира с населением более 8 миллионов.
Москва занимает первое место среди столиц мира по количеству учебных заведений
и студентов. В городе свыше 100 музеев и выставочных залов (exhibition halls), десятки
театров, множество клубов, кинотеатров, стадионов и других спортивных сооружений.
Москва была столицей всемирных Олимпийских игр 1980 и очень хорошо
подготовилась к встрече лучших спортсменов мира и многочисленных зарубежных
гостей. В Москве много исторических и архитектурных памятников. За последние
десятилетия город сильно изменился. Там, где раньше были кривые, узкие улочки и
маленькие деревянные дома, теперь широкие проспекты с красивыми высокими
современными зданиями. Москва растет и хорошеет с каждым днем, появляется все
больше новых домов, улиц, площадей, проспектов, скверов. Увеличивается количество
новых линий метро. Москва расширяется во всех направлениях. Все, кто приезжает в
Москву, поражаются огромному строительству, которое идет во всех районах столицы.
XX.
Fill in articles if necessary:
1. In ... big cities ... streets are broad and straight, there are ... lot of squares
and ... beautiful parks. 2. At ... each corner you can see .. militiaman regulating ..
traffic. 3. Let us walk to ... nearest stop and take ... bus. 4. If we don't know where
to go We ask ... militiaman to show us ... way. 5. When ... traffic light changed
from yellow to green, we crossed ... street and entered
... underground station, paid our fares, went down ... escalator, got on ... train
and rode as far as ... Yugozapadnaya station. 6. There we left ... metro and walked
to ... Institute. 7. Walk ... short distance down ... street till you come to ... multi-
storeyed house, then take ... first turning to ... right, walk down ... block and you
will see ... entrance. 8. We must get out here or we shall miss ... stop. 9. We went
239
by metro as far as ... Sokolniki station and then changed for ... trolley-bus. 10. We
made ... tour of ... new metro stations. 11. Never step off ... pavement into ... road
without looking ... both ways to see if anything is coming.
XXI.
Develop these dialogues using the topical vocabulary and conversational
phrases:
1. Do you happen to know the way to the Tretjakov Gallery? — Well, let me
see ... Go straight on and then take the second turning to (or on) the left (right).
2. Er ... Excuse me, could you tell me if this is the right way to Petrovka
Street? — Oh, no, you are quite wrong. You'd better go back and then ask again.
3. Er... I wonder if you could tell me the nearest way to Tver-skaya Street. —
I'm terribly sorry. I really don't know. I'm a stranger here myself. You'd better ask
the militiaman over there.
4. Er... Could you help me, I'm not quite sure where the nearest metro station
is? .— Well, let me see. It's round the corner.
5. Excuse me, is there a bus from here to Red Square? — I'm terribly sorry,
I've no idea, I'm afraid.
6. Er... Will you please tell me how far the nearest metro station is? — If you
walk, it'll take you about twenty minutes to get there. You'd better take a bus.
XXII.
Retell the following jokes using indirect speech:
1. Little John, in a crowded bus, is sitting on his father's lap. An elderly lady
enters the bus, and Johnny at once jumps down, politely takes off his hat, and
says: "May I offer you my seat?"
2. A traveller, on arriving at a railway station, asked a local man: "Well, my
friend, as this is my first visit to your town, could you tell me how many hotels
you have here?"
L o c a l m a n : We have two.
Traveller: Now, which of the two would you recommend?
L o c a l m a n : Well, frankly speaking, it's like this, sir: whichever one you
go to, you'll be sorry you didn't go to the other.
3. A woman hired a taxi. It began to race along, passing trams, cars,
policemen, etc. The woman was frightened, and said to the taxi-driver:
"Please, be careful. This is the first time I ever rode in a taxi." "It's all right,"
answered the taxi-driver. "It is the first time 1 ever rode in a taxi, too."
4. When Conan Doyle arrived in Boston, he was at once recognized by the
cabman whose cab he had engaged. When he was about to pay his fare, the
cabman said:
"If you please, sir, I should prefer a ticket to your lecture."
240
Conan Doyle laughed. "Tell me," he said, how you knew who I was and I'll
give you tickets for your whole family."
"Thank you, sir," was the answer. "On the side of your travelling-bag is your
name — Conan Doyle."
XXIII.
a) Retell the text **A Visit to Moscow", b) Describe the Wilsons' visit to
Moscow as if you were Mr. Wilson himself (his wife, his daughter Mary).
XXIII.
This exercise should be done in pairs. Use your own words to fill in the
blanks in the following dialogue. Before you begin, study the whole dialogue carefully and
decide what you are going to say:
( A stranger is asking for directions in a town you know well)
A: Excuse me. Can you tell me the way to please?
B: Yes. At the moment you are standing in ... (atnear ...).
A: And I want to go to ...
B: If you turned leftyou'd come to ...
A: But I don't want to go to ...
B: No, I know you don't. But if you went straight along this road, you'd come
to ...
A: But I don't want to go to ...
B: No, you don't, do you? So if you turn tight at you'll come to ...
A: Thank you. B: Not at
all.
XXV.
a) Watch Film Segment Six -Sightseeing ... at Home" for general content, b)
Watch the film segment again to find the English equivalents to the following:
такое движение!; левостороннее движение; двухэтажный автобус; дорожные
происшествия; выставка; набережная; основывать; заседать (о парламенте);
кинооператор (фоторепортер); неудачная съемка.
с) Answer your teacher's questions on the content of the film segment, d) Listen to the
sound track recording of Segment Six. Get ready to speak as the narrator of Mr. Brown's
home movie on Londpn.
XXVI.
Take a plan of Moscow, St.-Petersburgf your native town, etc. Prepare 8—10
questions to help your fellow-students discuss it in class.
XXVII.
a) Render the following in the form of a dialogue, b) Get ready with a
situation for your fellow-students to give it in the form of a dialogue:
Ваш знакомый, с которым вы вместе работали на Севере, приезжает на несколько
дней в Москву. Он никогда раньше не был в столице и просит вас посоветовать ему, с
чего начать осмотр города. Вы охотно соглашаетесь. В Москве много мест, которые
стоит посмотреть. Для начала вы предлагаете побывать на Красной площади, на
241
Воробьевых горах, осмотреть новое здание Московского университета. Ваш знакомый
просит объяснить ему, как добраться до центра.
XXVIII.
Find English proverbs concerning travelling, provide them with Russian
equivatents, ask your fellow-students to illustrate them.
XXVIII. Ask your friend to give you as much information as possible about:
his native town; a place in Britain he knows; one of the capitals of our
republics.
XXX.
Get together with one or two other students and have a friendly talk. The
situation is this:
You are friends planning a trip to St.-Petersburg. There are a lot of things that
need to be done. Each of you is full of imaginative ideas.
XXXI.
Speak on the following:
1. Your arrival in a big city. 2. Any city you think interesting.
3. A new district of Moscow. 4. Explaining to a stranger how to get to the
Central Post Office from: Pushkin Square, Petrovka Street, the Vorobyev Hills.
LABORATORY WORK
I. a) Repeat the sentences after the tape, b) Make them interrogative
and negative.
II. Spell and transcribe the given words and word combinations.
II. Use the sentences with the verb in the passive voice.
III. a) Translate the sentences into English, b) Check your sentences with the key.
IV. a) Use the sentences in indirect speech. Make all the necessary changes, b) Check
your sentences with the key.
V. Listen to the wrong statements. Correct them.
VII. a) Listen to the poem "Evening" by Percy D. Shelley. Mark the
stresses and tunes, b) Practise the poem, c) Learn it by heart.
Lesson Eighteen
Grammar: The Complex Object.
Texts: I. Carrie Goes to a Department Store. 2. Shopping.
242
STUDY THE FOLLOWING
T a b l e No. 1 THE COMPLEX OBJECT
1
want
Nelly
make a report.
We
wanted
Nick
to
return soon.
They
expect
you
ride in a taxi.
L expected him (her)
sing at the party.
243
b
Nelly
go along the street every morning.
)
He (She)
sees
Nick
take the book from the desk.
Jack
saw
hears
m e
N
stelly
an
d near s
thep eak
Kre loudl
mlin. y,
Ann
heard us
Nickcome up to sin
the g beautif
window ully
and sever
hut y
it. S
unda
write y, laugh
them exercises eve srof
y tl
e y
ve at the
ning. joke.
d
Jack
Nick
do the room every day.
)
Ann
makes
him (her)
speak loudly enough.
He (She)
The teacher
made
us
get up early every morning.
c
Ann
)
The mothe
_ r
____
them
work regularly.
Note 1. A continuous action is expressed by a present participle. e д. I saw Pete coming
towards me
Note 2. After the verb make in the Passive Voice the infinitive of the verb following it is
used with the particle to, е. д. 1 was made to get up early.
GRAMMAR EXERCISES
I. Study Substitution Table No. 1 and compose as many sentences as
you can. r
II.
Spell and transcribe the four forms of the following verbs:
buy, make, become, show, try, put, wear, fit, cost, get, forget, write, run, go.
III.
a) Write one sentence instead of the given two using complex
objects.
M o d e l : I saw John every day. He often spoke with his comrades. I often
saw John speak with his comrades (or John speaking).
1. 1 watched the sun. It was rising. 2. I heard him. He was singing an English
song. 3. yje noticed a man. The man was cleaning his shoes. 4. He saw two girls.
They were dancing on the stage. 5. She watched the children. They ran about and
played in the garden. 6. I saw her every morning. She arranged
her hair carefully. 7. Every night we saw our neighbour. He listened to the
news. 8. John heard his daughter. She was talking loudly. 9. We saw Roger. He
was crossing the square. 10. They heard their father. He played the piano every
night.
b) Give your own examples of complex object, c) Use the same .entences with
complex objects in short situations.
IV, a) Translate the following sentences into English:
1. Я видел, что Николай пришел. 2. Я видела, что Джордж идет по улице. 3. Каждое
утро Мэдж видела, как ее сосед раскрывает окно. 4. Мы заставили брата прочесть свои
стихи. 5. Мои друзья заставили меня петь вчера. 6. Никто не может заставить меня это
сделать. 7. Мы видели, как разговаривали их родители. 8. Мы видели, как дети играли.
9. Она видела, что Нина примеряет шляпу. 10. Алиса видела, что ее сестра взяла книгу.
11. Он видел, что его ученики стоят около школы. 12. Том видел, что она вышла из
комнаты. 13. Мать видела, что ее дети сидят и делают домашнее задание. 14. Она
видела, что Роджер сидит на диване. 15 . Николай видел, что Анна что-то пишет. 16. Я
хочу, чтобы вы меня поняли. 17. Я хочу, чтобы вы купили это платье. 18. Я не хочу,
чтобы вы уходили рано. 19 Мы ожидаем, что они скоро придут. 20. Учитель заметил,
что ученики разговаривают.
b) Use the translated sentences in situations.
V.
Paraphrase the following sentences as in the model.
M o d e l : Nelly spoke to the dean yesterday.
It was Nelly who (that) spoke to the dean yesterday.
Those boys have brought me the letter.
It is those boys who (that) have brought me the letter.
1. The guide showed them many places of interest. 2. Mrs. Hilton told the
children to go to bed. 3. Lizzie does not want to eat her porridge. 4. Jim is eager
to ride a pony. 5. Alice is cutting some sandwiches. 6. James says the frost is
severe. 7. Alice and Roger swam further along. 8. The conductor told me where
to get out. 9. The students began a lively talk with an English correspondent. 10.
Robert and Nora noticed a nasty-looking cloud. 11. My friends helped me to
catch up with the Stroup.
TEXT 1
CARRIE GOES TO A DEPARTMENT STORE
The extract is taken from "Sister Carrie" by Th. Dreiser, a well-known American writer
(1871—1945). Carrie, a young provincial girl, comes to Chicago and is greatly attracted by
the pleasures the big city offers. Shopping is one of them. Drouet,1 her friend, is to meet her
at the ready-made clothes department.
Carrie reached Dearborn Street. Here was the great Fair store with its crowds
of shoppers. She thought she would go in and see. She would look at the jackets.
She paused at each article of clothing. How pretty she would look in this,
how charming that would make her! Carrie stopped at the jewellery department.
She saw the ear-rings, the bracelets, the pins, the chains.
But the jackets were the greatest attraction. When she entered the store, she
already had her heart fixed on a jacket with large mother-of-pearl buttons. The
cut was all the fashion that fall.2 She said to herself there was nothing she would
like better.
Here she saw Drouet who was coming up to her smiling. "Let's go and look
at the jackets," he said as if he had read her thoughts.
When Carrie got the jacket in her hand, it seemed so much nicer. The
saleswoman helped her on with it. It fitted perfectly. It was just her size, not a bit
loose. She looked quite smart.
Carrie turned before the glass. She could not help feeling pleased as she
looked at herself. It was so becoming.
"That's the thing," said Drouet. "Now pay for it."
"It's nine dollars," said Carrie, after she had asked the saleswoman how much
it was. She took out one of the bills and gave it to the cashier.
From there they went to a shoe department where Carrie tried on some shoes.
Drouet stood by and when he saw how nice they looked, said: "Wear them."
Then Drouet advised her to buy a purse made of leather, a pair of gloves and
stockings.
' Drouet [drit'ei],
2 fall: autumn in the American variant of English.
Carrie thought that she would come the next day and buy herself a skirt to
match the new jacket.
(After "Sister Carrie" by Th. Dreiser)
TEXT 2 SHOPPING
M o t h e r : Pete, we've run out of vegetables and we've hardly any bread in
the house. You know, now it's your turn to go to the greengrocer's and to the
baker's.
P e t e : Oh, bother? Why do we have to go shopping so often?
M o t h e r : The day before yesterday it was Nelly who did all the shopping.
She went to the grocer's and to the butcher's.
P e t e : Did she? But, Mother, girls are so fond of shopping. Let Nelly do it
today as well.
M o t h e r : Oh,'you've been a lazy-bones ever since you were born! It's so
difficult to make you go anywhere.
P e t e : D'you want to make me a model boy, Mum?
M o t h e r : I'd like to. Take that bag and don't grumble. Buy a cabbage, a
pound of onions, half a pound of carrots and a loaf of bread. Here is the money
and don't forget the change.
P e t e : Did I ever forget it?
M o t h e r : I don't say you did. But you are so absent-minded.
P e t e : (sighing): My teacher says the same.
M о t h e r: I expect you to be back in half an hour.
P e t e: All right. I'll do my best.
VOCABULARY NOTES department store л
универсальный магазин
ready-made clothes/clothes department отдел готовой одежды; footwear, millinery,
knitted goods, leather goods, textiles hosiery, haberdashery, cosmetics (departments)
отделы: обувь, головные уборы, трикотаж, кожгалантерея, чулки-носки, галантерея,
косметика
pretty a d j хорошенький; Syn. good-looking, beautiful; handsome (usually about
men)
cut л покрой, е. д. The saleswoman assured Eliza that the cut of the coat was
fashionable, cut (cut, cut) vt резать; proverb: Cut your coat according to your cloth.
fashion n мода; Syn. style, e. g. Take this coat. It's the latest fashion (style), in
fashion в моде, е. д. Such shoes are in fashion now. out of fashion не в моде, е. д. This
cut is out of fashion now. fashionable a d j e. g. Alice has gone shopping and is sure to
buy a fashionable hat. old-fashioned a d j , е. д. I don't like old-fashioned furniture.
to help smb. on with smth. помочь надеть что-л.; to help smb. off with smth.
помочь снять что-л.
become (became, become) vt/i идти, быть к лицу, е. д. I don't think it's very
becoming. Compare the use of the verbs to become (in the meaning «быть к лицу»), to
fit, to match, to go with, to suit, fit vt сидеть, годиться, быть впору, е. д. The dress
fits her like a glove, match vt подходить no цвету, тону, е. д. She is going to buy a hat to
match her new coat, go with vi подходить (по фактуре, стилю), соответствовать, е. д.
That cardigan does not go with a silk skirt, suit vt подходить, соответствовать, идти к
лицу (is the most general term), •e. g. The costume suits her. She looks smart in it.
size л размер, е. д. What size shoe(s) do you wear? What size glove(s) do you wear?
What size clothes do you wear?
loose adj широкий, свободный; to be loose on smb., e. g. The frock's a bit loose
on me. Ant. tight: to be tight on smb., e. g. The coat is tight on him. The shoes are tight
on me.
How much is it? What is the price of...? What does it cost? Сколько это
стоит? The expressions are used only in the process of shopping. Compare the use of tenses
in the following situation: "I bought a new hat yesterday." "Really? How much was it?"
("What was the price?")
cashier л кассир; cash-desk л касса. Note other English words corresponding to the
Russian word «касса»: box-office at the theatre; booking-office at a railway station
to try on smth. примерять что-л.
wear (wore, worn) vt 1. носить, быть одетым в..., е. д. Не always wears a grey hat.
Kitty was wearing, a lovely pink dress that night. Syn. to be dressed in smth.; to have
smth. on, e. g. She was dressed in a light summer frock. She had a Hght summer frock on.
2. vi носиться (о платье, ма т е р и и и т . д . ) е . g. Does that material wear well?
advise vt советовать, e. g. The teacher strongly advised him to work more at the
language laboratory, advice л совет; Pay attention
to the use of the noun advice which is uncountable, e. g. We got so much good advice
from him. Compare it with the Russian word «совет» which is countable. The following
English uncountable nouns also correspond to Russian countable nouns: knowledge,
money, weather, hair, work, information, news.
made of... сделанный из .... as made of leather, wood, etc.
to run out of smth. истощить свой запас, е. д. We've run out of sugar. У нас
кончился сахар.
to have hardly any, e. g. We've hardly any bread in the house. У нас почти не
осталось хлеба дома.
turn л зд. очередь; in turn по очереди, е. g. Speak in turn, please. I can't understand you
when you are talking together. Note the translation of the Russian combination «стоять в
очереди за чем-либо» — to stand in a queue (line) for something.
the greengrocer's овощной магазин
the baker's булочная, e. g. I met her at the baker's yesterday, the grocer's магазин
«Бакалея»; the butcher's мясной магазин. Note also the names of some other shops:
provision shop продуктовый магазин; fishmonger's рыбный магазин; fruit-shop
фруктовый магазин; confectionery кондитерская; dairy молочная; supermarket
магазин самообслуживания; shopping centre торговый центр
Oh, bother! Какая досада!
It was ... who (that), e. g It was Nelly who did all the shopping. Это Нелли сделала
все покупки. The word combination it is (was)... who (that) is used to emphasize the
subject.
to do shopping, to go shopping делать покупки, e. g Boys don't like to do shopping.
Mary likes to go shopping in the morning, when there are fewer people.
as well adv также; Syn. too, also, e. g Everybody was eager to go sightseeing. Ann
wanted to see the town as well.
model adj образцовый, e. g Tom Sawyer hated the model boy because he was so good,
model n образец, модель, e. g Sentences must be formed according to this model.
sigh vi вздыхать; sigh n вздох
expect vt ожидать, предполагать, полагать, думать; е. g. I expect a letter any day
now. Everybody expects he will come tomorrow. Syn. to wait ждать. Whom are you waiting
lor? I am waiting for a friend of mine. Note that wait refers to physical activities (e. g. to sit
&nd wait) While expect denotes supposition, looking forward to smth.
TOPICAL VOCABULARY
Kinds o f clothes: coat, shirt, blouse, cardigan, sweater, skirt, suit,
trousers, shorts, a pull-over, dressing-gown, jersey, jeans, corduroy trousers
(corduroys).
Articles o f clothing: socks, stockings, scarf, muffler, kerchief, gloves,
mittens, tie, handkerchief, tights, pyjamas, nightgown, underwear (undies).
Parts o f clothes: collar, sleeve, belt.
Footwear: slippers, sandals, sport shoes, walking shoes, court shoes, rubber
boots, training shoes (trainers).
Textiles: silk, cotton (print), velvet, woollen cloth. Jewellery: ring,
bracelet, ear-rings, chain, brooch, necklace. Cereals: buckwheat, rice.
Meat: beef, pork, mutton, chicken, goose, duck, tinned meat. Fish: herring,
sprats, smoked fish, tinned fish. Dairy products: cream, sour cream, cottage
cheese. Confectionery, biscuits, cakes, chocolate, pastry. Vegetables: onions,
turnips, melon, water-melon, cauliflower, lettuce, radish, parsley, celery.
EXERCISES
I. a) The material below is to be prepared for reading. Mark the stresses and tuues.
Concentrate your attention on sounds, b) Let your fellow-student read this exercise
aloud for you to detect his errors in sounds and tell him what must be done to eliminate
them:
[r] 1. A foreign accent is a very great drawback.
2. The three will probably drive across the Brooklyn Bridge.
3. We gathered ripe red raspberries along the river road.
4. When at Rome do as the Romans do.
5. Neither rhyme nor reason.
6. Every cook praises his own broth.
[auj 1. What have you found out about it? 2. Out of
sight out of mind.
[au — ai] 3. Snow came in the nighj Without a
sound, Like a white cloud trembling Down to the
ground.
П. Before' you start working at the text practise the sounds in the Allowing word
combinations:
A.
1. [rj] becoming; smiling; clothing; feeling pleased;
earrings; shopping's one of them; comingwup.
2. Loss of plosion: reachedwDearborn Street, lookedwquite smart,
turnedjbefore the glass, stood^by.
3. Linking [r]: mother-of-pearl, helped hereon with it, a pairwof gloves.
B.1. [зи — o j — oh, bother, go shopping, so often, fond of
shopping, go to the grocer's, [з: — э:] — your turn, were born. 2. a) No
voicing before voiced consonants and vowels: halfwa pound, takewthat bag. b)
No, glottal stop: sowoften, hardlywany, did Iwever, sowabsent-minded.
III.
1. a) Listen to the recording of the text "Carrie Goes to a Department Store".
Mark the stresses and tunes, b) Practise the text for test reading. Listen to the text very
carefully until you can say it in exactly the same way.
2. a) Listen to the recording of the dialogue "Shopping". Mark the stresses and
tunes, b) Practise the dialogue for test reading. Listen to the text very carefully until you
can say it in exactly the same way. c) Memorize the dialogue and dramatize it.
IV. Transcribe the following sentences, mark the stresses and tunes and picture them
on the staves:
1. "What size gloves do you wear?" she asked. 2. I don't think it's becoming.
3. "Will you please show me that pale-green one?" she said. 4. That can't be
called very cheap.
V. Make up questions covering the contents or Text 1.
V. Write 10 questions on Text 2.
VII.
a) Study the Vocabulary Notes. Write 5 sentences on each of the Substitution
Tables on pages 267, 268 using the new words, b) Use them in short situations.
VII.
a) Write the interrogative and negative forms of the following sentences:
1. John saw his brother go to the fruit-shop. 2. Everybody expected you to
give this information. 3. They want him to take
his parents' advice. 4. We saw Peter buy rolls at the baker's. 5. I have made
Michael tell the news. 6. Helen wants me to wear this cardigan. 7.1 want you to
clean your shoes.
b) Express your surprise. Use conversational phrases.
IX.
Each sentence describes a certain situation in a concise way.
Some points of the situation are already known to you. Find out some
more details about the situation by asking questions. Work in pairs:
1. My wife has spent a lot of money on fashionable furniture. 2. Ann wore a
black velvet dress that night. 3. Jack wants Pete to give him a piece of good
advice. 4. Alice's bag is made of silk.
5. Mrs, Brown will go shopping in the morning.
X. Fill in prepositions or adverbs wherever necessary:
A. 1. What size ... gloves does your daughter wear? 2. Is
your blouse made ... silk or ... nylon? 3. This frock suits ... her
and she looks so well today. 4. Go ... the fitting-room and try ...
the green frock. 5. Go ... the mirror and have a look ... yourself,
6. I'm afraid the shirt is a bit loose ... you. 7. You must choose another belt.
This one does not go ... your light dress. 8. I'm sure they will soon make ... their
quarrel. 9. The woman was made to believe that such shoes were not ...
fashion ... that time.
B..................................1. We've run meat. Let's go and buy some ...
the
butcher's. 2. Please weigh half ... a pound ... sweets. 3. Will you give me a
quarter ... a pound ... sausage? 4. Whom are you waiting ...? — I'm waiting ... my
friends. They are ... the greengrocer's. 5. She paid ... a cabbage and went ... . 6.
The salesmen will finish their work ... half ... an hour. 7. There is no cottage
cheese ... the dairy today. 8. I'm not going to stand ... a queue ... a tin ... sprats.
XI.
Change the following direct questions into indirect and answer them. Begin
the sentences with the words / wonder ... or Tell me ... or I ' d like to know.
1. At what shop did you buy this hat? 2. What colour scarf would you like to
buy to match your new coat? 3. Are those gloves old or new? 4. How old is your
father? 5. Does Ann do shopping every day? 6. When'will you go to the State
Department Store? 7. Were any new films on last week? 8. How much is this
material? 9. Has anything gone wrong with the iron?
10 Why didn't you come to the dining-hall yesterday? 11. Is it snowing
hard? 12. Has John given you good advice? 13. Why is it so stuffy in the room?
14. When did they get everything arranged? 15- Have you managed to knit a
pull-over for your father? 16. When are you going to the dairy? 17. When was
he made to write that letter?
XII.
Choose the right verb:
( t o expect
wait)
— to
1. Don't... for him. He is going to return very late. 2. Nobody ... such an
answer from him. 3. ... a minute. Your brother is sure to come soon. 4. Do you ...
her to be late? 5. Nobody ... him to repair that broken radio-set. 6. Let's ... for
some other students. They are sure to help us to put the tape-recorder right. 7.
Everybody ... him to hurry out, but he remained proudly in his seat. 8. Nobody ...
the weather to become so nasty. 9. The children ... impatiently for the beginning
of the performance. 10. They ... the river to freeze over in a few days. 11. We ...
the box-office to be opened on Sunday.
XIII.
Make up your own sentences with the phrases: How much is it? What is the
price? What does it cost? and use them in micro-dialogues.
XIV.
Translate the following sentences into English:
A. 1. Какого размера перчатки (туфли, пальто) вы носите? 2. Это платье
вам идет. Вам идет эта шляпа. Не примеряйте это платье. Вам не подходит
цвет. Идет ли мне эта блуза? 3. Я хочу купить туфли в тон своему новому
костюму. 4. Этот костюм плохо сидит на мне. Это платье очень хорошо
сидит на вас. Ирине очень идет зто платье. 5. Эти перчатки не подходят к
твоему костюму. Эти туфли не подходят к твоему нарядному платью. Этот
бант не подходит к твоей лиловой блузке. 6. Эта блузка широка тебе. Этот
костюм вам широк. Это платье мне узко. Эти туфли мне малы. Этот пиджак
вам узок. 7. Эти туфли очень красивы. Примерьте их. Это пальто очень
элегантно. Примерьте его. 8. Это пальто слишком дорого для меня. Этот
зонтик не очень дорогой. 9. Мне нужны дешевые туфли для улицы. Я
предпочитаю носить дешевые вещи. Ю. По-моемуг он умен. По-моему, это
неинтересно. По-моему, нужно подождать его.
B. 1. У нас кончилось мясо. У нас кончился лук. У нас кончился
картофель. 2. Мне нужно пойти в бакалею (булочную, овощной
магазин, рыбный магазин, в кондитерскую, молочную, фруктовый магазин). 3. Это
Нина нам помогла. Это мама вымыла всю посуду Это Николай был нашим гидом. 4.
Моя очередь читать. Твоя очередь идти за покупками Ее очередь мыть посуду. 5. Пусть
Петя купит лук. Пусть Аня купит кочан капусты. Пусть Николай купит огурцы. 6. Не
ждите его, он не придет. Кто ждет меня? — Роджер. Пожалуйста, подожди нас на
станции у билетной кассы.
XV.
Retell Text 1 on the part of (a) Carrie; (b) Drouet.
XV.
Think of sentences using the word combinations in bold type. Add a
sentence or two to develop a situation as in the model.
M o d e l : I don't know much about this material. So I'm not buying the
dress, I'm afraid.
1. Will you please show me that blue dress? 2. I don't know much about
this fruit-shop. 3. We've run out of sugar. 4. She looks so smart today. 5. It was
Nelly who did all the shopping. 6 Let Nelly go to the fishmonger's. 7. He went
both to the greengrocer's and to the baker's. 8. This cut is out of fashion now. 9.
It's your turn to go shopping. 10. It is those boys who are fond of figure skating.
XVII.
Retell the story using indirect speech. Write logical questions
to the text. Give a title to it:
Once a little boy entered a shop and said to the shopman: "How much will I
have tor pay for ten pounds of sugar, two pounds of coffee and three pounds of
butter?" The shopman took a piece of paper and a pencil, wrote something down
and said: "Four dollars and sixty cents."
Then the boy said: "How much change will you give me if I give you five
dollars?"
"I shall give you forty cents," answered the shopman.
"Thank you," said the boy, "I don't want to buy anything. It is my homework
for tomorrow, and I cannot do it myself."
XVIII.
Fill in articles wherever necessary. Retell the text:
... train stopped at ... small station. ... passenger looked out of... window and
saw ... woman who was selling ... cakes. ... man wanted to buy ... cake. ... woman
was standing rather far from ... carriage. ... man called ... boy, who was walking
on ... platform near ... carriage and asked him:
"How much does ... cake cost?"
"Three pence, sir," answered ... boy. .. man gave him ... sixpence and said to
him: "Bring me ... cake, and with ... other three pence buy one for yourself."
Some minutes later ... boy returned. He was eating ... cake. He gave ... man
threepence change and said: "There was only one cake, sir."
XIX. Translate the following sentences into English:
A. 1. Когда Ирина подошла к примерочной, она увидела, что ее подруга
примеряет нарядное платье. 2. Ты слышала, как Олег читал текст? Он
читал его очень хорошо. Теперь твоя очередь записывать свое чтение. 3. Не
советуй ей покупать эту блузку. Она не идет ей. 4. Пусть Лена купит
картофель, лук и помидоры. 5. Вы хотите, чтобы она купила эти дорогие
туфли? — Да, они ведь такие красивые. 6. Мама хочет, чтобы Нина пошла в
булочную. 7. На днях я встретила свою подругу. Она выходила из
центрального универмага (the Moscow Central Store). 8. Нина не спала и
слышала, как ее сестра вошла в комнату. Она почувствовала, что Анна
касается (touch) ее руки. 9. Заставь ребенка убрать свои вещи. 10. Никто не
может заставить его следовать вашим советам.
B. 1. Вчера в универмаге я купила замшевые перчатки (suede). Они тесны
мне. Если хотите, я могу отдать их вам.
Спасибо. Я возьму их с
—
удовольствием, если подойдет размер. — Это размер 6V2 — Как удачно1
Это как раз мой размер. — Сколько они стоят? — 80 рублей. — Вот вам
деньги, пожалуйста. 2. Я получила стипендию, и мне придется сделать
некоторые покупки. Мне нужно купить чулки, носки и красный кожаный
ремешок для моего нового платья. 3. Летом я предпочитаю носить платья из
ситца. В них не так жарко, как в шелковых. 4. Вам очень идет этот костюм,
но Жакет слишком длинный, по-моему. 5. Платья в этом магазине не
продаются. Здесь продаются только мужские костюмы, брюки, пиджаки и
мужские рубашки. 6. Помоги мне выбрать туфли. — Примерь те
коричневые. Мне кажется, что они подойдут к твоему зеленому костюму. 7.
Послушайте моего совета, не берите это пальто. Оно уже не модно. То, серое,
гораздо лучше. Я уверена, Что оно будет хорошо сидеть на вас. Пройдите в
примерочную. Сюда, пожалуйста. — О, пальто действительно
изумительное. Сколько оно стоит? — 820 рублей. Выписать чек? Да,
пожалуйста, я вам очень благодарна. 8. У нас кончились сахар и масло.
По дороге с работы не забудь зайти в бакалею и купить все
необходимое. 9. У нас почти не осталось хлеба. Зайди в булочную и купи
батон и две сдобные булочки (bun). 10. Нам необходимо купить колбасу,
сыр, банку шпрот (a tin of sprats), овощи для салата, конфеты и пирожные.
11. Нине придется пойти в овощной магазин и купить капусты и моркови.
12. Роберта заставили пойти в продуктовый магазин.
XX.
a) Listen to the recording of the text "Protecting His Property" for the
general content. The following words will help you to understand the text:
to protect; property; closet; pack; tablet; to slip; to faint; poison; stare, half-
conscious; thief; to steal; murder; the law.
b) Retell the text according to the following plan:
1. John Webb and his wife are going to leave their summer cottage.
1. John discovers that somebody has drunk his wine.
2. John decides to put some poison into the wine.
3. John falls down.
4. His servant gives him the poisoned wine.
XXI.
Describe the pictures on page 281 using the following words and word
combinations:
broad brim; parasol; sandal shoes; bathing-suit; raincoat; rubber boots.
XXII.
Find a picture on the topic "Shopping" for your discussion in class. Prepare
8—10 questions which would help your fellow-students to describe the picture.
XXII.
Use the following story as material for rapid reading. Retell it and give a
title to it:
The other day my friend George came to see me and brought a small book
with him. It was a guide to English conversation for the use of foreign travellers.
George said: "My idea is to go to London early on Wednesday morning and
spend an hour or two going about and shopping with the help of this book. I want
one or two little things — a hat and a pair of bedroom slippers."
On Wednesday we arrived at Waterloo station and went to a small boot shop.
Boxes of boots filled the shelves. Black and brown boots hung about its doors
ahd windows. The man, wheri
we entered, was opening with a hammer a new case full of boots.
George raised his hat, and said "Good morning."
The man did not even turn round. He said something which was perhaps
"Good morning" and went on with his work.
George said: "I have been recommended to your shop by my friend, Mr. X."
The answer to this in the book was "Mr. X. is a worthy gentleman; it will give
me the greatest pleasure to serve a friend of his."
What the man said was: "Don't know him; never heard of him."
This was not the answer we expected. The book gave three or four methods
of buying boots; George had selected the most polite of them centred round "Mr.
X." You talked with the shopkeeper about this "Mr. X." and then you began to
speak about your desire to buy boots, "cheap and good." But it was necessary to
come to business with brutal directness. George left "Mr. X," and turning back to
a previous page, took another sentence. It was not a good selection; it was
useless to make such a speech to any bootmaker, and especially in a boot-shop
full of boots.
George said: "One has told me that you have here boots for sale."
For the first time the man put down his hammer, and looked at us. He spoke
slowly. He said: "What do you think I keep boots for — to smell them?"
He was one of those men that begin quietly and get more angry as they go on.
"What do you think I am," he continued, "a boot collector? What do you
think I'm keeping this shop for — my health? Do you think I love the boots, and
can't part with a pair? Do you think I hang them about here to look at them?
Where do you think you are — in an international exhibition of boots? WTiat do
you think these boots are — a historical collection? Did you ever hear of a man
keeping a boot shop and not selling boots? Do you think I decorate the shop with
them? What do you think I am — a prize idiot?"
I have always said that these conversation books are practically useless. We
could not find the right answer in the book from beginning to end. I must say that
George chose the best
sentence that was there and used it. He said: "I shall come again, when,
perhaps, you have more boots to show me. Till then, good-bye."
With that we went out. George wanted to stop at another boot shop and try
the experiment once more; he said he really wanted a pair of bedroom slippers.
But we advised him to buy them another time.
(After Jerome K. Jerome)
XXIV.
a) Watch Film Segment Seven "Souvenirs from Scotland**,
b) Watch the film segment again to find the English equivalents to the
following:
фасон (какой бы фасон вам хотелось?); позволить себе израсходовать;
расточительный; универсальный магазин; забежать в магазин; сыт по
горло; хорошая идея; штатив (подставка); фототовары; желаю удачи!; ум
хорошо, а два лучше; сопровождать; уговорить; обман; друг в беде —
настоящий друг.
с) Answer your teacher's questions on the content of the film segment, d) Listen to
the sound track recording of Segment Seven. Get ready to reproduce the dialogue
between Bob and Fred.
XXV.
a) Make up a dialogue on the following situation:
You ask your friend whether she has bought that nice hat or she has had it
made to order. You'd like to buy one, but you are not a Muscovite and you don't
know the city well enough. You wonder which department store in Moscow is
the best and how you can get there.
b) Suggest a situation for your fellow-student to give it in the f6rm of a dialogue.
XXVI.
Write and then reproduce your dialogue on one of the following topics. Use
complex objects in them:
1. At the Moscow Central Store. 2. Going to the market. 3. At the grocer's. 4.
At the baker's. 5. At the greengrocer's. 6. Choosing a present for a friend. 7. At a
ready-made clothes department. 8. Buying shoes.
I. a) Repeat the sentences after the tape, b) Make them interrogative
and negative.
II. Replace the proper names in the sentences by corresponding personal pronouns.
III.
Combine each of the pairs of sentences as in the model (use complex object).
II. Replace the noun in the sentence by the given noun.
II. Answer the given questions.
II. Change every sentence as in the model.
M o d e l : Try this frock on. Try on this frock. Try it on.
VII.
Replace the group of the subject as in the models.
VII.
Replace the word ioose in the given sentences by its antonym tight.
VII. Translate the sentences into English using the given words and word
combinations of the text.
X. Listen to the wrong statements. Correct them.
XI. a) Listen to the text "Shopping". Write it down, mark the stresses and tunes.
Read it following the model, b) Learn the text by heart.
Lesson Nineteen
AGrammar: Some Verbs and Word Combinations Followed by a Gerund '
Texts: 1 Jean's First Visit to the Theatre 2 Dialogue
STUDY THE FOLLOWING
SOME VERBS AND WORD COMBINATIONS FOLLOWED BY A GERUND
to stop
to finish
to mind
to enjoy
to be fond of
doing smth.
to be good at
to go in for
to be worth
can't help
to go on
Note. The preposition without may be followed by a gerundial construction e g He left
the room without saying a word One can't learn without making mistakes
GRAMMAR EXERCISES
I. Complete the following sentences using a gerund:
I. Go on ... . 2. He stopped ... . 3. He couldn't help ... . 4. We all enjoyed ... .
5. Have you finished ...? 6. I don't mind ... . 7. Her cousin is fond of ... . 8. The
child is rather good at ... . 9. She goes in for ... . 10. The poem is worth ... 11. The
boy doesn't read a sentence without ... . 12. You won't go there without... .
II. Translate the following sentences into English:
1 Прекратите разговаривать (смеяться; курить; писать; ссориться) 2 Мать велела
детям закончить игру (чтение, вязание; шитье, глажение). 3 Продолжайте петь
(работать над этим текстом, переводить эту статью; писать; изучать эту проблему). 4.
Вы не против того, чтобы открыть окно (собраться в субботу; пойти туда вместе,
повторить это упражнение)? 5. Я очень люблю рисовать (играть в теннис; петь в хоре;
читать вслух). 6. Мы получили удовольствие от ее пения (от плавания; от беседы с
ним. от катания на лыжах в лесу). 7 Я не могла не согласиться с ним (не подождать ее,
не ответить на его вопрос). 8. Стоит посмотреть эту пьесу (посетить этот музей;
сделать эти упражнения устно). 9 Он ушел из комнаты, не сказав ни слова (не глядя ни
на кого; не взяв ничего с собой, не попрощавшись). 10. Ее дочери увлекаются вязанием
(катанием на коньках, танцами).
TEXT 1
JEAN'S FIRST VISIT TO THE THEATRE
When I invited Jean to the theatre I was afraid she would refuse my
invitation, but she had accepted it. I still doubted whether she would come: her
religion did not allow to go to a theatre, play cards or love a man of other
religious views. However, when I met her at the entrance to the theatre I saw she
had
thrown off her religious scruples. She looked eager and her dark eyes
sparkled with excitement. Our seats were in the pit. They were not expensive,
but we could see the stage quite well. I gave her the programme and my opera
glasses.
Presently the lights went down; then the curtain rose upon a scene of
eighteenth-century Paris at the time of the French Revolution. It was a
melodrama full of hopeless love and heroic self-sacrifice, a play after Dickens's
novel "A Tale of Two Cities". When Martin Harvey, a famous actor, who played
the leading part of Sydney Carton appeared on the stage, Jean's eyes were full
of interest and delight. She was greatly impressed by pale, dark Carton and
delicate, charming Lucie Manette, the girl he loved.
During the interval Jean said: "Oh, Mr. Shannon, how splendid it is! So
different from what I expected! I can't tell you what a treat it is for me! I feel so
sorry for poor Sydney Carton! He is so much in love with Lucy and she ... It
must be a frightful thing to be in love and not to be loved!"
"Quite," I agreed gravely. "At least they are good friends, and friendship is a
wonderful thing."
She consulted her programme to conceal her flush. "The girl who does Lucie
is very sweet, she has such lovely, blonde hair and is so young!" "Well, in real
life she is Martin Harvey's wife, must be about forty-five, and that blonde hair is
a wig."
"Please, don't, Mr. Shannon! How can you joke about such things?" she cried
in a shocked voice...
As the last scene was under way Jean's hand, small and hot, touched mine.
We sat hand in hand as though to support each other while watching Carton with
a pale face and carefully arranged hair mount the guillotine and meet his death.
Jean couldn't keep her tears and they fell upon the back of my hand like
raindrops in spring.
When at last the play came to its end there was a storm of applause and
many curtain calls for Miss de Silva and Martin Harvey. Miss Jean Law,
however, was too overcome to join in such a banal applause, her feelings were
too deep for words Only when we were in the street she whispered with shining
eyes. "Ohr Robert, you can't believe me how much I've enjoyed myself!" It was
the first time s'he had used my Christian name.
(After "Shannon's Way" by A Cronini
TEXT 2
A TELEPHONE CONVERSATION
(McJc dials the number, Helen answers the call.)
H e l e n : Hullo!
N i c k : Thank God, is that you, Helen?
H e l e n : Sure, that's me, Nick, darling. You sound a bit an-aoyed. Is
anything the matter?
N i c k : Well, I've been trying to get connected with you for nearly ten
minutes and...
H e l e n : But what's wrong? The line wasn't engaged, I hope?
N i c k : Yes, it was. Besides, I got the wrong number several times...
H e l e n : Oh, Nick, I'm so sorry!
N i c k : That's all right now. I say, Helen, have you got anything special on
tonight?
H e l e n : No, not really. Why?
N i с к: I suggest our going to the theatre.
H e 1 e n: I'd love to. What are we going to see?
N i c k : I've got two tickets for "Lady Windermere's Fan" by Dscar Wilde.
It's the first night.
H e 1 e n: Oh, it's at the Maly Theatre, isn't it?
N i c k : I have heard the play is worth seeing. It is staged /ery well. The
scenery is simple, but good and the acting is Splendid.
H e l e n : And what about the seats? I hope they are not in the balcony or in
the gallery?
N i c k : Oh, dear, no. They are in the dress-circle, box 5.
H e l e n : Let's hope we'll enjoy ourselves. Will you call for Die or shall we
meet at the theatre?
N i c k : I'd rather call for you. I don't like waiting and you take such a long
time to get ready.
1 H e l e n : So I do. But I love to look smart when I go to the theatre.
N i c k : All right, then. I'll call for you at 5.30, so we'll have plenty of time
to get to the theatre before the performance starts.
H e l e n : That suits me perfectly. I'll be waiting for you. And, t>h, Nick!
Thank you ever so much for your invitation.
N i c k : That's all right, dear. See you tonight.
H e l e n : Bye-bye!
VOCABULARY NOTES
refuse vt отказывать(ся); Ant. accept, e. g. Irene refused Soaraes several times
before she accepted him, refusal n
accept vt принимать; to accept a present (invitation, offer, help, plan) but to
receive guests (visitors)
doubt vt/i сомневаться, e. g. We doubted whether he would follow your advice,
doubt n; no doubt, e. g. There is no doubt he tells the truth.
excite л возбуждать, волновать, е. д. The performance excited Jean so greatly that she
could hardly speak, excited p. p. взволнованный; to be (look, feel) excited;
excitement л
seat n место в театре; in the stalls в партере; in the orchestra stalls в первых
рядах партера; in the pit stalls в задних рядах партера; in the pit в амфитеатре; in
the dress-circle в бельэтаже; in the upper circle в первом ярусе; Syn. in the
balcony на балконе; in a box в ложе; in the gallery на галерке
stage л сцена; e. g. When the singer came onto the stage there was a storm of applause,
stage vt, e. g. This play was staged by K. S. Stanislavsky.
program(me) л; to be on the programme в программе, е. д. My favourite songs
were on the programme, the lights went down огни погасли
rise (rose, risen) vt 1. подниматься, подняться, е. д. Не slowly rose to his feet. 2.
взойти (о солнце), е. д. When the sun rose we started off. Note: raise vt поднять: to raise
one's head (hat, voice, etc.), e. g. At seeing Fleur he raised his hat. Syn. put up, e. g. If you
want to ask a question put up your hand.
scene л сцена, картина (о пьесе), е. д. I like the final (last) scene in that ballet,
scenery л (used only in the singular) декорации, e. g. The scenery was beautiful. The scene
is laid in Paris.
act л акт, действие, е. д. I like the second act of "Swan Lake" most of all. actor,
actress л актер, актриса, as a great (famous, popular, talented, favourite) actor; act vi
действовать, e. g. He had to act at once. There was no time to lose, active a d j активный,
as an active person (support, part, etc.). Our students take an active part in school life. Ant.
passive
to play the part of играть роль
leading adj ведущий, главный; leading article передовая статья, . передовица
delight л восторг
charming adj очаровательный, е. д. The doctor was a charming young
woman, charm vt, n, e. g. We were all charmed by her manners. His short
stories have a charm of style that cannot be found in other writers.
to be in love with smb. быть влюбленным в кого-л., е. д. Fleur was in love
with Jon. to fall in love with smb. (at first sight) влюбиться в кого-л. (с
первого взгляда)
- touch vt трогать; касаться; волновать, е. д. Her story touched the listeners,
touch n прикосновение; touching adj трогательный, e. g. We were excited by
this touching scene.
support vt поддерживать, e. g. Michael helped his father to support their
family, support n поддержка, е. д. I need your friendly support.
carefully adv аккуратно, тщательно; осторожно, е. д. Не took the baby
carefully in his arms, care л уход, забота, е. д. The car needs constant care, to
take care of ухаживать за, присматривать, е. д. Не took care of the flowers in
the garden. Syn. look after, care (for smb.) питать интерес, любить, е. д. I
don't care much for fish. I don't care! Мне все равно, careful adj. 1.
осторожный, е. д. I'll be careful with your books, be careful not to смотри,
не..., е. д. Be careful not to lose the tickets. 2. тщательный, as careful work
(preparation, examination); careless a d j 1. небрежный, as careless person
(work, attitude); 2. беззаботный, as careless little singing birds
death n смерть; Ant. life, e. g. After his parents' death little Shannon was
brought up by his grandparents, die w, e. g. Her father died when the girl was
twelve, dead adj, e. g. When the doctor came the old man was already dead.
applause л аплодисменты; a storm of applause буря аплодисментов, е. д.
There was a storm of applause when the curtain rose. The scenery was wonderful
indeed, applaud vi, e. g. As soon as we saw the famous actor we began to
applaud to him.
curtain call вызов актера на сцену
ticket л билет, as a ticket to the theatre (cinema), a ticket for a play
(performance, etc.)
the first night премьера
the play is worth seeing пьесу стоит посмотреть
to call for smb. зайти за кем-л., е. д. I'll call for you and we shall
go there together, to call on smb. зайти к кому-л., е. д. Last night
1 called on Ann. She's ill as you know.
That suits me perfectly. Это меня очень устраивает.
Ю Зака.ч 1971
289
TOPICAL VOCABULARY
opera, drama, comedy, circus, variety show, concert, concert hall,
conservatoire, symphony music, composer, conductor, cloak-room, refreshment-
room, attendant, rehearsal (dress rehearsal), matinee, opera-glasses
EXERCISES
I. a) The material below is to be prepared for reading. Mark the stresses and tunes.
Concentrate your attention on the sounds, b) Let your fellow-student read the exercise
aloud for you to detect his errors in sounds and tell him what must be done to eliminate
them:
[i] 1. Six little kittens lost their mittens. It's a pity, they were so pretty. 2.
Little Bill, sit still. Will you sit still, little Bill? If you sit still, little Bill, Jimmy
Nill will bring you to a big hill.
[t(] 1. Most French children like cheese.
2. Why did the teacher ask such a question?
3. Don't touch those peaches in the kitchen.
II. Before you start working at the text, practise the following word combinations:
A.
1. a) [h] — her hand, hand in hand, allow her, I met her,
I gave her, her feelings, b) Loss of aspiration: the pit stalls, the stage, could
speak, in spring, a storm, in the street, expensive. 2. Alveolars replaced by
dentals: atjthe entrance, irxJJie pit, playedjthe part, injthe street.
B.1.10 — d] anything special, it's the first night, it's
—
worth seeing, get to the theatre. 2. Loss of plosion: gotjtwo tickets, but^good,
getjto the.
III.
Transcribe and intone the following extract:
"Oh, Mr. Shannon, how splendid it is! So different from what I expected! I
can't tell you what a treat it is for me!" said Jean.
IV.
a) Listen to the recording of the text "Jean's First Visit to
|be Theatre". Mark the stresses and tunes, b) Practise the text for test
reading. Listen to the recording very carefully until you can say it in
exactly the same way.
V.
a) Listen to the recording of the dialogue. Mark the stresses and
tunes, b) Practise the dialogue for test reading. Listen to the recording
very carefully until you can say it in exactly the same way. c) Memorize
the dialogue and dramatize it.
VI.
Find in the text sentences that might be the answers to the questions given
below:
1. What did Jean look like when Robert met her at the theatre? 2. Where were
their seats? 3. Upon what scene did the curtain rise? 4. What kind of play was it?
5. Who(m) was Jean greatly impressed by? 6. What did Robert say about the
leading actress? 7. What showed that Jean was deeply touched by what was
going on on the stage? 8. Why didn't Jean join in applause? 9. What showed that
the performance was a success? 10. Jean had always used Shannon's Christian
name, hadn't she?
VII.
Answer the following questions. Use conversational phrases. Work in pairs
and enlarge the dialogue.
M o d e l : — Could you possibly tell me why Robert invited Jean to the
theatre?
— I Jm not sure but I believe he wanted to give her a treat.
— Then why on earth did he take her to a melodrama and not to a comedy or
something?
— To my mind he was afraid she would refuse to come if she knew it was a
comedy. Don't you remem-
* ber her religious scruples?, etc.
1. I wonder what made Robert doubt if Jean would come to the theatre? 2. Do
you happen to know anything about Jean's religion? 3. Could you tell me what
made Jean throw off her scruples? 4. Do you happen to know anything about
Charles Dickens? 5. I'd like to know why Jean was so impressed by the play and
the actors? 6. My question may be personal but is it really so frightful to love and
not be loved in return? 7. Why did Robert say gravely that friendship was a
wonderful thing? 8. Could you tell me why Robert was ironical when he spoke
about the leading actress? 9. I wonder if that visit to the theatre
was a real treat to Jean? 10.1 wonder why Jean had used Shannon's Christian
name for the first time?
VIII. Choose the correct word :
to rise — to raise 1. He ... his head when he heard a slight noise. 2. When
we started the sun had already. .. 3. There was a storm of applause when he
curtain .... 4. He ... his hat to greet us. 5. Ann slowly. . to her feet. 6. It was very
noisy and the reporter had to ... his voice. 7. The curtain wouldn't... and we had
to... it.
stage — scene
1. The ... was so touching that Jean began to cry. 2. Carrie was told to come
onto the ... in the second act. 3. The play consists of two acts and four. .. 4. When
the actor appeared on the ... the audience began to applaud. 5. 1 don't quite like
the final... in this play. 6. Our seats were in the orchestra stalls and we saw
the ...well.
4
IX.
Fill in the missing words:
1. Jean looked ... when she came to the theatre (взволнованный). 2. I ... the
invitation with joy (принимать). -3. The play consists of three ... and four ...
(акт; картина). 4. He ... our help and said he could do everything himself
(отказываться). 5. When the ... rose and the audience saw the . . everybody
began to ...'(занавес; декорации; аплодировать). 6. When Alison appeared on
the ... she was ... (сцена; взволнованный). 7. Our ... were in the ... and we could
see the ... very well without the ... (места; ложа; сцена; бинокль). 8. The play
made such an ... upon me that I would never forget it (впечатление). 9. I never
expected that you would ... our suggestion (поддерживать). 10. We made up our
minds to ... a party in English (устраивать). 11. I don't remember the name of
the ... who played the ... part in the play (актер; главный). 12. Seats in the boxes
and in the stalls are ... and seats in the gallery are ... (дорогой; дешевый). 13.
She said she was telling the truth, but we ... her words (сомневаться).
X. Fill in prepositions or adverbs wherever necessary:
1. We enjoyed ... the performance greatly. 2. He decided to reserve a seat...
phone. 3. It's rather easy to get tickets ... this
theatre, but it is difficult to get tickets... this play. 4. She refused ... our help.
5. She took care ... her little brother. 6. Will you go to the football match
tomorrow? — No, I don't care ... football. 7.... my way. . the theatre I met a
friend of mine. 8.1 don't like seats ... the balcony or ... the gallery, I prefer
them ... the stalls or... the dress-circle. 9. The scene is laid ... Verona. 10. This is a
play. . Dickens' novel. 11. I'm so sorry. . Ann. She has fallen ill. 12. Fleur Forsyte
fell ... love ... Jon ... first sight. 13. The attendant will show you ... your seats. 14.
There is no doubt ... it. 15. When the lights went ... and the curtain rose there was
a storm... applause.
XI. Fill in articles wherever necessary. Retell the text:
... theatres are very much ... same in London as anywhere else; ... main
theatres, music-halls and cinemas are in ... West End. If you are staying in
London for ... few days, you will have no difficulty whatever in finding
somewhere to spend ... evening. You will find ... opera, ... comedy, ... drama, ...
variety, ... cinema performances start at about eight or ... half past, and finish
about eleven.
... best seats are those in ... stalls, in ... dress-circle and ... upper circle. Then
comes ... pit and ... last of all ... gallery. ... boxes, of course, are more
expensive. ... most theatres and music-halls have ... good orchestras with ...
popular conductors.
The opera house is at Covent Garden. There you get... best of everything: ...
first rate orchestra, ... famous singers and celebrated conductors. But, of course,
if you are not fond of ... music, this won't interest you. At... West End theatres
you can see ... most of... famous English actors and actresses. ... plays are staged
well. Choose ... good play, and you'll enjoy yourself from ... moment... curtain
goes up, to ... end of ... last act. Get your seat beforehand either at... box-office
of... theatre itself or at one of... agencies.
(Abridged from ELC)
XII.
Change the following sentences according to the models.
M o d e l 1:1 like to read plays. — I enjoy reading plays.
1. We like to play chess. 2. My eldest sister likes to sing folk songs. 3. They
like to ski in the forest on a sunny frosty day.
4. The children like to bathe and splash the water all around.
5. They also like to lie in the sun.
M o d e l 2: He is excited. He cannot speak. — He is very excited and can
hardly speak.
1. Our seats were far from the stage. We could not see well what was going
on. 2. The scene was touching. Jean couldn't hide her tears. 3. It was very noisy
in the hall. We didn't hear the speaker well. 4. Her lips trembled. She spoke with
difficulty. 5. The news is so exciting. I cannot believe it. 6. The child is so active.
He cannot sit still for a minute. 7. Bill was extremely tired. He rose to his feet
with great difficulty. 8. His hand was shaking. He couldn't open the door at once.
9. The patient is very weak. He cannot raise his hand.
XIII.
Put the verbs in brackets in the correct form.
M o d e l : Neither you nor he is right.
Neither my girl-friend nor her parents have forgotttn you.
Neither of you is wrong.
1. Neither Mike nor his sister (to expect) us to return so soon. 2. Neither
Helen nor Alice (to be) eager to go anywhere that night. 3. Neither of you (to
know) the end of that story. 4. Neither my sister nor my brother (to go) on
excursions very often. 5. Neither of us (to We) mistaken. 6. Neither my brother-
in-law nor his schoolmates (to be) good at playing chess. 7. Neither my parents
nor my grandmother (to travel) by air. 8. Neither David nor his fellow-students
(to be excited) at the exams. 9. Neither my sister's younger daughter nor her son
(to be) fond of symphony music. 10. Neither John nor his companion (to be)
lazy.
XIV.
Translate the following sentences into English:
1. Ни моя племянница, ни ее муж не навещают нас. 2. Ни друзья, ни
родственники не могут ему помочь. 3. Ни мы, ни студенты 104 группы не
опоздали на лекцию. 4. Ни французский язык, ни немецкий не
распространены так широко, как английский. 5. Ни дожди, ни морозы не
останавливают настоящих путешественников. 6. На небе не было ни звезд,
ни луны. 7. Ни студенты, ни староста группы не принесли наушники. 8. Ни
вы, ни Анна
не виноваты в этом. 9. Ни он, ни его друзья не собираются этого делать.
10. Ни Уильям, ни его брат не прочли книгу до конца. 11. Ни я, ни мои
соседи не знают этого человека. 12. Ни мои друзья, ни я не играем в карты.
XV.
Respond to the following statements. Use conversational phrases. Work in
pairs, trying to enlarge the dialogue.
M o d e l : — Jean looked so eager and excited when she came to the theatre.
— No wonder. It was her first visit to the theatre, wasn't it?
— Yesr it was, but I think she was so excited because she had had thrown off
her religious scruples.
— That's just what I'm thinking, etc.
1. I hear your friend is fond of opera. 2. The best seats are in the dress-circle.
3. It's rather a problem to get tickets to the Bolshoi Theatre. 4. Girls often take
such a long time to get ready to go somewhere, especially to the theatre. 5.
Tikhonoff was very good playing the part of Stirlitz. 6. It's so nice to go to a
concert and hear some good music! 7. The ballet Borneo and Juliet is worth
seeing. 8. Going to a theatre is a real treat.
XVI.
Correct the given not-true-to-fact (false) statements and give your reasons.
Use conversational phrases. Work in pairs. Enlarge the dialogues.
M o d e l : —Jean did not like theatre but she didn't refuse Robert's invitation
not to hurt him.
— I'm afraid you've got it all wrong. It was her first visit to the theatre, etc.
1. Jean wasn't going to accept Robert's invitation to the theatre. 2. She looked
quite calm when Robert met her at the entrance to the theatre. 3. The tickets were
rather expensive. 4. The play was a merry comedy. 5. The leading actors
produced little impression on Jean. 6. During the intervals Jean spoke with
Robert about the play. 7. Neither Robert nor Jean liked the play. 8. While
watching the last scene Jean couldn't help laughing. 9. The public didn't like the
performance and there was no applause when the curtain fell.
XVII.
Translate the following sentences into English:
1. Роберт предложил, чтобы они встретились у театра. 2. Анна
предложила, чтобы мы купили билеты на этот спектакль.
3. Она предложила купить программу у входа в театр. 4. Мать
предложила, чтобы мы пригласили Лизу на выходные дни (weekend). 5. Он
предложил нам не касаться этого вопроса. 6. Режиссер (the stage manager)
предложил, чтобы главную роль дали лучшей актрисе. 7. Анна предложила
пойти в буфет во время антракта.
8. Я предлагаю немедленно отправить телеграмму. 9. Петя предло-
жил зайти за Аней пораньше. Она всегда так долго собирается.
10.
Интересно, кто предложил поехать за город в такую
отвратительную погоду.
XVIII. Fill in yet, still, more, another, other, else, which are translated
into Russian as «еще»:
1. Don't hurry. The performance is not over ... . 2. I'd like to read
something ... by this author. 3. What ... impression did you get there? 4. What ...
did Jean say about the performance? 5. I've read two ... books by Dickens. 6.
You'd better ask somebody . . . . 7. It is ... spring, but it is getting rather hot. 8.
The theatre is going to stage ... play by this playwright. 9. How many ... English
books have you got? 10. Fetch ... chair, please.
11.What ... have you seen in this ancient town? 12. He hasn't returned from
the South. He is ... there. 13. Please book two ... tickets for me. 14. Will you
call ... time? 15. What ... things did you buy?
XIX.
Translate the following sentences into English:
•г-
1. Где еще можно посмотреть эту пьесу? 2. Мы решили устроить еще
несколько вечеров на английском языке. 3. Мне бы хотелось еще чашку
кофе. 4. Боюсь, что он еще спит. 5. Мы боялись опоздать, но спектакль еще
не начался. 6. Мне нужна еще одна книга по истории театра. 7. Сколько еще
репетиций будет на этой неделе? 8. Через месяц в этом театре будет еще
одна премьера.
9. Какие еще актеры принимают участие (играют) в этом спектак-
ле? 10. Дождь еще не перестал, но потеплело. 11. Вы все еще рабо-
таете над докладом? — Да. Я еще не собрала всего нужного мате-
риала 12. Нам нужно еще три билета на этот спектакль. 13. Кого
еще вы встретили в театре?
XX.
Pick out words and phrases from Text 1 and Text 2 and group them under the
following headings: a) theatre; b) appearance. Learn them.
XX.
Retell Text 2 in indirect speech as if you were Helen (Nick).
XXII.
Render these jokes. Use indirect speech:
1. The well-known singer Enrico Caruso was once driving not far from New
York. It so happened that something went wrong with his car and he had to
spend some time in the house of a farmer. Soon they became friendly and the
farmer asked Caruso his name.
When the farmer heard the name, he rose to his feet. "My, I never thought I
should see a man like you in my kitchen, sir," he cried out. "Caruso. The great
traveller. Robinson Caruso!"
2. "I say, Dad/* said a schoolboy, returning home, "we gave a wonderful
performance at school. A lot of parents came and although some of them had
seen it before they all had a jolly good time."
"How do you know?" asked his father.
"Why, they laughed all through the play," the boy replied.
"And what was the play?" the father asked.
"Hamlet," said the boy.
XXIII. Translate the following sentences into English:
A 1. Я пригласила Анну на вечер, но она отказалась прийти. 2.
Интересно, примет ли он наше приглашение или откажется от него. 3.
Доктор сейчас не принимает. 4. Я надеюсь, что вы поддержите наш план. 5.
Роберт был так возбужден, что с трудом говорил. 6. Не могли бы вы сказать
мне, в чем дело? Почему вы так взволнованы? 7. Когда занавес поднялся,
публика зааплодировала. 8. Услышав шаги, она подняла голову, 9. Мне
очень понравилась финальная сцена в опере «Жизнь за царя». 10. Роберт
почувствовал, как Джин дотронулась до его руки. 11. Рассказ был такой
трогательный, что девочка не могла удержаться от слез. 12. Пение Алисой
произвело большое впечатление на Роберта. 13. Мы сидели в бельэтаже и
хорошо видели сцену.
В. 1. Актриса, игравшая главную роль, была очень хороша. 2. Мне
нравится, как поставлен балет «Лебединое озеро» в театре имени
Станиславского. 3. Фильм был очень хороший, и я получила большое
удовольствие. 4. Зайди за мной, когда ты пойдешь на каток. 5. Летом они
часто заходили к нам. 6. По дороге домой мне нужно зайти в библиотеку. 7.
Декорации в этой опере просто великолепны. 8. Я не смог купить билеты на
этот спектакль заранее, но мне удалось достать хорошие места в кассе
театра. 9. Я бы лучше пошла в консерваторию сегодня, в программе
произведения Моих любимых композиторов, 10. Мы получили большое
удоволь
ствие от вечера, он был хорошо организован. П . Что вы делали во время антракта?
— Мы ходили в буфет. 12. Когда вы приходите в театр, вы оставляете пальто в
гардеробе. Там же вы можете взять бинокль и программу. 13. Лучшие места в театре
— в партере и в бельэтаже, это самые дорогие места. Места на балконе и галерке хуже
и дешевле. 14. Спектакль имел огромный успех у публики, актеров много раз
вызывали на сцену.
XXIV.
Render the following dialogue in indirect speech. Explain the difference
between a concert hall and a music-hall:
G i l d a : I went to a very good concert at the Festival Hall last month. You
call that hall "a concert hall", don't you? Mrs. G r e e n : Yes.
G i l d a : Well, what's "a music-hall"? I've seen that name several times and
heard it used in broadcasts, too.
Mrs. G r e e n : A music-hall is something very different from a concert hall!
If you want to hear a symphony orchestra playing good music, you go to a
concert hall. A music-hall is more like a theatre. The seats are arranged like those
in a theatre. There's a stage with curtains like in the theatre. There's scenery on
the stage. We often use the name "Variety Theatre".
G i l d a : What would I see and hear if I went to a music-hall?
Mrs, G r e e n : There'd be popular music and singing and dancing. There'd
be performances by acrobats and jugglers. There might even be performing
animals.
G i l d a : To my mind music-hails are not so popular now. People prefer
films today, and radio and television keep people at home more.
Mrs. G r e e n : I agree with you. The most popular singers and comedians
are seen and heard by millions of viewers and listeners in their own homes.
XXV.
Listen carefully to the recording of the text "Theatres in London**, b)
Find English equivalents for:
постоянная труппа; набирать актеров на сезон; увольнять актеров; давать большой
кассовый сбор; не раз; филиал, отделение; актеры с мировой известностью; вмещать
около 6000 зрителей; орган; по инициативе; любители театра.
b) Answer the following questions:
1. In what way do most of the London theatres differ from those of Russia?
2. Why are many actors and actresses in England always afraid to remain
unemployed? 3. What do you know about Covent Garden, the famous Royal
Opera House? 4. Why can Covent Garden be called the home of international
opera and ballet? 5. Where is the Shakespeare Memorial Theatre situated? 6.
Where did Shakespeare stage his plays? 7. When was the Shakespeare Memorial
Theatre built? 8. What is the London filial of the Shakespeare Memorial
Theatre? 9. What are the two largest and best concert halls in London? 10. On
whose initiative was the Royal Albert Hall built? 11. What is the most modern
concert hall in London and when was it built?
XXVI. Let one of the students give a brief impression of his visit to the theatre. Find
out some more details about the performance by asking questions.
M o d e l :
A: Last night I was at one of the best theatres in Moscow. The performance
was perfect and I enjoyed every minute of it. Though my seat was in the balcony
I could see the stage very Well and hear each sound perfectly. Guess where I was
and what к saw.
B: Were you at the Art Theatre? A: No, I
wasn't.
B: But you say you could hear each sound perfectly! A: So I could. I meant
the music. B: Ah, that means you were at the Bolshoi Theatre. A: That's right.
B: Was it an opera or a ballet?
A: Try to guess.
B: And who is the composer?
A: P. I. Tchaikovsky.
B: Is the scene laid in Russia?
A: No, it isn't.
B: Was the scenery beautiful?
A: Oh, yes, it was so beautiful, that there was a storm of applause when the
curtain rose. , B: It's a fairy-tale, isn't it? A: In a way, yes.
В: Then it was either "Swan Lake", or "The Sleeping Beauty"...
A: No, neither of them. It's not a ballet.
B: If it is an opera, and the composer is Tchaikovsky, and the scene is not laid
in Russia I really can't guess. Well, one more question: how many acts are there
in this opera?
A: It's a one-act opera in two scenes.
B: Then it is"Jolanta"!
A: This time you are right.
XXVII.
a) Watch Film Segment Eight -The Play is Over", b) Watch the film
segment again to find the English equivalents for :
отрицательный персонаж; образ; изображать, описывать, рисовать;
труппа; перейти (работать) в кино, на телевидение; насмехаться,
поддразнивать; поставить чайник (на плиту); быть возбужденным,
волноваться; прервать (поездку); расстроить, огорчить; занавес падает.
с) Answer your teacher's questions on the content of the film segment.
XXVIII.
a) Make up a dialogue on the following situation:
Молодой человек подходит к билетеру и просит дать ему программу.
Спрашивает, сколько нужно заплатить, покупает программу и направляется
в партер. Но вскоре он возвращается к билетеру и, извинившись, просит
показать ему его места. Оказывается, что у него билеты в бельэтаж. Билетер
рассказывает молодому человеку, как пройти в бельэтаж, и советует взять
бинокль. (Ему бы лучше взять бинокль.) На вопрос, где он может взять
бинокль, билетер отвечает, что за биноклем надо спуститься в гардероб. Но
ему следует поторопиться, так как уже был третий звонок и он может
опоздать. Молодой человек благодарит и спускается вниз.
b) Make up a similar situation (a visit to a concert, a variety theatre, a circus, etc.)
for your fellow-students to present it in the form of a dialogue.
XXIX.
a) Read the text: *
...Pauline Fraser had a few minutes to herself in her room while waiting for
the time she was wanted on the stage. Suddenly
the door flung open and a young girl, wearing a short brown tweed coat and
dark green slacks darted in. Pauline knew at once she was an actress. She wasn't
pretty, but she had a good stage face. "You're Pauline Fraser, aren't you?" cried
the girl in admiration. Pauline smiled. "Yes, but who are you?" "Oh, you've never
heard of me. I'm Ann Steward from the Rep* at Wanley. I hear Mr. Cheveril is
going to stage his new play. I'd be delighted to get a part in it. I'm ready to do
anything!" Pauline smiled at her. The girl went on: "Miss Fraser, you're great. I
saw you in Mr. Cheveril's play 'The Wandering Light' three times. You were
wonderful! But... er... would you mind if I say this?" Pauline was amused.
"Probably. But go ahead!" "Well, at the end of the Second Act, when you learn
that your lover is back and waiting for you, couldn't it he better to drop
everything from your hands and then run out into the garden?" Pauline looked at
the girl with interest. "Why, as a matter of fact I wanted to do it like that, only
the producer wouldn't let me. Look here — you are a real actress!" "I know I
am," cried the girl, "but I could be a thousand times better if only I get a chance
in a Cheveril play! Please, Miss Fraser, I don't want to be a nuisance, but I
simply must talk with him." "I'm afraid he won't speak with you, but I'll try to
persuade him. You'd better wait outside, he may come any moment." "Oh, Miss
Fraser, you're a darling!" said Ann and went out.
Some minutes later Cheveril entered the room carrying his script. "We've
made a little cut and the scene is all right now, Pauline. You'll be wanted on the
stage in a minute or two."
"I'm ready, Martin. Oh! I quite forgot! There is a girl here who is eager to see
you. She's with a local repertory company, and I shouldn't be surprised if she's
quite a good actress. You'll see her, won't you?" Without turning Martin
answered firmly: "No. I'm sorry, Pauline, but I'm fed up with young promising
actresses." "But... but you must see her!" Pauline was reproachful. At that
moment she was called to the stage and left the room.
Cheveril was looking through his script when he heard a young voice behind
him: "Mr. Cheveril, I'm that young
Rep. — repertory theatre
actress... !" "You had no right to come here. Will you please go?" He didn't
even look at her. "But... but I've acted in lots of your plays — and loved them
all!" "I don't care. Please, go out at once." There was a strange little pause.
"You'll be sorry soon you said that..." The girl spoke with an odd certainty. .
(After J. B. Priestley "A Story of the Theatre")
b) Determine the main idea of the extract, c) Make up a plan of the extract, d)
Choose a suitable headline to the story from those suggested:
1) "Ann Looks for a Job"; 2) "Meeting a Famous Actress"; 3) "He was Fed
Up!" 4) "Talent or... Chance?"; 5) "The Crash of Hopes".
e) Give a short summary of the extract, f) Give your own ending to the story.
XXX. Say a few words: about your last visit to the theatre.
LABORATORY WORK
I. a) Repeat the sentences alter the tape, b) Make them interrogative and negative.
II. Answer the questions and record your answers in the intervals.
III.
Translate the sentences into English using the active vocabulary*
IV. Spell and transcribe the words.
V. Translate the phrases into English.
VI.
Listen to the wrong statements. Correct them.
#
VII.
a) Listen to the dialogue "At the Theatre", b) Write it down.
Mark the stresses and tunes. Practise the dialogue following the model,
c) Learn it by heart.
Lesson Twenty
л =
A
Grammar: The Present Perfect Continuous Tense. Texts: 1.
Home. 2. Dialogue.
У
T a b l e No. 1 THE PRESENT PERFECT CONTINUOUS
TENSE
He (She) Father Mary, Johnhas ( not) beenwaiting for you for 20 minutes, working at this
problem two
months, sleeping rather long already.I (We)
You
They
Ann and Petehave (not) beenwriting this translation since
the morning, living in this vil age nearly
a month, playing tennis for about an hour.
T a b l e No. 2
Hashe (she) Father Mary, Johnbeenwaiting for you for 20 minutes? working at this
problem two
months? ' sleeping long?HaveI (we)
you
they
Ann and Petebeenwriting this translation since the . morning?
living in this village nearly a month? playing tennis for about an hour?
GRAMMAR EXERCISES
STUDY THE FOLLOWING
I. a) Make up sentences using Substitution Table No. 1. b) Compose your own
sentences of the same kind.
II. Give the interrogative and negative forms of the following
sentences:
1. He has been working at his report since 10 o'clock. 2. They have been
writing their test for nearly two hours already. 3. She has been waiting long. 4.
His daughter has been playing the piano since the morning. 5. They have been
discussing this problem for rather a long time. 6. The child has been sleeping too
long. 7. Ann and Roger have been quarrelling for fifteen minutes. 8. She has
been dreaming to become an actress all her life. 9.1 have been doing my lessons
since 4 o'clock.
III.
Put the verbs in brackets in the Present Perfect or the Present Perfect
Continuous:
1. How long you (to wait) for me? 2.1 (to know) her since my childhood. 3.
He (to think) about it for three days. 4. They always (to prefer) theatre to TV. 5.
How long she (to study) music? — Oh, she (to study) music since her early
childhood. 6. Since she was a little girl she (to try) not to take things seriously. 7.
The students (to write) their test for two hours already.
8. She (to live) in that house round the corner about thirty years.
9. You (to play) too long. It's high time to do your lessons.
10.
She (to be ill) for more than two weeks. I (to miss) her terribly.
IV. Translate the following sentences into English:
1. Я жду вас уже двадцать минут. 2. Ученые работают над этой
проблемой много лет. 3. Джин всю жизнь мечтает поехать куда-нибудь на
восток. 4. Я перевожу статью с самого утра. 5. Она спит уже очень долго.
Пора ее будить, б. Анна и Роджер ссорятся с самого утра. 7. Мы живем в
этой маленькой деревушке целую неделю. 8. Вы слишком долго обсуждаете
этот вопрос. 9. Вы давно здесь живете? 10. Неужели он действительно так
долго занимается? 11. Ты уже уложила вещи? Такси уже десять минут ждет
нас 12. Он всегда интересовался физикой. Сейчас он работает над новой
проблемой. Он работает над ней уже два месяца. 13. Н. пишет очень
хорошие повести. Недавно он закончил одну повесть и сейчас пишет новую
Он пишет ее больше месяца и говорит, что пишет ее с удовольствием. 14.
Мы здесь уже с начала месяца, но все это время погода плохая. 15. Дождь
идет с самого утра.
TEXT 1
HOME
After W. S. Maugham1
The farm, an old-fashioned stone house, was built in 1673, and for three
hundred years the people had been born and died in it and had farmed the
surrounding land.
George Meadows was a man of fifty and his wife, Mrs. George, was a year or
two younger. They were both fine people in the prime of life. Their three
daughters were lovely and their two sons were handsome and strong. They had
no notions about being gentlemen and ladies; they knew their place, were happy
and deserved their happiness, as they were merry, industrious and kindly.
The master of the house was not George, but his mother, who was twice the
man her son was, as they said in the village. She was a woman of seventy, tall,
upright, with gray hair and a wrinkled face. Her eyes were bright and shrewd
and she had a sense of humour. Her word was law in the house and on the farm.
In short, she was a character.
One day Mrs. George met me in the street and told me that they had received
a letter from their Uncle George, whom them all thought dead. The letter
informed them of his coming. "Just fancy," she said, "he hasn't been here for
fifty years. And old Mrs. Meadows sits there and smiles to herself! All she says
is that he was very good-looking, but not so steady as his brother Tom!" Mrs.
George invited me to look in and see the old man. I accepted the invitation with
joy, as I knew the story of Uncle George Meadows and it amused me because it
was like an old ballad. It was touching to come across such a story in real life.
More than fifty years ago, when Mrs. Meadows was Emily Green, a young
charming girl, George and his younger brother Tom both courted her. When
Emily married Tom, George had gone to sea. For twenty years he sent them
presents now and then; then there was no more news of him. After her
husband's death Emily wrote George about it, but never received an answer. And
the previous day, to their greatest surprise they
Maugham [тэ.т]
received his letter, in which he wrote that he was crippled with rheumatism
and feeling he had not much longer to live, wanted to return to the house in
which he was born.
When I came the whole family was assembled in the kitchen. I was amused
to see that Mrs. Meadows was wearing her best silk dress. On the other side of
the fireplace sat an old man with a wrinkled yellow face. He was very thin and
his skin hung on his bones like an old suit too large for him. Captain George, as
he had called himself, told us that he had been so ill he thought he would never
be able to get back, but the look of his old home had done him a lot of good. He
said good-humouredly: "I feel now better and stronger than I have for many
years, dear Emily!" No one had called Mrs. Meadows by her Christian name for
a generation and it gave me a shock, as though the old man were taking a liberty
with her. It was strange to look at these two old smiling people and to think that
nearly half a century ago he had loved her and she had married another.
When I asked him if he had ever been married he said he knew too much
about women for that. Then he added looking at Mrs. Meadows: "I said I'd never
marry anyone but you, Emily, and I never had." He said it not with regret, but
with some satisfaction.
Captain Meadows told us a lot of interesting stories about his adventures and
about many things he had seen and done.
"Well, one thing you'haven't done. George, and that is to make a fortune!"
said Mrs. Meadows with a thoughtful smile.
"Oh, I'm not one to save money. Make it and spend it, that's my motto. But if
I had a chance of going through my life again I'd take it. There are not many
people who'd wish it!"
I looked at this toothless, crippled, penniless old man with admiration and
respect. That was a man who had made a success of his life, because he had
enjoyed it.
Next morning I decided to see the old man again. I saw Mrs. Meadows in the
garden picking white flowers. I asked her if Captain Meadows was well. "Oh,
dear, he had always been a harum-scarum fellow! He boasted that he was so
happy to be back in his old home that he would live for another twenty years.
Alas! He died in his sleep.u Mrs. Meadows smelt the flowers she held in her arms
and added thoughtfully: "Well, I'm glad he came back. After I married Tom and
George went away, I was never sure I had married the right man!"
TEXT 2 D I A L O G U E
A l i c e : Hallo, Mike, have you been waiting long? I'm so sorry I'm late.
M i k e : Now that you are here it's all right.
A l i c e : I say, Mike, I've just had a wire from Mary. She is coming by the
5.20 train. And I have a meeting at 5. Will you do me a favour and meet her at
the station?
M i k e : Certainly, but I've never seen her. How could I possibly recognize
her?
A l i c e : Oh, it's quite easy. She's just like her mother.
M i k e : Most helpful I'd say, but the trouble is I've never seen her mother
either.
A l i c e : No, you haven't. And I'm afraid I haven't any photos of her.
M i к e: At least try to describe her. What does she look like? AI i с e: A tall
slim girl of 18 with an oval face. M i k e : Complexion? A l i c e : Rather pale.
M i k e : Hair?
A l i c e : Fair and curly. Light grey eyes, a small snub nose, a big mouth
with white even teeth and a pleasant smile.
M i k e : Г m sure there'll be at least a dozen girls like that at the station.
A l i c e : Oh, Mike, we've been discussing it for the better part of an hour
and I see no end to it.
M i k e : But how am I to recognize her in the crowd?
A l i c e : Oh, I forgot. There's a dimple in her left cheek. She is so lovely,
you'll fall in love with her at first sight.
M i k e : That'll help me, to be sure. Go to your meeting. I promise to be on
the platform at 5 sharp looking for a tall slim fair-haired lovely girl with a
dimple in her cheek.
VOCABULARY NOTES
lovely adj прелестный, прекрасный, чудесный; Syn. beautiful. Pretty, good-
looking, as a lovely child (girl, woman), a lovely day; lovely eyes, hair, e. gr. We had a
lovely time. What lovely weather!
Note t h e adjectives with the same suffix -ly: friendly дружеский; lonely одинокий;
kindly добродушный
handsome a d j красивый; Syn. beautiful, e. g . a handsome boy (man), but a beautiful
girl (woman); a handsome face, handsome appearance
deserve w; to deserve attention (punishment, reward, praise, love.
etc.) заслуживать внимания (наказания, награды, похвалы, любви
и т. д.), е. д. Не hasn't deserved that from you. They deserved praise
for what they had done.
jmerry a d j веселый; a s a merry child (look, game, company, song),
a merry face, merry eyes; merrily a d v весело
industrious a d j трудолюбивый; Syn. hard-working
wrinkle л морщина, е. д. There were merry wrinkles in the corners
of his eyes, wrinkled a d j морщинистый, e. g . Her face was old and
wrinkled.
inform v t / t сообщать, информировать, уведомлять; S y n . Let know, e. g. We must
inform them immediately, to inform smb. of smth., e. g. You must inform the post-office of
the change in your address, to inform smb. that e. g . We informed them that there would be
a meeting on Thursday, information л (no pl.\ no indefinite article!) сведения, сообщения,
е. д. I want some information about this town useful (interesting) information; to get
(receive) information, to give information
amuse vt забавлять, развлекать, смешить, е. д. The sight of the child amused us.
amusing a d j забавный, as an amusing story (child, incident, play, scene)
to go (away) to sea стать моряком
now and then время от времени
regret vt сожалеть, пожалеть о..., е. д. You will regret your words to regret doing
smth., e. g. He will regret telling a lie.
to make a fortune разбогатеть; fortunately; unfortunately a d v to save money
копить деньги
to have the (a) chance of иметь случай, возможность, е. д. If you have the chance of
listening to this singer you'll enjoy it.
respect n уважение; respect vt; respectable a d j , e. g. His life and work deserve
everybody's respect. We must respect her desires.
he had made a success of his life он хорошо прожил свою жизнь; success п успех; to
b§ a success; successful a d j , e. g . The actress was a success yesterday.
boast v t / i хвалиться,хвастаться; гордиться, е. д. Не boasted that he could easily get
tickets to any theatre. The young actress boasted of
her success. The Muscovites boast of the magnificent palaces of the metro.
Will you do me a favour ... He будете ли вы любезны...
to be (look) like выглядеть; быть похожим на, е. д. She is like her mother. What is the
weather like? What does he look like? to take after smb. быть похожим (унаследовать
внешность, черты характера), е. д. Her son took after her husband.
the trouble is ... беда (дело) в том, что trouble л, v t / i , е. д. You mustn't trouble about
your mother's health. She is all right. Proverb: Pon't trouble trouble until trouble troubles
you.
at 5 sharp ровно в пять
TOPICAL VOCABULARY
People's Appearance
Figure: tall, short, middle-sized; stout, thin, slim; straight, stooping
Face: thin, plump, fat; oval, round, square; beautiful, handsome, good-
looking; lovely, pretty, attractive; common, plain, ugly
Complexion: rosy, pale; fresh, dark, fair
Eyes: blue, brown, hazel, dark, grey; deep-set, close-set, wide-set
(Eye-)lashes: long, short, curving, straight
(Eye-)brows: straight, arched, pencilled, bushy
Forehead: broad, narrow; low, high
Nose: straight, hooked, turned up, snub(bed)
Mouth: large, small, tiny, red.
Lips: thin, full, thick
Hair: long, short; curly, straight; red, brown, dark, fair, grey, thestnut,
golden; thick; to wear one's hair long, short; to wear !a beard, a moustache
Arms and legs: long, short; shapely, small
to gain (lose) weight; to keep fit
EXERCISES
I. a) The material below is to be prepared for reading. Mark the stresses and
tunes. Concentrate your attention on the sounds, b) Let your fellow-student read the
exercise aloud for you to detect his errors in sounds and tell him what must be done to
eliminate them:
[rj] 1. To know everything is to know nothing.
2. A good beginning makes a good ending.
3. Better die standing than live kneeling.
4. The proof of the pudding is in the eating.
5. Spades for digging, pens for writing. Ears for
hearing, teeth for biting. Eyes for seeing, legs for walking.
Tongues for tasting and for talking.
II. Before you start working at the text practise the sounds in the foUowing word
combinations:
A. 1. [av] a sense of humour, the master of the house;
—
a man of fifty; the story of Uncle George.
2. Loss of aspiration: master, story, steady, strong.
2. Loss of plosion: silk w dress, Emily married wTom, he had^gone to sea,
wanted^to return, I'd^take it.
B. 1. [з:] — certainly, fair and curly r a dozen girls.
2. No glottal stop: qyite^easy, her motherweither, anwoval face, with^even
teeth.
III. a) Listen to the recording of the text "Home". Mark the stresses and tunes, b)
Practise the text for test reading. Listen to the recording very carefully until you can
say it in exactly the same way.
III. a) Listen to the recording of the dialogue. Mark the stresses and tunes, b)
Practise the dialogue for test reading. Listen to the recording very carefully until you
can say it in exactly the same way. c) Memorize the dialogue and dramatize it.
IV. Form adjectives from the following nouns adding the suffixes -less, -ous:
tooth, hope, care, sleep, cloud, pity, voice, home, thought, rest, harm, penny;
danger, fame, nerve, courage, industry.
VI.
Find in the text the sentences that are answers to the following
questions:
1. What kind of people were George Meadows, his wife and children? 2.
Who was the real master of the house? 3. Why did the story of Uncle George
amuse the author? 4. What letter had the Meadows received the previous day? 5.
What did Captain Meadows look like? 6. What stories did he tell? 7. What made
the author think that Captain Meadows had made a success of his life? 8. What
did the old man boast of? 9. What did Mrs. Meadows say about him? 10. What
did she say made her glad?
VII.
Respond to the questions given below. Use conversational phrases. Work in
pairs. Enlarge the dialogues.
M o d e l : — I wonder if you could explain to me why the Meadows
deserved happiness?
— I believe because they were industrious and merry and knew their place.
— And what do you mean 'they knew their place' ?
— Oh, that's like this, I think. They had no notions about being ladies and
gentlemen, etc.
1.1 wonder if you could help me to understand who of the two women was
Mrs. Meadows. 2. I'd like to know why it was Mrs. Meadows who was the real
master of the house? 3. Do you really think that Mrs. Meadows was a character?
4. I'd like to know what made George go to sea? 5.1 hope you don't mind my
asking but why was it so amusing to see old Mrs. Meadows in her best silk
dress? 6. Can you tell me why Captain Meadows had never married? 7. I'd like to
know what you think about his motto? 8. Is it so important to make a fortune as
Mrs. Meadows thought? 9. I'd like to know if you too agree that the old man had
made a success of his life? 10. Could you possibly tell me if Mrs. Meadows had
found the answer to her problem whether she had married the right man?
VIII. Respond to the following statements. Use conversational phrases.
Give your reasons. Work in pairs and enlarge the dialogues.
M o d e l : — George Meadows and his family deserved their happiness.
— Oh, yes, I couldn't agree more. They were industrious and merry.
— Besides, they had no notions about being gentlemen and ladies and knew
their place.
— That's just what I'm thinking, etc.
1. Mrs. Meadows was twice the man her son was. 2. Mrs. Meadows was a
character. 3. Uncle George's story amused the narrator. 4. Captain George was no
longer a good-looking jolly fellow. 5. The old man had never made a fortune. 6.
The old man inspired admiration and respect. 7. Captain George really loved
Emily Green. 8. Old George made a success of his life. 9. Mrs. Meadows was
glad that old George had come back.
IX.
Respond to the following statements which are not true to fact. Use conversational
phrases. Give your reasons. Work in pairs and try to enlarge the dialogues.
M o d e l : — I think George Meadows was a good master of the house.
—
I'm afraid you've got it wrong, he wasn't.
— But wasn't he industrious and steady and in the prime of life?
— Yes, he was. But his mother was twice the man her son was, etc.
1. The Meadows had great notions about being gentlemen and ladies. 2.
George Meadows was a character. 3. Emily Green married Tom because he was
very good-looking. 4. Uncle George's story was a banal one. 5. Captain
Meadows returned home to boast of his health, fortune and success. 6. All the
household called Mrs. Meadows by her Christian name Emily. 7. Captain
Meadows was very unhappy in his life. 8. Captain Meadows did not deserve
admiration and respect. 9. Mrs. Meadows wasn't glad to see Captain Meadows.
10. Mrs. Meadows never thought whether she had married the right man.
X. Pick out words and phrases from Text 1 and Text 2 and group them under the
following headings: a) appearance; b) character. Learn them.
X. a) Retell Text 1 in indirect speech, b) Retell the text as if you were a member of the
family.
XI.
Fill in the missing words*
1. Though she is not very talented she is ... and I think she will make a good
musician (трудолюбивый). 2. The children
were very ... and excited and their mother couldn't make them
go to bed (веселый). 3. Mr. Pickwick was a .......................... gentleman
(веселый, добродушный). 4. The boy did not ... punishment (заслуживать).
5. Though the woman is rather old her face is not ... and her eyes are
(морщинистый, проницательный). 6. Robert wanted to ... Jean, but her parents
were against their ... (жениться; брак). 7. The girl is ... clever for her age
(удивительно). 8. The appearance of Mr. Dick ... Davy and his funny signs ...
him (удивить, развеселить). 9. Jean wanted to ... Robert to her parents, so she
invited him to their place (представлять).
10.
I'd like to ... you with the plan of our work (познакомить).
11.The teacher was pleased with Mike's work and said he ... a prize
(заслуживать). 12. Tom Sawyer ... that he could beat the boy with his little
finger (хвастаться). 13. When Jane came her aunt was still ... but soon she ...
(живой; умирать). 14. We couldn't help ... the boy's courage (восхищаться).
XIII.
Choose the right word:
to introduce — to acquaint — to get acquainted — to meet
1. I'm glad you have come. I want ... you to my parents.
2. Michael ... himself to Soames as he was eager ... with Fleur.
3. He ... me with his latest experiments. 4. George was ... to Helen at our
party. 5. She refused to talk to him as they were not ... with one another. 6. Will
you ... me to your friend? — Oh, aren't you ... yet? 7. He was eager ... with the
contents of his aunt's letter. 8. I want you to ... my friend, Helen. 9. We had a
lovely time in the rest-home and ... a lot of interesting people there. 10. I'm so
sorry I haven't... you earlier.
XIV.
Fill in prepositions or adverbs wherever necessary:
1. Soames had courted ... Irene for a long time before she accepted ... him. 2.
I'm going to introduce you ... my friend. 3. I'd like to get acquainted ... your plan.
4. Who is she married ...? — She is married ... a well-known artist. 5. Will you
inform me ... your decision? 6. We got some information ... the matter we were
interested ... . 7. We were surprised ... her refusal. 8. George Meadows went ...
sea when his brother married ... Emily. 9. I'm sure you will regret ... your act. 10.
She is going to marry .... one ... our students. 11. ... our surprise we found
nobody ... home. 12. He likes to boast... his strength. 13. What is she ...? — She
is tall and very beautiful. 14. She is ... her mother.
XV.
Fill in articles wherever necessary:
1. We received ... very interesting information about this country. 2. Last
summer we had Ck lovely time irtW South. 3. He went to{/E sea hoping to
save ... money and make fi. fortune. 4. This boy doesn't deserve ... praise. 5. Will
you do me ... favour? 6. She gave me4. good advice how to get rid of my
mistakes. 7. It was hard work and Mike did not like it. 8. She is making (:'. good
progress in English. 9. Where is'Jftf money? — I put it on the table. 10.1 don't
likri brainy weather. 11. She has ./Mong, beautiful hair. 12. It was*"!??
unexpected news and we were surprised to hear it. 13J$Ј Bickets were eager to
save . money. 14. The girl had V.1. snub nose and ... fair complexion. 15. My
father was of ... dark complexion, ynth ... very great forehead and ... dark hazel
eyes, overhung by*?* eyebrows which were black though his hair was white. He
had {*. straight nose and... full lips.
XVI.
Translate the following sentences into English:
A. 1. Они смеялись так весело, что я не мог не рассмеяться тоже. 2. Русский ^ народ
талантлив и трудолюбив. 3. Мистер Дик был очень добродушным. Он был добр к Дэви,
и мальчик любил этого смешного и веселого человека. 4. Хотя мистер Бэртон выглядел
очень добродушным, на самом деле он был жестоким человеком. 5. Я думаю, что
мальчик не заслуживает наказания. 6. Когда он улыбался, в уголках его карих глаз
появлялись добрые морщинки. 7. Мисс Бэтси была проницательной женщиной. 8.
Когда его мать и брат умерли, Дэви решил найти свою тетку. 9. Родители Оливера
умерли, и он был очень одинок. 10. Его странное поведение удивило нас. 11. Это была
удивительная новость, и Джин не могла не сообщить о ней Роберту. 12. Девочка была
удивительно умна для своего возраста. 13. Красота Ирэн была удивительная, и люди не
могли не восхищаться ею. 14. К нашему удивлению, он был дома. 15. Мы известили
его, что через три дня у нас будет собрание.
B. 1. Ее длинные вьющиеся волосы были красивого каштанового цвета. 2.
Забавный вид ребенка рассмешил старую женщину. 3. Мальчик развлекал нас,
рассказывая смешные истории. 4. Он представил меня своей жене, мне давно хотелось
с ней познакомиться. 5. Мистер Хилл ознакомил Эрика с его новой работой. 6. Он
представил нас своим родителям, с которыми мы не былй
еще знакомы. 7. Мисс Эмили не знала, за кого ей выйти замуж: за Тома или за
Джорджа. 8. Майкл женился на Флер, хотя она не дк>била его. 9. Молодые люди
поженились два года назад и очень счастливы. Они заслуживают своего счастья. 10.
Хотя Соме понимал, что его брак неудачен, он не хотел оставить Ирэн. 11. Как все
мальчишки, Том Сойер любил хвастаться. 12. Мы не могли не восхищаться
великолепной игрой молодого актера в пьесе «Гроза». 13. Мистер Пиквик был
маленький, толстенький, добродушный человек. 14. Большие темные глаза Флоренс с
темными загнутыми ресницами, светлые волосы и чудесная кожа делали ее
удивительно красивой. 15. Она не хорошенькая, но очень привлекательная. И руки у
нее красивой формы. 16. Девочка толстенькая, у нее пухленькое личико, вздернутый
носик, голубые глазки, тоненькие бровки, длинные ресницы и рыжие вьющиеся
волосы. У нее очень светлая кожа и чудесный цвет лица. Уже сейчас она очаровательна,
а со временем будет красива. 17. Джейн была некрасива, но у нее были чудесные глаза
и стройная фигура 18. Мисс Бэтси была высокая худая женщина с прямыми темными
волосами, бледным цветом лица и темными проницательными глазами.
XVII. Give a short description of your friend according to the follow-
ing model:
She is rather short but so slim and graceful that she seems taller than she is.
She has shapely legs and arms and her hands are beautiful. Her hair, slightly red,
is curly. Her face is oval, her eyes are brown, but when she is angry they seem
black. Her complexion is fresh, her mouth is full, her lips — red. She is lovely.
XVIII.
Give a ten-line continuation of the following dialogue:
A: Have you seen Bob's sister? B: No, 1
haven't, have you? A: I've met her several
times.
B: If she is like her brother she must be very good-looking. Bob is handsome,
isn't he?
XIX. Let one of the students give a very short description of the ap-
pearance (and character) of a person, male or female, you all know very
*veli. Try to find out who that person is by asking questions as in the
tttodel. All those present are to take part in the game.
.№ о d e 1: A: How old is she?
B: She's young, tall and slim.
A: Is her complexion rosy?
B: No, rather pale, I'd say.
A: She is blue-eyed, isn't she?
B; No, her eyes are dark.
A: And what about her nose?
B: She has a very nice turned-up nose.
A: Is her hair (does she wear her hair) long or short?
B: Her hair is short and straight.
A: Is she dark-haired?
B: Red.
A; It's Ann, isn't it?
B: No, it's not. You are mistaken. (That's right. You've guessed).
Note. You are allowed to ask any questions about appearance, disposition, hobbies,
habits, interests, but the name and occupation
XX. a) Make up 10 sentences using the verbs to want, to ask, to expect,
to like, to tell, to make, to hear, to see, to notice, to watch, to feel +
Complex Object. b| Read them out in Russian for your fellow-students to
translate them into English. Correct their mistakes if any at all.
XXI.
a) Read and translate the text:
On Thursday evenings the two librarians at the library in Benham, Pamela
Cream and Violet Meade were to work until nine o'clock. The girls didn't mind
staying late; in their small town there was very littlerfor two unmarried girls to do
anything. That's why when Inspector Ellis of the local police offered to give judo
lessons to anybody who wanted them, Pamela was the first to enrol. She began
learning judo exactly as she did everything else, thoroughly and with great
interest. She always insisted on doing her best. She was a small woman, but in
judo that does not matter. She was healthy, strong and brave. If not really
beautiful she was pleasant to look at and no wonder Inspector Timothy Ellis fell
in love with his best pupil. They were to get married soon.
That Thursday Tim was to call for her at nine o'clock to take her out to
dinner. It was already eight-thirty and Pamela was returning the books to the
shelves, while Violet was serving the remaining readers.
When Pamela was passing the windows near the back door she noticed that
the blind was up. She tried to pull it down, but
it kept rolling to the top of the window, making a very loud noise. At last
Pamela managed somehow to make it stay down, then went to the next aisle. To
her greatest surprise she saw two men there. "Oh," she said, "I'm sorry,
gentlemen, but readers are not allowed in this section of the library!" "I'm sorry,
Miss," said the smaller of the two .men with an ugly face, who seemed as
surprised as Pamela, "ye didn't know it." The other man, much larger than the
one who spoke stood with his back to Pamela, leaning against the shelves. The
smaller man said: "I'm afraid my friend is feeling rather weak. He wants some
fresh air. Could you help me take him out, Miss?" "Oh, I'm so sorry," said
Pamela and put her arm about the bigger man who was quite heavy. The smaller
man took his friend by the other arm and the three of them started moving
slowly to the back door. Suddenly Pamela stopped in horror. She saw blood on
the man's coat. Looking at him closely she saw he was dead. The truth flashed in
her mind. "You ... you killed him... here, in our library!" "Aren't you a smart
young lady!" hissed the short man angrily, "go on helping me and avoid
attracting attention, or you'll get what Blackie got." Pamela obeyed. They were
in front of the window when suddenly Pamela had an idea. That new judo hold
that Tim had taught her, maybe it would work! She must take her chance. That
murderer was very dangerous, one more dead body that could well be her own
wouldn't make him lose sleep. Oh, if only the hold worked!
Her hand touched the window blind. It went up with a loud noise. The man,
greatly surprised by it, dropped Blackies arm and Pamela let go of the other arm.
The heavy body fell to the floor. The murderer snatched out a knife and rushed at
Pamela, who was ready for him...
When the frightened people from the library came running into the back
room they saw two men lying on the floor and white-faced Pamela standing over
the unconscious murderer. .
(After George P McCallum's
*
"Tales of Mystery and Suspense")
f
b) Determine the main idea of the story, c) Make up a plan of the Могу, d) Choose a
suitable headline to the story from those suggested below:
1. "It Worked!"; 2. "A Brave Girl"; 3. "Sport Is Your Saving"; "The
Inspector's Girl"; 5. "Murder in the Library".
e) Say what you think of Pamela's character, f) Give a short summary of the story,
g) Think of a logical end to the story.
XXII.
Explain the meaning of the proverb and use it in a situation of your own:
Handsome is that handsome does.
XXIII.
Make up short dialogues concerning the appearance of:
a child, an elderly person, your favourite actor (actress) or fiction character.
XXIV.
Render the following in the form of a dialogue:
Режиссер (producer) беседует со своим помощником о кандидатуре на роль Наташи
Ростовой в фильме «Война и Мир». Они прослушали нескольких актрис. Одна из них
очень хорошо играет, но внешность ее не вполне подходит. Она невысокая и довольно
полная Вторая — стройная, высокая, но у нее голубые глаза и светлые волосы. Они
решают прослушать еще нескольких актрис, чтобы сделать окончательный выбор
XXV.
a) Read the text "A Lovers' Quarrel" (Part One). Translate it into Russian:
A Lovers' Quarrel
Scene: Daphne's house.
Part One
The telephone rings
D a p h n e (picking up the receiver): Hullo! Is that you, James?
R o b e r t : Hullo! Is that you, Daphne?
D: Yes, James. I was wondering whether you'd call this evening.
R: Listen, Daphne. This is Robert, not James. Who the devil is James,
anyway?
D: Oh ! It's you, Robert. I'm sorry. I was expecting a call from somebody
else.
R: I've been trying to get you on the phone since 2 o'clock.
D: Have you? I've been out. I only came in half an hour ago.
R: Where have you been?
D: I've been playing tennis at the club. r,
R: You told me you weren't going to play tennis today. , D: Yes, I know. But
Madge asked me to go and make up a four.
R: Well! That's a bit thick!
b) Explain the use of tenses:
1.1 was wondering whether you'd call this evening. 2.1 was expecting a
call.... 3. I've been trying to get you .... 4. I've been out. 5. Where have you been?
6. I've been playing tennis... . 7. You told me you weren't going....
c) Make up situations in which you can use the tenses mentioned above. Ask other
students to explain their use. d) Read the text "A Lovers' Quarrel" (Part Two).
Translate it into Russian:
Part Two
R: What's the matter, Daphne? You seem to have been avoiding me recently.
D: Avoiding you ? Of course I haven't been avoiding you. We went out
together on Wednesday, didn't we?
R: Yes, but that's three days ago, Daphne. I'm longing to see you. Will you
come with me tonight?
D: Oh, not tonight, Robert. I'm feeling a bit tired.
R: Couldn't we go out just for an hour? I've been looking forward to seeing
you all day.
D: I can see you haven't been playing tennis all day or you ...
R: I wish I had. I've been helping the old man in the garden. D: Then you
must be feeling tired too!
R: Listen, darling! Are you telling me the truth? Or are you going out with
this James, whoever he is? D: Of course not. He's ...
R: You're going out with him this evening, aren't you?
D: No. I've told you. I don't want to go out this evening.
R: Now I know why. You're going to sit by the phone all ^ening, waiting for
your beloved Jimmy to give you a call.
D: Don't be ridiculous, Robert. He isn't my beloved Jimmy. And anyway ...
his name is James. He doesn't like to be called Jimmy.
e) Explain the use of tenses:
1. You seem to have been avoiding me ... . 2. I'm longing to see you. 3. I'm
feeling a bit tired. 4. I've been looking forward .... 5. You haven't been playing
tennis ... . 6. You've been helping the old man . . . . 7. ... you must be feeling
tired too. 8. Are you telling me the truth?
f) Make up situations in which you can use the tenses mentioned above. Make other
students explain the use. g) Read the text "A Lovers' Quarrel" (Part Three). Translate it
into Russian:
Part Three
R: Oh! He doesn't, does he? Well, if I get my hands on him people will be
calling him Scarface Jimmy. I suppose you've been seeing this poor fish every
day. That's why you haven't been seeing me.
D: Of course it isn't. Do stop talking nonsense, Robert, and listen...
R: To your explanation? You needn't bother, I understand everything
perfectly. (He imitates her.) Oh, hullo, James darling. I was wondering
whether you'd call this evening? I'm not a fool, you know.
D: For the last time... will you listen?
R: Go on. I'm all ears. ,
D: James is my cousin. He's thirty-four, he's married , and he has 3 children.
He's coming to London next week from Scotland, and he'll be staying with us.
We're expecting a call from him this evening.
R: Your cousin? Honestly? Married? Why the devil didn't you sayso?
D: You didn't give me the chance. R: When
can I see you again?
D: I'll see you in half an hour ... unless you're feeling too ashamed of
yourself.
h) Explain the use of tenses:
1. If 1 get my hands on him people will be calling him ... . 2. You've been
seeing this poor fish... 3. He's coming to London ... and he'll be staying with
us ....
i) Make up' situations in which you can use the tenses mentioned above. Make other
students explain their use. j) Reproduce the text **A Lovers' Quarter in Indirect
Speech.
LABORATORY WORK
I. Answer the questions. Record your answers in the intervals.
II. Translate the sentences into English using the active vocabnlary.
III. Spell and transcribe the words.
II. Translate the phrases into English.
II. Write the dictation.
VI.
Listen to the wrong statements. Correct them.
VI.
a) Listen to the poem "Twilight" by George G. Byron, b) Mark the stresses
and tunes. Practise the poem, c) Learn it by heart.
I N T R O D U C T I O N
INTONATION
I n t o n a t i o n is a complex unity of variations in pitch, stress, tempo and
timbre.
T h e p i t c h c o m p o n e n t of intonation, or melody, is the changes in
the pitch of the voice in connected speech.
S e n t e n c e s t r e s s , o r a c c e n t , is the greater prominence of one
or more words among other words in the same sentence.
T e m p o is the relative speed with which sentences and intonation-groups
are pronounced in connected speech.
S p e e c h t i m b r e is a special colouring of voice which shows the
speaker's emotions, i. e. pleasure, displeasure, sorrow, etc.
Intonation serves to form sentences and intonation-groups, to define their
communicative type, to express the speaker's thoughts, to convey the attitudinal
meaning. One and the same grammatical structure and lexical composition of the
sentence may express different meaning when pronounced with different
intonation.
e. g. -> Isn't it ridiculous? (general question) -> Isn't it
ridiculous! (exclamation)
Long sentences, simple extended, compound and complex, are subdivided
into i n t o n a t i o n - g r o u p s . Intonation-group division depends on the
meaning of the sentence, the grammatical structure of the utterance and the style
of speech Each intonation-group is characterized by a definite intonation pattern.
The number of intonation groups in the same sentence may be different.
е. д. In ,June | Ju,ly | and /August | our V children 'don't 'go to ^school.
In VJune, 'July, and ,August | our V children 'don't 'go to ^school.
The end of each sentence is characterized by a relatively long pause. The
pauses between intonation-groups are shorter, they vary in length. There may be
no pauses between intonation-groups at all.
Each intonation-group is characterized by a certain intonation pattern, i. e.
each syllable of an intonation-group has a certain pitch and bears a larger or
smaller degree of prominence. Consequently pitch levels are inseparably
connected with stress. Intonation patterns consist of one or more syllables.
Intonation patterns containing a number of syllables consist of the following
parts: the pre-head, the head, the nucleus and the tail.
T h e p r e - h e a d includes unstressed and half-stressed syllables
preceding the first stressed syllable.
T h e h e a d includes the stressed and unstressed syllables beginning with
the first stressed syllable up to the last stressed syllable.
The last stressed syllable is called t h e n u c l e u s . The unstressed and
half-stressed syllables that follow the nucleus are called t h e t a i l .
e. gr. It was a Vvery 'sunny xday yesterday. It was a ...
— the pre-head. ... V very 'sunny — the head. ...
xday ... — the nucleus. ... yesterday — the tail.
The rises and falls that take place in the nucleus or start with it are called
n u c l e a r t o n e s .
T h e n u c l e u s is the most important part of the intonation pattern as it
defines the communicative type of the sentence, determines the semantic value
of the intonation-group, indicates the communicative centre of the intonation-
group or of the whole sentence.
T h e c o m m u n i c a t i v e c e n t r e is associated with the most
important word or words of the intonation-group or of the sentence.
The nuclear tone of the final intonation-group is determined by the
communicative type of the whole sentence.
The communicative types of sentences are differentiated in speech according
to the aim of the utterance from the point of view of communication, i. e. in
order to show if the sentence expresses a statement of fact, a question, a
command or an exclamation.
There are four communicative types of sentences:
1. Statements, е. д. I like music.
2. Questions, e. g. Can you prove it?
3. Imperative sentences or commands, e. g. Try it again.
4. Exclamations, e. g. Right you are!
The intonation pattern of the non-final intonation-group., mainly its nuclear
tone, is determined by the semantic value of the intonation-group and by its
connection with the following one.
The falling nuclear tone shows that the non-final intonation-group is
complete, important by itself and is not so closely connected with the following
intonation-group.
A longer pause after an intonation-group pronounced with the falling tone
makes the intonation-group even more significant.
e. g. I'll -> tell him vall | when he vcomes.
The rising nuclear tone shows that the non-final intonation-group is closely
connected in meaning with the following intonation-group, is not important by
itself and implies continuation.
e. g. -> Generally,speaking, 11 pre->fervtennis.
The intonation pattern is also modified by the speaker's attitude towards his
utterance:
e. g. vWhy? — detached, even unsympathetic. /Why? —
wondering.
In English notional words (nouns, adjectives, verbs, etc.) are generally
stressed. Form-words and most pronouns (personal and possessive mainly) are
generally unstressed. But any part of speech may be stressed if it is semantically
important.
е. д. V What is he 'going to ^do? — do is the communicative
centre.
-> What is vhe going to do? he is the communicative
—
centre.
METHOD OF INDICATING INTONATION ON THE STAVES
Unstressed syllables are represented by dots, stressed syllables are marked by
dashes or curves.
A dash represents a level tone. _ A downward curve represents
the final fall. *\
' An upward curve represents the final rise.
Two parallel lines (staves) represent the upper and the lower
limits of human voice or the range of the voice. _________________
The temporal component of intonation can be indicated graphically only as
far as pauses are concerned.
Two vertical bars 11 denote a long pause, which usually occurs at the end of
a sentence.
A single vertical bar | denotes a short pause inside a sentence.
FUNDAMENTAL INTONATION PATTERNS AND THEIR 11Щ
Section One
Intonation Pattern I
(LOW PRE-HEAD + ) LOW FALL ( + TAIL)
M o d e l s : Pve just seen Tom. vWhere? "\
Whose book is this? ^Mary's, I .think. \ ^
What's his job? He's a xdoctor.
Stress-and-tone marks in the text: Low Fall: |v | Half-
stressed syllables: |, |
Unstressed syllables have no graphic indication in the text.
The Low Fall in the nucleus starts from the mid-level or lower and usually
reaches the lowest level.
The unstressed syllabtes which form the tail are pronounced on the lowest
level pitch. The unstressed syllables forming the pre-head are pronounced either
on the low level pitch or rise gradually.
This intonation pattern is used:
l . I n s t a t e m e n t s , final,categoric,calm,reserved.
e. gr. Whose book is this? It's ^Mother's.
—
2. I n s p e c i a l q u e s t i o n s , calm, serious, fliat, reserved, very
often unsympathetic.
e. gr. One book is missing. — vWhich?
3.I n i m p e r a t i v e s , calm,unemotional,serious.
е. д. Г11 send it to him. — xDon't.
How can I get in touch with Nick? — vPhone him.
4. I n e x c l a m a t i o n s , calm, unsurprised, reserved.
e. g. Would you like an apple? — vThank you. He's just
arrived. — vFine!
EXERCISES
LOW FALL ONLY
M o d e l : vYes. "*\
1. ap Listen carefully to the Concentrate your attention on the
Verbal Context
Can you come tomorrow? Whose book is this?
When can you do it? Where does he come from?
What subject do you prefer? What's your name?
following conversational situations, intonation of the replies.
Drill S t a t e m e n t s (final, categoric, calm, reserved)
Yes.
Mine.
Yours.
His.
Jack's.
John's.
Tom's.
Anne's.
Now.
Soon.
France.
Spain.
Wales.
French.
Maths.
Smith.
Jones.
Brown.
1 Material for exercises marked with one asterisk is borrowed from the book by J. D
O'Connor, G. F Arnold "Intonation of Colloquial English", L , 1956, 1973
Take only one of them.
Just tell him.
Make them at once.
I saw a friend of yours today.
Borrow someone's dictionary.
Would you mind calling your dog ?
Shall we have another game?
He's just arrived.
S p e c i a l q u e s t i o n s
(calm, flat, reserved, serious, very often unsympathetic)
Which?
What?
How?
Who?
Whose?
I m p e r a t i v e s
(calm, unemotional, serious) Heel. Sit.
Down. Here. Let's.
E x c l a m a t i o n s
(calm, unsurprised) Oh! Right! Good! Fine!
b) Listen to the replies and repeat them in the intervals. Make your voice fall as
low as possible, c) Listen to the verbal context and reply in the interval.
LOW FALL + TAIL
M o d e l : Yes,, Mary. ^\
x
0 #
2. a) Listen carefully to the following conversational situations* Concentrate your
attention on the intonation of the replies:
Verbal Context Drill
S t a t e m e n t s
(final, categoric, calm, reserved)
Where do you come from? India.
Poland.
Sweden.
Denmark.
Italy.
Norway.
Holland.
England.
Scotland.
Ireland.
How old are you? Seven.
Twenty.
Thirty.
Forty.
Will you send it to me?
Yes, sir.
No, John. Gladly, madam. Certainly, professor.
S p e c i a l q u e s t i o n s
(calm, serious, flat, reserved, very often
unsympathetic)
Pass me that box, Joan.
He's away quite often.
She's got something in her eye.
He's broken a window.
Which box? How often? Which eye? Who has? Whose window? Whose
window, may I ask? Whose window has he broken?
I m p e r a t i v e s (calm, unemotional, serious)
How can I get in touch with Miles? Phone him.
Wire him. Write to him.
E x c l a m a t i o n s
(calm, unsurprised) T h a n k y o u .
Would you like an apple? N o n s e n s e ! R u b b i s h ! P i t y !
Oh, I'm cold.
I've lost my ball.
b) Listen to the replies and repeat them in the intervals. Make your voice fall as low
as possible. Do not forget to blend the words together, c) Listen to the verbal context
and reply in the interval.
LOW PRE-HEAD 4- LOW FALL ( + TAIL)
Model: He's a vteacher. 1f
3. a)* Listen carefully to the following conversational situations. Concentrate your
attention on the intonation of the replies:
Verbal Context
Whose pen is this?
Drill
S t a t e m e n t s
(final, categoric, calm, reserved)
Patricia's. Diana's. Elizabeth's. It's mine. It's Freddie's. It's Christine's. It's
Susan's.
Someone'11 have to do it. You'll find it in the drawer.
It's my book.
What shall I do with these figures?
Did you lock the back door? I'm afraid I've got a cold.
S p e c i a l q u e s t i o n s (cairn, serious, flat, reserved, very often
unsympathetic) Butwho? In which drawer?
I m p e r a t i v e s
(calm, unemotional, serious)
Well, take it then. Divide them. Remember them.
E x c l a m a t i o n s
(calm, unsurprised) Of course. No wonder.
b) Listen to the replies and repeat them in the intervals. Make your voice fall as low
as possible. Do not forget to blend the words together, c) Listen to the verbal context
and reply in the interval.
4. In order to fix Intonation Pattern I in your mind, ear and speech habits repeat all
the replies yourself until they sound perfectly natural to you. See that your Russian
pronunciation habits do not interfere.
5. Listen to a fellow-student reading the replies. Tell him what his errors in
intonation are.
6. Listen to your teacher reading the verbal context below. Reply by using one of the
drill sentences. Pronounce it with Intonation Pattern I. Say what attitude you mean to
render:
Verbal Context Drill
Is your brother in?
Yes.
Have you any cousins?
No.
Whose exercise book is this?
Mine.
How old is your brother?
Ten.
How old are you ?
Twenty.
May we go?
No, girls.
May I go?
Yes, Betty.
Who is on duty today?
May I switch off the cassette-recorder?
Who is absent today?
Whose book is this?
When is he coming?
Where is your sister?
May I ask you a question ?
Can I help you with the test?
What's your uncle's job?
Where's Ann?
Where do you come from ?
Why do you stay here so long?
Where is your teacher?
Will you give me your book?
Will you switch on the cassette-recorder?
May I go and see him ?
I've got a new flat.
I'm afraid I can't leave at once.
Pass me the book, Tom.
He is on duty very often.
Will you bring the cassette?
One book is missing.
Someone'11 have to do it.
I must go now.
I'll stop him.
What do you want me to do? What shall I do now? How can I get in touch
with him? It's my book.
I'm afraid to miss the train.
1 don't know this poem well enough.
What shall I do with those naughty boys?
All the students are present.
Here's the cassette.
You've got many mistakes in pronunciation.
We can go now.
Don't go so fast.
We've got no ear-phones. *
I've already cleaned the blackboard.
Here's the book.
Iam.
Yes, please.
No one is.
It's Mary's.
Tomorrow.
At the Institute.
Of course, you may.
Of course, you сйп.
He's a turner.
She's out now.
The Ukraine.
I have to.
At the dean's offifce.
Which?
How?
When?
Where?
Why?
Which one?
How often?
Which cassette?.
Which one?
Butwho?
Do.
Don't.
Stay.
Write.
Phone him.
Then take it.
Hurry up, then.//
Repeat it, then.
Ignore them.
Fine!
Thanks.
Oh!
Fine!
Good!
Pity!
Thank you, Mary. Thank you, Tom.
7. Your teacher will suggest a verbal content. You in turn respond by using: a)
statements, sounding final, categoric, calm* reserved; b) special questions, sounding
calm, serious, flat, reserved or unsympathetic; c) imperatives, sounding calm,
unemotional, serious; d) exclamations, sounding calm, unsurprised, reserved.
8. Read the following rhythmic groups. Observe quick pronunciation of unstressed
syllables:
a) Write to her. Read to me. Wait for them. Talk to her. Mary can. Answer it.
Certainly. Open it. Tell them that. Nobody is.
b) lean answer you. I can wait for you. It was wonderful. It's impossible. You
must tell them that. He can write to you. I can give it to him. They must keep it
for you. You could do it for me.
Section Two
(LOW PRE-HEAD + ) DESCENDING HEAD + LOW FALL ( + TAIL)
M o d e l 1:
When can you come?As V soon as the 'weather im proves.M o d e l 2:
v
Where did you spend your holiday?.
V
I V stayed in 'Moscow and 'worked at my book.(LOW PRE-
x
HEAD) + HIGH LEVEL HEAD + LOW FALL ( +
TAIL)M o d e l : What time is it?It's -» half past eleven.
Intonation Pattern II
Stress-and-tone marks in the text:
Stressed syllables of the descending head:
the first stressed syllable [ V ]
any following stressed syllables of the head [1 ]
The first stressed syllable of the descending head is pronounced on the high
level pitch. Sometimes it is pronounced with a slight rise. The following stressed
syllables have level pitch and form a descending sequence until the nucleus is
reached, unstressed syllables may either carry the pitch down as in Model 1 (the
Falling Head) or they may he pronounced on the level of the preceding stressed
syllable as in Model 2 (the Stepping Head). The Low Fall in the nucleus starts
somewhat lower than the mid level. If there are any unstressed syllables before
the first stressed syllable they are said on a rather low pitch.
This intonation pattern is used:
l . I n s t a t e m e n t s , final, categoric, considered.
e. g. How much did you pay It V costs over 'two 'hundred for it? ^pounds.
What is the weather like? I V think it is 'going to xrain.
2. I n s p e c i a l q u e s t i o n s , serious, responsible, intense, often
suggesting irritability or impatience.
e. g. Will you lend me your -> What do you xwant it for?
pen?
Go and see him tomorrow. VWhat 'place does he xlive in?
3. I n i m p e r a t i v e s , firm, serious, pressing.
е. д. I can't think what to do. V Leave it en'tirely to xme,
then.
I'm afraid I've made
V Copy it 'out axgain, then-
a mistake.
4. I n e x c l a m a t i o n s , rather emphatic.
e. g. The exams are over at last. -> Isn't it xwonderful!
It's my birthday today.
V Many 'happy returns!
She refused my help.
What a Vstrange 'thing to x*fo!
EXERCISES
(LOW PRE-HEAD) + FALLING HEAD + LOW FALL (+ TAIL)
M o d e l :
Have you got any news of Mary?
I V haven't 'seen her since vSunday.
1. a)* Listen carefully to the following conversational situations. Concentrate
your attention on the intonation of the replies:
Verbal Context
When can you come?
What can I do for you ?
Why didn't the guard let you in?
^en am I to expect you ?
Dril
S t a t e m e n t s (categoric, final, considered)
As soon as the weather improves.
I want a ticket for Birmingham, please.
He said he couldn't let me in without a pass.
Sometime towards the end of
the next week.
Soon after half past five.
S p e c i a l q u e s t i o n s
(serious, responsible, intense, often suggesting irritation or
impatience)
m afraid I've broken the vase. Why can't you leave things
m terribly tired, ve lost my
handbag. Wiat was that you said ?
rie's promised to ring you up.
alone?
Why don't you leave it til tomorrow morning? When are you going to learn to be more
careful? When are you going to visit your parents?
Why didn't you say so before?
What shall I tell John?
What shall I do after tea?
Shall I memorize it?
Hello, Jane!
So sorry he's left.
I really wanted so much to see her.
What nasty weather we are having!
I m p e r a t i v e s (firmr serious, pressing)
Ask him to come as soon as he is free.
Tell him exactly what you think about it.
Take the cups into the kitchen and wash them up. Study the whole dialogue
carefully first.
E x c l a m a t i o n s (rather emphatic)
It's so very nice to see you, Harry!
What a pity we didn't ring sooner!
Such a pity you didn't come a bit earlier.
Fancy such a day in July!
b) Listen to the replies and repeat them in the intervals. Pronounce unstressed syllables in
the pre-head as low as possible. Make the stressed syllables of the head carry the pitch lower.
Do not forget to blend the words together. Make your voice fall on the last stressed syllable,
c) Listen to the verbal context and reply in the interval.
The stepping head makes the utterance more weighty.
(LOW PRE-HEAD) + STEPPING HEAD + LOW FALL {+ TAIL)
M o d e l : Why did you leave so soon?\ Alice was be'ginning to 'getvery V
tired.*• • ■
2. a)' Listen carefully to the following conversational situations. Concentrate your
attention on the intonation of the reply:
Verbal Context Drill
S t a t e m e n t s
(final, categoric, considered, weighty]
Have you any news of Malcolm? We haven't heard from him
for ages.
Tom and I have just been to see him in hospital.
I shall miss him terribly.
I firmly believe you'll be bet-
ter off without him. It's much too late to have any regrets now.
How did you spend the morning? I stayed in bed until nearly
lunch time.
I went to see my brother in Kensington.
We spent the whole morning in Hyde Park and Green Park.
I shan't be able to go. I've lost my handbag.
Good morning, madam.
In a quarter of an hour's time.
S p e c i a l q u e s t i o n s
(serious, responsible, intense, weighty, often suggesting
irritation or impatience)
For heaven's sake why not? What are you going to do about it?
When does the next train for Kiev leave?
What's the price of a single first-class ticket?
I m p e r a t i v e s
(firm, serious, pressing, weighty)
How many pencils do you want? Buy me half a dozen, please. The answer to
the first sum is six. Have a go to the next one.
What shall I do with my boots?
What do you want me to do?
Here are the magazines.
Shall I read the words?
My daughter asks me for permission to visit you.
I'll make you a present of it.
Fine day, isn't it?
There's a letter for you, Mary!
*
I'm going on a voyage round Europe.
See if you can do the second one more quickly. Take them into the kitchen
and clean them. Put them away tidily in the cupboard under the stairs. Read the
paragraph beginning at the bottom of the next page but one.
Don't put them all on my table.
Be careful to pronounce distinctly the word "thirteen." Let your daughter
come here and stay with us on Sunday.
E x c l a m a t i o n s
(weighty, rather emphatic)
Thank you very much! Thank you very much indeed!
What lovely weather we are having today!
Thank you very much indeed, Mrs. Brown. What an extraordinary pieco of
luck!
b) Listen to the replies and repeat them in the intervals. Pronounce unstressed
syllables in the pre-head as low as possible. Make the stressed syllables of the head carry
the pitch lower. Observe the same level of stressed and the following unstressed syllables
of the head. Do not forget to blend the words together. Then make your voice fall on the
last stressed syllable, c) Listen to the verbal context and reply in the interval.
(LOW PRE-HEAD) + HIGH LEVEL HEAD + LOW FALL ( + TAIL)
M o d e l :
How much does it cost? * More than we can now af.ford.
When the syllables of the head are pronounced on the high level pitch the
head is called the High Level.
3. a)* Listen carefully to the following conversational situations. Concentrate your
attention on the intonation of the replies:
Verbal Context
I hate cabbage.
I can't bear Julia.
David's grown a beard. How much does it cost?
What's the time, please?
ave you any news of Malcolm?
Harry's not coming to tea. You can't have that book. I'm afraid I can't do it. I
shan't be able to go.
Drill
S t a t e m e n t s (final, categoric, considered)
So do I.
So does Peter.
So do we all.
Neither can If nor can my mother. So he has. Five shillings. Ten pounds.
Three guineas. Half a crown. Two pounds ten. Four o'clock. Half past one. Five
past eleven. Quarter to six. Quarter to eleven. Ten minutes to nine. He's passed
his exams. I was talking to him yesterday.
S p e c i a l q u e s t i o n s
[serious, intense, often suggesting irritation or impatience)
Who is coming to tea, then? Which one can I have? Can't do what? Why ever
not?
I m p e r a t i v e s
(firm, serious, pressing)
I didn't quite catch what you said. Pay attention, then.
What do you think you are doing? Mind your own business.
I'm going to resign.
Don't be ridiculous.
What do you want?
Write him a letter.
E x c l a m a t i o n s
(rather emphatic)
He says it was your fault.
How ridiculous! Too bad! Bad luck!
I've sprained my ankle.
You haven't! Thanks awfully!
I'l make you a present of it.
b) listen to the replies and repeat them in the intervals. Observe high level tone of
the head. Do not forget to blend the words together. Make your voice fall on the last
stressed syllable, c) Listen to the verbal context and reply in the interval.
4. In order to fix Intonation Pattern II in your mind, ear and speech habits, repeat
all the replies yourself until they sound perfectly natural to you. See that your Russian
pronunciation habits do not interfere.
5. Listen to a fellow-student reading the replies. Tell him what his errors in
intonation are.
6. Listen to your teacher reading the verbal context below. Reply by using one of the
drill sentences. Pronounce it with Intonation Pattern II. Say what attitnde you mean to
render:
Verbal Context
I am hungry.
I'm not thirsty.
I can't translate it.
Do you often read English
newspapers? When can you come? Where is my book?
Where did you see him? What did you do on Sunday?
Drill
So am I. Neither are we. Neither can I. Every chance I get.
Any time after six o'clock. I think you left it on the table.
In Room Twenty-four.
I spent the whole day in the
park.
When did you start learning English?
When can you come?
What shall I do?
What's the time?
Why are you in a hurry?
I don't like this film.
Will you give me your pen?
Pass the sugar?
What's he saying?
Will you go and see Helen? Can she see you tomorrow?
I've missed the last bus.
I've done the translation.
I came on Tuesday morning.
The weather is horrid.
I'd like to have a few textbooks.
I've finished my translation.
What shall I do with the book?
What shall I do?
I don't like porridge.
How long do you want me to
stay there?
The doctor says it's not serious.
I didn't quite catch that. I can't undo the door. How long can I have it for?
Where shall I read?
I'll give you an interesting book to read.
It's my birthday.
I started to learn it about three years ago. Whenever you invite me. It's up to
you. I suppose it's about eleven. I've got to catch a train. I entirely agree with
you. What do you want it for? Why don't you say "please"? How can I hear when
you're making so much noise? What street does she live in? What is the matter
with her now?
How are you going to get home?
What will you do next? At exactly what time? Then why can't you stay? How
many of them do you want to have now? Now answer questions. Give it back to
Kitty. Read the first paragraph. Eat it upt I say. Stay as long as you can.
Then don't make so much
fuss about it.
Pay attention, then.
Try another key.
Keep it for as long as you
like.
Go right back to the beginning again. Thanks awfully.
Many happy returns!
Very many happy returns of
the day!
How do you do? Lovely day, isn't it? Here's to you. She asked us to tea.
How do you do! Isn't it beautiful! Your very good health! How perfectly
charming of
her!
Here's your tea.
We're going picnicking. Isn't it mild today?
What a big piece of cake you've given me! What a pleasant surprise! What a
difference from this time last week!
7. Your teacher will suggest a verbal context. You, in your turn, reply to it using
class="book">Intonation Pattern II. The drill will continue until every student has participated. Keep
the exercise moving on rapidly. Keep the attitude in mind.
Reference material for the teacher:
1. What's your name? 2. How old are you? 3. When is your birthday? 4. How
many brothers have you? 5. How many sisters have you? 6. Where do you live?
7. Where do you come from? 8. Where do you study? 9. My pronunciation is not
good. 10. When can you do it? 11. What do you think of the book? 12. I'd like to
see you tomorrow. 13. How much have you paid for it? 14. How long have you
been there? 15. Where do you usually rest? 16. What have.you bought for lunch?
17. My cousin is a doctor. 18. I don't know this young man. 19. I'm afraid I can't
do it in time. 20. I'm afraid I don't understand you 21. Where have you put your
bag? 22. Why have you bought the French newspaper? 23. What will you wear?
24. My mother is in St.Petersburg now. 25. She is not in. 26. I don't find it easy.
27. What is there in front of the building?
8/M Listen to the dialogues. Mark the stresses and tunes. Practise and memorize
them:
a) "What's your name?" "My
name's John." "How old are you?"
"I'm thirty-five." "When's your birthday?" "It's on the
1 Material for exercises marked with two asterisks is borrowed from the book by J. D
O'Connor "A Course of English Pronunciation". L , 1954
tenth of December." "How many brothers have you?" "I
haven't any brothers at all." "How many sisters have
you ? " "Just one."
b) A: Stand up. Wh^t have you done? B: I've stood
up.
A: Pick up you pencil. What have you done?
B: I've picked up my pencil.
A: Give it to me. What have you done?
B: I've given it to you.
A: Sit down again. What have you done?
B: I've sat down again.
c) A: Look at this picture. B: How
beautiful!
A: Now look at this book. B: What a very
big one! A: Look at the sun. B: Isn't it bright!
A: Look at me. B:Oh dear!
9.'* Listen to the following sentences and read them using Intonation Pattern II.
Observe quick pronunciation of unstressed syUables. Concentrate your attention on
rhythm and intonation:
Can anyone tell me the time? Does anyone know the time? Does anyone
know Tom? I'm going to town for the day. I'm going to town today. I'm going to
town now.
What do you want me to do ? What do you want to do? What do you want
done? Tom's got abetter idea. Tom's got a better plan. Tom's got a good plan.
10. Make up a micro-dialogue using Intonation Patterns I, II.
Section Three
Intonation Pattern III
(LOW PRE-HEAD + ) LOW RISE ( + TAIL)
M o d e l : Do you play tennis ? ,Yes.
J
/Sometimes.
Of ,course.
> J
Stress-and-tone marks in the text: Low
Rise: |, |
Before the Low Rise the low pre-head is pronounced on the same pitch level as the
start of the rise. The rise in the nucleus starts from the lowest level and usual y reaches the
medium level. If the nucleus is followed by a tail, it is pronounced on the lowest level and
the syllables of the tail rise gradual y.
This intonation pattern is used:
1. I n s t a t e m e n t s , not categoric, non-final, encouraging further
conversation, reserving judgement.
e.g. Have you heard about Max? ,No. Shall we be in time? I ,think so.
—
—
What do you want at the grocer's? /Tea, ,rice, ,cheese„.
—
2.I n q u e s t i o n s :
a) I n s p e c i a l q u e s t i o n s (with the nuclear tone on
the interrogative word), wondering, mildly puzzled.
e.g. How must I do it? ,How?
—
She's thirty-six. ,How old is she? How old are you?
—
,How old am I?
—
b) I n g e n e r a l q u e s t i o n s , disapproving, sceptical.
e.g. It's very important. — ,1s it?
We ought to follow his advice — /Must we do as he says?
3. I n i m p e r a t i v e s , calmly warning, soothing, e.g. /Careful.
/Steady. /Watch. /Don't.
4. I n e x c l a m a t i o n s , reserving judgement; encouraging further
conversation; expressing calm, casual acknowledgment; often heard in
greetings.
e.g. It's half past ten. /Well. (We're not in a hurry.) Here's your change.
—
—
/Thank you! Good morning. — /Morning!
EXERCISES
LOW RISE ONLY
M o d e l :
,Yes.
1. a)* Listen carefully to the following conversational situations. Concentrate your
attention on the intonation of the replies:
Verbal Context
Have you heard about Max? You know where John lives? Whose book
is this?
How many pencils have you got?
Drill
S t a t e m e n t s
(nof categoric, non-final, reserving judgement, encouraging
further conversation)
No.
Yes.
Mine.
Jack's.
Joan's.
Tom's.
John's.
Jean's,
Ann's.
One.
Two.
Three.
Four.
Five.
How must I do it? You must do it this way. Which is William's book?
William's is the blue book. Who's coming this Friday?
(To someone in the way.) (Photographer to sitter.) (Teacher to class.)
John says he can't come. It's half past ten. The car's here. Shall I ring the bell?
S p e c i a l q u e s t i o n s
(wondering, mildly puzzled)
How?
How?
Which?
Which?
Who?
I m p e r a t i v e s
(calmly warning, exhortative)
Mind.
Smile.
Start.
Stop.
Go.
E x c l a m a t i o n s (encouraging further conversation, reserving
judgement, expressing calm, casual acknowledgement)
Oh! Well! Good! Please!
b) Listen to the replies and repeat them in the intervals. Make your voice rise from
the lowest level reaching the medium one. c) Listed, to the verbal context and reply in
the interval.
LOW RISE 4- TAIL
M o d e l : , Isn't it?
2. a)* Listen carefully to the following conversational situations. Concentrate your
attention on the intonation of the replies:
l^ren't they rather expensive? pan Tommy come to tea tomorrow? I'm going
to use my old one. Will you be able to fetch them? He's late again.
Count as far as you can.
That one is yours. His name was William. Richard's due at eleven o'clock.
How old are you?
They are supposed to be different.
They are arriving next week. It's very important. You were quite wrong about
it. The Smiths weren't invited. I thought she was pretty.
(Mother to small daughter who is overexcited.)
(Father to small son who is riding his bicycle a little too fast.)
S t a t e m e n t s
(not categoric, non-final,
encouraging further conversation, reserving judgement)
Some of them are. Maybe he can. That should be all right. Probably I shall.
That's all right. That doesn't matter. Thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, sixteen,
seventeen, eighteen, nineteen, ...
S p e c i a l q u e s t i o n s
(wondering, mildly puzzled)
Which one? What was that? When is he due? How old am I?
G e n e r a l q u e s t i o n s
(disapproving, sceptical)
Is there any difference between them? Are they? Is it? Was I?
Weren't they? Did you?
I m p e r a t i v e s (calmly warning, soothing) Steady.
Slowly.
(Mother to small son who is teasing Gently. a
puppy.)
He just can't be bothered. Your change, sir. I've finished my work. Good
morning, sir.
E x c l a m a t i o n s
(encouraging further conversation, reserving judgement;
expressing calm, casual asknowledgement)
Pity!
Thank you!
Splendid!
Morning!
b) Listen to the replies, repeat them in the intervals. Pronounce the stressed syllable on
the low level. Unstressed or partially stressed syllables in the tail should rise to the medium
level or even higher, c) Listen to the verbal context and reply in the interval.
LOW PRE-HEAD 4- LOW RISE ( + TAIL)
M o d e l ' Per, haps. JI /think so. ,
•
t
3. a)" Listen careful y tp the following conversational situations. Concentrate your
attention on the intonation of the replies:
Verbal Context Drill
S t a t e m e n t s
(not categoric, non-final, encouraging further conversation,
reserving judgement)
How about asking Max to join us? He ought to be able to get
away.
Can you turn up at nine on
Tuesday?
D'you think the proposal is
reasonable?
Martm says the answer's six.
As a rule I can.
On the whole it's quite fair.
I suppose that's the right answer.
(Response to a knock at the door.) (Teacher to student practising
pronunciation.) (Doctor to patient.)
I m p e r a t i v e s
(calmly warning, exhortative)
Come in. Again.
Relax.
E x c l a m a t i o n s
(reserving judgement, expressing
Is it really yours? Shall we meet at ten? Good morning, sir! I'll bring it
tomorrow.
calm, casual acknowledgment)
Of course! All right! Good morning! Many thanks!
b) Listen to the replies and repeat them in the intervals. Pronounce unstressed syllables in
the pre-head as low as possible. Then raise your voice from the low level, c) Listen to the
verbal context and reply in the interval.
4. In order to fix Intonation Pattern 111 in your mind, ear and speech habits repeat all the
replies yourself until they sound perfectly natural to you. See that your Russian pronunciation
habits do not interfere.
5. Listen to your fellow-student reading the replies. Tell him what his errors in intonation
are.
6. Your teacher will ask you or one of the students the question "What would you like?".
You answer by using one of the replies below. Pronounce it with Intonation Pattern 111. You
in turn ask someone else the same question. And he (or she) will also answer from the replies
below. Continue the exercise until everyone has had an opportunity to ask the question and
have it answered from the replies below. Keep the exercise moving rapidly and do not allow
the students to take a long time to answer the question.
M o d e l : What would you like? An,
apple.
an orange, some cheese, a bicycle, a book, a carpet, a drink, some
mushrooms, a walk, a telephone call, a trip, some coffee, potato, porridge.
7. Listen to the verbal context suggested by your teacher. Reply by Using the drill
sentences below. Pronounce them with Intonation Pattern 111. Say what attitude you mean to
render:
What do you think of the picture?
Do you play the piano?
Do you think the English climate is
changeable?
Why is your garden so beautiful?
Do women smoke?
Do students dance?
Do you do your morning exercises?
What's your nationality?
What does it cost?
Where are you going next week?
When's your birthday?
What's your hobby?
What's your favourite month?
Do you speak French?
Can you call on me tomorrow night?
Will you be able to do it?
Nobody goes to see him.
Pity, they didn't like it.
Did she see him yesterday?
How many English books have you got?
Will he ring her up?
Do you get up early in the morning?
Thank you very much.
What are they doing? He is at home after four. You should do it like this.
Which is Benny's coat? Lucy is coming to Moscow. Where shall we meet? I stop
here. I'm thirty.
You should write to her at once.
Come round at five.
Who gave it to you? I'll finish it by Sunday.
Fine.
No.
Quite.
Work.
Some.
Many.
Sometimes.
Russian.
Fourpence.
Moscow.
Monday.
Music.
January.
Certainly.
Maybe.
Probably I shall.
Mother does.
I like it.
She did.
A few.
Perhaps.
As a rule.
You're welcome.
It was nothing.
What?
When?
How?
Which?
Who?
Where?
Why, may I ask? -How old are you? Who should I write to?
What time do you want me to come? Who gave it to me? By what day?
He is a writer.
Your train goes from King's Cross station.
The train leaves at two.
The pen is in that box.
Someone wants you on the phone.
He wasn't there.
There's a concert this evening at the club,
I can't go there.
I'm making a new dress.
We haven't been to the club for ages.
I'm sure it's the plug.
We're going to be late, I'm afraid.
I've entered this Institute.
I wasn't lucky at the exams.
She has some palatalization of the sound
[ml in the word "milk".
Everybody is present today.
[Photographer to sitter.)
What shall we do to improve our English?
(Sister to small brother who is overexcited.)
(Mother to child.)
(Father to son who is learning to drive a car.) (Girl to her small
sister who is teasing a cat.) John says he can't come. We'll be there by seven.
Something has gone wrong with my electric iron. Can you put it right? Here you
are.
Ann, please bring some more milk from
the kitchen.
Your book, Mary.
Good morning, Tom,
I've passed this exam.
He is seriously ill.
I can't see it from behind you.
Hallo, Jane.
He is what?
From which station?
At what time?
In what box?
Who is it?
Where was he then?
Is there?
Can't you?
Are you?
Haven't we?
Is it?
Are we?
Have you?
Weren't you?
Has she?
Really?
Still.
Read.
Careful.
Careful.
Slowly.
Gently.
Oh! (Why not?)
Well!
Of course!
Thanks! Right!
Thank you!
Morning!
Wonderful!
Pity!
Pardon!
Hallo!
8. Pronounce the drill sentences with Intonation Pattern I. Observe the difference in
attitude.
9. Your teacher will suggest a verbal context. You in turn respond* to it using
Intonation Pattern III. The drill will continue until every studMt has participated.
Keep the exercise moving rapidly.
Reference material for the teacher.
M o d e l : Pm well now. ,Are
you?
1. She is at home. 2. It's already six. 3.1 can come at nine. 4. She is leaving
tomorrow. 5. Tom is coming on Saturday. 6. Jane is at home. 7. I've got "good" in
English. 8. I'm going now. 9.1 must leave you. 10. I've no mistakes. 11. My
brother is a doctor. 12. I'm already twenty. 13. I see him very often. 14. She is
waiting for you. 15. Helen is ill, 16. I don't like this book. 17. She is from the
Crimea. 18.1 can't help you. 19. You have too many mistakes. 20. I can't switch
on the cassette-recorder.
10. Your teacher will suggest a verbal context. You in turn respond by using: a)
statements, sounding non-final, encouraging further conversation or reserving some
judgement; b) special questions, sounding wondering or mildly puzzled; c) general
questions, sounding disapproving or sceptical; d) imperatives, calmly warning,
soothing; e) exclamations, encouraging further conversations, expressing calm, casual
acknowledgement or reserving some judgement.
11. Make up a micro-dialogue. Your fellow-student will suggest a verbal context.
Respond by using Intonation Patterns I, II, 111. Continue the talk.
12. "*1 Listen carefully to the following sentences and repeat them in the intervals.
Observe quick pronunciation of unstressed syllables:
I didn't believe it was true.
I'm perfectly certain you're
right.
I didn't think it was true.
I'm almost certain you're
right.
I don't think it was true.
I'm quite certain you're right.
What a sensible piece of advice. He's the happiest man in the
world.
What a useful piece of advice. He's the nicest man in the
world.
What a wise piece of advice.
He's the best man in the
world.
1 Material for exercises marked with three asterisks is borrowed from the book
"Lingaphone English Course". L., 1960.
13."* This exercise is meant to develop your ability to hear the intonation and
reproduce it in proper speech situations, a) Listen to the dialogue "Days and Months.
Asking the Time" sentence by sentence. Write it down. Mark the stresses and tunes.
Practise the dialogue, b) Record your reading, play the recording back immediately
for your teacher and fellow-students to detect the errors in your pronunciation.
Practise the dialogue for test reading and memorize it.
Section Four
Intonation Pattern IV
(LOW PRE-HEAD + ) DESCENDING HEAD 4- LOW RISE (-f TAIL)
—
M o d e l 1: Alice is leaving.
V Does she "want to 'go to the ,Park?
M o d e l 2: That's all you were going to buy, isn't it? — Pve Vonly 'got to 'buy
something for , supper.
(LOW PRE-HEAD + ) HIGH LEVEL HEAD + LOW RISE ( + TAIL)
M o d e l : Don't be so slow. — I'll ™> try to be ,quicker.
— t«
• ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________•
This intonation pattern is used:
l . I n s t a t e m e n t s , not categoric, non-final, soothing, reassuring, (in
echoes) questioning, sometimes surprised.
e. g. Pve made a lot of mistakes It's -»not so ,bad.
in my dictation, haven't I?
He's already left.
Al-> ready ,Ieft.
2. In questions:
a) I n s p e c i a l q u e s t i o n s , expressing sympathy, interest; with
the nuclear tone on the interrogative word, puzzled.
e g. I'm leaving tomorrow. -»What, time are you leaving? I've just seen
him in the You've -»seen him , where?
dean's office.
I've lost the key, mother. VHow did you 'manage to 'do
,that?
b) I n g e n e r a l q u e s t i o n s , expressing interest (most common
pattern for general questions).
e. g, I've packed the things. VAre you 'ready to ,leave?
3. I n i m p e r a t i v e s , soothing, encouraging, calmly patronising (often
addressed to children).
e. g. What shall I do?
-»Don't , worry.
I'm leaving.
V Put 'on your 'warm ,clothes.
4. I n e x c l a m a t i o n s , encouraging, airy, often used in leave-takings
and in bright and friendly greetings.
e. g. Here is my translation. Wery 'well ,done!
Anything else?
-* No, ,thank you!
Good morning.
-»Good /morning!
EXERCISES
(LOW PRE-HEAD + ) FALLING HEAD + LOW RISE ( + TAIL)
M o d e l V Does she 'want to 'go to the ,Park?
■ —1 > j
1. a) Listen carefully to the following conversational situations. Concentrate your
attention on the intonation of the reply:
Shall I buy the TV-set?
The furniture is new but not
quite modern.
I'd like to have a bite.
Benny is eager to have a rabbit.
It took me four hours to do the exercises.
Henry Sandford is my brother-in-law.
You are going to the post.
Shall I read the words?
I've arranged your lecture for tomorrow.
S t a t e m e n t s
(not categoric, non-final, soothing, reassuring)
If you don't find it too expensive.
It doesn't matter all that much.
Perhaps we'll go to a restaurant for a cup of coffee.
S p e c i a l q u e s t i o n s
(sympathetically interested, puzzled)
Where do you intend to keep the animal?
It took you four hours to do what?
G e n e r a l q u e s t i o n s (interested)
Is your brother-in-law a doctor?
Have you any letters you'd like me to post?
I m p e r a t i v e s
(soothing, encouraging, calmly patronising)
Be careful to pronounce distinctly the word "thirteen".
E x c l a m a t i o n s (encouraging, airy, friendly)
Terribly sorry for giving you all that trouble.
b) Listen to the replies and repeat them in the intervals. Make the stressed and the
unstressed syllables of the head carry the pitch lower. When pronouncing the nucleus
make your voice rise from the lowest level to the medium one. Do not forget to blend
the words together, c) Listen to the verbal context and reply in the intervals. /
(LOW PRE-HEAD + ) STEPPING HEAD + LOW RISE ( + TAIL) I »
2. a)* Listen carefully to the following conversational situations. Concentrate your
attention on the intonation of the reply:
Verbal Context Drill
S t a t e m e n t s
(not categoric, non-fine^ soothing, reassuring)
Tell me, doctor. Is he badly hurt? Nothing at all serious.
Just a few bruises.
I don't think I'll ever do it.
You will. It's iust a matter of
practice.
S p e c i a l q u e s t i o n s (sympathetically interested)
Stevens is going to retire. I'm
afraid they've gone out.
Who do you think will take over from him? How soon will they be back?
G e n e r a l q u e s t i o n s (interested)
Can I come too?
I'm going to do some shopping.
I m p e r a t i v e s
(soothing, encouraging, calmly patronising)
I really must be off.
I'm just going.
Don't let me detain you, then.
Have a good time.
E x c l a m a t i o n s (encouraging, airy, friendly)
Good-bye, Mr. Smith.
Pleasant and interesting jour-
ney.
At last I've got it right.
Well done.
b) Listen to the replies and repeat them in the intervals. Make the stressed syllables of the
head carry the pitch lower. The unstressed syllables should be pronounced on the level of the
preceding stressed syllable, c) Listen to the verbal context and reply in the intervals.
(LOW PRE-HEAD 4- ) HIGH HEAD + LOW RISE (4- TAIL)
M o d e l * Г11 try to be .quicker.
3. a)* Listen carefully to the following conversational situations. Concentrate your
attention on the intonation of the reply:
Verbal Context
Drill
I hate climbing ladders.
I must pay you what I owe you.
I've told Andy about the meeting.
Don't make up your mind now. Think about it again.
He is sitting on the carver. Alice is on the phone.
S t a t e m e n t s
(not categoric, non-final, soothing, reassuring)
It's all right. You won't fall. There's no hurry. Whenever it's convenient. So
that he won't forget. (Drop him a line to confirm it.) Since you insist.
S p e c i a l q u e s t i o n s
(sympathetically interested, puzzled)
He's sitting on the what? Who does she want to speak to?
Here's my new hat.
I just can't quite manage it.
I'm just going.
What a nuisance it all is.
Am I disturbing you?
Have a good holiday. I'll be back later.
You've got the wrong number. More tea?
My name's Lumpkin.
G e n e r a l q u e s t i o n ^ (interested)
May I try it on?
I m p e r a t i v e s
(soothing, encouraging, calmly patronising)
Well, keep trying. Have a good time. Don't worry.
(It's not for much longer.)
No, sit down.
No, come in.
No, but shut the door.
E x c l a m a t i o n s (encouraging, airy, friendly)
And you.
Good-bye for the present.
See you, then.
Sorry you've been troubled.
No thanks.
No, thank you.
I beg your pardon. (Would
you mind saying that again?)
b) Listen to the replies and repeat them in the intervals. There is only one strongly
stressed syllable in Model 3. The unstressed syllables should be pronounced on the level of
the preceding stressed syllable. Do not forget to blend the words together, c) Listen to the
verbal context and reply in the intervals.
4. In order to fix Intonation Pattern IV in your mind, ear and speech habits repeat the
replies yourself until they sound perfectly natural to you. See that your Russian pronunciation
habits do not interfere.
5. Listen to your fellow-student reading the replies given above. Tell him what his errors
in the intonation are.
6. Listen to your teacher reading the verbal context below. Reply using one of the drill
sentences. Pronounce it with Intonation Pattern IV. Say what attitude you mean to render:
Are you quite well prepared for your exam?
Shall we write a dictation tomorrow?
I'll give a talk on Cronin. Kitty, why are you so slow? When shall we start?
Are you ready to go? He is leaving for London. I don't think I'll speak to him
today.
Look at this dictation. My pen won't write. I am so tired. I can't do it alone.
Oh dear, oh dear! Who am I talking to? What's our home task? I'm going to
the stadium.
Wait a little. I'll put on my coat.
My friend is a teacher.
I'm going to a dance tonight.
The cake tastes good.
Hope to see you some day.
Something has gone wrong with
the electric iron.
I'm sorry but 1 can't go to the
cinema with you.
I never smoke in the morning.
Our garden is not so beautiful
as yours.
I've just come from Paris.
I am from Poland.
I'll go to the country today.
I can't do it.
Not quite. I believe so.
Since you are fond of him. I'm not slow. Any time that suits you. I shan't be a
moment. Leaving for London? Why not?
Whose is it?
What's wrong with it?
Why don't you have a rest?
Why don't you ask your
friend to help you?
What's the matter?
Who are you talking to?
What's your home task?
Do you have time to go in
for sports?
Do you think it's cold today? Are you a teacher also? Do you like dancing?
Will you have some more? Will you invite me to your evening party? Can you
put it right?
Are you very busy today?
Does your wife smoke? Have you any flowers in it?
Is Paris as large as London? Do you live in Warsaw? Don't be silly. The frost
is severe.
Try it again.
It's so hot here.
I am going for a walk.
I am cold.
Open the window. Don't be long. Shut the door.
A button has come off my coat.
Sew it on.
There is a new film this evening
Let's go and see it.
at the club.
I can't hear what you are saying.
Switch off the radio then.
What a frightful storm. I'll start in half an hour. I'm just going. Have a good
holiday. I'll take my exam tomorrow. More tea?
I'll see you on Sunday.
Don't be afraid. Don't be late. Have a nice time. And you!
Good luck, my boy! No, thank you. Right you are!
7. Say the same replies with Intonation Pattern II. Observe the difference in
attitude.
8. Your teacher will suggest a verbal context. You in turn reply to it using Intonation
Pattern IV. The drill will continue until every student has participated. Keep the
exercise moving on rapidly.
M o d e l : My sister plays the piano very well.
V Does your 'brother 'play the 'piano too?
Wait a little. I'll lake my umbrella. -*Is it /raining?
1. I've bought a new English book. 2. My friend is a student. 3. Something
has gone wrong with my pen. 4. I am hungry. 5. My brother has a new flat. 6. I'd
like to go to the Crimea next summer. 7. My mother is French. 8. I am fond of
tennis. 9. I've just come from St.Petersburg. 10. I can't translate this article alone.
11.1 don't think I'll finish this work today. 12.1 am thirsty 13. I am going to do
the room. 14. I don't think she can speak English.
9. Translate into English. Use Intonation Pattern IV in the replies:
1. Мы купили пианино. — Оно в моей комнате? 2. У меня есть очень интересная
английская книга. — Можно мне взглянуть на нее? 3. Я очень хочу пить. — Принести
тебе чаю? 4. Моя мать — учительница. — Твой отец тойсе учитель? 5. Я не могу
сделать это упражнение. — Помочь тебе? 6. Мой брат полупил новую квартиру. — Он
собирается покупать новую мебель?
10. Your teacher will suggest a verbal context. You in turn respond
by using: a) statements, sounding not categoric, soothing, reassuring;
b) special questions, expressing sympathy, interest, general questions, ex-
pressing interest; c) imperatives, soothing, encouraging, calmly patronising;
d> exclamations, encouraging, airy, friendly.
11. '* Listen to the dialogue "Guessing Game". Mark the stresses and
tunes. Practise and memorize it:
Is it in this room?
Yes.
Can I see it?
Yes.
Is it made of metal?
No.
Is it made of wood?
Yes.
Could I carry it?
No.
Is it useful?
Yes.
Has it got legs?
Yes.
Is it the chair?
No.
Is it the table?
Yes.
12.
Make up your own guessing game.
13. " Listen to the dialogues. Write them down. Mark the stresses and
pines. Practise and memorize them.
\ 14. Read the following sentences. Observe correct pronunciation of fhythmic
groups:
1. John came last night. 2. Don't do that here. 3. What nice soft gloves. 4.
John's away on business. 5. Thank you for the letter. 6. They went for a walk in
the Park. 7. At the bottom of Kensington Road. 8. At the bottom of Kenton Road.
9. At the bottom of Kent Road. 10. It wasn't so nice as before. 11. It wasn't so
nice before. 12. It wasn't so nice then. 13. Come and see him off. 14. Don't be so
impatient. 15. He always keeps me waiting. 16. It's the only time I'm free. 17.
Would you mind passing the sugar? 18. Can you be here at eleven? 19. She's
rather an impetuous woman. 20. Everyone else was on holiday. 21. How on earth
can you manage to finish so quickly? 22. I sent them a photo of the children, 23.
I should think it would be better to wait till tomorrow. 24. He realized that the
bus wasn't going to stop for him.
15.*** This exercise is meant to develop your ability to hear and reproduce
intonation, a ) Listen to the text "Our Sitting-Room" sentence by sentence. Write it
down. Mark the stresses and tunes. Practise the text, b) Record your reading. Play the
recording back immediately for your teacher to detect the errors. Practise the text for
test reading, c) Describe any picture in the same manner.
16."** Read the text silently to make sure you understand each sentence. Split up each
sentence into intonation-groups if necessary. Underline the communicative centre and the
nuclear word in each phrase. Mark the stresses and tunes. It is not expected that each student
of the class will mark the text in exactly the same way. Your teacher will help all the
members of the class to correct their variants. Finally practise reading your corrected variant:
When you enter our sitting-room, the first thing you notice is the large
window opposite the door. On the left is an armchair with a small table by it. On
the table are some books and an electric table-lamp. There are two other
armchairs in the room and a settee.
"Aren't there any small chairs?"
"Only one, which is next to the radio-set, opposite the window. I have also a
small cassette-recorder, which I keep in my bedroom."
"Have you many cassettes?"
"Quite a lot... The mantelpiece is on the right pf the window and next to it is a
bookcase." "Do you read a lot?"
"Yes, everybody in our family likes reading. There are books in every room."
"What else is there in the room?"
"Nothing else. We don't like a lot of things in our room."
Section Five
I. Accidental Rise
M o d e l : VTom 'Brown is the f best 'pupil in vclass.
If the speaker wants to make one word of the descending head more
prominent than the others he pronounces it a little higher than the preceding
syllables thus breaking their descending succession. This non-final rise is called
a c c i d e n t a l . It never occurs on the first stressed syllable as this syllable is
always the highest in the descending head.
EXERCISES
1. Listen carefully to the following sentences. Concentrate your attention on
Accidental Rise:
1. In spring Nature awakens from her long winter sleep.
2. The trees are filled with new life. 3. The earth is warmed by
the rays of the sun. 4. The weather gets gradually milder. 5. The
fields and the meadows are covered with fresh green grass.
6. The woods and forests are filled with the songs of the birds.
7. When winter comes, we're obliged to spend more time indoors. 8. There's a
bus stop just over there. 9. Then he has to take great care of the young animals.
10. I should say that football is one of the most popular sports in Great Britain.
11. He sat thinking of his own children. 12. The scientist is known all over the
world. 13. Mary's umbrella is quite spoilt. 14. Ann was wearing a charming blue
hat.
2. Listen to the same sentences and repeat them in the intervals. Make your voice go
up a little on the word you want to make more prominent. Follow the intonation line
exactly.
3. In order to fix the intonation of sentences with Accidental Rise in your mind, ear
and speech habits repeat the sentences yourself until they sound perfectly natural to
you.
4. Read the following sentences using Accidental Rise on the words in bold type. Do
not forget to blend the words together:
1. I suppose it couldn't possibly happen again. 2. I'm sorry I couldn't quite
make out what you were saying. 3. My husband often does the washing up for
me. 4. We went for a day's walk in the forest in spite of the rain. 5. I'm reading a
most interesting book by a new writer just now. 6. You have not given me a
satisfactory explanation of your strange behaviour. 7. We hope to move into our
new house before the month is out. 8. George plays football every Saturday
afternoon. 9. I have an English lesson every day. 10. I haven't seen her for a long
time. 11. The doctor says she must stay in bed for two or three days. 12. Tom
Brown is the best pupil in his class.
II. Sequence of Tones Alternative Questions
M o d e l :
Has she a , niece | or a x nephew?
Alternative questions have the low-rising nuclear tone in the first intonation-
group and the low-falling nuclear tone in the final intonation-group. The fall and
the rise are of narrow range here.
EXERCISES
5. Listen carefully to the alternative questions. Concentrate your attention on the nuclear
tones of both intonation-groups:
1. Are the bedrooms on the ground floor or on the first floor? 2. Is the
furniture in his house modern or old? 3. Do the members of Dr. White's family
read the Times or The Worker? 4. Is it a large house or a small one? 5. Do you
prefer tea or coffee? 6. Is your wife a housewife or does she work? 7. Shall I go
on or stop here? 8. Does the dress fit you or do you want a larger one? 9. Have
you a son or a daughter? 10. Do you study French or English?
6. Listen to the same sentences and repeat them in the intervals. Follow the intonation
line of the model exactly.
7. In order to fix the intonation of alternative questions in your mind, ear and speech
habits repeat the sentences yourself until they sound perfectly natural to you. Listen to your
fellow-student reading the alternative questions. Tell him what his errors in the intonation are.
6. Complete the following sentences using the words in brackets:
1. Do you usually have dinner at home ...? (at the canteen) 2. Do you get up
at six ...? (at seven o'clock) 3. Will you have clear soup ...? (cabbage soup) 4.
How do you like your tea strong ...? (weak) 5. Do you do your morning exercises
in the room ...? (the garden) 6. Does she study French ...? (English) 7. Do you
usually have breakfast at eight ...? (nine) 8. Do you , usually sit up late ...? (go to
bed early) 9. Did it take you half an hour ...? (a quarter of an hour to get there)
10. Did you lay the table for 6 ...? (for 12 persons) 11. Did you take your exam in
English on the 15th ...? (on the 17th of January) 12. Will you
lave black ...? (white coffee).
9. Make up alternative questions using the following sentences.
VI о d e 1: She is twenty. She is twenty-five.
-* Is she /twenty | or 'twenty-xfive?
1. He lives in a new house. He lives in an old house. 2. Your :hildren have
milk in the morning. Your children have coffee in ;he morning. 3. He will have
black coffee. He will have white :offee. 4. They spend Sundays in town. They
spend Sundays in he country. 5. It is warm today. It is cold today. 6. She will go
to :he Caucasus next summer. She will go to the Crimea next summer. 7. Your
friend speaks English. Your friend speaks Spanish. 8. Her nephew lives in
Moscow. Her nephew lives in St.Petersburg.
10. Translate the following sentences:
1. Ваш друг живет в общежитии или с родителями? 2. Он уехал 5 Санкт-
Петербург или в Киев? 3. Он занимается в гимнастическом зале или ходит
на стадион? 4. Вы делали доклад в понедельник зли во вторник? 5. Вы
обедаете в столовой или дома? 6. Вы готовите свои домашние задания дома
или в библиотеке? 7. Вы принимаете ванну вечером или утром? 8. Вы
предпочитаете теплый или холодный душ? 9. Вы вчера ходили в театр или в
кино? 10. У вас (Осодит полчаса или четверть часа на то, чтобы добраться
до института? 11. Какой предмет вы больше любите, физику или
математику? 12. Вы будете пить чай или кофе, миссис Браун? 13. Вы будете
гить черный кофе или кофе с молоком?
11. Make up a dialogue using alternative questions. See that your
Russian pronnnciation habits do not interfere.
Disjunctive Questions
M o d e l s : You've vmet her, | ,haven't you?
You've xmet her, | xhaven4 you?
Disjunctive questions consist of two intonation-groups. The Sequence of
tones in disjunctive questions depends on the atti-:ude of the speaker towards the
significance of the utterance.
The first intonation-group has generally the low-falling nuclear tone. The
low-rising nuclear tone of the final intonation-group, or tag, shows that the
speaker is not certain of the facts expressed in the first part of the question. An
answer is expected.
е. д. I rang you up yesterday. You were -> meeting your vwife, j ,weren4
you? — Yes, I was.
The low-falling nuclear tone of the tag shows that the speaker is certain of the
facts expressed in the first part of the question. No answer is expected.
е. д. I saw you at the station. You were -> meeting your xwife, I ^weren't
you? She looked so young and happy.
EXERCISES
>
12. a) Listen carefully to the following conversational situations. Concentrate your
attention on the intonation of the replies:
Verbal Context
What a very nice house!
I rather like Mary.
James has quite a lot of talent.
And how do you like our weather?
You've broken the nail on this
finger rather badly.
You mustn't rely on this clock. We told him about your success. Arthur's
coming home today. But they only got blue or green. Peggy wants to stay at
home.
Drill
Yes, isn't it?
Very pleasant, isn't she? Yes, hasn't he? It's very changeable, isn't it? Yes, I
have, haven't I? Be careful with my right thumb, it's a bit painful. It gains,
doesn't it? He was surprised, wasn't he? He's due here at ten, isn't he? Blue's all
right, isn't it? That doesn't matter, does it?
b) Listen to the replies and repeat them in the intervals.
13.
Listen to the verbal context and reply in the intervals.
14. In order to fix the intonation of disjunctive questions in your mind,
ear and speech habits repeat the replies yourself until they sound perfectly
natural to you.
15. Listen to a fellow-student reading the replies. Tell him what his pors in intonation
are. I 16. Read the drill sentences according to the given models. Observe the pfference
in meaning.
M o d e l s : The -»text is xeasy, | /isn't it?
The -»text is veasy, j visn4 it?
1. She is better today, isn't she? 2. There is a lawn in front of pur house, isn't
there? 3. There are many new houses in your street, aren't there? 4. The New
Year is the most favourite holiday in our country, isn't it? 5. Great Britain is an
island, isn't it? 6. The Alps are higl>^r than the Urals, aren't they? 7. The
Mississippi is the longest river in the world, isn't it? 8. You don't speak
Hungarian, do you? 9. You don't take beer, do you? 10. You can't speak German
yet, can you? 11. You have learned this poem by heart, haven't you? 12. You are
fond of skating, aren't you? 1 3 . We must pay right now, mustn't we? 1 4 . They
shouldn't be late, should they? 15. She can understand nearly everything, can't
she? 16. It's my turn, isn't it?
17. Read the following conversational situations according to the models, suggested for
replies. Concentrate your attention on the intonation of the replies. Say what meaning is
rendered by them.
M o d e l 1: It's vhorrid, | visn't it?
Verbal Context
If only the day had been warmer. The work will never be ready in time.
Where could we get the book? It's a seat in the gallery.
Mary's broken the ski-jumping record.
It looks like rain.
What a delightful family the
jSmiths are!
Where did you meet him then?
Drill
Very cold, wasn't it? Never, will it?
It's very difficult, isn't it? She won't be able to see, will she?
Marvellous ski-jumper, isn't she?
It does, doesn't it?
They're so friendly, aren't
they?
In High Street, didn't we, John?
They thought we'd missed our chance.
What a boring evening!
None of us wants to go.
He rarely goes to the club these days.
You can't do it like that.
The parcel hasn't come.
So you've finished.
It wasn't his fault this time.
M o d e l 2: It's x horrid, | , isn't
What's happened to Mable? I've just been talking to Mary.
No, I didn't go to the cinema
with them.
Whose turn is it?
Peggy wants to stay at home.
Oh, all right. I'll get it for you.
Why've you brought me that
spoon?
Oh, do let's get out of here.
You can write to him at Warwick Street.
I may be late tonight.
Send that wretched boy to me at once.
Hullo, Jean. You are early.
They were quite mistaken, weren't they?
Jack's no sense of humovjff,
has he?
Someone will have to go, won't they?
He used to enjoy it so, didn't he?
Then I must try some other
way, mustn't I?
We'd better enquire at the
station, hadn't we?
Now it's your turn, isn't it?
But he should drive more
slowly anyway, shouldn't he?
it?
She wasn't invited, was shei She wasn't very helpful, was she?
You'd seen the film already, hadn't you? Mine, isn't it?
That doesn't matter, does it? You don't mind, do you? It's the one you asked
for, isn't it?
You're surely not frightened, are you?
That's not his home address, is it?
But you'll be home in time for dinner, won't you? You're not going to be hard
on him, are you? I'm not too early, am I?
18.
Complete the following sentences making them disjunctive questions. The
speaker is not certain of the fact expressed in the first part of the sentence. An answer is
expected. Concentrate your attention on the intonation of the tag:
1. You aren't reading this book now, ...? 2. She doesn't like tomatoes, ...? 3.
He lives in Kiev, ...? 4. They usually have dinner at one o'clock, ...? 5. You like
both pears and apples, ...? 6. He never uses pepper, ...? 7. It's high time to have a
bite, ...? 9. Going out in such weather is out of the question, ...? 9. She is leaving
for St.Petersburg, ...? 10. She can get rid of her mistakes, ...? 11. You finished
school two years ago, ...? 12. You have passed your exams, ...? 13. You've got a
letter, ...? 14. She hasn't finished school yet, ...?
19.
Complete the same sentences. You are certain of the fact expressed in the first
part of the sentence. No answer is expected. Observe the difference in the intonation of
the tag.
20.
Look throngh the exercise carefully. Mark the stresses and tunes. Read the
tags of the disjunctive questions with the intonation suggested by the conversational
situation:
The exams are over at last. Lovely party, wasn't it?
They have bought three copies.
This text is very difficult to
understand, isn't it?
What about another sandwich?
You see no mistakes in this paper, do you? It's so fine to see them again, isn't
it?
She is better today, isn't she?
Your sister is younger than you, isn't she?
You are not very well, are you?
You haven't got this record, have you?
It was difficult, wasn't it?
It was very nice to see them
all again.
We don't want so many, do we?
Not at all, It's very easy.
No, thank you, I've had enough, haven't I? Yes. I do, but not many.
Oh, yes. It is.
I'm afraid not. The temperature is still high. Oh, yes, she is.
Yes, I am. I'm much better now.
Yes, I have.
You lived on the ground floor, didn't you?
You were in England, weren't you?
The play was wonderful
You like these books, don't you?
You are thirsty, aren't you?
Yes.
No, I wasn't.
You like it, don't you?
Shall we ask how much they
are?
I'd rather have a glass of mineral water.
21." Listen to the following dialogue. Mark the stresses and tunes. Practise and
memorize it:
A: What a lovely day, isn't it?
B: Yes, it is,
A: How blue the sky looks, doesn't it?
B: Yes, it does.
A: What a lot of people, aren't there?
B: Yes, there are.
A: You're on holiday, aren't you?
B: Yes, I am.
A: It's a long one, isn't it?
B: Yes, it is.
A: You don't talk very much, do you?
B: No, I don't. You ask a lot of questions, don't you?
A: Yes, I do.
22. ** Listen to the dialogue. Practise and memorize it.
22.
Make up short dialogues with disjunctive questions.
22.
This exercise is meant to develop your ability to reproduce the text with correct
rhythm. Listen to the text. Split the text into intonation and rhythmic groups. Observe
correct pronunciation of rhythmic groups. Practise the exercise:
The weather in England can change very quickly. One day last week I went
for a walk in the country. When I started early in the morning the weather was
beautiful. The sun was shining, the sky was blue and there were no clouds at all.
In the middle of the morning a sudden change came. A cool wind started to blow,
black clouds covered the sun and in a very short time it started to rain heavily.
There were no houses in sight and I had no coat with me. So I got very wet
indeed and very cold too.
After about an hour I managed to catch a bus which took me home. But when
I arrived I was shivering and sneezing. And I've had a cold ever since. I ought to
have taken my coat. We sometimes say that England is the only country where
you can have four seasons in one day.
Section Six
I. Intonation Pattern V
(LOW PRE-HEAD + ) (DESCENDING HEAD + ) MID-LEVEL (4- TAIL)
Model: I think I saw you yesterday afternoon.
> Yesterday | I -* stayed vin ,all ,day.
I ' \
_____I________LiLfi___
Stress-and-tone marks in the text: Mid-Level Tone: | > |.
The mid-level tone in the nucleus is pronounced on the medium level with
any following tail syllables on the same level.
This intonation pattern is usually used in non-final intonation-groups
expressing non-finality without any impression of expectancy.
EXERCISES
1. a)* Listen carefully to the following conversational situations. Concentrate your
attention on the intonation of the non-final intonation-groups of the reply:
Verbal Context Drill
Let's hope so.
Hope that's all you can do.
How's Tim behaving?
Recently he's been very con-
siderate.
I'll give him a piece of my mind. I hope you'll do no such
thing.
Jane's forgotten her umbrella. Yes, she left it in such a hurry-
Fancy Max apologising!
But I get so air-sick.
Invite him again in January.
I'm not very interested.
Well, what time then?
He promised it for July.
It'll be difficult, you know.
When do you want me? Won't forty be enough?
He apologised because he
jolly well had to.
In that case, why not go by
train?
But in January, where will he be?
If that's how you feel, why bother about it? Shall we say ten or ten thirty?
July, well, that'll be soon enough, do you think? But do you consider it worth
trying?
If you can, come right away. To be on the safe side, take one or two more.
b) Listen carefully to the replies and repeat them in the intervals. Pronounce the
nucleus and the tail of the non-final intonation-group on the same medium level of
your voice, c) Listen to the verbal context and reply in the interval.
2. In order to fix Intonation Pattern V in your mind, ear and speech habits repeat
the replies yourself until they sound perfectly natural to you.
3. Listen to a fellow-student reading the replies. Tell him what his errors in
intonation are.
4. Your teacher will suggest a verbal context. You in turn respond to it by using
mid-level nuclear tone in the non-final intonation-groups:
Verbal Context
Where is his son now? Couldn't you help him? What about Saturday?
And how's the skirt?
I won't be free for another ten minutes, I'm afraid. Am I mistaken?
Drill
Frankly, I don't know.
At present I'm too busy.
On Saturday we'll go to the
country.
For my taste cut it a bit longer.
In the meantime I'll look through the papers. You are. In future try to be more
careful.
Shall I call on you on Sunday?
So you are expecting Johnson.
-low many books would you ike?
Nhen would you like me to :ome?
Alhai did Tom say? Nhy not speak to him? \ny suggestions, Peter?
Will you have an ice-cream?
Why do you play tennis? How often do you play?
Did you meet the Nelsons
yesterday?
Why not buy a car?
I'm afraid I can't do it now.
What are you going to do then?
On Sunday I'll be glad to see you.
Yes, and when he arrives, show him in immediately. If possible, give me
three.
If you can, come right away.
Naturally, he was delighted. Frankly, I'm in two minds. If necessary, I'll let
him know.
Ice-cream I can have at any hour of the day. I play to keep fit. Generally, at
least once a week.
Yesterday I stayed in all day.
Frankly, I can't afford to.
In that case shall I have a
try?
Well, I don't know.
5. Pronounce the drill sentences with the low-rising tone in the non-final intonation-
groups.
II. Sequence of Tones
The Simple Sentence. Intonation of Adverbials.
M o d e l : /Generally. | I Vcome 'home xearly.
> Generally. | I V come 'home vearly. He is at vhome on Sunday.
Simple, sentences with adverbial phrases at the beginning are usually divided
into two intonation-groups.
The non-final intonation-group is usually pronounced with the low-rising or
mid-level tone.
e. g. At ~» two o'clock | we shall have xdinner. At -* two o'>
clock I we shall have ^dinner.
Adverbial phrases at the end of sentences do not form separate intonation-
groups, as a rule, and often remain unstressed.
e. g. We are -* going xout tonight.
EXERCISES
6. Listen carefully to the following sentences, repeat them in the intervals.
Concentrate your attention on the intonation of the adverbials. Observe the sequence of
tones. Repeat the sentences in the intervals:
1. In the dining-room we have our meals. 2. On the sideboard the Browns
usually have a bowl of fruit. 3. In front of the host there's a carving-knife and a
fork. 4. On the left of each person is a table-napkin and a plate with a roll on it.
5. Next to the piano is a tall bookcase standing against the window. 6. On the left
is a large window. 7. Under the window there's a radiator. 8. On the settee there
are two cushions. 9. On the ground floor there's the dining-room, the lounge or
sitting-room, the kitchen and the hall. 10. In the hall we see a stand for hats,
coats and umbrellas. 11. On this floor there are four bedrooms, a bathroom and a
lavatory. 12. On the top of the roof there are three chimneys. 13. In front of the
house we have a small garden. 14. At the back of the house there's a much larger
class="book">garden with a lawn and some fruit-trees. 15. At the side of the house is a garage
where 1 keep my car. 16. On the dressing table, in front of the looking-glass,
you'll see a hair-brush and a comb, a hand-mirror, a bottle of scent and a powder-
box. 17. In the wardrobe I keep my suits and other clothes, which I hang on coat
hangers. 18. On each side of the fireplace there's an armchair. 19. In the centre of
the mantelpiece there's a clock and above it an oval mirror. 20. On the right you
can see a standard lamp. 21. By the table there's a small chair. 22. On the
extreme right there's a radio-set. 23. After this there'll be fish, meat or poultry
with vegetables, then a sweet and perhaps cheese and biscuits to finish with. 24.
Once or twice a week we go to a theatre or to the pictures. 25. A few minutes
later we hear a ring at the door. 26. At night when I feel tired and sleepy I go up
to my bedroom and switch on the electric light. 27. After a few minutes I fall
asleep. 28. Punctually at seven thirty in the morning, the alarm-clock rings
and wakes me up.
7. Repeat the sentences yourself until they sound perfectly natural to you. Do not
let your Russian pronunciation habits interfere.
8. a) Read the sentences according to the given models. Observe the sequence of
tones: first Mid-Level + Low Fall, then Low Rise + Low Fall, b) Listen to a fellow-
student reading the sentences. Tell him what his errors in intonation are.
Model: On > Sunday | we shall be at xhome. Cn 7 Sunday I
we shall be at xhome.
1. On Tuesday we have six lessons. 2. On Friday they have grammar. 3. On
Saturday we go to the concert. 4. On Sunday we have dinner at home. 5. On the
1st of May we have a holiday. 6. On the 26th of October I leave for the Urals. 7.
On the 18th of November we have a test. 8. On the 9th of May we have no
classes. 9. At 4 o'clock he is at home. 10. At half past 7 I get up. 11. At 11 o'clock
I am in bed. 12. At a quarter to 8 I do my morning exercises. 13. In front of the
window there is a flowerbed. 14. On the ground floor there is a library. 15. On
the first floor there are bedrooms. 16. For the present he is not here. 17. In
January we have our exams. 18. At the club we usually meet our friends. 19. At
our faculty there is a good language laboratory. 20. In September we begin our
studies. 21. At our University there is a good drama circle.
9. Change the word order in the following sentences according to 'the model. Pay
attention to the intonation of the adverbials.
;M о d e 1: He is at the vhospital on Monday.
'■•
On 7Monday j he is at the xhospital.
1. We have our meals in the dining-room. 2. The Browns usually have a bowl
of fruit on the sideboard. 3. There's a carving-knife and fork in front of the host.
4. There is a tall bookcase next to the piano. 5. There is a large window on the
left. 6. There is a radiator under the window. 7. There are two cushions on the
settee. 8. We see a stand for hats, coats and umbrellas in the hall. 9. There are
three chimneys on the top of the roof. |0. There's an armchair on each side of the
fireplace. 11. You can lee a standard lamp on the right. 12. There's a small chair
by the table. 13. There's a radio-set on the extreme right. 14. We
go to the theatre or to the pictures once or twice a week. 15, We heard a ring
at the door a few minutes later. 16.1 fell asleep after a few minutes.
10.
Your teacher will suggest an adverbial phrase. You in turn give a complete
sentence beginning with the adverbial. Use the sequence of tones: Mid-Level + Low Fall,
then Low Rise + Low Fall. Keep the exercise moving on rapidly.
Reference material for the teacher:
On Monday .... On Tuesday .... On Saturday .... On Sunday .... In August.... In
September .... In November .... On the 9th of May ... . On the 1st of September ...
. In June ... . At four o'clock .... At half past seven .... At a quarter to 2 .... In the
morning .... In the afternoon ... .At night.... Yesterday .... For the present.... Once
or twice a week .... Punctually at seven .... A few minutes later .... On the ground
floor .... Upstairs .... Behind the house ... . On the sideboard ... . Next to the piano
... . Under the window .... On the settee .... In the hall ... . On the dressing table ...
. In the wardrobe ... . On the right ... . By the table .... Opposite the fireplace ....
As a rule .... As you come into the room.... After a few minutes .... At the club ....
At our faculty .... In front of the house .... In the dining-room .... In front of the
host.... On the left.... On this floor. .. On the top of the roof.... At the back of the
house .... In the chest of drawers .... In the centre of the mantelpiece....
11. Translate the following sentences:
1. Перед домом есть небольшой сад. 2. На первом этаже есть библиотека. 3. Справа
стоит большой диван. 4. В центре комнаты — стол. 5. Слева стоит пианино, два кресла
и торшер. 6. На стене две картины. 7 В классной комнате нет карты. 8. В воскресенье
мы встаем позже. 9. В четверг отец работает дома. 10. В субботу мы дома после двух.
11. В девять часов ребенок должен спать. 12. В семь часов мы ужинаем. 13. В
институте есть столовая. 14. В половине одиннадцатого я обычно ложусь спать. 15. В
половине восьмого я завтракаю. 16. Без четверти восемь я иду в институт. 17. Во
вторник у нас нет грамматики. 18. В январе у нас экзамены. 19. Перед окном клумба.
20. На втором этаже есть читальный зал. 21 В институте есть хорошая библиотека. 22.
В два часа они обычно обедают. 23. В зале много студентов. 24. В этой английской
книге много хороших иллюстраций. 25. На его столе много книг
26 На земле много снега. 27. На небе мало облаков. 28. На полях много
цветов
12.
Listen to the dialogue. Mark the stresses and tunes. Practise and memorize it:
E1 s a: Patrick, what do you all do every day?
P a t r i с k: Do you really want to know? Well, on Monday we begin our
work for the week. On Tuesday Mother usually cleans the kitchen. Then on
Wednesday we send our dirty clothes to the laundry; Mother doesn't wash them.
On Thursday my Father often brings his friends home to dinner. My club holds a
meeting once a week, usually on Friday. And on Saturday we all go to the
cinema.
13.
Make up a micro-dialogue of the same kind. Your fellow-student will suggest a
question. Respond using the proper sequence of tunes. Continue the talk.
14/** This exercise is meant to develop your ability to hear and reproduce
intonation, a) Listen to the text sentence by sentence. Mark the stresses and tunes.
Practise the text, b) Record your reading. Play the recording back immediately for your
teacher and fellow-students to detect the possible errors. Practise the text for test
reading.
The Browns' Dining-Room
In the dining-room we have our meals: breakfast in the morning, lunch in the
middle of the day, tea in the afternoon, and supper or dinner in the evening.
Here you see Mr. and Mrs. Thompson who've just arrived from abroad and
are having dinner with the Browns. The host, Mr. Brown, is sitting at the head of
the table, and the hostess, Mrs. Brown, is at the other end. Mr. and Mrs.
Thompson are sitting on either side, facing each other.
The dining-room table is covered with a white cloth. Mrs. Brown has laid the
table in the usual way, and has put the right number of knives, forks, spoons and
glasses for each person. There's also pepper and salt, oil and vinegar, and
mustard. On the left of each person is a table-napkin and a plate with a roll on it.
In front of the host there's a carving-knife and fork.
On the sideboard the Browns usually have a bowl of fruit: apples, pears,
plums, cherries, grapes, oranges or bananas, according to the season. The
mistress of the house has just served the soup. After this there'll be fish, meat or
poultry with
vegetables, then a sweet, and perhaps cheese and biscuits to finish with.
15. Mark the stresses and tunes. It is not expected that each member of the group
will mark the text in exactly the same way. Practise reading your corrected variant:
The flat is not large but it is comfortable. In it there are two rooms, a kitchen,
a bathroom, a lavatory and a small hall.
The sitting-room is through the door on the left. There is a piano in it. There
is a picture on the wall over the piano. It is a still-life. In the picture there is a
silver tea-pot, a silver dish with three oranges in it, and a vase of red roses. The
picture is by a famous woman artist. The sofa is by the wall opposite the door. It
is of a rich red colour. There is a small round table in front of the sofa. There are
two modern armchairs on both sides of. the large window. On the window there
are curtains of a very pretty colour. There is not a sideboard in this room, but
there is one in the kitchen.
The bedroom is not large. It is square. The walls are light pink. There is a
silvery grey carpet on the floor. The effect is very fine. There are two beds here
with bedside tables beside them. In the right-hand corner near the window there
is a dressing table with a large looking-glass and a round stool in front of it.
There are not many things*in the rooms.
16. "* This exercise is meant to develop your ability to hear and reproduce
intonation in proper speech situations, a) Listen to the dialogue sentence by sentence.
Mark the stresses and tunes. Practise the dialogue, b) Record the dialogue and listen to
your recording to detect the possible errors. Memorize the dialogue and dramatize it:
Afternoon Tea
"Good afternoon, Mrs. White, how are you?"
"Very well indeed, thank you, and how are you?"
"Quite well, thank you. Won't you sit down. Excuse me, please. I think that's
my niece at the door."
"Hallo, Betty, dear! I'm so cflad to see you. You do look well. I don't think
you've met each other before. Let me introduce you. This is my niece, Miss
Smith. Mrs. White, Mr. White."
"How do you do."
"How do you do."
"And now let's have some tea. How do you like your tea, Mrs. White, strong
or weak?"
"Not too strong, please, and one lump of sugar. I like my tea rather sweet, but
my husband prefers his without sugar."
"Well, what's the news, Mr. White? How's business?"
"Pretty good, thank you. And how are things with you ? "
"Well, not too good, I'm afraid, and going from bad to worse, [n fact, it'^ the
worst year we've had for a long time."
"I'm sorry to hear that. I hope things will soon improve."
"Yes, let's hope for the best. And how's your nephew Richard getting on?"
"Oh, he's getting on quite well, thank you. He's staying in :he country just
now with his Uncle William and his cousins."
"How long is he going to stay there?"
"I don't know exactly, but he's having a very pleasant time and it's doing him
a lot of good, so the longer he stays, the bet-:er."
c) Give a conversational context in which the following phrases co-jld be used:
1. Hello, Betty, dear! I'm so glad to meet you. 2. How do you do. 3. How are
you? 4. Quite well, thank you. 5. Pretty good, :hank you. 6. Excuse me, please. 7.
I'm so glad to see you. 3. Oh, he's getting on quite well, thank you. 9. Not too
good, I'm afraid. 10. Well, what's the news, (Tom)? 11. How are things (with
you) ? 12. No more, thank you. 13. I'm sorry to hear that.
17/** Read the dialogues. Mark the stresses and tunes. It is not expected that each
member of the group will intone the dialogues in exactly the same way. Practise reading
your corrected variant:
"Hello, John, I'm so glad you've come. How are you?" "Quite well, thank
you. How are you?" "Very well indeed, thank you. Have you met Mr. and Mrs.
Black? They are staying with us for the week-end." "Oh, yes, we know each
other quite well." "That's good. And now this is Mary with the tea, I think.
Yes, it is. Thank you, Mary. John, you can pass the tea round Do you have
sugar in your tea, Mrs. Black?"
"Just a little, please, but no milk."
"Any sugar for you, Mr. Black?"
"Yes, please, I like a lot of sugar."
"Most of men do, I think. My husband likes his tea very sweet."
"And what will you have with it, a sandwich, or one of these cakes?"
"A sandwich, please."
"How is your mother, Mrs. Black? I hear she's not been very well."
"No, she hasn't, but she's much better now. She's staying with my brother for
a few days and then she's coming to stay with us."
"I'm glad to hear she's getting better."
18.
Make up a conversation with the phrases from the dialogue "Afternoon Tea".
18. This exercise is meant to develop your ability to read and narrate a story with proper
intonation, a) Listen to the joke. Write it down. Mark the stresses and tunes. Practise reading
the joke, b) Listen carefully to the narration of the joke. Observe the peculiarities in
intonation-group division, pitch, stress and tempo. Note the use of the temporisers. Retell the
joke according to the model you have listened to.
19. Read the joke silently to make sure you understand each sentence. Find the most
important sentence in the text. Underline the main word in each sentence. Sptit up each
sentence into intonation-groups, mark the stresses and tunes. Practise reading the joke. Make
your reading expressive. Retell the joke according to the model (see Ex. 19):
Two Americans were travelling in Spain. Once they came into a little
restaurant for lunch. They didn't know Spanish and the waiter didn't know
English. In order to make him understand they wanted some milk and
sandwiches they drew a cow. The waiter looked at it and ran out of the
restaurant. Soon he was back and put down in front of the two men two tickets
for a bullfight.
Section Seven>
Intonation Pattern VI
(LOW PRE-HEAD + ) FALL RISE ( + TAIL)
M o d e l : Do you often go to the theatre?
^Some/times. "^^/
Of ^course, I ,do. 9 J
__________________.______________________I
Stress-and-tone marks in the text: Fall-Rise: | v | \ /1 \ ,. /|
t
e.g. \/Yes. vGeneral,ly. Well J don't ,think so.
This intonation pattern is used: s I n s t a t e m e n t s expressing concern,
reproach, contradiction, correction, hurt feelings, sometimes soothing.
The Fall-Rise is also used in non-final intonation-groups or in sentences of
different communicative types instead of the low-rising nuclear tone to draw
particular attention to one of the words for the purpose of contrast or to intensify
the significance of the communicative centre.
е. д. I wish we'd left earlier. — That wasn't xmy, fault. It's so hot in this room.
— VI don't,think so. You'll be thirty-five soon. — Thirty \/four. Is it going to rain?
I
—
vhope ,not. Do you work every day? — On vweek ,days | I vwork, |
but on vSun,days 11 xdon't.
FALL-RISE SPREAD OVER TWO SYLLABLES
M o d e l : v Sometimes.
The fall of the voice starts from a fairly high or medium pitch and usually
ends rather low. The rise begins very low and does not go up too high.
EXERCISES
1. a)* Listen carefully to the following conversational situations. Concentrate your
attention on the intonation of the replies:
Verbal Context Drill
I thought they all took one. Didn't Smith and Jones go? Can Jack and Bill
come to tea? Have Bob and Jane arrived? Hike oysters.
I've passed my driving test. I don't think she's at all nice.
S t a t e m e n t s
(expressing concern, hurt feelings, reproach,
contradiction, corrections, contrast)
Ann did. Smith went. Bill can. Jane's here. You may. That's good. I do.
John does. Tim does.
I suppose you're working all the time. On week days.
Must I go by train?
You don't have to.
b) Listen to the replies and repeat them in the intervals. Make your voice fall as low
as possible on the nuclear syllable. Start the rise from the lowest pitch and do not go up
too high. Do not accent the tail, c) Listen to the verbal context and reply in the interval.
FALL-RISE SPREAD OVER A NUMBER OF SYLLABLES
M o d e l : vHe can / manage it. t___________________. •
In this case the fall is on the stressed syllable and the rise is separated from
the fall by one or more syllables. The syllables between the fall and the rise are
always on a very low level.
EXERCISES
2. a)* Listen carefully to the following conversational situations. Con rentrate your
attention on the intonation of the replies:
Verbal Context
Drill
S t a t e m e n t s
(expressing concern, hurt feelings, reproach,
Can you play chess? I think they'd Л contradiction, correction, contrast)
agree. Have you finished? But you
Once I could. Stephen would. Practically. Usually
aren't free on Sundays. So you all
I am not. I didn't think he was. You couldn't help it.
thought him guilty. I'm sorry about the He won't know what's happened.
mess. Let's ask that fellow over there.
Lying won't get you anywhere.
Somebody must know who did it.
I didn't do it.
One goal's nothing to get excited about. The
colour is all right.
The whole thing's quite a mystery.
Guess what. I scored a goal.
It's difficult all right. There might be a better one
somewhere.
What do you think of my new suit?
It's difficult, isn't it? Is this the best
you've got?
b) Listen to the replies and repeat them in the
intervals. Make your voice fall as low as possible on the
nuclear syllable. Start the rise from the lowest pitch and
do not go up too high. Do not accent the tail, c) Listen to
the verbal context and reply in the interval.
FALL-RISE ONLY
M o d e l * \/No. V
The fall may start with a fairly high or medium tone and generally ends
rather low. It occurs on the first part of the vowel. The rise begins very low and
does not go up too high. It occurs on the second part of the vowel or on the
following sonorant. *
EXERCISES
3. a)* Listen carefully to the following conversational situations. Concentrate your
attention on the intonation of the replies:
Verbal Context Drill
S t a t e m e n t s
[expressing concern, hurt feelings, reproach, contradiction,
correction, contrast)
There were seven boys there. Six.
Eight.
Nine.
Ten.
This is Hilda's book. Mine,
Yours. Jack's.
[Attracting attention) John.
Tom. Mark. Ann. Pat.
Can you delay it a bit longer?
Well, yes.
b) Listen to the replies and repeat them in the intervals. Make your voice fall as low
as possible and then raise it slightly, c) Listen to the verbal context and reply in the
interval.
4. In order to fix Intonation Pattern VI in your mind, ear and speech habits repeat
all the replies yourself until they sound perfectly natural to you.
5. Listen to a fellow-student reading the replies. Tell him what his errors in
intonation are.
6. Listen to your teacher reading the verbal context. Reply nsing one of the drill
sentences below. Pronounce it with Intonation Pattern VI. Say what attitude you mean
to render:
Nobody worked at the labI did.yesterday.Nobody's coming.Bob is.No one has brought
theThat's bad.headphones.I think you've done it.Almost.Is this book good?Fairly.I shall
never speak to him again."Never" is a very dangerousword.Is it going to keep fine?I hope
so.Are you at home on Sunday?I think so.That's a fine book, isn't it?Parts of it are fairly
interest-ing.I'l give him a good piece of mind.That won't get you very far.What do you do on
Sunday?Usually, I spend it out oftown.He knows English and French.German and French
youmean.This piano's out of tune.The piano's al right.Shal we go and see him ?If you can
go, you ought.I don't think he's worse now.When I saw him, he wasmuch better.Can you
speak English?Once I could.I thought you don't ski at al .Well, sometimes I do.(On
addressing a person)Mary.Helen.Betty.Bill.Tom.Jane.You won't go there, wil you?No.You
have four lessons today.Five.It's nearly five, isn't it?Six.May I keep this book a bit longer?
Well, yes.I can't do it now.You can.Tt won't take you long.It will.
7. Pronounce the drill sentences with Intonation Patterns I, Ш. Observe
be difference in meaning.
8. Your teacher will suggest a verbal context. You In turn reply by state-
|fents expressing contradiction, correction, contrast, concern, reproach.
9. This exercise is meant to develop your ability to hear the falling-rising tone and
reproduce it in proper conversational situations, a) Listen to the following dialogues. Mark
the stresses and tunes. Practise and memorize them.
A: My holiday starts tomorrow. B: Not
tomorrow.
A: You'll be seeing Tom on Sunday. B: On
Saturday.
A: I'm having tea at five o'clock. B: At four
o'clock, you mean. A: I can do it in a few minutes. B:
A few hours, more likely. A: It's your birthday on
Monday. B: Not this Monday. A: You'll be thirty-five
then. B: Thirty-four.
A: I think I'll have a rest now.
В: I shan't.
A: I feel tired today.
В: I don't.
A: It's so hot in this room.
В: I don't think so.
A: My head aches when it's hot.
B: Mine doesn't.
A: I don't like the heat.
В: I do.
A: I'll go for a swim this afternoon. В: I shan't.
A: It'll be cool in the winter. B: It won't.
b) Listen to the dialogue "Is it going to rain?" sentence by sentence. Write it down. Mark
the stresses and tunes. Practise and memorize it. c) One of the students will suggest a verbal
context. The other will contradict or correct him. Keep the exercise moving rapidly until
everyone has participated.
10. One of the students will suggest' the verbal context given below. You answer by using
the reply from the model. Continue the exercise until every student has participated. Keep the
exercise moving rapidly and do not take a long time to give a reply.
M o d e l 1: May I come in?
vYes, ,please. vDo, ,please.
1. May he come into the room? 2. We are going to bed. Shall I switch off the
radio? 3. Shall I help you in the garden? 4. May ^ stay here a bit longer? 5. Shall
I repeat the word? 6. Shall I lay the table? 7. May I try to put the iron right? 8.
It's rather cold. Shall I close the windows? 9. It's stuffy in the room. Shall I open
the windows and air the room? 10. May I switch on the radio and listen to the
news?
M o d e l 2: Do you find it difficult to study maths? vRa,ther.
1. Do you find it difficult to translate the sentence? 2. Does she find it
difficult to study languages? 3. Do you find it easy to do this exercise? 4. Do you
find this book interesting? 5. Do you find it warm to set a tent here? 6. Do they
find it cold to plant the flowers?
M o d e l 3: Have some more porridge.
No more, , thank you.
v
1. Have another cup of tea. Have another ice-cream. Have another lump of
sugar. Have another piece of cake. Have some more coffee. 2. Will you take
another book to read? Will you have some more milk? Will you buy some more
flowers? Will you take another ticket for the play? Will you take some more
(apples?
fVlodel 4: Do you always get up at the same time? vOf,ten.
(often, sometimes, never, rarely, generally, usually)
1. Do you regularly go to the laboratory? 2. Does your little brother like to
read books? 3. Do you go to the theatre every week? 4. Does she always agree
with him? 5. Do you rarely go shopping? 6. Can you often go to the cinema on
week-days? 7. Do you always have dinner at home? 8. Do you ever go to the
Institute on Sunday? 9. Do you ever miss your friends when they ^ire far away?
10. Can you help your friends with phonetics?
11. Read the sentences according to the models. Concentrate your attention on the
intonation of the address.
M o d e l 1: xPe,ter, where are you?
1 . Benny, come home. It's getting dark. 2. Kitty, it's high time to get up. 3.
Betty, why aren't you listening to me? 4. Edward, stop talking. 5. Alec, come
here. 6. Minnie, why aren't you writing? 7. Nick, why aren't you listening to the
text? 8. Billy, you've left your umbrella. 9. Harry, wake up.
M о d e 1 2: I xsay, ,Mike, I've just had a wire from Mary.
1.1 say, Peter, I've just seen Sid. 2. 1 say, Nick, something has gone wrong
with the tape-recorder. 3.1 say, Alec, whet are you doing tonight? 4.1 say, Helen,
have you seen the film "War and Peace"? 5. I say, Kitty, I've got two tickets to
the theatre. 6. I say, Mum, can I have another ice-cream? 7. 1 say, Dad, can I go
bicycling?
12.
Address your fellow-student according to the models above. Make him (or her)
reply by using the intonation patterns you have studied.
12.
Read the following conversational situations. Use Intonation Pattern VI in
them:
Shall I go on?
May I take your ball-pen?
Shall I switch on the cassette-recorder?
Will you pass me the mustard, please?
(Edward repairs the plug and then
gives it back to Mary.) Will you please give me a little
more porridge, dear? Are you ready to go now? Where do I sign? What do
you say to a bottle of
beer? How are things? Let's go to the dining-room. Mr. White wants to see
you,
Harry.
Do, please. Do, please. Do, please.
Here you are.
Here you are.
Just a moment.
Just a moment. Here, please. No beer, thanks.
Quite all right, thank you. This way, please. Show him in, please.
I'm just finishing this article.
We must leave at once to be in
time for the beginning of the
discussion. Don't you find it difficult to
study mathematics? What about going there together? Shall I put some more
sugar on your porridge, John? Why aren't you eating anything,
Kitty?
(Addressing Mary) Excuse me, what country are
you from? Excuse me, but I must be off.
Will you wait a minute,
please? Right you are.
Rather.
All right, Eddy.
No more, thank you.
I don't like porridge. I'm just thirsty. Give me some tea and cakes, Mum.
Look here, Mary!
I'm from Poland.
I'm so sorry.
14."* This exercise is meant to develop your ability to hear the intonation and reproduce
it in proper speech situations, a) Listen to the dialogue **Morning and Evening'* sentence by
sentence. Write it down. Mark the stresses and tunes. Practise the dialogue, b) Record your
reading. Play the ecording back immediately for your teacher and fellow-students to detect he
possible errors. Practise the dialogue for test reading. Memorize the lialogue and dramatize it:
Morning and Evening
"What time do you get up as a rule?" "Generally
about half-past seven." "Why so early?"
"Because I usually catch an early train up to town."
"When do you get to the office?"
"Normally, about nine o'clock."
"Do you stay in town all day?"
"Sometimes I do, and sometimes I don't."
"What do you usually do in the evenings?"
"We generally stay at home. Once or twice a week we go to i theatre or to the
pictures. We went to the pictures last night ind saw a very interesting film.
Occasionally we go to a dance."
"Do you like dancing?"
"Yes, very much. Do you dance?"
"I used to when I was younger, but not very often now. I'm getting too old."
"Too old? Nonsense you don't look more than fifty." "As a matter of fact, I'm
nearly sixty." "Really! You certainly don't look it."
"I'm glad to hear it. Are you doing anything special tonight? If not, what
about coming with me to my club? You'd get to know quite a lot of interesting
people there."
"I should love to but today happens to be our wedding anniversary and we're
going out tonight to celebrate."
"Well, my heartiest congratulations."
"Thank you very much. I could manage to come along tomorrow night, if that
would suit you."
"Yes, excellent. Let's make it round about eight o'clock." "Very well.
Thanks."
c) Give conversational situations with the phrases of the following type:
1.1 am glad to hear it. 2.1 should love to. 3. Sometimes I do and sometimes I
don't. 4. My heartiest congratulations. 5. Why so early? 6. Really? 7. Generally. .
15. The teacher or one of your fellow-students will read a question from the exercise.
Reply using phrases suggested below. Make your fellow-students decide what attitude
you are trying to render. Keep the exercise moving rapidly:
1. What time do you get up as a rule? 2. What time do you go to bed? 3. What
time do you have breakfast? 4. What time do you read the newspaper? 5. What
time do you go to the University? 6. When do you get to the University? 7. What
time do you have dinner? 8. When do you get home? 9. What do you usually do
in .the evening? 10. What do you usually do on Sunday? 11. What do you usually
do in the country? 12. What do you usually do in the garden? 13. Do you like
dancing? 14. Do you like fishing? 15. Do you like boating? 16. Do you like
sports? 17. Do you like singing? 18. Do you like skating? 19. Do you stay at the
University all day? 20. Are you doing anything special tonight? 21. Are you
doing anything special on Sunday? 22. Are you doing anything special tomorrow
morning? 23. What about going to the theatre tonight? 24. What ^bout going to
the skating-rink? 25. What about going to the pictures? 26. What about going to
the park? 27. When can you come?
1. Generally. .. 2. Normally.... 3. Occasionally. . 4. As a matter of fact.... 5.1
used to.... 6.1 could manage to ... if that would suit you.
16. Make up a conversation with the phrases from the dialogue "Morn-
ing and Evening".
17. "* This exercise is meant to develop your ability to hear and repro-
duce intonation in reading. Listen to the text "My Bedroom" sentence by
sentence. Write it down. Mark the stresses and tunes. Practise the text for
test reading.
18. Read the text "About Myself" silently to make sure you understand
each sentence. Sprit up each sentence into intonation-groups if necessary.
Underline the communicative centre and the nucleus in each phrase. Mark
the stresses and tunes. Use Intonation Pattern V in the word-groups in bold
type to intensify the meaning of these communicative centres. It is not
expected that each student of the class will mark the text in exactly the
same way. Your teacher will help all the members of the class to correct
Itheir variants. Finally practise reading your corrected variant:
About Myself
I'm a student of English. I have been a student only two months and a half. I
can't speak English well yet. I'm just a beginner, you know. I live in a hostel. It is
rather a long way from the University. In fact, it is in the country and it takes me
about pn hour and a half to get to the University. But it gives me no Irouble at
all, as I like to get up early. I don't need an alarm-clock to wake me up. I am an
early-riser, as they say.
Though our hostel is out of town it is very comfortable and has all modern
conveniences.
As a rule I get up at 6.30, do morning exercises and have a shower. I don't
have a bath in the morning, I have a bath before [go to bed.
For breakfast I have a boiled egg and a cup of coffee. At about 7.301 am
quite ready to go. It is about a five minutes' walk from the hostel to the station. I
usually take the 7.40 train. I walk to the station as I have plenty of time to catch
my train.
I come to the University five minutes before the bell rings. So I can have a
chat with my friends. Only four students of our group are Muscovites, the others
either come from different parts of our country or from other countries. We
usually have a lot of things to talk about.
There is a very good language laboratory at our University. It has modern
equipment. We spend a lot of time in the laboratory listening to the tapes,
imitating the sounds and intonation. It helps us to learn the language without
much difficulty.
We don't go out to lunch. There is a good canteen at our University. It is on
the ground floor. We can go downstairs and have lunch in no time at all. As to
my dinner I have it in a cafe on my way back to the hostel.
I come to the hostel from the University about a quarter to five every
evening. I live in a single room and have nobody to speak English to. I go to the
girl next door and we do our lessons together. We are always ready to help each
other.
In the evening we sometimes go out. We go to the pictures if there is
something new on or to the club if there is a dancing party there.
But we often stay in, watch the TV program in the common room or listen to
the radio. Then I read a book for half an hour or so and go to sleep. That doesn't
take me long, as a rule.
19. This exercise is meant to develop your ability to read and narrate a story with proper
intonation, a) Listen to the joke. Write it down. Mark the stresses and tunes, practise reading
the joke, b) Listen carefully to the narration of the joke. Observe the peculiarities in
intonation-group division, pitch, stress and tempo. Note the use of temporizers. Retell the
joke according to the model you have'listened to.
20. Read the joke silently to make sure you understand each sentence. Find the main
phrase in the text. Split up each sentence into intonation-groups if necessary. Mark the
stresses and tunes. Underline the communicative centre and the nuclear word of each
intonation-group. It is not expected that each student will intone the text in the same way.
Your teacher will help you to correct your variant. Practise reading the joke several times.
Retell the joke following the model above (see Ex. 19):
Peggy, aged five, said she had a stomachache.
"It's because you haven't had lunch yet," said her mother. "You would feel
better if you had something in it."
That afternoon their neighbour called and remarked while speaking to the
mother that he had a bad headache. "That's because it's empty," said Peggy.
"You'd feel better if you had something in it."
Section Eight
I. Sequence of Tones. Complex Sentences
If an adverbial clause precedes the principal one and makes a separate
intonation-group, it is usually pronounced with the Low Rise or Mid-Level as it
implies continuation.
e. g. If you want to have a > rest, | go to the xcountry. If you -* want to
have a ,rest, | -> go to the xcountry.
In case the complex sentence begins with the principal clause and contains
more than one intonation-group both the clauses die usually pronounced with the
low-falling nuclear tone.
e. g. -> Go to the xcountry | if you -> want to have a xrest.
If the principal clause implies continuation and makes a separate intonation-
group it is pronounced with the low-rising or falling-rising nuclear tone.
е. д. Г11 -> tell him at ,once | you -* want to xsee him.
Adverbial Clauses of Condition and Time
Model: a) If you ~> want to have a > rest, | go to the xcountry.
b)
If you ~> want to have a , rest, | go to the xcountry.
c)
When he , comes | -> ask him to xwait.
EXERCISES
1. Listen carefully to the sentences below and, repeat them in the intervals.
Concentrate your attention on the intonation of the non-final adverbial clauses. Observe
the sequence of tones. Repeat the sentences in the intervals:
a) 1. If you can stay longer, so much the better. 2. If you wish to bathe, you
can hire a hut or a tent. 3. If you walk, it'll take you ten minutes or a quarter of an
hour. 4. If you are staying in London for a few days, you'll have no difficulty
whatever in finding somewhere to spend an enjoyable evening. 5. If you're not
fond of music and singing, opera won't interest you. 6. If
you want to have a really quiet and healthy holiday, you must go to the
country. 7. If you take off your coat, I'll take your measurements. 8. If I were
you, I should make up my mind beforehand. 9. If you had time and weren't too
tired, you could go to the East End and see the Tower of London. 10. If I want to
know the time, I look at my watch. 11. If you want to post an ordinary letter, you
can drop it into the nearest pillar-box. 12. If you come with me, I'll show you. 13.
If you are interested in churches and historical places, you should go to
Westminster Abbey.
b) 1. When winter comes, we're obliged to spend more time indoors. 2. As I
was going through the book department, I was surprised to meet an old friend of
mine. 3. When we stay at щ- brother-in-law's, we have to work very hard, but we
don't mind. 4. After I've tried the suit on, the tailor will probably find it necessary
to make a few alterations. 5. When it is as cold as that, it is really very
unpleasant. 6. When Tom died, Mrs. Meadows wrote George about it, but they
never got an answer. 7. In the afternoon as soon as Mr. Hilton, Roger and Alice
came home, their preparations began. 8. When I've dried myself with a towel, I
get dressed. 9. When the suit is ready, I shall pay for it and get a receipt.
2. Read the sentences above several times until they sound perfectly natural to you.
Follow the intonation line exactly.
3. a) Read the sentences according to the model above. Observe the sequence of
tones, b) Listen to your fellow-student reading the sentences. Tell him what his errors in
intonation are:
1. If you go to the country, you'll enjoy yourself thoroughly. 2. If you are
busy today, you may come tomorrow. 3. If you don't know the way ask the
militiaman. 4. If you have to do some shopping, go to the Central Department
Store. 5. If you take (follow) my advice, you will not regret it. 6. If you want to
see a good play, you should book tickets beforehand. 7. If it suits you, come by
all means. 8. If it is not very frosty tomorrow, we shall go skating. 9. If this play
is as good as that one, it is worth seeing. 10. If you finish your exercise soon, you
may go for a walk. 11. If you hire a taxi, it will take you only 10 minutes to get
there. 12. If you want to see many places of interest, you should go on
sightseeing tours whenever you can. 13. If you
want to buy a pair of shoes, you should try them on. 14. If the weather is fine,
we shall go to the country. 15. If it rains, take an imbrella. 16. If you walk, it'll
take you half an hour to get to ,he Institute. 17. When you come home, ring me
up. 18. When rou finish your books, you'll have to make reports on them.
19.
When you enter the theatre, you go to the cloakroom.
20.
When the actor appeared on the stage, there was a storm of
applause. 21. When Robert Shannon invited Jean to the theatre, he doubted
whether she would come or not. 22. When you call for me, I'll introduce my
sister to you. 23. When he saw the old man for the first time, he looked at him
with admiration and respect. 24. When he went to sea, he did not inform anyone
of it. 25. When he learnt the news, he got angry. 26. When she married Tom, she
was never sure that she had married the right man. 27. When he arrived in
Moscow, the weather was surprisingly wonderful. 28. When he passed his exam
with an excellent mark, he was eager to inform his parents of it. 29. When you
come to Red Square, turn to the left and you will see the building you want. 30.
When you come back home, you should go to the greengrocer's and to the
butcher's.
4. Complete the following sentences in turn. Observe the sequence of tones. Keep the
exercise moving on rapidly:
1. If you are going to stay in England for some time..............................2. If
you can stay longer...........3. If you walk, ... . 4. If you are staying
in London.....5. If you are not fond of music....................6. If you are at
the cinema, .... 7. If you want to have a really quiet holiday, ... .
8 If you take off your coat...........9. If you can do it now.................10. If I
were you........ 11. If you have time and aren't too tired...........................
12. If I want to know the time.....................13. If you are going to
England.....14. If you want to post a letter, ... . 15. If you want
to send a telegram, .... 16. If you want your letter to arrive more quickly, ... .
17. If you want to send a parcel, ... . 18. If you want a guide to show you
round, .... 19. If your wife is going to be with you, ... . 20. If the weather is
fine, ... . 21. If it rains, ... .
22. If you go to the country................23. If you are busy today, ... .
24. If you don't know the way, ... . 25. If you have to do some
shopping......26. When we were out in the street........................27. When
summer comes, ... . 28. When we were children, ... 29. When you
are tired of London..........30. As I was walking, ... . 31. When it is
as cold as that, ... . 32. When Robert Shannon invited Jean, ... .
33. When at last the curtain fell,.... 34. While we were watching the last
scene, ... . 35. When we were out in the street, . . . .
36.
When I met her at the entrance to the theatre, ... .
37.
When Tom died, ... . 38. When I came to see him the next day, ....
39. And before their tour came to an end,.... 40. When you come home, ... . 41.
When you enter the theatre, ... . 42. When the actor appeared on the stage,.... 43.
When you call for me, ... . 44, When he saw the old man for the first time, ... .
45. When he went to sea, ... . 46. When he learnt the news,.... 47. When she
married Tom,.... 48. When he arrived in Moscow,....
5. Translate the following sentences. Use the necessary sequence of tones. Do not let
your Russian pronunciation habits interfere:
1. Если вы хотите покупаться летом, вам лучше поехать на юг. 2. Если
он опоздает, учитель его не впустит. 3. Если этот спектакль идет сегодня, ты
не достанешь билетов. 4. Если он будет сегодня в театре, я познакомлю его
с моей сестрой. 5. Если он опоздает на полчаса, не жди его. 6. Если ты
посмотришь этот спектакль, он тебе наверняка понравится. 7. Если ты
будешь работать упорно, ты добьешься больших успехов. 8. Если ты не
будешь работать много, ты провалишься на экзамене. 9. Если ты его
пригласишь, ему наверняка понравится наш вечер. 10. Если у тебя есть
возможность поехать за город, я думаю, ты должен поехать как можно
скорее. 11. Если ты хочешь купить новые туфли, тебе лучше сходить в
ГУМ. 12. Если ты хочешь узнать какие-либо новости о нем, ты должна сама
сходить к нему. 13. Если ты поедешь на такси, ты успеешь к началу вечера.
14. Если ты познакомишь меня со своими родителями, я смогу помогать им.
15. Если отец придет домой вовремя, мы будем обедать в пять. 16. Когда
будет тепло, мы поедем за город. 17. Когда стемнеет, приходите домой,
дети. 18. Когда вам будет нужна помощь, обращайтесь ко мне. 19. Когда я
окончу университет, я буду работать учителем. 20. Когда приедет мать, мы
подарим ей цветы. 21. Когда солнце сядет, будет холодно. 22. Когда я
окончу работу, я позвоню тебе. 23. Когда я напишу письмо, я дам его тебе
прочитать. 24. Когда приедет брат, у нас будет весело. 25. Когда их дочь
уедет в Санкт-Петербург, им будет очень скучно 26. Когда наступит ночь,
мы не найдем дороги. 27. Когда наступит утро, мы снова двинемся в путь.
28. Когда я останусь одна, у меня будет много времени. 29. Когда наступит
осень, мы
поедем в город. 30. Когда отец приедет, мы поедем на вокзал. 31 Когда она
пришла, она никого не застала дома. 32. Когда я зашел к ним, они обедали. 33. Когда я
позвонил ему, его не было дома. 34. Когда мы спросили его об этом, он отказался
отвечать. 35. Когда мы вошли в комнату, Наташа пела.
6. Listen to the dialogue. Memorize it. Make up your own dialogue of the same type.
II. Logical Stress
M o d e l : I can xdo it.
XI can do it.
If the nucleus is shifted from the last notional word to some other word of the
intonation-group the sentence stress is called logical.
EXERCISES
7. The words in bold type are the nucleus of the sentences below. While reading
concentrate on the change in meaning in sentences with logical stress. Intone the sentences:
1. Jack lived there alone. Jack lived there alone. 2. We met Mark in our
English club. We met Mark in our English club. We met Mark in our English
club. 3. He's lost his father's book. He's lost his father's book. He's lost his
father's book. He's lost his father's book, 4. John's sister speaks French perfectly.
Johnrs sister speaks French perfectly. John's sister speaks French perfectly.
John's sister speaks French perfectly. 5. He told them not to go there. He told
them not to go there. He told them not to go there. He told them not to go there.
He told them not to go there. He told them not to go there. 6. My brother knows
you well. My brother knows you well. My brother knows you well. My brother
knows you well. My brother knows you well. 7. Her father likes them very
much. Her father likes them very much. Her father likes them very much. Her
father likes them very much. 8. His last story was long. His last story was long.
His last
story was long. His last story was long. 9, My cousin helps the boy a lot. My
cousin helps the boy a lot. My cousin helps the boy a lot. My cousin helps the
boy a lot. 10. Group 102 will take their exam next week. Group 102 will take
their exam next week. Group 102 will take their exam next week.
8. Read the sentences according to the situation suggested in brackets. Use the logical
stress to single out the elements of contrast. Make your reading expressive:
1. The students were listening to the text at the laboratory (not in Room 15).
2. The students were listening to the text at the laboratory (not to the poem). 3.
The students were listening to the text at the laboratory (not recording it). Л The
students were listening to the text at the laboratory (not the teachers). 5. The
first-year students sang a Russian folk song (not an American song). 6. The first-
year students sang a Russian folk song (not a modern song). 7. The first-year
students sang a Russian folk song (not the third-year students). 8. It rained hard
on Sunday in Pushkino (not yesterday). 9. It rained hard on Sunday in Pushkino
(not in Moscow). 10. It rained hard on Sunday in Pushkino (not just a little as
you say). 11. He was taking his exam in Literature on Monday (not on Friday).
12. He was taking his exam in Literature on Monday (not in Linguistics). 13. He
was taking his exam in Literature on Monday (not having a consultation).
9. Vour teacher or fellow-student will read the questions below. While answering them
concentrate your attention on the distribution of sentence stress:
1. Are you in the first or in the second course? 2. Is the girl in Group 213 or
in Group 313? 3. Does your father work at a Medical Institute or at a Teachers'
Training Institute? 4 Which season do you like best of all? 5. Do you like early
autumn or late autumn? 6. Are they reciting a poem or reading it? 7. Have they
spoken to their new neighbour or have they just seen him? 8. Will you go boating
or cycling on Saturday? 9. Will you go skiing to the forest next week or will you
stay at home? 10. Is it my fountain-pen or yours? 11. Is it your coffee or mine?
12. Would you like coffee or cocoa for breakfast? 13. Have you had dinner or are
you going to have it? 14. What street do you live in? 15. What exam are you
taking on Friday?
10.
The tines below are taken from books by different authors. How do you think the
authors intended them to be stressed and why?
1. "Do you prefer the inside or the outside, John?" I said I generally preferred
to sleep inside a bed. 2. She said slowly: "If you don't know, nobody does." 3.
"It's all very well for you, fellows," he says, "you like it but I don't." 4. "I had
their promise, their written promise..." 5. M i s s B e e c h . But your mother
likes him? — J o y . (Sullenly). I don't want her to like him. 6. "I say our
chairman. Why do I say our chairman? Because he is not my chairman, you
know." 7. "Speak out," said Martin, "and speak the truth." "I fear this is the
truth." 8. "She'll be pretty," he muttered. "1 shouldn't wonder." "She is pretty,"
said Emily; "she ought to make a good match." 9. George said that if anything
was broken, it was broken, which reflection seemed to comfort him. 10. "Oh!"
exclaimed George, grasping the idea; "but we can't drink the river, you know!"
— "No, but you can drink some of it," replied the old fellow. "It's what I've
drunk for the last fifteen years."
11.Look for similar situations in your books for home reading.
11.This exercise is meant to develop your ability to hear and reproduce intonation in
proper speech situations, a) Listen to the dialogue sentence by sentence. Mark the stresses
and tunes. Practise reading it. (See p. 219) b) Record it. Play the recording back immediately
for your teacher and fellow-students to detect the possible errors, c) Give a conversational
context with the following phrases:
1. Do you think it's ... . 2. Don't speak too soon. 3. Don't worry, (Robert) .... 4.
Never mind. 5. Oh, dear, ....
13.
Make up a conversation with the same phrases.
13. *" This exercise is meant to develop your ability to hear the intonation and to
reproduce it in the text, a) Listen to the text "Seasons and Weather" sentence by sentence.
Mark the stresses and tunes. Practise the text, b) Record your reading. Play the recording
back immediately for your teacher and fellow-students to detect the errors in your
pronunciation, c) Practise the text for test reading:
Seasons and Weather
The year is divided into four seasons: spring, summer, autumn and winter. In
spring nature awakens from her long winter sleep. The trees are filled with new
life, the earth is
warmed by the rays of the sun, and the weather gets gradually milder. The
fields and the medows are covered with fresh green grass. The woods and forests
are filled with the songs of the birds. The sky is blue and cloudless. At night,
millions of stars shine in the darkness.
When summer comes the weather gets warmer still and sometimes it's very
hot. It's the farmer's busy season — he works in his fields from morning till
night. The grass must be cut and the hay must be made, while the dry weather
lasts. Sometimes the skies are overcast with heavy clouds. There are storms with
thunder, lightning and hail.
Autumn brings with it the harvest-time, when the crops are gathered in and
the fruit is picked in the orchards. The days get shorter and the nights longer. The
woods turn yellow and brown, leaves begin to fall from the trees, and the ground
is covered with them. The skies are grey, and very often it rains.
When winter comes, we're obliged to spend more time indoors because out-
of-doors it's cold. We may get fog, sleet and frost. Ponds, lakes, rivers and
streams are frozen, and the roads are sometimes covered with slippery ice or
deep snow. The trees are bare. Bitter north winds have stripped them of all their
leaves.
15. This exercise is meant to develop your ability to read and narrate a story with proper
intonation, a) Listen to the joke. Write it down. Mark the stresses and tunes. Practise reading
the joke, b) Listen carefully to the narration of the joke. Observe the peculiarities in
intonation-group division, pitch, stress and tempo. Note the use of temporizers. Retell the
joke according to the model you have listened to.
16. Read the joke silently to make sure you understand each sentence. Find the main
sentence in the text. Underline the main word in every sentence. Split up each sentence into
intonation-groups if necessary. Mark the stresses and tunes. Practise reading the joke several
times. Retell the joke following the model above:
Rather Late
It was a dark night. A man was riding a bicycle without a lamp. He came to a
crossroad and did not know which way to turn. He noticed a pole with sofnething
white which looked like a sign. Climbing to the top of the pole he lit a match and
read: "Wet Paint".
Section Nine
Intonation of Parentheses
Model:Well, 1don't know.What do you think of Nick?> Wel ,| I -> don't know./Wel , |I -*
x
x
don't know. Well, |I don't know.He is a nice chap, I .think.
x
x
x
v
Parentheses express the speaker's attitude towards the utterance.
Parentheses at the Beginning of the Sentence
When the speaker doesn't attach any importance to the parenthetical words at
all they do not form a sepaiate intonation-group and are often unstressed and are
pronounced very quickly.
e. g. -» Well, I xdo. Well, I xdo.
If the speaker attaches more importance to parentheses, they form an
intonation-group. In this case they are stressed and are pronounced with any
nuclear tone: Low Fall, Low Rise, Mid-Level or Fall-Rise.
e. g. xWell, | I vdo.
To -* tell you the , truth, | I Vdon't 'want to go there.
v
> Well, I I vdo.
For my xown ,part, | I should xlove it.
1. a) Listen carefully to the following conversational situations. Concentrate your
EXERCISES
M o d e l 1 : Well yes.'Well yes.
x
x
attention on the intonation of the replies:
By the way, do you play billiards?
I say, what are you and your
sister going to do for your
holiday this year? Oh, Peter's not old enough to
make up his mind about such
things.
I can see the English coast already, can you?
I wish I had your gift for
languages. Yesr what is it now, Harry? The Rovers won, Mum!
And how is your nephew Richard getting on?
And what do you think of London, Mrs. Thompson?
It's my book.
Well, I do, but of course, I'm not a professional or a champion.
Well, I don't know.
Well, you haven't answered my question yet Robert.
Yes, just. Well, I suppose
we'd better get ready for
landing. Well, I don't think I should
call it a gift. Oh, there you are. The Rovers, Robert? Why,
where have you been? Oh, he's getting on quite
well, thank you. Oh, I think it's a wonderful
place. Well take it, then.
b) Listen carefully to the replies and repeat them in the intervals. Have no pause after the
parentheses. Make them stressed or unstressed but pronounce them a bit faster than the main
utterance, c) Listen to the verbal context and reply in the interval, d) In order to fix intonation
in your mind, ear and speech habits repeat the responses yourself until they sound perfectly
natural to you. e) Listen to your fellow-student reading the replies. Tell him what his errors in
intonation are.
M o d e l 2 : Well, | I do.As a matter of /fact,| I'mnearly fortyOf > course, | I
x
x
x
do Persona l y | I'm Vnot'fondof hiking
x
x
/
class="book">x
2. a ) Listen carefully to the fol owing conversational situations. Concentrate your
attention on the intonation of the replies:
Verbal Context (Starting conversation)
I hope you'll have a comfortable journey.
What about indoor games?
There are plenty of good hotels in London.
Where do you go?
Where do you go as a rule? And how are things with you?
What day was before yesterday?
And how do you like our weather?
What sort of gloves do you require? Kid, suede, chamois?
Drill
Well, what's the news. Mr. White?
Well, what did you think of the play?
Well, what's the matter with you, Mr. Walker? Now, let's see what else did I
want.
Well, I've still got a few minutes to spare, so I'll go and get myself a novel...
Well, there's chess, billiards, cards.
Still, if you don't want to be disappointed, especially during the holiday
season, it's better to engage a room beforehand.
I think we prefer the south. However, it really doesn't seem to matter very
much, as long as the youngsters get a good sandy beach. We've tried many
seaside places on the east and south coasts; on the whole, I think we prefer the
south. Well, not too good, I ' m afraid, and going from bad to worse. In fact, it's
the worst year we've had for a long time.
Monday. As it happens last Monday was my birthday. Well, it's rather
changeable, isn't it?
Well, let me see some of each.
I should think it's dry enough after yesterday's sunshine. And how are things
with you?
How long have you been in London?
Can you tell me the right time, please?
There's a nasty-looking cloud just coming up behind you. You know, Nora, I
do feel a bit ill; perhaps I had better get back to bed.
We can't really tell until he takes his scholarship examination.
What about that pub we came past?
I've noticed quite a lot of interferences on my set. I suppose it's the weather.
I'm sorry to hear that.
I can see the English coast already, can you?
I don't think I'm quite as foolish as that.
What kind of shoe did you want, Madam?
What about indoor games?
Is it possible to see anything of London in one or two days? What kind of
biscuits would you like?
Well, is it warm enough for
you?
Well, not too good, I'm afraid,
Oh, only a few days.
Well, my watch says five past two.
Oh, that cloud isn't big enough to do any harm. Oh, what a pity!
Oh, but I'm sure he'll win a scholarship.
It's much too far away. Look, there is a barn over there. Of course yours is
rather an old-fashioned model.
Anyhow, I hope things aren't as bad as you imagine. Yes, just. Well, I suppose
we'd better get ready for landing.
As a matter of fact, I don't think I have anything to declare.
I want a strong walking shoe with a low heel... As you see, I have rather
small feet. Well, there's chess, billiards, cards, table tennis. By the way, do you
play billiards? Well, yes, but, of course, not half enough.
Well, I think I should like to try some of each.
What would you say are the most popular games in England today? What can
I do for you ?
Will he go to the University?
I bought myself a lovely pair of shoes.
Well, I suppose football.
Well, I have a proposition to
put before you.
Well, he may, or he may
not.
Did you? Well, that was exciting.
b) Listen carefully to the replies and repeat them in the intervals. Have a short pause
after each parentheses. Observe the slight difference in : tempo, pronounce the parenthetical
words or phrases a bit quicker. Make ' them sound more weighty and important than in
Model 1. c) Listen to the ■ verbal context and reply in the interval, d) In order to fix
intonation in your mind, ear and speech habits repeat the responses yourself until they sound
perfectly natural to you. e) Listen to your fellow-student reading the responses. Tell him what
his errors in intonation are.
3. Listen to the verbal context suggested by your teacher. Respond by using the replies.
Say what attitude you express:
Verbal Context
Where's Mum? I want to ask her something.
How do you make a cake, Mum?
There's a cold wind out there this morning.
She'll catch up with us in no time. I was left to keep house.
But I thought you mended it last year.
How far did you get?
Is there anything to your taste on the menu?
Now it's your turn to go to the greengrocer's and to the baker's.
Drill
Well, you'll have to wait till she comes in.
Fancy you being interested! Well, listen, and I'll tell you. Well, come inside
now and get warm.
Well, let's hope for the best. Well, I should think you had a hard time.
Well, yes, I've mended it several times.
Well, I went along the main road first.
Oh, yes, all kinds of things. Oh, bother!
Let Nelly do it today as well.
It's the first night.
I hope the seats are not in the balcony or in the gallery? How could I possibly
recognize her?
You were badly ill then. I've never spent a holiday in the country, so I don't
know what it's like.
Who were they all? They had no news of him. And was that the only place
you had been to?
I can buy another pair for you.
Oh, you've been a lazy-bones ever since you were born! Oh, it's at the Maly
Theatre, isn't it? Oh, dear, no.
Oh, it's quite easy.
Oh, that was ages ago. Haven't you really? Oh, you ought to.
Oh, nobody special. Oh, he'll be all right. Oh, no, it wasn't.
Oh, but it's all right, Harry, I've got them.
4. Read the following sentences according to Models 1, 2. Use them in conversational
situations:
1. So, if you come with me, Til show you. 2. Yet, if you talk to her, you'll see
that she is right. 3. Then, don't trouble to answer it. 4. Then, I don't know how to
help her. 5. So, he is very lucky then, I think. 6. Now, why are there so many
people here? 7. Still, there are five more days. 8. Of course, their furniture is
more modern than ours. 9. Perhaps, I'll go there immediately. 10. Of course, I
didn't know it. 11. Of course, I have been rather silly. 12. Perhaps, she is coming
with us too. 13. Perhaps, that gentleman over there will be able to help you. 14.
Come, don't worry about that. 15. Here, what's the trouble? 16. Here, somebody
is knocking at the door. 17. Why, I didn't know he was there. 18. As a matter of
fact, I like the idea. 19. As a matter of fact, I wanted to know what was worrying
you. 20. As for me, I never take mustard or pepper. 21. As you know, I finished
school in June. 22. As for me, I am a member of our English club. 23. As far as I
know, you passed all your entrance exams with excellent marks. 24. Fortunately
for me, it was a translated version. 25. As a rule, the plays are magnificently
staged. 26. In fact, I would say, the further away the better. 27.1 say, how black
;hose clouds are getting. 28. For instance, when driving, they ieep to the left-
hand side of the road in England. 29. On the whole, I prefer a black hat. 30. You
see, you haven't been married as long as we have. 31. First of all, let's see the
house. 32. By the way, may I open the window? 33. In any case, before crossing
the road, take care to look to your right. 34.1 say, who's the boy, with whom I've
been dancing?
5. Read the following sentences, according to Model 2. Use them in conversational
situations:
1. Besides, I'm afraid I have a bad pain in my side. 2. Generally, I drink
coffee in the morning. 3. Normally, we go for a walk in the evening. 4.
Occasionally, we go to the South. 5.. Besides, it's a pity to stay at home on such a
fine day. 6. Personally, I've always wanted to be a teacher. 7. Personally, I'm not
very keen on opera. 8. Besides, we do live nearer now. 9. Anyhow, who says I'm
bad-tempered? 10. Anyhow, he'll be well looked after at the hospital. 11.
However, he is always ten minutes late.
6. Complete the following sentences. Use them in conversational situations:
1. Well, you see...............2. You know.............3. Oh, ... . 4. Look here,
... . 5. Come.............6. Why.................7. I say..................8. Still.................
9. Now, ... . 10. Then................. 11. Of course............ 12. Perhaps,
13. Luckily, 14. Fortunately............15. Unfortunately, ... . 16. How-
ever, ... . 17. Anyhow, ... . 18. Besides, ... . 19. Normally.....................................
20. Finally, ... . 21. Personally, ... . 22. Generally.................23. Probably,
... . 24. Possibly, ... . 25. Perhaps...............................26. Maybe....................
27. Surely.....28. No doubt...............29. Upon my word................30. Not
at all, ... . 31. As far as I can see, ... . 32. To my regret..........................33. I
am sorry to say, ... . 34. At any rate...........................35. In short, ... .
36. After all, ... . 37. In any case, ... . 38. At least, ... . 39. On the
contrary, ... . 40. Above all, ... . 41. Strictly speaking........................42. To
tell you the truth, ... . 43. As far as ... is concerned.........................44. You
see, ... . 45. As for me, ... . 46. In my opinion.................47. By the by, ...
. 48. To begin with, ... . 49. First of all, ... .
7. Translate from Russian into English. See that your Russian pronunciation habits do not
interfere:
1. Послушай, где ты была? 2. Знаешь ли, я не люблю этот напиток 3. Что
касается меня, то я люблю ходить в кино. 4. Короче
говоря, я позвонила туда. 5. Откровенно говоря, я не приготовила задание на
сегодня, б. Ну что я могу тебе сказать? 7. Итак, начнем сначала. 8. И все-таки, я люблю
эту песню. 9. А теперь давайте спросим Аню об этом. 10. Конечно, я очень хотела
поехать на юг. 11. Возможно, он прав. 12. Наверно, ему лет сорок. 13. Однако стало уже
холодно. 14. Тем не менее, я ее пригласила. 15. К счастью, у меня были с собой часы.
16. Что касается меня, я встаю очень рано. 17. Несомненно, этот человек —
знаменитый художник. 18. Действительно, почему он так плохо учится? 19. К счастью,
я увидела Лену. 20. Несомненно, он очень талантлив. 21. Честное слово, я была там. 22.
Во всяком случае, она оказалась права. 23. Насколько мне известно, она хорошо
танцует. 21. Во всяком случае, его надо спросить об этом. 25. По-моему, это был
Виктор. 26. Между прочим, почему ты не позвонил?
Parentheses at the End or in the Middle of the Sentence.
M o d e l : I'm Vnot 'good at v languages, you know.
You 7know, of course, | he's my ^brother.
In the middle or at the end of the sentence parenthetical words and phrases
are generally pronounced as the unstressed of half stressed tail of the preceding
intonation-group.
EXERCISES
8. a ) Listen carefully to the following conversational situations. Concentrate your
attention on the intonation of the parentheses at the end of an intonation-group;
Verbal Context
Drill
I wish I had your gift for languages.
Well, I don't think I should call it a gift. Where there's a will there's a way,
you know.
How are you two getting on?
Not very well. I think I'm going to leave it to Robert, after
all.
By the way, did you hear "Carmen" the other night?
We shall go to the sea, I expect. What about horse-racing?
What are you doing?
Yes, I did, fortunately for me, it was a translated version. I'm not good at
languages, you know.
Leaving the rest of the family behind, I suppose? I should say that is one of
the most popular sports in Great Britain. Then there are, of course, walking
races, running, swimming and boxing.
We shall go to the sea, I expect.
b) Listen to the replies and repeat them in the intervals. Have no pause before the
parentheses. Pronounce them as unstressed or partially stressed tails of the preceding
intonation-groups, c) Listen to the verbal context and reply in the interval, d) In order
to fix the intonation of the parentheses at the end of an intonation-group in your mind,
ear and speech habits repeat the replies yourself until they sound perfectly natural to
you. e) Listen to your fellow-student reading the replies. Tell him what his errors in
intonation are.
9. Read the following sentences according to the model given above. Use
them in conversational situations:
1. A walking holiday depends upon the weather, of course. 2. You were badly
ill then, as far as I remember. 3. A cowardly thing to do, I call it. 4. Tastes differ,
you know. 5. They are geologists, as you know. 6. So you didn't have any rest, in
fact. 7. Had a nice rest in the South, too, I guess? 8. Our time is up, I'm afraid. 9.
Jane doesn't make up, I am sure. 10. Just the same, so far. 11,1 feel bad, indeed.
10.
Make up sentences using the following parenthetical words and phrases at the
end of them. Use them in conversational situations:
1...., of course. 2..................anyhow. 3...., at least. 4....................I'm sure.
5...., I hope. 6. ..., I believe. 7.as far as I know. 8............................I think.
9. ... , I presume. 10.................. you know. 11. ... , I suppose.
12.I'm afraid. 13....(I guess. 14.so far. 15............................in fact.
11. Give your own examples with parentheses at the end of the sentences.
12. *** This exercise is meant to develop your ability to hear intonation
and reproduce it in proper conversational situations, a) Listen to the
dialogue "Planning a Holiday" sentence by sentence. Write it down. Mark
the stresses and tunes. Practise the dialogue, b) Record your reading. Play
the recording back immediately for your teacher and fellow-students to
detect the possible errors. Practise the dialogue for test reading. Memorize
the dialogue, c) Pick out sentences and intonation-groups containing
parentheses, d) Give conversational situations with the phrases below:
1. I say, ... . 2. Well, I don't know. 3............... I expect. 4. Oh( yes.
5. anyhow. 6. .... I suppose. 7............. as a rule. 8. On the whole,
... . 9. However, ... . 10. For my own part, .... 11. Right, I will.
e) Make up a conversation with the phrases from the dialogue "Planning a Holiday".
13. Translate the following sentences into English; read them following the intonation
patterns of the dialogue:
1. Что ты собираешься делать в каникулы в этом году? —- Мы поедем на юг, я
думаю. 2. Что ты читаешь, как правило? 3. Что касается меня, то мне это нравится. 4. В
це ом, я согласен с вами 5. Я люблю шить, однако на это уходит много времени. 6.
Послушай, что ты делаешь сегодня вечером? 7. Во всяком случае, я предпочитаю
остаться дома.
14. "* This exercise is meant to develop your ability to hear and reproduce intonation in
reading, a) Listen to the text "At the Seaside" sentence by sentence. Mark the stresses and
tunes. Practise the text, b) Record your reading. Play the recording back immediately for your
teacher and fellow-students to detect the possible errors. Practise the text for test reading, c)
Pick out sentences with subordinate clauses at the beginning. Observe the intonation they are
pronounced with:
At the Seaside
If you're going to stay in England for some time, you ought to spend at least a
week at the seaside. If you can stay longer, so much the better. You ought to have
no difficulty in finding a suitable hotel or boarding-house.
When we were children, we used to enjoy playing on the beach, making
castles and forts and channels in the sands. I expect you did the same when you
were young, because it's really one of the most delightful holidays for children.
We used to love
playing about on the sand and paddling in the water and getting splashed by
the waves. Sometimes we'd get our clothes wet, and Nurse would get very cross
and tell us we oughtn't to have gone so far into the water.
When you're tired of London, go down to the sea for a week or a fortnight.
You can walk up and down the front, listen to the band on the pier and do more
or less anything you please. If you wish to bathe, you can hire a hut or a tent. A
swim now and then, or better still, everyday, will do you a lot of good. Take your
car with you, if you've got one, choose a good hotel, and you're sure to spend a
thoroughly enjoyable time.
15.*" Read the text silently to make sure you understand each sentence. Split up each
sentence into intonation-groups if necessary. Mark the stresses and tunes. Find the
communicative centre of each sentence. Practise reading the text:
We had a grand holiday last year. My husband and I took the children to the
seaside for a month. We have five children. John, the eldest, is 12 years old, and
little Mary, the baby, is only two and a half.
John has been to the seaside several times before, but this was the first time
the other children had been. Naturally, it was a great event for them. For weeks
before we were to go they talked of nothing else and were very busy getting their
things ready. Finally, the day came when our holiday was to begin. John was a
great help in looking after the other children and so was Betty, who is nearly
eleven. It was a fine morning. We were up very early as we wanted to leave
home soon after breakfast. We made the journey by car, and we took some
refreshments with us so that we could stop for lunch when we found a pleasant
place in the country. We reached the seaside town, where we intended to stay in
the early afternoon, and as soon as we arrived the children were asking if they
could go down to the beach and see the sea. After that we spent many hours of
each day on the beach. The children made sandcastles and bathed. John and
Betty, who are quite good swimmers, had a swim every morning with their father
while I sat with the others. Several
times my husband and I went to the theatre in the evening and once or twice
we went dancing.
16.
This exercise is meant to develop your ability to read and narrate a story with
proper intonation, a) Listen to the joke. Write it down. Mark the stresses and tunes. Practise
reading the joke, b) Listen carefully to the narration of the joke. Observe the peculiarity in
intonation-group division, pitch, stress and tempo. Note the use of temporizers. Retell the
joke according to the model you have listened to.
16.
Read and retell the jokes:
Doctor's Orders
S e r v a n t : Sir, wake up, wake up!
M a s t e r : What is the matter?
S e r v a n t : It's time to take your sleeping tablets.
Politeness
M o t h e r : Which apple do you want, Tom? T o m :
The biggest one.
M o t h e r : Why, Tom, you should be polite and take the little one. ' T o m :
Well, Mamma, should I lie just to be polite?
His Pipe
L i t t l e g i r l : Grandpa, would you like me to give you a new pipe for your
birthday?
G r a n d p a : That's very nice of you, Mary, but I have got a pipe.
L i t t l e g i r l : Don't think you have, Grandpa, I've just broken it.
A Good Student
P r o f e s s o r : Can you tell me anything about the дтеМ chemists of the
17th century?
S t u d e n t : Yes, sir, they are all dead, sir.
Section Ten
Intonation Pattern VII
(LOW PRE-HEAD + ) FALLING HEAD + FALL-RISE
M o d e l : Type out this letter at once.
I Vcan't 'possibly x finish it ,now
This intonation pattern is used in statements, commands and other
communicative types of sentences to express the same attitudes as Intonation
Pattern VI. Stressed syllables of the head sometimes glide down.
e. g. I didn't know you drank coffee. I -* do
—
xsome, times.
EXERCISES
1. a)* Listen carefully to the following conversational situations. Concentrate your
attention on the intonation of the replies:
Verbal Context Drill
S t a t e m e n t s
[expressing concern, hart feelings, reproach, contradiction,
correction, uncertainty, contrast, grumbling)
Do you smoke?
I do sometimes.
Can we smoke here?
It's not forbidden.
She is a pretty girl, isn't she? She has a lovely face.
Are you using the ruler?
Not at the moment.
We got here about midnight. It was earlier than that. The clock's twelve
minutes fast. I'm quite sure it's not thft
much out.
Are you coming for a swim?
Not I. Not likely.
May I come to your lecture?
There'll be nothing new in it
for you.
What about this green dress?
The recipe says a pound of dried fruit.
I'd like to go, but it's such an expensive journey.
She's an absolute failure. You're a clumsy oaf. We'll leave before dawn.
Look, Mummy, I'm right at the top.
b| Listen to the replies and re voice fall as low as possible. Start not go up too high.
I shouldn't buy that one if I were you.
I doubt whether a pound will be enough.
You shouldn't let the cost of it deter you from going.
C o m m a n d s (urgent, warning)
Now be fair. Steady on. Have a heart. Have a bit of sense. Mind you don't
fall.
them in the intervals. Make your rise from the lowest pitch and do
c) Listen to the verbal context and reply in the intervals.
2. In order to fix Intonation Pattern VII in your mind, ear and speech habits repeat the
replies yonrself until they sonnd perfectly natural to yon.
3. Listen to your fellow-student reading the replies. Tell him what his errors in intonation
are.
4. Listen to the verbal context suggested by your teacher. Reply by using one of the drill
sentences below. Pronounce it with Intonation Pattern VII. Say what attitude you mean to
render:
Verbal Context
Are you coming to dinner tonight?
Everyone's at home.
What a nice house!
He won't come, I tell you.
I came at a quarter past two.
Here I am.
Do you like my hat?
Drill I will if I can.
Not everyone. It isn't a large one. He hasn't definitely refused. , Half past
three it was. You're rather late. If you don't mind my saying so, it's terrible.
}don't know what to do about it.
it's not easy, you know.
Јhe speaks English quite fluently.
Sfou look cold.
pit last she has passed her exam. fcVill you be staying in London till autumn?
|>hall we meet next Sunday?
think if's going to rain. He is certain to win the game. Be careful. It's loo dark
here. I'll like to ask some friends to dinner.
It's time to go. So long!
If I were you, I'd wait and see
what happens.
But not impossible.
But with a shocking Russian
accent, doesn't she?
I'm not exactly cold.
She failed again.
I'm not quite sure.
I'm afraid I can't make it next Sunday.
Oh, don't say that. Don't be too sure. Don't be nervous. But not too many,
please.
So long! Be careful to cross the road.
5. Read the same replies with Intonation Patterns II or IV. Observe the difference in
attitude.
6. Give a conversational context with the following sentences pronounced with
Intonation Patterns VI and VII. Your fellow-student will suggest a verbal context. You
respond to it using one of the sentences below. Keep the exercises moving on rapidly until
every student has participated:
1. On Saturday. 2. It's mine. 3. The style is good. 4. He's coming m a week. 5.
I saw him today. 6. It's not bad. 7. You needn't do it now. 8. You'll fall. 9. Your
chair's slipping. 10. You'll miss your train. 11. Try to be there by six. 12. Careful
with that glass. You'll drop it. 13. Mind. There's a step here. 14. Be quick. We are
going to be late. 15. You must call at Helen's.
7. Your teacher will suggest a verbal context. You in turn reply by using statements,
expressing contradiction, correction, contrast, concern, reproach, sometimes soothing.
8. Read the following sentences, containing the opposition. Use Intonation Patterns VI or
VII to express the opposition:
1. There was a beautiful vase on the piano and above it there lung a picture.
2. On the dressing table in front of the looking
glass you'll see a hair-brush and comb, a hand-mirror, a bottle of
scent and a powder-box. In the wardrobe I keep my suits and other clothes,
which I hang on coat-hangers. 3. Then there's the motor cycle, with which you
can travel quickly and cheaply, but for long journeys it's rather tiring. With a
motor-car one can travel comfortably foi long distances without getting too
tired. 4.1 saw members of the crew carrying out their duties in various parts of
the ship, while the captain watched the operations and gave his orders from
the bridge. 5. You'll probably want to sit as near to the stage as possible. But if
you're at a cinema, you may prefer to sit some distance from the screen. 6. She
kept the books in the bookcase and the dictionaries stood on the shelf
above her writing table. 7. The sun was shining brightly but the air was still
cold. 8. It takes 45 minutes to get there by bus. But if you go there by
metro it won't take you half an hour. 9. The lawns were already green, but
the apple-trees stood still bare. 10. The Smiths enjoyed the view of the
whole city from the Vorobyev Hills while the Wilsons liked the historical
monuments of Moscow. 11. We'd better put the table to the wall and the
armchairs in the corner of the room. 12. The elder children were tobogganing,
skiing, making snowmen while the smallest were just watching them. 13.
You may have a good time in town, going to the museums, theatres and cinemas.
But if you want to have a really quiet holiday you'd better go to the
country at the week-end. 14. It was already summer. The days were hot and
stuffy. But the mornings were still fresh.
9. Read the following sentences. Observe the position of the communicative centre.
Use Intonation Patterns VII in the clauses of condition and time to make the
communicative centre more prominent:
1. If you are going to stay in England for some time, you ought to spend at
least a week at the seaside. 2. But if you're at a cinema, you may prefer to sit
some distance from the screen. 3. If you can stay only a few days in London, you
won't have much time for your sightseeing. 4. If you want to send a telegram,
you can either take it to the nearest post-office or dictate it over the telephone. 5.
If you want to send a parcel, you hand it to the assistant. 6. If you want a guide to
show you round, they'll get you one. 7. If the price of a reel of cotton is
fourpence, you hand over four pennies for it. 8. If you feel too ill to go to the
doctor, you'll have to send for him. 9. While we were watching
the last scene, her hand small and hot touched mine. 10. When I met her at
the entrance to the theatre, she looked excited and her eyes sparkled. 11. And
before their tour came to an end, they had seen and learned a lot of interesting
things about our country. 12. When we were children, we used to enjoy playing
on the beach, making castles and forts and channels in the sand. 13. When you
are tired of London, go down to the sea for a week or a fortnight. 14. When
summer comes, the weather gets warmer still.
10. Read the sentences according to the situation suggested in brackets. Observe the
position of the communicative centre:
1. It was my first visit to London (not the second one). 2. I hope Mary will
come soon (not John). 3. She's coming on Sunday at four (not on Tuesday). 4. I'd
like to have a few English books (not Russian ones). 5. May I go and see Tom?
(not only ring him up) 6. This house is situated on the left side of the street (not
on the right one). 7. You'll find the magazine in the desk (not on the desk). 8. I
must see him (not his sister). 9. I did it (not anyone else). 10. Will you lead the
way? (I can't do it myself).
X X . This exercise is meant to develop your ability to hear the intonation and reproduce
it in proper speech situations, a) Listen to the Conversation "Asking the Way" (See p. 253)
sentence by sentence. Mark the stresses and tunes. Practise the dialogue, b) Record your
reading. Play the recording back immediately for your teacher and fellow-students to detect
the errors in your pronunciation. Practise the dialogue for test reading. Memorize and
dramatize it. c) Give conversational situations for the phrases of the following type:
I. Excuse me ... . 2. Excuse me, (officer) ... . 3. Can you tell me the way to ...?
4. Certainly. 5. Thank you very much. 6. How far is it from here? 7. There's sure
to be. 8. Yes, (sir), any (bus) will take you. 9. Sorry, (sir) ....
12. Read the following dialogues:
"Take matches."
"What's the time?"
"Where are they?"
"Ten to eleven."
"In the usual place, I expect."
"We shall have to be quick, then."
"I can't see them."
"He tells me you've been very good to him."
"Oh we do what we can for him. He is a nice boy." '
Л4 Заказ 1271
417
13. *** Make up a conversation with one of your fellow-students using phrases from the
Conversation "Asking the Way".
13. This exercise is meant to develop your ability to hear the intonation and to
reproduce it in reading, a) Listen to the text "A Street in London** sentence by sentence.
Write it down. Mark the stresses and tunes. Practise the text, b) Record your reading. Play the
recording back immediately for your teacher and fellow-students to detect the errors in your
pronunciation. Practise the text for test reading.
14. This exercise is meant to develop your ability to read and narrate a story with proper
intonation, a) Listen to the joke. Write it down. Mark the stresses and tunes. Practise reading
the joke, b) Listen carefully to the narration of the joke. Observe the peculiarities in
intonation-group division, pitch, stress and tempo. Note the use of temporizers. Retell the
joke according to the model you have listened to.
15. Read the jokes silently to make sure you understand each sentence. Find the main
sentence in the text. Split up each sentence into intonation-groups if necessary. Mark the
stresses and tunes. Underline the communicative centre and the nuclear word of each
intonation-group. It is not expected that each student will intone the text in the same way.
Your teacher will help you to correct your variant. Practise reading the joke several times.
Retell the joke according to the model above (see Ex. 15):
When a group of women got in the car every seat was already occupied. The
conductor noticed a man who seemed to be asleep, and, fearing he might miss his
stop he said to the man: "Wake up."
"I wasn't asleep," the man protested.
"But you had your eyes closed."
"I know. I just hate to look at ladies standing up in a crowded car."
* * *
A very stout lady said angrily that she wanted to report the conductor of the
bus that had just gone, "He's been rude," she shrilled. t "How?" asked the official.
"Why," went on the lady. "He was telling people the bus was full up and
when I got off he said: "Room for three inside."
Section Eleven
Intonation of Direct Address
M o d e l : vChildren, vlisten to me.
vMo,ther, j Vcan I have an 'ice-cream?
-> Never /mind, Tom, | I'll help you with vpleasure.
Direct Address at the Beginning of the Sentence
Direct address at the beginning of the sentence is stressed. It is pronounced
with the low-falling nuclear tone in formal serious speech and with the falling-
rising tone to attract the listener's attention or in a friendly conversation.-
e. g. vChildren, | ^listen to me. vMa,ry,
j -*come vhere.
EXERCISES
M o d e l 1: vPeter, | come vhere.
1. Listen carefully to the following sentences and repeat them in the intervals.
Concentrate your attention on the intonation of direct address:
1. Mary, sit down! 2. John, listen to me! 3. Harry, look at the map! 3.
Children, look at the blackboard! 5. Kitty, it's time to get up! 6. Peter, we've run
out of vegetables. 7. Peter, sit here on my left! 8. Tom, who's on duty? 9. Nick,
hurry up. 10. Boys, don't be so noisy.
2. Read the following sentences according to Model 1. Follow the intonation line
exactly:
1. Children, stand still at your desks! 2. Ann, stand up straight! 3. Comrades,
take your seats! 4. Helen, why were you absent yesterday? 5. Kitty, you're late
again. 6. Children, stop talking! 7. Ann, come to the board and divide it into two
parts.
8. Peter, please fetch some chalk! 9. Children, stop making noise! 10. Harry,
stand aside, so that we all can see the board.
M o d e l 2: xMO/ther, | Vcan I have an 'ice-,cream?
3. Listen carefully to the following sentences and repeat them in the intervals.
Concentrate your attention on the intonation of direct address:
1. Peter, may I use your pencil? 2. Edward, something has gone wrong with
my electric iron. 3. Mary, isn't this skirt long for me? 4. Porter, will you see to
my luggage, please? 5. Helen, darling, don't be angry with me. 6. Mum, I should
like another apple. 7. Ann, may I take your book? 8. Eddy, why didn't you phone
me? 9. Tom, why don't you wash your hands?
4. Read the following sentences according to Model 2. Follow the intonation line exactly:
1. Mother, could I go and play football now? 2. Mother, may I have another
cup of milk? 3. Ann, will you please give me a little more porridge? 4. Kitty, why
aren't you eating anything? 5. Bob, is there anything to your taste on the menu?
6. Peter, give me another glass of water, I am thirsty. 7. Mary, will you help me
to wash the dishes? 8. Ann, at what shop did you buy this hat? 9. Madam, which
is the biggest department store in Moscow?
Direct Address in the Middle or at the End of the Sentence
Direct address in the middle or at the end of the sentence is ordinarily
pronounced as the unstressed or half-stressed tail of the preceding intonation-
group. After the low-falling nucleus it can also be pronounced with the low-
rising tone.
е. д. I vsay, Mike, | I've V just had 'a 'wire from xMary. -> That's all /right,
darling. Good xmorning, Mrs. /Wood.
EXERCISES
5. Listen carefully to the following sentences and repeat them in the intervals.
Concentrate your attention on the intonation of direct address:
1. Good afternoon, Mrs. White, how are you? 2. Mind you don't miss the
train, sir. 3. Certainly, madam. 4. What's the salt for, Mum? 5. Right, Dad. 6.
Come on, Nora. 7. Hello, Betty, dear! 8. Well, what's the news, Mr. White? 9.
What do you think of London, Mrs. Thompson? 10. Well, what's the matter with
you, Mr. Walker? 11. Yes, of course, Mrs. Howard. 12, Good-bye, Mrs. Wood.
13. Had a good day, Nora? 14. Do you want me to do anything this evening,
Nora? 15. Shut the door behind you, Peter. 16. Good afternoon, sir, what can I do
for you? 17. Good morning, Mrs, Wood. 18. I'll go in and get them, Dad. 19,
You'll have to carry this case, Peter. 20. You know, Harry, there's a dance this
evening at the Town Hall. 21. And how do you like your tea, Mrs. White, strong
or weak? 22. Excuse me, officer, is there a bus from here to Trafalgar Square?
6. Read the following sentences according to the models given above. Follow the
intonation line exactly:
1. No more, Mum, thank you. 2. Good afternoon, Mrs. White, how are you?
3. I say, Helen, have you got anything special on tomorrow night? 4. Good
morning, Ann, glad to see ,you. 5.1 say, Peter, will you go to the cinema with
me? 6. Don't worry, Mary, I'll do that myself. 7. Now, Bobby, how much is two
plus four? 8. Now, Tom, why don't you wash your hands? 9.1 say, Mary, where is
my book? 10. You are wrong, Pete, that was yesterday, 11. Look, dear, a button
has come off my coat. 12. Now, James, you'll catch cold. 13. Can you come a
little earlier? — Oh, yes, darling, certainly. 14. Don't worry, Mother, I'll come in
time. 15. All right, mother, I'll come in an hour. 16. And now, my dear fellows,
good night to you all. 17. All right, Betty, I'll join you inaminute. 18.Thank you,
Mother, I don't want any more. 19.1 think, dear, you are right. 20. Hello, Robert,
do you want any help? 21. And now, Nina, repeat all the words you have
mispronounced. 22. Well, Ann, have you noticed any mistakes? 23. You forget,
Mother, that I am getting my stipend very soon. 24. Come on, Jim, we shall have
to hurry. 25. Look here, Mary, there's a concert this evening at the club. 26. You
know, Tom, when Bob was your age he was a very good pupil.
— Yes, Father, I know that. 27. You are wanted on the phone, Roger. 28.
Good evening, Mr. White. 29. Which book will you take, Henry? 30. Very well
done indeed, Tom! 31. I like your reading, Ann. 32. Change (turn) the sentence
into a question, Jim. 33. Stop talking, Ann. 34. What's the date today, Ben? 35.
Go to the board, Jimmy. 36. Don't prompt him, Ann. 37. Repeat the word, Ann.
38. What is the Russian for this word, Pete? 39. Read the first sentence, Mike.
40. Put down (take down) your homework, children! 41. You'll help me, wont
you, Nina? 42. Now remember what I've said, Peter. 43. How are you, Harry? 44.
Glad to see you, Arthur. 45. Have some more pudding, Ann? 46. Please read to
yourself, Mary, and not aloud. 47. Good morning, madam. Can I help you? 48.
May I ask you a question, Comrade Petrov? 49. Will you have anything to drink,
Sir? 50. Isn't it a pretty thing, Mother? 51. D'you want to make me a model boy,
Mum? 52. What have we got to eat, Mum? 53. Can I have another glass of tea,
Mary? 54. May I take your pen, Ann? 55. I'm so sorry, Mother. 56. Can I have an
apple, Mum? 57. Haven't you finished your work yet, John? 58. May I use your
pencil, Bob? 59. Give it to me, Ann. 60. Good-bye, Mr. Smith. 61. Give your
book to Ann, Mary. 62. May I go to th^ cinema, Mother?
7. Address your friend placing direct address at the beginning, in the
middle and at the end of the sentence.
4
8. "* This exercise is meant to develop your ability to hear the intona-
tion and reproduce it in proper conversational situations, a) Listen to the
dialogue "Shopping" sentence by sentence. Write it down. Mark the stress-
es and tunes. Practise the dialogue, b) Record your reading. Play the re-
cording back immediately for the teacher and your fellow-students to de-
tect the possible errors in your pronunciation. Practise the dialogue for test
reading, memorize and dramatize it:
Shopping
"Er — Excuse me, how do I get to the glove department?" "Over there on the
left, madam, just past the ribbon counter." "Is this the right counter for gloves?"
"Yes, madam. What sort of gloves do you require? Kid, suede, chamois ...?"
"Well, let me see some of each." "Certainly, madam. What
size do you take?"
"Six and a quarter, I believe, but you'd better measure my hand to make
sure."
"I think a six is your size. How do you like these? I can recommend them,
they're very reliable."
"How much are they?"
"Nineteen and eleven (19/11), madam."
"Very well, I'll take them. And now, how do I get to the shoe department?"
"Come this way, please, and I'll show you ... just over there beyond the
millinery department."
"What kind of shoe did you want, madam? Calf, qlace, suede...?"
"I want a strong walking shoe with a low heel. Perhaps calf would be best. I
like court shoes, but of course high heels aren't suitable for country wear ... As
you see, I have rather small feet."
"Here's a pair about your size. Try them on ... How do they feel?"
"They're fairly comfortable, but they're a bit tight across the toes; I suppose
they'll give a little." "Yes, they'll stretch with wearing."
"Very well, then... Now, let's see, what else did I want. Oh yes, some silk
stockings, shoe-polish, a pair of scissors, and some safety-pins."
c)
Use the phrases below in conversational situations:
1. Excuse me, how do I get to ...? 2. Is this the right ...? 3, What sort of ...? 4.
What size do you take? 5. How much ...? 6. This way, please. 7. As you see ....
d) Make up a dialogue of your own using phrases from the dialogue
"Shopping".
9. " Listen to the dialogue. Write it down. Practise it in pairs until you
can say it in exactly the same way.
10.
Read and reproduce the following dialogues. Concentrate your
attention on the intonation of direct address:
"Now, take out your books and open them at Page Thirty. Peter, where did
we leave off yesterday?"
"We left off at the second paragraph on Page Thirty."
"Thank you! Ann, will you please read the text. Don't prompt her, John. Has
she made any mistakes, comrades?" 0
"Ann didn't pronounce the word 'work' correctly."
"Say the word, Ann!"
"Johnny, why are you late for school every morning?" "Every time I come to
the corner the sign says: 'School Go slow'."
May I use your pen, Mary?" By all means."
"Peter, may I take your book?"
"By all means."
("Of course you may.")
"John, haven't you finished that
book yet?" "I've only just begun it."
"Darling, will you marry me?" "No, but I will always admire your good
taste."
Peter's got your pen, Daddy." "Put it down. Peter."
'Mike's pulling my hair, Mummy." 'Stop it, Mike."
I've been helping Mummy, Daddy."
That's a good girl."
"John, why were you absent yesterday?"
"I was ill. Here is a note from the doctor."
"Can I have an apple, Mother?"
"You ate the last one th.s morning."
"Ann, it's time to get up." "But it's only half past six."
"Hello, Steve."
"Good afternoon, Mr. Davis."
"Which will you take, Henry?" "This one."
"I pointed it all by myself,
Daddy." "There's a clever boy."
"It Was all your fault, Ann." "But it wasn't."
"Tom's having tea. What for you,
Peter?" "I'd prefer a cup of coffee."
"Can you go to the circus, Daddy?" "I'll see."
"John will be at home at seven,
Mrs. Read." "Thank you." "I'm so sorry, Mummy."
"Are you really sorry? "
"Can I have an ice-cream,
Mum?" "Later on."
"Tell me, doctor. Is he badly
hurt?" "Nothing at all serious."
11. *** This exercise is meant to develop your ability to read a text with
proper intonation, a) Listen to the text "The Big Stores" sentence by
sentence. Mark the stresses and tunes. Practise reading the text, b) Record
your reading. Play the recording back immediately for your teacher and
fellow-students to detect your possible errors, c) Practise the story for test
readings:
The Big Stores
I went into one of the big London stores today and enjoyed myself very
much, just wandering from one department to another, looking at the various
articles on the counters. I thought the assistants were very helpful. There must
have been some hundreds of salesmen and saleswomen and dozens of different
departments, including china, haberdashery, confectionery, hardware and even
provisions. I went from one department to another — from umbrellas to gloves,
from fancy goods to lace — up and down, in lifts and on escalators. As I was
going through the book department, I was surprised to meet an old friend of
mine, whom I hadn't seen for years. We went up to the restaurant and had lunch
together.
We didn't finish lunch until half past two. Then we did some shopping
together. I helped her to buy some presents for her children. I can't tell you how
glad we were to see each other again. We used to be very great friends. I hadn't
seen her for — let me see — ten or twelve years, at least.
12. This exercise is meant to develop your ability to read and narrate a
story with proper intonation, a) Listen to the joke. Write it down. Mark the
stresses and tunes. Practise reading the joke, b) Listen carefully to the
narration of the joke. Observe the peculiarities in intonation-group division,
pitch, stress and tempo. Note the use of temporisers. Retell the joke
according to the model you have listened to.
13. Read the jokes silently to make sure you understand each sentence, find the most
important phrase in the story, underline it, split up every sentence into intonation-groups,
mark the stresses and tunes. Practise reading the jokes several times. Retell the jokes
following the model above (See Ex. 12):
Jack's Mistake
J a c k ' s M o t h e r : There were three pieces of cake in the cupboard, Jack,
and now there are only two.
J a c k : It was so dark there, Mamma, that I didn't see the others.
A Correction
T e a c h e r : Jimmie, why don't you wash your face? I can see what you had
for breakfast this morning. L i t t l e b o y : What was it? T e a c h e r : Eggs!
L i t t l e b o y : You are wrong, teacher, that was yesterday.
Whose Mistakes?
T e a c h e r (looking through Teddy's homework): I wonder how one
person could make so many mistakes.
T e d d у: It wasn't one person, teacher. Father helped me.
Father and Son
F a t h e r : You know, Tom, when Lincoln was your age he was a very good
pupil. In fact, he was the best pupil in his class.
T o m : Yes. Father, 1 know that. But when he was your age he was President
of the United States.
At a Restaurant
"Here, waiter, it seems to me tha't this fish is not so fresh as the fish you
served us last Sunday." "Pardon, sir, it is the same fish."
Section Twelve
I. Intonation of the Author's Words
M o d e l : "I'm not ready," he said."Are you ,sure?" he asked, |.looking
x
a , round him ashe , spoke.He > said: | Look at the^picture."He ,said: |
"The film was^excellent."He said: | "That's all."
v
x
The Author's Words Following Direct Speech
The author's words which follow the direct speech are usually pronounced as
an unstressed or half-stressed tail of the preceding intonation-group.
e. g. "I'm -» not vready," he said.
"Is -> this for ,me?" he asked with surprise.
If the tail gets longer, it may form a separate intonation-group. In this case it
is stressed and is pronounced with the same nuclear tone as the preceding
intonation-group but on a lower pitch level.
e. g. "I'm xsorry," | a, gain re, pea ted the ^landlord
If the author's words form two or more intonation-groups, the first of them
doesn't form a separate intonation-group. The second and the third are always
stressed and pronounced each on a lower pitch level. The nuclear tone of the
final intonation-group is usually that of the sentences in the direct speech. The
non-final intonation-groups may be pronounced either with the low-rising tone or
with the low-falling tone according to their semantic importance.
e. g. "What a vpity!" was all I said | when he .broke a x glass. "VDo you
'think 'that's ,fair?" she asked, | .looking at me with surprise.
EXERCISES
M o d e l 1: "I'm -> not vready," he said slowly.
"-+ No, I vcan't," she replied, | shaking her head.
1. Listen carefully to the following sentences. Concentrate your attention on the
intonation of the author's words following direct speech:
1. "I don't know," he said quietly. 2. "What's it for?" he inquired in a whisper.
3. "Come here," she ordered in a sharp voice. 4. "It isn't mine," he said for the
second time. 5. "Give it to me," she said with a smile. 6. "You've dropped it on
the floor," he complained to her. 7. "You'll have to put a stamp on," he explained
in his best French. 8. "Come here!" commanded the captain in a loud voice. 9.
"Be back in half an hour," she reminded him sternly. 10. "You've made the same
mistake again," the teacher complained with a frown. 11. "It's nearly ten o'clock,"
she observed glancing at her watch. 12. "What a pity!" was all I said when he
broke a glass. 13. "Quite right," he added nodding his head. 14. "Pleased to meet
you," he said holding out his hand. 15. "I think it's going to rain," he remarked,
looking up at the black sky, 16. "I must put some coal on the fire," she remarked
getting up from her chair. 17. "We really must be going now," she said getting up
out of her chair. 18. "1 disagree," said the next speaker rising to his feet. 19.
"Stop it!" shouted the little girl to her brother. 20. "It's not possible," was the
opinion he offered after a moment's thought. 21. "It's rather expensive," she
remarked looking in the shop window. 22. "You don't mean it, madam," said the
girl, and there was pain in her voice.
2. Listen to the same sentences and repeat them in the intervals. Pronounce the author's
words on a low pitch level.
3. In order to fix the intonation of the author's words in your mind, ear and speech habits
repeat the sentences yourself until they sound perfectly natural to you.
4. Listen to a fellow-student reading the sentences. Tell him what his errors in the
intonation of the anther's words are.
5. Read the following drill sentences according to Model 1. Concentrate your attention
on the author's words following direct speech:
1. "What have we got to eatr Mum?" asked Robert. 2. "It's coming on to
pour," said Nora. 3. "It's much fresher here than in London," said Mrs. Hilton. 4.
"My husband is coming in a moment," said Mrs. Martin, taking off her hat. 5. "I
like your house very much. It's the quietest I know," she said, looking at her
friend with a smile. 6. "It hasn't rained since Sunday," she said, looking out of the
window, 7. "It's dry enough to sit on the grass," she said spreading the table-
cloth. 8. "Don't be too quick about spreading that table-cloth, Nora. I felt a spot
of rain," said Harry, looking up at the sky. 9. "Well, I am glad he came back,"
said Mrs. Meadows with a faint smile. 10. "Oh, Robert, you can't believe how
much I've enjoyed that wonderful play!" exclaimed Jean as they were leaving the
theatre.
M o d e l 2" "Is -> this for ,me?" he asked with surprise.
"Is -*that all 7пд1и?" she asked | showing him the /letter
6. Listen carefully^ to the following sentences. Concentrate your attention on the
intonation of the author's words:
1. "Do you really think so?" she said excitedly. 2. "I hope you don't mind,"
she remarked apologetically. 3. "It's the best you can do," he explained to them.
4. "Did you meet him?" she inquired at once. 5. "Do you think it's true?" they
kept on asking. 6. "Would you like a cup of tea?" she said with a smile 7. "Will
you wait for me?" she called from upstairs. 8. "Please, take one," she said
invitingly. 9. "Shall we ask him too?" they whispered to one another. 10. "It's not
so bad," he said at last. 11. "Did you hear?" he repeated with an angry frown.
7. Listen to the same sentences and repeat them in the intervals. Follow the intonation
line exactly.
8. In order to fix the intonation of the author's words in your mind, ear and speech habits
repeat the sentences yourself until they sound perfectly natural to you.
9. Listen to a fellow-student reading the sentences. Tell him what his errors in the
intonation of the author's words are.
7. Read the following drill sentences according to Model 2. Concentrate your attention
on the intonation of the author's words following direct speech:
1. "Do you think it's too damp to sit on the grass?" asked Nora. 2. "Does this
bus go to Trafalgar Square?" asked the man. "Can I get there by the metro?" he
asked. 3. "Have you ever been married, Captain Meadows?" I asked. 4. "Would
you like to go to the theatre with me?" asked Nick handing the ticket to his
friend. 5. "Have you ever been to that museum?" asked the guide, pointing to an
old building across the street. 6. "Is there a bus from here to Trafalgar Square?"
asked the man, standing on the platform.
11.Read the following according to Models 1 or 2:
a) "Tickets, please!" called the attendant as they entered the hall.
"You've got them, haven't you, Emily?" asked Miss Green. "Yes, of course!"
her friend answered, handing them to the attendant.
"This way, please," he said going on ahead of them.
b) "And how are you today?" smiled the doctor, entering the little girl's room.
"All right, thank you," she answered, looking at him timidly.
"Open your mouth!" he said, bending over her bed. "Now say Ah!" he added,
as he peered down her throat.
"Do you think she's better, doctor?" asked the mother.
"She'll be all right in a day or two," the doctor replied with an encouraging
smile.
The Author's Words Preceding Direct Speech
M o d e l s : He > said: | "The -» play is ^perfect."
He xsaid: | "The -» play is ^perfect." He ,said: | "The -» play is
^perfect."
The author's words introducing the direct speech form an intonation-group
and are usually pronounced with the mid-level, low-falling or low-rising nuclear
tone.
M o d e l 1: My -» mother > said: | "You -» look xtired."
12.
Listen carefully to the following sentences. Concentrate your attention on the
intonation of the author's words preceding direct speech:
1. He said: "They were very glad to get a letter from you." 2. He asked:
"What else can I do for you?" 3. George said: "Let's go to London early on
Wednesday morning." 4. He said: "I want two stalls if you've got them." 5. She
said: "They'll do very well." 6. He said: "I don't quite like the final scene in the
play."
13.
Listen to the same sentences and repeat them in the intervals. Pronounce the
author's words with the mid-level tone.
14.
In order to fix the intonation of the author's words in your mind, ear and speech
habits repeat the sentences yourself until they sound perfectly natural to you.
15.
Listen to a fellow-student reading the sentences. Tell him what his errors in the
intonation of the author's words are.
16.
Read the following drill sentences according to Model 1. Concentrate your
attention on the intonation of the author's words preceding direct speech:
1. He said: "You are wrong." 2. She said: "Don't hurry. The performance is
not over." 3. They said: "We enjoyed ourselves at the party." 4. He said: "There is
no doubt she tells the truth." 5. He said: "She accepted the invitation." 6. They
say: "Our seats were far from the stage." 7. They said: "The best seats at theatres
are those in the stalls."
M o d e l 2: The -> teacher vsaid: Stand xup."
17. Listen carefully to the following sentences. Concentrate your attention on the
intonation of the author's words preceding direct speech:
1. He said: "They were very glad to get a letter from you." 2. He asked:
"What else can I do for you?" 3, George said: "Let's go to London early on
Wednesday morning." 4. He said: "I want two stalls if you've got them."
18.
Listen to the same sentences and repeat them in the intervals. Pronounce the
author's words with the low-falling tone.
19.
In order to fix the intonation of Model 2 in your mind, ear and speech habits repeat
the sentences yourself until they sound perfectly natural to you.
20.
Read the following sentences according to Model 2. Concentrate your attention on
the intonation of the author's words preceding direct speech:
1. She said: "I haven't laughed so much for a long time." 2. He said: "Show
your tickets to the attendant inside the theatre." 3. She said: "The play isn't over
till half past five." 4. He said: "She'll show you to your seats."
M o d e l 3: She ,said: | "The acting was ^excellent".
21.
Listen carefully to the following sentences. Concentrate your attention on the
intonation of the author's words preceding direct speech:
1. She said: "They'll do very well." 2. He said: "I don t quite like the final
scene in the play." 3. They said: "Our seats were in the orchestra stalls and we
saw the stage well." 4. She said: "The play is worth seeing."
22.
Listen to the same sentences and repeat them in the intervals. Pronounce the
author's words with the low-rising tone.
23.
In order to fix the intonation of the author's words in your mind, ear and speech
habits repeat the sentences yourself until they sound perfectly natural to you.
24.
class="book">Read the following drill sentences according to Model 3. Concentrate your
attention on the intonation of the author's words preceding direct speech:
1. She said: "I like drama and ballet, but I don't quite like opera." 2. He said:
"The attendant showed us to our seats and gave us the programme." 3. She said:
"Please book two more tickets for me." 4. He said: "Would you like to go to the
theatre with me?" 5. The attendant said: "Would you like the programme?" 6.
She asked: "What do you think of the play?" 7. She asked: "Have you got any
seats for tomorrow?" 8. She said: "The acting was excellent."
25. Read the following dialogue. Express proper attitudes. Concentrate on the
intonation of the author's words:
"I've come up to talk to you," my mother said, "while you are getting ready.
Who's going to be at the party?" "I don't know," I said. "Will you enjoy it?" my
mother asked. "I hope so," I said.
"You've only got fifteen minutes," my mother said.
"Yes, I know."
"Can I help you?" my mother asked. "No, thanks
awfully," I said. "Will Betty be there?" "No," I said.
"Why not?"
"Because the people giving the party don't know her." "That's funny," my
mother said. "I wonder why they don't. Isn't that funny, their not knowing her?"
"Why?"
"Well because it is," my mother said. "Why don't you introduce her to them?
They'd like her. I've always liked Betty. . I like that dress. It suits you. It doesn't
make you look old like some of the things you wear. What on earth are you
doing to your hair?"
"Putting it on top."
"Oh, I don't like that," my mother said. "Why are you doing it like that?" "I
like it."
"Your father won't like it," my mother said. "Good heavens, your stockings
are transparent." "Yes."
"What's the good of wearing transparent stockings if your legs are blue?" my
mother asked. "Are you going to wear your boots and take your shoes with you
in a bag?"
"No," I said.
"You've only got five minutes now," my mother said. "Yes, I know."
"Will Sammy be there?" my mother asked. "I think so."
"Oh good," my mother said. "I hope you'll be nice and polite to him. You
will, won't you?" "Yes."
"Yes, try," my mother said. "Would you like him to come to tea?" "No."
"Oh, all right," my mother said. "But I think you're very silly, that's all. I
remember I didn't really like your father very much when I first met him, but
you won't take any notice of anything I can say. Can you walk in these shoes?"
"Yes."
"You are going to be late, aren't you?" my mother said. "Yes."
"Oh!" my mother cried. "You're not wearing your cardigan. Why have you
taken it off? Why aren't you wearing your cardigan?"
"Because I am not going to," I said.
"You'll be sorry," my mother said, "when the others are all enjoying
themselves and you are sitting near the fire with your teeth chattering and a red
nose. Sammy won't find that attractive."
"I'm ready now," I said. "Good-bye." "Enjoy
yourself, good-bye."
II. Intonation of Enumeration
M o d e l : I've V visited the 'British Mu,seum, | the National /Gallery | and
the vTate.
If a sentence contains enumeration, all non-final intonation-groups are
usually pronounced with the Low Rise each being a bit lower than the preceding
one. The final intonation-group is pronounced with the Low Fall if the choice of
enumeration is exhausted.
26.**" This exercise is meant to develop your ability to read sentences containing
enumeration. Listen to the text. Mark the stresses and tunes. Pick out of the text
sentences containing enumeration. Observe the intonation they are pronounced with.
Practise the text:
Theatres, Music-Halls and Cinemas
Theatres are much the same in London as anywhere else; the chief theatres,
music-halls and cinemas are in the West End.
If you're staying in London for a few days, you'll have no difficulty whatever
in finding somewhere to spend an enjoyable evening. You'll find opera, ballet,
comedy, drama, review, musical comedy and variety. Films are shown in the
cinemas during the greater part of the day. The best seats at the theatres are those
in the stalls, the circle, and the upper circle. Then comes the pit, and last of all
the gallery, where the seats are cheapest. Boxes, of course, are the most
expensive. Most theatres and music-halls have good orchestras with popular
conductors. You ought to make a point of going to the opera at least once during
the season, if you can. There you can get the best of everything — an excellent
orchestra, famous conductors, celebrated singers and a well-dressed audience.
But, of course, if you're not fond of music and singing, opera won't interest you.
At the West-End theatres you can see most of the famous English actors and
actresses. As a rule, the plays are magnificently staged — costumes, dresses,
scenery, everything being done on the most lavish scale. Choose a good play,
and you'll enjoy yourself thoroughly from the moment the curtain goes up to the
end of the last act. Get your seat beforehand, either at the box-office of the
theatre itself or at one of the agencies. When you go to a theatre, you'll probably
want to sit as near to the stage as possible. But if you're at the cinema, you may
prefer to sit some distance from the screen. In fact, I would say, the further away,
the better.
27. Read the following sentences. Observe the intonation of enumeration:
1. Presently the maid brings in tea on a trolley: a pot of tea, cups and saucers,
hot water, a jug of milk, and sugar; also sandwiches, bread and butter, jam, and
cakes. 2. Mary has laid the table in the usual way, and has put the right number
of knives, forks, spoons and glasses for each person. 3. There's also pepper and
salt, oil and vinegar and mustard. 4. On the sideboard the Browns usually have a
bowl of fruit: apples, pears, plums, cherries, grapes, oranges or bananas
according to the season. 5.1 get out of bed, put on my dressing-gown and
slippers and go into the bathroom. 6. On the dressing table, in front of the
looking-glass, you'll see a hair-brush and a comb, a hand-mirror, a bottle of
scents and a powder-box. 7. In all large towns there are plenty of restaurants,
cafes, tea-rooms, and inns or public-houses.
8. One of the people in the picture is buying postage-stamps, another is
registering a letter, the third is writing out a cable.
28. Read the text:
My brother and his wife have just gone back to their home in the country
after spending a week with us. As we live in London, they were glad of the
chance to visit as many theatres and music-halls as they could. They have a good
cinema in the little town where they live, so they didn't want to see any films
while they were here, but were very keen to see as many plays as possible.
During the day, my wife and sister-in-law used to visit the shops, and one
afternoon they went to a picture-gallery. Then in the evenings, we would all meet
for dinner and go on to a play.
We saw several plays, including two new ones, with two very promising
young actresses. When I was younger, I used to go to the theatre a lot. I used to
queue up for a seat in the gallery in those days. I must say I enjoy being able to
have a good seat in the stalls now, and I like to book the seats beforehand to save
trouble.
We saw a very good review too. The music and costumes were most
attractive. The last evening before our visitors had to go home, we saw a musical
comedy. I am not very fond of these myself, as a rule, but I thoroughly enjoyed
this one. We were all rather tired, I think, and it made a change from the serious
drama that we'd seen the night before.
29. *" This exercise is meant to develop your ability to hear and re-
produce intonation in proper speech situations, a) Listen to the dialogue "At
the Theatre" sentence by sentence. Write it down. Mark the stresses and
tunes. Practise reading each sentence after the cassette-recorder, b) Record
your reading. Play the recording back immediately for your teacher and fel-
low-students to detect your possible errors. Practise the dialogue for test
reading, memorize and dramatize it. c) Give conversational situations with
the phrases below:
1. Have you got (any seats for tomorrow) ? 2. They'll do very well, thank
you. 3. May I see your (tickets), please? 4. This way, please. 5. Yes, please. 6.
The (play) isn't over till (half past five). 7. What did you think of (it) ? 8.1
thought it was splendid. 9. The whole thing was first-rate from beginning to end.
10. How much (is that) ? 11. Shall I (bring you some tea, sir) ? 12. Neither have
I.
30.
Make up a conversation with a fellow-student using any phrases from the dialogue
**At the Theatre".
31.
This exercise is meant to develop your ability to reproduce the text with correct
intonation, a) Listen to the joke "The Bell-Boy" sentence by sentence. Write it down. Mark
the stresses and tunes. Practise the joke for test reading, b) Listen to the narration of the joke.
Observe the peculiarities in intonation-group division, pitch, stress and tempo. Note the use
of temporizers. Retell the joke according to the model you have listened to.
32.
Read the jokes silently to make sure you understand each sentence. Find the main
sentence in the text. Split up each sentence intonation-groups if necessary. Mark the stresses
and tunes. Underline the communicative centre and the nuclear word of each intonation-
group. It is not expected that each student will intone the text in the same way. Your teacher
will help you to correct your variant. Practise reading the jokes several times. Retell the jokes
following the model above (See Ex. 31):
A man was at a theatre. He was sitting behind two women whose continuous
chatter became more than he could bear. Leaning forward he said to one of them:
"Pardon me, madam, I can't hear."
"You are not supposed to — this is a private conversation," she answered.
Too Great a Majority
George Bernard Shaw's gift of ready wit is well illustrated by the story of
how he turned the laugh against a member of the public who was expressing
disapproval of one of his plays.
It was the first night of "Arms and the Man", a play which had an enthusiastic
reception from a crowded house. When the curtain fell at the end of the last act
there was tremendous applause, accompanied by insistent calls for the author to
appear. One man in the gallery, however, kept up a string of catcalls and
whistling, thus expressing his disapproval.
Shaw appeared before the curtain and waited in silence until the applause had
died down. Then, looking up at the hostile critic, he said:
"I quite agree with you, sir, but what can we two do against all these people?"
Section Thirteen
Intonation Pattern VIII
(LOW PRE-HEAD + ) LOW HEAD + LOW RISE ( + TAIL)
Model: He says he'll never speak to me again.
He „doesn't Mreally ,mean it.
Stress-and-tone marks in the text: a stressed syllable of the low head: | H |
In the usual form of the low head, all the syllables contained in it are said on
the same, rather low pitch. This intonation pattern is used:
1. I n s t a t e m e n t s , encouraging further conversation; reprovingly
critical, guarded, reserving judgement, appealing to the listener to change his
attitude.
e. gr. Гш just back from seeing my mother. I , .trust you ,,found her ,well.
—
Take no notice of him. We must „do as he ,says.
2.1n q u e s t i o n s : h
a) s p e c i a l q u e s t i o n s , calm, but very disapproving'.
e. gr. I don't agree. „Why ,not?
—
b) g e n e r a l q u e s t i o n s , expressing disapproval, scepticism.
e. g. I'm sorry, Mummy. — MAre you , really sorry?
3. I n i m p e r a t i v e s , reprovingly critical, resentful.
e. g. He'll let me have it by Monday. ,.Don't be „too ,sure.
—
4. I n e x c l a m a t i o n s ; calm, reserving judgement, expressing casual
acknowledgement.
e. gr. You can have it if you like. — ,.Thanks very /much.
1 . a)* Listen carefully to the following conversational situations. Concentrate your
attention on the intonation of the replies:
Verbal Context
Drill
How much did you win? I've got odd socks on. I feel terrible about it.
What's your opinion of his work? I'm
S t a t e m e n t s
told you refused his offer. Will you be
(encouraging further
calling again? Can I have another apple? cdptversation, ' reprovingly
He's nice, isn't he?
critical guarded, reserving
judgement)
It's not bad. That's quite right. It's quite possible. Well, I don't know. So I'm
told. So they say. We shall see.
About a thousand pounds. No one'll notice. You've nothing to reproach
yourself about. I trust you found her well.
I hope you had a good game.
I'm just back from seeing my mother.
I've just been playing badminton.
You were rather harsh with him. I'll give you a jolly good hiding. Please don't
do that. Harry's just arrived.
I'd like a new hat.
I thought she was in France.
Let's talk to him on the phone.
S p e c i a l q u e s t i o n s (calm, but very disapproving)
Well, what of it?
And who'll help you?
And why shouldn'11 ?
Who on earth told him to
come?
Who's going to pay for it? Where did you get that idea from?
What makes you think that will do any good?
G e n e r a l q u e s t i o n s
I'd no idea how to get there. The bus is at five I'm told. He's not good enough,
I tell you. We must get on with it now.
He says he'll never speak to me again.
I've asked Mary but she hasn't any.
I don't think I can dive from that height.
I won't have anything to do with him.
She's so terribly rude. I'm sorry.
I'm terribly sorry.
I can't make six o'clock.
I can't help you.
You can have it if you like.
(disapproving, sceptical) *
Couldn't you have asked? r Have you made sure? Mayn't you be mistaken?
Couldn't it be left till this evening?
He doesn't really mean it (does he?)
I m p e r a t i v e s (reprovingly critical, resentM)
Ask Mabel then.
Have a shot at it.
Don't be so silly.
Don't take any notice of her. Well, say it as if you meant it.
Don't apologise.
E x c l a m a t i o n s
(calm, reserving judgement, expressing casual acknowledgement)
All right. Very well. Thanks very much.
b) Listen to the replies above and repeat them in the intervals. Make your voice follow
the intonation line exactly, c) Listen to the verbal context and reply in the interval, d) In order
to fix Pattern VIII in your mind and ear, pronounce each reply several times until it sounds
perfectly natural to you. Don't forget to pay attention to the verbal context, e) Listen to a
fellow-student reading the replies above. Try to detect any failure to reproduce the pattern.
The errors must be pointed out and eliminated.
2. Listen to your teacher saying the context sentences below. Pronounce each of the
following replies in two ways: first with Intonation Pattern VIII, then with Intonation
Pattern IV. Be careful with the intonation line, observe the difference in attitudes. Make
a fellow-student decide what attitude you are trying to render;
Hullo, Mary!
How long have you been here? I can't find my gloves anywhere. Shall I do it
now? When will he return? Can I take the cassette-recorder now?
We shall have to tell him the truth.
He said he was miserable.
I didn't think much of the party.
You shouldn't have been rude to her.
['ve broken the vase.
Oh, I'm miserable!
I'm really sorry, John.
We must be getting home now.
Here is a cake for you.
You can have all of them if you
like.
I shall never see him again. Look! A hedgehog! Good morning, Jane. Let's go
through the forest.
You're looking very tired. Not very long. That's strange. It's up to you.
He'll return as soon as he can. I don't think you can.
We can't do that.
He said no such thing. Why didn't you leave sooner?
And what's it got to do with you?
How did you manage to do that?
What's the matter with you? Are you sure you are sorry? Wouldn't it be better
to wait
till ten o'clock? Can't you give me more
than one? Thanks very much.
Don't be so silly. Don't touch it. Good morning. If you like.
3. Translate the replies above into Russian. Pronounce them trying to express the
corresponding attitude in your mother tongue. Is the attitude expressed by means of
intonation only, as in English, or do we use any additional words to render it?
4. Read the verbal context below silently and translate the replies into English.
Pronounce the replies trying to render the attitude suggested in brackets. Concentrate
your attention on the intonation line. Decide what Intonation Pattern you are using in
each reply:
Will you be calling again? What a charming person she is!
I shall give them all to Mary.
You were rather rude to him. Oh dear, oh dear!
You must return it.
He is going to pay next month.
Let me have ten of them.
. Are you certain he knows them?
Вполне возможно, (reassuring)
Она довольно красива. (guarded, reserving judgement)
Но это очень несправедливо, (critical)
Ну и что же? (calm)
Что такое с тобой случилось? (sympathetic)
И ты серьезно так думаешь? (sceptical)
И ты не очень-то верь этому, (reprovingly critical)
Очень хорошо, (expressing casual acknowledgement)
Ну, не совсем, пожалуй. (reserving judgement)
5. Your teacher will ask you the following questions. You in turn respond to them using
Intonation Patterns 111, IV, VIII. Decide what attitude you are trying to express in each
response:
1. Shall we postpone the meeting then? 2. How did you come to lose it? 3.
When did you see him? 4. Does John always forget? 5. Were there many people
there? 6. What made you do such a stupid thing? 7. How many pencils do you
want? 8. Where does he come from? 9. Can I see him if I come back later? 10.
Can't we do something about it? 11. Shall I phone you? 12. What's your opinion
of his work? 13. Can I come again tomorrow? 14. Could you send me another
copy? 15. Do you mind waiting a little longer?
6. This exercise is meant to develop your ability to hear and reproduce intonation in the
dialogue, a) Listen to the dialogue carefully sentence by sentence. Write it down. Mark the
stresses and tunes. Practise reading each sentence after the cassette-recorder, b) Record your
reading. Play the recording back immediately for your teacher and fellow-students to detect
your errors. Practise the dialogue for test reading. Memorize and play it with a fellow-
student:
H а г г у: Do you want me to do anything this evening, Nora? N о r a: I don't
think so.
H a r r y : You're sure there's nobody coming to see us? N o r a : No, I don't
think there is.
H a r r y : And there's nothing you want me to listen to on the wireless?
N o r a : I'm sure there isn't!
H a r r y : Then will it be all right for me to go round to the club?
N o r a : Oh yes, I should think so. H a r r y : It's
a long time since I went. N o r a : I suppose it is.
H a r r y : The chaps are wondering what's happened to me.
N о r a: I suppose they must be.
H a г г у: I'd like a game of billiards with the chaps.
N о r a: I expect you would.
H a r r y : I'm fond of billiards.
N o r a : Yes, I know you are.
H a г г у: I get out of practice if I stay away too long. N о r a: I dare say you
do.
H a r r y : Besides, didn't Bonnet telephone last week and ask me to have a
game?
N o r a : Now you mention it, I believe he did.
H a r r y : So you won't mind if I go off just for this evening, will you?
N о r a: Of course I won't.
H a r r y : I'll go up and change.
N o r a : Yes, do. Only —
H a r r y : Only what?
N o r a : Well, Harry, don't you remember that today's the anniversary of our
wedding day? H a r r y : Good heavens, so it is! N o r a : And you promised we
should always keep it. H a r r y : So I did!
N o r a : You know, Harry, there's a dance this evening at the Town Hall.
H a r r y : So there is?
N о r a: So do you still think you'll go round to the club? H a r r y : No —
somehow I don't think I will.
("Meet the Parkers", a Lmgaphone Course)
с) Listen to a fellow-student reading the dialogue above. Try to detect any failure to
reproduce the pattern. The errors must be pointed out and eliminated, d) Give a
conversational context with the following phrases:
1. I don't think so. 2. No, I don't think you will. 3. I'm sure there isn't. 4. So I
did. 5. So there is. 6. Oh yes, I should think so. 7. I suppose it is. 8. I expect you
would. 9. I think you are. 10. No — somehow I think I don't.
e) Make up a conversation with phrases from the dialogue.
7. Listen to the verbal context suggested by your teacher or a fellow-student. Respond by
using Intonation Pattern IV or VIII in your reply. Decide if you are going to sound reserved or
friendly and encouraging.
8. This exercise is intended to develop your ability to use different Intonation Patterns in
reading, a) Read the dialogues "On the Road" and others silently to make sure you understand
each sentence. Underline the communicative centre in each phrase. Decide what attitude
should 'be expressed in it. Mark the stresses and tunes, keeping the attitude constantly in
mind. Practise reading the dialogues with a fellow-student. Memorize them, b) Make up a
conversation with a fellow-student using any phrases from the dialogues below. Keep the
attitude in mind:
a) J а с к: Are we on the right road? J i l l : I think
so.
J a c k : You think so. Aren't you sure?
J i l l : No, I'm not sure. I've only been along this road once before.
J a c k : Then we'd better ask someone, hadn't we? J i l l : Yes, that's the right
thing to do. We don't want to lose our way. Look, there's' a postman. He'll know.
J a c k : Does this road go to Henfield? P o s t m a n : Yes, this is the Henfield
road. J a c k : Is it very far?
P o s t m a n : No, not very far. About an hour's walk. J a c k : There are no
buses to Henfield along this road, are there?
P o s t m a n : Oh, yes, but the buses don't come very often. Only about four
times a day.
J а с к: Do you know when the next bus comes along?
P o s t m a n : Not until half past seven. You can be in Henfield long before
then if you walk.
J a c k : Well, thank you. We'd better walk. It's no good waiting an hour and a
half for a bus.
b) "Is Henry likely to play bridge at George's tonight?" "I don't think so. He'll
probably go to a concert instead." "What can Mary be doing now?"
"Well, she may be having dinner."
"And I think she must be writing a letter to me."
"She is more likely to be writing a letter to Henry."
c) "What are you going to do on New Year's Eve?" "I haven't
decided yet. What about you?" "Mary and I have decided to go to
a dance."
9. This exercise is intended to test your ability to hear and reproduce
intonation in reading, a) Listen to the text "The Tailor and the Dressmak-
er" carefully, sentence by sentence. Write it down. Mark the stresses and
tunes. Practise reading each sentence after the cassette-recorder, b) Record
your reading. Play the recording back immediately and try to detect your
errors. Make a careful note of your errors in each sound and tune and
work to avoid them. Repetition should be done aloud. Practise the text for
test reading.
10.
This exercise is meant to develop your ability to hear intonation and reproduce it in
proper speech situations, a) Listen to the joke sentence by sentence. Write it down. Mark the
stresses and tunes. Practise the joke for test reading, b) Listen to the narration of the joke.
Observe the peculiarities in intonation, word-group division, pitch, stress and tempo. Note the
use of temporizers. Retell the joke according to the model you have listened to.
11.This exercise is intended to test your ability to analyse material for reading on your
own outside the class, a) Read the story silently to make sure you understand each sentence.
Underline the main sentence in the story. Split up each sentence into intonation-groups.
Locate the communicative centres of them. Mark the stresses and tunes, concentrating your
attention on the attitude expressed. It is not expected that each member of the class will mark
the story in exactly the same way. Discuss your variants in class. Your teacher will help you
to choose the best variant. Practise your corrected variant for test reading, b) Retell the story
following the model above (See Ex. 10):
The Story of Narcissus
Long, long ago, when birds and flowers and trees could talk, a beautiful
fountain sprang up in the midst of a forest. Little sunbeams crept between the
leaves, and, as they fell upon it, made it shine like silver.
One day a lad, who had been hunting in the forest, lost sight of his friends.
While looking for them, he saw the fountain shin
ing in the sunlight through the trees. He at once turned to it, for he was hot
and thirsty.
He stooped down to bathe his burning forehead, and to cool his dry hot lips.
But as he bent over the water, he saw his own face in it, as in a glass. He thought
it must be some lovely water-fairy, that lived within the fountain, and as he
looked he forgot to drink. The bright eyes, the curly hair, the round cheeks, and
the red lips were beautiful to him; and he fell in love with that image of himself,
but knew not that it was his own image. It smiled when he smiled, and as he
spoke, the lips of the face moved as though speaking too, though no sound came
from them. "I love you with all my heart," said the lad. The image smiled and
held out its arms, but still was dumb. The lad spoke to it again and again, and
getting no answer, he at last began to cry. The tears fell upon the water, and
ruffled it, so that the face looked wrinkled. Thinking it was going away, he said:
"Only stay, beautiful being, and let me look at you, even if I may not touch you."
He forgot everything but that lovely face. Day after day, night after night, he
stayed there, till he grew thin and pale, and at last died. Just at the water's edge,
where the lad had died, there grew one strange little flower, all alone. "He has
been changed into a flower," his friends said. "Let us call it after our dead
friend." So they named the flower Narcissus in memory of him and it is called
Narcissus to this very day.
S u p p l e m e n t
TEXTS NOT INTRODUCED IN THE EXERCISES Section Three
Ex. 13
DAYS AND MONTHS. ASKING THE TIME
"Do you know the days of the Week?"
"Yesr Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday."
"Now, let's assume that today is Wednesday. What day will tomorrow be?"
"Thursday."
"And the day after tomorfow?" "Friday."
"What day was yesterday?"
"Tuesday."
"And the day before yesterday?" "Monday."
"As it happens, last Monday was my birthday."
"Is that so? Well, many happy returns of the day."
"Thank you. And now, let's have the names of the months."
"Certainly. January. February, March, April, May, June, July, August,
September, October, November, December."
"Good... Oh, can you tell me the right time please?"
"Well, my watch says five past two, but if's no use relying on it, because
sometimes it's fast and sometimes it's slow."
Section Four
Ex. 13
"Have we time for another coffee?" "I think so."
"Shall I give you some?" "Yes,
please."
"Do you take sugar?"
"No, thank you."
"Will you have a cigarette?"
"In a moment."
"Have you paid the bill?"
"Not yet."
"Shouldn't we be going now?" "All
right."
"Oughtn't we to take a taxi?" "If you
like."
"How long will you be out?" "Not long."
"When will you be back?" "Soon after
ten." "What are you going to do?" "Nothing
very interesting." "Where are you going?"
"Just down the road." "Who are you going to
see?" "Tom."
"Why are you going to see him?" "Just for a
little chat." "What about?" "Nothing in
particular."
Ex. 15
OUR SITTING-ROOM
Let's have a look at this picture of our sitting-room. As you come into the
room you notice a piano with a low music-stool in front of it. Next to the piano is
a tall bookcase standing against the wall. On the left is a large window. Under the
window there's a radiator, but, you can't see it because it's behind the settee. On
the settee there are two cushions. The fireplace is at the other end of the room.
On each side'of the fireplace there's an armchair. An old lady is sitting in one of
the chairs, but nobody's sitting in the other one: it's empty.
In the centre of the mantelpiece there's a clock and above it an oval
mirror. On the right you can see a standard lamp. Opposite the fireplace you
can see a small table with an ash-tray and some newspapers on it. By the
table there's a small chair. On the extreme right there's a radio-set. The floor
is covered with a beautiful thick carpet. An electric light is hanging from the
middle of the ceiling. At night when it gets dark we switch on the light and
draw the curtains: During the day, the light comes in through the window.
Section Five
Ex. 2 2
A: You're on holiday, aren't you?
B:
No, I'm not.
A: You're not working, are you?
B:
Yes, I am.
A: You work in London, don't you?
B:
No, I don't.
A: It's nearly time for tea, isn't it?
B:
No, it isn't.
A: You're not hungry, are you?
B:
Yes, I am.
A: You'll soon be going home, won't you?
B:
No, I shan't.
Section Six
Ex. 19
BALZAC AS A HANDWRITING EXPERT
Balzac, the famous French writer, was a man of great talent. But he himself
was proud of his ability to tell a person's character by his or her handwriting. He
often told his friends that he could tell anybody's character exactly by his
handwriting.
One day a woman friend brought him a young boy's exercise book. She said
that she wanted to know what Balzac thought of the boy's character.
15 Заказ 1271
449
Balzac studied the handwriting carefully for a few minutes. The woman,
however, told him that the boy was not her son and that he might tell her the
truth.
"All right," said Balzac. "I shall tell you the truth." And he said that the boy
was a bad, lazy fellow.
"It's very strange," said the woman smiling. "This is a page from your own
exercise book, which you used when you were a boy."
Section Seven
Ex. 9
A: Is it going to rain? В: I hope
not.
A: Ought we to take our coats?
В: I think so.
A: Shall we be late?
B: We might be.
A: Is the car all right?
В: I expect so.
A: Will it break down?
В: I doubt it.
A: Have you got enough petrol? В: I hope I
have.
Ex. 17 • MY BEDROOM
At night when I feel tired and sleepy, I go up to my bedroom and switch on
the electric light. I take off my shoes, undress and put on my pyjamas. Then I get
into bed arid switch off the light.
After a few minutes I fall asleep. I sleep the whole night through.
Punctually at seven-thirty in the morning, the alarm-clock rings and wakes
me up. I get out of bed, put on my dressing-gown and slippers, and go into the
bathroom, where I turn on the hot and cold taps. While the water's running into
the bath, I wash my face and neck, clean my teeth, and shave. My shaving things
are on the shelf above the basin. Then I turn off the taps
and have my bath. Sometimes I have a shower. When I've dried myself with a
towel, I get dressed.
On the dressing-table in front of the looking-glass, you'll see a hairbrush and
a comb, a hand-mirror, a bottle of scent and a powder-box. These, of course,
don't belong to me, but to my wife. In the chest of drawers I keep clean linen
such as shirts, collars and handkerchiefs, besides things like socks and ties. The
dirty linen is put in a linen basket and sent to the laundry. In the wardrobe I keep
my suits and other clothes, which I hang on coat-hangers.
Ex. 19
THE SMOKING CHIMNEY
One afternoon Professor N. was walking along a country road when he saw a
farmer eating his supper alone in the road before his house. The professor
approached the farmer and asked him:
"Why are you eating here alone?"
"Well, sir," answered the farmer after a short pause, "the chimney smokes."
"That is too bad," said the professor. "You must have it repaired. Let's have a
look at it."
And before the farmer could say a word the professor tried to enter the
farmer's house. As soon as he opened the door a broom fell on his shoulders and
a woman's voice cried:
"Go away, you old rascal, or I'll kill you ..."
The professor left the house quickly. The farmer sat in the road looking very
unhappy. The professor approached him and put his hand on his shoulder.
"Never mind," said he, "my chimney smokes sometimes too."
Section Eight
Ex. 6
A: When I went out it was dark. B: Was
it?
A: Just at first I couldn't see.
B: Couldn't you?
A: After a while I got used to it.
В: Did you?
A: I went to Tom's and he wasn't there. B: Wasn't he?
A: So I walked around and then came back home. B: Oh?
A: And now if you like we'll go to the pictures. * B: Lovely.
Ex. 15
MARK TWAIN IN FRANCE
Mark Twain, the famous American writer, was travelling in France. Once he
was going by train to Dijon. That afternoon he was very tired and wanted to
sleep. He therefore asked the conductor to wake him up when they came to
Dijon. But first he explained that he was a very heavy sleeper. "I'll probably
protest loudly when you try to wake me up," he said to the conductor. "But do
not take notice, just put me off the train anyway."
Then Mark Twain went to sleep. Later, when he woke up, it was night-time
and the train was in Paris already. He realized at once that the conductor had
forgotten to wake him up at Dijon. He was very angry. He ran up to the
conductor and began to shout at him. "I have never been so angry in all my life,"
Mark Twain said.
The conductor looked at hirri calmly. "You are not half so angry as the
American whom I put off the train at Dijon," he said.
Section Nine
Ex. 12
PLANNING A HOLIDAY
"I say, what are you and your sister going to do for your holiday this year?"
"Well, I don't know. I should like, to take my sister for a tour to the Baltic
Sea, but then she can't very well leave her children. What are you doing?"
"We shall go to the sea, I expect — for part of the time, anyhow. Then my
wife and 1 may go off alone for a week or so in the car."
"Leaving the rest of the family behind, I suppose!"
"Oh yes. They'll be quite safe with their grandmother — and, besides, they're
ever so much happier playing about on the sands than spending long days in the
car."
"Where do you go, as a rule?"
"We've tried many seaside-places on the east and south coasts: on the whole,
I think we prefer the south. However, it really doesn't seem to matter very much,
as long as the youngsters get a good sandy beach."
"What do you do? Take rooms, or stay at a hotel, or what?"
"We've done both, and this year we're taking a furnished house. Why don't
you make up your mind to join us? Find a house near by, and make a large party.
It'll be great fun."
"For my own part, I should love it. I'll talk it over with my sister, and see
what she thinks about it."
"Do, and let me know as soon as you can." , "Right. I
will."
Ex. 16
THE KING AND THE CRITIC
A king liked to write stories, which he thought were very good. The people to
whom he showed them were afraid to criticize them. They said that his stories
were good.
One day he showed some of them to a well-known critic, who said that his
stories were bad. The king got angry with him and sent him to prison.
After some time the king pardoned the critic and when he returned invited
him to his palace to dinner. Again he showed him some of his stories and again
asked him what he thought of them.
The critic turned to the guards who were standing behind him and said: "Take
me back to prison."
15* Закаэ 1271
453
Ex. 14 A STREET IN LONDON
We're in Oxford Circus, half-way along Oxford Street, one of the busiest
streets in the West End of London, and that street over there is Regent Street,
famous all over the world for its splendid shops. Near one of the street corners
you can see the entrance to the subway leading to the Underground Railway, or
"Tube" as we call it.
On both sides of the street there are shops, banks and restaurants. In the
roadway there's a constant stream of cars, taxis, buses and lorries. In some parts
of London there are trolley-buses and trams as well. The noise is deafening, but
one soon gets used to it. The pavements are crowded with people, and it's
dangerous to attempt to cross the road until the traffic is stopped, either by a
policeman on point duty or by the red traffic lights. In any case, before crossing
the road, take care to look to your right, and when you reach the middle of the
road, look to your left.
At night, the streets are lit by electricity, or in some districts, by gas. You can
see the lamp-posts and standards on the pavements, and on the "islands" in the
middle of the road. The main streets are flooded with light from the brilliant
shop-windows and the illuminated signs and advertisements, so that after dark
everything looks as bright as in broad daylight.
Ex. 15
THE BULLET-PROOF JACKET
A man once called on a general, and showed him a jacket which he had
invented for soldiers, and which, he said, was bullet-proof.
"Oh!" said the general. "Put it on!"
Then he rang the bell, and said to the servant: "Tell the captain to load his
gun and come here.'*'
The inventor of the bullet-proof jacket disappeared, and the general never
saw him again.
W o m a n : Good morning!
S a l e s m a n : Good morning, madam. Can I help you? W.: Yes, you can. I'd
like to buy a watch, please. S.: Certainly, madam. Is it for yourself? W.: Oh no.
It's for my small daughter. S.: I see. You don't want a very expensive one, I
suppose. W.: No. Fairly cheap, and fairly strong, too. S.: Oh, I understand. Will
you have a look at this one, madam?
W.: I think that looks too small. I'd rather have a bigger one.
S.: What about this, madam?
W.: That looks fine. How much is it?
S.: Let me see. That's five pounds ten.
W.: Oh dear. I'm afraid that's too much.
S.: Here's one that's a little cheaper.
W.: How much is that?
S.: Four pounds fifteen.
W.: Yes, I'll take that one.
S.: Can we send it for you, madam?
W.: No, thank you. I'll take it with me. Four pounds fifteen. S.: Thank you,
madam. Good morning. W.: Good-bye.
Ex. 12
THE DUMB BEGGAR
A beggar made up his mind that he would pretend to be dumb. He arrived at a
town where he had begged before. In one of the streets a gentleman who had
given him money, and so remembered his face, met him and spoke to him.
The beggar did not say a word. "Hello!" cried the gentleman, "how long have
you been dumb?" "Ever since I was a baby," answered the beggar.
Ex. 29 AT THE THEATRE
"Have you got any seats for tomorrow?" "Matinee or evening performance?"
"Matinee, please. I want two stalls, if you've got them." "Yes, you can have — er
— two in the middle of Row F." "They'll do very well, thank you. How much is
that?" "They're thirteen and six (13/6) each — that makes twenty-seven
shillings."
"Stalls, sir? Stalls on the right. Gentlemen's cloakroom this way; ladies'
cloakroom on the first landing."
"Show your tickets to the attendant inside the theatre; she'll show you to your
seats and let you have a programme."
"May I see your tickets, please? Row F, 12 and 13 ... This way, please. Would
you like a programme?" "Yes, please."
"Shall I bring you some drink, sir? The play isn't over till half-past five."
"When do you serve tea?"
"After the second act; there's an interval of fifteen minutes." "Then I think we
might as well have some."
"Well, what did you think of the play?"
"I enjoyed every minute of it. What did you think of it?"
"I thought it was splendid. I haven't laughed so much for a long time."
"Neither have I. It was extremely good."
"Yes, wasn't it? I thought the acting was excellent."
"So did I. The whole thing was first-rate from beginning to end."
THE BELL-BOY
A traveller was standing at the desk in the lobby of a Washington hotel. He
was in a hurry. He had only ten minutes to pay his bill and reach the station.
Suddenly he remembered that he had forgotten something.
He called the bell-boy and said: "Run up to Room 48 and see whether I left a
box on the table. Be quick, I am in a hurry."
The boy ran up the stairs. Five minutes passed, and the gentleman was
walking up and down impatiently.
At last the boy came back.
"Yes, sir," he said, "yes« sir- Уои l^ft it there. It's on the table."
Sec t ion Th irteen
Ex. 9
THE TAILOR AND THE DRESSMAKER
This morning I've been to my tailor's to order a new suit: coat, waistcoat and
trousers. I should have liked to order a new overcoat as well as my old one is
nearly worn out, but just now I can't afford it. I shall have to wait till next year
for that. But I might get a raincoat later on. My tailor always has an excellent
stock of materials to choose from, and I think I've chosen what'll be the most
suitable for my purpose. I've had my measurements taken and I'm going again in
a fortnight's time for the first fitting. After I've tried the suit on, the tailor will
probably find it necessary to make a few alterations, and he'll mark the places for
pockets, buttons and buttonholes. Then he'll ask me to return later on for a final
fitting just to make sure that the suit fits really well. When the suit's ready, I shall
pay for it and get a receipt. My wife has also been buying some new clothes this
week. She's bought herself a ready-made suit, that's to say, a coat and skirt. She's
been trying to find a silk blouse to match, so far without success. But when she
went to the milliner's, she did succeed in getting just the right hat, in the very
latest fashion, or so she says. It would seem that the one she bought three weeks
ago is already out of date.
An English tourist found himself in Norway with only-enough money in his
pocket to pay his passage back. As he knew that it would take him only two days
to get to England, he decided that he could easily do without food. So he went on
board the steamer and bought a ticket.
He closed his ears to the sound of the lunch bell. When dinner time came he
refused the invitation to accompany a fellow-traveller to the saloon, saying that
he didn't feel well.
The next morning he didn't go to breakfast and at lunch time he again stayed
in his cabin. At dinner time he was so hungry that he could not stand it any
longer.
"I'm going to eat," he said, "even if they throw me overboard afterwards."
At dinner he ate everything the steward put in front of hi^n and felt ready for
the coming row.
"Bring me the bill," he said to the steward. "The bill,
sir?" said the man. "Yes," answered the traveller.
"There isn't any bill," was the answer, "on the ship meals are included in the
passage money."
»GRAMMAR EXERCISES
To Lessons 1—3
1. Point out the main and the secondary parts of the sentence and name them:
1. James was sitting by the fire. 2. My elder sister has two sons. 3. He slowly
opened the door; the room was empty. 4. The children ran to the river. 5. We sent
them a telegram yesterday. 6. Will you do me another favour? 7. I will do it for
you with pleasure. 8. We shall write to you in a day or two. 9. I did not find
anybody there. 10. The boy's mother was a young woman. 11. Half an hour has
passed. 12. A lot of students were present. 13. Nell is going to the concert
tonight. 14. He spoke loudly and distinctly.
2. Underline verbal predicates with one line and nominal predicates with two lines.
Note. Remember that the nominal predicate cannot express an action
1. It is good. 2. I can do it. 3. His story was true. 4. That is a good idea. 5. I
have finished my work. 6. It is raining. 7. It is not real coffee. 8. I shall write a
postcard to Doctor Wing now. 9. I understand, he is a writer . 10. "She is a
wonderful woman," said the girl softly.
3. Use an indefinite article with the predicatives where possible:
1. This is yellow pencil. 2. The text is easy. 3. This is easy text. 4. These are
low tables. 5. This table is low. 6. This is low table. 7. Roses are beautiful
flowers. 8. A fox is yellow. 9. This town is big. 10. Moscow and Minsk are big
cities. 11. Kiev is big city, too. 12. These flowers are very beautiful.
4. Point out direct, indirect, and prepositional objects and say what they are expressed by.
Note. Remember that the indirect object cannot be used without the direct object.
M o d e l s : Give me (indirect) your address (direct).
I must read it (direct) to you (indirect). He came with his friend
(prepositional).
1. Give me a knife and a small spoon, please. 2. It is raining, you must give
her your umbrella. 3. Tell us your story. 4. Tell it to him, too. 5.1 know nothing
about it. 6. Show me your room. 7.1 want to buy a doll for my little sister. 8.1
haven't seen the children today. 9. Help me, please. 10. See me tomorrow. 11.
You'll forget him. 12. She writes letters to her cousins.
5. Point out the objects and say what kind they are:
1. Give me a match, please. 2. Put all possible questions to this sentence. 3.
Will you pass me the sugar? 4.1 addressed her twice before she answered me. 5.
He handed the letter to his wife. 6. I need a book with pictures for my little
daughter. 7. Everybody listened to him with interest. 8. Peggotty opened a little
door and showed me my bedroom. 9. We are sorry for him. 10. He stopped and
shook hands with me. 11. She put the kettle on the fire. 12. We looked for the
boy everywhere.
6. Point out the attribute and say what it is expressed by.
Note. An attribute may stand before and after the noun. Remember that an attribute to a
pronoun always follows it.
1. Ansell gave an angry sigh. 2. I hear Mary's voice in the next room. 3. I
looked at her smiling face. 4. He is a walking grammar book. 5. Toby is a good
clever boy. 6. The cover of this book is blue . 7. It was a cold winter night. 8. The
streets of Moscow are wide. 9.1 like all Moscow theatres. 10. Tell me something
interesting. 11.1 don't see anything difficult in it. 12. Give me a better pencil,
please.
7. Point out adverbial modifiers of time, place and manner and say what they are
expressed by.
Note. Adverbial modifiers are often expressed by adverbs and nouns with prepositions.
M o d e l s : Come to see me tomorrow. We
live in Moscow. ' Don't speak so loudly. Jim
spoke in a whisper.
1. Ann can speak English well. 2. Father comes home at four o'clock. 3. You
mustn't stay there late. 4. She looked at me with a smile. 5. John said it in a low
voice. 6. Take these things upstairs. 7. She came into the room from the kitchen.
8.1 will do it for you with pleasure. 9. Don't allow the children to play in the
street. 10. We started early in the morning. 11. That day I was busy and didn't go
out. 12. We stayed there for an hour.
8. Put the adverbial modifiers in their proper places.
Note. With verbs of movement or staying (движения или пребыва-ния) the adverbial
modifier of place comes immediately after the verb. If there are two or more adverbial
modifiers, the usual order is "place", "manner", "time".
M o d e l s : Bill ran home quickly an hour ago.
They stayed there quietly all day.
1. He went (at seven o'clock, by taxi, to the theatre). 2. She stood (looking at
the road, on the porch). 3. Felix lived (for a long time, in France). 4. We went
(after dinner, to the village shop). 5. They left (in a hurry, at about 12 o'clock, for
London). 6. We started (after dinner, there, immediately). 7. Don't forget that you
must come (every morning, regularly, here). 8. I will meet you (tomorrow, at
three o'clock, at the college gates). 9. Did you come (on your bicycle, to work,
this morning) ? 10.1 went (by air, last month, to St. Petersburg).
9. Put the adverbs given in brackets in their proper places.
Note. The adverbial modifier of indefinite time expressed by such adverbs as: never,
usually, often, seldom, yet, just, etc. is placed before the main verb or after the auxiliary or
modal verb.
M o d e l s : She seldom comes to see us.
Do you often go through the park?
You are always late.
I can never understand you.
The book has already been translated.
1. She has a few mistakes in her composition (always). 2.1 can agree to that
(never). 3. We have six lessons a day (usually). 4. Old Mrs. Pratt is ill (often). 5.
You are kind to me (always). 6.1 met him there (seldom). 7. We are very busy
(generally). 8. They will believe it, I'm sure (never). 9. My friend stays long with
us (seldom). 10. We are going for a walk (just).
10.
Put the adverbs of indefinite time in their proper places.
Note. In questions the place of adverbs of indefinite time is after the subject.
M o d e l s : Is he often late?
Have you ever seen him ?
What time do you generally get up?
1. Where do you spend the summer (usually) ? 2. Do you prepare your
lessons in the afternoon (always)? 3. Did he come so late (often) ? 4. Axe you in
time (always) ? 5. When do they start working (usually) ? 6. Have you seen him
(ever) ? 7. Axe you going for a walk (just) ? 8. Do the children quarrel with each
other (often)? 9. Has your uncle mentioned this fact (ever)? 10. Must you get up
so early (always) ?
11. Put very much in its proper place.
Note. "Very much" is an adverbial of degree (обстоятельство степени). It has the
following positions in the sentence:
1. after the direct object: I like this idea very much. I like coffee very much in the
morning.
2. after the verb "to be" (before the 2nd participle): He was very much surprised to hear
that.
3. before the subordinate clause: I hope very much that you will be able to do it.
1. Do you like the story? 2.1 can't say that I like the idea. 3. Would it matter if
we arrive about ten minutes later? 4. They were surprised to meet the two sisters
there. 5. John regrets that he cannot take part in the discussion. 6.1 was
disappointed to find out that the letter was lost. 7. We enjoyed ourselves at the
party. 8. He said that he was impressed by her progress. 9. I doubt that they have
ever visited Japan. 10. I like a cup of hot tea at five o'clock.
12.
Make up sentences using the following words:
1. Give, paper, a piece, of, me, a pencil, and. 2. Week, Mr. Barnett, new,
brings, Mary, and, books, magazines, every. 3. Tall, General Henderson, with,
hair, a man, white, was. 4. Was putting on, gloves, her, in, Nancy, a way, slow. 5.
Show, can, I, something, you, interesting. 6. GQod, English, some, have, I,
books. 7. Them, can, I, bring, to, the Institute, you, to. 8. Cold, a night, January,
was, it. 9. Long, can't, we, stay, here. 10. In, coffee, the morning, I, like.
13. Translate the following sentences into English:
1. Он хороший друг. 2. Мне холодно. 3. Эту книгу передай ему.
4. Запишите для меня свой адрес. 5. Я могу вам рассказать инте-
ресную историю. 6. Он хорошо говорит по-английски. 7. Объясни
это ему. 8. Я написал вчера родителям письмо. 9. Ты можешь дать
мне свой учебник? 10. Это.хорошо. 11. Учитель говорил громким
голосом. 12. Это ясно. 13. Закройте книги и слушайте меня. 14. Это
очень легко.
14. Choose an adjective to form a nominal predicate and an adverb
to modify a verbal predicate.
M o d e l s : It is clear.
I see it clearly.
1. It is (correct, correctly). 2. Spell the word (correct, correctly). 3. You
know it (good, well). 4. Of course it is (good, well).
5.It is (cold, coldly) in the room. 6. Don't look so (cold, coldly)
at me. 7. It is (easy, easily). 8. I can do it (easy, easily). 9. It
is (warm, warmly) today. 10. He always greets us (warm, warm-
iy).
15.
Write the plural of the following nouns and read them aloud:
a story, a fish, a knife, a man, a dress, a tooth, a lamp, a box, a brother, a
brother-in-law, a dog, a foot, a bench, a hospital, a bed, a sentence, a lady, a toy,
an exercise, a child, a woman, a sheep, a niece, a son-in-law, a family, a half, a
library, a wife, a potato, a sportsman.
16.
Use the personal pronouns given in brackets in the Objective Case:
1. Do you know ... (he)? 2. Who is there? — It's ... (I). 3. They invite ... (we)
to their party. 4. And do you invite ... (they)? 5. Ask ... (she) to come, too.
17.
Name the forms of the personal pronouns and use them in sentences.
M o d e l s : She is the Nominative Case.
Her is the Objective Case.
You is the Nominative Case and the Objective Case.
The Singular it, she, him, you, me, her, I, he. The Plural
—
—
we, them, you, they, us.
18.
Translate into Russian.
Note. When the plural forms these, those are the subjects of the
sentence, they are translated into Russian as «это».
M o d e l s : This is a good pencil — Это хороший карандаш.
These are good pencils. — Это хорошие карандаши.
1. These sentences are not very long, are they? 2. This isn't a box. 3. These
are not boxes. 4. This book is very interesting. 5. Those were not very interesting
books. 6. These are simple sentences. 7. This phoneme is easy, those two were
more difficult. 8. These are my notebooks. 9. Are these your things? 10. Those
were very beautiful flowers. 11. Take those flowers, they are very nice. 12. These
are my shoes.
19.
Put into the Singular:
1. These are phonemes. 2. We have English and French books. 3. Roses are
beautiful flowers. 4. Houses have roofs. 5. Those are little children. 6. Foxes are
animals. 7. Watches are small clocks. 8. Classrooms have blackboards. 9. These
are old oaks. 10. Dogs have tails. 11. Those boys are good friends. 12. Balls are
round.
20.
Put general questions to the following statements:
•
1. Mrs. Sandford is in bed. 2. These words are easy. 3. She is a good student.
4. They are in the garden. 5. Her daughter is a teacher. 6. The children are at
school. 7. John is 19 years old. 8. Lesson 9 is difficult. 9. It is 10 o'clock. 10. The
flowers are yellow. 11. You are future teachers.
To Lessons 4—5
21. Put disjunctive questions to the following statements:
1. Your family is not large. 2. The children are in the garden. 3. This man is a
doctor. 4. His parents are not in Moscow. 5. It is six o'clock now. 6. Benny is not
in the nursery. 7. They are old friends. 8. This is a very interestingbook.
22.
Put general and alternative questions to the following statements: v
1. The girl is small. 2. The children are at school. 3. It is dark in the room, 4.
This is a velvet dress. 5. The dog is in the yard. 6. They are busy all the time.
23.
Make up imperative sentences.
Note. Please is introduced before or after the imperative for polite requests.
Ask your friend: 1. to go to the blackboard; 2. to give you a fountain-pen;
3. to fetch some chalk; 4. to find lesson 11; 5. to speak louder; 6. to meet you at
5; 7. to go to the laboratory with you; 8. to write exercise 3 at home; 9. to learn
this poem by heart; 10. to write down the new words; 11. to repeat the sentence
three times; 12. to look at the blackboard; 13. to listen to the new text; 14. to
show you the way to the theatre
24.
Make up negative imperative sentences:
Tell your friend: 1. not to open the door; 2. not to leave the room; 3. not to
take the chalk; 4. not to write this exercise; 5. not to make such a noise; 6. not to
smoke in the room; 7. not to send a telegram today; 8. not to bite the pencil; 9.
not to talk so loudly; 10. not to go there alone; 11. not to close the window; 12.
not to read text 7; 13. not to be late next time
25.
Make up questions to which the words in bold type are answers:
1. She is always at home in the evening. 2. The books are on the shelf. 3.
Doctor Sandford's wife is in the garden. 4. This is a difficult sentence. 5. His
parents are in Kiev. 6. The children are at school at this time. 7. My mother is
60 years old.
26.
Complete the following sentences translating what is given in brackets:
1. I don't like to go out (когда холодно). 2. Open the window, please (в
комнате жарко). 3. Switch on the light (уже темно). 4. Let's wait a little (еще
очень рано). 5. The lesson begins at 9 (а сейчас только 8 часов). 6. Let's walk
there (это недалеко). 7. Hurry up (пора идти в институт). 8. Let's take a bus
(это очень далеко отсюда). 9. Go to bed (уже 11 часов). 10. Wake up (уже
утро).
27. Use an indefinite article in the following exclamatory sentences
where necessary:
1. What... difficult phoneme this is! 2. What... deep snow! 3. What ... easy
sentences these are! 4. What ... hot water!
5. What ... cold evening! 6. What ... clever student she is!
7. What... good ideas you have! 8. What... beautiful music he is
playing! 9. What... dark eyes your daughter has! 10. What...
silly mistake you have made! 11. What ... fine weather!
12. What ... good advice! 13. What... pretty girl! 14. What ...
talented writer he is! 15. What... lovely child your boy is!
28.
Write the plural of the following nouns:
a country, a wolf, a tomato, a brush, a baby, a watch, a sheep, a postman, a
day, a shelf, a sister-in-law, a text, a roof, a cassette-recorder, a page, a
handkerchief.
29.
Write 10 affirmative and 10 negative imperative sentences using the verbs
given below:
to take, to give, to bring, to tell, to speak, to answer, to go, to read, to write, to
come, to repeat, to begin, to forget, to switch on, to show, to look, to listen, to
wait, to put on, to take off.
30.
Use the infinitive as attribute (take the infinitives from the following list):
to remember, to learn, to answer, to eat, to come, to worry about, to say, to
speak to, to do, to read, to apologize.
M о d §1: Benny hasn't any friends to play with.
* »■
1. This is a rule.... 2. There is nothing..., 3. These are the letters ... . 4. You are
just the man ... . 5. This is a poem ... .
6. Have you got anything ... ? 7. He is always the first ... .
8.1 have nothing .... 9. Is there anything ... ? 10. This is the first
thing... 11. It is just the moment....
31.
Form the degrees of comparison of the following adjectives:
old, bad, cold, yellow, loud, clean, large, cosy, comfortable, green, modern,
long, red, dark, good, small, interesting, difficult, important, easy.
32. A. Change the following sentences as shown on the model.
M o d e l s : 1. Tom is as clever as Jim.
2. Tom is not as clever as Jim. Tom is not so
clever as Jim.
1. The Thames is as long as you say. 2. She is as proud as her sister. 3. My
pen is as good as yours. 4. This armchair is as comfortable as that one in Father's
study. 5. The film is as interesting as the play. 6. My bag is as heavy as hers. 7. A
tram is as quick as a bus. 8. She is as beautiful as her mother. 9. The furniture in
her bedroom is as modern as in the sitting-room. 10. My dressing-table is as
small as yours.
B. Change the negative sentences you have written in the following way.
M o d e l s : 1. Tom is not (as, so) clever as Jim, 2. Jim
is cleverer than Tom.
To Lessons 6—7
33.
Make up questions to which the words in bold type are answers:
1. They have got a car of their own. 2. He has a nice, gentle face. 3. We have
a lot of relatives in Moscow. 4. You have got three mistakes in your test. 5. Mr.
Smith has a son and a daughter. 6. My friend has a large family.
34.
Replace the o/-phrases by the noun in the Possessive Case:
1. The wife of Doctor Sandford. 2. The elder sister of Helen.
3. The friend of my brother-in-law. 4. The best suit of my hus-
band. 5. The novels of Dickens. 6. The hat of my sister-in-law.
7. The answers of the students. 8. The tools of the workers.
9. The dress of the girl. 10. The dresses of the girls.
35.
Replace the o/-phrases by the noun in the Possessive Case:
1. The face of the woman is attractive. 2. The faces of these women are
attractive. 3. The coat of my father-in-law is grey.
4. The coats of the passers-by are wet. 5. The voice of the man is
too loud. 6. The voices of the men sound harsh. 7. The toys of
the child are on the floor. 8. The toys of the children are on the
floor.
36. Replace no by not ... any.
Note. No = not ... any and both are grammatically correct, but in colloquial speech
not... any is more common than no.
M o d e l s : The poor boy has no shoes to wear.
The poor boy hasn't any shoes to wear. There are no apples
on the plate. There aren't any apples on the plate. She gives him
no money. She doesn't give him any money.
1. She has got no English books. 2. I have got no friends here. 3. She has no
more money. 4, I have got no cousins.
5. They have got no children. 6. There are no boys or gir's in
the house. 7. He has got no toys to play with. 8.1 see no books
on the table. 9. I want no more, thank you.
37. Translate into English using not . . any:
1. У доктора Смита нет детей. 2. У Бенни нет братьев и сестер. 3. У него нет в этом
городе родственников. 4. У меня нет английских книг. 5. Не давайте вашему мальчику
больше конфет (sweets).
6. У доски нет мела. 7. У меня нет времени разговаривать с тобой.
8. У нас сегодня нет уроков. 9. У нас в контрольной ошибок нет.
10.
Не задавайте мне вопросов.
38. Fill in the blanks with the expressions a lot o f r plenty o f , a great
deal of
Note. In spoken English much and many are usually replaced by these expressions in
simple affirmative sentences. Remember that a great deal o f can be used to replace much
only.
M o d e l s : We have a lot of (plenty of) apples this year.
We have a lot of (plenty of, a great deal of) time.
1. They've got ... cassette-recorders in the laboratory. 2. Doctor Sandford's
wife has ... flowers in her garden. 3. She has ... trouble with her boy Benny. 4.
The doctor has ... patients. 5. A housewife has ... work to do. 6. He has got ...
English books in his library. 7. We have got ... spare time today. 8. Their family
is large. They havev.. children. 9. I spend ... money on books. 10. She buys ...
milk for her grandchildren.
11.
I have ... questions to ask. 12. He knows ... interesting
stories.
39.
Make up 8 sentences following the models given below.
Note, Much and many are used in questions and negative sentences, also in affirmative
sentences when preceded by very, too, so.
M ode l s: 1. Have you got many (a lot of) lessons today?
Yes, we have a lot of lessons today. No, we haven't got many
lessons today. She has too many mistakes in her test.
2. Have you got much work today? Yes, I have a lot of work
today. No, I haven't much work today. She eats so much bread.
It isn't good.
40.
Change the following sentences into disjunctive and general questions:
1. There is a tea-pot on the table. 2. There are some flowers
in the vase. 3. There aren't any English books on the shelf. 4.
There is nobody in the garden. 5. There is a lot of milk in the
jug. 6. There aren't any mistakes in your test. 7. There isn't any
chalk at the board. 8. There are some pictures on the walls of
the room. 9. There is some coffee in the cup. 10. There are six
continents in the world. 11. There are a lot of flowers in the
garden. 12. There is nothing in the box. 13. There aren't any
new words in the text. 14. There is a lot of snow in the forest.
41.
Fill In the blanks with some, any, not any, much, many, not much, not
many, very little, a little, very few, a few.
1. Are there ... college-graduates among your friends? —
Yes, there are.... 2. Are there... students in the next classroom?
— No, there aren't.... 3.1 haven't got time, I must hurry. 4.1
have... time and can help you. 5. There are ... cups on the table,
but there aren't glasses. 6. I have very ... time and can't stay
any longer. 7. We know very... about it. 8.1 have... questions to
ask. 9. Verypeople know Doctor Sandford. 10. There are... girls
in the family, are there? 11. There's very... chalk at the
blackboard, go and fetch.... 12. There are ... students in the
hall, are there? 13. There isn't... tea in the tea-pot. 14. There
isn't... paper in the box, I need more. 15. There aren't... pencils
in the box, don't take.... 16. It's a secret. Very... people know
about it. 17. Please add... more tea in my cup.
42.
Use the proper article.
Note. Pay attention to the use of the article with the noun predicative, the noun object
and the noun subject (in sentences with the introductory there).
1. Have you ... grandfather? 2. There is ... garden behind ... house. 3. My
brother-in-law is ... writer and his wife is ... doctor. 4. These are ... difficult
sentences. 5. I have ... father, ... mother and ... little sister. 6. What's ... matter
with you? 7. We are ... students of ... English faculty. 8. There came ... knock
at ... door. 9. Benny is already in ... bed. 10. Once there lived ... captain brave.
11. ... Doctor Smith is still at ... hospital. 12. This isn't ... snow, this is ... ice. 13.
She has ... velvet dress. 14. He is ... good-looking young man of 20. 15. There
are ... beautiful flowers in ... park. 16. Is she ... college graduate?
43.
Translate into English using not ... much and not . . any.
Note. Instead of little and few we usually use a negative verb + much. and a negative
verb + many.
M o d e l s : I haven't much time (instead o f : I have little time).
I haven't many English books (instead o f : I have few English books).
1. У меня мало денег. 2. У вас мало времени. 3. Мы пригласили мало
народу на вечер. 4. У них мало друзей. 5. В чайнике мало чаю. 6. В вашем
саду мало деревьев. 7. У нее мало родственников. 8. У него мало работы. 9.
Во дворе мало снегу. 10. В этой аудитории мало столов. 11. На столе мало
хлеба. 12. На полке мало книг.
44.
Fill in the blanks with it is or there is:
1. ... warm in the room. 2. ... a theatre in our street. 3. ... easy to understand
this rule. 4. ... five o'clock in the afternoon. 5. ... so nice seeing you again. 6. ...
nothing to be done about this. 7. ... often a rainbow after rain. 8. ... too late to go
there now. 9. ... a lot of snow this year. 10. ... a mistake in your dictation. 11. ...
far from my house to the Institute. 12. ... difficult to say what's wrong about it.
13. ... very strange that he hasn't come. 14. ... still very early and ... nobody to be
seen in the street. 15. ... usually a stamp on the envelope. 16. ... so cold out-of-
doors today. 17. ... electricity in all the houses of the town.
45.
Use the proper article:
1. Come to ... blackboard and write... Exercise 12. 2. You have ... spelling
mistake in ... word "nursery". 3. He is ... old friend of mine. 4. There came ... tap
at ... door and in another moment we saw ... small girl enter ... room. 5. He is ...
young artist and, I should say, rather talented. 6. He gave her ... cigarette and
lighted it. 7. I don't feel ... sympathy towards this man. 8. They are going to
build ... new house. 9. Are ... rooms in your flat large or small? 10. ... hour is a
long time. In ... hour you can read ... newspaper, or write ... letter. 11. What ...
beautiful music he is playing! 12. In every remark he found ... meaning but not
always the true meaning. 13. There is ... curiosity in her look. 14. ... Sandfords
have ... nice house. ... house isn't large but comfortable.
46.
Translate into English:
1. В семье есть другие дети? — Нет, я единственный ребенок. 2. Твой брат студент,
и ему 19 лет, не так ли? — Даг он студент, но ему 18 лет, а не 19. 3. На улице много
народу. 4. В кувшине нет молока. 5. У них двое детей — мальчик и девочка. 6. Такие
люди есть, не правда ли? 7. За вашей школой есть сад? — Да. 8. В вашем городе есть
парки? — Да, но немного, два или три. 9. У вас есть
около окна стоят часы. 11. Твои книги и
тетради на полке. 12. На полке есть тетради? — Да, это мои тетради. 13. Что там
на столе? — Там чайник и чашка. 14. Кто в соседней комнате? 15. Есть кто-нибудь в
соседней комнате? 16. Есть в вашей аудитории книжные шкафы? 17. На столе есть
сахар, но мало. 18. У Бенни много игрушек. 19. У Тома игрушек мало. 20. Времени у
нас мало, уже половина второго.
То Lessons 8—9
47. Form the plural of the following nouns:
a lawn, a bush, a deer, a pantry, a sitting-room, a study, a sofa, a phoneme, an
exercise, a housewife, a son-in-law, a nursery, a child, a woman, a family, a boy,
a shelf, a mouse, a penny, a face, a tomato, a mother-in-law, a toy, a sentence, a
leaf, a sheep, a piano, a policeman.
48. Fill in the blanks with there is or it is:
1.... a party at our Institute tonight. 2.... a lot of work to do.
3.... not any coffee left. 4. ... cold today; ... a strong wind. '
5.... not a single mistake in your exercise. 6.... dark;... no moon.
7.... not very far to walk. 8. ... too early to leave yet. 9. ... a cas-
sette-recorder in the classroom. 10.... strange that she is absent
today. 11. ... a post-office near the house I live in. 12. ... a pity
that you can't come with me. 13.... not true to say that she is
my
friend. 14. ... time to begin our lesson. 15. ... no time to write it
down, the lesson is nearly over. 16. ... a fact that he is often
absent from school.
49. Arrange the following nouns into two groups: a) countable nouns, b)
uncountable nouns. Say which can be used with an indefinite article:
apple, literature, sugar, ball, music, sea, news, dress, tomato,
soup, mountain, advice, friendship, foreigner, money, class,
shop, poetry, corner, ice, artist, sentence, subject, mistake.
50.
Use some where necessary.
Note. Uncountable nouns and countable nouns in the plural are preceded by some when
"a certain quantity or number" is implied.
1. Students write on ... paper and also on the blackboard. 2.1
need ... writing-paper to write a letter. 3.1 like ... sweet apples.
4.Please, buy me ... apples. 5. ... children must drink ... milk
every day. 6. ... children do not like ... milk. 7. The tea is very
hot, I must put... milk in it. 8. What must I buy, ... cheese or ...
butter? 9.1 am fond of ... flowers. 10. Put... butter on the pota-
toes. 11. I've brought you ... flowers. 12. Give me ... bread.
13.1
don't like ... tea at this time of the day. 14. I'd like ... hot tea
now. 15. Bring ...water, please.
51. Point out countable nouns by using an indefinite article.
Note. Remember that uncountable nouns in their general sense never take any article.
1. He is ... honesty itself. 2. ... iron is ... metal. 3. ... knife is
made of... metal. 4.1 want... glass of... milk. 5.1 like ... jam on...
piece of... bread. 6. We can write ... letter in ... ink or with ...
pencil. 7.1 prefer ... book of... poetry to stories of... adventure.
8. Can you give me ... piece of... advice? 9, No news is ... good
news. 10.... kindness is... good quality.
52.
Change the following sentences into the plural where possible:
1. The house is not large but it is comfortable. 2. A study is a room where
we study, read or write. 3. The furniture is old-fashioned. 4. There is a pantry
in the house. 5. Have you got an exercise to do? 6. There is a green lawn
behind the house. 7. Is his family large? 8. This television-set costs a lot of
money. 9. What is there in that box? 10. This cupboard is new and modern.
11. There is no soup in my plate. 12. Is the curtain white or yellow? 13. There
is a lot of snow in winter. 14. The woman's dress is bright. 15. A city is a big
town. 16. The child's toy is on the floor.
53.
Choose the correct form of the possessive pronouns in brackets.
Note. The conjoint form of the possessive pronoun stands before a noun The
absolute form is used instead of a noun not to repeat it
1. This is (my, mine) bag. 2. This bag is (my, mine). 3. Is (her, hers) family
large or small? 4. (Her, hers) skates are better than (your, yours). 5. Whose hat is
this? — It's (my, mine). 6. Is he a friend of (your, yours)? 7. Don't stay at (their,
theirs) house; stay at (our, ours). 8. She is in bed in (her, hers) room. 9. (My,
mine) pen won't write,, please give me (your, yours). 10. She's an old friend of
(my, rni^e). 11. Is this dictionary (my, mine) or (your, yours)? 12. (Her, hers) is
the best composition.
54. Translate into English using personal and possessive pronouns in the appropriate
form:
1 Дай мне на минутку твой словарь. 2 Скажи это ему, а не мне. 3. Где она? Я ее не
вижу. 4. Доктор Сэндфорд — его приятель. 5. Что с ней? Она больна? 6. Это не моя
тетрадь. Моя в голубой обложке (cover). 7. Ей сегодня лучше. Скажите об этом доктору.
8. Я хочу поговорить с ней. 9. Возьми этот цветок и передай его Бетти 10. Не
спрашивайте нас, спросите их. 11. Это плохой карандаш. Я не могу им писать. 12. Не
садитесь на этот стул, у него сломана ножка (leg). 13. Моя комната больше, чем ваша.
14. Это старая книга, у нее пожелтевшие (yellow) страницы (leaves).
55.
Choose the proper word from brackets:
1. (Can, may) you play the piano? 2. (.Can, may) Benny watch TV before
going to bed? 3. I think I (can, p&y) do the work myself. 4 (Can, may) your
friend speak English? 5. (Car*."T
16 Заказ 1271
473
may) I have another cup of tea? 6. You (can, may) stay a little longer if you
like. 7. I (cannot, may not) hear you. Speak louder, please. 8. You (can, may)
take the book home. 9. (Can, may) I leave my bag with you? 10. I (cannot, may
not) believe that.
56.
Give negative replies to the following questions.
Note. M u st n ' t in a reply means — нельзя (запрещение), needn't — не нужно (нет
необходимости), can't — нельзя (невозможно), I' m a f ra i d not — вежливый отказ.
1. May I go out and play in the street? — ... . It's dangerous to play in the
street. 2. May I open the window? — .... It's cold outside. 3. Must he come here
today? — .... He may come tomorrow. 4. May I take your textbook for a
moment? — ... . I must finish the exercise. 5. Must I bring the ear-phones? — ... .
It is the monitor's task. 6. Can I see the Dean? — ... . He is busy. 7. Must we all
come to the laboratory at 12? — ... . You may come half an Hour later. 8. May I
write with your pencil? — ... . It is broken. 9. May I take it home? — ... . The
book is not mine. 10. Can I speak to the secretary? — .... He is out.
57.
Translate into English using modal verbs:
1. Можно вам помочь? — Пожалуйста. 2. Вы должны запомнить адрес и пойти туда
тотчас же. 3. Какой-то человек хочет вас видеть. — Можете попросить его сюда. 4.
Должен ли я уплатить вам сейчас же? — Нет, не нужно; я^могу подождать. 5. Вы
должны подписать письмо и поставить дату, 6. Он может это сделать вовремя, не так
ли? 7. Могу я повидать доктора Сэндфорда? — (а) Да, он в кабинете. Сюда,
пожалуйста, (б) Нет, его нет дома. 8. Можно включить радио? ■— Боюсь, что нет. Дети
должны идти спать. 9. Можно пока положить книги на этот стол. 10. Чем могу быть вам
полезен? — Вы можете сделать для меня многое. 11. Пока (в настоящее время) этого
делать не нужно. 12. Можно задать вам вопрос? — Пожалуйста.
То Lesson 10
58. Use the required tense instead of the infinitives in brackets:
1. My little sister (to go) to school every day. 2. The sun (to rise) in the East.
3. Be<$/students never (to work) hard. 4. It often (to snow) in winter. 5. He (to
wake'up) at seven and (to have)
breakfast at half past seven. 6. The teacher (to point) at the blackboard when
he (to want) to explain something. 7. Mother always (to cook) in the morning. 8.
I (to see) what you mean.
9. She (to say), she (to hear) nothing. 10. There (to'be) a girl
downstairs who (to want) to see you. 11. My friend (to go) there
nearly every week.
59. Write the following sentences in the negative and interrogative:
1. He takes English lessons. 2. She walks to the Institute.
3. They often go to the laboratory. 4. She writes to her mother
every day. 5. He comes to see us on Sunday. 6. Tony reads
newspapers in the evening, before going to bed.
60. Read quickly in the Singular:1
1. My friends want to study French. 2. They remember everything. 3.
Children receive a lot of pleasure from this game.
4. Do these girls go to the theatre on Saturday? 5. His friends
work in St.Petersburg. 6. The children play all the morning and
sleep in the afternoon. 7. My friends like meat and do not like
fish. 8. They live in small houses which have three rooms. 9. His
brothers work h^rd all day, and want to rest in the evening.
10.
They get new books from the library every week. 11. The
postmen bring letters three times a day. 12. They want to buy
some toys, because their sons have a birthday tomorrow.
13. These girls come to our library every Thursday. 14. Their
holidays finish in August. 15. The boys wake up at seven.
16. Housewives have to work very hard. 17. On Saturday they go
to the cinema. 18. They know English well and can answer all my
questions. 19. Our fathers work in an office and do not come
home for lunch. 20. They do not believe her stories.
61. Make the following sentences negative and interrogative:
1. They receive the Times. 2. Benny knocks at the door of his father's study
every morning. 3. They want to see this film. 4. There are a few mistakes in your
composition. 5. Benny often shows Mr. White his toys. 6. She remembers
everything. 7. She
1 Most of the examples of this exercise have been borrowed from "Living English
Structure" by W. Stannard Allen, London, 1955.
must sign that paper. 8. The boy has a lot of friends to play with. 9. He can
speak English well. 10. Our lessons begin at 8.30. 11. He likes to read
newspapers after breakfast. 12. My cousin lives in St.Petersburg.
62.
Put disjunctive questions to the following statements:
1. It gets dark very early in winter. 2. We can have a good time together. 3.
Victory Day is the greatest holiday in our country. 4. It doesn't take you long to
get to the University. 5. They have a lot of relatives in Moscow. 6. There isn't any
chalk at the blackboard. 7. You don't remember the new woroo. 8. She hasn't got
any mistakes in her translation. 9. Benny and John are his nephews. 10. Some of
our students live in the hostel. 11. She spends a lot of time in the laboratory.
63.
Use the proper article:
1. He read ... leading article slowly moving his lips over ... words. 2. ...
thought of Nessie faded from his mind. 3. I was ... interpreter during ... war. 4.
We were shocked by. . scene that followed. 5. And then ... lady came in, ... tall
young lady. 6. We were met by ... handsome young man. ... man was ... guide.
7. ... street was empty. But suddenly she noticed ... old woman on ... opposite
side of... street. 8. Long ago this park was ... large private garden. 9. She changed
... wrapper in which she did the housework for ... black satin blotise and ... skirt.
10. ... marble clock on ... mantelpiece softly chimed twelve. 11. He had ... wild
desire to run away. 12.1 want you to explain ... incident we had this morning. 13.
What ... nice cheerful fellow he is! 14. ... young woman of about 30 with ...
pleasant face rose to greet them when they entered ... room.
64.
Change the following a) into the negative, b) into the interrogative:
1. You remember her address. 2. He comes home at 7 o'clock. 3. Directors
sign a lot of papers. 4. They receive several newspapers. 5. He has breakfast at 8
o'clock. 6. Benny likes fruit. 7. She lives near the metro station. 8. The girl plays
the piano very well. 9. Men shave every day. 10. He spends all his money on
books. 11. The last train leaves at midnight. 12. They speak English at the
lessons. 13. My parents want to buy new furniture. 14. The girls help their
mother. 15, On Sundays they have
dinner at home. 16. The dog usually barks at night. 17. Some girls enjoy
dances. 18. Mary looks well. 19. He knows the right answer. 20. John loves
Helen. 21. She cuts her hair every month. 22. The old woman feels very cold.
65.
Make up sentences using the following words:
1. at once, can, all, we, questions, your, answer. 2. autumn, prefer, I, in,
holiday, to have, a. 3. comes, late, my, often, elder, home, brother. 4. is, lawn,
there, a, house, our, in front of, 5. telegram, her, to, a, send, he, must. 6. advice,
always, she, very, good, gives, me. 7. they, mistakes, a lot of, make, spelling. 8.
pronunciation, has, she, got, not, mistakes, any, in. 9. every, day, first-year, must,
students, work, laboratory, at, the. 10. our, great, is, a, in, country, holiday, May,
of, ninth, the.
66.
Translate into English using appropriate pronouns:
1. Это мои перчатки, а где твои? 2. Это мой или твой карандаш? 3. Это
твой карандаш. Мой зеленый. 4. Возьми эту лампу и поставь на мой стол. 5.
Это твои тетради? 6. Я не могу взять этот зонтик, он не мой. 7. Кто из вас
Нелли? — Это я. 8. Вот книжки! Которая твоя? 9. Какого цвета твое новое
платье? 10. Кто знает ответ? Я! 1
—
I\OHH нас не знают, но мы хорошо их
знаем. 12. Это очень странные факты. 13. Мне нравятся твои туфли, но мои
лучше. 14. Что с ним? Он болен? 15. Какие книги вы любите? 16. Кто там?
— Это я.
67.
Change the following general questions into disjunctive ones:
1. Is Doctor Sandford still at the hospital? 2. Does your grandmother live in
the country? 3. Have you many English books at home? 4. Are there any new
words in this text? 5. Do you usually have dinner with your family? 6, Do you
want to see this new film? 7. Can your cousin play the piano? 8. Does he not
study German? 9. Is there a study in your flat? 10. Must we sign this paper at
once? 11. Do little children sleep twice a day? 12. Are his parents not in Moscow
now? 13. Do all the members of your family read the Times? 14. Do you not
remember all the new words?
68.
Use the proper article. Pay attention to the use of the article with nouns
denoting parts of the day:
1. Late in ... afternoon they went back to London. 2. It was such ... cold and
windy night that we had to look for shelter.
3. ...morning was breaking when we started. 4. It happened on ... very day of
his arrival. 5. It was ... evening when we parted at last. 6. It has been ...
wonderful evening for me. 7. It is pleasant to go to the country on ... warm
summer day. 8. ... night was so wet that no one was about. 9. ... morning was
perfect. 10. It is ... early morning. 11. ... night was silent. 12. I thought it was ...
morning. 13. It was ... late night when he arrived. 14. ... evening was still and
warm. 15. It all happened early in ... morning. 16. What ... exciting day it has
been! 17. It is ... last day that we are together. 18. We arrived there late at ...
night. ... next morning we were to begin our work. 19. It was ... day to tempt one
out-of-doors — cool and bright.
60. Put the words in bold type into the Singular and make other changes if necessary:
1. They know the town well and can show you the way to the theatre. 2. My
friends live in Kiev, they study at the University. 3. Do these boys go to school in
the morning or in the afternoon? 4. They want to buy some English books which
they need for their work. 5. These girls sing well but they cannot play the piano.
6. Housewives work very much at home. 7. Two of my friends work at this plant,
they are engineers. 8. These little girls like when their brothers play with them. 9.
Children spend a lot of time out-of-doors. 10. My cousins have families of their
own.
11.My sisters have breakfast at 8,о'с1оск and then they go to school. They
return home only at 2 o'clock in the afternoon.
12.
They go to the library twice a month. 13. Their teachers tell them
that they make a lot of mistakes because they are not attentive at the lessons. 14.
They go to work by bus and return home on foot. 15. Two of my sisters are
married, their husbands are workers.
70. Translate into English paying attention to uncountable nouns:
1. Спасибо за хороший совет. 2. Какая хорошая погода! 3. Мне очень жаль, но у
меня плохие новости для вас. 4. Я думаю, что только работа может ему помочь. 5. Это
трудная работа. 6. Он любит давать советы своим друзьям. 7. Я не люблю чай с
лимоном. 8. На завтрак у меня яйцо и чашка кофе. 9. Я люблю бутерброды с яйцом или
сыром. 10. Волосы у нее черные, а глаза голубые. 11. Эти деньги не мои, я не могу их
взять. 12. В плохую погоду я не выхожу. 13. Этот книжный шкаф сделан из дуба.
71. Put the adverbs given in brackets in their proper places.
A. M о d e 1 s: He always has a lot of friends.
You can always do it in time. I am always glad to
see you.
1. You must follow the doctor's advice (always). 2. I can remember to do it in
time (never). 3. We have six lessons a day (always). 4. You may take my books
(always). 5. She is late (never). 6. Betty is ill (often). 7. I have my breakfast at
nine o'clock (seldom). I have it at half past eight (usually). 8. I am glad to join
you (always). 9. Old Mrs. Sandford goes out (seldom). 10.1 know what to speak
to him about (never).
B. M о d e 1 s: Can you always do it in time?
Are you never late?
Do you always get up at 7?
1. Is Helen in at this time of the day (rarely)? 2. Is she late (often)? 3. Must
you bring the ear-phones for the lesson (always)? 4. Does he come home so late
(often)? 5. Do you have dinner at six o'clock (usually)? 6. Is she glad to see you
(always)? 7. Doesvhe smoke in bed (ever)? 8. Does she introduce her friends to
her mother (always)? 9. Does old Mrs. Sandford stay at home (usually)? 10.
Does her son-in-law visit her (often)?
To Lessons 11—12
72.
Make up questions to which the words in bold type are answers:
1. In summer a lot of people leave town and go to the country. 2. There are
twelve students in our group. 3. On Sundays people usually get up late. 4. His
parents live in the Far East. 5. Lucy speaks two foreign languages. 6. This young
man is from Poland. 7. They prefer to speak English at the Institute.
73.
Translate into English.
Note. Remember that future actions m clauses of time and condition are expressed by the
Present Indefinite
M o d e l s : We can't start in time if he does not come back from the country
on Wednesday (... если он не вернется). We can't go till we finish our work (...
пока не кончим работу).
1. Я могу вам помочь, если вы мне позволите. 2, Возвращайтесь до
того, как стемнеет. 3. Если кто-нибудь придет, попросите их подождать. 4.
Встречайте меня на вокзале, когда я вернусь из Варшавы. 5. Я буду очень
занят на следующей неделе, но если ты позвонишь мне в субботу, мы
сможем встретиться. 6. Когда будешь писать своему французскому другу,
попроси его прислать фотографии Парижа. 7. Подожди, пока он не придет.
8. Мы не можем присоединиться к вам, пока не закончим работу. 9. Не
забудь взять цветы, когда пойдешь встречать иностранных гостей. 10.
Позвони мне, как только будешь готова. 11. Она не может пойти, пока не
окончит перевод. 12. Мы должны купить карту, прежде чем пойдем в
поход. 13. Я не могу ждать до сентября. Я поеду, как только начнутся
каникулы. 14. Мы можем поехать к нашим болгарским друзьям, как только
окончится учебный год, 15. Приходи ко мне до того, как я уеду в
Чехословакию. 16. Я не могу вам ничего сказать, пока я не знаю фактов.
17. Нам надо ждать, пока наша делегация вернется из Болгарии. 18. Ты
должен все объяснить отцу, как только он придет с работы.
74.
Translate into Russian. Pay attention to the translation of the con-% junction i f when
it introduces object clauses:
1. If you want me to help you, why don't you say so? 2. I don't know if there
are any Bulgarians in the delegation, 3. Let's meet at nine o'clock if it is
convenient for you. 4. Tell me if I may take these books home. 5.1 don't know if
it is so. 6. Why not go now if you want to see the illumination? 7. Ask him if he
often comes home so late. 8. Would you like to join us if we go to Red Square?
9.1 wonder it he likes his job. 10. Ask him if he has got any pen-friends in India.
75.
Use the proper article:
1. ... Elbrus is ... highest peak of... Caucasus. 2. ... Japan is situated on ...
islands. 3.... London is on ... Thames. 4.... Poland is to ... west of... Russia. 5....
USA is in ... North America. 6. In ... north of our country ... summer is very
short, 7. What is ... capital of... Spain? 8. This expedition has just returned
from ... Antarctic. 9.... Urals separate Europe from... Asia. 10.... Ireland is ...
island, isn't it? 11. ... Mississippi is... longest river in ... world. 12.... names of...
rivers, seas and oceans are used with... definite article. 13. Turning to ... JEast he
saw that ... sun had risen. 14. I hear he is off to ... Central Africa. 15. ... Severn
is ... longest river in ... Great Britain. 16. ... Great Britain lies in ... eastern part
of... Atlantic Ocean.
76. Compare the objects according to the given model.
M o d e l : A lemon — an apple (sour).
A lemon is sourer than an apple. An apple is not so
sour as a lemon. An apple is not as sour as a lemon.
1. The Black Sea — the White Sea (warm). 2. Oil — water (light). 3.
Bulgaria — Russia (small). 4. Butter — milk (cheap). 5. Stone — wood (heavy).
6. Carrots — cucumbers (useful).
7. India — Japan (large). 8. Meat — vegetables (expensive).
9. Japanese — Spanish (difficult). 10. The Indian Ocean — the
Arctic Ocean (warm),
77. Use the Present Continuous instead of the infinitive in brackets:
1. He (not to work), he (to watch) the TV programme. 2, Kitty (to finish) her
porridge. 3. Look, the sun (to rise). 4. John (to polish) his boots and his sister (to
press) her dress. 5. It (to rain)? Yes, it (to rain) very hard. 6. The delegation (to
leave) Moscow tomorrow. 7, Somebody (to talk) in the next room. 8. Who (to
make) such a noise? 9. What you (to read) now?. I (to read) stories by Maugham.
10, The weather is fine. The sun (to shine) and the birds (to sing). 11. Somebody
(to knock) at the door. 12. You (to go) anywhere tonight? 13. Why you (to speak)
so fast? You (to make!) a lot of mistakes. 14. Go and see what the children (to
do). 15> Who you (to wait) for? I (to wait) for my sister. 16.1 сапЧ hear what
they (to talk) about.
78. Use the proper article:
1. What shall we have for ... dessert today? 2. Let's go to ... canteen and
have... bite. 3.... cucumbers and ... tomatoes are ... vegetables. 4. I don't like ...
mineral water, I prefer ... cup of... tea. 5. Pass me ... butter, please. 6. ... water, ...
milk, tea and ... coffee are drinks. 7. Is there anything to your taste on ... menu?
8. Will you bring ... knife from ... kitchen? 9. Only after ... sec-
ond course he felt he was not hungry any longer. 10. Is pud-
ding to your taste? 11. They sat down to ... table and began eat-
ing. 12. It was ... stewed-fruit and ... ice-cream to follow. ... ice-
cream was rather melted.
79. Replace the words in bold type by personal pronouns:
1. Tom and Bob are always hungry after classes. 2. Tom usually goes to the
canteen with his fellow-students. 3. Mother
doesn't like mustard. 4. Give Kitty some tea. 5. Is Kitty thirsty? 6. Mother
often asks Ann to help little John. 7. Bob doesn't like beer and always prefers a
glass of mineral water.
80.
Form all possible questions to the following sentences:
1. Mr. Smith reads the Times after breakfast. 2. He lives in a small town in
the North of Poland. 3. The children must stay at home as it is raining. 4. Ann is
helping her mother in the kitchen. 5. My elder daughter doesn't like porridge.
81.
Use the Present Indefinite or the Present Continuous instead of the infinitives in
brackets:
1. My elder sister (to have) a music lesson. She always (to have) a music
lesson on Friday, 2. Who (to sing) in the next room? 3. Father (to read) a
newspaper. He usually (to read) something before going to bed. 4. Mother (to
cook) breakfast in the kitchen. She always (to cook) in the mornings. 5. Who you
(to wait) for? — I (to wait) for Ann, we must leave in ten minutes. 6. It often (to
rain) in autumn. 7. Do not go out, it (to rain) heavily. 8. You (to understand) the
use of the Present Indefinite and the Present Continuous quite well? 9. What you
(to write) ? You (to make) notes about the two present tenses? 10. Why you (to
smile), Kitty? 11.1 often (to meet) you at the corner of this street. You (to wait)
for anybody? 12. You usually (to go) through the park? — Not usually, it's only
today that I (to go) here. 13. You (to hear) anything? — Yes, somebody (to
knock) at the door. 14. They still (to discuss) where to go now.
i
82.
Translate the following sentences into English. Pay attention to the use of the
Present Continuous to express an action in the near future:
1. Мы сейчас очень заняты, так как завтра мы уезжаем. 2. Летом мы всегда уезжаем
на дачу. 3. Давайте пройдем на платформу, поезд прибывает через 5 минут. 4. Поезда
отправляются и прибывают точно по расписанию (according to schedule). 5. Делегация
английских учителей прилетает (to arrive by plane) сегодня вечером в Москву. 6.
Иностранные делегации обычно прилетают в аэропорт Шереметьево. 7. Поторопись,
последний поезд отходит через несколько минут. 8. По расписанию последний поезд в
Москву отправляется ровно в 12 часов ночи. 9. Когда мои друзья приезжают в Москву,
они всегда останавливаются у нас. 10. Моя сестра приезжает в субботу. Я должна ее
встретить. 11. В понедель
ник я сдаю экзамен по истории Англии. 12. Студенты сдают экзамены
два раза в год. 13. Моя подруга устраивает сегодня вечер. 14. Когда они
устраивают вечер, они обычно приглашают всю нашу семью
83.
Copy the following sentences choosing the proper word from brackets:
1. Please, tell me the (next, nearest) way to the post-office. 2. The exercise is
on the (next, nearest) page. 3. We must wait for some (farther, further)
instructions. 4. Who is that boy in the (farthest, furthest) corner of the room? 5.
He is the (oldest, eldest) son of my father's friend. 6. This is the (oldest, eldest)
edition of the book. 7. Lucy is my (oldest, eldest) pen-friend. 8. I am (older,
elder) than you. 9, Jim is the (oldest, eldest) son in the family. He is two years
(older, elder) than Mary. 10. Eleven o'clock is the (last, latest) time when my
daughter goes to bed.
84.
Translate into English:
1. Какой язык труднее, английский или немецкий? 2. Волга — самый
длинный водный путь-в" Европе, не так ли? 3. Каковы последние новости?
4. Сегодня погода хуже, чем вчера. 5. Февраль — самый короткий месяц
года. 6. Ведь Лондон больше Парижа? 7. Мой словарь лучше твоего. 8.
Какой материк самый большой? 9. Он не такой высокий, как его старший
брат. 10. Какой путь самый короткий? 11. Джим — мой самый старый и
самый лучший друг 12 Это самая грубая ошибка. 13. Эти яблоки слаще
груш. 14 Она ниже ростом, чем ее муж. 15. Альпы — самые высокие горы в
Европе. 16. Последний рассказ в этой книге — самый интересный. 17. В
воскресенье мы встаем позже, чем обычно. 18 Байкал — самое глубокое
озеро в мире. 19. Хотя сыну всего 15 лет, но он уже выше своего отца. 20. У
вас произношение хуже, чем у других студентов вашей группы. Вам надо
больше заниматься. 21. Прямая линия — кратчайшее расстояние между
двумя точками 22. Моя сестра на 6 лет моложе меня.
85.
Pick out countable nouns from the list below and write them in the plural. Give
examples with the remaining uncountable nouns:
porridge, daughter, salt, sugar, butter, milk, tea, cake, bacon, toast,
marmalade, tea-pot, egg, bread, soup, waitress, chop, beer, potato, pleasure,
water, mustard, sausage, pepper, fruit, knife, orange, discussion, watch.
86. Copy the following sentences putting the direct and the indirect
objects in their proper place; insert to or for wherever necessary:
1. Can I do (anything) (you)? 2. Pass (it) (your father).
3. Show (us) (the capital of Poland). 4. You must explain (it)
(him). 5. Fetch today's newspaper and read (it) (me). 6. Please
bring (some milk) (Kitty). 7. Send (it) (them) at once. 8. Ask the
waitress to bring (us) (coffee).
87. Use the verbs given in brackets in the Present Indefinite or the
Present Continuous tenses:
1. Why you (to walk) so fast today? You usually (to walk) quite slowly. — I
(to hurry). I am afraid to miss the train. 2. Cuckoos (not to build) nests. They (to
use) the nests of other birds. 3.1 always (to buy) lottery tickets but I seldom (to
win).
4. You can't have the book now because my brother (to read) it.
5. Some people (to do) everything with their left hand. 6. Who (to make) that
terrible noise? — It's my son. 7. How you (to feel)?
8. Switch on the light. It (to get) dark. 9. You (to understand) the
rule? 10. The sun (to set) late in summer. 11. What you (to look
for) ? — We (to look for) our grandmother's spectacles. 12.1 (not
to know) what he (to want) .13. What time she (to come) here as a
rule? 14. Look, snow still (to fall). 15. It often (to rain) in October.
88. Translate into English using the Present Indefinite or the Present
Continuous:
1 Студенты сдают экзамены. He шумите в коридоре. 2. Посмотри, как ярко светит
солнце. 3. Вы слышите шум в коридоре? 4 Подождите немного, они сейчас ужинают. 5.
9-го Мая тысячи людей приходят на Красную Площадь. 6. Вы любите смотреть
телевизор? 7. Я не понимаю, о чем они говорят, так как они говорят очень тихо. 8.
Послушайте! В соседней комнате кто-то плачет.
9. Кого вы ждете? — Я жду свою подругу. 10. Что ты ешь? — Я ем
яблоко. 11. Осенью птицы улетают в теплые страны, а весной
возвращаются обратно. 12. Сейчас мы проходим 12-й урок. 13. Сту-
денты этой группы часто занимаются в лаборатории. 14. Завтра мы
идем в театр. 15. Маленькие дети едят 4—5 раз в день. 16. Говорят,
что он возвращается завтра.
89.
Use the proper article. Pay attention to the use of the article
with the names of meals:
1. We have ... breakfast at 8. 2. When ... lunch was over they went upstairs to
rest a little. 3. We all agreed that it was ...
very pleasant dinner. 4. It is not good to smoke before ... breakfast. 5.
Nobody objected to ... light supper. 6. At... dinner we sat far from each other and
could not talk. 7. All that made ... excellent breakfast. 8. When I came down
to . .. tea all had already gone. 9.... dinner was marvellous. 10. She was not sure
whether she should order... supper herself. 11. It all happened at... official
luncheon. 12. When ... dinner was over she decided to talk with him. 13. As
for ...supper itself it was ... very tasty one. 14. For ... breakfast was bacon and
eggs and coffee. 15. We must organize ... little dinner to celebrate the event. 16.
If you come half an hour before ... supper you will always find him at home.
17.
After ... dinner sit a while, after ... supper walk a mile.
18.
That night we had ... lonely little dinner. 19. She came down to ...
breakfast. 20.1 shall speak to him at... dinner.
90.
Translate into English:
1. Мы обедаем в 3 часа. 2. Если ужин холодный, подогрей его. 3. Он никогда не
опаздывает к обеду. 4. По утрам, до завтрака мы ходим купаться. 5. Что у нас сегодня на
ужин? 6. Они отказались даже от легкого завтрака. 7. За обедом все говорили о новом
директоре. 8. Очень полезно "прогуляться после ужина. 9. В конце завтрака я обычно
пью кофе. 10. Мой руки, ужин готов. 11. Какой вкусный обед! 12. Садитесь к столу,
обед стынет.
91.
Fill in the blanks with can or m a y in the correct form:
1. ... I visit you one of these days? 2. ... you lift this box? 3. When the fog
lifted we ... see where we were. 4. She asked me if she ... use my dictionary. 5.
The telephone is out of order. I ... not hear anything. 6. ... you help me a little?
7. ... I read the letter? 8. You ... think whatever you like. 9. I ... not walk so
quickly. I have a weak heart. 10. You ... take the textbook. I don't need it any
longer.
92.
Fill in the blanks with must not or need not
1. You ... ring the bell, I have a key. 2. "You ... play with matches," said
Mother. 3. I ... go to the shops today. There is plenty of food in the house. 4.
You ... strike a match; the room is full of gas. 5. We ... drive fast; we have plenty
of time. 6. You ... drive fast; there is a speed limit here. 7. You ... turn on the
light; I can see quite well. 8. You ... ask a woman her age. It's not polite.
93.
Fill in the blanks with there or i t:
1. ... was a lovely morning. 2. ... was absolute silence all over the house. 3.
I'm fond of young Toby; is a great charm about the boy. 4. ... was Lucy who told
me his address. 5. ... must be a mistake in what you have written. 6. Is ...
anything interesting on the TV programme tonight? 7. They say ... is going to be
windy tomorrow. 8. ... was a dense fog that day. 9. ... was very foggy that day.
10. ... was no necessity to do it yesterday. 11. ... was not necessary to do it
yesterday. 12. ... was snowing heavily all day. 13. ... was heavy snow all day. 14.
While ... is life, ... is hope. 15. ... is hardly time to do the packing. 16. ... is all
very well to say so, but is it so really? 17. ... is most unpleasant to have eight
lessons a day. 18. ... is not known where he spent his early childhood. 19. ... is a
time and place for everything. 20. ... was much to be said on both sides. 21. ... is
not clear who is responsible. 22. ... is a long way from the house to the tram-
stop. 23. ... is time to finish the translation before we go. 24. ... is a long time
since I saw such an interesting film. 25. ... is no place like home.
94.
Paraphrase the sentences using too or enough:
M o d e l s : It was so cold (that) we couldn't go out. It was too cold (for us)
to go out. She is clever, and can understand everything. She is clever enough to
understand everything.
1. She knows English well and can talk to a foreigner. 2. The passage is so
difficult that you can't translate it without a dictionary. 3. He has grown so fat he
can't tie up his own shoes.
4. He was so thirsty he could drink a well dry. 5. You're so
young that you don't know such things yet. 6. I know him well
and I trust him. 7. The work is so difficult we can't fulfil it in a
fortnight. 8. It's very late, you can't go for a walk. 9. He is not
clever, and he won't understand your joke. 10. She is so kind,
she can't be angry with anybody.
95.
Use the required form of the adjective given in brackets. Insert
articles where necessary:
1. My sister is much (old) than myself. 2. This is (warm) room in the house.
3. Her daughter is a little (tall) than I but much (thin). 4. It was (early) than I
thought, only six o'clock.
5. Where is (near) shop? 6. He is (old) son in the family.
7. What's (late) news? 8. Only when (late) guest left the room she sighed
freely. 9. Cardiff is (large) town in Wales. 10. She is much (useful) at home than
here. 11. She is (beautiful) girl we have ever seen. 12. He is one of (good)
engineers at the plant. 13. Today your answer is (bad) than last week. 14. John is
my (old) friend in this place. 15. This is (funny) story in the whole collection. 16.
1 didn't like (late) chapter in this book. 17. Your composition must be as (short)
as possible. 18. He was not so (talented) as we had expected. 19. They always
choose (easy) way. 20. Which is (high) mountain in the world? 21. What can be
(sweet) than honey?
96.
Put the adverbs in brackets in their proper places:
1. Aren't you ready (yet)? 2. He doesn't understand the rule (still). 3. She's
late for her lectures (often). 4. I can understand him (never). 5. Do you go
through the park (sometimes)? 6. The buses are full in the morning (usually). 7.
Have you been here (ever, before)? 8. I shall have to see his ugly face again
(never).
9. He isn't late (generally), but he was late last night (nearly).
10.
You must get up early (always). 11. I have to do it myself
(nearly always). 12. I am going for a walk (just). 13. None of
them had been there before (ever) and they wanted to go there
again (never). 14. He can help you (always). 15. May I come to
see you (sometimes)?
97.
A. Translate into English paying attention to the use of articles:
ручка двери, ножка стола, горлышко бутылки, крыша дома, потолок комнаты,
обложка книги, спинка стула, крыло самолета;
пачка сигарет, группа студентов, букетик фиалок, стадо овец, связка книг, набор
инструментов;
буханка хлеба, ложка варенья, капля крови, кусок сахара, чашка кофе, бутылка
вина, кувшин молока.
В. Make up sentences using the oAphrases.
To Lessons 13—14
98. Insert the appropriate form of the possessive pronoun:
1. This doesn't look like my tooth-brush; it must be ... . 2. Take your bag, I
have taken ...; come on! 3. They say they
have lost ... tickets; perhaps these are ... . 4. John has come to see me; ...
father and ... are old friends. 5. Mary and I have made new dresses to wear at ...
party; she says ... is better than ... .
6. Ann is going to help littleKitty to clean ... shoes.
99.
Make up sentences according to the model using the following words as
predicatives:
M o d e l s : It is nice to see you.
It is pleasant to take a shower in the morning.
pleasant, nice, useful, interesting, difficult, impossible, high time, a great joy,
a pity, a good idea.
100.
Write the comparative and the superlative degrees of the following adjectives:
late, pretty, sad, dear, gay, cheap, expensive, far, simple, clever, happy, sweet,
little, hot, quick, heavy, pleasant, wonderful, lazy, old, easy.
101. Put the adverbs of indefinite time in their proper place.
Note. 1. The usual place of adverbs of indefinite time is a f t e r the auxiliary have. 2.
Yet and already may also be placed at the end of the
sentence.
M o d e l s : He has already finished his coffee.
He hasn't finished his coffee yet.
1. I have seen him (just). 2. Have you spoken to her about it (ever)? 3. I have
been to the laboratory (already). Nick isn't there. 4. We have been there before
(never). 5. They haven't finished breakfast (yet). 6. I have done my homework
(already).
7. Have you made the beds, Ann (already)? 8. Mary and Edward
have left (just). 9. She hasn't finished doing the room (yet). 10. I
have finished my translation and now I am free (just). H - She
has seen the sea (never) and wants to go to the Crimea this
summer. 12. When does your train leave? Have you packed your
bags (yet)? 13. Have you been to England (ever)? 14. The bell
has gone (just). 15.1 have seen him looking so pale (never). 16. If
you have seen the film you must remember this scene (ever).
102.
a) Copy the sentences arranging them in the following way: 1. Sentences
expressing the completion of actions. 2. Sentences expressing durative actions:
1. Glad to see you! Haven't seen you for ages. 2. I have lived in iMoscow
since childhood. 3. Have you done your morning exercises? 4. Robert has
studied English for five years already. 5. Ann has made a new dress. 6. The
children have just come home from a walk. 7. Has anyone cleaned the
blackboard? 8. Why haven't you brought your article exercise book? 9. Kitty has
been asleep for two hours, it's time to wake her up. 10. Something has gone
wrong with the radio-set. 11. I haven't had time to repair the radio since last
Monday. 12. Have you heard the news? 13. The bell has gone, let's begin our
lesson. 14. It's 12 o'clock, so I have been here for two hours.
b) After you have written the sentences translate them into Russian.
103.
Use the proper article. Pay attention to the use of the article with the nonn in
apposition:
1. ... girl was alone, ...^rather short young woman of twenty-seven. 2. Her
companion, ... handsome dark-haired youth, had left. 3. Last night we saw "An
Ideal Husband", ... play by Oscar Wilde. 4. She was seventeen then — ...
beautiful young creature. 5. This is my friend, ... writer. 6. Beside him hung the
portrait of his wife, ... thin woman in black. 7. Tokyo, ... capital of Japan, is one
of the largest cities in the world. 8. Our Institute, ... grey four-storeyed building,
is not far from the railway. 9. Shakespeare, ... great English playwright, lived in
the 17th century. 10. Mr. Bennett, ... man of fifty, resembled my father. 11. I saw
him speaking to a young man,... Englishman.
104.
Use the Present Indefinite, the Present Continuous or the Present Perfect instead
of the infinitives in brackets:
1. Will you, please, lend me your pen for a moment? I (to leave) mine at
home and now (to have) nothing to write with. — I (to be) sorry, but I (to be
going) to write myself. Ann (not to write), she can give you her pen. 2. You (to
read) "The Gadfly" by Voynich? I (to read) it now, I (not to finish) it yet. It (to
—
be) a very good book, I (to like) it very much. 3. We (to go) to the cafe "Cosmos"
tonight. You ever (to be) there? 4. Where (to be) Ann? — She (to be) in the
kitchen. — What she (to do) there? —
She (to wash up). I already (to help) my mother with the housework and (to
—
come) to ask Ann to go to the cinema with me. 5. Don't forget we (to have) a
party tomorrow, be sure to bring Bob with you if he (to come) back from
St.Petersburg. 6. (to be) there anything the matter with you? You (to be) so pale.
— Nothing the matter. I just (to finish) my work and I (to be) a little tired. 7.
Who (to play) the piano? Mary still (to have) her music lesson? — No. The
lesson (to be) over and the teacher already (to go). Mother (to play) for little
Kitty. 8. Ring me up when you (to be) free. I (to have) something to discuss with
you.
9. I (not to hear) the news yet. 10. Hurry up if you (to want) to go
out with me. 11. She (to send) me a letter that she (to come) in a
few days. 12. You (to understand) what they (to talk) about?
13. When she (to call) on us she always (to bring) some toys for
my little daughter. 14. What you (to look) for?
I (to look) for
—
my dictionary. I just (to see) it somewhere. I (to think) it (to lie)
on the bookshelf.
105. Translate into English using the Present Continuous, the Present Indefinite or the
Present Perfect:
1. Надень пальто и шапку. На улице холодно, дует сильный ветер. 2. Видишь
человека на углу? Он на нас смотрит. 3. Сегодня на обед придет Елена. Я давно ее не
—
видела. Она очень изменилась? — Не очень. 4. Когда учитель объясняет новое правило,
он обычно пишет на доске примеры. 5. Ты что-нибудь слышишь? Я слушаю
—
внимательно, но ничего не слышу. 6. Ты читал эту книгу, отец? — От корки (cover) до
корки. Хорошая книга, я собираюсь прочесть ее еще раз. 7. Кто только что вышел из
комнаты? — Не знаю, я никого не заметил. 8. По дороге на работу я обычно встречаю
детей, которые идут в школу. 9. Я думаю, вам нужно выпить горячего кофе, прежде чем
вы уйдете. Вечер такой холодный.
10.
Ты видела Мэри сегодня? — Нет, она больна. Она больна уже
десять дней. 11, Что ты собираешься делать после занятий? —
Хочу пойти в кино. — Не уходи без меня, подожди, пока я тебе
позвоню. — Хорошо. 12. Вы ходили в кино на этой неделе? — Нет,
я очень занята последнее время. — Вы должны посмотреть но-
вый фильм он вам, наверняка, понравится, 13. Вы часто ходите в
театр? — Да, довольно часто, и сегодня иду. 14, Мы давно его не
видели. Нелли говорит, что он очень изменился, 15. Я очень рада,
что вы пришли. Вы всегда приносите хорошие новости. 16. Сегод-
ня мы играем в теннис, Никки и я. 17 Они уже уехали? Нет, они
уезжают трехчасовым поездом. 18. Есть у вас вопросы? Вы все
поняли, что я вам объяснила? — Спасибо, все ясно.
106.
Use the Present Continuous or the Present Perfect Continuous
instead of the infinitives in brackets.
Note. The Present Continuous expresses an action going on at the moment of
speaking. The Present Perfect Continuous expresses an action occupying a period of
time still continuing or just finished.
1. What you (to look) at? — I (to look) at that picture over there. I (to look) at
it for almost half an hour and I still can't understand what it is. 2. What Mary (to
do)? — She (to practise) the piano. She (to play) since 12 o'clock. I think she
must have a rest. 3. Here you are at last! I (to look) for you everywhere. 4. Why
you (to smile) Robert? — I (to watch) your kitten. What a playful little thing it
is! 5. I see you (to write) letters all the morning. Is it the last letter you (to write)
now? 6. You (to sit) here for a long time. You (to wait) for anybody? 7. How long
you (to study) English? — Forlhree years already. 8. I (to work) at my report
since Monday. Now I (to write) the conclusion.
9. Mary's mother (to rest) in the garden all day because she is ill.
10.
She (to sleep) for ten hours! You must wake her! 11. David
(to repair) the TV-set. He (to work) at it for an hour or so.
12.
David (to wash) his hands. He just (to repair) the TV-set.
13.
Why you all (to laugh)? Jim (to tell) you his anecdotes?
14.
It's six o'clock. I (to wait) for Ann for half an hour. I must be off now.
107.
Comment on the use of the Present Perfect Continuous and
translate these sentences into Russian:
1. a) All these days he has been talking about his new plan. He can't speak of
anything else, b) Here is Mr. Madden who we have just been speaking about.
2. a) I have been peeling potatoes for half an hour, but Mother says there isn't
enough for everybody, b) Why are your hands dirty? I have been peeling
—
potatoes.
3. a) Children, you have been swimming half an Jiour already. Get out of
the^water,^uick! b) I am cold because I have been swimming for an hour.
4. a) They have been working in the garden since 10 o'clock. Tell them it is
time to have lunch, b) I am very tired; I have been working in the garden.
5). a) Kitty, you have been watching TV too long, you'll have a headache, b) I
have a headache; I have been watching TV too long.
108. Use the Present Perfect or the Present Perfect Continuous instead
of the infinitives in brackets:
1. You (to pass) your exam in English literature? 2.1 (to try) to learn English
for years but I (not to make) good progress yet.
3. That book (to lie) on the table for weeks. You (not to read) it
yet? 4. I (to wait) here for her since 7 o'clock and she (not to
come) yet. 5. I (to read) "War and Peace" for the last three
months. 6. I (to think) about you all day. 7. He never (to be)
here before. 8. I can't help being angry with you; you (to sit)
here all the time and doing nothing. 9. There's nothing to be
proud of; you (not to get) a single excellent mark as yet. 10.1 (to
work) so hard this week that I (not to have) time to go to the
cinema. 11. The girls (to talk) about their new dresses for half an
hour already; it seems they have nothing else to talk about. 12.1
just (to talk) to him; he agrees to help us. 13. Some of our stu-
dents (to join) the English club to get a better command of the
language. 14. I (to know) her all my life and we always (to be)
good friends.
109. Combine the two sentences into one using too + adjective + in-
finitive.
M o d e l s : I was busy; I couldn't write to you. I was too busy to write to
you. It was very dark. We couldn't see anything. It was too dark for us to see
anything.
1. I am very tired; I mustn't work any longer. 2. It's very cold; we can't go out.
3.1 was so angry; I couldn't speak to him.
4. It's very far; we can't walk. 5. It's very good; it can't be true.
6. This dress is very old; I can't wear it any more. 7. The music
is very soft; we can't hear it. 8. You are so young; you can't be
a teacher.
110. Read the following sentences a) in the interrogative, b) in the
negative:
1. Bob came home late. 2. She gave them her dictionary. 3. He took a shower.
4. The students went to the lab. 5. They got up early. 6. Ann brought me a new
magazine. 7. He left for London on Monday. 8. They wrote to me every month.
9. He read the letter out loud. 10. You did it all by yourself. 11. She spoke
English fluently. 12. They sat down quietly. 13. Jim saw
them together. 14. They all heard the song. 15. He paid the money yesterday.
16. Benny found his ball. 17. She remembered every word. 18. Ann made good
progress in English. 19. The boys knew where to go. 20. They celebrated New
Year. 21. She got an excellent mark. 22. My parents met me at the station. 23.
You thought he was right. 24. We discussed it at the meeting. 25. It troubled me
very much. 26. Robert repaired Ann's iron. 27. They began on time. 28. You told
John about it. 29. He spent a lot of time on his English. 30. They admired her
singing very much.
111.
Use the Past Indefinite or the Present Perfect instead of the
infinitives in brackets:
1. How long you (to know) him? — I (to know) him since 1965. 2. He (to
live) in Leningrad for two years and then (to go) to Siberia. 3. When he (to
arrive)? — He (to arrive) at 2 o'clock. 4. I (to read) this book when I was at
school. 5. I can't go with you as I (not to finish) my work. 6. The clock is slow.
— It isn't slow, it (to stop). 7. You (to have dinner) yet? 8. The performance (to
begin) at 7 o'clock and (to last) for 3 hours. We all (to enjoy) it. 9. The lecture
just (to begin). You are a little late. 10. We (to miss) the tram. Now we'll have to
walk. 11. You (to be) here before? — Yes, I (to spend) my holidays here last year.
12 You (to see) Kitty on Monday? 13. Where is Tom? •— I (not to know). I (not
to see) him today. 14. I (to lose) my pen. You (to see) it anywhere? 15. You ever
(to try) to give up smoking?
16.
Why you (to switch on) the light? It is not dark yet.
17.
When it (to happen)? 18. He (to leave) for the Far East two years ago
and I (not to see) him since. 19. The last post (to come)? 20. When you (to meet)
him last? 21. You (to be) to the laboratory this week? 22. Why you (to take) my
pen while I was out? You (to break) it,
112.
Use the Past Indefinite or the Present Perfect instead or the
infinitives in brackets.
Note. Remember that the definite place usually implies a definite past
time
1. You (to find) the key which you (to lose) yesterday? — Yes, I (to find) it in
the pocket of my other coat. 2. I (to see) him in the laboratory today. We (to be)
there together. 3. You (to see) him today? He is your friend, as far as I know;
help me to find
him. 4. We never (to meet) him. We don't know what he looks like. 5. She (to
meet) them in Tverskaya Street this afternoon. 6. I am angry with Ann; she (to
keep) me waiting at the Institute for a long time this evening. 7. Lend me your
rubber. I (to make) a mistake and wish to rub it out. 8. Do you know that the
English delegation already (to leave) for London? — Yes, of course, I together
with my fellow-students (to be) at the station to see them off.
113.
Change the following sentences into the negative and interrogative:
1. Students often have to work at the laboratory after classes. 2. Tony had to
take entrance exams in August. 3. You will have to come here twice a week. 4.
She had to spend a lot of money on books. 5. They had to stay there for a long
time. 6. Ann always has to get up early. 7. He has to work hard at his
pronunciation. 8. Lucy has to help her little brother and sister to prepare their
lessons. 9. You will have to join some sports society. 10. She has to clean the flat
herself.
114.
Use the Past Indefinite or the Past Continuous instead of the infinitives in
brackets.
Note. Remember that when we want to express a period of time in the past, we usually
use the Past Indefinite. The Past Continuous expresses an action going on at a definite
moment in the past.
M o d e l s : We lived there for 10 years.
They waited for us for an hour.
1. We (to walk) in-silence for a long time. Nobody (to want)' to speak. 2. We
(to walk) in silence when he suddenly (to ask) me if I (can) help him. 3. He (to
wait) there for half an hour, but nobody (to come). 4. I just (to have) breakfast
when the telephone (to ring). When I (to come)" back to my coffee it (to be)
almost cold. 5. I (to speak) to her several times, but she (to read) and (not to
hear) me. 6. Ann (to drop) two cups while she (to wash) up last night, but neither
of the cups (to break). 7. I (to walk) for a quarter of an hour and (to watch) what
(to go on) around me: fast cars (to rush) in both directions, and ft (to be)
impossible to cross the street. 8. The old man who (to sit) on the bench beside me
(to keep) silent for some time. Then he (to ask) me if I (to know) him. 9. She (to
teach) Russian for two years
when she (to live) in France. 10. He (to remember) the day when he first (to
go) to school. 11. We (to talk) about Jim when he (to run) into the room. 12. I (to
stand) at the window for some time; the sun (to shine), and I (to decide) to go for
a walk. 13. For a quarter of an hour or so he (to lie) motionless, he (can) not
make himself get up. 14. Alison and Cassie (to talk) on the staircase as I went
down.
115.
Translate the following sentences using the Past Indefinite or the Past Continuous:
1. Когда я пришла, они обедали 2. Когда мы катались на лыжах, начал идти снег. 3.
Когда ты закончила школу? — В 1977 году. 4. В тот день у нас было много работы, так
как вечером мы уезжали. 5. Сколько времени ты вчера занималась? — Я занималась 3
часа. 6. Мы познакомились, когда сдавали вступительные экзамены. 7. Вчера он был
занят весь вечер, он чинил телевизор. 8. Он вошел в комнату, поздоровался со всеми и
сел у окна. 9. До войны наша семья жила в Туле. Мы прожили там 6 лет. 10. Было
известно, что делегация прибывает на следующее утро. 11. Я целый месяц гостила у
своей подруги в Крыму. 12. Во вторник я два часа работала в лаборатории. 13. Они
сказали, что уезжают из Москвы. 14. Она долго сидела на крыльце с письмом в руках.
15. Когда часы пробили одиннадцать, он все еще работал. 16 Он не замечал, что
происходит вокруг. 17. По вечерам он имел обыкновение читать вслух своему сынишке.
18. Он сказал мне, что скоро уезжает из Лондона. 19. Я ждал там около часа. 20. Мой
отец работал на том заводе 20 лет.
116.
Change the following sentences into indirect speech:
1. He asked angrily, "Why are you smiling to yourself and don't answer my
questions at once?" 2. The girl said, "I am thinking of the summer spent in the
Crimea." 3. She said to Nick, "When are you going to visit them?" "I have no
time," replied Nick. 4. Mary said, "I'm making a new dress, I want to wear it at
our party." 5. Ann said, "We are thinking of going out." 6. The teacher asked,
"Are you listening carefully, John?" 7. She asked him, "Is Robert coming
tomorrow?" 8. I said, "Is John studying for an examination now?" 9. Father said,
"Mary is doing her morning exercises, I don't want to disturb her." 10. Mother
said, "You are forgetting your manners, John."
117.
Use the proper article:
1. Did you finish ... school ... last year? 2. ... examiner has already come. 3.
What was your mark in... History? 4. He has made ... great progress since ...
beginning of ... term. 5. It is easy for ... child to study ... foreign language. 6.
Where is ... money? — It is on ... table. 7. ... boy is good at ... Mathematics, ...
Physics and ... Chemistry, but his knowledge of ... Literature and ... English is
rather poor. 8. What ... fine weather we are having today! 9. At last he found ...
very interesting work. 10. ... new& he brought yesterday is very important. 11.
What ... clever advice! 12. ... Phonetics is ... branch of ... Linguistics. 13. If you
want to speak without ... mistakes you must study ... Grammar hard. 14. What is
... news? 15. ... exercise 12 must be done in ... written form. 16. Do you often
work in ... laboratory? 17. She attends ... course of ... lectures on ... Russian
Literature at ... University. 18. I am not interested in ... Chemistry. 19. Her
subject is ... History of ... Art. 20. It was clear she had ... good news. 21. ...
advice is good but I cannot follow it.
118.
Comment on the use of tenses in the following examples and translate them into
Russian:
1. Every evening the young fisherman went out upon the sea and threw his
nets into the water. 2. Stanley got up looking for his stick. "Have you, children,
been playing with my stick?" 3. Fleur does what she likes. 4. He liked music but
the piece she was playing had no melody for him. 5. This is getting interesting. 6.
How long have you been married? 7. Don't you know that Mrs. Greenfield has
left us? She's gone to London. 8. He has been studying at the University for б
years. 9. She looked at it for some time and slowly a little frown crept between
her brows. 10. I am always telling Jerry that his uncle means more to him than
his own parents. 11. I am starting again. A new life begins from today. 12. "It's a
pity you interrupted us," said Nora. "We were having an interesting
conversation." 13. At that moment the telephone bell rang. Rosanna took up the
receiver and listened. 14. I was still thinking of it when I came face to face with
Rogei.
119.
Use the required tense (Present and Past Indefinite, Present and Past Continuous,
Present Perfect and Present Perfect Continuous):
1. She (to go) to Italy five years ago. Since then she (not to speak) Italian, and
(to forget) nearly all she (to learn) there.
2. When he (to run) after the tram, he (to fall) and (to hurt) his leg. We (to
have) to carry him home. Now he (to lie) in bed. The doctor just (to leave). The
doctor (to say) he must stay in bed for a week. 3. He (to look) through my album
when I (to enter). "You (to like) my sketches?" I (to ask) him. "They (not to be)
very good." 4. What you (to look) for? — I (to lose) my pen and (to want) to
find it before it (to get) dark. — When you (to lose) it? — I (to think) I (to drop)
it somewhere here when I (to go) to the Institute this afternoon. 5. My friend
Robert (to learn) French for the last three years, and now he (to study) German,
too. 6. You (to speak) to Ann yesterday? — No, I (not to see) her for a long time.
I (not to remember) when I last (to see) her. 7. My brother (to study) modern
English literature for two years and then (to give) it up. 8. I (to look) at this
photograph for five minutes, but I can't see you in it. — I'm afraid you (to look)
at the wrong one. 9. You must stop reading; you have a headache because you
(to read) too long! 10. My elder brother (to join) the army when he (to be)
eighteen. 11. They (to live) in that town for ten years and then (to move) to the
country. 12. We (to live) here for the last six months, and just (to decide) to
move. 13. He (to write) a new play for the last two years, but he (not to finish) it
yet.
To Lesson 15
120. Insert the missing conjunctions and comment on the use of tenses in the
following sentences. (Conjunctions to be used: when, till, before, after, as soon as,
while, tf):
1. I shall believe it ... I see it. 2. You must wait ... the light changes to green.
3. I shall be ready ... you count ten. 4. He will ring up for the taxi ... you finish
packing. 5. I shall tell you a secret... my brother goes out. 6. We shall be starting
immediately ... you finish your dinner. 7. I don't think he will write ... he arrives.
8. I shall always remember you ... I live. 9. I shall be preparing breakfast ... you
are taking a shower. 10. I shall put on my raincoat ... it starts to rain. 11. He'll tell
you ... you ask him. 12. ... you stay in the reading-hall I'll be working in the
laboratory. 13. He will stay here ... you come. 14. ... they show me their
homework, I will correct it..
121.
Translate what is given in brackets using the Present Indefinite or the Future
Indefinite:
1. You will enjoy yourself if you (поедете на Кавказ). 2. Ask him if he
(поедет на Кавказ). 3. We shan't be able to go out if (будет сильный дождь). 4.
They say (собирается дождь); the clouds are gathering. 5. I don't know when he
(придет); the weather is so nasty. 6. Tell him to wait when he (придет). I may
be late. 7. Tell Mother we (не скоро вернемся), it's much too fer away. 8. Tell
Mother not to worry if we (не скоро вернемся); it's much too far away. 9. I'll
talk to him about it if I (увижу его сегодня). 10. I'm not sure if I (увижу его
сегодня). 11. She will > take the children out for a walk if she (окончит работу
раньше). 12.1 don't know if she (окончит работу раньше); she has got a lot to
do. 13. The rain won't do him any harm if he (наденет плащ). 14. Ask him if he
(наденет плащ); it looks like rain.
122.
Complete the following sentences using the Present Indefinite or the Future
Indefinite:
1. If you travel by car to the Crimea ... . 2. I should like to accompany you in
case .... 3. If the weather remains fine ... . 4. We shall wait till ... . 5. I should like
to know when ... . 6. Don't go away before ... . 7, Tell me when ... . 8. The rain
will soak us to the skin unless .... 9. He is clever enough to understand what you
want if... . 10. If it looks like rain .... 11. I am not quite sure if .... 12. I understand
you are going to stay at home till ... . 13. Please, ring me up as soon as ... . 14.
We'd better stay at home if ... . 15. You may go skating after ... . 16. Don't forget
to remind him tomorrow in case ... . 17. We'll remain here and wait for you
until.... 18. He must join us tomorrow; ask him when .... 19. I'm afraid I shan't be
able to join you before .... 20. She promised to come tonight. Please try to find
out if....
123.
Translate into English using you (we) had better + Infinitive:
1. Вам бы лучше остаться дома; сейчас польет дождь. 2. Тебе бы лучше
туда одной не ходить. 3. Нам бы лучше отложить эту работу до завтра. 4.
Вам бы лучше пойти к нам, чем оставаться одному. 5. Тебе бы лучше надеть
плащ, б/Тебе бы лучше подождать Джона и пойти вместе с ним. 7. Нам бы
лучше не говорить об этом Ане, она рассердится. 8. Ты бы лучше мне
сказала, куда мы идем. 9. Ты бы лучше мне объяснила, почему он
рассердится, если я рас
скажу ему правду. 10. Вам бы лучше послать им телеграмму, если вы
хотите, чтобы они поскорее приехали. 11. Нам бы лучше поговорить с ним.
Он приятный человек, он нам поможет. 12. Вам бы лучше пойти и
поговорить с ним сейчас же, если он еще не ушел.
124.
Replace the Future Indefinite by to be going to.
Note, to be going to+ Infinitive refers an action to the near future; it has the meaning of
intention or certainty.
1. I'll travel by car this summer. 2. We'll have a test on the use of tenses on
Monday. 3. The Parkers will have a picnic lunch in the country on Sunday. 4.
Ann will practise the piano all the morning. 5. There will be a storm soon, look
at those clouds. 6. They say she'll be married this autumn. 7.1 got wet through in
yesterday's rain, I think I shall have a cold. 8. She'll clean the flat on Saturday. 9.
What will you do when you finish school? 10. We'll see them all in September
when they come from the country. 11. Do you like the song? I'll sing it again this
evening. 12. What will you do after classes today? 13. I'll take my last exam next
Monday. 14. The article isn't very long; he will translate it tonight. 15. My friend
is leaving tomorrow. She says she'll write to me every week.
125.
Use the proper article. Pay attention to the use of the article with the
names of seasons:
1. ... winter was bitterly cold. 2. It was ... early autumn. 3. ... summer is my
favourite season. 4. October is ... rainy month. 5. There are many wonderful
verses about ... winter. 6. In ... spring ... days become longer and ... nights grow
shorter. 7. ... children have ... long vacations in ... summer and ... short vacations
in ... winter and ... spring. 8. ... summer is ... good time for sports. 9. It is pleasant
to go to ... country on ... hot day in ... summer. 10. It was ... cold rainy autumn.
11. What is ... weather like in Siberia in ... winter? 12. ... Russian winter is
famous for its frosts. 13. Look at... sky. It is covered with ... dark clouds. 14.
When it is ... winter in one part of our country it is already ... summer in another.
126.
Translate the following sentences into English:
1. Стояла поздняя осень. 2. Зима 1941 года была очень суровой. • 3.
Летом мы всегда живем на даче, а зимой в городе. 4. Наступила весна.
—
Ярко светит солнце. 5. Пушкин очень любил осень.
6. Какая сегодня великолепная погода! Настоящая весна. 7. Я люблю бывать за
городом ранней весной. 8. Лето было очень жаркое, и все стремились уехать из города.
9. Иногда осенью бывает очень хорошая погода. 10. Было холодное, дождливое лето. \
127.
Put the adverbs given in brackets in their proper place:
1. Does she wear this hat (always)? 2. Have you seen hm (today, anywhere)?
3. It rains in this part of the country (seldom). 4. Have you seen such a vast forest
(before, ever)? 5. Will you be working if I come at four (still)? 6. Do you go
(there sometimes)? 7. He, as usual, was working (at night, late). 8. She spoke the
last words (out loud). 9. We are waiting for you. Aren't you ready (still, yet)? 10.
He gets up at seven. Has he got up (already, usually)? 11. You can be sure how to
behave in her presence (never). 12. You must speak like that to your mother
(never). 13. Can she do it (easily)? 14. Have you met him (before, here, ever)?
15. Let's go together (tonight, there). 16. She keeps us waiting a long time
(seldom). 17. She doesn't take sugar in her tea (usually). 18. I made spelling
mistakes when I was at school (generally) 19. The train arrived (yesterday, late).
20. The students of our faculty are very busy (generally).
128.
Use the proper article:
... boy who had always lived in ... country and who had never heard of ...
animals that live in other lands came one day to ... town where there was ... wild-
beast show. ... elephant attracted his attention, and he was particularly struck
by ... animal very much like ... cat, but considerably larger, with ... spotted skin
and of ... quiet and peaceful appearance. Near ... cage, containing this beautiful
animal, was another of much less attractive appearance with two humps on its
back and with ... long ugly neck. "What is ... name of that pretty animal which
you have placed next to this other ugly one?" asked ... boy of.. attendant. "That
animal which you admire so much," he replied, "is ... leopard, and is one of...
most dangerous of all wild beasts."
4
129.
Use the Future Continuous where possible.
Note. The Future Continuous is often used to express an action which is
supposed or anticipated in the future (to anticipate — предвидеть,
предвкушать)
a) Open the brackets:
1. Will you have a cup of tea? — No, thank you. I (to have) lunch soon. 2.1
hope I (to sleep) peacefully tonight. 3. My boys (to go) back to college in a
week's time, and I (to be) alone again. 4. What tasty little cakes! I expect you (to
make) some more cakes like these while I stay with you, Auntie! 5.1 must be off
now. They (to wonder) what has happened to me. 6. I'm sure they (to meet) us at
the station. I (to be) so glad to see them! 7. Will you, please, wait a little? He (to
come) home soon. 8.1 don't want to disturb you. I know you (to pack). 9. It's just
the time to see him. He (to work) in his little garden. 10. He is supposed to be
very busy then. He (to prepare) for his examination. 11. Just a second. You (to
see) Cora shortly? 12. What game he (to play) tomorrow? 13.1 suppose you (to
meet) your people? 14. You (to see) him tomorrow by any chance?
b) Translate into English:
1. Я должна идти, мама будет ждать меня. 2. «Все это будет происходить со мной, и
очень скоро», — подумал он. 3. Я легко могу представить, что будут делать мои
родители, когда я приеду: отец будет читать газету, а мама — готовить мой любимый
пирог. 4. Ник сейчас в Болгарии; он пишет, что через месяц-два будет возвращаться
домой. 5. Останься со мной еще немного. Мы скоро будем пить чай. 6. Преподаватель
говорит, что в следующий раз он будет читать лекцию об артикле. 7. Мы будем пить
кофе после обеда, как обычно. 8. Не забудьте, мы будем вас ждать! 9. Не беспокойся,
мама, я буду пить чай в институтской столовой. Сделай мне бутерброд, пожалуйста. 10.
Боб обещает прийти. Полагаю, он опять будет рассказывать нам забавные истории. 11.
Мы будем ужинать минут через двадцать. Не уходите. 12. Он скоро снова придет
повидаться с нами. Я могу спросить его об этом, если хотите. 13. Я предполагаю, что
мне пора идти обратно. Нэн будет недоумевать, где я. 14. Я увижу Генри сегодня
вечером. Хотите, чтобы я передал ему что-нибудь?
130. Translate into English. Pay attention to uncountable nouns:
1. Мне нужен совет в этом вопросе. 2, Ваши советы очень хороши, но я не могу им
последовать. 3. Сведения были очень важные. 4. Какая интересная работа! 5. Она
сделала такие большие успехи! 6. Он всегда приносит нам какую-нибудь новость. 7. Вы
слушали сегодня последние известия? 8. Где деньги? — Они в портфеле. 9. Погода
сегодня отвратительная. Льет дождь, и дует холодный ветер. 10. Приятно поехать за
город в хорошую погоду.
11. Какие интересные новости! 12. У тебя есть с собой деньги? Дай мне
немного. 13. Работа, которую он нашел, очень нравится ему. 14. Какая
замечательная мысль! 15. У нее волосы черные, а глаза голубые. Это
делает ее очень привлекательной. 16. Я могу дать вам два хороших совета.
17. Ее старшая сестра велела ей отнести фрукты на кухню и вымыть их в
кипяченой воде. 18. Это не мои деньги, я не могу их взять. 19. Кто дал вам
таки * интересные сведения? 20. Наконец он нашел работу, которая его
интересует. 21 Это такая интересная пьеса. 22. Какой хороший совет вы
мне дали!
То Lesson 16
131.
Change the following sentences into indirect speech:
1. He said "I attend the language laboratory almost every day. I am working
hard at my pronunciation, and Г hope I'll make good progress soon." 2. Helen
said to Roger, "I'll join you in a moment if you wait for me at the entrance door."
3. Robert asked his friend: "Where are you going for the week-end? I hope you
won't stay indoors all the time?" 4. Helen said: "Don't even ring me up. I'll be
working at my translation." 5. Mother said to the children: "If Aunt Emily invites
us we'll spend the week-end at the seaside." 6. "I'm sure I'll still be sleeping when
you start. I don't want to get up so early," said Alice. 7. "I recommend you to join
Our company if you want to have a good rest," said Roger, "we are going to the
river, I know a nice place for bathing there." 8. She said: "The tall trees make a
green corridor, and their leaves are murmuring above our heads while we walk
along that wonderful alley." 9. "Are you quarrelling again?" he asked. "Mother
will he angry with you." 10. "If you watch TV for a long time, you'll get tired,"
said Mother to the boy. 11. He said: "Hurry up! Find your hockey stick. Г11 be
waiting for you outside because it's too hot here" 12. She said: "I'll give him your
note if you like. I'll be seeing him tomorrow as we work together."
132. Choose the proper word from brackets and say in which of the
sentences look is a link-verb: *
1. She looks (nice, nicely) in her new hat. 2. She looked (pleasant, pleasantly)
and made everybody feel at ease. 3. She
looked (pleasant, pleasantly) at the little boy. 4. Father looked (stern, sternly)
at me and I felt unhappy. 5. The girl looked (happy, happily) at her father, but the
father looked (angry, angrily). 6. The woman looked (helpless, helplessly). 7.
The woman looked (helpless, helplessly) about. 8. What's the matter with you?
You look so (sad, sadly). 9. She looked (sad, sadly) at me and turned away. 10.
Everything is all right with the little girl; she looks (gay, gaily) and (cheerful,
cheerfully) again.
133.
Translate into English. Pay attention to the sequence of tenses:
1. Ему очень хотелось поехать на юг, и мы не думали, что он вернется
так скоро. 2. Он сказал, что, когда он занимается, он всегда выключает
радио. 3. Отец сказал, что мы отправимся, как только я кончу завтрак. 4.
Мы говорили о своей будущей работе. Петр сказал, что он поедет учить
ребят в свою родную деревню. Там хорошая школа. 5. У нас было мало
времени, так как мы уезжали на следующий день. 6. Он очень, торопился,
так как боялся, что сестра будет ждать его. 7. Моя сестренка чувствовала
себя несчастной, когда получила двойку за сочинение. 8. Я пойду домой,
как только кончу прослушивать пленку пятого урока. 9. Мой старший брат
сказал мне, чтобы я не включал магнитофон, если я не знаю, как это делать.
10. Я как раз завтракал, когда зашел мой приятель и сказал, что мне
придется поторопиться, если я хочу присоединиться к нему. Они
отправятся рано. 11. Мы решили, что пока ты будешь делать перевод, Аня
будет помогать нам, потом мы поможем ей вымыть посуду и убрать комнату
до того, как ее мама придет с работы. 12. Джон сказал, что он все устроит
сам для нашей поездки на взморье. 13. Мы надеемся, что, когда он
вернется, он примет участие в нашей дискуссии о современной
американской литературе. 14. Он ответил, что мы не сможем уладить этот
вопрос, пока не поговорим с деканом. 15. Джемма знала, что Артур не
изменит своего решения, даже если она даст ему совет, и, кроме того, она
не хотела давать ему никаких советов.
134.
Use the proper article:
Robert Robinson, my old acquaintance, had worked at ... plant in Detroit.
There ... technical school was started for advertising reasons. ... newspapers had
stressed ... fact that... school would be open to all... workers "regardless of
colour."
Robinson's life before he came to that school had been full of ... hardships.
His home was in one of... southern states where he had become ... instrument-
maker. ... unemployment caught
up with him, and he went to Detroit where ... newspapers prorr ised ...
employment. In Detroit ... new period in his life began- . endless search for ...
work. He managed to enter ... technic* school. He was ... only coloured
student there. ... newspapei made the most of it and even featured his
photograph at... worl ... papers, however, did not mention ... fact that he was
paid les than ... white workers, and they kept quiet about ... animosit that he
was met with every morning.
135.
Use the Past Indefinite or the Past Perfect instead of the infin tives in brackets:
1. Margot (to go) to the door and (to lock) it, and (to return) with the key. 2.
He sighed again and again, like one who (to escape) from danger. 3. Then I (to
search) for a piece of paper and a pencil, and I (to write) a message for the maid.
He (to make) tea and (to eat) the biscuits which Mrs. Aberdeen (to bring) him. 5.
Ansell (to give) an angry sigh, and at that moment there (to be) a tap on the door,
6. When the cinema (to be) over they (to go) for a walk across the dark, damp
fields. 7. The doorj (to open). A tall young woman (to stand) framed in the light
thatj (to fall) from the passage. j3?Cassie (to spend) the night at home,j and on
entering the dining-room (to glance) at the space above1 the fire, He (to walk)
about our sitting-room all afternoon,! murmuriifg to himself. 10. It (to be) all so
sudden that for a; moment no one (to know) what (to happen). 11. He (to tell)
mej that they (to be) at the same public school and (to be) friends j ever since.
12. At the age of seventy-four he (to be) excited as ai boy about his expedition.
13. Near the door he (to see) the man he (to notice) at the station. 14. The house
(to be) much smaller than he (to think) at first.
136.
Change the following sentences into disjunctive questions:
1. He is having dinner now. 2. They usually have dinner at six. 3. She has a
music lesson every Wednesday. 4. They had a quarrel yesterday. 5. She is having
a music lesson now. 6. He had to take four exams. 7. Next week you'll have to
prepare for your last exam. 8. She had to wait for a long time. 9. We have. to
arrange everything by tomorrow. 10. He had to pay a lot of j money for this TV-
set. 11. They will have to start tomorrow morning. 12. He has to work a lot at his
English.
137.
Use the Past Indefinite, the Past Continuous or the Past Perfect instead of the
infinitives in brackets:
1. Yes, Hatte? What you (to say)? 2. He even (not to count) the money that
Lammiter (to hold) out to him. 3. I (to look) at her. She (to smile) to herself and
(not to answer) my question at once. I (to repeat) it. 4. For some time she (not to
realize) where she (to be) and what (to happen). 5. Then she (to get) up and (to
go) to the kitchen and (to open) the fridge. 6. Toby and Michael (to smile) at
each other and (to begin) to walk slowly towards the lake. 7. The silence in the
room (to tell) that the rain (to stop). 8. She (can) not think why she (not to think)
of this before, she (to say). 9. He (to go) away on the very day I (to arrive). 10.
My mother (to make) sandwiches in the kitchen and (not to hear) the bell. 11. He
(to go) to school for the first time with a bunch of flowers in his hand, and it (to
seem) to him that everyone (to turn) to look at him. 12. After he (to leave) school
he (can) not find a job and (to decide) to go to New York. 13. The grass (to be)
damp; it (to tell) us that rain (to fall) in the night. 14. Now he (to look) at me
with wide open eyes. 15. He (can) not help thinking that he (to see) that face
somewhere before. 16. After he (to read) "The Gadfly" he (to tell) all his friends
that he never (to read) a better book. 17. Roger (to say) he (to come) back in an
hour. 18. She (to turn) half about and (to see) that the rain (to stop) and it (to be)
a little brighter outside. 19. After the war they (to part) and he (to tell) me that he
(not to see) her since. 20. She (to go) back to take her gloves and bag which she
(to leave) on the hall table. 21. The storm (to pass) and the sun (to shine) on the
green leaves of the trees. 22. He (to look) through the window and (not to seem)
to notice me.
138.
Use the Past Indefinite, the Past Continnous or the Past Perfect Continuous
instead of the infinitives in brackets:
1. He (to read) his evening paper as usual when a friend of his called him on
the telephone. 2. He (to read) before the fire for half an hour when the telephone
rang. 3. When we went to see them last night, they (to play) chess; they said they
(to play) since six o'clock. 4. She felt chilly after she (to swim) for an hour. 5.
They told me that Ben still (to swim). 6. The boys (to play) football and did not
hear their mother calling them from the window. 7. The boys were tired because
they (to play) football. 8. We (to work) in silence for some time when John
spoke.
17 Заказ 1271
505
9. He (to look) at the fire and (to think) of something. 10. He (to look) three
or five minutes at the fire and then turned his face to me; it was sad. 11. At last I
found the book, which I (to look) for all day. 12. He asked me what I (to look)
for. 13. When I entered the room Sir George (to talk) in a loud voice. 14. They
told me Sir George just (to talk) about me. 15. Monty (to tremble) too in fits
which shook his body from top to bottom. 16, She (to put) aside the book she (to
read) and (to stand) up from the table.
139.
Translate into Russian and then change the following sentences into indirect
speech:
1. How long have you been sitting here? 2. It has been raining since morning,
and we cannot go out. 3. She has been teaching in that school since 1968. 4. He
has been working since I came here. 5. Come in! We have just been speaking
about you. 6. I've just been asking him; he says he knows nothing. 7. They have
been watching me all the time. I don't like it. 8. She has been waiting in the
library for a long time. 9. What have you-been doing since I last saw you? 10.
Where have you been all the time?
140.
Translate into English using the appropriate tenses:
1. Он уехал в тот день, когда я приехал. 2. Все эти дни он работал упорнее, чем ты.
3. Почему ты не слушаешь, когда я говорю с тобой? 4. Она долго работала в саду. 9на
не знала, что происходит в доме. 5. Не возвращайся, пока не найдешь его. 6. Вы давно
знаете друг друга? 7. Не говори ему, когда мы приедем. 8. Я сейчас работаю усиленно,
чтобы догнать группу. Я был болен две недели. 9. В тот вечер у нас было очень мало
времени, так как мы уезжали на следующий день. 10. Маленькая Кити только что
прыгала по комнате; где она сейчас? 11. Наступил вечер, а дождь все шел. 12.
Извините, я не знала, что вы меня ждали. 13. Он сказал вам, когда придет? 14. Я знаю
его, давно знаю. 15. Ваш мальчик очень подрос за эти месяцы. 16. Я был очень занят с
тех пор, как видел вас в последний раз. 17. Я вижу, все смеются. Ты опять
рассказываешь небылицы! (to tell tales) 18. Он сказал, что они выполняют эту работу с
августа. 19. Она смотрела на меня с минуту, потом отвернулась и вышла из комнаты.
20. Я уверена, что все будут смеяться над тобой, если ты наденешь эту шляпу. 21.
Сколько времени вы занимаетесь спортом? — С детства. 22. Девочка вскочила со
скамьи, на которой сидела, и побежала встречать мать, которая как раз входила в сад с
улицы. 23. Лекция еще не началась, и
студенты болтали и смеялись. 24. Я увидел его прежде, чем он меня. Он
отвернулся, и я понял, что он опять не ответит на мои вопросы.
141. Use the proper article. Pay attention to the wirh-phrases (attributive and adverbial):
1. ... driver was ... young fellow with ... large red hands, ... long legs and ...
orange hair. 2. They watched them go with ... amused look. 3. She always met
me with ... smile. 4. He sat down to table with ... great pleasure. 5. They have
been working with ... enthusiasm all this time. 6. It was ... little house with ...
green windows and ... brown door. 7. It was ... cold winter with ... sunny weather
and ... severe frosts. 8. The child looked at us with ... surprise. 9. He was ...
young man with ... pleasant open smile. 10. He spoke with ... bitterness.
To Lesson 17
142.
Put the following sentences into the Passive Voice:
a) 1. They often invite me to their parties. 2. People speak English in different
parts of the world. 3. One uses milk for making butter. 4. We form the Passive
Voice with the help of the auxiliary verb "to be". 5. They build a lot of new
houses in this district every year.
b) 1. They built this house in 1950. 2. Somebody locked the front door. 3.
Someone broke my pen last night. 4. They punished the boy for that. 5. They
finished their work in time.
c) 1. People will forget it very soon. 2. They will translate this book next year.
3. They will tell you when to come.
4. Where will they build a new library? 5. Someone will ask him
about it.
143.
Put the following sentences into the Passive Voice:
1. No one has seen him anywhere this week. 2. Somebody has invited her to
the party. 3. They have done all the exercises in written form. 4. They had done
everything before we came.
5. I thought they had already sent the letter. 6. Evidently some-
. body had informed him of the news before they announced it.
7. They are constructing some new metro lines now. 8. Wait
a little. They are examining the last student there. 9. They are discussing this
question now. 10. We could not use the cassette-recorder, they were repairing it.
11. When I switched on the radio they were broadcasting a very interesting
programme. 12. They have not yet told him about it. 13. The branches of the tree
hid her face. 14.1 know her family. Her brother Charles has taken me there more
than once. 15.1 am sure your presents will please them. 16. They informed me
that they had seen you in Oxford Street.
144.
Use the proper article. Pay attention to the article in adverbial phrases of manner:
1. She nodded to me with ... smile. 2. I shall do it with ... pleasure. 3. He
closed the dooi with ... bang. 4. Everybody looked at her with ... approval. 5.
They were talking in ... low voices. 6. Though he said it in ... whisper I heard
everything. 7. She was pulling her gloves on in ... very slow way. 8. She went up
the steps like ... bird. 9.1 was trembling like ... leaf. 10. She said it in ... matter-
of-fact voice. 11. The young man smiled in ...amazement. 12. She was weeping
like... child. 13. With... deep sigh she rang the bell. 14. They were walking
along ... side by. . side. 15. He worked from ... morning till... night but earned
very little. 16. She told me everything ... word for ... word. 17. The boys were all
dirty from... head to ... foot. 18.1 always meet them walking... arm in... arm.
145.
Put the following sentences into the Passive Voice making the indirect object the
subject of the passive construction.
Note. It is more usual in English to make the indirect object the subject of the passive
construction.
M o d e l : They showed me the way. I was
shown the way.
1. He offered me a chair. 2. We gave him all the money. 3. They have just
shown me a new magazine. 4. Mother promised the boy a new toy. 5. Nobody
has told me the news yet. 6. They sent you the invitation last week. 7.1 am sure
they will offer you a very interesting job. 8. They recommended me several
articles on that problem. 9. Someone taught him French and gave him a
dictionary. 10. They asked us to be there at eight o'clock. 11. They have promised
me some books on this problem. 12. A passer-by showed us the way to Trafalgar
Square.
146.
Translate the following sentences into English using the Passive Voice:
1 Когда обсуждался этот вопрос? 2. Такие вопросы часто обсуждаются
на нашйх собраниях. 3. Какой вопрос сейчас обсуждается? 4. Этот вопрос
уже обсудили. 5. Когда я пришла, этот вопрос обсуждался. 6. Эта книга
написана в XVIII веке. 7. Когда статья будет написана, ее поместят в газете.
8. Рассказ уже написан? 9. Эта работа была написана до того, как были
сделаны новые открытия в этой области. 10. В Москве сейчас строится
много новых домов. 11. Когда мы переехали сюда, неподалеку строилось
несколько домов. 12. На этой площади будет построен новый дом. 13. Этот
дом был построен до войны. 14. Эта школа только что построена Осенью в
ней начнутся занятия. 15. Мне уже задавали такой вопрос. 16. Такие
вопросы часто задают на экзамене. 17. Я уверена, что вам зададут много
вопросов, когда вы будете рассказывать о своей поездке. 18, Так как ему
уже раньше задавали такие вопросы, он знал, что ответить.
147.
Put the following sentences into the Passive Voice.
M o d e l : They laughed at him. He was
laughed at.
1. People speak much of him. 2. They will look after the children well. 3.
People will laugh at you if you say it. 4. They sent for the doctor immediately. 5.
Everybody listened to her attentively. 6. They always wait for me after the
lessons. 7. Nobody took notice of this little boy. 8. Everybody lost sight of the
boat in the fog, 9. Why are they laughing at her? 10.1 wonder whether they will
listen to him. 11. Students often refer to these books, 12. Nobody has ever
spoken to me in such a way. 13. If they send for you don't refuse to come. 14.
They have not referred to that incident since then.
148.
Make up sentences using the given verbs in the Passive Voice:
to look (at), to listen (to), to wait (for), to think (of), to speak (about), to refer
(to), to look (for), to look (after), to send (for), to laugh (at), to speak (to), to ask
(for),
149.
Translate into English using the Passive Voice:
1 Работа только что закончена. 2. Доклад слушали очень внимательно. 3.
Его вчера нигде не видели. 4. Телеграмма будет получена только завтра 5.
На этой улице строится новая станция мет
ро. 6. Когда была написана эта статья? 7. Его попросили принять участие в
концерте. 8. Об этом фильме много говорят. 9. Ей посоветовали написать доклад по-
английски. 10. Вас просят к телефону. 11. Мне дали эту книгу всего на 3 дня. 12. Эта
книга не переведена на русский язык. 13. Эта пьеса поставлена в Московском
Художественном театре. 14. Меня об этом никогда не спрашивали. 15. В детстве ее
учили музыке. 16. После лекции нам покажут фильм о Лондоне. 17. Письмо еще не
отправили. 18. Интересно, ему уже сказали об этом или нет. 19. На эту книгу редко
ссылаются, хотя она была издана в 1970 году. 20. Над вами будут смеяться, если вы это
скажете.
150.
Use the proper article:
Мог knew that now was his chance to give Miss Carter ... letter. He stood up.
Miss Carter looked at him, ... little surprised. Мог searched his pockets for ...
letter, which took him ... moment or two. Then he held it forth and threw it
quickly on to her knee. It fell to ... floor and she picked it up with ... puzzled
look, As she did this, ... motion caught ... Mor's eye and he looked over ... Miss
Carter's head to see that Demoyte was standing at ... open door and had seen ...
scene. Miss Carter, who had her back to ... door, had not observed him. She put...
letter quickly into ... handbag, which lay beside her, and looked up again at Мог.
(Alter "The Sandcastle" by Iris Murdoch)
151. Comment on the formation and meaning of the tenses in the
following sentences. Translate them into Russian:
1. The sun rises in the East; now it is setting and night is falling. 2.1 haven't
seen your brother lately. Has he gone away? 3.1 am taking the children to the
Zoo this afternoon. 4.1 felt she did not believe a word I was saying. 5. She
suddenly realized that she had left her umbrella in the bus. 6. When shall we see
you again? — I'll call on you as soon as I come back from Canada. 7. He was
tired because he had been working too hard. 8. They haven't spoken to each other
since they quarrelled. 9. We shall be playing in a tennis match on Sunday with
medical students. 10.1 hoped she would soon forget all about it. 11.1 have been
waiting here nearly half an hour. 12.1 must have a rest. I have been running
round the town all day.
To Lesson 18
152.
Point out the Complex Object and the verbs after which this construction is used:
1. She made me do it. 2. I saw him enter the room. 3. We watched the train
disappear. 4. You will hear him speak. 5. Mother didn't let the boy go to the
yard. 6. The teacher made the pupil repeat the rule once more. 7. We wanted
him to repeat the poem. 8. I should like you to come to our place. 9. Nobody
expected him to say that. 10. Who wanted you to go there?
153.
Complete the questions using the Complex Object:
1. Do you want ...? 2. Did you hear ...? 3. Do you expect ...? 4. Has anybody
seen ... ? 5. Did anybody make ... ? 6. Who has noticed ...? 7. Why doesn't the
doctor let...? 8. Do you often see ...? 9. Would you like ...? 10. Did anybody
expect ...? 11. Can you make ...? 12. Who made ...? 13. Did your parents
want ...? 14. Who let...?
154.
Put the following sentences into the Passive Voice:
1. Everybody looked at them with interest. 2. They have finished the work at
last. 3. The children surround their teacher after the lessons. 4. I lost the key
yesterday. 5. He has brought the letter. 6. We shall send for the doctor at once. 7.
One can rely on this man. 8. They were discussing the examination questions. 9.
Have they asked you about it? 10. People met the delegation at the station. 11.
Suddenly we heard some steps. 12. They will tell you everything about it. 13. We
can win peace if we fight for it. 14. Nobody has answered my question yet. 15.
What have people done about it? 16. They are typing the text. You'll have to
wait. 17. Students often ask for this book. 18. People speak well about her. 19.
They spoke to each student. 20. They have just discussed this question.
155.
Use the proper article. Pay attention to the o/-phrases:
a) 1. He leaned on ... back of... chair. 2, He saw the boy on ... roof of... house.
3. ... neck of... bottle was very narrow. 4. It was ... face of... old man. 5. ... cover
of... book was very bright.
b) 1. He gave her ... little bunch of... flowers. 2. I am looking for ... box of ...
matches. 3. She joined ... group of ... students
standing near by. 4. ... whole pack of ... cigarettes got wet and he couldn't
smoke. 5. The house was reached by ... flight of ... steps.
с) 1. She asked for ... glass of ... water. 2. We could see ... drops of ... dew on
the grass. 3. What do you say to ... bottle of... beer? — No beer, thanks, I
prefer ... glass of ... mineral water or just ... cup of... tea. 4. He took ... jug of...
milk standing on the kitchen-table and poured himself a little. 5. Here's ... piece
of... chalk for you to write with.
156.
Translate into English using the Complex Object with the infinitive:
1. Я слышал, как кто-то вошел в комнату. 2. Я видел, как они вместе вышли из
дому. 3. Мы не ожидали, что он вернется так скоро. 4. Никто не слышал, как ребенок
открыл дверь. 5. Это за-* ставит тебя подумать, как исправить ошибку. 6. Мы хотели,
чтобы они рассказали нам что-нибудь о Москве. 7. Я часто слышал, как она задавала
один и тот же вопрос. 8. Интересно, что заставило его отказаться? 9. Мы Фидели, как
дети побежали в сад. 10. Я хочу, чтобы все перевели эту статью. 11. Мы не хотим,
чтобы вы это делали одни. 12. Он почувствовал, как из окна подул холодный ветер. 13.
Тетя хочет, чтобы мы провели лето с нею. 14. Мы ожидали, что делегация приедет в
конце недели. 15. Я хочу, чтобы вы были более внимательны. 16. Он почувствовал, что
вода поднялась ему до колен. 17. Заставьте ее помочь вам. 18. Они ожидали, что мы
примем участие в обсуждении. 19. Я слышала, как кто-то открыл и закрыл дверь. 20.
Она хочет, чтобы ее сын поступил в университет.
157.
Change the following dialogue into indirect speech:
A n n : Will you join me? I am going to the grocery.
H e l e n : Come along, I have spare time, and will you go with me to the
Department store?
A n n : Surely. Do you want to buy a new dress, a blouse or a skirt? I know
you are very fond of blouses.
H e l e n : That's right. How do you know?
A n n : It's quite easy to guess. You have a new blouse nearly every other
day.
H e l e n : You see, this time I want to buy a pair of shoes.
A n n : Haven't you bought brown shoes recently?
H e l e n : I bought those for my mother.
158. Translate into English using the Passive Voice:
1. Письмо получено вчера. 2. Этот роман не переведен на английский язык. 3.
Работа будет закончена сегодня. 4. Когда будет издана ваша статья? 5. Тебя
пригласили на вечер? — Нет еще, но я уверена, что меня пригласят.' 6. Почему за ним
послали так поздно? 7. Он сделал все, о чем его просили. 8. Вас просят подняться
наверх. 9. Его речь на собрании была такой интересной, что
0 ней потом много говорили. 10. Покажите мне, где в вашем городе строится
новый театр. 11. Этот материал сейчас носят. Он не дорогой и хорошо стирается. 12.
Этого лектора всегда слушают с интересом. 13. Факты, о которых вы говорите, были
опубликованы на прошлой неделе. 14. О ней очень хорошо отзываются. 15. Доктор
сказал, что больного надо немедленно отправить в больницу. 16. В нашей стране о
детях хорошо заботятся. 17. Мне только что предложили интересную работу. 18. В этот
момент обсуждался очень важный вопрос и все внимательно слушали.
159. Use the proper article:
1. ... building Lammiter saw now was ... garage (once it had been ... stable
and ... coach-house). 2. ... curiosity is ... vivid emotion. 3. He looked like ... man
with several problems on his mind. 4. She went to ... window for ... air. ... pain
about her heart was dreadful. 5. It was not ... answer he had expected. 6. He
asked her if she could get him ... clothes in which he could pass unnoticed. 7. ...
young man in ... photograph seemed familiar to me. 8. She stared at him with ...
strange look that he could not interpret. 9. On ... evening of St. Valentine's day
Boldwood sat down to ... supper as usual. 10. Suddenly round ... corner of ...
house ... group of ... men appeared. 11. "... boy is all right," he said in ... low
voice. 12. ... new information about them? Do you really have ... new
information? 13. When we returned to ... town it was already ... late autumn. 14.
Oh, darling, it's ... Behrman's masterpiece — he painted it there ... night when ...
last leaf fell. 15. My brother has ... little cottage ... mile or so from here, and
1 have been spending ... couple of... days with him.
160.
Translate the following sentences into English paying attention
to the use of tenses:
1. Когда мы вошли в зал. занавес уже поднялся. 2. Он пожалел, что сказал ей
правду, когда увидел, что она плачет. 3. Хотя одна из ведущих актрис заболела,
спектакль состоялся. 4. Кто звонил тебе вчера в 7 часов вечера? 5. Что было у вас
сегодня на
завтрак? 6. Он звонил мне и спрашивал, все ли готово для пикника, 7. С тех пор как
мы приехали, погода стоит ужасная. 8. Мы обсудим все после того, как выпьем по
чашке кофе. 9. Вы очень бледны. Вы болели все это время? 10. Она сказала, что идет в
овощной магазин, чтобы купить моркови и лука. 11. Почему ты пришел? Тебе было
сказано, что я буду занята сегодня. 12. Если ты послушаешься моего совета, ты
никогда не пожалеешь об этом.
13.
За всю свою жизнь я не встречала такого доброго человека.
14.
Он сказал, что окончил институт в 1976 году. 15. Мне бы хотелось знать,
когда она приедет в Москву. Если она приедет в этом месяце, то я смогу с ней
увидеться.
То Lesson 19
4 161. Use the Future Indefinite, the Future Perfect or the Present Perfect instead of the
infinitives in brackets.
Note. Remember that in clauses of time the Present Perfect is used instead of the Future
Perfect.
1. By the end of the year I (to read) five of Shaw's plays. 2. They (to leave)
the country before you go to see them. 3.1 can give you a definite answer only
after I (to speak) to my mother. 4. By the end of the term we (to learn) a lot of
new words. 5.1 hope, when you (to do) this exercise, there (not to be) so many
mistakes in it. 6. I expect you (to grow up) by the time I come back from
England. 7. You had better not go bathing until you (to get rid) of that cough. 9.
I'm sure you (to forget) me by that time. 9. She shan't have any pudding until she
(to eat) her potatoes. 10. When I (to learn) a thousand English words, shall I be
able to read a newspaper? 11.1 (to write) all my exercises long before you come
back. 12. Don't ask for another book before you (to read) this one. 13. They will
not return home until they (to see) Scotland, Ireland and Wales. 14.1 hope that by
the end of the year he (to teach) us to speak English a little. 15. Sit down, and
when you (to rest) I'll show you the garden.
162. Use the appropriate tenses instead of the infinitives in brackets. Translate the
sentences into Russian:
8, 1. Don't leave till we (to discuss) our plan in detail. 2.1 hope that by the
time I (to be) back with the flowers you (to finish) dressing for the theatre. 3.
They are very slow in everything, so
Последние комментарии
1 час 34 минут назад
1 час 37 минут назад
1 час 49 минут назад
1 час 51 минут назад
2 часов 5 минут назад
2 часов 21 минут назад